Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http: //books .google .com/I
A
IHntversitig of tCotonto
Examination Papers
FOB
1901
tORONTO:
HENRY HUTCHISON,
Pbintkk to the Univbrsity.
1901.
education Dcp
Anoual Bxcu
PAKT I. JUNIO]
ENGLISH
[W.J.
Exami7ier8:\ Pelh.
[W.J.
i7ier8:\ Pelh.
[Q. M.
1. "Ift
Of what it holds could
Were aa a volume, ahu
Of yielding ite conteat
We should recoil, stric
To see diaclosed, by si
That which is done mi
To reason, and by com
Analyse the above passa^
(principal and eiibordinate) ii
lations to one another. In
specially careful to state the g
to point out the particular woi
[N.B.~Wnte evttry daux inj
2. Explain the grammatica
(line 2), "were" (line 3), "si
(line 6), in the poetical passa^
words in the following senterc
"There was nothing to do bu;
human brenst." "I found the waj
in." " How could it be otherwise !'
more than another.
3. (a) Write out short sentf
tain a true imperfect participl
imperfect participle but in fun
an imperfect participle dischai
the fourth, an imperfect parti
conjunction. (In each of thi
word in question may more pr
preposition, or conjunction re
{b) State the grammatical fanctions and relations of each
of the prepositional phrases in the following passage : —
** First, then, I would draw attention to the coincidence, for such it
would seem to be, of what has been said, with St. Paul's definition of Faith
in the text."
4. Eewrite in correct form any words which are incorrectly
spelled in the following : —
The principle drammatic occurance was the production, on Teusday last,
of a little tradgedy which, although lacking in literery and immaginative ex-
ceUence succeeded in seizing the attention of the audience and in arrousing
their sympathy.
6. Point out the nature of each of the grammatical errors in
the following passage, and amend them : —
Every intelligent student ought to be careful who the members
let into a society entrusted so completely to their own control, and
which may likely have a great influence both on the younger and elder
pupils of the school. I spoke of this the other day when I expected
5 more members of the committee to have been present ; but now, return-
ing to the same subject, this society should not neglect, like so many
similar associations have done in the past, to afford each, even of the
very immature pupils, an opportunity for exercising their own particu-
lar powers. Let no talent lay hidden, let it not be said that the senior
10 boys hindered instead of helped the others, for you are at least as
old, and certainly much more advanced than them. I hope I will have
the pleasure of seeing all your proceedings characterized with good sense
and free from the bickerings of various factions among each other.
6. What simple Latin word is the root of the English word
modesty ? Give six other English words which may be
traced to the same root. Point out the connection between the
present meaning of each of the derivatives and that of the root,
indicating the effect of the prefixes and affixes.
7. (a) State two important kinds of change that the English
language underwent between the time of Edward the Confes-
sor and Chaucer (end of 14th century).
(6) Point out, with examples, the chief ways in which the
vocabulary of the English language is being changed at the
present time and indicate any other respect in which the
language has undergone marked change during the last two
centuries.
ma ot each
9, for such it
bion of Faith
ncorrectly
susday last,
^fnstive ex-
larrousmg
irrors in
members
roi, and
nd elder
expected
return-
K> many
2 ol the
particu-
) senior
east as
11 have
i sense
r.
word
be
the
lish
he
he
he
k
£bucation Department^ Ontario*
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART I. JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
ARITHMETIC.
Eocamin^rs :■
A. C. McKay, B.A.
A. Odell.
W. Prendergast, B.A.
1. Find the L. C. M. and the H. C. F. of 13230, 32(
23625.
2. A stick was broken into two pieces so that f of th(
piece equalled the shorter. The difference between the
of the two pieces was 4 inches. What was the length of tl
stick ?
3. A sells a quantity of wheat at $1 per bushel and ga
afterwards he sold a quantity of the same wheat to the
of $37.50 and gained 50%. How many bushels were in
lot, and at what rate per bushel did he sell it ?
4. Divide $916 among A, B, and C, so that \% of A
may equal 7^% of B's, and 12^% of B's may equal 20% c
6. What sum of money would amount to $1406.08 in
at 4% per annum, compound interest ?
6. A note was discounted at a bank, 120 days before
due, at the rate of 7%, and the proceeds amounted to
For what amount was the note drawn ?
7. If copper weighs 500 lbs, lead 600 lbs., tin 480 lbs.
tively, to the cubic foot, find the weight of a cubic foot c
composed of equal weights of copper, lead, and tin.
8. Bank of Commerce stock is divided into shares of $
Bank of Montreal stock into shares of $100 each. A
holding 220 shares of the former sells when it is quoted
and purchases with the proceeds an integral number I
greatest number possible) of shares of the latter stock wl
quoted at 248, and deposits the balance of the proceeds i
ings bank which pays interest at the rate of 3% per annum
the change in his yearly income caused by the change ol
ment, if Bank of Commerce stock pays an annual div
7% and Bank of Montreal stock an annual dividend of 1!
(«60P)
jBbucation Department, Ontario.
i
Annual Examinations, 1001.
PART I. JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
HISTORY AND GEOGRAPHY.
[ W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
ExamiTiera : \ Pelham Edgar, Ph.D.
(g. M. Wrong, M.A
1. Explain the bearing upon the expansion and contraction o
the British Empire of the Treaty of Paris in 1763, and of tha
of Versailles in 1788.
2. Write brief explanatory notes upon : —
(a) the destruction of the tea cargoes in Boston Harbour
(6) Warren Hastings' administration in India ;
(c) the Reform Bill of 1832.
3. Give a brief account of the following: — the Irish rebellioi
of 1798; Britain's part in the Peninsular War; Chartism.
4. Indicate the causes of the Crimean War, and the part whicl
Great Britain took in that contest.
6. Compare the extent of Canada in 1837 and in 1885, an<
the systems of government in operation at these dates.
6. Indicate : —
(a) William the Conqueror's claim to the Crown of England
(/;) the caase of Oliver Cromwell's quarrel with the Lon;
Parliament ;
(c) the significance of the battle of Trafalgar.
7. Show by an outline map or by a verbal description th
geographical position of the chief portions of the British Empire
noting the political divisions of Australia, Canada, and Soutl
Africa.
(8600)
^
£^ucation 2)epartment» Ontario*
Annual Bzamlnatione, 1901.
PART I. JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
PHYSICS.
Exwminers: -
R. R. Bensley, B.A., M.B.
W. L. Goodwin, D.Sc.
F. W. Merchant, M.A.
1. (a) Distinguish between the density and the specific gravity
of a body.
(b) Describe fully one method of determining accurately
the specific gravity of alcohol.
2. State Boyle's law and give an experimental verification of
it. Why is it necessary to keep the temperature constant during
the experiment ?
I 8. (a) Describe an experiment illustrating the diffusion of
7 gases through a porous partition.
J (b) State the law of diffusion.
4. (a) Describe the construction of a mercurial thermometer,
state the manner in which the freezing and boiling points are
determined, and explain the Centigrade and Fahrenheit scales.
{b) What information concerning heat does the thermome-
ter supply ? Explain fully.
5. If a hot lamp-chimney is touched with a cold knife-blade it
may crack. If a tightly corked bottle full of water is put out
of doors on a frosty night it will burst. State as fully as you
can the reasons for these two results.
6. State the laws of ebullition. Describe an experiment to
show the effect of the reduction of pressure on the boiling-point
of water.
7. (a) Define (i) specific heat, (ii) latent heat of fusion.
(b) How many units of heat will be required to raise 20
grams of a hquid, whose specific heat is .5 and latent heat of
vaporisation 500, from 30° C. to its boiling-point at 180"* C, and
to convert it into vapor at that temperature ?
(BUO)
1
£bucation department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND RHETORIC.
Examiners :
W. J. Alexander, B.A., Ph.D.
Pelham Edoar, B.A., PLD.
^G. M. Wrong, M.A.
1. Ab, where a despotic authority has exclusive control over the adminis-
tration and religious organization of a country, that authority does not
brook any contradiction of its own views, and, if there is no rivalry of
neighbouring nations, necessarily unifies the ideas of the whole nation, and
suppresses ail new opinions that may rise against the established ones, the
new views that were springing into life in Japan would have perished at
once, had it not been for the peculiar form of government existing at that
time.
(a) Analyse the above sentence so as to show the various
clauses (principal and subordinate) which it contains, and indi*
cate their relations to one another. In the case of subordinate
clauses be careful to state the grammatical function of each, and
to point out the particular word or words e€M5h one modifies.
[N.B. — Write every dauae in full.]
2. Write brief grammatical notes on the italicised words in
the following : —
(a) After my trip abroad I went into the country.
(b) It rained cats and dogs.
(c) The fewer who came the better he liked it.
(d) It is very hard to prevent the grass from becoming
parched.
(e) She went out crying.
(/) She went out sketching.
(g) His drawing of animals is faulty.
3. Explain the forms : — or ere, last, lesser, near, nea/rer, fore-
TTiost, mithinks.
[over.]
(8600)
4. Discuss the influence of word-stress in English.
5. Give the plural of: — cMoquy, gaUowa, scdmon, crisis,
tableau, banjo, potato.
6. Write not more than half a page to illustrate the operation
of analogy in EnglisL
B.
7. State the nature of the errors in the following sentences,
and re- write each sentence correctly : —
(a) Integrity is the shortest and nearest way to our end,
carrying us thither in a straight line, and will hold
out and last longest
(&) At least my own private letters leave room for a poli-
tician, well versed in matters of this nature, to
suspect as much, as a penetrating friend of mine tells
me.
(o) He accepted all fcheir tales with a credible mind.
id) Your Englishman is just as serious in his amusements
as in any act of his life.
{e) He returned to England in 1839, and next year he was
persuaded to enter Parliament, but he soon lost his
seat, and then he retired, and resumed his literary
studies, and died suddenly in 1849.
8. The following is the opening paragraph of an essay upoi^
the subject "A Contrast between Macbeth and The Tempest
Criticise it as such, with special reference to its sentence and
paragraph structure, and the appropriateness of the words.
In the study of the works of any author the student should take into
his careful consideration, and make himself familiarly acquainted with the
conditions, both social and political as well, existing at the period when the
work was written. EspeciaUy should this be done with tne study of the
great works of Shakespeare, for without this previous preparation it is
quite impossible for the reader to procure a clear understonding of the
many now obsolete expressions and references which are so frequently
encountered in the works of Shakespeare. It does not matter any that
these illustrious works are immortal and were written as has been said for
~ aU time. For though this is true they were also written for his own time
and age ; and if one would want to understand him it is necessary that we
may understand the people of his day and their surrounding environment.
Now ** Macbeth" is a tragedy and ^*The Tempest" is a comedy, therefore
our aim must be twofold in the following, namely to arrive at an imderstand-
ing of the age, and to observe the contrasts that exist between a great
comedy and a great tragedy.
}
1
>
£bucatfon Department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART II. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
Eoccmiinera :
W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
Pelham Edgab, B.A., Ph.D.
G. M. Wrong, M.A.
Note. — The candMate wiU write on one, and one only, of the
following avhjecta: —
1. Courage (either a narrative or an exposition).
2. The Great Lakes, (a descriptive essay).
3. The Advantages of Youth.
4. Athletics.
5. Camping Out in Canada.
6. "Lay aside life-harming heaviness,
And cultivate a cheerful disposition."
(W»)
£^ucatlon S)epartment, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PARt H. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
ENGLISH POETICAL LITERATURE.
(W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
Pelham Edgar, B.A., Ph.D.
G. M. Wrong, MA.
1- The splendour fallfi on castle walls
And snowy summits old in story :
The lonff light shakes across the lakes,
And the wild cataract leaps in glory.
5 Blow, bugle, blow, set the wild echoes flying.
Blow, bugle ; answer, echoes, dying, dying, dying.
O hark, O hear ! how thin and dear.
And thinner, clearer, farther going ! ,
O sweet and far from cliff and scar
10 The horns of Elfland faintly blowing !
Blow, let us hear the purple glens replying :
Blow, bugle; answer, echoes, dying, dying, dying.
O love, they die in yon rich sky.
They hmt on hiU or field or river ;
16 Our echoes roll from soul to soul,
And grow for ever and for ever.
Blow, bu^e, blow, set the wild echoes flyins^
And answer, echoes, answer, dying, dying, dying.
(a) Explain briefly and clearly what is referred to in
"splendour" (\A), "snowy sammits old in story*' (1. 2), "scar"
{L9), "The horns of Elfland" (LID), "glens" (L 11), "rich"
(1. 18), "our echoes" (L 15).
{b) Explain, clearly and within the space of half a page,
the plan of the above poem, — that is, the main idea expressed
and the relation between this idea and the other principal
thoughts.
2. (a) State, in a word or two, the main feeling or idea to
which Ulysses gives expression in the poem named after him.
(b) What circumstances of his life are indicated in the poem
as giving rise to this feeling or idea ?
(c) Whom is he adcbressing, and what indications of the
scene are ^ven ? [ovbb.]
8. Nor toil for title, place, or touch
Of pension, neitner count on praise :
It grows to guerdon after-days :
Nor deal in watch-words overmuch :
Not clinging to some ancient saw ;
Not master'd by some modem term ;
Not swift or slow to change, but firm :
And in its season bring the law.
(<z) Express, in simple prosaic language of your own but in
good literary form, the thoughts contained in the above passage.
(The utmost brevity consistent with accuracy and clearness is
required).
(b) Describe the versification adopted in this poem, t.e., the
form of line and stanza.
4. Describe, within the limits of half a page, the character of
Lancelot as presented in Lancelot and Elaine,
5. Qupte either "Tears, idle tears," or "Early Spring," or a
passage of twenty consecutive lines from one of the blank verse
poems prescribed.
6. Give a description, (with short appropriate quotations), of
The Lady ofShalott, such as would give some adequate idea of
the contents and character of the poem to a person unacquainted
with it.
7. There rolls the deep where grew the tree.
O earth, what changes hast thou seen !
There where the long street roars, hath been
The stillness of the central sea.
The hills are shadows, and they flow
From form to form, and nothing stands ;
They melt like mist, the solid lands,
Like clouds they shape themselves and go.
But in my spirit will I dwell.
And dream my dream, and hold it true ;
For tho' my lips may breathe adieu,
I cannot think the thing farewell.
(a) Explain what natural phenomena are referred to in the
first two stanzas.
(b) What is the plan of this poem, that is, what is the main
thought and what the relation between this main thought and
the other thoughts expressed ?
(c) In a single word or short phrase, give a suitable title to
the poem.
J£^ucation Department, Ontario*
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART II. JUNIOR LEAVING.
ARITHMETIC AND MENSURATION.
Exaffiiners :
A. C. McKay, B.A.
A. Odell.
W. Pbendergast, B.A.
1. I borrow $4,500, agreeing to pay interest and principal in
two equal annual payments. Find the amount of each payment,
interest at the rate of 5% per annum.
2. The sides of a rhombus are each 845 ft in length, one of the
diagonals is 1014 ft in length. Find the area of the rhombus.
3. There are two rectangles, one 189 yds. by 45 yds., the other
244 yds. by 36 yda Show that there is only one square whose
area is less than that of the one rectangle and greater than that
of the other, and whose side is an integral number of yards in
length ; and find the length of its side.
4 A note for $182.50 was discounted at a bank on March 24th
at the rate of 7% ; it fell due on July 2nd following, and was re-
deemed by the maker. What rate of interest did the bank make
on its investment ?
5. A person borrows $1000 for 2 years and agrees to discharge
the debt by paying $600 at the end of one year, and $600 at
the end of two years. What rate of interest did he pay ?
6. A pyramidal tent whose base is a square contains 960 sq.
ft of canvas. If the length of the side of the base be 24 ft.,
find the perpendicular height of the tent.
7. A commission merchant sold a consignment of oranges and
charged 5% commission. Other charges against the consi^mient
paid by the commission merchant amounted to $56. He was
instructed to invest the proceeds in cheese, after deducting a com-
mission of 3%. His entire commission amounted to $438. Find
the selling price of the oranges. [over.]
(8«0)
8. A man invests $40,000 in a certain stock that sells at a dis-
count of 20i% and pays a dividend of SJ^ ; and $60,000 in
another stock which sells at a premium of 19|^ and pays divi-
dends at the rate of 7^%. What is his total income ii the bro-
kerage in each case be i%.
^
£dttcation ^Department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART IL JXJNIOR LEAVING AND PART H. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
ALGEBRA.
Examimera:
(A. C. McKay, B.A.
A. Odell.
W. Prendergast, B.A.
1. Solve: —
, V 05+1 3 X 5—x
(a) — = —
^ "^ 2 X 3 6
(6) aj+y=rl8.
a;«+y« = 194.
2. Solve:—
(a) aj« + Va«^^=19.
f3aj-4y+20=-14.
(6) \2x+3y-5z=3S.
l&c+y-32f = 25.
3. (a) If a number be a measure of two other numbers,
prove that it will also be a measure of the difference of any
multiple of these numbera
(6) Find the highest common factor of cc'— cc* — 2a5+2
and a;*-3a;» + 2a;«+aj-L
4. (a) Pindthesquarerootof (a-4Xa-3Xa-2Xa-l)+l.
(6) Show that the product of any four consecutive integers
increased by unity is a perfect square.
5. Divide x—2{x^-ak)+2(x^-x^-x^hyx^-x^.
6. Express: —
(i) a(6* — (;»)-t-6((;» — a«)+c(a» — 6») in four factors.
(ii) {x* - 9aj)« + 4(aj« - ftu) - 140 in four factors.
[over.]
dBOO)
7. (a) Find the condition that the roots of ax^+bx+c=0
may be real and unequal, if a, b, and c are real.
(6) If p and q are the roots of ax*+bx+c=0, find the
value of p* +p^q^+q^ in terms of a, b and c.
8. (a) What must be the value of n in order that ttt zrr—
l(m+21ot
may be equal to f when a is ^ ?
(6) The left-hand digit of a certain integral number exceeds
the right-hand digit by 6 ; and when the number is divided by
the sum of the digits the quotient is 8. Find the number.
9. A field whose length is to its breadth as 3 to 2, contains
664 square rods more than one whose length is to its breadth as
2 to 1. The difierence of their perimeters being 60 rods, find the
area of the larger field.
{
\
^
£ducation department, (Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART U. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
EUCLID.
A. C. McKay, B.A.
Excumimera :-( A. Odell.
.W. Pbendergast, B.A.
1. If one side of a triangle be prodaced, the exterior angle
shall be greater than either of the interior opposite angles.
(Euc. L, 16.)
2. The square described on the hypotenuse of a right-angled
triangle is equal to the squares described on the other two sides.
(Euc. I., 47.)
3. ABC is an equilateral triangle, and AD is the perpendicu-
lar drawn from the vertex A to the opposite side BC. Prove that
four times the square on AD is equal to three times the square
on AC.
4. If a straight line be divided externally into any two seg-
ments, the square on the straight line is equal to the difference
of the rectangles contained by the straight hne and the two
segments. (Euc. 11., 8.)
5. To describe a square that shall be equal to a given recti-
lineal figure. (Euc. II., 14.)
6. Find the sides of a rectangle, given its perimeter and the
side of a square of equal area.
7. Equal chords in a circle are equidistant from the centre.
(Euc. in., 14.)
8. If a straight line be a tangent to a circle, and from the
point of contact a chord be drawn, the angles which the chord
makes with the tangent shall be equal to the angles in the
alternate segments of the circle. (Euc. III., 82.) [oveb.]
(WOO)
9. Two circles touch internally at the point A. From A two
chords APQ^ ARS are drawn, the one meeting the circumfer-
ences in P and Q, and the other in R and S. If the radius of
the one circle is double that of the other, show that the straight
line QS is double the straight line PR,
i
4
£^ucaUon Department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART H. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
ANCIENT HISTORY.
(W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
Pelham Edgar, Ph.D.
Q. M. Wrong, M.A.
NoTB. — OandidaUt ioiU take questions 1 to5 cmd either 6 or 7.
1. Explain the chief peculiarities of the geographical situation
of Greece, and the causes of Greek colonial and commercial
enterprise.
2. Outline the political situation which Solon opposed, and
compare him with Pericles.
8. Give the main features of the careers of Pausanias and
Alcibiades.
4. Discuss the causes and the political effects of the free dis-
tribution of corn to the Roman populace.
5. Write notes upon : —
(a) Jugurtha;
{b) Marcus Cato;
(c) Caius Gracchus ;
(d) Hasdrubal.
6. Give an account of the political work of Julius Caesar.
7. Write geographical notes upon : — Attica, Ar^os, Leuctra,
Hymettus, Peneus, Dyrrhachium, Massilia, Numidia, Capua.
y
£^ucatton Department, (^ntarto.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART H. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
FRENCH COMPOSITION.
^ J. H. Cameron, M.A.
Examiners : \ J. Macgillivray, Ph.D.
,A. H. Young, M.A.
A.
1. Translate into French : —
(a) How many months are there in a year ? — There are
twelve.
(6) What day is it ? — It is Thursday, not Wednesday.
(c) It is twenty minutes past six, or a quarter to seven.
(d) To-morrow will be the fifteenth of August, nineteen
hundred and one.
2. Translate into French: —
(a) This wine is too dear ; it should sell at eight francs a
bottle.
(6) Three times five make fifteen, and the half of fifteen is
seven and a half.
(c) My cousin is twenty years old, and my brother is only
sixteen.
{d) The carpenter and the grocer have been here for forty-
one years.
3. Translate into French : —
(a) It is cold to-day, but I am too warm, for I am ill.
(6) I never go out when it rains ; I work at home.
(c) He has lost all his money, but that makes no difference
to him.
(d) I shall have a house built soon, if I am well.
4. Translate into French : —
(a) Are you sorry that they cannot come and see us ?
(6) How do you want her to arrange her l)ooks ?
[over.]
(c) I do not think you will have time enough for that.
{d) Although we are very young, we must learn something.
B.
5. Translate into French, using the materials provided in the
extract below : —
I do not intend to travel in a straight line; I have in
a comer a picture to which I proceed on setting out. A medi-
tative {Tndditatif) man who traverses his room obliquely,
sometimes meets his armchair, and he may at once settle himself
in it without ceremony.
(Not to he translated.)
Lorsque je voyage dans ma chambre, je parcours rarement
une lime droite ; je vais de ma table vers un tableau qui est
plac^ dans un coin; de Ik je pars obliquement pour aller k la
porte ; mais, quoique en partant mon intention soit bien de m'y
rendre, si je rencontre mon fauteuil en chemin, je ne fais pas de
fa9on, et je m'y arrange tout de suiter
C.
6. Translate into French : —
If there were some snow, we could enjoy ourselves on the
hill; but as there is none, we must stay at home. What shall we
do ? Henry will sit down here at the window, where he will see
the people who are passing, and he will tell us all that he dis-
covers in the street. Mary wants to finish her dress, and she
will put her chair near the window, so that she can see her work
well. Lewis, who is making a drawing (dessin, Tnaac), will have
to take his place {se Tnettre) at the large table, for he needs plenty
ol room. Mary, bring him his paper, and take away those big
books which you left here yesterday. Now we are all ready to
begin our work.
£bucation Department^ Ontario*
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART H. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
FRENCH AUTHORS, GRAMMAR, AND
SIGHT TRANSLATION.
Examiners :
J. H. Cameron, M.A.
J. Macgillivray, Ph.D.
A. H. Young, M.A.
A.
1. Translate into English: —
Jean, entrant avec vme terrinepleine de hlanc d^Eepagney
pa/r le pan coupe gauche. YoUk le blanc d'Espagne.
Blanche, d pa/rt. Oh ! (Bas d Jean.) Jette tout cela
sor Machut
s Jean, dtonn4. Hein ! platt-il ?
Blanche, bas. Va done !
Jean, d part. Je veux bien, moi ! (iZ passe entre Machut
et Caboussat, et renverse la terrine sur la redingote de
Ma>chuL)
1 o Machut. Ah ! sapristi !
Blanche, nw/rchant sur Jean. Maladroit !
Caboussat. Imb^dle !
Jean. Mais c'est mamzelle qui m'a dit. . .
Blanche. Moi ?
1 5 Caboussat. Tais-toi, animal ! butor !
Jean, se sawvant par la porte de d/roite. Je vais chercher
nne brosse !
Caboussat, d Madhut Vite 1 6tez votre redingote!
Machut. Merd ! ce n'est pas la peina . .
so Blanche. Si!
Caboussat, exaspSrd. Mais dtez done votre redingote !
(R le dSpouiUe, aiad de safiUe.)
Blanche, se sauvant avec la redingote. Un coup de
brosse . . . je reviens {EUe sort vivement par le premier
plangoMcn^.) [over.]
98001
2. Write the second person plural of the imperative and of the
present subjunctive of entrant, jette, plait, va, veux, dit, tais, est,
reviens, sort,
3. Write the past participle of the verbs in question 2
preceded by the third person singular of the present indicative
of their proper auxiliary.
B.
4. Translate into English : —
"Quoi ! dis-je alors en moi-meme, il y a done des homines
qui d^crottent les souliers des autres pour de Targent ? " Ce
mot d' argent fut un trait de lumifere qui vint m*^lairer. Je
me ressouvins tout k coup qu'il y avait longtemps que je
6 n'en avais point donn^ k mon domestique. — ''Joannetti, lui
dis-je en retirant mon pied, avez-vous de Targent?" Un
demi-sourire de justification parut sur ses Ifevres k cette de-
mande. — " Non, monsieur ; il y a huit jours que je n'ai pas
un sou ; j'ai d^pens^ tout ce qui m'appartenait pour vos
10 petites emplettes. — Et la brosse? C*est sans doute pour
cela?" II sourit encore. II aurait pu dire k son maitre:
" Non, je ne suis point une t^te vide, un animal, comme
vous avez eu la cruaut^ de le dire k \otre fidMe serviteur.
Payz-moi 23 livres 10 sous 4 deniers que vous me devez, et
1 6 je vous acheterai votre brosse." II se laissa maltraiter in-
justement plut6t que d'exposer son maitre k rougir de sa
colore.
Que le ciel le b^nisse ! Philosophes ! chr^tiens ! avez-vous
lu?
5. Write in French words the numerals which occur in the
extract contained in question 4.
6. Write in full the present subjunctive of aov/rit and rougir.
7. Write in full the future and the future anterior (the future
perfect) of Trie ressouvins and pu,
C.
8. Translate into English : —
(a) " Te woilk done mari^, mon cher Joannetti," lui dis-je en
riant II ne s'^tait pr^cautionn^ que contre ma colore, en
sorte que tons ses pr^paratifs furent perdus. H retomba
tout k coup dans son assiette ordinaire, et mSme un peu plus
has, car il se mit k pleurer. " Que voulez-vous, monsieur !
me dit-il d'une voix alt^r^e ; j'avais donn^ ma parole. — Eh !
morbleu ! tu as bien fait, mon ami ; puisses-tu Stre content
de ta femme, et surtout de toi-mSme I . . . . II faudra done
nous s^parer ! — Oui, monsieur ; nous comptons aller nous
^tablir il Asti "
Get homme me servait depuis quinze ans. Un instant
nous a s^par^ Je ne Tai plus revu.
(6) C'est un retour de cimetifere, au jour tombant, dans une
petite maison de la rue du Val-de-Grftce. On vient
d'enterrer grand'mfere ; et, la porte pouss^e, les amis partis,
rest^es semes dans Tetroit logis oil le moindre objet leur
rappelle I'absente, Mme Ebsen et sa fille sentent
mieux toute Thorreur de leur chagrin. Meme Ik-bas, k
Montpamasse, quand la terre s'ouvrait et leur prenait tout,
elles n'avaient pas aussi vivement que . . . devant ce f auteuil
vide la notion de I'irr^parable, Tangoisse de T^temelle separ-
ation. Cast comme si grand'm^re venait de mourir une
seconde foi&
t
i
fl
I
I
f
£^ucation Department, ©ntarto.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART II. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[J. H. Cameron, B.A.
Exanniners : ^ J. Macgillivbay, Ph.D.
(a. H. Young, M.A.
1 Translate into German: —
(a) I have a good pen, ink, and a black lead pencil.
(6) The paper on which I am writing is blue,
(c) You nave white paper. Give me a sheet.
{d) This is the book which you gave me.
{e) Put it on the table, and do not read it.
2. Translate into Geriaan: —
(a) My father's house is on the other side of the road.
(6) It has thirteen rooms and twenty-two windows.
(c) My mother's room is the largest in the whole house.
(d^ In winter the windows are almost always shut.
{e) The doors are opened when anyone goes out or comes in.
3. Translate into German: —
(a) In summer when it is warm, it is different.
(6) No one likes to stay in the house then.
(c) It is nicer to sit in the shade of a tree;
id) Or to lie on the green grass where the sun does not
shine
(e) Those who must work should not mind the heat.
4. Translate into German: —
(a) There was once a lazy boy, who was a dreamer.
(6) This boy's father had to work hard every day.
(c) The boy did not work and did not go to school.
{d) He often sat on a stone under a large oak tree.
\e) And there he once fell asleep and had a dream.
[over.]
5. Translate into German: —
(a) He dreamed of a beautiful princess,
(6) Who lived in a far away country,
(c) And whose father was a great kin^.
(d) He set out to go in search of this distant country.
(e) But, just when he arrived there, he awoka
6. Translate into German: —
The old Germans (der Oermane) had many gods and god-
desses. One of the mightiest of their gods was called Thor. The
fairest among their goddesses was Freya, who could never become
old. Thor was very strong, but in order to be so, he had to eat
and drink very much. He could eat a whole ox and drink a
barrel of mead {Meth) at one time. He became angry very,
easily, and this is not becoming to a god. He had a big ham-
mer, with which he could strike anyone, and which came back
to him again after it had struck. When this hammer flew, there
was lightning. Thor also possessed a chajAot (Wagen), in which
he often drove. The noise that this chariot made, when it
rattled (raaaeln) through the clouds, was the thunder that men
heard.
education Department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART n. JUNIOR I.EAVING AND PART H. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
GERMAN AUTHOES, GMMMAR AND
SIGHT TRANSLATION.
J. H. Cameron, iLA.
Examiners :\ J. Macgiluvbay, Ph.D.
A. H. Young, M.A.
1. Translate into English: —
Sarauf ging bcr ^onig bcr Irdumc poran unb ^bx^ folgte
i^m. aiS fie an bic Stcttc lamcn, roo bie 2Bolfcn auf bic (?rbc
^ingen, roxt% ber ftdnig auf etne ^^-atlt^ure, toelc^e fo Derftecft im
Sufd^ tag, ba^ fte gar nid^t gu ftnben toar, toenn man eS nid^t
iDu|tc. (5r f)ob fie auf unb fu^rte feinen 93egleiter funf{|unbert
®tufen l^inab in eine l^etl erteud^tete @rotte, roeld^e ftd^ metlen-
roeit in rounberbarer ^rac^t ^injog. @S roar unfagtid^ fd^Sn!
JJa roarcn Sd^Ioffer auf 3nfetn mitten in gro^en Seen, unb bie
^nfeln fd^roammen um^er roie ©d^iffe. 3Benn man in ein fotc^eS
Sd^Io^ ^ineingel^en rooUte, braud^te man fid§ nur an bad Ufer
ju ftellen unb ju ruf en :
,,®(^t6ptein, ©d^lo^lein, fd^roimm l^cran,
JDap id^ in bid§ 'reingel^n !ann !"
bann fam e§ Don felbft an bad Ufer. SBeiter roaren noc^
anbere ©d^loff^r ba auf SQSoIfen; bic flogen langfam in ber
8uft.
2. Give the present infinitive and the past participle of ging,
tamen, ^ingen, roied, lag, ]^ob...auf, l^tnjog, flogen, fd^roimm, roaren.
3. Give in full the present indicative of roufete, rooHte, roaren.
4. Give, with the definite article, the nominative singular of
Iraume, Snfeln, Seen, ©c^iffe, ©c^ISffer. [over.]
mm
5. Make a list of the prepositions in the extract which may
govern either the dative or the accusative, naming the case of
each object, with reason for its use.
6. What is the normal position of the verb in principal
and in dependent clauses ? Refer to exceptional cases in the
extract, and give the reasons for the positions of such verba
B.
7. Translate into English: —
5)a l^icfe SBlauduglctn bic rocifec Jaubc fid^ auf il^rc ©d^ultcr
fcfeen, bamit fie il^r ben SSBcg roicfc, unb mai^te pd^ auf, ^eino
ju fud^cn.
3la(i)itm ftc brci Sage geroanbert roar, fam fie an ben
^trroijd^jumpf, too S^tino Dergaubert lag. ®ie fefete ftd§ ftiH
an ben 2Bcg unb roartete, btS eS Slbenb rourbe. 2KS eg bunfel
roarb, begog fic^ ber ^immel unb bte SSBolfen jagten. ^raffelnb
fc^Iug ber S^cgen in baS (Srlengebufc^ ; unb ni^t langc, jo fal^
fie fern im ©umpf bie erften blauen glammd^en auffteigcn. 5)a
fd^urgte fie fic^ i^re Sftocfe, ftieg bel^ergt ^inab in baS ©d^ilfgraS
unb roanberte DorroartS, unoerrudt na^ ben ^trlid^tern f(|auenb.
Q-^ roar ein befd^roerlid^er SSBeg ; benn fie fan! balb biS ubcr bie
£n6d^el ein, ber SBSinb peitfc^te i^r baS ^aar urn bie ©d^ultern,
bafe fie ftel^en bleiben mufete, urn eS in einen grofeen ^noten im
yiadtn jufammcn ju fc^irgen, unb ber 9%egen tief i^r uber bic
&>angen.
8. bie roeifee ^aube (linel), ein befd^roertid^er SBeg (line 12).
Decline the foregoing in full in both the singular and the plural.
9. Mention the verbs in the extract that govern an infinitive
without the preposition zu. Name four other verbs that
govern the infinitive without zu ?
C.
10. Translate into English: —
©d roar cinmal ein fteiner ^unQz, ber roar oier Sal^rc alt unb
biefe ^^v'it. Seine ©Item roaren 23auerSleute unb rool^nten in
einen abgelegenen SBalbborf . SDer ^nril roar aber nid^t fo angegogen
roie bie l^iefigen ©auern jungen ; er l^atte nid^tS am Seibe al8 ein
lurgeS ^emb oon grober Seinroanb.
9lun traf fid^'g, bafe bic 9Jiuttcr ^uc^cn gcbadfcn ^attc ; roic fi^
bic Scute bort gu fianbc Ucbcn. SSon btcfcn ^ud^cn banb bie 9Jiuttcr
iDeld^e in ein Zn6), gab eS bcm flcincn 3nrif in bie ,g>anb unb fagtc :
@c§% brtng'S bcm Satcr auf baS gelb ; abcr cite bid^, bamit er'S
loarm friegt.
35cr ^leine fa^te ben ftnotcn beS %ni)t^ fcft unb fprang n)O^I=
gemut in feinem ,g>cmb(^cn baoon. @r mufete aber burd^ cincn grofecn
SBalb laufen, too t)iete ©rbbeeren ftanben ; bod^ roeil if)m bie ©iutter
gefagt l^attc, ba§ er ftd^ eilen jaQte, \o rul^rte er feinc an unb lam
balb gu feinem 25ater. J)er rul^te im ©d^atten am Sftanbe beg
SESalbed, an ben fein gelb ftiefe. ©r ru^te von ber Slrbeit unb
roodte cbcn fein SeSperbrot, bie mitgebrad^te faure 9Wild^, Dergel^ren,
alS 3"^*' ^^^ ^^^ anlangte. 35a f rente fid^ ber SSater uber ben
fileinen unb uber bie Aud^en, lie^ i^n neben fi^ nieberft^en unb gab
t^m and) havon.
. I
Ebucation department Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART U. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
LATIN COMPOSITION.
G. W. Johnston, Ph.D.
Examinera ; -j A. L. Langfobd, B. A.
i A. B. Nicholson, B.A.
1. Translate into ^tin: —
(a) The territory of the Belgae is said to have been one-
third of all QauL
(b) Both the general and the soldiers had to do many
things at one time.
(c) I shall De unable to send more soldiers to assist you.
{d) He ordered the embassies to return to him at the
beginning of the summer.
(e) He asked ^o was unwilling to seem brave.
(/) While the soldiers of two legions were entrenching
{m/wnire) the camp, the enemy attacked the rear-
guard.
{g) This river, which at that place is three feet deep, is
two hundred miles long.
(A) He persuaded the Qermans not to remain longeron
this side of the river Rhine.
2. Translate into Latin: —
Although Caesar had been in Gaul man^ years and had *
been victorious over very many of the tribes {civitaa), few were
willing to surrender to his power. They knew indeed that all
the men they could bring together had no chance of withstand-
ing the Romans in a battle; but, as Caesar himself was spending
the winter in Italy, they hoped that, if they formed a conf eder- .
acy and all attacked his generals simultaneously, they would at
last regain {^recwperare) their freedom. Alarmed by a despatch
which he received from Labienus, Caesar started immediately for
QmL But the winter not yet being ended {ccmficere), the roads
were very difficult ; besides (jprdeterea) the Qauls were endeavor-
[OYBB.]
ing to prevent him from reaching the army before their own
forces were ready. Caesar nevertheless hurried forward with
such speed that he arrived more quickly than anyone expected,
and at once began to carry on operations against the tribes who
had conspired against him.
B^ucation Department, 0ntado*
Annual Examinations, 1001.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART H. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
LATIN AUTHORS, GRAMMAR AND SIGHT
TRANSLATION.
Examviners :
G. W. Johnston, Ph.D.
A. L. Langfobd, B.A.
A. B. Nicholson, B.A.
Note. — To parse is to give, —
(a) A complete description of the form (case, gender, number, person,
tense, mood, voice, degree).
(5) A statement of the word from which it is formed (e. g. the principal
parts of verbs ; the nominative and genitive of nouns).
(e) An explanation of the syntax (i. e. of the mood or case).
A.
1. Translate into English : —
(a) Hostes, nbi et de expugnando oppido et de flumine
transenndo spem se fefellisse intellexerunt, neque nostros in
locum iniquiorem progredi pugnandi causa viderunt, atque
ipsos res nrumentaria deficere coepit, ooncilio convocato con-
6 stituerunt optimum esse, domum suam quemque reverti, et,
quorum in fines primum Bomani exercitum introduxissent,
ad eos defendendos undique convenirent, ut potius in suis
?[uam in alienis finibus decertarent, et domesticis oopiis rei
rumentariae uterentur.
10 (b) Sabinus idoneo omnibus rebus loco castris sese
tenebat, cum Viridovix contra eum duum millium spatio
consedisset quotidieque productis copiis pugnandi potestatem
faceret, ut iam non solum hostibus in contemptionem
Sabinus veniret, sed etiam nostrorum militum vocibus
1 s nonnihil carperecur ; tantamque opinionem timoris praebuit,
ut iam ad vallum castrorum hostes accedere auderent. Id
ea de causa faciebat, quod cum tanta multitudine hostium,
praesertim eo abeente, qui summam imperii teneret,*nisi
aequo loco aut opportunitate aliqua data legato dimicandum
t o non existimabat [over.]
IMOQ
2. Parse : — expugnando (1. 1), pugnandi (1. 3), quorum (1. 6),
millium (L 11), legato (1. 19), dimicandum (L 19).
3. Explain the s^tax of the following words: — optimum
(1. 6), domum (1. 6), mtroduxissent (1. 6), convenirent (1. 7), spa-
tio (L 11), consedisset (1. 12), hostibus (1. 13), teneret (1. 18), loco
(L 19).
4. Write out in full the principal parts active of : — f ef ellisse,
coepit, praebuit, auderent.
B.
5. Translate into English: —
(a) Omnis spes Danaum et coepti fiducia belli
Palladis auxiUis semper stetit. impius ex quo
Tydides sed enim scelerumque inventor Ulixes,
f atale aggressi sacrato avellere templo
6 Palladium, caesis summae custodibus arcis,
corripuere sacram effigiem, manibusque cruentis
vir^neas ausi divae contingere vittas ;
ex illo fluere ac retro sublapsa referri
spes Danaum ; f ractae vires, aversa deae men&
(b) urbs antiqua ruit, multos dominata per annos;
plurima perque vias stemuntur inertia passim
corpora, perque domos et religiosa deorum
limma. nee soli poenas dant sanguine Teucri ;
« quondam etiam victis redit in praecordia virtus,
victoresque cadunt Danai. crudelis ubique
luctus, ubique pavor, et plurima mortis imago.
6. Who is the speaker of the lines in (a) ? Give the substance
of his story.
7. Explain the syntax of the following words in (a): —
Danaum (v. 1), belli (v. 1), auxiliis (v. 2).
8. Write brief explanatory notes on: — Tydides, Palladium,
deae (v. 9 in (a)).
9. Scan w. 3 and 4 in (a).
c.
10. Translate into English: —
Allobroges, crebris ad Bhodanum dispositis praesidiis,
magna cum cura et diligentia suos fines tuentur. Caesar,
qaod hostes equitatu saperiores esse intellegebat, et, interclusis
omnibus itineribus, nulla re ex provincia atque Italia
sublevari poterat, trans Rhenum in Qermaniam mittit ad eas
civitates, quas superioribus annis pacaverat, equitesque ab his
arcessit et levis armaturae pedites, qui inter eos proeliari con-
suerant Eorum adventu, quod minus idoneis equis utebantur,
a tribunis militum reliquisque equitibus Romanis atque evocatis
equos sumit Qermanisque distribuit. Interea, dum haec geruntur,
hostium copiae ex Arvemis equitesque, qui toti Galliae erant
imperati, conveniunt
disponere — ^to arrange at intervala
ttieri — to protect
svJblevare — to render assistance.
evocati — veterans.
1
<Sdttratia» §t9Uttmtni, 0nt»ri«.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1901.
PART II. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART XL JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
GREEK COMPOSITION.
G. W. Johnston, B.A., Ph.D.
Examiners : ^ k. L. Langford, B.A.
A. B. Nicholson, B.A
1. Express in Greek :
To the doors. With many hopes. Half (fj/jLiav*;) of the
army. In the same city. On this plain. For three days. By
the quickest (raxv^) road. All must die. They were glad to
(fjSiw^) halt. He told them where Cyrus was.
2. Translate into Greek :
(a) Cyrus marched through the plain, with the river
Euphrates on his right.
(6) We asked them if they would give pledges {irurTo) to
do this.
(c) They would have been afraid if they had seen the enemy
crossing the river.
(d) After waiting there one day, on the next they continued
their march (TropeveaOai).
(e) The barbarians wished to deprive {o^ipelaBaC) the
Greeks of their country.
(/) Did you think they would forget (hriXapOdveaOai) the
way to the camp.
3. Translate into Greek :
It was DOW full (irXijOtov) market-time and the station was ,
near, where they intended to halt. Then a Persian appeared
riding at full speed with his horse in a sweat {iSpoay), To all
whom he met (ivrvyx^veo) he shouted out that the king with a
great army was coming up, evidently ((109) prepared to fight.
Thereupon there arose great confusion (rdpayo^). For the Greeks
as well as the others thought the king would attack them at once
disordered as they were (ara/cTo<;). Then Cj^rus, leaping down
from his chariot, put on (iviSuv) his breast-plate and, mounting
{lufoffcUiw) his horse, ordered all to arm themselves and to take
their stand {KoOiarafuu) each in his own rank (rd^i^).
(BAnnHtn ieparttnimt, (^ntaprio.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS. 1901.
PART IL JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART IL JUNIOR.
MATRICULATION.
GREEK AUTHORS, GRAMMAR AND SIGHT
TRANSLATION.
G. W. Johnston, B.A., Ph.D.
Examiners :\ A. L. Lanqford, B. A.
A. B. Nicholson, B.A.
A,
1. Translate into English:
(a) No/ii{|o> yitp v^jlu^ ifjLol elvai /cal irarpiha icai <l>i\ov^ koI
I avfjkfidxov^, fcai avv vfiiv fjL€v &v ol/icu etvai rlfiio^ Sttov &v &, vfi&v
J he Sfnffio^ &v oifK &v ucavo^ elpai olfuu ovr &v <l>i\op o)(l)€\tj<rac ovr*
iv ix^pov oKi^aadac, i^ ifiov oiv ibirro^ oirg Stv /cat vfiei^, oirto
Tfpf yvatfifjp exere,
Aifiah.y I.
(6) E/ ik Koi TflS ^€fi6vc irurrevaofiev h &v Kvpo^ 8^, rt
/cf»\v€i /cal ra ajcpa ^/uv xeKeveuf Kvpov irpoKaraXa^eiv ; iya> yhp
6/cpoif)P /i€i/ &v €i9 T^ ttXouk ifi^aiveiv h rifiiv Bolrj, firj fifjM^ rcu^
rpiiipeai KaraSvarj^ <lx>/3ol/jtffv B* &v r^ tfyefiovi (o iotq hrecOat, fiif
^f£a^ ayoffif odev ov/c hrrat i^eXdeiv fiovKolfirp/ o &v ukovto^ hirmv
Kupov XaOeiv abrbv aweKBtov' h ov Swarov iariv.
Ibid.
2. Parse: (a) i/Mov, vful^, ^ere,
(6) 89), fiS, ?7r€<T0ai, ar/dyp, Kvpov,
3. What would be the form in aratio recta of ehat (olpju
eJyai) in (a) ?
4. Substitute a fin te clause for eprjfio^ &v in (a).
5. Account for the syntax of the following words : itlct^v-
<yofA€P, fipSv (K€7i€V€iv), Boirf {eiretrBai).
6. What connection had Cyrus with other events in Grecian
history ?
[OVEE]
B.
7. Translate into English :
(a) & iroTTOi, J} fji0iya irkvOo^ *A^aiffia ycuav iicdvei
9 icev y7fdii<Tai Hpiafw^ UpcdfioiO re TrotSe?
aXKoi T€ T/owe? fiiya k€v Key^apolaro dvfji^,
el a<f>oilp rdBe iravra irvdolaro fiapvafievouVf
ot iripl ixiv fiovKriv Aavawv, irept o eare pAx^cOai,
aKKcL irLdeaG**' afufxo Be vetoTepa) iarov ifjueio*
7j8r) yap iror iycb Kai apeioaiv rje irep v/juv
hvSpdtriv ODfiiXrjaaf Kai ov irore p^ ov y adept^ov,
olf yap irto roiov^ iSov avepa^ ovhe tSm/Mait
olov tleipiOooif T€ ^pvavra re, TrotpAva \a&v.
Homer, Iliad, I.
(b) fih^ yap fie ical aXKor a\e^€p,evat p^fiaAra
ptylre woho^ rerar^wv airo firfKov Oeairea-ioLo,
frav S* ^p^p <f>€p6p/r}v^ apxi 8' rjeXiq) xartiBvirn
tcdmreaop iv Arip^v^y okiyo^ 8' Ita BvpJb^ hfrjeir
evda p,e X^ree? avhpe^ &<f)ap KopXaavro ireaovra.
Ibid.
8. Parse yi]0i](Tat, irvdoiaro, irlBetrffy apeloaiv. ^
9. Account for the syntax of a^iv, rdSe, /3ov\ijp, ^avaAv,
fJbdx^o'dai, vpJlv, r8a)yLia&.
10. Who is the speaker of the lines in (6) ?
11. Comment on the tense of <f>ep6p/qv and Kdmreaov, the case
of TToSo? and eu Ai^p^vtp, and the form of rerarfmv and evrjeu,
12. Scan verses 3 and 4 in (a).
C.
Translate into English :
'Hi/ he Tt9 hf rf} CTpari^ 'Si€vo<f)&v ^AOrjvalo^y S? ovre arpar'qyo^
ovre \o')(arfo^ oUre (TTpaTuoTrj^ fov avvqicoKovdeL^ hXKd Ilp6^evo<: abrov
psereTrepr^aro oiKodeu ^€vo<; &p dpx^^^' vwur'XvelTO Be abr^y el ekdoi,
<f>i\ov avTov Yivptp iroii^a-eip, bp abro^ €<^i; /cpeirTo^ eavrt^ popl^eip t^9
TrarpiBo^* 6 pAproc B€PO(f>&p apaypov<; rffp eiruTroXrjp opaKovpovrai,
XtoKodrev r^ ^KSripaUp trepi t^9 iropela^, Kai 6 "S^Kpdrrj^, vtto-
TTTevtra^ p^ij ri 7rpo9 t^ woXeio^ vTraiTLov elrj Kvptp ^ilsjop yeveadcu^
OTi eBoKei 6 JLvpo^ irpodvp^o^ roU AaKeBatp^opiot^ iirl tAv ^KOrjpa^
avpiroKepriaav, avplSovXeve^ to) 3epo(l>&vrL ekdopra ek A6X.<^V9
apaKotp&aai r£ 0e^ wept rfj^ Tropela^,
Xenophon, Anab., TIL
(TvpaKoXovdeip, to accompany.
dpoKOLpovp, to consult.
tmaiTiop Tt, a ground for censure.
JE^ucation Department, ®ntarto«
Annual Examinations, 1901.
PART n. JUNIOR LEAVING AND PART II. JUNIOR
MATRICULATION.
CHEMISTRY.
R R Bensley, B.A., M.B.
Exarainera : ^ W. L. Goodwin, D.Sc.
F. W. Merchant, M.A.
1. (a) Define dibasic add.
(b) Give an example of (a) and show that your definition
applies to the example.
2. Show how the law of multiple proportions is illustrated by
oxides of chromium having the following composition : —
J _ Chromium 76.47% tt _ Chromium 52%
^' Oxygen 23.53% ^^* Oxygen 48%
3. Show by reference to compounds of chlorine, oxygen, and
sulphur the meaning of the law of reciprocal proportions.
4. (a) Define chemical element
(6) Iron bums in an atmosphere of oxygen. How would
you prove that the iron has not been decomposed, but that it
has combined with something ?
5. Write equations for the following cases of chemical change,
and note in each case any changes of colour, physical state, smell
and taste : —
(a) Sodium on water,
(6) Dilute sulphuric acid on ferrous sulphide,
(c) Hydrochloric acid solution on sodium hydroxide solution,
(d) Hydrochloric acid gas on ammonia gas,
(e) Sulphuretted hydrogen burning in oxygen.
6. Write the equation for the neutralisation of sulphuric acid
by ammonia, and mark the proportions by weight of the ammo-
ma, the sulphuric acid, and the salt [N=14, S=32, 0=16.1
[over.]
ism)
7. Describe the properties of sulphur under the heads (a)
physical and (6) chemical.
8. (a) What volume of nitrogen monoxide .measured at 0° C
and 760 millimetres pressure is required to bum completely 10
grammes of pure carbon ?
(J)) Calculate the volumes of the resulting gases measured
at 0** C' and 760 millimetres pressure.
[N=14, 0=16, 0=12.]
>
Education department, ^tario*
Annual Examinations, 1001.
P^RT n. JUNIOR LEAVING.
PHYSICS.
Exwnvmers:
R R. Benslby, B.A., M.B.
W. L. Goodwin, D.Sc.
F. W. Merchant, MA.
1. (a) Indicate by means of a diagram the construction of the
common barometer. Explain the principle of its action, and
state its chief ases.
(6) The volmne of a certain mass of gas at 2T C and 600
m m. pressure is 80 litres ; find its volume at — W C and 780 m m.
pressure.
2. (a) Describe an experiment which tends to verify the fact
that a material medium is necessary to transmit sound.
(b) State the commonly accepted theory which explains the
transmission of sound by a material medium.
8. (a) State the laws of the transverse vibrations of strings or
wires.
(6) Two wires of the same material, whose lengths are in
the ratio 8 : 4 and whose diameters are in the ratio 5 : 8, are
stretched with the same tension on a sonometer; find (i) the
ratio of tilie vibration-numbers of the notes given by the wires,
(ii) the interval between these notes.
4. Show by means of diagrams : —
(a) the positions of all the images of a luminous point
formed by two plane mirrors which ma]ke an angle of Wf with
each other ;
{b) the character and position of the image of an object
formed by a double convex lens when the object is placed be-
^ tween the focus and the lens.
5. Describe an experiment illustrating the decomposition of
white light by a prism. Explain the cause of the dispersion of
the rays, and incUcate by a &etch : —
[OVEB.]
(a) how the directions of the rays are changed by their
passage through the prism,
(b) the order of the colors seen when the light falls on a
screen.
6. Describe the construction and the action of a voltaic cell
suitable for supplying current to an electric bell. Give your
reasons for regarding the cell as suitable for the purpose.
7. Give a full description of an electro- magnet. Make draw-
ings to show : —
(a) the relation between the direction of the current and
the polarity of the magnet,
{b) the construction of any instrument in which an electro-
magnet is employed for some useful purpose.
Education department, ^ntarto.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
ExaTniners :
W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
Pelham Edgab, B.A., Ph.D.
G. M. Wrong, M.A.
Note. — Hie candidate will write on one, and only one, of the
following iliemes : —
1. The Study of Literatare.
2. The Study of Science.
3. A Sammer-Evening Scene.
(The candidate is to describe a scene as presented to a spectator
remaining stationary at a given point, and the details must be
snch as are presented simultaneously to the eye, or at least are
included in a period not longer than five minutes.)
4. French Canada.
(The essay must be a description eiiher of the physical and
material, or of the social, moral, and political aspects of the
Province of Quebec.)
Education Department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
ENGLISH POETICAL LITERATURE.
Excmdnera :-
'W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
Pelham Edqab, B.A., Ph.D.
G. M. Wrong, M.A.
1. Is it preferable to consider " The Lady of Shalott " merely
as a poem of fancy, or as possessing a symbolical meaning?
Give reasons for your answer.
2. (a) State in three or foor lines the gist of '' Ulysses."
(b) Contrast the moral temper in the two poems '' Ulysses "
and '' The Lotos Eaters." Give brief quotations for illustration.
8. Give yoar estimate, with appropriate brief quotations, of
the character of Julius Caesar as revealed in the play.
4. ** Look, Lucius, here's the book I sought for so ;
I put it in the pocket of my gown."
Show the full dramatic appropriateness of this passage.
Befer to other examples of realistic detail in the play.
5. Give an account in your own words of the quarrel scene
between Brutus and Cassius.
6. ** Half yet remaiiis unBung, but narrower bound
Within the viaible diurnal sphere ;
Standing on earth, not rapt above the pole,
More safe I sing with mortal voice, unchang'd
To hoarse or mute, though fall'n on evil days,
On evil days though fall*n, and evil tongues ;
In darkness, and with dangers oompast round.
And solitude ; yet not alone, while thou
Visit'st my slumbers nightly, or when mom
Pui^les tlie east : still govern thou my song,
Urania, and fit audience find, though few.
But drive tu off the barbarous dissonance
Of Bacchus and his revellers, the race
Of that wild rout that tore the Thradan bard [over.]
In Rhcxlope, where woods aiid rocks had ears
To rapture till the savf^e clamour drown'd
Both harp and voice ; nor could the Muse defend
Her son. So fail not thou, who thee implores :
For thou art Heavenly, she an empty dream."
(a) Explain in careful detail the meaning of the passage.
(/>) Comment on its value as poetry.
(c) Give the gist of what has preceded in the seventh book.
7. Explain in general the meaning of the following passages,
with special reference to the italicised lines : —
(a) ** But pamper not a hasty time
Nor feed ii*ith crude imaginings
The herd, wild hearts and feeble wings
Tliat every sophister can lime.
Deliver not the tasks of might
To weakness, neither hide the ray
From those not blind, who MXtitfor day,
Tho' sitting girt with doubtful light.
(b) But lest his heart exalt him in the harm
Already done, to have dispeopl'd Heav'n
My damage fondly deem'd, I can repair
That detriment, if such it be to lose
Self-lost.
(c) but feather'd soon and fledge
They sunim'd their pen^, and soaring th' air sublime
With clang deftpised the ground.
(d) The genius and the mortal instruments
Are then iri cimncil ;
(e) He shall but l)ear them as the ass bears gold.
8. The situation which Pitt occupied at the close of the reign of George
the Second was the most enviable ever occupied by any public man in Eng-
lish history. He had conciliated the King ; he domineered over the House
of Commons ; he was adored by the people ; he was admired by all Europe.
He was the first Englishman of his time : and he had made England the first
country in the world. The Great Commoner, the name by which he was
often designated, might look down with scorn on coronets and garters. The
nation was drunk with joy and pride. The Parliament was as (piiet as it
had been imder Pelham. The old party distinctions were almost efiaced ;
nor was their place yet supplied by distinctions of a still more im{>ortant
kind. A new generaticm of country squires and rectors had arisen who
knew not the Stuarts. The Dissenters were tolerated ; the Catholics not
criielly persecuted. The Church was drowsy and indulgent. The great civic
and religious conflict which began at the Reformation seemed to have ter-
minated in universal repose. Whigs and Tories, Churchmen and Puritans,
spoke with equal reverence of the constitution, and with equal enthusiasm of
the talents, virtues, and services of the Minis^^"*-
[over.]
A few years sufficed to change the whole aspect of afiairs. A nation con-
vulsed by faction, a throne assailed by the fiercest invective, a House of
ConiTnons hated and despised by the nation, England set against Scotland,
Britain set against Amerioi, a rival legislature sitting beyond the Atlantic,
flnglish blood shed by English bayonets, our armies capitulating, our con-
quests ^nrested from us, our enemies hastening to take vengeance for past
humiliation, our flag scarcely able to maintain itself in our own seas, such
was th.e spectacle which Pitt lived to see. But the history of this great revo-
lution re<|uires far more space than we can at present bestow. We leave
the Great Commoner in the zenith of his glory. It is not impossible that
we may take some other opportimity of tracing his life to its melancholy,
yet not inglorious close.
(rt) State in a phrase the theme of the above extract.
(b) Critically examine the paragraphs to show whence they
derive their strength.
i
Education S)epartment, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
EUCLID.
Exa/miTiera ;
A. C. McELay, B.A.
A. Odell.
W. Prendergast, B.A.
1. To divide a given straight line so that the rectangle con-
tained by the whole line and one part shall be equal to the square
on the other part. (Euc. 11, 11.)
2. On t given straight line to describe a segment of a circle
which shall contain an angle equal to a given angle. (Euc. Ill,
83.)
I 8. To circumscribe a square about a given circle. (Euc. lY, 7.)
4. To circumscribe a regular hexagon about a given circle.
5. State Euclid's test of equality of ratios. Apply the test to
show that lines whose respective lengths are 8, 4, 5 and 6 inches,
are not proportionals.
6. Parallelogramsof the same altitude are to one another as
their bases. (Euc. YI, 1.)
7. Equal parallelograms, which have one angle of the one
equal to one angle of the other, have their sides about the equal
angles reciprocally proportional. (Euc. YI, 14.)
8. APB is any chord of a given circle, drawn through the
fixed point P. On AB is described a semicircle, and PC is
drawn perpendicular to APB, to meet the circumference of the
semicircle in C. Show that the locus of G is a chrcle.
k 9. Through a given point within a circle draw, if possible, a
' chord which shall be divided at the point in the ratio of 2 to 1.
10. Show how to produce a given straight line so that the
whole line produced shall be to the part produced in the dupli-
cate ratio of the given line to the part produced.
£i)ucation department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
ALGEBRA.
Exa/minera :
(A. C. McKay, B.A.
A. Odell.
W. Pbendebgast, B.A.
1. Solve: —
(a) 323a;«+2a5-l=0.
(&) V3a;«-2a;+9 + V3aj«-2aj-4 = 13.
2. Solve:—
(a) «+y = 9,
aj»+y« = 189.
aj«+3ajy-10y«=32.
3. (a) Write the equation whose roots are the reciprocals of
the roots of (a;+a)* + 6(aJ+a)+m=0.
(6) Find four linear factors of 26«c« + 2c«a« + 2a«6« -a* -
(c) Show that the ratio of 999* to 997* is nearly the same
as the ratio of 1005 to 997.
4. (a) Show how the whole number, JV, may be expressed in
the scale whose radix is r.
(6) Prove that the difference of two integers, expressed in
the ordinary scale and consisting of the same figures, is divisible
by 9.
I
•:• 5. (a) li yoox when z is constant, and yoo — when x is con-
stant, prove that y oo — when x and z are variable. State a
problem exemplifying this principle.
fOVBB.]
W K-;n:7=<*;TXr=^5TX:;:=*5 fi^ *^^ relation be-
y"*^ 2^+ic ^+y
tween a, b and o.
6. (a) Sum to ti terms the series : —
2 3 4
(i) l+-2-+'2i'+'2^+
(ii) 1+3 + 6 + 7+
(6) If a, 6, c, be inir.P. show that ^_^ + ^_ =2.
7. (a) Prove that the number of combinations of n things r at
a time is equal to the number of combinations of the same
number of things taken n— r at a tima
(b) How many different permutations may be formed of
the letters in the word, arraTige^ taken all together ?
8. (a) Find the sum of the coefficients in the expansion of
(6) Show that the coefficient of aJ* in the expansion of
(l+oj)^* is double the coefficient of cc* in the expansion of
(l+a;)2»-i.
(c) If C^, Cj, C„ Cn denote the coeffidentsof (l+»)**,
find the sum of Co+-^ + ^+ +-^, n beinga posi-
1 o 71 + 1
tive integer.
9. (a) Find the discount on A dollars in t years at r per cent
per annum, compound interest being allowed.
(6) Find the cash value of an annuity of A dollars deferred
t years and to continue for T years, r being the interest on one
doUai* for one year.
£t)ucation department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
TRIGONOMETRY.
Exa/minera:
f A. C. McKay, B.A.
A. Odell.
W. Prenderoast, B.A.
1. (a) The value of sin cc is -g" ^'^^ ^ ^ known to lie between
0"* and 90°. Find cos x and tan 2a;.
(6) Express the sine of an angle in terms of the tangent.
2. (a) Prove that 8in*<?+cos*<? = l — 3eo8^<?+3cos*<?.
(6) Find the value of cos 76"* and tan 75°.
3. (a) A and B being each less than a right angle, prove that
sin (^A+B)=miA cosS+cos^ wiB.
(b) Show that ^"^^^ = tan«A.
^ l+cos^ 2
4. (a) Show that cos 2-4. = cos^-4. — sin^il.
rt 1 1
(b) If tan x= and tany = -- -, show that one
a 2a— 1
value of (x+y) is 45°.
6. (a) Show that tan(45°+.4)-tan(45-^) = 2tan2il.
(6) Prove that 8in(a;— y) + sin (y—z) + sin (0—0;) +
6. Prove that logo( — )=logom-loga'y^; and that logio^=
*og€^ State the importance of this last formula.
[over]
7. Prove : —
(a) •R= — ?-— J, R being the radius of a circle de-
scribed round a triangle.
S •
(6) r= — , r being the radius of a circle inscribed in
s
a triangle.
8. (a) Find the area of a triangle in terms of its sides.
(6) Given a=37, 6=13, c=30, log 3= '47712125, log 13=
11139434, L sin 56°. 18' =9-9200994, L sin 56". 19' =99201 836,
find the angle A,
9. (a) Given two sides and the included angle of a triangle,
show how to solve it.
(6) From the bottom of a tower 75 feet high, the angular
elevation of the summit of a hill is 60°, and on retiring 75 feet
the top of the tower is seen to be in a straight line with the top
of the hill. Find its height.
£^ucatfon De)>artment, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
HONOR MATRICULATION.
PROBLEMS.
(SOHOLABSHIPS.)
ExamiTiers :•
f A. C. McKay, B.A.
A. Odell.
W. Prendergast, B.A.
1. Eliminate x and y from the equations : —
2. Show that x^+px+q==iO, and px*+qx+1^0, have a
conmion root, if 1+p* +q* =^p+q+pq.
3. find the number of combinations, taken 2n at a time, of
Sn things of which 2n are alike and the others different.
4. Show that 16** + lOn — 1 is divisible by 26, if ti is a positive
integer.
5. In every triangle, show that (6*cos*5— c*co8*(7) cot 2A +
{c* cos* C-a* cos* ^)cot 2B+{a* cosM-fe« cos* 5) cot 2(7=0.
6. If r, Tj, r^, r,, iJ, denote the radii of the inscribed, escribed
and circumscribed circles of a triangle, show that r^ +r^ +'^^ —
^j^3—'r3ri—rir2=(4J2+r)* — 3«*, where « is the semi-sum of
the sides.
7. Produce a riven straight line so that the square on the
whole line may be equal to the sum of the square on the given
line, and of the square on the line made up oi the given line and
half of the part produced.
8. A rectangle, whose length is double its breadth, is inscribed
in a circle. Prove geometrically that five times its area is equal
to four times the area of the inscribed square.
9. From a given point without a circle draw a secant which
will be divided in a given ratio by the circumference.
10. Find.a point P in the sid^^d^ of the triangle ABC such
that the sum of the squares on AP and CP may 1^ minimum.
£^ucation Department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
ENGLISH AND ANCIENT HISTORY.
Exa/miTiers :
'W. J. Alexander, B.A., Ph.D.
Pelham Edqar, B. a, PrD.
G. M. Wrong, M.A.
1. Explain in what respects the policy of Henry VIII. may be
regarded as revolutionary. Compare his authority as monarch
with that exercised by William III.
2. Write notes upon : —
^ (a) Wentworth's policy in Ireland ;
r (b) the Jacobite risings ;
' (c) the founding of the Massachusetts colony.
3. Explain why the Battle of Marathon could be called '* the
most memorable battle in the history of the world." (Freeman.)
4. Write explanatory notes upon : —
(a) the reasons for the severe discipline of life enforced at
Sparta ;
(b) the political and social effects of the Olympian festival;
(c) the career of Themistocles.
5. Explain the origin of the patrician and plebeian parties at
Borne, and indicate briefly the political functions of the Tribunes
and the Censors.
6, Write notes upon : —
(a) the career of Hannibal ;
(b) the chief causes of the decline of public virtue at Bome ;
(c) the greatness of JuUus Caesar.
[over.]
7. Write notes, historical and geographical, upon the follow-
ing:—
(a) the political results of the peculiar physical features of
Greece ;
(b) the frontiers of the Soman Empire under Augustus ;
(c) Salamis;
(d) Sedgemoor;
(e) Plymouth Bock ;
(/) Argos.
£^ucatfon De{)artment, Ontario*
Annual Examinations, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
FRENCH COMPOSITION.
Examiners :
J. H. Cameron, M.A.
J. Macgillivbay, Ph.D.
A. H. Young, M.A.
A.
1. Translate into French : —
(a) Why does the sun rise ? — Because the earth turns.
(fc) How far is it from Paris to London? — It is four hun-
dred and twenty kilometres.
(c) How much did your hat cost ? — I paid ten francs for it.
(d) How do you know where my brother is ? — He has told
me.
(e) When did you do that ? — When you were sleeping.
2. Translate into French : —
(a) Some are very bad, and none are quite good.
(b) I told him to take some of them, but he took all.
{c) Nobody can believe all that ; it is too ridiculous.
(d) Each will receive the same thing, and everybody will
be satisfied.
{e) Both have gone away, but the eldest will come back.
3. Translate into French: —
(a) I am sure that will produce the same effect this time.
(6) You {!2nd pers. sing.) do not think that we have worked
long enough.
(c) It is impossible that men should know all that is to
happen after death.
(d) We diould like somebody to tell us where we are all
going.
(e) They hope that we shall succeed better than they did.
4. Translate into French : —
(a) He will lend us his horses, if we give him ours.
(6) They will send us news when they are in France.
(c) The poor would have had food enough, if they eoukl
have got work.
(d) Could you tell me whether he will come next week ?
{e) Even if it should not rain to-night, I should not go out
again.
B.
5. Translate into French: —
(a) It is said that one day Sir Isaac Newton, sitting in front
of a great fire, was in danger of being roasted alive, when some-
body demonstrated to him that he could escape that fate by
pushing back {recider) his chair.
At another time, the philosopher, who was smoking his pipe
beside a lady, is-reported-to-have (aurait) committed the mis-
take of using the lady*s finger to press down the burning tobacco.
{b) A Scotch advocate meeting his minister (pasteur) one
day, said to him, '' It was an excellent sermon that you gave
(faire) us on Sunday ; but you did not say (there) a single word
that I cannot show you in a book which I have at home."
" It is not possible," said the astonished minister ; " I com-
posed the sermon myself, from one end to the other. I beg
you to show me your wonderful book."
"Well," replied the advocate, with a smile, "be good
enough to come with me."
In a quarter of an hour they arrive at the house of the advo-
cate, and the latter shows his visitor into the library. Then he
goes to a table and lays his hand upon an immense volume,
upon the back of which the minister sees in big letters the word,
" Dictionary."
£6ucation Department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
FRENCH AUTHORS, GRAMMAR, AND
SIGHT TRANSLATION.
J. H. Cameron, M.A.
Examiners : \ J. Macgillivbay, Ph.D.
^A. H. Young, M. A,
A.
1. Translate into English: —
PoiTBiNAS. Merci . . . maintenant je vais vous demander
un service.
Caboussat. Lequel ?
PoiTRiNAS. C'est de tenir la plume k ma place ; je vais
dieter.
Caboussat, a part. Diable ! (Haul.) Mais . . . c'est que . . .
PoiTRiNAS. Quoi ?
Caboussat. £crire h, une acad^mie.
PoiTRiNAS. Puisque vous Stes membre correspondant . . .
c'eet pour correspondre . . .
Caboussat, va a'asseoir d la table. C'est Juste ! {A part,)
a'asaeyant au bureau. lis ont tons la rage de me faire ^crire
aojourdliui . . . et ma fille qui n'est pas Ik !
PorrRiNAS. Y etes-vous ?
Caboussat. Un moment ! {A part.) Peut-etre qu'avec
beaucoup de p&t^ . . .
PoiTRiNAS, dictant. " Messieurs et chers collogues ....
"Tarch^ologie vient de s'enrichir . . ."
2. Construct two French sentences to show the different uses
of lequel. Translate your sentences.
3. Write the perfect infinitive of the following verbs : — vaia,
tenir y est, icrire, correspond/re, a'asaeoir, faire, a'enrichir.
4. Sasaeoir. Write the imperative of this verb in full
(a) with the negative, (6) without it (over.)
B.
5. Translate into English : —
Je ne sals comment cela m'arrive : depuis quelque temps
mes chapitres finissent toujours sur un ton siniatre. En vain je
fixe en les commen5ant mes regards sur quelque objet agr^ble, —
en vain je m'embarque par le calme, j'essuie bientdt une bourras-
que qui me fait d^river. — Pour mettre fin k cette agitation, qui
ne me laisse pas le maltre de mes id^es, et pour apaiser les batte-
ments de mon coeur, que tant d'images attendrissantes ont trop
agit^, je ne vois d'autre rem^e qu*une dissertation. — Oui, je
veux mettre ce moreeau de glace sur mon coeur.
Et cette dissertation sera sur la peinture ; car de disserter
sur tout autre objet, il n'y a point moyen. Je ne puis descendre
tout a fait du point od j'^tais mont^ tout k llieure.
C.
6. Translate into English : —
Madame Malingeak, Ah ! je te dis qu'ils sont sortis
eblouis . . . charm^s . . . tons les deux.
Malingear. Tu crois ?
Madam Malingear. Et demain . . . pas plus tard que de-
main . . . nous entendrons parler d'eux.
Maliiuqear, apercevant 8a fille qui entre. Chut! Emmeline!
Emmeline. Maman, il n'y a plus de Sucre r&p^.
Madame Malingear. Voilk la clef de Tofiice.
Malingear, d Emvidine, qui se diepoae d sortir. Eh bien.,
tu ne m'embrasses pas ? . . . (L'embraasant,) Ch^re petite ! . . . Ton
pfere. vient de se donner bien du mal pour toi !
Emmeline. Quoi done ?
Malingear. On ne pent pas le dire . . . ne le r^p^te pas . . .
c*est un secret.
Emmeline. Sois tranquille. (A part) II s'agit de mon
manage. (Haut) Oh ! je ne te le demande pas ! Approche
done . . . il y a ^ ta redingote un bouton qui ne tient pas.
7. Crois, apercevant, dire, ripUe, tient Write in full the
present subjunctive of these verbs.
D.
8. Translate into English : —
Nous autres enfants, Hans Aden, Franz S^pel, Nikel,
Johann et moi, nous allions de porte en porte, regardant les
tuiles cass^es, les volets bris^, les hangars d^fonc^s, et ramassant
les guenilles, les papiers de cartouches, les balles aplaties le long
des mors.
Ces trouvailles nous r^jouissaient tellement, que pas un
n'eut ridee de rentrer avant la nuit close.
Vers deux heures, nous fimes la rencontre de Zaph^ri
Schmouck, le fils du vannier, qui redressait sa tSte rousse et
semblait plus fier que dliabitude. II tenait quelque chose cach^
sous sa blouse, et comme nous lui demandions : *' Qu'est-ce que
tu as ? " il nous fit voir la crosse d'un grand pistolet de uhlan.
Alors toute la bande le suivit
II marchait au milieu de nous comme un g^n^ral, et k
chaque nouvelle rencontre, nous disions : " II a un pistolet ! "
Le nouveau venu se joignait k la troupe.
Nous n'aurions pas quitt^ Schmouck pour un empire ; *il
nous semblait que la |;loire de son pistolet rejaillissait sur nous.
Voil^ bien les en&nts, et voilk bien les hommes 1
E.
^
9. Translate into English : —
" Voyons, David, reprit Kobus en s'animant de plus en plus,
qoand le ^and Hom^rus, le po^te des pontes, nous montre les
h^roe de Ta Grkse qui s'en vont par centaines sur leurs petits
bateaux — pour r^lamer une belle lemme qui s'est sauv^e de chez
eux — traversent les mers et s exterminent pendant dix ans avec
ceux d'Asie pour la ravoir, crois-tu qu'il ait invents cela ? Crois-
tu que ce n'^tait pas la v^rit^ qu'il disait ? Et s'il est le plus
grand des pontes, n'est-ce pas parce qu'il a c^l^br^ la plus grande
chose et la plus sublime qui soit sous le ciel: Tamour! Et si
Ton appelle le chant de votre roi Salomon le Cantique des Can-
tiques, n'est-ce pas aussi parce qu'il chante I'amour, plus noble,
f>lu8 grand, plus profond que tout le reste dans le coeur de
liomme ? Quand il dit dans ce Cantique des Cantiques : " Ma
bien-aim^e, tu es belle comme la vo6te des ^toiles, agr&ble
comme Jerusalem, redoutable comme les armies qui marchent,
leurs ensignes d^ploy^es ! " est-ce qu'il ne veut pas dire que rien
n'est plus beau, plus invincible et plus doux que I'amour ? Et
tous vos prophetes n'ont-ils pas dit la meme chose ? Et depuis
le Christ, I'amour n'a-t-il pas converti les peuples barbares?
N'eet-ce pas avec un simple ruban rose, qu'il faisait d'une esptee
de sauvage un chevalier ?
Education department, 0ntario»
Annual Examinations, 1001.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[J. H. Cameron, B.A.
Examiners : ^ J. Macgillivray, Ph.D.
(a. H. Young, M.A.
1. Translate into German: —
(a) I once lent my newest book to a good friend.
(b) This friend told me he would return it after reading it.
(c) I thought he could read it in a couple of days.
{d) I have waited for it now many years without getting it
back.
(e) It is always best never to lend one's books to anyone.
2. Translate into German : —
(a) I am going to write a letter to my sister this evening.
(6) Do you write to her once a month, or once a week, or
daily ?
(c) I write to her only when I have something important
to say.
id) I consider that sensible : people should not speak about
^nothing,
(e) They do it all the same ; but then I should rather not
listen.
8. Translate into German :r—
(a) The cleverer one is, the more modestly he should
behave himself.
(b) He has been obliged to leave the country on account
of a crime.
(c) Does the patient know that I have had the doctor
come?
((2) Are you fond of translating from English into German ?
(e) The best German is not spoken in the city of Berlin,
the capital of Germany.
[over.]
4. Translate into German : —
(a) Tailors were not always bo much respected as they are
now-a-days.
{b) A German gymnasium teacher was once tormented by
his pupils because he was a tailor's son.
(c) An official's boy, who could write poetry, was the worst
oflFender.
(d) The teacher went to the boy's parents to complam of
their son, and fell in love with the daughter.
(e) The mother was a vain, foolish woman, yet the young
man became her son-in-law.
5. Translate into German : —
August Hohendorf was a young doctor, who at the time
of our story had been married for a short time to a young and
beautiful wife named Gacilie. The doctor enjoyed a good repu-
tation, and was consequently pretty busy. It is, therefore, pos-
sible that he had to neglect his young wife somewhat, or, at
least, to appear too indifferent to please her. She became quite
unhappy over it. It happened that her uncle, a wise old man,
paid a visit to the young couple about this time. Once when he
was alone with his niece he found out the cause of her trouble.
She wanted her husband to be jealous of some man on Her
account. Finding the old gentleman sympathetic, she proposed
that he should disguise himself as a gay young officer and pay
her attentions sometime when her husband would see them.
She said she would dance with him at the next ball if he could
make her husband jealous. He promised to do this but he first
told the plan to the husband and the latter played his part so
well that Cacilie was always after that a happy wife.
\
£^ttcatfon department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
GERMAN AUTHORS, GRAMMAR AND
SIGHT TRANSLATION.
J. H. Cameron, M.A.
Eocaminers :\ J. Macgillivray, ?h.D.
A. H. Young, M.A.
1. Translate inix) English: —
®ic fc^tcn ben ®arg Dor bcm 9lltarc nicbcr, nnb ber Orgclbau-
mciftcr Icl^ntc fid^ ftiU an cine ©fiulc bancben unb laufd^tc ben Sonen,
bie immer geroaltiger an\6)rooVitn, ]o geroaltig, ba^ bie ^irc^e in
i^rcn ©runbpfcilcrn bcbtc. $)ic Jlugcn ficlcn i^m gu, benn cr roar fcl^r
mubc Don bcr rocitcn SRcifc ; abcr jcin §crg roar frcubig, bcnn er rouble,
bafe xf)m ©ott Dcrjicl^cn ^abc, unb alS bcr Ic^te Zon bcr Orgel Dcr-
Kang, ^cl cr tobt auf ba§ ftcincrnc ^paftcr nicbcr. 35a l^obcn bie
Scute bie 2ei(^e auf, unb roic fie inne rourben, rocr eS fei, offnctcn fie
ben vgarg unb Icgtcn i^ ju feincr 33raut. Unb roic fie ben ®arg
roicbcr fc|loffcn, begann bie Orgel nod) cinmal gang leifc gu tSnen.
Dann rourbc fie ftiU unb f)at fcitbcm nie roieber Don felbft geflungcn.
2. Write the perfect infinitive and the third person singular
of the present indicative of the following verbs: — anSd^rootlcn,
fe^ten, ficlcn gu, roar, roufetc, f|oben, inne rourbcn, fd^loffen, begann.
3. Indicate the gender and write the genitive case singular of
Sltar, loncn, (Srunbpfeilcrn, Slugcn, ^erg.
B.
4. Translate into English: —
J)cr ©d^ulgc fclber abcr roar roic umgeroanbelt. ©o ernft unb
^ j^roeigfam er oor^er gerocfen, fo luftig unb auf geraumt rourbc cr jc^t,
unb Stmolb felber f onntc fic^ bem ©inftuffe bicfeS loftbaren SOBcineS
nic^t entjie^cn. O^nc ba§ cr eigentlid^ genau roufete, roic cS get ommen,
[over.]
CMOQ
^atte bet Sc^ulje eine iBtotine in bie ^anb genommen unb fpielte einen
lupigcn lanj, unb Slrnolb, bic fd^one ©crtrub im 9trm, roirbcltc mit
i^r in bcr ©tube fo toll Return, bafe cr baS ©pinnrab unb bic ©tu^lc
umroarf unb gcgcn bic 3Ragb anronntc, bic baS ©cjc^irr ^inauStragcn
rooCtC; unb attcrl^anb luftige ©treid^e tricb, ba^ \i6) bic Ucbrigcn
bariibcr opr Sadden audfd^uttcn rooHtcn.
5. Point out (a) the inseparable, (b) the separable verbs in
this extract, and explain the reason for the position of the
separable particles here used.
C.
6. Translate into English; —
55 rib a. 3lnv reciter, rocitcr.
Stern (Icfcnb). ,,Unb cS fc^ien mir aud^, bafe Sic in 3^^^^
^immlif^cn @ute mir ni^t auSroid^cn, fonbcrn meinc unbcl^ilflic^cn
33emu^ungcn, ^^nm bic l^crgtid^ftc SScrcl^rung ju bcrocifcn, frcunb=
tid^ bulbetcn." (3luf6lidfcnb unb cin ®la3 umrocrfcnb.) 9lber
barin irre id^ racial ?
i^riba. aCBarum rooHcn ®ic ba3 anncl^mcn ?
©tern (Icfcnb). ,,8cibcr rciftcn ©ic ai, ol^nc bafe id^ S^ncn
^dttc fagcn lonncn, roaS ic^ fur ©ic cmpfanb. 2Kd bic attcrglurf=
lid;[tc ©c^idfung abcr bctrad^tctc id^ c3, ba§ mcinc Scrufung l^icrl^cr
mic^ nun bauernb in ^l^rc SRal^c brad^tc. ^6) bin cntfd^loffcn, attcS
5U TOugcn. O mcin ^rdulcin — "
55tiba. Slbcr foCtcn ©ic bag — roaS ba folgt — roirftid^ nid^t
auSrocnbig roiffcn, ^crr ^rofcffor?
©tern. 2lu8njcnbig — ©S ift nur gar ju fcl^r inroenbig.
7. Give, with examples, rules for the position of the
modal auxiliaries in simple as well as in compound tenses in (a)
principal clauses, (6) in dependent clauses.
D.
8. Translate into English: —
„Dlcfcr ffllenfd)," fnl)r ber ©firgenndftcr fort, ,.\\t cin mcbrfad) bt-
ftrafttr ©cfriiger, bcr fid) ftit \tDti 3a()reu btm *rm bcr «Poliici immtr auf bic
|d)laueflc !^cifc ent^itbt. ^r ift cbcnfoiDcnig bcr ungarifd)t @raf 3ftban Don
(ifanobt), aid bcr Si^einbfinbler Stcrnfopf ober ber Sieutcnant bon Stein obcr
bcr ))olnifd)e Emigrant ©apiet)a, unter meid)cn llteln er anbcrtoSrtd gefcbtoiii'
belt bat. Scin cigentdcbcr 9iamc unb Stanb— "
M?oulO Spinblcr, ©(bnclbcrgefellc auS iborn/' fid bcr !Pfcubograf ein,
inbcm cr ftd) bobnlfd) bor bcr Aanjlririlin bcrbcugtc.
„&\\ Sd)neibergcfca I" fd)rie cntftt}t bie Dame unb fanf obnmad)tig in
bie «rme bc0 4>crrn (£(fart.
E.
9. Translate intx) English : —
SBaumann. 3^ fagc, bu 6ift cin Sldrrd^cn. ^i^il^i, l^unbcrtc
oon ^raucn rourbcn fid^ gturfUd^ prcifen, rocnn il^rc Sffidnncr nid^t
ciferfud^tig roarcn, bcnn ©ifcrfud^t ift cine JpoCcngcfiurt, unb bu
rounjd^cft, ba| bcin 3Rann, ben bu Ucbft, bid^ mit bicfcr ©atangs
toc^ter qualen foQ. ^ber wit bu mtr Dorl^in gefagt l^aft, fo bift bu
ia fclb|t nid^t cijcrfud^tig, roarum rounfc^cft —
6Sc ilic. (rafd^ cinfaCcnb). O, mit mir ift baS aud^ gang roaS
anbered alS mit Suguft.
F.
10. Translate into English: —
2118 ©lifabctl^ micbcr l^crctnfam, l^attc fic cin SJtatt papier
in ben ^Snbcn unb \o roei^e garbc tm ©cfid^t, roie baS SSIatt felbft.
TOuttcrc^cn, fagtc fic mit ftorfenber ©timmc, baS l^at mir bic
55onate cbcn eingcl^dnbigt. @3 ift Don il^m. SBoltt il^r c8 guerft
Icfen ?
fiieS c3 nur, fagte bic 9Kutter. 63 lann nid^tS Unrcd^tcS fein.
O abutter, pfterte bag 3Rabd^cn, ic^ fann nic^t lefen, cS
fc^roimmt mir nor ben 2tugen. 3^ "^^^B/ ^^^ ^^ ^^^ Stbfd^icb ift.
©0 gieb ! fagtc 5^<i^ ^ctena unb cntfattctc ben Srief . — @r
fragt bic^, fagte fic nad^ einiger ^tit, ob bu nid^t baroiber rodrft,
loenn cr bei mir um bic^ anl^iette. 6r tl^uc cS jd^rifttic^, bcnn rocnn
bu il^n nid^t moHteft, roie er leiber furd^ten mu|c, ba bu il^m immer
nur cin ganj luftigcS ©cfic^t gemad^t, fo moUe er bir nid^t mcl^r unter
bie ?lugcn treten, fonbern abrcifen ol^nc ein Scbmol^t unb fein
unfetigeS ;^erg fo rocit aU mogtic^ Don l^inncn tragen.
33a§ aKdbd^en antmortetc nid^tS, unb bic abutter fd^roieg auc^
cine ganjc SBcile. ^tofelic^ ful^Ite grau ^ctena bie 9lrme il^rcS
^inbeg an i^rem ^aU unb il^rc naffen Slugcn an i^rer SCBange unb
bad rocid^e 3Runbd^en ftammette bid^t an il^rcm Of)x : ^d) mdre
geftorben, 9Jiuttcr(^cn, rocnn er mic^ nid^t licb gcl^abt ^dtte! — S)a
jog bie SKutter fte auf ben ©c^oofe, roie fie il^r ^inb feit ben frul^ften
unmunbigcn Sa^ren nid^t mcl^r gcl^attcn l^attc, briidtte fic feft an il^r
J^crj unb fagte mit bebenber ©timme : ®ott fegne cud^, mcine guten
^inbcr. S^x ffabi mir t)iel roicber gut gu mac^en.
►
►
£&ucation Dei>artment, Ontario*
Annual Examinations, 1001.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
LATIN COMPOSITION.
Exa/minera :
• .
Q. W. Johnston, Ph.D,
A. L. Langfobd, B.A.
A. B. Nicholson, B.A.
1. Translate into Latin : —
(a) The consul was within a little of being slain in the'
battle at the river Ticinus.
(6) Hanno knew that he had to oppose the Roman without
any delay if he hoped to regain his province for
Carthage.
(c) He besought them not to waste time in discussing the
situation, while the danger of the townsmen was in-
creasing day by day.
{d) At this crisis the senate sent a messenger to meet the
consul and to command him to wait where he was
for the enemy.
(e) He decided, before he put his army in battle array, to
deliver a speech before a mass-meeting of the soldiers.
(/) This young man afterwards had the great distinction
of finishing the war by a victory in Africa, and for
this reason was sumamed Africanus.
[g) What have you to fear? Are you not very much
ashamed of such cowardice ? Do not yield in cour-
age to anyone. (Write in indirect also, depending
on qtuiesivit).
2. Translate into Latin : —
When spring came, Hannibal himself hastened to succour
the beleaguered city of Capua. But after a fierce assault on the
Boman lines had been steadfastly met, the Carthaginians were
compelled to draw oflf by want of provisions.
Hannibal now resolved to march on Rome. It was per-
l^aps the most daring move of a daring captain. He knew that
^thout artillery it would be impossible for him to reduce the
foVSB.J
city. Bat doabtless he hoped that the legions woald abandon
Capua for the defence of the capital. All accounts agree that lie
came by the river Anio, and encamped unmolested within four
miles of Bome. Panic reigned in the city. Two legions, mus-
tered in the cit^, were ready to repel assault, and levies of fugi-
tives were rapidly raised and armed. From his camp by tbe
Anio Hannibal rode round the city and gazed wistfully on tlie
ancient walls which alone saved the houses and temples from
destruction. He had wasted her lands and even thrown a spe&ir
against her gates, but even now he knew he must turn his baek
on the hated city which all his life it had been his purpose to
destroy.
>
j£bucation Department, Ontario*
Annual .Examinations, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
LATIN AUTHORS. GRAMMAR AND SIGHT
TRANSLATION.
EoDaminera :
G. W. Johnston, Ph.D.
A. K Langfoed, B.A.
A.. B. Nicholson, B.A.
1. Translate into English: —
Veneti reliqaaeque item civitates, eognito Caesaris ad-
vento, simiil quod quantum in se facinus aomisissent intelle-
gebant, legatos, quod nomen ad omnes nationes sanctum
mviolatumque semper fuisset, retentos ab se et in vincula
ooniectoB, pro magmtudine periculi bellum parare et maxime ea,
quae ad usum navium pertinent, providere mstituunt, hoc maiore
spe, quod multum natura loci confidebant
2. Elxplain the mood of fuisset, and the syntax of legatos
retentos.
8. Translate into English : —
Ibi Hannibal militibus certa praemia pronuntiat, in
Suorum spem pugnarent : a.grum sese daturum esse in
talia, Africa, mspania, ubi quisque velit immunem ipsi,
qui accepisset, liberipque ; qui pecuniam quam agrum mal-
» uisset, ei se argento satisfacturum ; qui sociorum cives Car-
thaginienses fieri vellent, potestatem facturum ; qui domos
redire mallent, daturum se operam, ne cuius suorum popu-
larium mutatam secum fortunam esse vellent. Servis
(juoque dominos prosecutis libertatem proponit, binaque pro
io iis mancipia dominis se redditurum. Eaque ut rata scirent
fore, agnum laeva manu, dextera silicem retinens, si falleret,
lovem ceterosque preeatus deos, ita se mactarent, quemad-
modum ipse a^um mactasset, secundum precationem caput
pecudis saxo eusit.
4. Make clear the syntax of gitorum (1. 2), pugnarent (1. 2),
Uheris (L 4), socwrwm (1. 5), rata (1. 10), Toactarent (1. 12), and
account for the tense of velit (1. 3), maluisset (1. 4). [over.]
5. State briefly the occasion and circumstances of Hannibal's
address.
6. Translate into English : —
ipsum autem sumptis Priamam iuvenalibus armis
ut vidit '^uae mens tarn dira, miserrime coniunx,
impulit his cingi telis ? aut quo ruis V inquit.
' non tali auxilio, nee def ensoribus istis
tempus ^et: non, si ipse mens nunc adforet Hector.
hue tandem concede ; haec ara tuebitur omnes,
aut moriere simuL' sic ore effata recepit
ad sese, et sacra longaevum in sede locavit.
Ecce autem elapsus Pyrrhi de caede Polites,
unus natorum Pnami, per tela, per hostes
porticibus longis fugit, et vacua atria lustrat
sauciua ilium ardens inf esto vulnere Pyrrhus
insequitur, iam iamque manu tenet et premit hasta.
7. Elxplain the mood and tense of adforet, and the case of
portidbvs.
8. Give inyour own words the meaning of nion tali auxUio
. . . adforet Hector ; inf esto wlnere ineequitv/r.
9. Give the principal parts of ciifhgi, nda, moriere, effata,
10. Translate into English: —
frustra cruento Marte carebimus
fractisque rauci fluctibus Hadriae,
frus^ per autumnos nocentem
corporibus metuemus Austrum :
visendus ater flumine languido
Cocytos errans et Danai genus
inf ame damnatusque longi
Sisyphus Aeolides laboris.
linquenda tellus et domus et placens
uxor, neque harum quas colis arborum
te praeter invisas cupressos
ulla brevem dominum sequetur.
absumet heres Caecuba dignior
servata centum clavibus et mero
tinget pavimentum superbo,
pontificum potiore cenia
11. What is the theme of the ode ? Briefly explain the ref*
erence in Cocytos, damnatua lahoria.
12. Account for the case of laboris. Make clear the poet's
reason for using ater, inviaaa, Caecuba, dignior, pontijicuTn
potior^ cenia,
13. What is the metre ? Scan the first stanza, indicating the
feet and all long syllablea
14. Translate into English : —
PoBtero die dispoeitis praesidiis cum in forum descendisset,
conversaque in eum plebs novitate rei esset, missus ab dictatore
Servilius, magister equitum, ad Maelium 'vocat te/ inquit, 'dic-
tator.' Cum pavidus ille, quid vellet, quaereret, Servilius causam
dicendam esse proposuit ; tunc Maelius recipere se in catervam
Buoramy et primum cireumspectans tergiversari ; postremo, cum
lictor iussu magistri equitum duceret, ereptus a circumstan-
tibos fidem plebis Bomanae implorare, et se opprimi consensu
patrum dicere, quod plebi benigne fecisset ; neve se ante oculos
teueidari aiiiarenl Haec eum vocif erantem adsecutus Servilius
obtroncat, respersusque craofe dictator! renuntiat Maelium,
repulso lictore, poenam meritam habere.
)
le^ucation department, ©ntarto.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
GREEK COMPOSITION.
Examiners :
G. W. Johnston, B.A., Ph.D.
A. L, Langford, M.A.
A. B. Nicholson, B.A.
1. Translate into Greek: —
(a) Gyrus, with the assistance of the Greeks, demanded
that the cities of Tissaphernes should be given to
him.
(b) Many of the soldiers used to abandon the ranks when-
ever night fell.
(c) He declared that it was impossible to cross the river,
if the enemy opposed.
(d) If we should give arms to the horsemen, we think they
would be grateful to us for the gift.
(e) I am afraid that the admiral in his anger will sink us,
ships and all.
(/) The river must be crossed by us before we reach the
capital.
2. Translate into Greek: —
At that moment the centres of the two armies were still
distant from one another a space of three miles. But when the
Greek generals noticed that their camp was occupied by the king
and his troops, they deliberated whether to send a detachment
or to go in full strength to the rescue of their camp. During
this hesitation of the Greeks the king was apparently advancing
straight forward to attack them. They therefore made ready to
sustain the shock. But the king passed by without attacking,
merely picking up some Greek stragglers together with Tissa-
phernes and his men. Now, when the Greeks saw the Persians
declining the fight, raising the battle-song they advanced at the
doable against the foe. They, however, did not wait, but fied
through an adjoining village until they reached a hill. There
they halted, as the hUl was covered by their own cavalry.
tf Anratim ^tpnttmnA, (6nUitia.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
GREEK ADTHORS, GRAMMAR AND SIGHT
TRANSLATION.
Johnston, B.A., Ph.D.
Examiners :-{ A. L. Langford, B.A.
Nicholson, B.A.
1. Translate into English :
*Op6vTa^ Si, Uipaff^ ^vrjp, yivei re irpoa"qKa)p /SaatXei /cal ret
'jToTufJua \€y6fi€V0<s hf toZ? dploToc^ HepcrHv, iirifiovXevei Kvpip,
Kai trpoirdev TroKe/Mi^a'a^, KoraXKayel^ Si, oiro^ Kvp^ etirevy el
airr^ Soirf hrirea^ x^Xtbu?, ori tou9 Trpo/earaKaoPTOf; Imria^ fj
5 Karaxavoi hv eveSpevaa^ fj ^civra^ 7roX\ou9 avr&v iuf eXoc xal
xtaXweie rov Koew hriovra^, koX iroLrjcreiev Acre fnprore Suva-
aOay ainois ISovra^ to Kvpov cTTpdrevfia ^aaCKei SutyyeiXaL
Anabasis, I.
2. Give the syntax of yivei (1. 1). Write out the principal
parts of KaraXKarfek (1. 3) and koclv (1. 6). Give the form in
oratio recta of Soirj (1. 4) and of iroci]<T€L€v (I. 6). Give and
distinguish the different constructions that follow &ar€.
3. Translate into English :
(a) " ^ArpeiSrjj vvv afifie irdTuv frXar/xOivTa^ 6t(o
&y^ cnrovooTi^eiv, el xev ddvarov ye <f)vyoLfi€i/,
el Sif ofiov irokefio^ re Sap^ xal Xo^/i09 *A^aiov^'
aW' aye Si; rwa pbdvTiv ipeiofiev fj ieprja,
5 fi teal opeipoTToXop — koI yap t ovap k/c A509 iarcp —
09 K eiiroi 8 Ti TotTGOv i)(QxraTO <l>o2)3o9 ^AiroWcov"
Iliad, I.
[oveb]
(6) Top S* ai TriXefiayo^ ireirvvfjAvo^ avrlov fjvha'
" aA.\a>9 /*€!/ <r iiv iyd y€ xai rifierepovhe K€\oifiijv
€pX€(T0'' ov yap Tt ^€via)V irodtf' aXKa <to\ axnot
10 ^cApof, hrei toi iya> fiev hniaaofMai, ovBi ae ixtfrrjp
Sy^erat' ov fiiv yap re ffapM fjLi/fforfjpfr ii/i oliap
<j>aiv€Tai, aW* airo rS)v irrrepwitp iaTOv v<f>aiP€t.
aX\d TOI, aXKov <f>&Ta 'm<f>ava'KOfjuii ov kbv Xkoig^
FivpvfjLayov, Ilo\v0oto Sat(f>povof; ayXaov vlov^
15 toi; vvv taa Ge^ ^Wcucqacot europowar
fcal yhp iroWov apurro^ avr)p fiifioviv re pAXidra
/lm;t€P* €fir)v ya/jAevv Kat *OSi;<r<r^o9 yipa^ l^iv,
dXXA rd ye Z€U9 olBev ^0\vfjL7no<;, aidepi paitap,
€1 fci <T<f)v irpo yajMoio reXevrijaei, kcucop fi^iap,^^
Odyssey^ XV.
4. What is noticeable in the syntax of <l>vyoifi€p (v. 2), &z/^
(v. 8) and etiroi (v. 6), and in the form of ipeiofjuep (v. 4) ? Supply
the verb with x^^P^^ (^- ^^)' Explain the mood of txoio (v, 13)
and reXevn^a-ei (v. 19), and tense of yafUeip (v. 17).
5. Scan vv. 6 and 13.
6. What is meant by pa'^^ioi and what explanation of the
origin of the Homeric poems is based upon this term ?
7. Translate into English :
(a) 'ETreiSAi/ he oirot wavcrayprat ahopre^, Sevrepo^ X^P^^ ircLpip-
X^o,t ix KVKPiop Kal ^eXtSoz/coi/ koX arjSopcop. eiretSap Se #ca«
oihot aamait Tore Sff waaa ri vKr) hravKelt rmp apeficov Karap-
XpproDP, fMeyitTTOP Se Brj 7rpo9 €v(f>poavpf)P ixeipo eyovai' Tnjyai
5 eici 8vo irapb, to av/JLiroaiop, 17 fj^p yiXtaro^ fj oe riSopfj^^ iic
TovrcDp exarepa^ rrdirre^ ip apx§ rrj^ 6ua>p^/a9 'jripovai, Kal to
Xoiirop riiofiepoi, Kal yeX&pre^ Sidyovort.
Vera Histoid, XL
(b) *fl fMaratoij t( etriroviaKare irepX ravra ; iravaaade Kap*-
popre^' ob yap 69 del fitaxrecOe' ovSip t&p ipravda aepLvS^P
10 aiStop ear LP ^ ovS^ &p aTrar/drfoi t49 abr&p ri avp avr& arroBavKav,
aX-X* dpdy/cT) rop flip yvfipop olxefrdait rr^p oIkUlp he Koi top
dypop KoX ro ^vcr/oi; hel SXKcop elpai Kal fierafiaXKjeip rov^
heoTTora^. el ravra Kal rd roiavra i^ hrr^Koov efifioijaaip^i^
air 01^, ovK &p olei fieydka a><l>e\f)0fipaL rop fiiop Kal aax^popeare-
15 pov^ tip yepeadai irapd rroXv ;
Charon.
8. Mark the antepenult — of ;^€XtSoi/a)j; (1. 2), and give the
principal parts of nripovai (1. 6) and fjhofiepoi (1. 7). Explain the
syntax of drrarfdyov (1. 10) and SXSmv (1. 12), and the use of hv
in oifK &p oUi, etc. (1. 14).
9. In a short sketch, show the state of politics, education and
religion in the Roman Empire during Lucian's life.
10. Translate into English :
XAP. ^AKovaare, w e^ei ^/uv rh Trpar/fiara* fiucpov fjLcv
vfjM/, a>9 opare, to <TKa(\>Ziov xal inroaadpoi/ iarL, koI Siappel rk
TToXX^, ical ijv rpair^ hr\ Oarepa, ol^aerai wepcrpaTriv v/AeU
Si t€KTovTOL &fia ffKere, ttoXKcl hri^epouevoi eKaaro^' ffv ovv
fA€Ta Tovrtov €/Ml3rJT€, BiSia firj v<rT€pov fi€Tavoij(r€T€'\ Koi fuxKurra
OTTotToi v€iv ovK hrLoTcurde. NEK. Hw oft/ Trovqaame^
evTrXo'fjaofiev ; XAP. *£>ya> vfiip <f>pdcw, Fv/lu/ov? hn^aivetv
XPV» '''^ 'Tepi^rra ravra irdvra hrl rrfi fjiovo^ KaTaKiwovTw;*
fJLO\M^ *>fiLp aV K€U OVTOD Si^OdTO VflcL^ TO TTopOfieiov (Tol Si, &
*^pfi7j, fieXiio'et, TO Sltto tovtov, firjBipa irapoBiyeaffcu alrriiv^ &9
&v fLti '^iXo9 ^y KcuTii eTTurXa, &<nr€p €<f>rfv, hiro^oKtov* iraph
Se T7}u hiro^oBpav €<rTa>9 BtarflvaxTKe airrov*:, xai avaXafi/Savef
yvfjtvow hn^alveof avarfKa^tov.
HeKpucol AuiXoyoi.
•\
i
f
JE^ucation Department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR BiATRlCULATION.
CHEMISTRY.
Exa/minera: ■
fR R Bensley, B.A., M.B.
W. L. Goodwin, D.Sc.
F. W. Merchant, M.A.
Note. — Thirty minutes will be allowed for the analyais of the
salt
Part A,
1. Determine the base and the acid in the salt submitted.
2. Give the names and formulas of the base and acid found,
and state the tests by which they were identified.
£bucation Department, Ontario.
Annual Exanninations, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
CHEMISTRY.
Examiners:
R R Bensley, B.A., M.B.
W. L. Goodwin, D.Sc.
F. W. Merchant, M.A.
Part B.
1. (a) The molecular weight of phosphorus is 124. Its atomic
weight is 81. Calculate the volume of 8 grammes of phosphorus
Tapor at SOCG and 740 millimetres pressure.
(6) Calculate the volume of phosphorus trichloride at 150°
C and 750 millimetres pressure formed by combining 10
grammes of phosphorus with the requisite chlorine. ^
2. Describe the changes in properties and write equations for
the following reactions : —
(a) ammonia gas on hydrobromic acid gas,
(6) phosphorus and iodine on water,
(c) moderately dilute nitric acid on copper,
(d) hot concentrated sulphuric acid on copper,
(e) sulphuretted hydrogen on solution of lead nitrate.
3. Describe the halogens and their compounds in such a way
as to bring out resemblances and gradations in properties.
4. (a) What is the composition of blue vitriol, of chloride of
lime, and of baking soda ?
(6) How is hydrochloric acid manufactured ?
(c) What substances are formed when brass is dissolved in
nitric acid ?
5. (a) Describe the manufacture of aluminium.
(6) Write the formulas of potassium and ammonium alums.
(c) Describe what takes place when a solution of potassium
hydroxide is added little by little to a solution of aluminium
chloride.
education Department, static*
Annual Examinations, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
PHYSICS.
ExaTninera:
(R. R. Bensley, B.A., M.B.
W. L. Goodwin, D.Sc.
F. W. Merchant, M.A.
1. (a) Explain the absolate measurement of force and work,
defining the metrical onits dyne and erg.
(6) A constant force of 100 dynes acts on a mass of 10
grams, initially at rest, for two seconds and then ceases; find: —
(i) the velocity of the mass at the end of two seconds,
(ii) its displacement at the end of four seconds,
(iii) its kinetic energy at the end of four seconds.
2. (a) State the conditions of equilibrium of any number of
forces in the same plane acting at a point.
(6) A uniform horizontal beam AB, whose mass is 100
pounds, is movable about A and has a body whose mass is 200
pounds suspended from it at J3. If it is kept from moving by a
rope BC fastened at a point C so placed that the angle ABC is
SO"", find the tension of the rope.
8. (a) Define the centre of gravity of a body.
(6) Through the centre of gravity of a triangle ABC, a line
DE is drawn parallel to the base BC. If F is the centre of BC
and AF is 45 centunetres in length, find the distance of the
centre of gravity of VBCE from F.
m
4. (a) Prove that the resultant fluid pressure on a submerged
body acts vertically upwards, and is equal to the weight of a
mass of the fluid equal in volume to the body.
(b) Equal masses of two substances, whose specific grav-
ities are 8 and 2 respectively, are weighed in a liquid whose
specific gravity is f ; find the ratio of their apparent weights
in the liquid. [over.]
CMO)
5. A current from a battery is passed through an electrolytic
cell which contains water acidulated with sulphuric acid, both
electrodes being copper. After the current has been passing
through the cell for a time the electrodes are disconnected from
the battery and connected with a galvanometer: —
(a) Describe as fully as you can the chemical changes
which go on within the cell when it is connected with the
battery.
(6) When the cell is connected with the galvanometer does
the galvanometer indicate the presence of an electric current ?
If so, -state its cause, indicate its direction, and describe the
chemical changes within the cell.
(c) What would be your answers to questions (a) and (6),
if the cell contained a solution of copper sulphate instead of
the acidulated water ?
6. The current from a battery of two similar cells is sent
through a tangent galvanometer, the resistance of which, to-
gether with the attached wires, is 4 ohms. If the tangent of
the angle of deflection of the galvanometer when the cells of the
battery are grouped in series is five-fourths of the tangent of the
angle of deflection when the cells are arranged in multiple, what
is the internal resistance of a cell ?
7. Make a drawing of a direct current electric motor indicat-
ing:—
(a) the direction of the current in the field-magnet and
armature coils,
^ (b) the positions of the magnetic poles in the field-magnet
and in the armature,
(c) the direction of the revolution of the armature.
State the cause of the revolution of the armature.
Education Department, ^tarfo.
Annual ExaminationSi 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
BIOLOGY-IBOTANY.)
ExamiTiers :-
R R Bensley, B.A,, M.B.
W. L. Goodwin, D.Sa
F. W. Merchant, M.A.
Pabt a.
Identify the submitted plant by means of your text-book, re-
ferring it to its proper order, genus and species, and analyse it
according to the accompanying schedule.
(Schedide uriU be found on Pages i9, 3 cmd 4.)
[over.]
A
1
1
1
1
a
Q
g
P
ft
F
a
i
1
Q
ft
ft
1
P
1
i
1
5
1
1
a ■
-!
i£
o
•<
05
o
^
<?i
CO
^
0^
M
CO
CO
z
§
z
O
O
uJ
llJ
_l
-I
>-
>
O
O
O
j.
'i
u
g
O
O
O
z
o
J.
'1
1
o
i
a
Q
I 5?
<S>
S fi
Ul
-3
o
O
fl
CM H
■*3
o
c
:z5
9
Pi
o
■i S
*
a
o
ee
a
d
a
i
I
I
5
I
® '3.
o
1 1
D
o
X
to
5P S ^
o
p
c
o
43
o
s
43
••^
43
43
o
3 t
43
00
06 'iH
9
•-3
i
43
•s
o
43
£•
O
1
>
}
O
o
flc
bJ
h
(0
o
"?
^
Mi
o
z
LlJ
o
CO
UJ
oc
o
-J
u.
z
education 2>epartment, Ontario*
Annual Examinations, 1901.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR BiATMCULATION.
BI0L0GY.-(B0TANY.)
Exa/ndne7'8: ■
f R R Bensley, B.A., M.B.
W. L. Goodwin, D.Sc.
F. W. Merchant, M.A.
Pabt B.
1. Describe folly the submitted plant.
2. Describe a lichen.
8. Describe the general structure of a stem and a root, point-
ing out the differences. Give examples.
4. Draw the submitted section, naming the parts. From what
organ is the section taken ? State, with reasons, whether the
plant belongs to the Monocotyledonous or Dicotyledonous divis-
ion of flowering plants.
5. Give an account of venation in plants, indicating its value
from the classificatory and physiological standpoints.
6. Describe features of perennial plants which enable them to
persist for more than a single season.
education department, Ontario.
Annual Examinations, 1001.
SENIOR LEAVING OR HONOR MATRICULATION.
BIOLOGY-lZooLooY.)
R R Bensley, B.A., M.B.
Examiners :-{ W. K Goodwin, D.Sa
Merchant, M.A.
1. Examine the submitted animal. Illustrate by drawings
and description : —
(a) the mode of the subdivision of the body,
(6) the character of the appendages,
(c) the organs of special sense.
Compare the animal in these respects with the crayfish.
2. Describe the e^e of a vertebrate. Indicate by a diagram
the effect of each of its parts on rays of light traversing it. How
are the various movements of the eye accomplished ?
3. Describe the fore limb and girdle of a frog. Compare the
corresponding structures in a bird, showing how the structures
in the latter instance are adapted to the animal's mode of life.
What other adaptive modifications of structure may be noted in
the bird ?
4. What is respiration ? Describe the organs of respiration
in: —
{a) earthworm,
(b) crayfish,
(c) insect,
(d) frog,
showing in each case how they are adapted to the animal's mode
of life.
Unt\»tvnit9 ot Soronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
GREEK.
PASS AND HONORS.
E, f M.AUKICE HUTTON, M.A.
Examiners: | ^^^^ Carruthers, M.A.
I.
HOMER, ODYSSEY, XV., XVI.
1 . Translate literally :
(o) *[!<; elirmv iv x^i^pl ridei Seira^ dfiil>iKirrre\\ov
17/M09 'ArpeiBf)^ 0 8' apa KprfTTJpa ^aeivov
Oijic avTOV 7rpoTrdpoi0€ if>ip(ov Kparepo^ ^eyoTrivOry;,
apyvpeoir 'EXcw; Se Trapurraro KaWiirdprfo^
TTCTrXov expvtr iv ^^e/ocrli/, Itto^ t' e^ar etc r ovofAofy*
" Bipov Toi fcat 670), rhcvov <f>i\€, tovto SiBtafu^
pt^vfifjL *EXi;i/i79 ;^etp«i)i/, iroKurfparov i^ ydfiov Sprjv,
afi aXoxtp <l>op€€iir retft)? 8^ <t>i\fj iraph firfrpl
iceia'dw ivt fie^faptp, <tv Se iiol '^aiptov d<t>iKOio
ducov ivKrifievov Kal afjv 69 irarpiSa ycuav.**
ft9 ehrovtr iv X€p<ri t10€1, 6 S' iSi^aro ^atpoH/.
Kol ra fiiv 69 ireiptvda riOei UeuricTpaTo^ fipdus
Be^fjLCvo^, Kai irdvra ii^ drjija'aro Ovfu^*
T0U9 S ffy€ irpo^ S&fJM xdprf ^avOb^ Mei/eXao^.
e^a-ffrjv S* dp* hreira icara xkiafiov^ t€ dpovov^ re.
')(€pvifia y dfiil>i7roXo<; tt/oo^oo) iwi'^eve <f}€pov<ra
KoK^ ypva-eifj, virep dpyvpeoio Xe^tfTo^,
vi'^aauar irapd 8i ^€a'Tr}v irdwaae rpdire^av.
airov 8' alSoir) ra^iirj irapedrffee (f)€povaa'
et&ara ttoW' iTn^detaa, 'x^api^ofievr) irapeovrtov,
(6) ** 'Ai/t/i/o', v^ptv e'^cov, KaKOfii]')(av€, xal Si ai (fyaatv
iv S^tJup *I0dtcrf^ fieff o/if^X^/ica? efif^ev dpiarov
0ov\^ Kal fivOotar av 8' ovrc apa rolo^ erjaffa.
^
fidpyCf TLT) Bi <rv TtyXe/xa^y Odvarov re fiopop re
pdvTei^, ov8' ifC€Ta<; ifitrd^ecu, ohnv apa Z€i)?
fidprvpo^ ;-^-oi;8' otrir) Kaxct pdtrreiv aWriKoLa'w.
ff ovK ol<T0* ore Bevpo Trarrjp reo^ iKero (f>€vy<oi/,
SrjfjLov vTroBBelaa^ ; Bij yap Ke^^o^jtoaro XiV/i/,
ovv€Ka X7)t,(nijp<TW iirKnTOfievof; Ta<^tot<rti/
i^/caye 0e<r7rpwToi5<?* oi 8' fjiuv apdfiiot fjaau.
rov p edeXov <f>0laat xat airoppaldai 4>iXov ^rop
rfBe Kara ^(orfv <f>ay€€Lu ixevoeiKia iroXXriv'
aW* '08ifO"€U9 KarepuKe /cal eayedev iefi€uov<i irep,
2. Parse fullv :
(a) TideCt 0r]K fJLvri/ji\ <f}ope€iv, k€L(tO<o, d(f>lKoi,o, irei-
pivOa^ 0ffij(TaTOy €^i<T0r)v, ^epvtffa, apyvpioiOf Xe/S^yro^,
em0€l(ra'
(b) €/jifJL€i/y i/JLwd^eai, oltriVy fjudprupo^Sy oa-irf, K€\o-
\a>aTo, \7}iarripaiv^ iTncwoiJLepo^, ^^^^j fievoe^/cia,
[FOR HONOR CANDIDATES ONLY.]
(a) Write out the Attic form of any words in this
passage, where it is distinct from the Homeric.
(6) Comment on p,€0^ op^riXxKa^t p^dprvpo^^ oa-irf,
ir.
[Write in a Beparate book.]
LUCIAN.
1. Translate:
20A. ovSe aiSijpov iK€lv6<s y€ Berj(r€Tai, aW*
{)VT€ x^Xkov ffVTe ')(pv<rov hua0fis^ SlKXoi^ fiiv wore
KTTJfia Kal ipfjLiuov eaj) dvaT€0€iKW fj ^aoKeikrw i^
Bo(6)TO?9 fj A€X<f>oh avTOL^ rj TtvL rvpdvvtp fj Xtia-r^^
T^ Be 0€a> oXiyov pAXei r&v a&v ')(pv<TO'jroi,&v,
KP0I2. hel (TV fiov T^ TrXovTtp wpoaTroXefiel^
/cat <l>0ov€k.
EPM. ov <f}€p€i 6 A17S099 & l^dpmp, Tffv irapprj'
ciav Kai rr)v aXi]0€uiv r&v Xoytov, dXXa ^ivov airy
SoKcl TO TrpayfJM, Trevrfff dv0p(owo<; ov\ vTTOirr'qa-irmu,
TO Be irapiaTdp^euov €X€v0ipa>^ Xeyoav. fAefitrjaerai
B* OVV /MlKpOV VCTTepOV TOV ^X(0VO^, STav auTov Sifj
dXovTa iiri Ttfv TTVpdv xrrro tov K.vpov ava')(0rivai'
i^Kovaa yap vij^ K.X(O0ov^ Trpt^ffp dvayi,v(o<rKova''q<; tA
eKaarTtp ^tiC€K\(Q(ypAva, iv oU xal TavT iyeypa'TrrOy
Kpourov /lev d\^y^f, tnrb Kvpov, TS^vpov Be avTov inr*
ixewffal tt/^ ^ ^ifrf€TiBo^ a7ro0av€lu. op^s "rifp
X/cvOiSa, rtfu J^ ^q\) vkttov tovtov tov XevKov
i^e\avpov<rav . ^i
Charon,
2. Parse ivaOfjs, fjL€fivi](rerai, ava')(0TJvaij aXAvai,
eiTiKhicKwafjLeva,
3. What historical figures are brought before us in
this dialogue \ Where and when is the scene laid ?
•4. Give a brief account of Lucian's life and times.
Write a note on the literary and the didactic value of
this dialogue.
5. Translate:
OinrfD hi Svo rj Tpei^ r^fiipai BteXrfXvffeaav xal
irpoaeXOwp €ya> 'Ofii^pip ti^ iroirjrr^, axoXrj^ ovarj^
afuf)olif, rd re aWa iwwOavofAtfv /cal o0€v eltf, Xeya^t^
rovTo /jbaXiara Trap rffilv euriri vvv t^'qreiaOat. o hk
ouS* airro^ fxev ayvoeiv €(f>a<rK€Vf a>^ oi fiep Xlov ol Se
^fivppoiov TToWol Be teal KoXoifxoviov avrov vofii-
fyvaiv, elvai /Jbiproi eXeye "BaffvXcovio^^ koi irapd
ye Tot9 TToXiTat? oi/y 'O/ATypo? aXXd Tir/pavrj^ KaXel-
aOai' varepov Si ofi/rjpevaa^ irapa rot? "'EXXt/o**!/
aXXa^ot Tfiv trpoaffyopiap, eri, Si xai ire pi r&v
oBeTovpivoav ariywv iinjpdntop^ el inr ixeivov elai
yeypafifjLevor xal i^ €<f>aa'tc€ iravra^ avrov eivai.
KareyiypoiHTKOp ovp tcui/ dfjL^l top Zi]p6Sotop kcu
' Apiarap-xop ypafiiuiTiK&p iroXXrjp rr}p y^v)(poXoyiap.
iirel Be ravd* ucapw dneKpiparo, irdXtp avTOP rfpo}-
TCtfV, Tt Bi] TTore hwb rrj^ fii^ptBo^ rr\p dpyy\p erroii]'
aaro' tcai &9 ehrep ovt<o^ hreXdelp avrt^ firiBep
eirirr^BevaapTi.
Vera Hietoria, II.
6. BieXviXiBeaap xat ... eirvpdapo/jLtfp. Explain the
coordination of these clauses. What syntactial pecu-
liarities have you observed in Lucian ?
7. Parse dfi<l>oip, Ofirfpevaa^, dXXd^at, eirrjpaoTmp.
Explain the syntax of a^xoXtj^, etr), "O/nijpo^y ainov,
^pafJkfjLaTuc&p.
*8. What is the purpose and what are the probable
originals of the Vei'a Historia ? What modern satires
or romances may have been suggested by this work ?
* For Honor CandidatOB only.
[FOR PASS CANDIDATES ONLY.]
9. Translate :
Koi ^fAeh iqpofieOa ripe^ re elep oi iroXifuoi Kcd
Tffp airloLV rtff Bta<f>opa^ 6 Bi, ** ^atde^p^^ ^alp,
' 0 T&p ev T(p ^Xi^ KoroiKovpTwp iStiaiXev^ (olKeirai
yap Sif Kax€WO^, Aairep koX 17 l^ekrivfi) iroXifv ijSff
fTpos fffia^ iroXffiei \povov. ijp^aro oe i^ airla^
TOiaVTff^* T&V €V T§ Op^ T§ ^/A§ TTOTC TOU? CLWOpw^
TaT0U9 awwyar^w ifiovXrfifjv airouclav ^ top *Km-
aifwpov areiXcUf ivra epfifiov xcti inrb firfSevo^ /caro^-
tcov(A€POV 6 Toivvv ^cUOmv ^Oovi^aa^ imiiXwre rfpf
airoucLav, Korh fiiaov rov iropov anavrriira^ ewX r&v
'lirrrofAVpfirjfctDv, rore fiev ovv vucffiivre^ {pi yhp
ff^p canvrrciKjoi rp irtipaaK€uff) hvex^piia-afiev vw
Bi ffovXofiai aidi^ i^eveyKew top iroXefiop, tcaX arroa-
reiXiu rrjp diroiiciap. fjp ovp ideXf/re, tcoiPfov^ari
fioi Tov OToXoi;."
Ibid.y I.
&iropo%, poor.
' E{i»a<f)6po^, planet Venus,
'iTTirofivpfjirj^, in plur. ant-cavalry.
apTiTraXo^, Tnatch, equal.
€Kif>€pa), begin.
nnftievfitfts ot CTovomo^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
GREEK.
HONORS.
Examiner: A. L. Lanoford, B.A.
HERODOTUS, VII.
1. Translate:
Mer* avTov Bi MapSovio^ iXeye' *ft hiawora, ov
/JLOVOV eh rSnf yevofiivfov Tlepa-imv apLtrro^, dWa xal
r&p iaofiipcov, 89 rd re aXXa Xeytov iirUeo aptcra
Kai aXtfOia-TaTa, Kal "laovas tov^ iv rfj Ftvpayrrr)
KarotKfffiivov^ ovk icurei^ KarayeXdaat ^fuv, ioma^
apa^iov^, xal yap heivhv &v eit) Trpfjyfia, el l.aKa^
fjLtv KoX ^Ivhov^ KoX hWlonrd^ re Kai * Aaovpiov^
aXXa re edvea iroKKa xal fieydXa dSlKijaavra
Hipcra^ ov&ip^ dXXit SvvafMW irpotTKrdaBai ^ovXo-
fjiepoi xaraarpe^dfievoi BovXou^ e)(Ofxev^ "^XXr^vaf; Se
irrrdp^avra^ dStKirj<; ov rifJL<apff<r6fi€da.
2. Parse eTruceo, Karoitcrf/Mevov^, VH'lv^ ob (rifMeaprfao-
fi€6a).
3. Translate:
*n tcaxe avOpudrre^ <tv iroXfirjca^^ ifiev crparevo-
fieifov ai/TOv eiri rifv *EtXXdBa Kal ar/ovro^ fralBa^
ifLOiK Kal aSeX<l>€OV^ Kai olKt^tov^ Kal <l>iXov^,
fivqaaadai irepl aeo iratBo^, ioav ifio^ SovXo^, rop
'Xp^v navoiKLp avrrj ywaiKi avveireaOai ; ev vvv
roS* i^errlara^Oy ©9 iv rolat oaai r&v dvdpdmnjiv
ouciei 6 9vfi6^, &9 ypri<rrit fiiv dKovaaf; repyjno^
ifivirrXie^ to a&fia, wrevavria Si rovrottri uKovaas
avoihiei. ore fjkiv vw ')(^p'q<Trd iroirjaa^ Irepa roiavra
^riyyiXXeo, evepyeairjai ^aaiXea ov Kav^W^^^
irrrep^akiadar errel re Se e9 to dvaiBitrrepov irpd--
V€v, Ttfv fihf a^vqv ov Xdfiylreai, iKiaata hi rrf^ b^itf^.
' (T€ fjL€P ^ap KOL T0V9 riacepa^ riv ircUhwv pverat tcl
^eivuL' Tov he ivb^, tov Trepii^etu fjbdXiara, rfj "^^^XV
^rffMidaeai'
4. Who is addressed in these lines ? iroXfitiaa^.
Why this tense ? Parse Xdfiy^ecu, ^rj^iuoaeai.
5. Translate:
*Aprdfiav€, oIkotod^ fihf <rv ye tovtodp SKCurra
Siatpeai' arap fitjre iravra <f>o^eOt f^V'^^ irav ofiouo^
eTTiXerfeo, Et yap hfj ^ovkoio iirl r^ aUl hre<ri^epO'
fiev^ 7rpj]yfjLaTL to tt&v ofiolot^ hrikeyeadac, iroiijaeuL^
&v oifhafjM ovSev Kpeaaov he, nravra Oapereovra
i^fiKTV TSiv heiv&v Trd(T')(eiv ^iSiXKov fj wav j(p^fia
irpoheiixaivovra firihaficL fitfhev iraOeiv, el he epi^mv
7rpo9 irdv to Xeyofiepov fit) to ^e/Saiov dirohe^ei^,
a^Weadat 6<f>ei\eL^ iv airroiac o/jlouo^ xal 6
x/rrevavria tovtokti Xe^a^. rovro fiev vw hr^ l<nf^
eyet* elheuat he avOporTrov eovra «m^ ^^ to
pe^aiop ; hoxeo) fiiv ovhafim, roia-i roivvp ^ov-
XopAvoiav TToieetv &^ ro iiriirav i^Chjeei ytveadai, rh
Kephea, rdiai he hriKeyofievoKri re irdvra koX OKueva
ov fidXa ideXec, 'Opa^ rd Ilepaicov irprjy/juira €9
h hvvdfjLio^ 'n'poKe')(<»pf)Ke' ei roivvv eKelvov oi rrpio
ifiev yevofievoi ^aaiXee^ yva>p/p<Tc rouivTr)<n aXXov^
<Tv/jL0ovXov^ elyov toiovtov^, oifK &v xore elhe^ abrd
€? toOto wpoeXOovra* vw hi tcivhvvov^ dvapptTrreovre^
€9 toOto a'<f>€a irpoffydyovro, fjbeydXa yap irpr\yfiara
aeydXotcrt Kivhvvov<TL eOeXei KaratpeecdaL*
0. Parse drrohe^ei^ and Mn79.
7. With a map show Xerxes' progress in the portion
of Herodotus rend this year. Locate any places
mentioned.
HOMER, ODYSSEY, XVIL. XVIIL
1. Translate :
*^n9 €<t>aT\ ^Ai/rivoo^ S' eireo'iv vetKecae avfiwrrjv
" & apiyvtore a'v/3S\ra, tIv he av rovhe iroXivhe
ijyaye^ ; fj ov^ a\c^ ^i/,\p aXrjfiove^ eiai Kat aSXot^
iTToyxoi avtrjpoi, hair^u d'^oXvfiavrripe^ ;
fj ovoaat OTC rot ^{q ^a^ehovaiv avatcro^ 5
ipffdS^ dyeipofievoi ?^» i /cat tt^otI rovS eKaXeaaa^ ;**
ft »
KvrlvOj oh fiiv KaXii xal iirdXb^ iwv itrfopev€i^'
TVi 7^/) S^ ^etvov KoXei aWoOev abro^ hreKOiav
SSXmf 7*, €i fXTf r&p ot ^fiioepyol laat, 10
fuivTiv fj trirrjpa kok&v fj reKTova hovprnv,
f^ teal 0€<rmv aoiSoi/^ o /cev ripirrjaw aeiScoP ;
oxfTOi jap KXrjToi ye fipor&v iir' aireipova yaiair
fTTtajfpv S* obK ap Tt9 icaKeot rpv^pra I avrop,
aXXJ aUt wXetro^ irepi irdprHv eU fMrqar/fptap 15
Sfimaiv 'OoiKTcr^o?, 'rripi S" aSr ifioi' avrap iyw ye
ov/c aXeyfA, €ia»9 uoi i'V€<l>pwp Hfp/eX&rreui
^a>€i ivl fieydpoi^ Kat TtfXA/jLaxo^ deoetSi^"
2. Scan vv. 2, 3 and 4, noticing any irregularities.
3. Parse ivoaa^, t&p (v. 10), xaKiot, iioi (v. 17).
4. Translate :
**Qv if>dTo, T& S' (hi fjL&Wop inro rpofio^ eXXalSe yvia,
€9 fjbia'aop 8' apayop' rcb 8' apL^oo x^^P^^ aveaxov*
hi) Tore fuppLTipL^e iroXvrXa? Sw 'OSutrcrct'?
^ eXdirei &^ p,ip yfrvx^ Xliroi aiOi irea-opra,
^ puv ^K eKaaeie ravvaaeiep r iTrl yaltf.
wBe Si 01 ^popiopTi Sodtraaro KepBiop elpa^,
ffK iXdaai, Xpa /mij fnp iiri^paacalar ^Ayau>L
8J7 tot' dvaayofiipm o uep fiKaae Be^ibv (Ofiop
ipo^, o o av^ep eKaaaep vtt ovarof;, oarea o etac^
effXaaep* avruca 8* ^Xde Kara aTopui <j>oipiop atiia,
KaS 8' hre<r ip Kopi'po'i puucimPy avp 8' ijXaa oBopra^
Xajcri^fop iroal yaZap* drap fiprfarrjpe^; hyavol
Xiupa% dpaaxpfiepoi yiX(p etcdapop,
5. Parse t^S (v. 1), dpiaxoPj Soda-aaro, hri^aaaaiar y
fULKiip, yiXqfj exOapop,
6. What part does Penelope take in the events of
these two books ?
VLnintvntts of ffovomo*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
ALL THE YEARS.
GREEK PROSE.
PASS.
Examiner : Adam Carruthers, M.A.
Note : — First year Candidates wil take A. and B. ; Candidates of
the other yean will take A. and C.
FOR ALL TEARS.
Translate into Greek :
To this king himself ; of these fathers ; in the mid-
dle of the iskuid ; at night ; on the same day ; in the
same summer ; in addition to this ; after this ; by means
of this; because of 'this; in my day; owing to the
influence of no woman ; they know (otSa) this ; they
did not know what to do ; we are persuading the citi-
zens ; you were obeying the general ; do not take the
gold ; they said he was not present ; he said not to
come ; do you not see those three men ?
B.
FOR FIRST YEAR.
Translate into Greek :
1. The general said that both peace and war were
advantageous to the State.
2. After hearing the general speak, the Athenians
condemned him to death.
3. The soldiers made use of horses to carry provi-
sions from the fields into the city.
[oyxB]
3. He said that flowers did not bloom there even in.
the spring.
5. They had more honesty than wealth, and were
too loyal to desert us.
6. Because he wished to take counsel with us he
was put to death by his own countrymen.
7. I am afraid that this man loves himself more
than he does his children.
8. He came to see the battle, but fearing that he
might be captured, he crossed the river.
9. Wherever they came they used to encamp,
although the enemy were present.
10. If the Spartans had not given quarter, all our
soldiers would have been slain.
C.
FOR SECOND. THIRD, AND FOURTH YEARS.
Translate into Greek :
1. Would that the king had not been slain. If he
were here now all would be well.
2. Socrates said that he was not wise, and that he
was conscious of his own ignorance.
3. He asked Meletus whether it was better to dwell
among good citizens or bad ones.
4. A Boeotian arriving at Corinth, as there arose a
north wind, and the water in the streets froze (aor.
pass, of Tnjyvvfu), fell down in the market-place, and
was in a very bad way (Sv<r;^e/3a>9 BLaKciadai), And
the bystanders raising him up {iwaipw) bore him to his
house. And when certain persons advised to send for
a physician, the sick man did not allow them, in-the-
idea-that (cov) there was only one wise physician, and
he (ouTo?) a Boeotian, by name Philondas. And they
sent a messenger that he might fetch (/co/a/J©) Philon-
das. And the messenger returned bringing a letter as
follows : ' My friend, I cannot come to you myself, but
I will send a proper (e^rtTiy&tov) medicine {^dpfJuiKov)
if I only know about ^^^ mischief (Ka/cov), where you
first felt pain.' A^j ^^e sick man bade them say, ' In
the market-piace of^he Corinthians/
nmrttvuits of fl:ovoiito«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS.
GREEK PROSE.
HONORS.
Examiner: Adam Carruthkrs, M.A.
Bi*asidas represented to them that he had been sent
among them by the Spartans in order to make good
the promise that the Peloponnesians had made at the
beginning of the war, to the efiect that they would
emancipate all the cities enslaved by Athens. That
the Spartans had not redeemed their promise sooner
was because the war had not gone as prosperously
with them as they had hoped it might.
But he was now come, having made a long and
datigerous journey, to redeem that promise, and offered
himself to them as their liberator. He assured them
that the Lacedaemonians would respect their inde-
pendence, and that no one party in the city need fear
that they would be delivered up to their political
enemies ; he had not come among them to be '* the
tool of a faction." The liberty that he brought them
was liberty for all, not for a few. But if they refused
to accept the freedom he offered them, and open their
gates to his army, then he would be forced to regard
them as the enemies of Sparta and her allies, and
would at once proceed to ravage their fields and make
war upon them in every way ; for it could not be
endured that they should be allowed to stand in the
way of the work of emancipating the Hellenes which
Sparta and her allies had undert^iken.
ii't.-r. »iii
^tniiierlSfiff at th^tmthl
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
HONORS.
i « »
J v» ' ».
rv«^ . ^„ . J J. C. ROBERT8QN, B.4.
.. 1. OtvQ theByntox of (a)'geDfiiral»^.conditi9naI,Ben-
tei^ces in Oree}^;, (6) ^be.v^rb^ ip -rio^^^XO ^^ abso-
lute construction ; (d) ** before " and " until " clauses ;
(e) av with the indicative.
2. Distinguish the following forms: cuf^elveug aweivai,
iiTiivaij a<l>ih€Ui /i^iQKa^ .a^l^^il ffLpcurr^t vapitrnf^
irapUrtfi ; /caOiaraaop, KaBiaraaav, KoSioTaaap, /cara-
aracav, KaraaTtfiTav, tearecrrja'av,
3. Write out the mopd-synopsis of t^e. following:
the present of BvvafAai and Bel ; the aorist active of
TtTMwrMttb irpofialvw and irapi)(<» ; the future middle
of wopl^.
4. Point out what is noteworthy or peculiar in the
syntax of the underlined words :
(a) oXX* Ire fffpaatuoai 'iroXiv tcdra 00X' avOpanrmv,
m». ap^poTi^oti /AiroXXflni' ^AprifiA ^ifP , .
oU affavoi/9 0€\€€traip iiroifxpiuvo^ Kareir^^vw*
(6) rcw^ €X ic€P iramtev avn^aofUP iv^v iovrmv,
fiif iroXvir$Kpa fcal aiviL^fiia^ ufrrorUretu tXJBmv^
(c) Jtt*, 9 T04 iihf iyiiP tlfi ^9 iroKiP, 6^pa /*€ /iifri^
J^rrrm* ov 70/9 ^oy i^poadeif irawrtaOai 61m
KkavOfiov re arvyepcSo yooto r« ioKpvoepro^,
TTplp y avTOP fi€ ihrjrar drhp aoi y c5S' hrririWa).
BcuTa irroD'xevtf,
(d) iya> Si k€ ae tcKjeifo Kar ainipova yalav.
(e) el irdvTe: ae iBoiev dv "laeroi/ *'Apyo^ 'Aj^a*oJ,
irkiovi^ K€ /ivrfo-Trjpe^ iv vfieripoia-i Bofiouriv
rjciOev Baivvaro,
(f) fifuk S* OUT* cttI epya irdpo^ y ifuv oire irfj aXXy
irpiv ye ae r^ yqfiaadaL 'A^^ataii/, 09 ri^ apurro^,
(g) 6 Si dSi/ceei dpaTreidofievo^ irpiv fj hrpeKcm^ iKfiAfftj.
{h) AecwoTa, ouk oIko^ iari *A0ijvaiov^, ipyaaafievov^
iroWd r^Sfj xatcd Tlepaa^, /iff ov Bovvcu Buca^,
(i) ^Cl fiaaiXev, enel re appo^Beeiv obBev ia^ wprfyfia,
aif Be fiev avfifiovXirfp evBe^at,
(J) f^p&Tov Bi PovKofuiL irept rrj^ ttoXcw? eiTrea/, hrel
firjB^ a\\<p Tti/i yey paTTTiu irepl avrrj^,
(Jc) *X2 tS)9 hvoia^, oXye obte laaaiv ore k&v ohjqv rf^v
Ile\<yir6pvr}(Tov eKoaro^ airrayv fcn^atovTait fJLoyi^ tiv
TToBuuov Xd/Soiev roirov irapd rov Alaxov.
11.
[Write in a separate book.]
1. Translate : Dixit urbem captum iH. Explain
the syntax of captum and of irL What is the com-
mon periphrasis for the f ut. inf. p&ss. ?
2. How is the lack supplied of (a) the pres. part.
fass., (b) the fat subjun. act, (0) the i^t subjun. pass. ?
llustrate.
3. Translate : ./ asked them what they xuovld have
done,
4. Give the main rales of oblique narration in Latin.
Translate : He said that the city wovXd have been
adorned,
5. Turn into direct narration :
Si mercede conducti obviam candidatis issent^
si conducti sectarentur, si giadiatoribus vulgo
locus tributim et item prandia si vulgo essent
data, contra legem Calpurniam factum videri.
\
^. Explain italicised forms in :
^a) Quamquam ego iam putdbam, iudices, multis
viris fortibus ne ignobilitas generis obiiceretur,
meo labore eaae perfectum, qui non mode antiquis
illis, fortissimis viris, novis hominibus, sed his
recentibns, corn/memorandia iacebant.
(b) Accusandi terrorea et minae, quibus tu cotidie
uti solebas, sunt f ortis viri,
-(c) Yenio nunc ad M. Catonem, qtuod est firmamen-
tum ac robur totius accusationis.
m
(jd,^ Quod si ita putaaset, certe optabilius Miloni
Juit dare iugulum P. Clodio.
^eT) Post diem teriium gesta res est quam dixerat.
^y) Quos nisi manu misiaaet, tormentis etiam de-
dendi JiierurU.
(ff) At etiam litteras, quas me sibi misisse diceret,
recitavit.
(A) Num exspectas, dum te stimulis fodiamua ?
(i) SyngrskphsL sestertii centiena,
(J) tJtinam id canere.
einftifrttfts of Soromo«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS.
GREEK AND LATIN.
TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
HONORS.
r* •^-— . (Cr- W. Johnston, Ph.D.
ExarmnerB:^j^ L. Langford, B.A.
. I.
for both tears.
Translate :
(a) lamque pedem referens casus evaserat omnes
redditaque Eurydice superas veniebat ad auras
pone sequens, — namque banc dederat Proserpina
legem —
cam subita incautum dementia cepit amantem,
ignoseenda quidem, scirent si ignosoere Manes :
restitit, Eurydicenque suam iam luce sub ipsa
inmemor heu victusque animi i^espexit ibi omnis
effusus labor, atque inmitis rupta tyranni
foedera, terque fragor stagnis auditus Avemia
ilia 'quis et me/ inquit, ' miseram et te perdidit,
Orpheu,
qais tantus furor ? en iterum crudelia retro
fata vocant conditque natantia lumina somnus.
iamoue vale : feror ingenti circumdata nocte
invalidasque tibi tendens, heu non tua, palmas ! '
dixit et ex oculis subito, ceu fumus in auras
commixtus tenues, fugit diversa.
Virgil, Georgics, IV.
(6) TTX. "E^j^ft? fioL, & 4>i\6K\et<;, elireii/, ri ttotc
apa rovTo iariv o Tois ttoXXois eh iiriOvfiiav tov
yjrevSeaOaL Trpodyerai, c!)9 avrov^ re ^aipeiv /uLrjSet
vyu^ \€yo])7a^ xal roU ra Toiama hie^covai fxaXicTTa
TTpoai'^etv tov vovv ;
<I>I A. IloXXa, €0 Tu^idhT}, iarlv h tov^ av0pa>7rov^
ipiov<i apayKa^ec tcl yjrevSfj Xiyeiv^ e? to ')(priai$jLov
aTTo^XeTTovTa^.
TTX. Ov&iv TTpo^ eTTov raCra. ovSe irepi TovTtov
rjpofi/qv OTToaoi r^v ')(peia^ eveKa -^evhovTai, airy-
yvcofJLty; Totyapovu ovtoi ye fidXKov koi eiraii/ov
Tive^ avTcav a^ioc, oiroaoi fj iroXe/jLiov^ i^ij7rdT7f(rau
Tj em aoyTfjpia tw Toiourip f^pfjbaKto e')(^pri<ravTo iv
To?9 hevol^^ ola iroXKa koX 'Ohvaaeu^ eiroiei, njv t€
avTOv '^v')(7]v apvifievo^ koX tov voaTov tS>v cTaipcov.
dWa irepl eKeivtov, & apiaTe, <l>f)fJLC, ot avTo aveu t^?
'Xpew TO ylrevSo^ irpo 7r\eibi/o9 r^9 aXfqdeia^ TiOevrai^
tfSofievoi Tw irpdyfiaTc koi ivSuiTpi^ovTe^ err* ovBcfMia
7rpo(f}da€c dvayKaca.
LUCIAN, ^c\oyjr€v8i]<:,
11.
FOR FIRST YEAH ONLY.
Translate :
(a) Prudentissima ci vitas Atheniensium, duni ea
reruin potita est, fuisse traditur ; eius porro civi-
tatis sapientissimnm Solonem dicunt fuisse, eum
qui leges, quibus hodie quoqu« utuntur, scripsit.
Is cum interrogaretur, cur nullum supplicium
constituisset in eum, qui parentem necasset,
respondit se id neminem facturum putasse. Sapi-
enter fecisse dicitur, cum de eo nihil sanxerit,
quod antea commissum non erat, ne non tarn
proliibere quam admonere videretur. Quanto
nostri maiores sapientius! qui cum intellegerent
nihil esse tam sanctum, quod non aliquando
violaret audacia, supplicium in parricidas singu-
lare excogitaverunt, ut quos natura ipsa retinere
in officio non posset, ii magnitudine poenae a
maleficio summoverentur ; insui voluerunt in cul-
leum vivos atque ita in flumen deici.
Cicero, Fro Roacio Amerino.
(6) n^ apa (b<ovri<raa fjyri<raro IlaXXa^ 'KOrjVT}
KaprraXifKo^i* 6 8' eireira fier r^^i^ia /Salve deolo,
l^ov S' €9 YlvKiODV avSpaop ayvpiv re Kal eipa^iy
evff apa Nea-rwp fjaro auv vldaipy afi<f>l 3' eraipoi
Salr ivTuvofievoi Kpear ATrrcav aWa t' eireipov,
oi 8' 0)9 ovv ^eivov^ i8ov, dSpoot ffKdov iiravre^,
')(€p(riv r riairaifiino Kal eSpidaadat dvooyou,
TT/xwTo^ N6<TTopt8i79 HeiaiKTTpaTo^ eyyvdev iXOoov
afji(f>OT€pQ)v eXe ^cl/^a xal tSpvaev irapa iatrl
fcd)€(riv ev fiaXaKOitriv, iirl ylraudPoi^ aXiija'i,
irdp re Koa-ir/u-qrco ^paavfxijBel Kat irarepi rZ*
S&tce 8* apa airXayyytov fjLOipa^^ ev 8' olvov e^^ve
')(pv€rel<p Bejrai' SeiBuT/cofievo^ 8e TTpo<rr)vha
naXXa8* ' AOrjvairjv, Kovprfv A 109 alyioxoto'
Homer, Odj/ssey^ III.
III.
FOR SECOND YEAR ONLY.
Translate :
(a) Legati iotroducti in senatuin maxime in banc
sententiam locuti sunt. " Populus nos Campanus
legates ad vos, P. C, misit araicitiam in perpetuum,
auxilium praesens a vobis petitum. Quam si
secundis rebus nostris petiissemus, sicut coepta
celerius ita infirmiore vinelo contracta esset : tunc
enim, ut qui ex aequo nos venisse in aniicitiam
I meminissemus, amici forsitan pariter ac nunc,
j subiecti atque obnoxii vobis minus essemus ; nunc,
i misericordia vestra conciliati auxilioque in dubiis
rebus defensi, beneficiura quoque acceptum col-
amus oportet, ne ingrati atque omni ope divina
humanaque indigni videamur ... Campani, etsi
fortuna praesens magnifice loqui prohibet, non
nrbis amplitudine, non agri ubertate uUi populo
praeterquam vobis cedentes, baud parva, ut arbi-
tror, accessio bonis rebus vestris in amici tiam
venimus vestram. Acquis Volscisque, aeternis
hostibus huius urbis, quandocunque se moverint,
ab tergo erimus; et subactis iis gentibus, quae
inter nos vosque sunt, quod propediem futurum
spondet et virtus et fortuna vestra, continens
imperium usque ad nos habebitis."
LiVY, VII.
[OYIR.}
(6) KopivOuLi yvvaiK€^, i^rjXdov iofi^ov,
firi ^ol 71 fiifjL<fyrf<T0\ olha yap iroXkov^ fiparAv
<T€fivov^ yey&ra^y tov9 fi€v ofMfidroDv airo,
T0U9 iv Bvpaioi^, oi 8* atfi f^av^ov 7roSo9
hvfTKkeiav iK7t]<rap70 xal paOvfiia.
SiKf) yap ovK evear iv 6<f>0a\uoU fipor&v,
o(rTi9 wplv avSpo^ <T<f>\ayyvov i/ctAoOeuf aa^^Af
artjyel SeBopKw^, ovSev rioLKfiiuvo^*
"Xjph ^^ ^ivop fiiv Kopra irpoa*)(wpeuf iroXei,
ovB* harov ^vea octtk avdd&f^ 767019
TTiKpo^ woklrai^ iariv apM0ia^ iiro.
ifiol S' acKiTTOv TrpS^fjM irpoaireaov roSe
'^vj(r)v hii^apK' olxofJMt ^ fcai 0lov
Xdpiv fjL€d€7aa Kardaveiv XPV^^' ^^'^^*
EuHiPiDBS, Medea^
i^tifiictsitv of t'okHm.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
». . 1
ANClfeNl^ fltStbRY.
EoDamvner : Adam Carbuthers, M.A.
Nor. — ^The candidatee will put I. and II. in separate books, and
write on /our qnesttons m ecLch section,
I.
1. Give some account of (a) the Tribal Asp, (6) The
Mycenaean Ai^e, and (c) The Epic Age, of rrehistoric
Greece.
8. Distinguish the copditions pi politiqal union or
organization in (a) Boeotia, (hi) Attica, (c) Lacouia.
What hindrances, were there to political union on
a larger sciite in Greece t
3. '* Among, the Greeks, not race so much as sur-
ronndings mide chi^i^iel.''
Illustrate the truth of tl^is dictum by* a considera-
tion of 8parta, Tarentuin, Corinth, and the Greek
oolonies in Sicily, bistingtiish briefly between charac-
teristic features of Doriaps and lohians.
4. What was the procedure in the organization of a
Greek colony ? In what relation did such colony
stand to the mother State ? What do you understand
by Clemchy t
5. Write brief notes on the following, mentioning
any famous work or works of each : Myron, Aeschylus,
Phidias, Sophocles, Praxiteles, Polygnotus.
6. Show the influence exercised by the Olympian
uid other great games on (a) Commerce, (6) Politics,
(c) MoraUty and ReKgion, (d) Art.
[oybrI
L i
a pa TovTo iariv o rots ttoWov^ €tv inriffu^tav toD
y^evSeaOai irpodyerai, a)v avTov^ re ')(aip€cv /j/rjSei.
vytt<? X€70i^Ta9 Koi T0I9 to, roiavra Sie^tovai /jLd\ia"ra
irpoaeyeiv top vovv ;
<I>I A. IloXXa, & Tirx^idSr), iariv h tov^ dvOpct^Trou^
ipiov^ avayKa^ei jk y^evhfi Xiyeiv^ €9 to ')^q<ri/JLOV
d'TTO^XeTTovTa^,
ITA. yjvo^v TTpo^ CTTO? ravra, ovoe irept Toxrrtov
7]pdp/r)v OTrocoi t^9 'xpeia^ evcKa yjrevSopTai, rruy-
yvca/Jirj^ roiyapovv ovroi ye /bLoXKov koI e'TraCvov
TLve^ avTmv a^ioc, oiroaoi ^ TroXefiiov^ e^TrciT7j<TCLV
ff hrl (ToyTrjpta tw toiovto) i^apfjbdKtp e'Xp7]a-cti/TO ev
T0A9 hevoh^ ola TroWd Koi 'OBvaaev^ eTroiei, Tqv re
avTOv ylrv'xr)v dpvvfievo% fcal rov voarov rSiv eTalpcji/^
dXkd Trepl eKeivtov, & apitrre, <f>r)fjLif ot avro ai/ev ttj^
'Xp€ia(; TO ylrevBo<: irpo nfkeiovo^ tt)^ dkrjdeia^ riOevTCU,
r^86fjL€voi Tc3 irpdypiaTc koi ivBiarpi^ovTe^ eir* ovBe/Mia
7rpo(f}d<TeL dvayKaia,
LUCIAN, 4>tXo^eyS?79.
11.
FOR FIRST YEAR ONLY.
Translate:
(a) Prudentissima civitas Atheniensium, duni ea
rerum potita est, fuisse traditur ; eius porro civi-
tatis sapientissimnm Solonera dicunt fuisse, eum
qui leges, quibus hodie quoque utuntur, scripsit.
Is eum interrogaretur, cur nullum supplicium
constituisset in eum, qui parentem necasset,
respondit se id neminem facturum putasae. Sapi-
enter fecisse dicitur, cum de eo nihil sanxerit,
quod antea commissum non erat, ne non tam
prohibere quam admonere videretur. Quanto
uostri maiores sapientius! qui cum intellegerent
nihil esse tam sanctum, quod non aliquando
violaret audacia, supplicium in parricidas singu-
lare excogitaverunt, ut quos natura ipsa retinere
in officio non posset, ii magnitudine poenae a
maleficio summoverentur ; insui voluerunt in cul-
leum vivos atque ita in fiumen deici.
Cicero, Pro Roado Amerino.
I
\
(6) n^ apa (t><ovri<raa fffqaaro JlaWa^ *A0ijvff
fcapiraXifia)*;' 6 S' erretra fier ix^^o, jSatpe deolo,
l^ov S' £? UvXlddv avBp<ov ayvpiv re Kal lSpa<;y
€vff apa Niartap fjaro <ruv vldaiv, afufn 3* eraipoi
ha^T €VTvv6fj,€voi Kpiar Syrrrfov oKXa r eTreipov,
ot 8' OK ovp ^€Lvov^ i8oPy dSpooi ffKSov airavre^y
^epaiv T '^aird^omo Kai iSpidaaffai apt&yoi^.
TTp&ro^ Neo-TopiS^ Held i(rr par o<; iyfudep i\0oi>p
dfM(l>or€pwv IXe ')(€ipa xai l[Spva€P rrapk hairl
xdeaip iv fia\aKolaiP, iirl ylraudfioi^ dXtrjai,
Trap re xaa-iyp^rtp ^paavfnjBei teat irarept w*
8&K€ S' apa (rTrXdyvpayp fjMipa^j ip 8' olvop €)(ev€
ypv^reitp Bhral* SeiSiaKOfiepo^ Se irpoarjuSa
llaWdS* 'A0rjpairjp, Kovprjp Aio9 alyioxoco'
Homer, Othjssey, III.
III.
FOR SECOND YEAR ONLY.
Translate :
(a) Legati iotroducti in senatum inaxime in banc
sententinm locuti sunt. " Populu.s nos Campanus
legates ad vos, P. C, misit amicitiam in perpetuum,
auxiliuni praesens a vobis petitum. Quam si
secundis rebus nostris petiisseinus, sicut eoepta
celerius ita infirmiore vinclo contracta esset : tunc
enim, ut qui ex aequo nos venisse in amicitiam
meminissemus, amici forsitan pariter ac nunc,
subiecti atque obnoxii vobis minus essemus; nunc,
misericordia vestra conciiiati auxilioque in dubiis
rebus defeusi, beneficium quoque acceptum col-
amus oportet, ne ingrati atque omni ope divina
humanaque indigni videamur ... Campani, etsi
fortuna praesens magnifice loqui prohibet, non
urbis amplitudine, non agri ubertate ulli populo
praeterquam vobis cedentes, baud parva, ut arbi-
tror, accessio bonis rebus vestris in amicitiam
venimus vestram. Acquis Volscisque, aeternis
hostibus huius urbis, quandocunque se moverint,
ab tergo erimus; et subactis iis gentibus, quae
inter nos vosque sunt, quod propediem futurum
spondet et virtus et fortuna vestra, continens
imperium usque ad nos habebitis."
LiVY, VII.
[otbl}
II.
Translate :
(a) Eheu cicatricum et sceleris pudet
Fratrumque. Quid nos dura refugimus
Aetas ? quid intactum nefasti
Liquimus ? Unde manum iuventus
Metu deorum continuit ? quibus
Pepercit aris ? O utinam nova
Incude diffingas retusum in
Massagetas Arabasque ferrum !
(6) Auream quisquis mediocritatem
Diligit, tutus caret obsoleti
Sordibus tecti, caret invidenda
Sobrius aula.
Saepius ventis agitatur ingens
Pinus et celsae graviore casu
Decidunt turres feriuntque summos
Fulgura montes.
1. Scan the first four verses of extract (a), naming
the metre.
2. Parse refugimua, nefasti, Arabas, sordibus, and
explain the meaning of diffingas.
3. Write explanatory notes on dura a^tas and
auream mediocritatem, showing their connection with
the poet^s theme in each extract.
4. Explain the references in the italicised words in
the following :
(a) Si mobilium turba Quiritium
Certat tergeminis tollere honoribus.
(b) Animaeque magnae
Prodigura Paulluvi superante Poena,
(c) Occidit et Pelopis genitor, conviva deoi^m,
Tithonusque remotas in auras.
(d) Satis beatus uvicis Sabinis.
(e) Utrum Hannibal [est] aemuLus itinerunx
Herculis, an vectigalis sfipendiariusque et servus
populi Romani a patre relict as ?
III.
Translation at sight :
Sub adventum praetoris ilomani Poenus agro
Nolano excessit et ad mare proxime Neapolim
descendit, cupidus maritimi oppidi potiundi, quo
cursus navibuB tutus ex Africa esset; ceterum
postquam Neapolim a praefecto Romano teneri
accepit, Neapoli quoque, sicut Nola, omissa
petit Nuceriam. Eam quum aliquamdiu circum-
sedisset, saepe vi, saepe soUicitaoidis nequiquam
nunc plebe, nunc principibus, tandem tame in
deditionem accepit, pactus, ut inermes cum singu-
lis abirent vestimentis. Deinde, ut qui a prin-
cipio mitis omnibus Italicis praeter Romanos
videri vellet, praemia atque honores, qui remanere
ac militare secum voluissent, proposuit. Nee
ea spe quemquam tenuit.
IV.
(Write at the end of the book.)
Translate into Latin :
1. While the Romans ivere making these prepara-
tions, it was long uncertain whether Hamilcar, whom
the enemy had commissioned to win over the Spanish
tribes, would break the treaty.
2. On coming to Carthage and being given a hear-
ing in the Senate, he warned the other faction not to
prevent any one from returning home at the beginning
of winter.
3. " Let ambassadors be sent/' said he, " to ask the
Carthaginians their reason for besieging the city of
Saguntum ; and if, as they seem likely to do, they
express their willingness to send for Hannibal, do not
declare war."
4. As it was impossible for us to reach the Pyrenees,
on account of the difficulty of crossing this river, they
did not know what to do.
0. When they began to fear that we should induce
the mountaineei*8 to join us, they declared that the
Roman people had promised not to impose a larger
tribute.
anfticrsUff of Saronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEAE.
LATIN.
HONORS.
Exanatier: J. Fletcher, M.A., LL.D.
I
I
I
L
Translate :
(a) dixerat haec, adytis cum lubricus anguis ab imis
septem ingens gyros, septena volumina traxit,
amplexus placide tumulum lapsusque per aras,
caeruleae cui terga notae maculosus et auro
squamam incendebat fulgor.
Virgil, Aerieid, V.
(6) ipse mihi nuper Libycis tu testis in undis
quam molem subito excierit : maria omnia caelo
miscuit, Aeoliis nequiquam freta procellis,
in regnis hoc ansa tuis.
per 8celu8 ecce etiam Troianis matribus actis
exussit foede puppis et classe subegit
amissa socios ignotae linquere terrae.
quod superesty oro liceat dare tuta per undas
vela tilny liceat LaurenteTn attingere Thybrim,
si concessa peto, si dant ea moenia Parcae.
Id.
(c) Daedalus, ut fama est, fugiens Minoia regna,
praepetibus pennis ausus se credere caelo,
insuetum per iter geiidas enavit ad Arctos,
Chalddicaque levis tandem super adstitit arce.
redditus his primum terris tibi, Phoebe, sacravit
remigium alarum, po8ui^ue inmania templa.
in foribus letum Androgeo turn pendere poenas;
CecTOpidae iussi — misenim ! — septena quotannis
corpora natorum ; stat ductia sort'ihua uma.
Virgil, Aemeid, VL
(d) igneus est oUis vigor et caelestis origo
seminibus, quantum non noxia corpora tardant
terrenique hebetant artus moribundaque mem-
bra.
hinc metuunt cupiuntque, dolent gaudentque,
neque auras
dispiciunt clausae tenebris et carcere caeco.
quin et supremo cum lumine vita reliqult,
non tamen omne malum miseris nee funditus
omnes
corporeae excedunt pestes, peuitusque necesse
est
multa diu concreta modis inolescere miris.
Id.
(e) Sed unam rem vereor ne non probes. Si enim
fuissem, non solum regem, sed etiam regnum de
re publica sustulissem : et, si mens stilus ille fuis-
set, ut dicitur, mihi crede, non solum unum actum,
sed totam fabulam confecissem. Quamquam si
interfici Caesarem voluisse crimen est, vide, quaeso,
Antoni, quid tibi futurum sit, quem et Narbone
hoc consilium cum C. Trebonio cepisse notissimum
est et ob eius consilii societatem, quum interfi-
ceretur Caesar, tum te a Trebonio vidimus sevo-
cari. Ego autem — vide quam tecum agam non
inimice ! — quod bene cogitasti aliquando, laudo :
quod non indicasti, grati&s ago : quod non fecisti,
ignosco. Yirum res ilia quaerebat. Quod si te
in indicium quis adducat usurpetque illud Cassia-
num, cui bono fuerit, vide, quaeso, ne haereas.
Quamquam illud quidem fuit, ut tu dicebas, omni-
bus bono, qui servire nolebant, tibi tamen prae-
cipue, qui non modo non servis, sed etiam regnas.
Cicero, Philippic, II.
(/) Num igitur me fefellit ? aut num diutius 8ui
potuit dissimilis esse ? Inspectantibus vobis toto
Vapitolio tabulae figebantur, neque solum singulis
venibant immunitates, sed etiam populis universis.
Civitaa non iam singillatim, sed provinciis totis
dabatur. Itaque si haec manent, i^uae stante re
piil>liea manere non possunt, provincias universas,
pai;res conscript!, perdidistis, neque vectigalia
solum, 8«d etiam imperium populi Romani huius
doixiesi^icis Dundinis deminutum est. Ubi est
aepti^Tts miliena, quod est in tabulis, quae sunt ad
Opis ? f unestae illius quidem pecuniae, sed tamen,
quae nos si iis, quorum erat, non redderetur, a tri-
butis posset vindicare. Tu autem quadringentiens
sestertium, quod Idibus Martiis debuisti, quonam
modo axite Kalendas Apriles debere desisti ?
Id.
1. Scao tlie first three lines of (a).
2. Write notes on italicised words.
3. Sxplaiu the terms spondaic line, aynapheia,
zetigma, heruiiadya, onomatopoeia.
4l What is a literary epic ?
5. What opinion of Julius Caesar does Cicero express
m the Second Philippic ?
8lnfiieir0ft9 of Cototito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
LATIN.
HONORS.
«
Examiners • I ^^* ^- J^^NSTON, Ph.D.
^^"^^"^'^ • 1 J. C. Robertson, B.A.
1. .Translate:
Qaid turn ? inde ibi ego te ex iure manum
coiLsertum voce, quid huic tarn loquaciter litigioso
responderet ille, unde petebatur, non habebat.
transit idem iure consukus, tibicinis Latini modo :
unde tu me, inquit, ex iure manum consertum
voc&sti, inde ibi ego te revoco. praetor interea ne
pulcbrum se ac beatum putaret atque aliquid ipse
sua sponte loqueretur, ei quoque carmen com-
positum est.
Cicero, Pro Murena.
2. Make clear the context and bearing of this
passage.
3. Explain the syntax of conaertum and respon-
deret, and the allusions in traiisit tibicinis Latini
modo,
4. Translate:
Huius sors ea fuit, ouam omnes tui necessarii
tibi optabamus, iuris dicundi: in qua gloriam
conciliat magnitudo negotii, gratiam aequitatis
largitio : qua in sorte sapiens praetor, qualis hie
fait, offensionem vitat aequabilitate decernendi,
benevolenliam adiungit lenitate audiendi : egregia
et ad consulatum apta provincia, in qua laus
aequitatis, integritatis, facilitatis ad extremum
ludorum voluptate concluditur. quid tua sors ?
tristis, atrox : quaestio peculatus, ex altera parte
lacrimarum et squaloris, et altera plena tabularuin
atqiie indicum. cogendi indices inviti, retinendi
contra voluntatem.
Ibid.
5. Write explanatory notes on Buius, sors, iuins
dicundi, provincia, quaestio, indices.
6. What peculiar difficulties confronted Cicero id
arguing this case ? How did he meet each of them?
7. Translate :
Itaque illud Cassianum, 'cui bono* fuerit, in his
personis valeat, etsi boni nullo emolument© impel-
luntur in fraudem, improbi saepe parvo. Atqui
Milone interfecto Clodius haec assequebatur, non
modo ut praetor esset non eo consule, quo sceleris
nihil facere posset, sed etiam ut iis consulibus
praetor esset, quibus si non adiuvantibus, et coni-
ventibus certe speraret se posse eludere inillis suis
cogitatis furoribus.
Cicero, Pro Milone.
8. What is the point of the orator's statements?
Explain illud Cassianuin.
9. Substitute a subordinate clause for Milone inter-
fecto, and account Jvlly for the syntax of cui bono,
aesequebiitur, posset, quibus.
10. Translate:
Quamquam quis hoc credat, Cn. Pompeium,
cum senatus ei commiserit, ut videret, ne quid res
publica detriment! caperet, hunc exercitu, hunc
dilectu dato indicium expectaturum fuisse in
eius consiliis vindicandis, qni vi indicia ipsa tol-
leret ? Quod vero in illo loco atque illis public-
orum praesidiorum copiis circnmfusus sedet, satis
deolarat se non terrorem inferre vobis (quid enim
minus illo dignum quam cogere, ut vos eum con-
demnetis, in quem animum advertere ipse et more
maiorum et sue iure posset ?), sed praesidio esse, at
int^llegatis contra hestemam iflam contionein
licere vobis, quod ^endatis, libere iudicare.
11. What is n&ferred to in eretvitu, dilectu dato,mi
in iUo loco***9(xl<t f
12. Explain the synux of txi^fciitturtun fuisse,
9entitfti^
13. Translate:
(a) Qao nos cunque feret melior fortuna parente,
Ibimus, o socii comitesque !
Nil desperandum Teucro dace et auspice Teucro :
Certus enim promisit Apollo,
Ambiguam tellure nova Salamina futuram.
O fortes peioraque passi
Mecum saepe viri, nunc vino pellite curas :
Cras ingens iterabimus aequor.
4 Horace, Odesy I.
(b) Nihil est ab omni
Parte beatum.
Abstulit clamm cita mors Achillem,
Longa Tithonum minuit senectus,
Et mihi forsan, tibi quod negarit,
Porriget bora.
Te greges centum Siculaeque circum
Mugiunt vaccae, tibi tollit hinnitum
Apta quadrigis equa, te bis Afro
Murice tinctae
Vestiunt lanae ; mihi parva rura et
Spiritum Qraiae tenuem Camenae
Parca non mendax dedit et malignum
Spemere vulgus.
Ibid, II.
14. Who is the speaker in (a) ? Write brief notes in
explanation of melior foriuna 'parente, auspice, am-
higuam, iierabvmus.
15. Develop the meaning of the first stanza of (b).
What is meant by the " curiosa f elicitas " of Horace ?
Illastrate as far as you can from the first stanza of (b).
Explain spiritum Uraiae tenu&m Camenae, malignum
spemere valgus,
16. Scan lines 1 and 2 of (a), and the second stanza
of (6), marking the long syllables.
smtUtrsUi? ot STovotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
LATIN.
HONORS.
ExamiTier : J. Fletcher, M.A., LL.D.
f
Translate into Latin :
He declared, that though it was a pleasure to
him to observe the concern and solicitude which
the senate had expressed on his account, yet he
begged of them to lay it all aside, and, without
any regard to him, to think only of themselves
and their families : that he was willing to suffer
any persecution, if, by his labors, he could secure
their dignity and safety : that his life had been
oft attempted in the Forum, the field of Mars, the
senate, his own house, and in his very bed : that,
for their quiet, he had digested many things
against his will, without speaking of them ; but,
if the gods would grant that issue to his consul-
ship, of saving them from a massacre, the city
from flames, all Italy from war, let what fate
soever attend himself, he would be content with it.
He presses them, therefore, to turn their whole
care upon the state : that it was not a Gracchus,
or a Satuminus, who was now in judgment before
them ; but traitors, whose design it was to destroy
the city by fire, the senate and people by a
massacre; who had solicited the Gauls, and the
very slaves, to join with them in their treason, of
which they had all been convicted by letters,
hands, seals, and their own confessions. — That the
senate, by several previous acts, had already con-
demned them ; by their public thanks to him ; by
[0V£R]
deposing Lentulus from his prsetorship ; by com-
mitting them to custody ; by decreeing a thanks-
giving; by rewarding the witnesses; but, as if
nothing had yet been done, he resolved to pro-
pose to them anew the question both of the fact
and the punishment ; that, whatever they iotended
to do, it must be determined before night : for the
mischief was spread wider than they imag^ined ;
it bad not only infected Italy, but crossed the Alps,
and seized the provinces : that it was not to be
suppressed by delay and irresolution, but hy quick
and vigorous measures.
MlDDLETTOX.
ottifneiTtftts o€ Sotomo*
.ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
ENGLISB COMPOSITION-
JEoDCLminer : W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
Ttlie caAdi<lAte will write aa original essay on one, and <me only,
of the following themes ; —
1. Sbakespeare's treatment of History in Julius
Ccesar.
2- The Differences between a Novel and a Drama.
3. Justice and Mercy.
4. Rome and Enp;land, a comparison.
WLnmtvutts of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
ENGLISH.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner : W. Pakenham, B.A.
Nors. — Honor Candidates will take the qaestions (6) marked with
an asterisk. Pass Candidates will take any six questions,
of which 7 and 8 must be two.
♦1. BrOTV.S:
It must be by his death ; and for my part,
I know no personal cause to spurn at him,
Bat for the generaL He would be orown'd :
How that might change his nature, there's the question :
It is the bright day that brings forth the adder ;
And that craves wary walking. Crown him ? — that :
And then, I grant, we put a sting in him,
That at his will he may do danger with.
The abuse of greatness is, when it disjoins
Kemorse from power ; and to speak truth of Cassar,
I have not known when his affections swayed
More than his reason. But 'tis a common proof,
That lowliness is young ambition's ladder,
Whereto the ctimDer-npward turns his face ;
But when he once attains the upmost round,
He then unto the ladder turns his back,
Looks in the clouds, scorning the base degrees
Bv which he did ascend : so Cesar may ;
Then, lest he may, prevent. And since the quarrel
Will bear no color for the thing he is,
Fashion it thus, — that what he is, augmented,
Would run to these and these extremities :
And therefore think him as a serpent's egg.
Which, hatch'd, would, as his kind, grow mischievous.
And kill him in the shell
(a) Sammarize the the argument of this passage.
(b) Discuss the justness or consistency of the
conclusion of the argument — '*It must be by his
death." ^
(c) From what premises did Cassius reach the
same conclusion ?
(d) On the basis of the different ways in ^w-faich
they reached the same conclusion, contrast the charac-
ters of Brutus and Cassius.
*2. (a) In what respect is Shakspere's presentation
of the character of Caesar untrue to history ? Justify
your answer by quotations or definite references.
(6) Discuss the dramatic appropriateness of
Shakspere's departure from historic truth in this
presentation.
*3. Cassius : " Ravens, crows and kites,
Fly o'er our heads and downward look on us,
As we were sickly prey. Their shadows seem
A canopy most fatal, under which
Our army lies, ready to give up the ghost. "
(a) What dramatic purpose is served by such
f oreshadowings of disaster ?
(h) Refer definitely (criving speaker, place and
details) to at least two such * foreshadowings * in
Romeo and Juliet and to three in Julius Gassar,
*4. In connection with the unity of interest required
in a drama, discuss the purpose and effect of the
scenes or episodes {a) where the mob meets the poet,
Oinna, in the streets ; (Jb) where the Triumvirs draw
up the proscription ; (c) where the page, Lucius, plays
for Brutus ; and also (d) of the death of Paris, and (e)
of the scene between Peter and the musicians after the
discovery of the death (supposed) of Juliet.
5. (a) "Go, counsellor,
Thou and my bosom henceforth shall be twain. —
I'll to the friar, to know his remedy ;
If all else fail, myself have power to die."
(6) Is it even so ? Then I defy you, stars ! —
Thou know'st my lodging : get me ink and paper.
And hire post-horses; I will hence to-night.
(i) By whom and at what crisis in the plot are
these spoken ?
[ii) Indicate — so far as they may be defined —
the effects of these crises upon the characters of the
speakers.
6. Give, as to one unacquainted with the play, the
substance of the Scene in which Juliet drinks the
Friar's potion.
*7. Explain by a parapbraze each of the following :
(a) The date is oat of such prolixity,
We'll have no Cupid hoodwink'd with a scarf,
Bearing a Tartar's painted bow of lath,
Scaring the ladies kke a crow-keeper.
(() Conceit more rich in matter than in words,
Brags of his substance, not of ornament.
They are but beggars that can count their worth ;
But my true love is srown to such excess
I cannot sum up half my sum of wealth.
(c) Alive, in triumph ! and Mercutio slain !
Away to heaven, respective lenity.
And fire-eyed fury be my conduct now : —
Now, Tybalt, take the villiau back again
That late thou gavest me !
{d) . . . But yet have I a mind
That fears him much ; and my misgiving still
Falls shrewdly to the purpose.
(e) ... Vexed I am
Of late with passions of some difference.
Conceptions only proper to myself,
Which give some soil perhaps to my behaviors.
(y ) Be factious for redress of all these sriefs ;
And I will set this foot of mine as far
As who goes farthest.
•8. By whom and on what occasions were any Jive
of the following passages spoken :
(a) Enjoy the honey -heavy dew of slumber ;
Thou hast no figures nor no fantasies.
Which busy care draws in the brains of men.
{b) O, so light a foot
- Will ne'er wear out the everluting flint !
A lover may bestride the gossamer
That idles in the wanton summer air,
And yet not fall ; so light is vanity.
{c) He reads much ;
He is a great observer, and he looks
Quite through the deeds of men.
{d) An I were so apt to quarrel as thou art, any man
should buy the fee-simple of my life for an hour and a quarter.
(e) I pray thee, leave me to myself to-night :
For I have need of many orisons
To move the heavens to smile upon my state,
Which, well thou know'st, is cross and full of sin.
(/) His life was gentle ; and the elements
So mixed in him, that Nature might stand up
And say to all the world, This was a man !
ig) My bosom's lord sits lightly on his throne ;
And all this day an unaccustomed spirit
Lifts me above the ground with cheerful thoughts.
i
Anlhtv»U9 9t STorotito
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST TEAR.
ENGLISH.
HONORS.
Examivaer : D. R. Keys, M.A.
1. Indicate briefly the character of the English
theatre, its players, plays and playwrights, in Shakes-
peare's time.
2. Tell the story of Prince Hal as contained in the
earlier plays of the series, and mention passages in
" Henry V" which refer to his actions in these plays.
3. What striking peculiarity appears in the con-
struction of this drama ? To what expedient has this
given rise ?
4. Criticise the comic element in the plot and discuss
its appropriateness in a play of the heroic order.
5. Explain the following passages (giving, in each
case, the speaker and the connexion) :
(a) Such and so finely bolted didst thou seem.
(6) His nose was as sharp as a pen and he bab-
bled of green fields.
(c) I knew by that piece of service the men would
carry coals.
(d) Can sodden water,
A drench for surreined jades, their barley broth,
. Decoct their cold blood to such valiant heat ?
(e) Familiar in his mouth as household words.
(/) I wear it for a memorable honor ;
For I am Welsh, you know, good countryman.
[OVEEJ
(g) Ha, art thou bedlam ? dost thou thirst, base
Trojan,
To h^ve me fold up Parca's fatal web ?
6. Give on outline of the King's speech before Hjir-
fleur, or of that before the battle of Agincourt.
7. Give the views on Shakespeare contained in the
essays read.
8. Contrast the style of Carlyle with that of I>e
Quincey and indicate any diflferenoes in their charac-
ters and circumstances which seem to correspond \^ith
the differences noted.
iBlniiiftBtts of n^ovontu.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FRENCH.
Examiner : Pelham Edgar, Ph.D.
I.
Translate into French :
1. Which of those buildings is the University ? The
University is the one in front of us.
2. If you were to lend me them, I should study all
day.
3. Here is the poultry which we bought (past indef.)
at the market this morning.
4. Louis XIV. was bom in 1638, on the fifth of
September. (All numbers to be written in tuU).
5. One should always read the best books.
6. How have been since you have been living in
Toronto ?
II.
Translate into French :
As soon as she had amved home, she went to
her godmother (marraine), and after having
thanked her, she said to her that she would like
very much to go ngain on the next day to the
ball While she was busy (occup^e k) relating to
her godmother all that hud happened (s'^tait
pass^) at the ball, the two sisters knocked at the
door. CindreUa (Cendrillon) went to open [it]
for them. " How late you are ! " she said, 7it6-
hing (en se frottant) her eyes as if she had just
(n'eClt fait que de) awakened. She had not how-
ever had any desire to sleep since they had left
each other. " If you had come to the ball," said
one of the sisters to her, ** you would have enjoyed
yourself there ; there came the most beautiful
princess, the most beautiful that one coidd (pres.
subj.) ever see."
[over]
III.
Translate into English :
Pendant que cette catastrophe s'aocomplissait,
le8 restes de la grande arm6e ne formaient plas
sur Tautre rive qu'une masse iDforme, qui se
d^roalait confus^ment en s'^coulant vers Z^vahin.
Tout ce pays est un plateau bois^ d'ane grande
^tendue, oil les eaux, flottant incertaines entre
plusieurs pentes, forment un vaste mar^cage.
L'arm^ les tra versa sur trois ponts cons^udfs de
trois cents toises de longueur, avec un dtonnement
mSl^ de frayeur et de joie. Ces ponts magnifiqaes,
faits de sapin r^ineux, coramen9aient k quelques
verstes du passage. Tchaplitz les avait occup^a
pendant plusieurs jours. Un abattis et des tas
de bourr^es, d'un bois combustible et d6]k sec,
^taient couch^ k leur entree, comme pour lai
indiquer ce qu'il avait k en faire. II n'aurait
d'ailleurs fallu que le feu de la pipe de I'un de ses
Cosaks pour incendier ces ponts. D^s lors tous
nos efforts et le passage de la B^rdzina eussent
^t^ inutiles.
1. What catastrophe is referred to in 1. 1 ?
2. Give the masculine and feminine singular of coiisS'
cutifs (1. 8), magnifiquea (1. 10), sec. (I. 14).
3. Express de trois cents toises de longueur in two
other ways.
IV.
Translate into English :
Mon cher fils.
Je commence aujourd'hui ma lettre, mais je n'ai
plus de bons yeux; j'^cris bien lentement, et ce
n*est gufere que dans quatre ou cinq jours que tu
pourras la recevoir. Nous avons appris ton succ^
par M. le cur^ et Madame de Civry, qui lisent les
gazettes. Presque tous les jours ils venaient k
la ferme pour nous raconter toutes les belles choses
que les gazettes disaient de toL Juge combien
nous ^tions heureux.
Le jour que ta lettre est arriv^, M. le cur^
lisait aussi dans son journal que tu venais de rece-
voir la croix. II est accouru tout de suite pour
nous faire voir Tarticle imprim^. Je lui ai montr^
ta lettre et en lisant il s'est mis k pleurer, si bien
que ton fr^re et moi nous avons fait comme lui.
Blnfii(r»fti) ^t fforonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEA?-
FRENCH.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. IJ. GAME^qif, IJI.^-
I.
Translate into French :
1. It is surprising that you have not time to read
more.
2. It would be much better po stay just wh^rQ you
are.
3. He does pot know m^ ftt ftH* I l^ave never seen
him anywhere.
4. Thi^t is the person whose bouse you are living in.
5. I can not tell you what has become of the young
men.
6. William w^ )istening to ifa^e3, bqj; Henry was
thi|^king of you.
7. ¥ou have more than seventy, but he h^ more
than you.
8. Neither of those two brothers does his work as
well as this man.
II.
Translate intq French :
One summer morning, George was §,t tbf^ win-
dow of his bed-room, which overlooked the neigh-
bor's orchard, i^e saw some fine red apples on
the grass, and determined to go and iake a few oi
them, although he knew very well that this was a
bad action. In the hedge which surrounded the
orchard there was a narrow opening. George
slipped through the opening and began to pick up
the apples as fast as he could. He had nearly
filled bis pockets with them, when he saw the
neighbor approaching, with a stick in his hand.
George ran away and tried (vovJmr) to get out by
the hole through which he had entered. But his
pockets were so full that he could aot get
through, and he was forced to give back the apples
and do several other disagreeable things.
III.
Translate :
(a) L'^l^den pudique et nu .s'^veillait mollement ;
Les oiseaux gazouillaient un hymne si charmantj.
Si frais, si gracieux, si suave et si tendre,
Que les anges distraits se penchaient pour I'en-
tendre ;
Le seul rugissement du tigre ^tait plus doux ;
Les halliers oil Tagneau paissait avec les loaps,
Les mers oil Thydre aimait Talcyon et les plaines
Oti les ours et les daims confondaient leun;
haleines,
H^sitaient, dans le choeur des concerts infinis,
Entre le cri de Tantre et la chanson des nids.
(6) Si Texcellence des races devait 6tre appr^i^
par la purete de leur sang et Tinviolabilit^ de lear
caractfere, aucune, il faut Tavouer, ne pourrait le
disputer en noblesse aux restes encore subistants
de la race celtique .... Resserr^e par la conquSte
dans des ties et des presqu'tles oubli^s, elle a
oppose une barri^re infranchissable aux influences
du dehors: elle a tout tir^ d'elle-mSme, et n'ft
v^u que de son propre fonds. La civilisation de
Rome les atteignit k peine et ne laissa parmi eux
que peu de traces. L'invasion germanique les
refoula, mais ne les pdn^tra point. A I'heure
qu'il est, ils r&istent encore jl une invasion bien
autrement dangereuse, celle de la civilisation
modeme.
1. From what authors are (a) and (b) taken ? Give
in a few lines the subject of each extract.
2. Explain what is meant in the last sentence of (6).
IV.
Translate:
Quoi de plus tragi(^ue que la Justice et la Ven-
geance divine pourmavant le crvme ? Sur un site
sauvage, obstru^ de pierres et de ronces, une lune
large et pleine verse une lueur livide et semble se
snspendre au ciel comme une lampe r^v^latrice.
Argentd par ses p&Ies rayons, le corps de la victime
git k terre dans Tabandon de la mort, comme unautre
Abel tu^ par un autre Cain. Ses formes dl6gantes
et pures, sa belle tdte renvers^e au milieu d'un flot
de cbeveux font un contraste frappant avec le
type ignoble, bas, presque bestial du meurtrier qui
s'^loigne la main crisp^ sur son poignard sanglant.
Le crime vient k peine d'etre commis, et d^jd dans
le ciel, sillonnant I'air de leur essor rapide, les
divinit^s vengeresses planent, les ailes ouvertes,
les draperies volantes, prates d fondre sur Tassas-
sin tremblant. . . .
(Description of Prud'hon's painting by
Th^oph Qautier.)
nnfiietsUv Of SToroiico.
AN^iUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
GERMAN.
Examiner : P. Toews, M.A., Ph.D.
I.
1. Translate:
^xittrli^ ber Q^tlit, *8ntg »on ?>reufen, f)attt
Qtffixt, bag etner frfner ©renabfere rinc SSleffugcl,
anfiatt etner Uf)r, an etner (Sd^nur in feiner S^afdf^e
trage. Sr mfinfcf^te btefe Slethtgel )u fe^en, unb mollte
ou^ »iffen, »o* ber ©olbat fa^en »flrbe, S5e{ ber
nfic^fien ^arabe rief er ben ©renabter ani bem ®lteb
unb fragte if^n, wit »{el lU^x e^ wSre. Der arme
®olbat war berlegen, unb weigerte ftd^, bie ^ugel aud
ber Za^(S)t }u jtet^en. %li aber ber StUnia bte U^r
fe^en moUte, ge^ord^^te ber ®o(bat Der ^Sntg betrac^^^
tete fie unb fragte {^n : ,s3Sitl^t ©tunbe fannbfefe Ul^r
anjefgen ?" IDann antwortete ber ©olbat flolj : „(ito.
fOlai^it, biefe U^r le^rt mid), ba§ id) immer berett fein
mufc ffir meinen *8ntg gu flerben/' Dem *8ntg
fiefiel bie SlnttDort beg ©renabferd fo fel^r, bof er i})m
tint fofibare golbene U^r gab.
VppABULARY.
Schnur : stfing ; Olied : rank ; verlegen : confused.
2. Give the plural of 8chnv/r, Uhr, Orenadier,
3. Trage ; why the subjunctive ?
4. Rief, Ziehen ; give the principal parts.
5. Give the third person sihgular, present, indicative
of 9dieny sterhen, gefiel.
[ovbb]
II.
Translate :
I. He told me he knew the names of all the
professors. 2. To-day a fortnight ago I visited
my brother-in-law in the country. 3. The &nny
hstd been marching (marachieren) the whole day.
4. Return (zwi^ilclcschicken) the books to the
librarian (Bibliothekar) as soon as you have read
them. 5. He asked her, whether she could trans-
late those letters for him. 6. I could have lent
(leihen) you the books, if you had asked me for
them. 7. He said he had fallen asleep (^n-
schlafen) at half-past twelve. 8. Paris the twenty-
first of jiiarch, nineteen hundred and one.
Beside a public road an old countryman i9vas
sowing his field. It happened that two youngs
men from London rode by and wished to have
some fun with the old farmer. " Halloo ! old
man/' cried one of them, " what are you doing
there ? " "I am sowing," he answered coolly.
"Indeed," said the other young man, "you are
sowing now, but we will reap the fruit." The
"You are quite
countryman answered coolly:
right, for I am sowing hemp. '
VOCABULARY.
public, offentlich; sow, sden; happen, geschehert ;
ride by, vorbeireiten ; fun, Sjpasz; halloo, heda;
coolly, mJiig ; indeed, so ; reap, ernten ; hemp, Hanf.
BfnfUftsftff of Sotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
GERMAN.
HONORS.
Examiner : P. Toews, M. A,, Ph.D.
I.
Translate :
Ein reicher junger Mann befand sich nicht sehr
wohl; sein Ar^t wuazte die Ursache seiner
Beschwerde und wUnschte ihn von seinen Gesell-
schaften in der Stadt weg. £r empfahi ihm ein
Dorf in Schofctland, weiches wegen seiner hohen
Lage, seiner erfrischenden Luf t und seines reinen
Wassers von alien Arzten empfohlen wurde.
Der junge Mann kam in dem Dorf e an, mietete
Zimmer im besten Wirtshause und war dann
bestandig im Freien, wenn das Wetter gUnstig
war. Eines Tages war er in einer Riehtung ge-
gangen, wo er noch nie gewesen war, und sah
neben der Landstrasze innerhalb einer niedrigen
Mauer einen Mann mit einer Schaufel und einer
Spitzaxt {pickaxe) ein Loch graben. Er sah eine
Zeit lang zu und f ragte den Mann endlich : '* Was
thun Sie, mein guter Mann ? '' " Ich grabe ein
Grab," war die kurze Antwort. " Ein Grab ! "
wiederholte der junge Mann, " ein Grab ! Ich
babe geh5rt, dass die Leute hier nicht oft sterben."
Das ist richtig, mein Herr," antwortete der To-
tengraber, ganz richtig ; die Leute sterben hier
nicht oft ; sie sterben nur einmal."
[over]
II
TraDslate :
Unb er fd^aut »ertraumb toititx
3tt bem blaucn ^tmmcl auf :
SWefne 3u8enb fel^rt nfd^t wteber,
Unb »oD[enbct {fl mtin 8auf-
SBfeleg »{rt) ber 3ett jum SRaube,
X)o(|i nidS^t alleg fann s^erge^n ;
©tier {fl'd, an ben f d^ daube,
Siner, ben bte ©teme fel^n.
Sieben fann i^, fllauben, l^offen ;
SCief im Dunfel gWnit e(n gtdj^t,
Unb i(|! fe^' ben ^tmmel offen,
S3enn bad ^erj tm £obe br^t
IIL
Translate :
1. They were not to speak to him about the
matter until they had heard from me. 2. The
clerk (Handlunga diener) ought to have shown
me at least two kinds of cloth {Tuck). 3. Are
those country people countrymen of yours ? 4.
The letters could easily have been found in spite
of his concealing {verstecken) them carefully from
(vor) them.
It was a time of war and a battle was expected
the next day. On the evening before this battle
an officer came to the tent of his general and
begged for a furlough. He wished to see his
faUier once more ; he had received word from his
brother that his father was dying. The general
who could see through this pretext, said : *'Yes,
go, and go soon ; for it is written, " Thou shalt
honor thy father and thy mother, that you may
live long upon the earth."
VOCABULARY.
Expect, erwarten ; tent, ZeU : furlough, Urlaub ;
pretext, Vorwand.
LITERATURE
1. Write a note on Sturm und Drang.
2. Briefly characterize the Romantic School, naming
the principal authors.
3. Who wrote the following works : Buch der Lieder,
Soil und Haben, Ekkehard, Schwarzwalder Dorfge-
schichten.
fMHUfVlliflS 0t K»V0ni9*
ANVUAL mxAuuxATWua i leoi.
F|BST Y£4ft*
ITALIAN.
HONOBS.
v^^i^^^ . f W. H. Frase^, B.A.
I.
Translate :
Lodovico Ariosio fu il piii grande poeta del suo
tempo. Nacque a Reggio d'Emilia nel 1474.
Era di una famiglia molto distinta, ma mentre
era ancora giovanissimo gli mori il padre eosiccb^
5 dovette pensare ad allevare i fratelli e le sorelle.
Ebbe uiSci important! dalla corte della casa d'Este
e morl nel 1533.
Scris.se delle commedie e delle satire: la sua
opera pid importante e Y Orlando Fuvioso, in cui
10 narra le avventure di Orlando, famoso cavaliere del
tempo di Carlo Magno, divenuto pazzo per amore
di Angelica.
Si racconta di lui questo fatto. Un giorno suo
padre lo rimproverava perch^ trascurava gli studi
15 per occuparsi solamente di poesia. II giovane
Lodovico stette ad ascoltarlo e non gli rispose
nnlla. Poi raccontando a suo fratello la cosa,
esponeva a questo tutte le cose che egli avrebbe
voluto rispondere a suo padre. II fratello gli
20 domand6 perch^ non avesse detto quelle cose a
suo padre. Allora Lodovico gli rispose che men-
tre suo padre gli parlava egli pensava che se
avesse dovuto rappresentare in una commedia un
padre che rimprovera un figlio gli avrebbe fatto
25 dire le stesse cose che suo padre diceva a lui.
L
1. Give the principal parts (infin., gerund, past part.,
1 sg. pres. indie, 1 sg. past def.) of macque, distirUa,
morl, acrisse, divenuto, atette, eaponeva, voltUo, detto,
fatto.
% Write in full the pres. indie, of wmwI, the pres.
subj. of dovette, the f ut. of divemUo, the impf. indie, of
alette, and the pres. indie, of occuparai,
3. Write in words the date 1474.
4. Write the following in the plural : U piu grands
poeta, a aibo fratello, dr lui. Give the singular of
uffi/yif gli atudi.
5. penaare ad allevare (1. t). Give at least three
examples of other verbs requiring a before a follow-
ing infinitive.
6. Give an alternative relative form for in etii
(1. 9).
7. Si racconta (1. 13). Translate ai va apeaao di qui
a Londra in otto giomi.
8. a 6U0 padre (1. 19). State the general rule for
the omission of the article in such constructions.
9. Write the following words in phonetic transcrip-
tion, indicating the stress where it is abnormal : tempo,
nacque, giovaniaaimo, opera, magno, giomo, giovane,
queato, egli, domandd,
II.
Translate into Italian :
1. That was the first war fought by the Italians for
Italy.
2. Running in the fields one day the boy fell and
broke his arm.
3. We did not need your money ; we had received
some from our parents.
4. In that house, of which you see the windows from
here, lives my best friend.
5. We should have been glad if you had come
some hours sooner.
6. The poor sick-man is better to-day; he seems
much stronger.
7. You will have to study a great deal if you wish
to learn this language.
8. Tlie poet Tasso was born at Sorrento. At ten
years of age he had already studied Latin and Greek.
Then he went to the University of Padua {Padova) to
study, and afterwards to the Court of Ferrara. He
'Wrote a fine poem called " La Gerusalemme Liberata."
This poem is liis greatest work. His last years were
not happy. He spent a part of the time in prison,
because he mras believed to be mad {pdzzo). In the
last year of his life he was at Rome, and was to receive
the croTvn of laurel (aUoro), but he died before the day
of his coronation. Few poets have been so great or so
unfortonate (diagraziato).
&ni9tvnlts of STorotitfi*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
SPANISH.
HONORS.
Examiners i"^'^' FRASEB, B.A.
I.
Translate:
Paseaba un dia con su padre Fernandito, cuando
un pobre anciano les tendi6 la mano, pidiendo
por amor de Dios una limosna El nifio, com-
pasivo, pidi6 permiso & su padre para socorrerle
5 con unos cuantos c^ntimos que tenia reunidos
para comprarse juguetes. Se lo concedi6 gustoso
el padre, y el anciano, enternecido y afectado,
despu^ de recibir la limosna, le dio gracias al
nifio, augurdndole venturoso porvenir, si mantenfa
10 tan delicados sentimientos.
— I No puede usted trabajar ? — dijo Ueno de
candor el nino.
— I Ay, hijo mio ! — contest6 el viejo suspirando
— ^no merezco que nadie me socorra : mi vida es
15 una serie no interrumpida de azares 6 infortunios ;
porque mal trabajador de joven no pens^ nunca
en aprender oficio. Murieron mis buenos padres,
me bice soldado, donde nunca tuve fortuna,
y licenciado despu^, no pudiendo trabajar en
20 ninguna parte, muy pronto he tenido que implorar
la caridad pAblica...; Ay, hijo mfol, apUcate i
aprender pronto un oficio 6 & estudiar una carre-
ra, que hoy la experiencia me hace ver con harto
dolor la verdad de aquel proverbio : '* Quien de
25 joven no trabaja, de viejo... se muere de hambre."
1. Complete the tense in which each of the foUo^^ing
occurs by writing the remaining forms of its singular
and plural : tendid (1. 2), did (1. 8), jmede (L 11), hace
(1. 23), Be rmuere (1. 25).
2. Give the principal parts of the following verbs,
showing in each case also the parts which may be
derived or inferred from these : pidiendo (1. 2), tenia
(1. 5), murieron (1. 17), hice (1. 18), pridiendo (1. 19).
3. tenia reunidos (L 5). When does the past par-
ticiple agree in Spanish, and when does it not agree ?
4. Se lo (1. 6). Parse.
6. le did gracias al niflo (11. 8, 9). Explain this con-
struction.
6. aplicate d aprender (11. 21, 22). Re-write, using
the usted form.
7. Write one example in Spanish for each of the
following forms, showing its correct use in a sentence
of not less than ten words : loa (pron.), las auyos (mean-
ing " yours "), ae los, ningunoSy lo que.
8. Give a phonetic transcription of the following
words : cuando, anciano, tendid, rennidos, juguetes^
recibir, delicados, dijo, nunca, aqueL
II.
Translate into Spanish :
1. I have some Spanish books ; do you wish them ?
Yes, I wish to read them.
2. If you wish to read them, I will give them to you
at half-past two in the afternoon.
3. A friend of mine has spoken to me about some
business (negodo) of yours.
4. Whose watch is this, and for whom have you
brought (tra^r) it here ?
6. It is my father's, and I have brought it for my
young nephew.
6. Well, if he has once refused to lend you his book,
you should not ask him for it again.
7. What was the matter with him yesterday ? Had
he a headache ?
8. Villeroiy the guardian {ayo) of Louis the Four-
teentli, used to write badly, so badly that very f ew
could read i?vhat he wrote. One day he wrote a lefcter
to Fleuri, tlie teacher of the young king, but he could
not read & single word of it. Fleuri asked him to
(nse : qu>^^ communicate his thoughts in a more legible
(^legible) maxmer. Yilleroi wrote another letter which
iH^As even ^worse than the former {anterior)^ and Fleuri
ansTirered him thus: *' Tour second letter is not much
more leg'ible than the first ; for our own honor do not
-virrite to me again, in order that it may not be said
that the 'k.ing has a guardian who cannot write and a
teacher ^eho cannot read.
SAniHevttftff of 2Poront04
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
PHONETICS,
HONORS.
Examiner: W. H. Fraser, B.A.
1. Define "Phonetics," and distinguish from Or-
thoepy and the Phonic system of teaching reading, with
which it is sometimes confused. What is the relation
of Phonetics to Phonetic spelling ?
2. Describe the organs which supply breath for
the purposes of speech, and the action of these organs
in supplying breath.
3. Which of the sounds indicated by italics in
the following words are voiced and which are voice-
less: Hami (Ger.), peupZe (Fr.), co8a (It. or Sp.), <Aine,
hei^Ai, t/j/*at, sayen (Ger.), Bergf (Ger.), icebergf, huwger ?
What is the difference between a voiced and a voice-
less sound ?
4. Describe the formation of " back open " conso-
nants, " point open trilled " consonants, " front nasal "
coDHonants, illustrating your answer by diagrams.
Examples.
5. Classify the sounds indicated by italics in the
following words : yes, ich (Ger.), hzer (Fr.), (/ant (Fr.),
banco (It. or Sp.).
6. Describe the formation of the sounds indicated
hy italics in lune (Fr.), fine (Fr.), school, sou (Fr.),
ou\ (Fr.),. schon (Ger.), using diagrams and noting
differences between the first and second and the third
and fourth of these sounds, respectively.
[over]
J
7. Write pairs of words illustrating the French
nasalized and corresponding non-nasalized vo^wels.
S. The division of speech into words is a logical'
not a phonetic, division. Explain and illustrate.
9. Compare the " oflf-glide " of t in English • top '
with that of t in French ' toper/
10. Upon what principle does the division of a
breath group into syllables depend ? Note any dif-
ference of principle between French and EInglish as
regards division into syllables (in the phonetic sense).
Parallel examples.
8lnftiev0its of Sorotiio#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
HEBRKW-
f J. F.
: < R. G.
(J.-F.
J. F. McCuRDY, LL,D.
^Examinera : { R. G. Murison, M.A.
McLaughlin, M.A.
1. Translate Genesis ii. 16 20 :
TT'T
• • ••• • •••• t
T •• : V T - — T T T -: 'T ' • • •••:
Ti: • - :• TTT V . "T- • - T • I
wn nm b^bj D"i«n l'?-Kip'' ie^« '?i)i 1^
T- VV TT'T TV:* V "' 2
n'or\2rrb^b ntoef onxn j^ip'i 20 : ^Ef
t •• : - t: •* , tT'T tis*- • :
• tt: vt- -- : --t- I :
lV?^ (V. 17) ; T\ip (^- 18) ; «3J1 (v. 19).
(b) Explain Waw consecutive. Distinguish between
^ consecutive and conjunctive as to pointing.
(c) Explain the syntax of nyiH* HltDn HID (""'
17) ; fc«!rD (^. 20).
T T
2. Translate Genesis iii. 9-13 :
" T T 'T V • \'' T : T J: • •
T MT It- • T - t I: n v v " t«v"
•• • •* ^ •••Tl*'T*T ** I*
T T 'T V - T : 'T T V • T -: • : • I
-|D •'V—nanj «in "•nsi? nnnj "ic^« he^xh
' • • T : IT • • T • T - T V ~: T • 'T
- T • "T • vJ T : V - ••• IT ' •• T
: Vi«i ^ii^^^n ^mn n;^iin "iD«m n^'E';; nw
,.. ,.j. . - , , T T - T • tT V ~ " T
(a) Parse and explain the forms HS'^N (^* ^) •
K3nN] (• 10) ; -"pj^ (V. 11), and pai-se J^^'^W (v- 10),
?Jin"'1y(v. 11), n"'E'J?'(v. 13).
I • • • • T
(6) What are the distinguishing marks of the Piel,
Pual and Hiphil in the peiiect and imperfect of the regular
verb ?
(c) Inflect ntS^t? (^- 12) without suffixes, and ^^p
T ; I
with suffixes, in the singular and plural.
(d) Give rules for the pointing of the article and He
interrogative.
3. Translate Genesis iv. 9-13.
- I • T vv •• i-i- .. T :
ni3 "iD^t'T 10 : ^3J>^ ^ni< -lat:^.! tij;"!^ ^b
• • T • T •• -: • : - T
•T T- : 'T ' • " •• I • - : ' ' • T •• : i t • t
nniJB -lEfx nDiNiTp nm iiin nn3?i ^
T : tT V "^ T T -: »T ' • T T T T " :
f'VT* f • T •* : V " r "T T •
T IT T •••(•• I T T-:iT V "2-
T : V ''I- V " ' V'TT v5 '• TT
(a) Parae Q-ip^y (v. 10) ; yn^> TjTD (^- H) J
nn (^- 12) ; K^E^^D (V. 13).
• • • •
(b) Define and distingaish Daghes lene and Daghes
forte. Give examples from the above passage.
(c) Inflect np7 throughout the Kal imperfect,
imperatiye and infinitive construct.
4. Translate into Hebrew : m j father's horse, our fathers'
horses, this good horse, this horse is good, my good horse.
The man arose and went to his house and said to his servant,
** Bring (Hiph of ^^2) ^^^ ^^^^ OOQil) ^^^^^ ^ g*^®
you."
(6) Distinguish between the use of the imperfect tense
and the participle as employed to express past action in
Hebrew.
(c) How is the comparison of adjectives expressed in
Hebraw 9
(d) Where was probably the original home of the
Semitic peoples! Name the different branches of the
Semites. Outline briefly the part played in history by any
one of the Semitic nations.
ilnflitVKtftfi ot Eovunio*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEAR
ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY.
j!v«.««,»,-».. . I John McGowan, B.A.
^^'^*'**^» • i Alfred T. DbLcbt. B.A.
N01& — CandidAtet will answer the questions in Algebra and Triso-
nometiy in separate books and endorse them aocordin|^y.
Questions 7 and 8 are for those candidates only who purpose
entering ti^e Honor Department of Political Science, and
are to 1m taken in place of questions 2 and 5.
1. Solve the equations :
(a) a^ + 6x + 2v^xa + 6x-3 « 102;
If m and n are the roots of the equation
then
(a+ mb + m^e) (a + wi+ nh) ■« a* + ^* + c*— ^c— ca — ah,
2. If -— M -J- then will cib + cdhea, mean proportional
between o« + c« and b^ + cP.
I, m, py q are positive numbers and — is greater than
m
P I '^' p
- : shew that Iq is greater than mp, and that ^ is
9 J fn + q
P ^
greater than - but less than — .
q m
3. In an A. P. of an odd number of terms shew that the
Bom is equal to the number of terms multiplied by the
Boiddle term.
The sum of 5 terms of an A. P. is 25 and the sum of
^3 terms is 169 : find the sum of 19 terms.
4. Sam to n terms : 2 + | + -j^ +
Employing the theory of the G. P. find the value of
•27318.
Find the present value of an annuity of $900 starting
7 years hence and running 11 years, the rate of intereet
being 4%.
6. Explain what is meant by the statement xac y^ and
shew that as a consequence x as ky, where k is some constant
The distance through which a body falls from rest
varies as the square of the time. It is known that the body
falls 16.1 ft. in the first second ; how far will it fall in seven
seconds f
6. Sum to n terms :
(a) 12 + 2« + 35» + ....
(h) (a + 6)« + (a + 26)2 + (a + 36)2+ ....
7. Assuming the formula for the number of permutations
of n things r at a time, find the number of combinations of
n things r at a tima
From a company of 5 officers and 43 privates, in how
many ways can a detachment of 3 officers and 30 privates
be selected f
8. State what is meant by the Binomial Theorem.
Expand to five terms and write down the general term of
(1 + «)-«, (1-2*)-*, {l+x)K
Noting that \/99 =« (1 — j^^)^* expand the binomial to a
few terms and arrive at an approximation to v^99.
I. Find the numerical values of all the trigonometrical
ratios of 60^ 90*^ and 135^
II. Prove the following identities :
(1) sec A — cos A «» tan A sin A,
l + oos^ ^ ^ ^^
^ ' 1 — cos A
^_, ootil . COtil _
(3) ' r + T-T-^ « 2 sec il.
^ cosecil — 1 cosec^ + 1
III. Prove the following identities :
(1) cos (A + B) mm cos A COS ^ — siu ^ sin B,
(2) cos 3 il «» 4 cos8 ii — 3 cosii.
(3) cos 40* + cos 80* — cos 20'.
<.l)
In any triangle prove the following :
62 + c» — a2
coa^
2bc
^ ^ 2 ^ 8 {8 — a)
(3)
V. Xf
(2)
<3>
Sl^ %/8(8 -.«)(« — b){8 — C).
H be the radius of the circumscribed circle of a
and r the radius of the inscribed circle, shew that :
ttbe
s
C
B
r ^
asm — sin -^
COB
1
dnfuetflifts of Toronto*
AVWAL EXAMmATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
EUCLID AND TRIGONOMETRY.
EaxmAner : John McGowan, B.A.
1. loBeribe a circle in a given tiiaDgle. (lY. 4.)
Describe a circle which shall touch one side of a
triangle and the other two sides produced
2. Inscribe a r^ular pentagon in a cirda (TV. 11.)
An equiangalar figure inscribed in a circle is equi-
lateral, provided that the number of its sides is odd.
3. Triangles on the same base and between the same
parallels are to each other as their bases. (YI. 1.)
Triangles are to one another in the ratio compounded
of their bases and altitudes.
4. If A and B are two lines, find a line C such that the
ratio of il to C is the duplicate oi A ix> B.
Similar triangles are to each other in the duplicate
ratio of their homologous sides. (YI. 19.)
5. If two triangles have one angle of the one equal to
one angle of the other aud the sides about one other angle
in each proportional, so that the sides opposite to the equal
angles are homologous, then the third angles are either
equal or supplementary. (YI. 7.)
If through the intersection of a pair of common tan-
gents to two circles, a line is dra.wn cutting the circles, the
radii to a pair of corresponding points are parallel.
6. If from the vertical angle of a triangle a straight line
be drawn perpendicular to the base, the rectangle contained
by the sides of the triangle shall be equal to the rectangle
contained by the perpendicular and the diameter of the
^le described about the triangle.
[ovbb]
J
7. Given L cos 35« 15' =. 9.9120316, Dif. for 60^ = 893,
find X COB 36^ 15' 26' and L ain 64*» 45' 18'.
Given L tan 39^* 20' = 9.9136291, Dif. for GO' = 2577,
find L tan 39^ 20' 24"' and L cot 50^ 40' 15^
8. Solve the triangle :
a « 32.74, h ^ 25.63, c » 41.27 ; il and ^.
log 4982 « .6974037 L ton 26'' 14' » 9.6926565
log 2419 » .3836359 Dif. for 60' » 3185
log 1708 - .2324879 L tan 19** ir » 9.5414678
log 855 ». 9319661 Dif. for 60"^ » 4069.
9. Solve the triangle :
a » 172.3, 6 - 231.9, C » 69* 24' ; find ^ and B.
log 4042 » .6065963 L cot 34* 42' » 10.1596224
log 596 - .7752463 X tan 12* r» 9.3280953
Dif. for 60' =. 6200.
10. Solve the triangle and show that it is ambiguous :
a » 2735, b » 2235, B » 52'' 26' ; find A and C.
log 2735 » .4369573 Z sin 52^ 25' » 9.898981^
log 2235 » .3492776 L sin 75** 62' «^ 9.9866509
Di£ for 60' =■ 318.
einfiif vRiftff of Sovotito#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
ALGEBRA.
HONORS.
Examiner: Alfred T. DeLury, B.A.
1. Prove the Exponential Theorem.
Dednoe the ezpaouon of log^ (1 + as).
For what values of the variable, x^ is each of the
expansions valid?
Shew that
nr - n (n - 1 )^ + "* ^^. ^ ^^ (n - 2)'" - . . . .
vamshee if r is a positive integer less than n.
2. Explain what is meant by the term Umitj using as
illustrations
(a) 1 + i + i + ^^ infinitum.
(&) f 1 H 1 , as n tends to infinity.
If p is a given number what is the limit of
Find L ^ ^^ J 2£?, when h tends to zero.
3. Explain what is meant by a convergent series.
The series
1' 2^ 3^
ia oonrmgent if p > I, otherwise divergent.
Examine for oonyergency,
(i) 1 + 2- 1 + 274- 1 + 2-0- F+— •
[ovib]
4. Resolve into partial fractions
Sum the infinite series
+ o-rS-e + F^lTo + ••••
1.2.3.4 • 3.4.5.6 ' 5.6.7.8
5. In the ordinal^ continued fraction shew that the
successive convergents approximate more and more doseij
to the value of the continued fraction.
Every recurring continued fraction ib equal to a quad-
ratic surd number,
6. Solve in positive integers and find the general solu-
tions of
(a) 17 a; ^ 49 y + 8 =. 0 ; «• — 13 y* - 1.
The number of positive integral solutions of cm;J+ by
ss c is limited.
7. In the usual notation shew that ^ (a) • ^ (b) ^ ^ {ab)
wheraa.and b are prime to each other.
Prove Wilson's Theorem.
Shew that 32» + 1 + 2« + « is divisible by 7.
If tTi, n, p be prime numbers the expression
leaves a remainder 1 when divided by mnp.
8. Sum to n terms :
W 0:5 ■*■ 3.5.7 "*'5?7:9"*' ••••
(6) 4 + 13 + 35 + 94 + 262 + 755 + ....
1 2 3 4
(c) ir3"« + 3V5i + 5r77+7r9i+ •• = •
. • « •
9ini\ttxuits of erovontb.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
TRIGONOMETRY.
HONORS.
Examiner: H. J. Dawson, M.A,
1. Prove
, ^ ^ 6^
If the angle C of a triangle ABC when expreBsed in
circular measure differs from tt by a very small angle 0,
shew that
c-(« + 6)|l-2^^-p^,|nearljr.
2. Elxpress sin*^^ in terms of trigonometrical ratios of
mnltaples of 0, n being an odd positive integer.
Prove that, if n is an even integer,
2»-i 1
sin** e —
[2* ^ 2([»)2
3. Prove that if 0 lies between -r- and + —r-
4 4
tan^^ . tan»^
^ » tan ^ ;; 1-
■ • • •
3 • 5
Show how TT can be calculated from the sum
4tan-i^-tan-i2l,.
[oveb]
4. Sum the following serietf to n terms, u$ing exponenHdU
in (c) :
(a) coa a + cos (a + i5) + C08 (a + 2 /?) +
(b) tan-iJ + ten-4+ .... + t&a-^ j^^-
(c) J + sin ^ + sin 2 ^ + + sin (n — 1) 0.
5. Prove, n being an even integer,
«» — 1 = (a:2 — 1) (aB2 — 2 flc COB — + 1)
n 2
(fic^ — 2 a: cos ?? + 1)
n
showing the origin of the different factors.
Prove Bin.-.(l-^)(l-2-^)._
6. If one spherical triangle be the polar triangle of another
spherical triangle, the latter will be the polar triangle of the
former.
What *ii^ the spherical excess of a triangle 1 Show that
it is always positive.
7. Prove
(a) cot a sin 6 eat cot ii sin C + cos b cos C.
,. . ' A + B c a + b . C
(0) cos ^ COS -r- as COS — 5 Sin -^ *
8. In a right-angled spherical triangle ABCy C being the
right angle, prove
sin b as sin j? sin c and tan a xbb tan c cosB.
Show how to solve a right-angled spherical triangle,
one side and the hypotennse being given.
9. Assuming that for* any polyhedron, the sum of the
number of solid angles and the number of plane faces is
equal to the number of edges increased by two, show that
there are only five regular polyhedrons.
SAnfUtrsfto of STorottto
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY.
HONORS.
Eocaminer : Alfred Baker, M.A.
1. Express in the form of an eliminant the condition
that (1) three given points may lie in a straight line ; (2)
three given lines may pass through a ])oint.
On one of two straight lines are situated the points
J, A\ A''; and on the other, the points B, F, B", The
lines A'B^ and A^'B' intersect in C ; the lines A"B and AB"
in C ; and the lines AB" and A'B in C\ Shew that C, C
and Cr lie in a straight line.
2. Find the cross ratio of the ]>encil formed by the lines
whose equations are
X «B 0, y — mx •= 0, y = 0 and y — m'x =« 0.
OABC and OA'BC are two intersecting straight lines.
0, J, B^ C form an harmonic range ; and so also do
0, A\ B, (T, Shew that AA\ BB, CC intersect in a point
3. Find the equation to the tangent to the parabola in
the form
m
f/8B mx + — •
a
From this deduce that the directrix is the locus of
the intersection of perpendicular tangents.
Prove also that the locus of the intersection of tangents
which make an angle 0 with each other is the hyperbola
y* — 4 aa; =« (x •♦• a)* tan* Q.
4. In the ellipse find the locus of the bisections of a
■jstem of parallel chords.
If (ae', y') be the co-ordinates of the extremity of a
diameter, find the coH>rdinates of the extremity of the
diameter conjugate to it.
[ovbr]
Shew that the ai'ea of the parallelograms oootained by
a pairof conjugate semi-diameters and the taogents at their
extremities is constaut,
5. Find the equation to the hyperbola when referred to
its asymptotes as axes of co-ordinates, in the form
4 a;y SB a' + 6*.
If {x\ y') be any point on this hyperbola find the
equation to the tangent at this point.
Shew that if any chord PQRS be drawn to the hyper-
bola, meeting the asymptotes in F and S and cutting the
hyperbola in Q and R^ then PQ = RS.
6. Find the polar equation to the tangent to the conic
in the form
- = 1 4- e cos 0
r
I
- = « cos g + cos {Q — a).
In the parabola, if tangents at P and P' intersect at
Ty and F be the focus, then
F!r = FP ' FF.
7. If any chord of a conic be drawn through a point 0,
it will be cut harmonically by 0, the curve, and the polar
of a
Hence discover a method of drawing the tangents to a
conic from an external point by means of a ruler only.
8. Find the general equation of a conic through four
fixed points.
Find the locus of the centres of the conies which pass
through four fixed points.
Shew that only one parabola can be described to pass
through four given points, one of which (given in direction)
is at infinity.
9. Two confocal conies cut one another at right angles at
all their common points.
Conversely if the conies
a» ^ 6' "" ' a'* h'^ ""
be at right angles at their points of intersection examine
whether they are necessarily confocal.
amtnerttfts of Sovotito#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
PROBLEMS.
HONORS.
( Alfred Bakek, M.A.
ExaTniiners : < H. J. Dawson, M.A.
( Alfred T. DkLury, B.A.
None — Candidates are requested to return answers to questions in
sections A and B in separate books, endorsed accordingly.
A.
1. Construct geometrically the radical axis for two circles
one of which 1 ies wholly within the other.
2. If a chord of a parabola pass through the focus, the
rectangle under the ordinates of its extremities is constant,
and so also is the rectangle under the abscissae of its
extremities.
3. Find the points (other than the vertex or infinity) on
the parabola y^ s*4 osc at which, when possible, the normal
to this parabola cuts the parabola y^ s 4 a' (a; — k) also at
right angles.
4. Shew that the locus of the pole of a fixed straight line
with respect to all the conies through four fixed points, is a
conic which passes through the three intersections of lines
joining the four points in pairs.
B.
I. Sum the set ies :
IS P4. 2» . . l' + 23-h ... 4-n8 .
1 ! 2 ! n !
in infinitum.
[OVEBl
II. If Fy Qy P\ Q' are positive iutegers such that
PQ' ^ FQ^l
the fractious
p p^
are consecutive convergents to a continued fraction whose
quotients are positive integei-s.
III. Evaluate:
1 1'^ 22 32 . . . .,
r . -7 . -I- -r- in mnnitum.
1+14-1+1 +
IV. If ^ be positive and not equal to unity then
mxm^i (jc — 1) > jc"» — 1 > m (^ — 1)
unless m lies between 0 and + 1, in which case
;^»ii-l (^ _ 1) <^.m _ 1 <„j (^ _ 1).
y. ABC is a spherical triangle having all its sides quad-
rants and T and U are any points on the sur&ce of the
sphere ; prove that
cos TU = cos TA cos UA + cos TB cos C^i? + cos TC cos UC.
VI. If 0 is the pole of the small circle circumscribing a
spherical triangle ABC, prove
•o*,.«c .„a -.6.C BOC
sm-* - + sm^ - — sm2 - s 2 sm ^r sm -:r cos —^ — .
2 2 2 2 2 2
VII. Find the co-efficient of «*»* in the expansion of
(1 — 2 5J cos ^ + «2)-t
in ascending powers oi z • (» < 1).
VIII. If tan 0 s ^ + tan a, prove
^ s a + jc cos2 a - }^x^ cos^ a sin 2 a — -J jc^ cos^ a coe 3 a
+ J ji:* cos* a sin 4 a + ....
tunihtvntts or scorottto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
PHYSICS.
PASS.
Examiner: W. J. Loudon, B.A.
1. If a body be moving with uniform acceleration in a
straight line, shew that
ip^here u, v are the velocities at the beginning and end of
the interval t, and 8 is the distance traversed daring that
interval.
2. Three forces act at a point : what is the condition that
thej may be in equilibrium ?
If not in equilibrium, how would you find their
resultant )
Three forces a, a\/3, 2 a act at a point. The angle
between the firet two is 60**, and the angle between the
last and the plane of the first two is 90'' : find their resultant.
3. Define centre of gravity.
Squares are described on the three sides of an isosceles
right-angled triangle : find thd centre of gravity of the plane
figure thus formed.
4. Define 8peci/ic gravity, density, pressure at a point,
and describe any instrument for measuring the pressure of
liquids.
5. Explain the p?*incii)le of the aneroid barometer,
6. How may the specific gravity of a liquid be most easily
found %
7. State the laws of expansion of gases, and explain what
is meant by the term absolute zero,
8. Describe the three modes of propagation of heat, giving
illustrations of each.
ainiiirrsltv of Eoronu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
HYDROSTATICS AND HKAT.
HONORS.
Examiner : W. J. LoUDON, B.A.
1. Define pressure at a point, and show that in any
liquid it is the same in all directions.
2. When two metals are mixed in equal volumes
they form a compound of specific gravity 9 ; when
they are mixed in equal weights, the compound has a
specific gravity 8|. Find the specific gravities of the
metals.
3. How would you determine the specific gravity of
a liquid most easily ?
In the case of substances, soluble in water or
other liquids, how would you find their specific
gravities ?
4. How may a difference in height above the earth's
surface be determined by means of the barometer or
hypsometcr ?
5. If the lineal* coeflScient of expansion of glass be
.0000085, find the capacity of a bulb at 80^ C, which
contains 131.5 grams of water at 4° C.
(i. Explain any accurate method of determining the
absolute expansion of a liquid.
If the density of mercury at 0® C is 13.59, and
^•he coefficient of expansion of mercury is .00018, find
its density at 100^ C.
[over. ]
7. A mass of ice, weighing !2.46 grains, whose tem-
perature is — 10^ C, is dropped into GO grams of water
m a calorimeter (water equivalent 4) at a temperature
of 15^ C ; when the ice is completely melted the
temperature is found to be 11.3^ C : find the latent
heat of fusion of ice.
8. State the laws of expansion of gases, and explain
what it meant by aJbaolute zero,
9. If P be the true weight of a body which is
balanced in a pair of scales by weights W : and p, <r,
be the densities of the substance weighed and of the
material composing the weights respectively; shevr
that, if 8 be the density of the air in which the
substance is weighed,
"'{^-(^-i)'}^-
9nfiifVRiUff of Sovonto#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
ELEMENTARY DYNAMICS.
HONORS.
EaxtmiTier : W. J. Loudon, B.A.
1. If a body move in a straight line with uniformly
increasing velocity shew that
s = ^ (u + v)t
-where u, v are the velocities at the beginning and end
of the interval t, and 8 is the distance traversed during
that interval.
2. (a) A ship is sailing north-east with the velocity
of 10 mil^ an hour, and to a passenger on board the
^Hnd appears to blow from the north with a velocity
of 10\/ 2 miles an hour. Find the true velocity of
the wind.
(6) ABC is a triangle, right-angled at C: prove
that, if it be placed with A uppermost, and AB vertical,
the times of falling down AB, AC will be equal ; and
if placed with AC vertical, the velocities acquired in
fialling down the same sides will be equal.
(c) Two particles P, Q start simultaneously from
A, one sliding down the plane AB at an angle a to
the horizon, and the other falling freely. Prove that
their relative vertical acceleration is g cos^ a.
3. State the principle of the triangle of forces.
(a) Two forces meet at a point: find in what
direction a third force of given magnitude must act at
the point if the resultant of the three is the greatest
possible.
[over]
1
(6) A small heavy ring A, which can slide upon
a smooth vertical circular hoop, is kept in a given
position by a string AB, B being the highest point of
the hoop : shew that the pressure between the ring
and the hoop is equal to the weight of the ring.
4. Define the terms amooih surface, oo-efunerU of
friction^ angle of friction.
(a) A block of wood, of length a and height 6, is
f)laced on an inclined plane, with its length along the
ine of greatest slope. The inclination of the plane
being gradually increased, shew that the block will
slide before toppling over, if a > fih,
(b) A uniform rod AB rests with the extremity
B against a rough wall, and is held by a string A O, of
the same length as the rod, fastened to a point 0
vertically above B. If the rod is about to slip at B,
find its inclination to the vertical and the tension of
the string, the co-efficient of friction being /i.
5. Find the centre of gravity of :
(a) A uniform triangular lamina ;
(6) A piece of uniform wire bent into the form
of a triangle.
6. Explain what is meant by a f uniculav polygon,
and shew how the force diagram may be formed.
7. State the conditions of equilibrium of any set of
forces acting in one plane.
Two small heavy rings of weights W and W
connected by a fine string slide on two wires in the
same vertical plane, making angles (a) with the horizon.
If the string makes an angle 6 with the horizon, shew
that
(IT + F') tan e =: (IT - W) cot a.
8. Explain the principle of the Balance, and state
the conditions for sensitiveness and stability.
dnfUftsUff of SorontOt
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND
MINERALOGY.
ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY.
«^a.a**^^M
Examiner : AlfrKd Baker, M.A.
1. Find the co-ordinates of the pbint which divides the
line joining the points (a^ , y^), {x^ , y^) in a given ratia
2. Obtain the equation to a straight line in the follow-
ing standard forms :
(1) X cos a -^ y sin a^s p
(2) y ss mx + b
^ ' cos 0 sin e "
3. Employ the last equation in the preceding question to
find the distance from the point (3, — 2) to the line
4x-|.5yslina direction making an angle of 30* with
tbe axis of x,
4. Find an expression for the cosine of the angle between
the lines
Ax-^By-^C^O
A'x + 5'y -I- (7' « 0
Find the equations to the lines through the point
{|K3+l),|(v/3+l)}
and making an angle of 60* with the line x + y = 3.
5. Find the equation to the tangent to the circle
«• -f y« « r
tt the pobt («', y) on it.
Prove analytically- that the normal at any point
through the centre of the circle.
[ovxb]
6. Find the equation to the normal to the ellipse
«• ^ 6' ^
at the point a;', y').
Shew that the normal biscts the angle between the
focal distanceB.
7. Obtain the equation to the tangent to the ellipse
a' ^ 6*
in the form
X COB a + y sin a m» -v^a* cos* a + 6* sin* a
Shew that the locus of the intersection of perpen-
dicular tangents is the circle
a;« + y« « a* + 6* .
8. Prove that tangents at the ends of a focal chord
intersect on the directrix.
9. Shew that the locus of the bisection of all chords
parallel to
I m
IB the diameter
Ix my
10. If (a/, y') be the co-ordinates of the extremity of anf
diameter, shew that
(-?^.H
are the co-ordinates of the extremity of its conjugate
Prove that the sum of the squares of any two semi-
conjugate diameters is constant and equal to a* +6*.
mnftifrsftff of s:ovonto«
ANNUAL EXAMIMATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR— MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS,
PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY, CHEMISTRY
AND MINERALOGY, NATURAL SCIENCE.
SECOND YEAR.— PASS.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
Wednesday, May 8th.
1. Fourteen grammes of potassium hydrate are
mixed with twenty-one grammes of nitric acid. Is
the resulting .solution neutraly alkaline or acid ? If
not neutral how much potassium hydrate or nitric acid
is required to n^uti-alise it ? [K. 39].
2. How is phosphorus obtained from bone-ash ?
Compare the properties of red phosphorus with those
of ordinary phosphorus and state how it can be proved
that these substances are allotropic modifications of
the same element.
3. Compare the common metals generally with
reference to their action upon water, hydrochloric
acid, nitric acid and sulphuric acid respectively.
4. Metallic copper, sulphuric acid, saltpetre and a
solution of ammonia are given you. Show, using
equations, how you would prepare (a) nitrous oxide
and (6) nitric oxide from these materials.
5. Tabulate the general metltoda employed for the
5 reparation of the metallic chlorides. Give equations,
lention some exceptions to the general methods and
explain how they are prepared.
6. Discuss the physical and chemical propei*ties of
the halogens and their compounds relatively to their
atomic weights.
iBitifiieriKftff of S9totito#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR— CHEMISTRY AND MINERALOGY,
PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
(SECOND PAPER)
1. Calculate the formula for a monobasic acid
having the percentage composition
Carbon 40.00 %
Hydrogen 6.6 %
Oxygen 53.4 %
and the silver salt of which contains 64.68 % of silver.
[Ag = 108].
2. Give the reactions involved in the customary
process for making Potassium Ferrocyanide. What
happens when it is treated with (a) H^SO^, (b) K,CO„
(c) Chlorine ?
3. Give the various points of agreement and dif-
ference between the Barium group of metals and their
compounds and those of the Potassium group.
4. Indicate precisely what is meant by the formula
HCl assigned to hydrogen chloride gas.
5. Give several methods by which pure Nitrogen
can be prepared. In what manner can Argon be
isolated from the atmosphere and in what respects
does it differ from Nitrogen ?
6. Write equations for the following reactions : —
(a) Potassium Bichromate with Ferrous Sulphate
in the presence of Sulphuric Acid.
[OVEB]
(6) Stannous Chloride with Potassium Perman-
ganate in the presence of Hydrochloric Acid.
(c) Sodium Phosphate with Magnesium Chloride
in ammoniacal solution.
(d) Hydrogen Sulphide with a solution of Arsen-
ious Acid.
(e) Stannous Sulphide with a solution of yellow
Ammonium Sulphide.
2lnitev0Ui? of STovonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
I. C. M. ; P. C. ; II. N. S. ; M. P.
Monday, May 13th.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
NoTB. — M. and P. candidates will omit questions 1 and 3, all others
will omit question 6.
1. How would you detect the presence of corrosive
sublimate in calomei, of arsenious oxide in flour, and
of oxalic acid in sugar ?
2. What are the disadvantages attendant on the
use of nitric acid as a solvent for an ordinary mixture
given you for analysis ? Explain the powerful solvent
action of " aquaregia."
3. Water is poured on a mixture of equal weights
of barium nitrate, common salt, silver nitrate, sulphur
and anhydrous magnesium sulphate. What salts will
be present in the filtered solution, and how would you
identify them ? What will be the nature of the insoluble
substances ? [Ba. 137, Ag. 108, Mg. 24].
4. Why is nitric acid said to be a stronger acid than
hydrogen sulphide ? How do you account for the
formation of lead sulphide when hydrogen sulphide is
added to a solution of lead nitrate ?
5. Distinguish between a characteristic test and a
delicate test, and tell the circumstances under which
you would select each.
6. Describe a method for determining the amount of
copper in a specimen of copper sulphate.
aitiflifr«ft9 tf Sorotilo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
BIOLOGY.
Eacaminer: Professor Bamsat Wright.
1. Construct a diagram showing the essential struc-
ture of vegetable and animal cells. Explain their
methods of reproduction and describe the locomotor
organs of unicellular organisms.
2. Elxplain the expression ''alternation of genera-
tions/' as applied to plants, by reference to a particular
type.
3. Give an account of the Mould-Fungi.
4. Distinguish between the classificatory expressions
Chordata and Vertebrata.
5. Describe the blood-corpuscles of the Vertebrates,
and explain their functions.
6. Classify and describe the tissues which enter into
the formation of the small intestine in man, and indi-
cate the functions which they perform.
einflif viKfts of Sovonto«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
BIOLOGY.
HONORS.
(RC.
:\ R. R.
( J. STi
R C. Jeffrey, B.A.
Examiners :-{ R. R. Bbnslet, B.A., M.B.
Stafford, B.A., Ph.D.
1. Describe the Qametophyte and Sporogonium of
a Liverwort (Pellia), and compare them with the
homologous generations of a Fern and a Gymnosperm.
2. Outline the characteristic features of the Dico-
tyledons and Monocotyledons, with special reference to
the forms studied in the laboratory.
3. Illustrate by drawings the external anatomy of
Squalus, indicating the names and uses of the various
parts.
4. Illustrate, by reference to forms studied in the
laboratory, the essential features of the Coelenterata.
5. Describe the reproductive organs of the Earth-
worm.
6. Discuss the origin of Parasitism, giving specific
examples from the diflferent great groups of animals to
illustrate your remarks.
Vinmfvnitn of Soromiu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
GKEEK.
PASS AND HONORS.
K*^..^^^^^ . i Adam Carruthers, M.A.
I.
1. Translate:
HO. Up&rov luv o 0€b<i r&v ifia^v irpoa^OerffiaTiov
Xaffmv airapya^ yaiperw, <rv t, & yvvai,
fiMV 'xpovio^ ikdwv a i^hrXtf^* oppiahitf ;
KP. ovSev y' d<f>iKov 8* eh psptp^vap* ICKXa fioc
Xe^p ri Okairiap! ix Tpoifxoviov <l>€p€i9,
rra&^v ottov^ v^v airippM cvyKpaLdrjaeraL.
HO. wtc rj^laxje rov 0€ov irpoKa/jL^dveiv
fjLavT€Vfu»lff' hf K oJnf el'irev, oVk airaiZd fie
irpi^ oIkov fj^eiv ovSe a Ik ')(jpfiaTqpl<ov*
KP. & trorvia ^olfiov fitjrep. el yap alaitu^
e\0oifjL6v, & re vwp avfifioXaui rrpoadev ^v
i^ vcuBa Tov aov, p.erairiaoi fieXriova,
BO. Sarai raS* aXKk ri^ irpoifyijTevet Oeov ;
in. ^fiek rd y e^w r&v eaw 8* aXXoi? fJteket,
oi ir\7iaiov Odaaova-t rpiwoSo^, & ^ive,
A€\ff>&v dpurrrj^ ob^ htcKriptoaev irdXo^.
Euripides, Ion.
.2 Parse xcupirto, i^i^Xrj^', hif>iKov, avyKpaOi^a-erai,
tx'cuid, iXBoiftev, fieraTriaoi, r&v ea<Oj dpiari]^,
3. Scan the first two lines, naming or describing the
metre.
4. Translate:
in. Koireir e/eatve^ <f>apfidKQi^ rip rov &€ov ;
KP. hW* ovK€T fiaOa Ao^iov, irarpo^ Se aov,
in. hX\' iyevofieada' <f}aTp6^ airovo'iav \eya,
KP. oVk ovv tot ^ada* vvV^ iyta, <rif ^ obKkr el.
m. oifK evae^ei^ ye, rafia S' evaefffj tot f^v.
KP. exreiva S* ovra iroKi^i^op Bpfiai^ ifioU,
in. ovToi aifv 07rXo49 ffXOov eh rrfp ariv ')(66v€L.
KP. ^d\ta-Ta' Kairlfiirpa^ y ^Epe^deta^ oonovi,
in. TToioiO'i iravol^ fj Trupo? irola <f>Xoyt ;
KP. ifAeWe^ oltcelv Tap! ifiov ffuf \al3(ov.
in. KaireiTa tou fieWeiv p! aireiCTeive^ (f>6^^ ;
KP. (i? p,rf ddvoLp,i 7*, ei (tv p,7) pAXKoDP TV)(pis<
Ihid.
5. Parse KhtrlpnTpa^, Tvypi^. What is the force of
€/cT€ipa in line 6 ?
FOR HONOR CANDIDATES ONLY.
6. Scan, naming the metre :
dvoSoKfOP <f>povpffp,^ exovo'ai Beatrorrfp <f>vKaa'a€T€,
i/cXekoiTT ^8?7 TOP iepop TpLiroha koX 'xpv^^rrjptop,
7. Write briefly on :
(a) The misogynism of Euripides ;
(6) His degradation of tragedy ;
(c) His dramatic defects.
II.
[Write in a separate book.]
1. Translate:
Tlept p^ep ovp &v oi irptaToi p,ov xaTijyopoi Karri-
yopovp avTff iarip iKaprj airoXoyia irpo^ vpw' trpo^
he MeXrfTOP top ay ad op re /cat fpiKoiroXip^ w (fnfai,
Kai T0V9 ixTTepov^ pLerh ravra Treipdaop^i airoXo-
yeladai,
Plato, Apology.
2. (a) &p. Explain the syntax.
(6) oi irp&TOi Karijyopoi. Explain the reference.
(c) <f>iX6'fro\iP. Write down the genitive singular.
(d) (fyrftri. Write down the rest of the present
indicative and the present infinitive.
3. Translate:
Xoipi9 Bi TTJ^ Bo^rf<:, & avhpe^, obhk Bixaiov fMi
hoKei elpcu ietaSai rov Bacaarrov ovSe ifiOfievov airo-
^iyeiv, ahyJi iiZdcKew Koi ireiOeip. ob yap iirl
TovTtp KdOrjrai 6 Buccko-Tii^^ hrl r^ KaTa')(aptfyadai
rh SiKcua, aXX' eTTt r£ Kptveiv ravra' Kai OfJtwfiOKev
ov yapieiadcu ols &v Sok^ avr^, aXKa iiKdakiv tcarii
T0V9 POfJLOV^, OVKOW ypV OVT€ 'qflU^ i0i^€iv vfia^
hrioptc€u/, ovff vp£s eui^eaOar ovhkrepoi yap &i(
fip£\p eifaefioUp, fi'fj oSv a^iovre fie, & apSpe^; ^Adrj-
paloi, roiauTa Belp 7rpo9 vfia^ TrpdrreiP, & H'V'''^
ffyovfiai Ka\a elpai /MrJTe hiKaia /M^qre oaia, oKXo^
T€ fjL€PTOi prj ^la 7rai/Tfi>9 /cat aaedeia^ (f>€vydpTa
inro MeX»7Toi; rovrovt (ra<f)m yi^p op, el irelOoi/Mi
vpta^ tcaX r£ Seurdat fiia^oi/Mrjp ofitofioKOTa^^ Oeoif^
Ap BiSdaicoifiL /jLt) fpfeladai, vpLa<i elpat, ical are^ckK
a'TToXoyovfievof; Karriyopovqp tip ifiavrov w Oeov^ ov
vofU^a>, aWa iroXXov Set ovto)^ ^X^^^' POfii^oa re
yap, & avBpe^ *\6rfpaloi, (&9 ou86i9 t&p ep,&p Kart)-
yoptop, Kal vpip ifrirpiirto xal tc2 Be^ Kplp(U irepi
ifjLOv &nri iieKKei i/Mol re api<rTa eipat Kal vfiip.
Ibid,
4. (a) 6fuofio/C€P, y^apieiaffa^, fcplpai^ elpat. Give the
principal parts and write out the mood-synopsis.
(6) /aiJtc ffyovpAi, Why is not ovre used ?
(c) <ra<f>m yhp &p. Account for the use of av
here.
{d) ^ia, ifiavTov. Decline throughout.
5. Explain the proceedings at the trial after this
peroration.
FOR HONOR CANDIDATES ONLY.
6. Give the date of Socrates' condemnation and the
technical name of this kind of suit. Who were the
judges ?
7. State your opinion of the Apology as an adequate
and effective refutation.
FOR PASS CANDIDATES ONLY.
8. Translate :
ET8. T/ 4^ ; ypa<f>rjp ae rt? yeypanrrai ;
2A. Udpv ye.
BT©. Tw ofro<? ;
[OVEK. ]
Tov opSpa* vio^ yap Ti9 fioi tpaa/erai koi ayvm^
ovofid^ovai uevTot ainov, &^ iy^fuu, MiXtirop,
ETB. OifK ii/po&, & X(i>KpaT€r aXKi, S^ rlua
ypa^v tre yeypairrai ;
'SSI, '^HvTiva ; ovK hyevvfj, ifioirfe SoKei. i/ceivo^
yap, w (fyrftrtv^ otSe rlva rpinrov ol vioi Bia^^ei-
povrai, Kal rtVe? ol hia^elpovr^ avrovf. Kai xufSv-
v€V€i <ro<f>6^ Tt9 elpai' xal rtfv ifAffv afiaOiav KariHsv
a>9 BuKJ^eipopTo^ tov^ nXiKiiina<; airrov, ipyero*
KaTrjyopf/iamv ^jlov &^ nrpo^ fjbrjripa irpo^ rifv iroXjv.
■ET0. 'AXXa fioi Xiye, ri xal Trotowra ae ^)ffai
hta^deipeof rov^ viov^ ;
Sn. ''AroTTay & Oavfidate* ifyrfal yap fie iroifjrtfp
elva^ 0€&v^ Koi m KUivois iroioxnna ueoxf;, roif^ 2*
ap')(aUnn ov uofii^ovra, iypdyp^aro tovtodv airrmv
iveKa^ a>9 <f>ff<TW»
ETO. M.avdav{a, & Xd^Kpare^* oti Sff ait to
haifioviov <^9 (ravr^ etcdo'Tore yiyvendai* cd9 o5v
Katvorofioinno^ aov frepl t^ Beta, yeypairra^ ravTffp
rifv ypa^Vy Koi cb9 ZiafidKAv Sij Ip^erat ek to
hiKoarripioVy 6t£a>9 Sri eifBid/SoXa rh roiavra irp^
T0V9 7roXXov9.
drf€vvri^y Tnean.
Ka^vorofiewj Toake innovations.
evhuiBoXo^, easy to misrepresent.
L
WLnUttvuitp of 2roronto.
ANXUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
GREEK.
HONORS.
AW«n.™:{»-«-Sc™»,M.^
I.
THUCYDIDE8, I.
1. Translate carefully) :
(a) OoXXa Si xal aWa k'Xfo €9 iXiriha rov irepiiae-
a0ai, fjv iOiXrjre apyriv re fifj iirvKraadai afia TroXe-
fLOVVT&; KoX Kii/hvvov^ abdaipkrov^ /mtj irpotrrideaOac
fjLoXKov yap 7r€<f)6l3rffuu ra^ otKciaf; rjfjL&v auapria^
^ Ta9 T&v ivamUdv Stavoia^. aW* ixetva fiii/ Kai iv
oKKxp yJj^fp afia T0I9 epyoi^ SfjKmd'qa-eTar vvv Si
ro&Toi^ awoKDivafievoL airoTrifiy^ajAev, Meyapia^ fiev
OTi idaofiev arfopa koX Xifiiai ypf)a0ai, ffv Koi Aatce-
Saifwvioi ^€vr)\aa'ia^ fj,}) iroicoat firfTC fip,&v fJi,i]T€
r&v ^fieripaov ^vfifuxyuiv — oCt€ yap i/cetpo KcoXvit iv
ral^ awovSaU oire roSe — tA? Si nroXeif; ore avrovo-
fiov^ d4>V^ofi€v, el Kal avropofJMv^ eyoin€<; iaireiad-
ficda /cat OTov nhKeivot ral^ avr&v airoScixn iroXetTi
fjLTf a'<f>ia'i ToU AafceSaifiovioi^; iTrnrfScia)^ ainovo-
fjb€UT0ai^ aXX* ainoh ifcdaroif; w fiovXovrar SUa^
Si OTi idekofiep Sovvat xaia Ta9 ^vvBijKa^, TroXe fiov
Se obtc ap^fiev, apypfiivov^ Se afivvovfieda,
(6) Til' ?€ *A0r)vaLa>p €tv)(€ yap trpea^eia ir pore pop
ip T§ AcuceSaifiopi irept aXXoav irapovaaj [xal] ci)<?
^{r0ovro rSip \6y<Dp, eSo^ep avroi^ irapiTqria 69 tov9
AaKeBaifjLOviov^ elvai, r&v fiev eyKXrjfidnov iripi
firjSev aTroXoyrjaofiivov^i &v ai ttoX^i? evcKokow,
BrfKayaai Se Trepl rov 7ravTo<; w ov Ta;^€ffl9 avroi^
ffovkei/riov €tff, dXX.' iv irXeiovi CKeirriop. ical afJM
Tr)v (r<f>€T€pav iroKiv i0ov\ovTO <rtjfirjvai, 00*17 ^^V
Bvvafiiv» Kai irrrofxinjertv iroir'iaaa'Oav rot? re Trpetrfiv'
T€poi^ &v yBeaav Kai roh vetoripoif; i^ijyrjcriv &v
airetpot fj<TaVj vofii^oine^ fiaXKov &p avrov^ €k t&v
\6y(ov 7rp09 to rjav^d^eiv TpOTriadai ^ T/009 to
TToXefieLv,
2, Comment on the historical and literary signifi-
cance of (a) ap'x^v fiff hrucrSurdat ... StyXw^iyo-era* ; how
do you understand the last line here ? {h\yC ixeiva
flip ... Srj\ci)0>]<reTai,)
Write brief historical notes on Meyapiaf; ... xpv-
a-0at : A^axeBatfiovtoL . . . 7ro(a>o-( : orav fcaKclvot . . . pov-
Xoinai : ZUa^ . . . ^wdrjKa^.
3. Write grammatical notes on :
(a) ^evrjkaaia^ firj iroi&tn : ovre ixelvo Ka>\v€t ovre
ToSe : auToh ixdaroi^ : irokifiov ovk ap^ofiev apxop^vo'tn
Be.
(b) tS)v Si *A0r)vaia)v eru^^e yap , . . [fcai] . . . : Trapirrf-
Tea : iripv : airoXoyrjaofjiePOU^ : &v at 7r6X€t9 ivexaXow :
Tpaireadai-
II.
[Write in a separate book.]
ARISTOPHANES AND SOPHOCLES.
Translate :
(a) ET. alfiol, iroXK^ Kpeirrov^ ovrot rod Ato9 ^/mp
I3a<n\€v€iv.
HE. ov yap ttoWq) ;
Kai TTpma fiev oiyi vew VM^^
oucoBofiew Scl Xidipov^ avro'k,
obSi 0upa>aav y^pvaaiai 0vpat<;,
ttW inro 0dfAPOiM Kai TrpipiSiot<;
olKi]<rovaip. 70*9 8' ai aefLpol^
r&p 6ppL0ajp SipBpop i\da<;
6 i/66>9 eaTar kovk ek ^€\<l>ov^
ovB^ ek ''Afifitop* ik06pT€^ eKei
0v(rofjL€p, dX)C ip ralavp KOfidpoc^
fcal roh kotuhks aravre^ tyovre^
KpiOd^, irvpov^, ev^ofieS* avrok
avareivome^ rw X^^P o,yad&v
BiSovai Ti fiipo^' Kat ravff fifiiv
irapaxpfifi earai
TTvpov^ okiyov^ TrpofioKovaiv,
XO. & ^iXrar ifjuoi itoXv 7rp€afiirt&v ef i^Plarov
fierafriTrrtov,
oVk €otu/ Sirto^ &v eyci tto^ €Ka>v t^9 <i^9
(6) TToXXa Srf KoL xaivci teal dav-
fidoT hreirrofieada^ KaX
Bewa irparffULT etSo/MCV.
€(7Ti yap SivBpov 7r€<f>vK0^
i/cTOTTOP Tt, KapSia^ a-
TTfaTepw, KXemvvfjLOf;,
Xpi^ertfjLOP /i€v ovSev, a\-
Xa)9 Be BeiXov Kal fiiya,
TOVTO TOV fJL€V ^p09 061
fiXaardvev kcu (rvKOffHurret,
TOV Be yeifi&vo^ ttoKip tA?
otnriBa^ <f>v\\oppo€t,
€OT& 5* ai x^P^ 'rrpo^ avr^
Tto aKOifp iroppfo t«9 €v
rfj \{r)(yvip iprffiia,
€p0a TOW ffpwaip dpOpco-
TTOi ^vpapttrraxri teal ^vv-
eiai, TrXrjp rrj^ ktnrepa^,
njpucavra S* ovkct fjv
da<f)a\ef: ^vpTvy^opeip.
el yap iprv^pv Tt9 fjpfp
r&p 0poT&p pvKTdjp 'OpiaTfj,
7V/ii/09 ^P TfKriyeU inr avrov
irapra ThiriBe^ia.
1. Parse irpoffaXovaw and a<l>€ifMrjp in (a), and rt and
icTripa^in (b).
2. Write a brief note on each of the proper names
in (6).
3. What was the origin of Greek comedy ?
4. Scan in (a) the verses from BiBopai to /jLeraTrlirToyp,
naming the metre.
[OVSR.]
Translate :
(a) €<f>pi^' eponTi, irepL'xapi)^ S ap€7rrdfiav, la) /o) Tl^v Tlav,
& nil/ Hal/ aXiirXaytCTe KvWavia^ yiovoicTinrov
irerpala^ airo Setpdho^; (f>dv7j0\ & Oemu yopoiro^ &va^,
a7ra>9 fiov ^vaia Kvaxri op^rjfiar avroSai) ^uvSa»
Idylrt)^.
vvv yap iwol fAekei ')(op€v<rai,
*lKa^uov o virep TreXayitov fjbo\a>v ava^ 'AttoWwp 6
Aa\t09 evyvo^aTo^
ifiol ^upeCfj 8ia Tramo^ ev^ptov,
eXvaev alvov ayp^ oltt ofipArtov ^Aptf^. uu Uu. vvv a£,
vwy & Zev, irdpa \€vk6v ebdfiepov TreKda-ax <f>do^
6oav inKvoKtav ve&v, or Ala^ Xadtrrovo^ 'nraXu/,
dew 3* av wdvOura 0itrp,L i^vva* ebvofjuia aifimv
fjLeyiaTq,
irdvO* 6 fji€ya<; 'xpovos fiapaiver
KouBev avauSarov ifMriaaifi av, eini 7* e^ aiXirrtov
A?a9 fJL€Tavey»(!><T0r}
Ovfiov T ^ArpeiSai^ fieyaXcDV re v€ik€(ov.
(6) ay\ etir air apx^ ai0c<:, ?} av <f>rf^ ayeu/
Tov avhp^ ^A'vaiok Sevpo avfifJM')^oi/ \a0mv ;
ovK avTo^ i^errXevaev w avrov Kpar&v ;
TTov aif arparrfyeU roiiSe ; ttov Bi aoi \e&v
e^eoT uvdaaeiv &v oS' rjyay' olxoOev ;
^'rrdpTff<; dt/dao'top I^Xde^t ov^ fjpAv Kpar&v,
1. What Is the technical name for (a), and why does
the chorus speak in this way here ?
2. How is the gods* treatment of Ajax justified ?
3. What other part does the speaker of the lines in
(b) take, and by what device was it made possible for
him to take both parts ?
Ifttiftierfitiis of SToronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
GREKK AND LATIN GRAMMAR
HONORS.
Examineva • { ^' ^^ Robertson, B.A.
£.xaminei8 . | q ^. Johnston, B. A., Ph.D.
I.
1. Give the syntax of (a) general conditional sen-
tences in Greek ; (6) the verbal in -rko^ ; (c) the abso-
lute construction ; {d) " before " and " until " clauses ;
(«) av with the indicative.
2. Distinguish the following forms : a<f>€lvaty aweluai,
avUvat, aipievai ; a<f>rjKa^, d<f>€lKw; ; Trapaarfj^ irapea-TTj^
irapUrTTj ; KaOioTaaav, Ka6L<na(Tav, fcadccraaap, Kara-
araaav, tcarcurrrjcravj KariaTtfcav.
3. Write out the mood-synopsis of the following :
the present of Swafuit and Bet ; the aorist active of
'^irpfWTKto, Trpofiaipfo and 'irap€')(fD \ the future middle
of iropi^to.
4. Point out what is noteworthy or peculiar in the
syntax of the underlined words :
(a) IloreiBaiaTai Be frifiyjravre^ fiiv koL irap WOrf-
vcarrepi^eiv firjSev,
(6) Kalroi el Tjaav avSpe^y &(nrep (jiatriv, ayaOoi, 6a'{p
iiKfiTtTOTepoi ijaav roh TreXa?, Tocry 8^ 4>avepfOTepav
el^v abroU Tr}v aperfjv SLSovct koX he')(opL€Vois ^iu
Bucaui Sena/vvai,
(c) eS la-fjL€P fir) &p fjixaov vfid^i XvTrrjpov^i yevofiivov^
Toi^ avfifid'xoiff.
(d) ovTM KaTafj>pov€l<; rcovSe koL otei avTovf; aireipov^
ypafifidroiv elvai, &fTTe ovk elSivai ori, ie.T.\.
(e) el fxev oiv ravra Xiycov Sta(f>0€ip(t) tou? p€ou^,
ravT &v ecrj fiXaBepd, ... 7r/309 raina a<l>i€T€ 17 fjiij
d(f>L€T€» w ifJLOv OVK UP 7roLi]aopTo<; aWa^ ov8* el
fiiWco TToWaKi^ T€0pdpac,
(/) el 8' ovKer eart, tIpi rpoirfp Bi€(f>ddprj ;
(g) TCL 8' aWa TrdpTa t(op eXevdepcop
ovS€l<: KaKicjp 8oDXo9i ocTTt? iadXo^ yj.
(h) airap fjLa0i]a€L Tovpyop, (i? kolpiopo^ top.
Keipo^ yap aKpa^ pvKTOf:, ^plx eairepoi
{i) dy\ elir an ap;^^9 aiOi^;, ?} av <^^9 ayeip
TOP dpSp^ 'A^aiot? Sevpo j(rvfifjLa)(OP Xa^eop ;
(j) dreinofieO^ €k rtf^ Trarpiho^ dfjL<f>olp roip ttoBoIv,
avTrjp fiep ov fAiaovPT €K€ipr)P rrjp ttoXip
TO lit) ov fAcydXrjp elpai <f>va€i Kibhaifiopa,
(Jc) tovtI Xa/3<op fiov ro aKidSeiop inripe'x^e
apoyOep, w &p fii) jm opcaaip 01 deoi.
II.
[Write in a separate book.]
1. Express in Latin : three-fifths, ninety-eighth,
twenty-one each, six million ; a man of very noble
birth and of a keen mind.
2. Of orior write the 3rd sing. pres. ind., and impf .
subj., the pres. imperat., and all the infinitives.
3. Illustrate the syntactical usage with oportet^
7iec€88e est, opus est, interest.
4. Translate :
(a) He hoped, he said, he would soon pardon him.
(6) It is as clear as day that, had . not your evil
designs been discovered, the consuls and all the loyal
citizens would have been murdered.
5. Explain the syntax of the italicized words in the
f olloi^ing, and state the more usual construction where
this is possible :
(a) Ridete quidquid est domi cachinnorum,
(6) Luco volabant.
(c) [Carmina] quae scribuntur aquae potoribus,
(d) Bellum adversus Germanos supererat, abol-
endae inagis infainiae ob amissum exercitum. ...
Cur non venisset augendia militum stipendiis ?
(c) O funde noster seu Sabine seu Tiburs —
Nam te esse Tiburtem autumant quibus non est
Cordi Catullum laedere.
(/) Nee dubium erat quin terga daturi hostes
(g) Mox vagi per vias olvios habxiere legatos.
(h) Laevo suspensi loculos lacerto.
(i) Quo mihi fortunam, si non conceditur uti ?
(j) Ilium indignanti s\mi\em... A spiceres, pontem
a'u^deret quia vellere Cocles.
(k) Opposuerunt abeunti arma, minitantes ni
regrederetur ; at ille feiTum deferebat in pectus, ni
dextram vi adtinuisaent Quidara /erirc^ hortabantur,
et miles obtulit gladium, addito dcutioi'em esse.
(I) Saepe tibi studioso animo...requirens
Carmina uti possem mittere Battiadae
Qui te lenirem nobis.
(vi) Equites procul visi [sunt] non sine terrore
ab dubiis, quinam essent
i
i!9nfii(r0ft9 of ^Toronto
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
GHHEK AND ROMAN HISTORY.
HONORS.
ExamiTier: Percy J. Robinson, B.A.
Note. — Candidates will write on four questions in A, and the
eij$hth and any other three questions in B, and will specify In
-v^'bat department they are seeking Honors.
A.
1. Show how far the polity and training ascribed to
Lycurgus affected the growth and decline of Sparta.
2. What were the evils that Solon undertook to
alleviate ? How did he provide political and social
relief? Comment upon the statement: "He had
^-rested the earth from religion to give it to labor."
3. Characterize the rule of the Peisistratids and
show how tyranny at Athens was, as elsewhere in
Grtfcce, a stepping-stone from oligarchy to democracy,
4. Point out in what ways the reforms of Cleis-
thenes gave birth to the Athenian Democracy.
Describe the institution of ostracism. Show its neces-
sity and point out any modern parallel procedure.
o. " If Athens had been capable of the task, the
interests of civilisation would have been really for-
warded by the subjection of the Greek communities to
the rule of Athens." Explain and discuss.
6. How did democracy succeed in Athens as a
practical instrument of administration and govern-
ment ?
7. Describe some of the chief differences between
the civilisation of Greece in the fifth century B.C. and
modern western civilisation.
[OVBRl
B,
8. Give an outline (after Coulanges) of primitive
Roman religious belief, and show briefly how this
belief afieeted : (a) the possession of land; (b). inherit-
ance ; (c) adoption ; (d) patriotism and exile.
9. Describe the position of the king in the original
constitution of Rome, showing what were his functions
and privileges, and what analogy there was between
the regal power in the state and that of the pcUer
familias in the family.
10. What was the probable object of the Servian
reforms ? Outline the reforms enacted and show what
was their effect politically and socially.
11. Show what were the main steps by which dur-
ing the period under consideration the plebs obtained
legal, social and political equality with the patricians.
12. What was the result of the passing cf the Licin-
ian Rogations, as regards the old patrician aristocracy,
the power of the Senate, and the land question ?
13. Write a note upon the Tribunate, explaining its
powers, and showing why it failed to fulfil its purpose,
and what use was made of the office in the period sub-
sequent to the Licinian Rogations.
14. Explain the following offices, showing when
and for what purpose they were first instituted :
Quaestors, Dictator, Military Tribunes, Censors, Prae-
tor, Curule iEdiles.
^nl^tvma 9t WPV9m9i
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1801.
SECOND YEAB.
UTIN.
Ji^xamiTiers . | j f^j^^heb, M.A., LL.D.
I.
A.
Tran<%late the following passage tp averaarentur :
Ibi Verginius maiorem, quam reliquerat fn urbe,
motum excivit. Nam prseterquam quod agmine
prope quadringentorum hominum veniens, qui ab
urbe indignitate rei accenui comites ei se dederant,
conspectus est, strictum etiam telum respersusque
ipse cruore iota in se castra convertit. Et togee
multifariam in castris vis«e maioris aliquanto,
quam erat, speciem urbanse multitudinis fecerant.
QaoBTentibvAi, quid rei esset, flens diu vocem non
misit ; tandem, ut iam ex trepidatione concur-
rentium turba constitit ae silentium fuit, ordine
cuncta, ut gesta erant, exposuit. Supinas deinde
tendens manus, commilitones appellans orabat, ne,
quod scelus App. Claudii esset, sibi attribuerent
neu se ut parrieidam liberum aversarentur.
Nee se superstitem filiae futurum fuisse, nisi spem
ulciscendaB mortis eius in auxilio commilitonum
habuisset. Ali^iia calamitate documentum datum
illis cavendsB similis iniuriae. Ceteri sibi a^ liberis
suis consulerent.
1. Give the principal parts of the verbs to which
the italicised forms belong.
2. Give the rule for the case of agmine, aliquanto,
qucerentibns, libemmj and the u^e of neu. Give the
derivation of aliena and documentum.
3. Translate literally from v,t to constitit and turn
into direct narration from Nee to constderent
B.
Translate into Latin :
(a) Do not forget that the elections will soon
be here.
(6) I am going to ask you to vote for none but
men of good ability.
(c) Has he told you the reason why the question
was asked ?
(d) Being heartily ashamed of himself, he never
afterwards returned ta this city.
(e) He came there to tell them that they ought
to obey the law.
(/) The narrative, as given by Livy, will not
afford the reader much gratification ; on the contrary
it cannot fail to affect him with the liveliest astonish-
ment at the depravity of Appius and the cruelty of
the re'st of the magistrates. In spite of the tears of
her friends, in spite of the entreaties of the multitude,
the unhappy Verginia was consigned by the judg-
ment of the decemvir to a life of infamous slavery
from which there seemed no possibility of escape
except by death.
II.
(Write in a separate book).
Translate :
(a) Quare refectus maximas tibi grates
Ago, meum quod non es uita peccatum.
Nee deprecor jam, si nefaria scripta
Sesti recepso, quin gravedinem et tussim
Non mi, sed ipsi Sestio ferat frigus,
Qui tum vocat me cum malum librum legi.
(6) Certe ego te in medio versantem turbine leti
Eripui et potiua germanum amittere crevi,
Quam tibi fallaci supremo in tempore deessem.
Pro quo dilaceranda feris dabor alitibusque
Praeda, neque injecta tumulabor mortaa terra.
(c) Hoc misso in Syriam requierant omnibus aures :
Audibant eadem haec leniter et leviter,
Nee sibi postilla metuebant talia verba.
Cum subito affertur nuntius horiibilis,
lonios fiuctus, postquam illic Arrius isset,
Jam non lonips esse, sed Hionios.
1. Scan the first two verses of each extract, naming
the metre.
2. Write explanatory notes on frigns in (a) and
nunti/its horrioilis in (c), showing in each case their
connection in meaning with the theme of the poems
to which they belong*
3. Parse receTpao, deessem and iaaet, and write an
explanatory note on gennanum amittere.
4. Translate at sight :
DEATH OF BRUTUS.
Postquam in agrum Romanum ventum est,
obviam hosti consules eunt. Valerius quadrato
agmine peditem ducit ; Brutus ad explorandum
cum equitatu antecessit Eodem modo primus
eques hostium agminis fuit ; prseerat Arruns Tar-
quinius, filius regis; rex ipse cum legionibus
sequebatur. Arruns ubi ex lictoribus procul,
consulem esse, deinde iam propius ac certius facie
quoque Bmtum cognovit, inflammatus ira " Ille
est vir " inquit, '' qui nos extorres expulit patria.
Ipse en ille nostris decoratus insignibus magnifice
incedit. Di regum ultores, adeste/' Concitat
calcaribus equum atque in ipsura infestus con-
sulem dirigit. Sensit in se iri Brutus ; decorum
erat turn ipsis capessere pugnam ducibub ; avide
itaque se certamini offert ; adeoque infesds animis
coQCurrerunt, neuter, dum hostem vulneraret, sui
protegendi corporis memor, ut contrario ictu per
parmam nterque transtixus, duabns hserentes has-
tis moribundi ex equis lapsi sint.
Slnftier0ft» ot CTovotito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAB.
LATIN.
HONORS.
E, . f A. J. Bell, M.A , PhJ).
Examx'nevs : | j f^^etCher. M.A., LL.D.
I.
HORACE AND CATULLUS.
•
1. Translate :
Forte per angustam tenuis volpecula rimam
Repserat in cumeram frumenti, pastaque rursus
Ire foras pleno tendebat corpore frustra ;
Cui mustela procul " Si vis " ait, " effugere istinc,
Macra cavutn repetes artum, quern macra subisti."
Hac ego si compellor imagine, cuncta resigno.
Horace, Epistles, I.
Write notes on the derivation and meaning of
rimam, mustela and resigno, and notice any reasons
for preferring the reading nitedula to volpec^da.
2. Translate:
Ut matrona meretrici dispar erit atque
Discolor, infido scurrae distabit amicus
Est huic diversum vitio vitium prope majus,
Asperitas agrestis et inconcinna gravisque,
Quae se commendat toqaa cute, dentibus atris,
- Dam volt libertas dici mera veraque virtus.
Virtus est medium vitiorum et utrimque reductum.
Ibid,, I.
Write explanatoiy notes on discolor and tonsa
cute, and describe fully the ethical theory here set
forth, illustrating by examples.
3. Translate :
Si, quia Oraioram sunt antiquissima quaeque
Scripta vel optima, Bomani pensantur eadem
Scriptores trutina, non est quod multa loquamur :
Nil intra est oleam, nil extra est in nuce duri ;
Venimus ad summum fortunae ; pingimus atque
Psallimus et luctamur Achivis doctius unctis.
Ibid., II.
Write a note on the syntax in Achivis doctius.
Show how the illustrations used here by Horace apply
to his theme. To whom is this epistle addrassed, and
under what circumstances was it composed ?
4. Translate :
Hie et in Acci
Nobilibus trimetris apparet rarus, et Enni
In scaenam missos cum magno pondere versus
Aut operae celeris nimium curaque carentis
Aut ignoratae premit artis crimine turpi.
Ibid,, Are Poetica.
Explain the meanijig, giving in full the subject
of premit Give Horace's reason for giving the name
trimetra to Accius' verses, and compare this name with
that ordinarily given them by the Romans.
5. Write explanatory notes on the following passages
with special reference to the words italicised in each :
(a) Ad summam : sapiens uno minor est Jove, dives,
Liber, honoratus, pulcher, rex denique regum ;
Praecipue aanus, nisi cum pituita molesta est.
(6) Vivere naturae si convenienter oportet,
Ponendaeque domo quaerenda est area primum,
Novistine locum potiorem rure beato ?
(c) Cum pateris sapiens emendatusque vocari,
Respondesne tuo, die sodes, nomine ?
(d) Caedimus et totidem plagis consumimus hostem,
Lento Samnites ad lumina prima duello.
(e) Scriptor hon,oratum, si forte reponis Achillem,
Impiger, ii-acundus, inexorabilis, acer,
lura negat sibi nata, nihil non arrogat armis.
6. " As there is nothing on which Horace more insists
than the necessity of consistency in conduct and opinion,
it appears, at first sight, difficult to understand his
apparent adherence to irreconcilable philosophies/'
Explain what is meant, and show how this apparent
inconsistency becomes intelligible, comparing him with
any Roman philosophical writer in this respect.
7. Translate:
Di magni, horiibilem et sacrum libellum,
Quern tu scilicet ad tuum Catullum
Misti, continuo ut die periret,
Satumalibus, optimo dierum.
Non, non hoc tibi, salse, sic abibit :
Nam, si luxerit, ad librariorum
Curram scrinia ; Caesios, Aquinos,
Suffenum, omnia colligam venena,
Ac te his suppliciis remunerabor.
Vos hinc interea (valete) abite
lUuc unde malum pedem attulistis,
Saecli incommoda, pessimi poetae.
Catullus, XIV.
Scan the first verse. Write notes on the form of
mi«H, the use of the plural in Satumalibvs, the mean-
ing of 81 in ai luxeHt, and of illuc in abite illuc,
8, Translate:
Sic funesta domus ingressus tecta patema
Morte ferox Theseus, qualem Minoidi luctum
Obtulerat mente immemori talem ipse recepit.
Quae turn prospectans cedentem maesta carinam
Multiplices animo volvebat saucia curas.
iMd, LXIV.
Write a note on the position and syntax of mente
immem/nn. Describe the structure of this poem, and
show how far the episode, from which this extract is
taken, has any theme or motive in common with the
original subject of the poem.
9. Translate :
Si qua recordanti benefacta priora voluptas
Est homini, cum se cogitat ease pium,
Nee sanctam violasse fidem nee foedere in uUo
Divum ad fallendos numine abusum homines,
Multa parata manent in longa aetate, Catulle,
Ex hoc ingrato gaudia amore tibi.
Ibid., LXXVI.
Ex hoc amove. Write a sketch of the connection
to which Catullus here refers, and show how far his
[over]
statement seems to be justified by the facts. Scan the
third and fourth verses of the extract.
II.
{Write in a separate booL)
VIRGIL.
Translate :
(a) Quanta per Idaeos saevis effusa Mycenis
Tempestas ierit campos, quibus actus uterque
Europae atque Asiae fatis concurrent orbis,
Audiit, et si quern tellus extrema refuse
Subinovet Oceano, et si quem extenta plagarum
Quattuor in medio dirimit plaga Solis iniquL
Diluvio ex illo tot vasta per aequora vecti
Dis sedem exiguam patriis litusque rogamus
Innocuum, et cunctis undamque aurainque pa-
tentem.
(b) In summo custos Tarpeiae Manlius arcis
Stabat pro templo et Capitolia celsa tenebat,
Romuleoque recena horrebat regia culmo.
AU^ue hie auratis volitans argenteus anser
Porticibus Gallos in limine adesse canebat ;
Qalli per dumos aderant, arcemque tenebant,
Defensi tenebris et dono noctis opacae :
Aurea caesaries oilis, atque aurea vestis ;
Virgatis lucent sagulis ; turn lactea coUa
Auro innectuntur ; duo quisque Alpina coruscant
Oaesa manu, scutis protect! coipora longis.
(c) Aetheria turn forte plaga crinitus Apollo
Desuper Ausonias acies urbemque videbat,
Nabe sedens, atque his victorem adfatur lulum :
' Macte nova virtute, puer: sic itur ad astra,
Dis genite et geniture deos. lure omnia bella
Gente sub Assaraci fato ventura resident,
Nee te Troia capit.'
1. Scan the first three lines in (a).
2. Write notes on Idaeos, Mycenis, Tarpeiae, Macte'
Assaraci.
3. What is the special object and propriety of the
episode of " the Shield " ?
t
einfiieKfifts fit ^pfronta*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
LATIN.
HONORS.
„ . f W. S. MiLNER, M.A.
Examvners : | ^ j -g^^^^ j^;^ p^ j^
LIVY.
1. Translate:
(a) Contentio, consulesne an tribuni militum crea-
rentnr, in interregno rem dies complures tenuit.
interrex ac senatus consalnm comitia, tribuni
plebis et plebs tribunorum militum ut habeantur
tendunt. vicerunt patres, quia et plebs, patriciis
seu hunc seu ilium delatura honorem, frustra cer-
tare supersedit, et principes plebis ea comitia
malebant, quibus non haberetur ratio sua, quam
quibus ut indigni praeterirentur.
(b) Alii purgare plebem, culpam in patres vertere :
eorum ambitione artibusque fieri, ut obsaeptum
plebi sit ad honorem iter ; si plebi respirare ab
. eorum mlxtis precibus minisque liceat, memorem
earn suorum inituram suffragia esse et parto aux-
ilio imperium quoque adscituram. placet toUendae
ambitionis causa tribunos legem promulgare, ne
cui album in vestimentum addere petitionis causa
licerct.
(c) Romani, ex arce plenam hostium urbem cer-
nentes vagosque per vias omnes cursus^ cum alia
atque alia parte nova aliqua clades oreretur, non
mentibus solum consipere, sed ne auribus quidem
atque oculis satin constare poterant. quocumque
clamor hostium, mulierum puerorumque ploratus,
sonitus fiammae et fragor ruentium tectorum
avertisset, paventea ad omnia animos oraque et
oculos flectebant, velut ad spectaculura a fortima
positi occidentis patriae, nee ullius rerum suamm
relicti praeterquam corporum vindices, tanto ante
alios miserandi magis, qui umquam obsessi sunt,
quod interclusi a patria obsidebantur, omnia sua
cernentes in hostium potestate.
2. Comment on the following extracts without trans-
lating :
(a) Mentio illata ab senatu est rem operosam ac
minime consularem suo proprio magistratu egere, cui
scribarum ministerium custodiaeque tabularum cura,
cui arbitrium formulae censendi subiceretur.
(&) Tribuni plebi assiduis contentionibus prohibendo
consularia comitia, cum res prope ad interregnum
adducta esset, evicere tandem, ut tribuni militum
consulari potestate crearentur.
(o) Aliquarum navium concursum in mains, ut fit>
celebrantes navalis victoriae vanum titulum appetivere.
(d) Pronuntiaverunt ex collegii sententia C. Valerio
consuli se. damnum aliamque coercitionem adversus
intercessionem collegae dilectus causa detractantibus
militiam inhibenti, auxilio futuros esse.
(e) Si tribunicio auxilio repelli nequeat, aliud telum
patres inventuros esse, consulesque increpabat, quod
fide publica decipi tribunos eos taciti tulissent, qui
senatus auctoritatem secuti essent.
TACITUS.
1. Translate :
(a) Noctem minacem et in scelus erupturam fors
lenivit : nam luna claro repente caelo visa lan-
guescere. id miles rationis ignarus omen prae-
sentium accepit, suis laboribus defectionem sideris
adsimulans, prospereque cessura qua pergerent, si
f uigor et claritudo deae redderetur. igitur aeris
sono, tabarum comuumque concentu strepere -
proat splendidior obscuriorve, laetari aut maerere ;
et postquam ortae nubes offecere visui creditum-
que conditam tenebris, ut sunt mobiles ad super-
stitionem perculsae semel mentes, sibi aetemum
labx)rem portendi, sua facinora aversari deos
IfliKientantur. utendum inclinatione ea Caesar et
quae casus obtulerat in sapientiam vertenda ratus
circumiri tentoria iubet ; accitur centurio Clemens
et si alii bonis artibus grati in vulgus. hi vigiliis,
stationibus, custodiis portarum se inserunt, spem
offerunt, metum intendant.
(b) Illi sanguine suo et lubrieo paludum lapsantes
excussis rectoribus disicere obvios, proterere
iacentes. plurimus circa aquilas labor, quae
. neque fern adversnm ingruentia tela neque figi
limosa humo poterant. Caecina dum sustentat
aciem, suffosso equo delapsus circumveniebatur, ni
prima legio sese opposuisset. iuvit hostium avi-
ditas, omissa caede praedam sectantium ; enisaeque
legiones vesperascente die in aperta et solida.
neque is miseriarum finis, struendum vallum,
petendus agger, amissa magna ex parte per quae
egeritur humus aut exciditur caespes ; non tentoria
manipulis, non fomenta sauciis; infectos caeno
aut cmore cibos dividentes funestas tenebras et
tot hominum milibus unum iam reliquum diem
lamentabantur.
2. Write notes on the syntax otproapere ceaawra qua
pergerenty postquam ortae nubes offecere visui, and
drcumvemebatur, ni prima legio opposuisset,
3. Notice any peculiarities of Tacitus' style that are
illustrated in these extracts, and show the effect at
which he aims in using them.
4. Show how the changes in the constitution and
government of the Roman state under the early empe-
rors tended to detract from the dignity and interest of
history, and how they tended to give it fresh variety
and interest.
5. Write notes on peculiarities in the syntax or use
of words in the following :
[oyer.]
(a,) Multas illic utrimque lacrimas et signa spem-
que ex eo fore ut i\ivenis penatibus avi reddereter:
quod Maximum uxori Marciae aperuisse, illam Liviae.
(6) Postremo eo furoris venere, ut tres legiones
misoere in unam agitaverint.
(c) Responde, Blaese, ubi cadaver abieceris : ne
hostes quidem sepultura invident.
(d) Feminas illustres .... pergere ad Treviros
externae fidei.
(e) Quod gnarum duci incessitque itineri et
proelio.
(/) Permotus his quantoque incautius efTerverat,
paenitentia patiens tulit absolvi reum criminibus
maiestatis.
WkUltttVUHS Of ffOtONtO^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
LATIN PROSE.
HONORS.
Examiifier : G. W. Johnston. Ph.D.
The principal citizens, who, till that fatal moment,
had confided in the protection of their sovereign, threw
themselves at his feet. They conjured him not to
abandon, or, at least, not to deliver, a faithful colony to
the rage of a barbarian tyrant, exasperated by the
three successive defeats which he had experienced
ander the walls of Nisibis. They still possessed arms
and courage to repel the invaders of their country ; they
requested only the permission of using them in their
own defence ; and, as soon as they had asserted their
independence, they should implore the favour of being
again admitted into the rank of his subjects. Their
arguments, their eloquence, their tears were ineffectual.
Jovian, who in a few weeks had assumed the habits of
a prince, was displeased with freedom and offended
with truth ; and as he reasonably supposed that the
discontent of the people might incline them to submit
to the Persian Government, he published an edict,
under pain of death, that they should leave the city
within the term of three davs. Ammianus has deline-
ated in lively colours the scene of universal despair
which followed. The highw.iys were crowded with a
trembling multitude ; the distinctions of rank and sex
and age were lost in the general calamity. Every one
strove to bear away some fragment from the wreck of
his fortunes; and as they could not command the
immediate service of an adequate number of horses or
wagons, they were obliged to leave behind them the
greatest part of their valuable effects.
Gibbon, Roman Ernpire,
atiftierttUfi of Q:orotito«
ANNUAL EXAMIMATIONS ; 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ENGLISH.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner : W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
1. Describe the special characteristics of each of the
three idylls prescribed.
2. Explain, within a page and a half of MS., the
symbolism of the Holy Grail.
3. Show the character and actions of Arthur as
revealed in each of the three idylls.
4. State, as fully as you can, what is meant by an
idyll, and show how the term is applicable to the
poems prescribed.
5. Explain fully what is italicised in the following :
(a) That puj^ed the swaying branches into smoke,
(b) Fled like a glittering rivulet to the tarn
And down the shingly scav/r he plunged.
(c) When the strong neighings of the wild White
Horse
Set every gilded parapet shuddering.
{cl) His battle-ivrithen arms.
(e) The sallow-rifted glooms of evening.
(/) Taliessin is our fullest throat of song,
(g) Thro' the gap glimmer'd the streaming scud.
i^
BtittietrsUs of CTotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND TEAK
ENGLISH.
HONORS.
Examitier : D. R. Keys, M.A.
1. How did the life of Chaucer prepare him for the
writing of the Prologue ? Give particulars.
2. Show the importance of Chaucer's work in the
development of English versification.
3. Explain the distinction between wit and humor
as you understand the words by references to examples
from the prescribed selections from Chaucer.
4. Refer the following quotations to their proper
connexion, and explain words in italics :
(a) He ooude aonges make and wel endite
I Juste and eek daunce and wel purtreye and write,
So Jioote he lovede that by vyghUriale
He dup namoore than doth a nyghtingale.
{h) And certainly he had a murye note ;
Wel ooude he synge and pleyen on a rote
Of yeddynges he baar oatrely the pris ;
His nekke whit was as the floiir-de-lys,
(c) He was to sinful man not despUous
Ne of his speche dangerous ne digne.
But in his teching descret and benygne.
{d) Wel loved he garleek, oynons, and eek lekes.
And for to drynken strong wyn reed as blood
Thanne wolde he speke and crie as he were toood.
it) A large man he was with eyen stepe,
A fairer burgeys was ther noon in Chepe ;
Boold of his speche and wys and wel y-taughl.
And of manhood hym lakkede right naught.
5. " Burke is the man essentially an orator whose
orations were vet literature." Determine the correct-
i»e8.s of this criticism by references to the speech on
** Conciliation," distinguishing between the literary
and oratorical sides of that work.
6. What is Macaulay's view of Burke as given in
the essay on Hastings ? Compare the styles of Burke
uid Macaulay.
^ I
QltiflifVttfts et Sotetito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FRENCH.
Examiner : J. Squaib.
I.
Translate into French :
1. (a) Let us eat the bread, (6) They were not
eating, (c) He throws and we throw, (d) Our
friends are leaving, (e) We held him.
2. If I had known him, I should have written
to him.
3. Take care the child does not fall ; it is very
slippery.
4. The doctor ordered that he should be given
wine.
5. Go for the doctor ; your father is very ill.
6. I have had a pair of shoes made. They cost
me five dollars.
7. It has been raining since five o'clock ; we
cannot go out.
8. It rained all day yesterday ; I hope it will
be fine to-day.
II.
Translate into French :
The trumpeter's horse was a large, grey horse.
He was an excellent hunter, and jumped well.
One of the game-keepers shot a rabbit. When
the horse heard the shot he stopped and would
not budge. The rider fell, and the horse ran
away. But Brutus returned accompanied by a
beautiful lady. The lady and her groom made
the gentleman get into her carriage. Then the
lady related what the horse had done. He bad
run to her house with a hat in his mouth. The
men could not catch him. He wished the lady
to come to his master. The lady came, the gentle-
man went back with her, and six weeks after she
became Madame de la Roche-Targ^.
III.
(a)
Translate :
Lk, tout en donnant les cartes, il d^blat^rait
centre les moeurs du temps, oil Tautorit^ paternelle
^tait m^pris^ par les enfants, oti se perdait
chaque jonr davantage le respect de la familie.
Lui, du moins, il donnerait le bon exemple, il
serait sevfere jusqu'^ la fin en vers le rebella
C'^tait meme son unique sujet de conversation, et,
malgr^ le prestige que lui donnait sa fortune, ses
compagnons de jeu le traitaient parfois, apr^
son depart, d'ennuyeux personnage et de vieux
" raseur." Mais, en sa presence, on plaignait son
malheur et on louait sa fermet^. II v avait sur-
tout I'employ^ des contributions — celui dont Ja
pipe sentait si mauvais — qui r^pondait invariable-
ment aux imprecations du bonhomme centre son
fils par cette phrase approbative.
— Uodeur du Bwis par Francois Copp6b.
1. Give past participle and past definite (in full) of
plaignait Give present indicative and present sub-
junctive (both in full) of sentait
2. Indicate pronunciation of vic&urs,
3. Distinguish between vers and envers. Give
examples.
4. Translate : He complained of his bad luck.
Translate :
1. II ne faut pas non plus lui en vouloir.
2. Pour que le gui soit bon et porte chance aux
amoureux, il doit avoir subi Thiver.
3. Je me rends compte aujourd'hui qu'il devait
avoir tout au plus cinquante ans.
4. Eustache jonglait avec les obus et tirait sur
r^paule un canon monstre achet^, pour un rien,
dans un bric-^-brac de plein vent.
IV.
Translate
La science se d^veloppait en mSme temps, gr&ce
k la ddcouverte de Timprimerie. Gutenberg, n^ k
Mayence, mais qui travailla le plus souvent a
Strasbourg, ^tait parvenu (de 1440 k 1446) k graver
en m^tal des lettres mobiles qu*il assemblait ou
s^parait k volont^ ; il composait ainsi des mots,
des phrases, des pages enti^res ; puis pressant ces
pages imbibes d'encre sur du papier, il les repro-
duisait autant de fois qu'il voulait. Un copiste
ne pouvait ^rire k la fois qu'un seul livre. OrtLce
k rimprimerie, d^ que le livre ^tait compost avec
des lettres en m^tal, on pouvait le reproduire, en
peu de temps, par milliers d'exemplaires.
— Histoire de France,
J
Bnirttvttltji of STorofitii
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. H. Camsrok, M.A.
I.
Translate into French :
1. It is not that I have lost so much time, but I have
never been thanked for m\- trouble.
2. You have not told me what you complain of;
how then can I decide between you ?
3. I shall not disturb you again, so as not to prevent
you from finishing your book.
4. The more one has the more one wants, and the
.less one wants to give to others.
5. However careful you may be, there are some
mistakes that you will not be able to avoid.
II.
Translate into French :
At the beginning of the nineteenth century,
and for more than forty years later, quarrels were
settled in the British Isles by duel, as they still
are in France. C, the celebrated Irish barrister,
having a quarrel with his friend E., went out (sur
le terrain) with him. The latter was a man of
enormous siz^, and when he found himself facing
his advei-sary, he complained that C, being very
small, had the advantage of him.
" 111 tell you what, Mr. E.," replied C. to him,
pistol in hand, "I don't want to have any
[ovib]
advantage. Let them mark out with chalk, on
your body, an area equal to [that of] my size,
-and then let us not count the shots which strike
outside of that mark."
It is needless to say that after this sally of wit
the duel was not mortal.
III.
Translate into English :
Courte et replfete de taille, vetue simplement
d'une robe noire montante, la tete attirait toute
Tattentioni, et dans la tSte les yeux. lis t^taient
magnifiques, peut-6tre un peu rapprochds, grands,
k Targes paupi^res et noirs, mais, nullement
brillants : on eut dit du marbre ddpoli ou plut6t du
velours ; ce qui donnait au regard quelque chose
d'dtrange, de teme et meme de froid. Ce ton
mat de la prunelle fetait-il naturel, ou devait-on
Tattribuer k son habitude d*^crire longtemps la
nuit k la lumi^re ? Le front haut, encadrd de
cheveux noirs qui se divisaient en deux simples
bandeaux, ces beaux yeux calmes, surmont^ de
fins sourcils, donnaient k sa physionomie un grand
caract^re de force et de noblesse que le has de
la figure ne soutenait pas assez. En effet, le nez
^tait un peu charnu, le dessin en ^tait mou, sans
belle ligne, vii de face surtout ; la bouche manquait
de finesse aussi, le menton petit, mais appuy^
d6jk sur un sous- menton trop appai-ent, ce qui
donne de la lourdeur au bas du visage. Du
reste, une extreme simplicity de parole, d'attitude
et de geste. Telle m'apparut Mme Sand, ce soir-li.
IV.
Write in French a composition of not more than
two compact pages on one of the following subjects :
1. Charlemagne.
2. Un voyage en Europe.
3. Les villes au moyen age.
4. L*Empereur Charles-Quint.
5. Ce qui se passe dans le Transvaal.
6. Le mot de Louis XI V : " TlStat, c'est moi."
7. Les gros poissons mangent les petits.
cmiHernfts •€ SarotiiQ.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901 .
SECOND YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS.
Examiner: J. H. Cameron, M.A.
L
[N.B. — CandidfttcB are cautioned not to translate, except where
tranalation is expreisly aaked for.]
(a) C'a ^t^ dans noire si^le un grand spectacle, dc
voir dans le mSme temps et dans les mernes
campagnes oes deux hommes, que la voix cominune
de toute TEurope ^alait aux plus grands capi-
taines des aisles passes: tantot a la tete de
corps s^pards ; tantdt unis plus encore par les
ordres que rinf^rieur recevait de Tautre; tantot
oppoo^ front k front, et redoublant Tun daii.s
Tautre ractivit^ et la vigilance: comme st Dieu,
dont souvent, selon T^criture, la sagesse se joue
dans I'univers, eftt voulu nous les montrer en
toutes les formes, et nous montrer ensemble tout
oe qu' il peut faire des hommes. . . . Vit-on jamais
en deux hommes les mSmes vertus avec des
caract^ressi divers, pour ne pas dire si contraires ?
— BOSSUET.
1. Translate the extract.
2. ees deux hommes. Who were they ? In what
respects had they des caractirea 9% dit^ra ?
3. Mention a few of the chief events in the life of
the subject of this funeral oration.
4. In what ways does this oration gain in import-
ance by the occ&sion of its delivery i
{b) Je rendais grfice au ciel et croyais de justice
Qa'avec la comidie etlt fini mou supplice
Mais, comme si e'en eftt ^t^ trop bon marche,
Sur nov/oeaux frais mon bomme a moi s'est atUicho,
M*a contx? ses exploits, ses vertus non communes,
Parl^ de ses chevaux, de ses bonnes fcirtunes,
Et de ce qu'a la cour il avait de faveur,
Disant qu'Ji m'y servir il s'otfrait de grand ca^ur.
Je le remerciais dou cement de la tite,
Minutant a tous coups quelque retraite honmte ;
Mais lui, pour le quitter me voyant dhvanU.-.
*' Sortons, ce m*a-t-il dit, le monde est 4coule"
Et sortis de ce lieu, me la dormant plus siclie,
" Marquis, allons au Cou7*8 faire voir ma calkhe :
EUe est bien entendue, et plus d'un due et pair
En fait cb mon faiseur une du meme air."
{Les Fdcheiix.)
1. Explain what is meant by the italicised words.
2. Give a short account of the events attending the
composition and first representation of les Fdcliexix.
(c) CLIT ANDRE.
Parbleu ! je viens du Louvre, oti Cldonte, au levi,
Madame, a bien paru ridicule achet^S.
N*a-t-il point quelque ami qui pftt, sur ses nianieres,
D'un charitable avis lui preter les Iwmieres ?
ClfiLlMBNE.
Dans le monde, a vrai dire, il se barhouille fort ;
Partout il porte un air qui saute au<n yeux d'abord,
Et, lorsqu'on le revolt apres un pen d'abseiice,
On le retouve encor plein d'extravagance.
ACASTE.
Parbleu ! s'il faut parler de gens extravagants,
Je viens d'en essuyer un des plus fatigants ;
Damon, le raisonneur, qui m'a, ne vous deplaise,
Une heure, au grand soleil, tenu hors de ma chaise,
(d) Dans ses fa9ons d'agir il est fort singulier :
Mais j'en fais, je I'avoue, un cas particulier.
Et la sincdrit^ dont son ame se pique
A quelque chose en soi de noble et d'h^roique.
C'est une vertu rare au siecle d'aujourd'hui,
Et je la voudrais voir partout comme chez lui.
{Le Misanthrope,)
1. In extract (c) translate only the italicised words,
and write notes on them, calling attention to peculiarity
of idiom, archaic usage, or the customs of the day
which require explanation.
2. Translate (d).
3. Whose words are given jn (d) ? Who is the person
under discussion ? Is it reasonable to hold that Moli^re
here expresses his own estimate of the charaetef?
Why?
4. Scan the last three lines of (cZ), so as to show not
only the syllabes to be counted, but the accents also.
(e) Allez, tous vos discours ne me font pas de peur;
Je sais comme je parle, et le ciel voit mon cceur,
De tous vos fagonniers on n'est point les esclaves.
II est de faux ddvots ainsi que de faux braves :
Et, comme on ne voit pas qu' oil Thonneur les conduit
Les vrais braves soient ceux qui font beaucoup de
bruit,
Les bons et vrais divots, qu'on doit suivre k la trace,
Ne sont pas ceux aussi qui font tant de grimace.
(/) Aussi ne vois-je rien qui soit plus odieux
Que le dehors^pldtre cUun zUe apecieux,
Que ces franca charlatans, que ces devofs fie place,
l3e qui la aacrnlige et trompeuse grimace
Abibse impun^ment, et sejouCy d leur gn*e,
De ce qu'ont les mortels de plus saint et sacre.
(g) De quelque'grand forfait qu 'on me puisse reprendre,
Je n ai garde d'avoir Torgueil de m'en defend re.
Croyez ce qu'on vous dit, arraez votre courroux,
TSt comme un criminel chassez-moi de chez vous ;
Je ne saurais avoir tant de honte en partage,
Que je n'en aie encor meritt^ davantage.
{Tar tuff e.)
1. Translate the \asifive lines of {e) and all of (g),
2. Whose words are quoted in (e) and (g) ?
3. Write explanatory notes on the italiciserl words.
IL
1. What was the character of the prose romances of
the first half of the seventeenth centuiy in France ?
Name two of the most celebrated writers of this class,
and their Works.
2. Define the influence of Malherbe, and show how
it was continued by Boileau. What is Boileau's
estimate of the PUiade ?
3. Give a concise account of the two works: — La
Chanson- de Roland, and le Roman de la Rose ; and
of the following writers : — Villon, Montaigne, Amyot,
Pascal, Mme de S^vign^, La Rochefoucauld.
;
2Anftiersft» <( Soronta
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS.
Eaxiviiner: Pelham Edgar, Ph.D.
X,B, — Candidates art requested to translate only tohat is asked for.
(a) Le ViEiL Horace.
Nous venez-vous, Julie, apprendre la victoire ?
Julie.
Mais pluiot du combat les funestes efTets :
Rome est sujette d* Albe, et vos fils sent ddfaits,
Des trois les deux sont morts, son epoux seul vous reste.
Le ViEiL Horace.
Oh ! d\in triste combat effet vraiment funeste ! 5
Rome est sujette d'Albe et pour Ten garantir
II n'a pas employ^ ju«qu' au dernier soupir !
Non, non, cela n'est point, on vous trompe, Julie ;
Rome n'est point sujette, ou mon fils est sans vie :
Je connais mieux mon sang, il sait mieux son devoir. 10
Julie.
Mille, de nos remparts, comrae raoi I'ont pu voii\
II s'est fait admird tant qu' ont dure ses frores :
ilais, comme il s'est vu seul contre trois adversaires,
Pres d' etre enferm^ d'eux, sa f uite Ta sauve.
Lk Vieil Horace.
Et nos soldats trahis ne Font pas achcve ! 15
Dans leurs rancrs b, ce l&che ils ont donnd retraite !
Julie.
Je n'ai rien voulu voir apres cette defaite.
Camille.
O mes f reres !
Le ViEtL Horace.
Tout beau, ne les pleurez pas tous :
Deux jouissent d'un sort dont leur p^re est jaloux.
Que des plus nobles ileurs leur tombe soit cou verte ; 20
La gloire de leur mort tn' a pay^ de leur perte :
Ce bonheur a suivi leur courage invaincu,
Qu'ils out vu Rome libre autant qu'ils ont v^cu,
Et ne Tauront point vue ob^ir qu' k son prince,
Ni d*un Etat voisin devenir la province. 25
Pleurez Tautre, pleurez I'iiT^parable affront
Que sa fuite honteuse imprime k notre front;
Pleurez le deshonneur de toute notre race
Et Topprobre ($temel qu'il laisse au nom d' Horace.
JUUE.
Que vouliez vous qu'il fit contre trois }
Le Vieil Horace.
Qu'il mourdt !
Ou qu*un beau ddsespoir alors le secour&t.
1. Translate 11. 5-10 inclusive.
2. Show in how far the above extract is characteris-
tic of Corneille, and of classical tragedy.
3. What changes did Corneille introduce for dramatic
purposes into Livy s account of the Horace episode ?
(6) Abner.
Hdlas ! Dieu voit mon cceur. Pliit k ce Dieu puissaiit
Qu' Athalie oubliat un enfant innocent,
Et que du sang d' Abner sa cruaut^ contente
Ci*{lt calmer par ma mort le ciel qui la tourmente ?
Mais que peuvent pour lui vos inutiles soins ? ^
Quand vous perii*ez tou8, en p^rira-t-il moins ?
Dieu vous ordonne-t-il de tenter Timposaible ?
Pour ob^ir aux lois d'un tyran iuflexible,
Moi'se, par sa m^re au Mil abandonn^,
Se vit, presqu*en naissant, a p^rir condamne ; W
Mais Dieu, le conservant contre toute esp^rance,
Fit par le tyran mSme Clever son enfance.
Qui sait ce qu'il reserve k votre !l^liacin,
Et si, lui prdparant un semblable destin,
II n'a point de pitit^ d4}k rendu capable 15
De nos malheureux rois rhomicide, implacable?
1. Translate 11. 13-16 inclusive.
2. Explain the subjunctives in 11. 1,2,4.
3. Explain the allusions in 11. 8, 16.
4. Comment on La Bruyere's comparison of Racine
and C!omeille.
(c) Un auteur moderne prouve ordinairement que les
anciens noos .sont inferieui's en deux nmni^res, par
rai<ton et par exemple : il tire la raison de son gotki
particulier, et Texemple de ses ouvrages. II avoue que
led anciens, quelque inegaux et peu corrects qu'ils
Boient, ont de beaux tmits, il les cite ; et ils sont si
beaux qa'ils font lire sa critique. Quelques habiles
prononcent en faveur des anciens contre les modernes ;
mais ils sont suspects, et semblent juger en leur propre
cause, tant leurs ouvrages sont faits sur le goiit de
lantiquite : on les r^use.
1. Translate the passage.
2. To what does the whole passage refer ?
3. Write a note on the influence of ancient classical
literature upon the period of Louis XIV.
{(i) II y a un terme, disent les uns, dans votre ouvrage,
qui est rencontr^, et qui peint la chose au nature! ; ii
y a un mot, disent les autres, qui est hasard^ et (|ui
d'ailleurs ne signifie pas &ssez ce ciue vous voulez peut-
^tre faire entendre : et c*est du meme trait et du nieme
mot que tons ces gens s'expliquent ainsi ; et tons sont
connaisseurs et passent pour tels. Quel autre parti
pour un auteur, que d*oser pour lors dtre do I'avis de
eeux qui I'appronvent ?
I. Translate the passage.
(e) Laragne cependant se ca.npe en un lambris,
Comme si de ces lieux elle eiit fait bail k vie,
Travaille a demeurer : voila sa toile ourdie,
Voila des moucherons de pris.
Une servante vient balayer tout Touvrage.
Autre toile tissue, autre coup de balai.
Le pauvre bestion toijs les jours d^mdnage.
1. Translate the extract.
2. Substitute the usual word for aragne, 1. 1.
3. Give the substance of the whole fable.
4. Scan IL 5-6.
5. Discuss La Fontaine in relation to his time.
atifHetsfts of CTorotito.
AKNUAL EXAMINATIONS : .1901.
SECOND YEAR.
GERMAN.
Iksaminer : P. ToEWS, M.A., Ph,D.
I.
Translate :
Eines Tages speiste Rousseau bei Voltaire und
Anstem wurden als Vorgericht aufgetragen; denn,
wie Jemand bemerkt hat, kein Mittagsessen
wtirde ohne diesen kostlichen Schalfiscn voll-
kommen aein. Diese waren wirklich kostlieh,
und Rousseau sagte, in dem er sich nach Herzens-
lust zulangte : " Wie ausgezeichnet ! Ich glaube
ich k3nnte eben so viele essen, wie Simson Phili-
ster erschlug." Mit derselben WafFe"? (einem
Eselskinnbacken) fragte Voltaire verschlagen.
Rousseau sagte nichts; er lachelte nur; jedocb
vergasz er den Soberz nicht und wartete nur auf
eine Gelegenheit sich zu rachen.
Eine kurze Zeit nachher spracb Voltaire bei
Rousseau vor; fand ihn aber nicht zu Hause.
Da die TUre seines Studierzipimers jedoch offen
war, trat er ein. Er fand das Zimmer in schreck-
licher Unordnung, Bueher und Papiere in Verwir-
rung herumgeworf en und dick mit Staub bedeckt.
Er schrieb mit dem Finger auf ein sehr staubiges
Buch das Wort : ** Schwein."
Nach einigen Tagen begegnete er Rousseau und
sagte ihm, er sei in seinem Studierzimmer gewe-
sen, habe ihn aber nicht zu Hause gefunden. " Ich
weisz es *' sagte Rousseau, ** ich fand Ihre Karte."
VOCABULARY.
KinnbacJcen, jawbone ; voraprechen, call at.
LOVER
II.
Translate :
•
Uttt) mit l^offcnbem ©emfitl^c
^c^aut cr auf jum @tcmcn(^or,
Unb eg ixx^t W jarte S3lfit^c
Slug bem bilrrcn ^olj l^ewor*
©etncg SQBeflg ©cfa^rten flic^en,
®cben ber ®cfalS>r i^n ^rete,
Jliemanb t^eilet fcfnc SWfij^cn,
Unb t^ri brfldt be« Sllterg ©g.
SlengfHt4> fu4>t cr na6^ ber ®d^tt)eBe,
©0 ctttfi fedie ©fege fianb.
3l6cr fremb ifi t^m bte ©teUe,
Wemanb beut jum ®ruf bfe ^ani.
III.
Translate :
When Alexander the Great was on his cam-
paigns, he went also to Asia and led his army to
Persia. Darius was king of Persia, and, fearing
that he could not resist Alexander, he oflFered him
ten thousand talents, if he would divide Asia with
him. Alexander refused this great offer, saying:
" That is not possible, for this earth cannot have
two suns, nor Asia two kings." As this money
(eleven million two hundred and fifty thousand
dollars) was a very great sum at that time, Par-
menio, a friend of Alexander, said : " I should
take that sum of money, if I were Alexander/'
** I should also accept it, if I were Parmenio," said
Alexander.
VOCABULARY.
Campaign, Feldzug ; resist, wideratehen ; offer,
anbieten ; refuse, ausschlagen : offer, Anerbieten;
sum, SurriTne; accept, annehmen,
A farmer once drove a load of oats to the mar-
ket. As he was driving through the gate of the
city the inspector stopped him and asked him
what he had in his wagon. The peasant looked
at his horses and whispered into the inspector's
ear, " oats." The inspector wondered at this and
asked him why he said that so low. "Hush!"
said the farmer, " my horses do not need to know
that I have a load of oats."
VOCABULARY.
Drive, fahren; load, Ladung ; oats, Hafer;
inspector, Zollinepector ; stop, anhalten ; whisper,
flUatem ; low, Uise ; hush, " stiU " ; need, hrauchtn.
mifliev0ft9 ot Sovomo«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1001.
SECOND YEAR HONORS— FOURTH YEAR
GENERAL.
GERMAN AUTHORS.
Examiner: G. H. Needler, B.A., Ph.D.
I.
1. Translate :
)oon bfr tcnfm mu§, 2Bemer ! 3«^ (><tbc eg nt(^t gem
gc^Srt »ag mtr 3ufi gefagt ^at. !J)u j^afi betn ®ut
^erfauft itnt) iDiDf) wteber f)trum^to&mtn, iai mtd^
nt(^t )>on btr glauben, ba^ bu nic^t fomol^I bad better,
aid bte mtot, Iteberltc^e Sebendart liebfi, tie unglficf^
It(|>er»etfe bamtt i^erbunben {ft. 5Dlan muf ©olbat fern
ffir fetn ?anb, ober aud Stebe ju ber ®a6)t, fflr bte
gefoAten wtrt. Dl^ne Slbftc^t b^ute \)itx, tnorgen ba
bteneii, l^etf t wit em gletfcberfncc^t retfen, wetter ntd^td*
ffierner. 9luti ja bocb, -^err SWaior ; tcb will 3^tieti
folgcn* @te tttffen beffer, wad itcb ge^Brt 3c^ »tU
bet 3bneti bletben^ Slber, Heber SWajor, tiebmeti ©fe
bocb au(^ berwetle mem ®elb. ©eut* ober tnorgett mug
3bre Sac^e aud feitt* ©te mflffen Oelb bte SWenge
bffommett. @ie follen mtr ed fobantt mft 3ntereffett
wiebergeben. 3^ tbu' ed ja ttur ber 3ntereffett wegen*
Lessing, Minna v, Barnkdm, III, 7.
2. und vnilst vriedei* herumachwdrmen. What was
Werner s pre*>ent intention ? Outline his character.
3. Man mv^ss Soldat sein filr sein Land, oder aus
Liehe zu der Sache, fil/r die gefochten wird. Discuss
Tellheini's character judged by this standard, explain-
ing Land and Sache in his case.
4. HeuV oder morgen muas Ihre Sache aus aein.
Explain definitely what is here referred to.
II.
5. Translate:
©eit er toenigc STOonate nac^ ter ®4ila(^t be QoUvx
t)ie granjofen bet JRoPa^j fo grilntjltd^ gefc^lagcntl^atte,
tDurbe er x>tx ^elt> !Deutfd^Ianbg, etn Subelruf ber grcube
brad^ flberaU ani. Durc^ gwet^unbert 3abre fatten
bie granjofen bem »telgetl^etlten 8anb gro§e llnhiU
jugefagt grabe jeftt begann bag beutfc^e 3Befen ft4>
gegen ben ©nfluf franjBjtfcber 93tlbung ju fe^en, unb
iejt ^atte ber ^Sntg, ber felbfi bte ?artfer SBerfe fo fc^r
berounberte, bie $artfer ©enerfile fo unflbertreffltc^ mix
beutf(^ett *ugeln weggefdj^euc^t. @g toar etn fo glanj^
enber ©{eg, eine fo f(|ima(^t>one 9l{eberlage ber alten
ge(nbe, eg »ar etne ^ergengfreube flberall tm SReif^ ;
auc^ tt)o bie ©blbaten ber Sanbe^b^rren gegen JtSnig
griebricli im gelbe logcn, jubelten balj^eim Sflrger unb
Sauem fiber feine beutf(|>en ^iebe.
Freytag, Avji dem Stoat Fr. d. Gr.
6. Where are Collin and Rossbach ? What was
the result of the former battle ?
7. dein vidgetheilten Land, Explain.
8. Einfiuss franzosiBcher Bildung. Compare Fre-
derick and Leasing in their attitude toward this.
III.
9. Translate :
Der 'Lamm i)erf(^tt)anb, ein aWecr erbraufl'g.
Den fleinen ^figel tm «re{g umfaufl*g.
'I>a garnet unb wtrbelt ber fd^Sumenbe ©tbiunb
Unb jfel^et b{e grau mil ben ittnbern ju ®mnb ;
Dag $om ber 3tege faf t bag e{n' —
©0 foHten fte alle t>erIoren fetn !
©d^6n ©ugcben jie^t nocb jirarf unb gut :
SBBer rettet bag junge, bag ebelfie SBlut !
©c^8n ©ugcben jiebt notb wte ein ©tern ;
Do(^ aUt SBerber ftnb alle fern.
Goethe.
10. Give the substance of this ballad and explain its
origin.
11. Give the substance of Goethe's ballads Der
Sanger and Die xvandelnde Olocke, with concise ex-
planatory comments.
IV.
12. Translate:
!2){e })o\)tn Sudden ftel^en babet gldcf^ emflen 935tem,
bte mfto^Ien ISd^elnb bem Snut^midtn bed HebUc^m
^tnbed jufe^tn ; bte wei^en Strfen bewegen jt4^ tantett:'
l^aft »ergnilgt, itnb bocb jugleicb SiigfUtd^ fiber bte
getoagten ©prfin^e; ber flolge Sid^baum fd^aitt bretn
loie efn )>eibrte§It(ber Dl^ettn. ber bad fd^One SBBetter
besol^Itn foD ; bie SBgelein in ben ?flften jiubein ibten
SBrffaD, bie 33lumen am Ufer Pfiflem jSrtHcli : O, ntmm
nitd tnit, ntmm und mit Ueb* ®4in)efler(^en I — aber
bod lufUge ^RSo^m fpringt unaufbaltfam meiter, unb
pU$K4 ergreift fte ben trSumenben !t)t4iter, unb ed
fir0mt anf mi6^ })txob etn Slumenregen )>on Htngenben
@tra|^Ien unb fhra^lenben AlSngen, unb bte ©inne
9frge^en mir »or lauter ^mli^Uit, unb id) ^Bre nur
noi^ tote flBtenffi^e ©Hmme.
Heine.
13. das lustige Mddchen. Explain.
14. Give the leading incidents of the Harzreise until
the Brocken is reached.
15. Outline Heine's life up to the time of his journey
to the Harz.
V.
16. Name and give some account of the leading
patriotic poets of 181S.
17. Write notes on Uhland, A. W. Schlegel, Borne,
Freiligrath, Freytag.
L
iSninersttv of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
GERMAN.
COMPOSITION AND TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
HONORS.
Examiner: Prof. Horning.
I.
Translate intx> Qerman :
1. Doctor Faust, a great wizard, was once walking
about the streets of Leipzig when he came to an
inn where several men were trying to get a large
cask out of the cellar into the street. He watched
them for a time and then said to his companions :
" How very awkward these fellows are ! A single
man could easily do that ! " The innkeeper heard
hitn and said : " If you will get it out alone, I'll
give you the wine in it." "Good," answered Faust,
and going down into the cellar, he seated himself
on the cask as on a horse and rode it out into the
street, to the astonishment of all onlookers.
2. Schiller in his youth had to contend with all
sorts of hindrances and difficulties, and sometimes
he even suffered want and privation. In such
periods he would have doubts of everything, even
of himself and of his calling as a poet. Once, as
he was in this mood, something quite unexpected
happened to him. He received by post from
Leipzig a package in which there was a costly silk
letter case, a musical composition of one of his
own lyrics and four portraits, two ladies and
two gentlemen, all entire strangers to him. The
LoverJ
i
letters which accompanied the package gave ex-
pression to the warmest gratitude and eathusi-
astic admiration for the poet. Naturally enough
Schiller was very much pleased. These letters,
furthermore, had a great effect, for they gave him
fresh confidence in himself because of the certainty
that his writings had begun to find an echo in
the hearts of the German people.
II.
Translate into English :
3. ®raf (aUetn)* (®c^t fiefrig auf mt> ai.) Da^
gel()t gu xotit, unt toie i6) miiSf au4i l^tn unb l^er beftnne,
bad ia§t [x6f mtt metncr Dfcnflpfltd^t gcgen ©einr
!I)urd^Iau4it ni4)t »eretntgcn. — Slbcr wai foD t^i t^un?
— Dfc '^erjogta {fi aufgcreat, i^ fenne {^ren feflen
SQtQen, fie toiit )>on biefem (Intf4iluf nt4it abjubringen
fctn. 3Benn nur bcr 'Derjog ba wire ! ©ne fofc^Sne
®elegenl[)ett mic^ aid getreuefien Dtener i^tn barju^
ftetten, fommt nid)t fo balb ttjfcbcr ; aber ber <^er)ogtn
ben ©e^orfam i^ertDctgem, ifi unmJgHd^. ®te l^at biS
je^t attc SSefel^Ic gegcbcn, eg roflre SlebeUfon gegen bie
Sltterboc^jie ©ewalt. (Sr gebt auf unb ab.) |)alt I —
bad gtnge! ®o toare ed mBgltd^; ia, la, i6f ^alte
3^re !£)ur(^laud^t t)on etnem fiberetlten S^ritt ab unb
ber <^er20g mup ed mir banfen, /
4. So am )acftgen Se(d bad ®en)og ftc^ branbenb empor^
bdutnt,
©enften bte greunbe bef ffla^t })tlmU^ I^emtflofled
?e{b
3n ^efmatbHt^en ®xmt. gejigaben unb S4)btenge^
fcbenfe
©rac^ten fie bar, unb ed flof xtld)ll6) b{e ©penbe bed
ffietnd.
Slber ben S^xn bed »erblenbeten SSolfed fletnmilt^lg
befi(lr4>tenb
©ta^Ien fie Wfe fttb \)tim, e(>e bte !DSmmrung erfd^teit
Denfjietnlod nun fcblummert ber ^elb* Do($ brftben
im ©pfitrotb
9iagt {^m, em ewiged SWal, ©alamid gelfengeflab.
BItifliftriifts at Sototitci*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ITALIAN.
H0N0R8.
if%^<^,..— . i W. H. Fraskb, B.A.
Translate into Italian :
I.
1. I cannot think of Florence without remembering
my good landlady, with whom I lived in the Via
Cavour.
2. Let the young men study. If they were to study,
they would win honor and wealth.
3. As a young man I was sent by my father to a
j^ood school in Turin, which I left after a few years
without learning anything at all.
4. I was only thirteen years of age when I left my
dear parents, whom I was never to see again, to em-
bark at Genoa tor America.
5. It has never fallen to my lot to learn much, but I
shonld begin even now if my other occupations per-
mitted me.
6. A story is told of a Sienese official to whom the
Florentines (Jiorentini) applied (rivolgersi) in 1860, in
order that he might invite the Sienese to take part in
the festivities which celebrated the union of Tuscany
with the Kingdom of Italy. He said he would gladly
%nd a deputation to Florence, but, asked he, '* would
the Florentines really like to have us come ? " ** Cer-
tainly ! Why not ? "— " Oh, that affair of Montaperto,
[ovxb]
you know." As if the thin^ had happened the year
before, or as if the recollection of that battle must
still, after six hundred years, arouse (destar^) the
wrath of the Florentines. But perhaps those six cen-
turies had confused the memory of that ancient injury,
and of so many others ; or perhaps the Florentines of
the nineteenth century believed themselves sufficiently
avenged {vendicare) by their -victory of twelve hun-
dred and 'sixty-nine.
IL
NoTB. — The ptuUi salienti are given as Buggesting an ontlme to be
developed', but the candidate may, at his option, treat the
Bnbject in any way which seems to him preferable.
Write a composition of not less than two hundred
words on one of the following subjects :
(a) " Fortuna/' Punti salienti : Un minatore parte
per I'Australia ; arriva e lavora alle miniere d'oro e
compra della terra ; lavorando la terra scopre una mina
ricchissima che lo rende opulento.
(6) " Ritomo dalla guerra." Punti salienti : Descri-
zione delle peripezie di una battaglia ; descrizione di
un atto eroico di un ufficiale ; onori che gli si rendono
al suo ritomo in famiglia dai cittadini e dallo stato.
(c) "Assalto." Punti salienti: Un ricoo signore
viaggia solo in carrozza per luoghi di montagna ; come
h assalito da tre assassini che cercano di rubarlo ; il suo
coraggio nella difesa e come ne uccide uno, ne cattura
un altro che conduce prigioniero alia giustizia.
?Bnfti(t0ft9 of Toronto
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ITALIAN.
HONORS.
Examiners i^-^- ERASER. B.A.
Jixamtners • ^ e. J. Sacco.
i
I.
Translate :
" Parlate sul serio ? " disse mio zio, turbandosi e
rodendosi le unghie. " Credete voi che la society
possa rivoltarsi come una frittata? Che si, che
questo ragazzo h suUa via deilo Spedaletto'' (lo
spedale del pazzi in Genova).
'' Ma, zio mio, se scoprire il baco nel frutto
dell'albero h cosa inutile, e attaccare le radici h
cosa pazza, ogni progresso e dunque impossibile, e
non resta altro a fare che tenersi per disperati le
mani incrociate sdl petto."
"No, non voglio dir qnesto. II pj ogresso cammina
da sfe ; cosi la Provvidenza ha disposto. Vi sono
nel mondo morale, come nel mondo fisico, misteriosi
principi che operano a nostra insaputa ed anche a
nostro malgrado. Per effetto di questo latente
iavorio, le cose oggi vanno meglio che non andas-
sero cento od anche cinquant'anni fa, e di qui ad
altri cinquant*anni voi, che siete giovine, vedrete
che andranno anche meglio. Bisoma prendere
con pazienza il male presente e dar tempo al
tempo. Lasciate che ciascuno nel suo piccolo
cerchi di farsi migliore e di migliorare quelli che
gli stanno attorno. Qui, soltanto qui, h la pietra
angolare della nostra f utura rigenerazione. Quanto
a me, mio dolce amico, quando nella prima bottega,
in cui entrerd, mi si chiedera della roba che vorr5
[oysb]
comprare soltanto il vero prezzo o poco piti, allora
dird che il mio paese ha fatto una conqiiista piii
importante, che se si fossero date tutte le istitu-
zioni di Sparta, e quelle di Atene per giunta.
1. Write the plural of mio zio, la aocietd, lo spedaU,
2. dnquant'anni fa (1. 17). Express by another
idiom.
3. Tneglio (1. 19). Give the positive and superlative.
4. Parse cerchi (1. 22) and si 1. 29).
5. Qive in tabular form the principal parts (infin.,
gerund, past part., 1 sg. pres. indie, 1 sg. past, def.) of
diase, posaa, sooprire, voglio, disposto, vanno, vedrete,
farsi, chiederd, vorrd,
6. Write in full the pluperfect of rodendosiy the
present indicative of disposto^ the past definite of
vedrete, the future of cerchi, and the impf. subj. of
stanno.
7. Give a phonetic transcription of UTighie, ragazzo,
ogni, dunqtie, incrociate, voglio, oygi, pazienza, cias-
cuno, dolce,
II.
1. Give some account of Petrarca and his writings.
2. Write notes on any three of the following authors,
giving their approximate dates, and indicating their
place in the history of literature: Guido Guinizelli,
Pulci, Guido Cavalcanti, Dante, Trissino, Ariosto.
•
3. Write a short paper on one only of the following
subjects: (a) ''The origins of Italian poetical liter-
ature " ; (6) " The 18th century drama " ; (c) " Italian
Romanticism.
4. Describe briefly any three of the following works,
naming the author in each case: II Quadriregio, R
Decamerone, Orlando Innamorato, Baldua, II Corte-
giano, I Promessi Sposi,
Bnitttvuittf of Toronto
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
8EC0ND YEAR.
SPANISH.
HONORS.
^™"- ■ { RT^K^M^Vni.
I.
Translate into Spanish :
1. The dinner being over, most of the guests took
leave.
2. Scarcely had he perceived him when he ran up
to him, embraced him and asked his pardon for having
disobeyed him.
3. Go away (2 pers. sing.) you naughty boy (picardn);
if you do not behave yourself you will not be per-
mitted to go for a walk this afternoon.
4. Here we are, let us sit down on this bench and
wait until the waiter (mozo) brings us what we
ordered.
5. He might have been at home a fortnight when an
elder brother of his died suddenly.
C. Thank her for it as soon as you have an oppor-
tunity of doing so.
7. A peasant came to his p&stor one evening and
told him, with trembling limbs, that he had seen a
ghost (fantaama). The pastor knew at once that he
had-to-deal (tenerlds) with a very foolish man, and
asked with some pity : " When and where did you see
the ghost, my good man ? " " Last night," said he,
" I passed the churchyard and I saw the ghost on the
lover]
wall." Then the pastor asked a second time : " Was
it small or large, and in what form did it appear ? "
" In the form of a large donkey " was the answer.
" Go home, my good man ; do not saj^ a word to your
neighbours about it ; you are very timid, and 1 really
believe you were frightened at your own shadow."
n.
Note. — The Punlo$ scUierUea are given as 8U|;ge8tmg an outline to be
developed, bat the candidate may, at his option, treat the sab-
ject in any way which seems to him preferable.
Write a composition of not less than two hundred
words on one of the following subjects :
(a) ''Viaje de Gibraltar & Nueva York." Pwntos
aalientes : La embarcacion ; el vapor y su capitan ; la
primera comida & bordo ; tempestad que estalla el ter-
cer dia del viaje ; pasatiempos del viaje ; la costa de
America se descubre ; los pasajeros se disponen &
desembarcarse ; la desembarcacion ; los pasajeros se
despiden.
(b) " Fortaleza de alma de una nina." Puntos
scdientea : La nifia es hija del vigia de un faro ; des-
cripcion de un faro y de la vida diaria del vigia;
nombre, edad y descripcion de la nina ; donde estl el
faro referido ; el vigia va & la ciudad (porqu^) ; los
raqueros se apoderan del vigia (porqu^) ; llega la noche ;
tempestad ; la nina enciende el farol (dificultades) ;
vuelta del padre la maflana siguiente.
sinitie¥0ltff af Sj^arantb
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND yjlAR.
SPANISE
HONORS.
IP -^^^^ f W- E. Fraser, B.A.
Examiners ; | p ^^^^^^ jy ^'^ p^ jj
I.
Translate :
— Ya sabe usted que deseo servirle con el alma
y la vida.
— Lo se, senor marquds. i Se acuerda usted
de Perico, aquel mucbacho per quien le habl^ hace
5 tiempo ?
— El hi jo de Romero ?
— Justamente. Su padre como usted sabe, era
uno de xais mejores ainigos. Cuando muri6 le
prometi que no abandonarfa d su hijo, y asf lo
10 hice : me llev^ a casa d Peiieo, que entonces tenia
diez afios, le di la educacion que pude, y le dedi-
que ik una carrera decente ; pero el muchacbo, d
pesar de que nada tiene de tonto ni le falta buena
voluntad, adelanta poqufsimo en sus estudios.
15 Yo, que tambi^n tengo mi filosofia, aunque muy
diferenfce de la de usted, vf que Perico era uno de
aquellos hombres cuyo cardeter se aviene maldi-
tisimamente con la uniformidad de ocupaciones
que proporciona una carrera determinada, al paso
20 que se pnede sacar un gan partido de ellos impo-
nidndoles trabajos variados y no sujetos & m^todo.
Con que, amigo mio, entonces me dije : No obligue-
mcs a este muchacho d tomar pulsas 6 hacer pedi-
mentos (petition, pleading) toda su vida, porque
25 de seguro se le morir&n los enfermos 6 perderd los
pleitos.
[ovsb]
^
— Es decir, que usted se convenci6 de que bas-
taba imponer al muchacho una obli^idn, para
que no la cumpliera 6 la cumpliera mal.
30 — Justamente : observe su carActer especial, y
quise valerme de esta observaci<$n para cnderezar
por buen camino & mi protegido.
1. Give the plural of el alma (1. 1), and explain the
use of el,
2. aquel (1. 4). Distinguish from eae. Examples.
3. d Perico (1. 10). State rule for the use of a here,
and give at least two other examples of a similar u>e,
each of a different type.
4. nada tiene (1. 13). Re- write, placing ncuJa after
tiene,
5. poquiaimo (1. 14). Why does the o of the posi-
tive change to ^u ?
6. amigo mio (1. 22). Give a rule for the use of
the form mio instead of Tni here.
7. Parse se (1. 25), cumpliera (1. 29).
S. Give the 3 sg. past def. of acibe and valerme, the
1 sg. pres. subj. of murid and di (1. 11), the imperative
2 sg. of se acuerda and dije, the 1 sg. impf. subj. of
imponer and quise, and the 1 sg. fut. iudic. of tenia
and ha^er.
II.
1. Name two of the earliest writers of Spanish prose,
and describe briefly any one work of each.
2. What is meant by a Romance of Chivalry ? Name
the first work of this kind published in Spain.
3. Name the author of and describe briefly any three
of the following words : Fray Gerundio, El Moro
Expdsito, Don Quijote, Guzman de Alfaracke, Rimado
de PaUxdo,
4. Give some account of the writings of any three of
the following, with approximate date : Jorge Manrique,
Garcilaso de la Vega, Gdngora, Moratin, Berceo, Lope
de Vega.
J
»ntiiev0Uff of Sovontik
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
HEBREW SYNTAX LITERATDRE AND
HISTORY.
J. F. McCuRDY, PhD., LL.D.
Examiners : -{ J. F. McLaughlin, B.A., B.D.
MuKisoN, M.A., B.D.
(N.B. — Students will take four qnestions only in Beotions I. and III.)
I.
1. How is the relative pronoun used in Hebrew ?
Write a full note, giving examples.
2. What classes of nouns are regarded as feminine
in Hebrew ?
3. Point out the chief uses of the simple perfect
4. How are the degrees of comparison indicated in
Hebrew ?
5. Define imperative, jussive and cohortative. How
does Hebrew express (a) a prohibition, (b) a dissuasion ?
II.
Translate into Hebrew: 1. Behold I will cut off
tliine enemies from before thee, and ye shall dwell
here in peace. 2. If ye eat of the fruit of this tree ye
shaU surely die, for Jehovah hath spoken and com-
manded you not to eat of its fruit
HL
1. How have the Aryans and the Semites respec-
tivdy contributed to the world's progress ?
2. What peoples were included in the North Semitic
region, and what was their geographical location ?
3. What stages mark the development of political
government among the Semites ?
[oyer]
4. What and how arranged are the books of the
Hebrew Canon ?
5. What is the Septuagint Version ? When was it
written and what is its critical value ?
6. In what sense were the Hebrew Prophets his-
torians?
I
anfbetsfti* of STovomo.
AKNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ORIENTALS-
GENERAL COURSE.
HEBREW TEXTS.
f J. F. Mc(
U J. F. Moj
(R. G. Ml
J. F. McCuRDY, LL.D.
Examiners :■{ J. F. McLaughlin, M.A.
MURISON, M.A.
1. Translate Ex. ii. 10-14.
T • :i- :- -: .. . ; - .... - -:•-
• I • • V ~ V • T i: • "" I •• :
n^D 'pi:'! Dnn d^d'3 %ti h :inn^e/D
: — T
0^123; D''E'at<-''aE^ njm ""JE^n oi^a ks'i 13
•• • • • • • ^
"iD^'i 1* : Tin nsn nnh vv^'h idk^'i d^j^j
- J,.... .. - T Y T TT V ~
T " • •• : T : •- •• T •• : - • : ! : "T
T •• • : • - V t: -T V -:•-
• TT- - '"T
2. (a) Parse inX2m (v- 10); {^JJll. {<-)lT (v. 11);
jcn yi ^ 12); D-^xij (v. 13); ijjin^n (v. u).
(*) Decline ^'f^ (v. 12); Q^i and TJ^^I (^- 13);
DCE^ (v. 14).
3. Translate Ex. iv. 7-10.
V T V T"" M*/ •• y J :iy •• T •• ~
T 1 : : : . : It • -:■-
V •• T <T
• • ■ •
^^^$) ■n«>T •'p-'sp mpb^ TjVpb |ij?p?;?
rni "ij<%-!-p npn ie^^x d^sh rm nE?3T.
T . : - I • I- • ... -: . - - T ; T T- "
• • • • • "
4. (a) Parse the verb-forms occurring in v. 7.
(b) Inflect the Imperfects o£ v. 7, but only in the stems
in which they are there found.
5. Translate Ruth iv. 5-10.
• t:'t * • V T ~ I : 1 1 : 1 :
)• T : T • IT •• - V '•• T* -: • -
n-ii];nn nxn in:;")b jnji l'?i?: u^^ ^hv -i3i
^bp'') Tib'T\ip ^if^b "^xan "ion'i 8 : b^iii:;^2
T T T : M":- ^ V - .-.I-
'v V • vi'v V ~: T %• • • T • - V ~
• Ti'T - • I : - I : • : ... ~: t "" :
nWiib ^b Ti^jp 'Abr\D nc?"« rrnj^bn nn-ni«
-Dt:r n")2''-^bi in'pnr^v nsn-ct:' n^orh
:Di'n Dnx d''ij; IdIdd "lyts^Di rn« d:?^ nsn
(a) Is Waw consecutive used in v. 7 1 It' so, point out
its precise effect on the verb.
(b) Parse PCH ^^^ Q^rh (v- 5); Q-^pb (v. V).
(c) Explain the diverse readings in vv. 5 and 6.
7. Translate 1 Kings v. 19-22.
^rt^ji ni.T Dc;^ n'^2 nljn^ nc^i ^Jjm 19
•■I. • • .■.
: ^^^b n''3n n^y-wn Ti^^DD^'py rnr\r\r\ ]n5?
i. -. ... ••:• I '•• : • — ? .. : — I •• ..
^^^ W3 r^ ^3 nj?"!^ nn« ""S "iDN'n "itL^'j^
T ' •• • T : ~T T " • •' V "•
DTn rbE^3 '•n*'! 21 : n^Jias D''iJV"mr'? v^'"
I
TT
IT V " : - : •- : •• : •
oyn-by D:?n p "n"!*? ?na "ie^n D\^r\ ni.T
T T - T T I •• • T : I - T V "• •" T :
• • T • .
V vi «v '-IT* T : - T V "": " • : - t
: D^e^'nn •'liyai d"'t"i« ""sra Tiycn-bs
,. ; ..-:,- • T-: ••^:i- |: : v t
8. (a) Decline the noun-forms occurring in v. 19.
(6) Inflect 7f^J "to give" in the Perfect stem
throughout. '
1
8lnnier0Uff of Vorotitci
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
HEBREW SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
J. F. McCuRDY, M.A., Ph.D.
Examiners : { J. F. McLaughlin, B.A.
MuRisoN, M.A.
1. Describe fully the aae of the persoQal proDoaDs in
Hebrew. Illustrate by examples.
2. Define annexion or the construct relation. Show, by
examples, the variety of ideas which may be expressed in
this way.
3. Define jussive, cohortative, imperative. Compare the
various uses of these forms with the uses of the ordinary
imperfect.
4. Explain clearly the use of waw consecutive with the
imperfect What was the probable origin of this usage ?
5. Translate into Hebrew :
(1) Bless me, even me also, O my father.
(2) Moses went in to Pharaoh and said to him, " Let
the sons of Israel go three days' journey into the wilderness
that they may sacrifice unto Jehovah their God.''
(3) Then David rose up and took the bread and the
cheese which his father gave him and went to his brethren
to the camp of Israel. And David went foi*th to meet
Goliath, the Philistine, of Gath, and he smote him and slew
him and cut off his head.
(4) I said " who is that man 1" And he said " that is
Samuel, the seer (Hi^*^)) ^^^ j^^^go of Israel." He was, at
that time, seventy years old and he had for many years
judged the people righteously (use abstract noun) and had
taught them the fear of God.
mmttttaits of ^Toronco.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR
HEBREW TEXTS.
HONORS.
J. F. MacCurdt, LL.D.
Examiners :^ J. F. MacLaughlin, M.A., B.D.
MURISON, M.A.
I. Translate Exodus xvi. 18-22.
1. Parse verbs in v. 18, explaining forms.
2. Explain Massoretic note on v. 20.
3. Inflect f^^ (both sign of del ace and prep.) and )^,
with snffixes. '
4. Give Qal thronghout of any " Ayin Doubled Verb,
comparing its inflection with the Aramaic verb."
n. Translate Numbers xxiii. 13, 17-23.
1. Parse and explain forms 13i<*)n> 1^D1> UDpl (1^) >
)y\ (17) ; yDE^I, 133 (18) ; 1 JQ-ip-J (19). ^
2. What is the pointing of the interrogative p|^.
3. Explain the term " Denominative Verb," and illustrate
from passaga
4. Give Hiphil throughout of nC^^'
5. 2fn J i^^)' ^^^® ^^^ explain derivation of this word*
6. What is your estimate of the character of Balaam as
represented by the narrative in Numbers.
IIL Translate 1 Kings xix. 1-7.
1. Parse nn (3) 5 b^D^ (5) ; "2^^) (7). Explain
forms.
[ovib]
■1
2. Translate into Hebrew : This sword is better than that
sword.
3. Explain the force of the Demonstrative in v. 5.
4. What is relation of Beersheba (3) to the verb imme-
diately preceding.
6. Decline the words for " Father," «* Mother," " Brother,"
" Sister." Give a form in each with pronominal suffix.
6. Inflect (^^^ in Hiphil perf. and Q^p in Niphal perl
and impf. Give inf. and part, of both. >
lY. Translate 2 Chronicles xxx. 10*14.
1. Compare briefly the books of Chronicles and Kings.
i
VnfiietflUff or Sovotito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
f J. F.
: ^ J. F.
(R. G.
J. F. McCuRDY, LL.D.
Examiners : -{ J. F. McLaughlin, B.A.
MuRisoN, M.A.
A. SYRIAC (EASTERN ARAMAIC).
1. Translate the passages on the accompanying sheet,
marked A (Gen. i. 17-30 ; Matt. v. 8-13).
2. Parse the underlined words.
3. Decline the nouns under (1), and inflect the verbs
under (2).
4. What Syriac consonants represent the Hebrew tj, ], [^,
in cognate roots f Give illustrations.
5. How is the present tense regularly expressed in Syriac 1
B. WESTERN ARAMAIC.
1. Translate the passages on the accompanying sheet,
marked B (Targum Onkelos, Gen. i. 14-17 ; Targum
Jonathan, Josh. xx. 1-6).
2. Parse the underlined words.
3. Decline pJQ] (Gen. i. U) ; ^^JJ (Josh. xx. 2);
NriiZ^J^ (Josh. XX. 6).
4. Inflect 7^p in Pe'al and Aph'el throughout.
5. Write Tl/D ^^^ pronom. suffixes, singular and
plaraL '
6. Point out some of the chief differences you have noticed
between Syriac, or Eastern Aramaic, and Western Aramaic.
J
amtnersitff of eovotito#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
SIGHT.
HONORS.
Jffxaminer: R. Q. Murison, M.A.
1. Translate ; Genesis 29 : 1-12.
2. Translate: Judges 7: 7-14.
3. Translate : 2 Kings 24 : ^-14.
4. Translate : Deuteronomy 29 : 1-8.
9lnfiier0ftff of STovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
HISTORY AND LITERATURE.
rJ. F.
••■^J.F.
(rg.
J. F. MacCubdy, Ph.D.
Eaeaminera : ■{ J. F. MacLauohlin, M.A., B.D.
MuBisoN, M.A.
I.
1. What are some of the distinguishing characteris-
tics of the Semites, as compared with Aryans ?
2. In what ways might a Semite state take its rise ?
Illustrate.
3. Write briefly on the historical importance of any
two of the following peoples : The Eabylonians, the
Phoenicians, the Aramseans, and the Egyptians.
II.
1. Give and account for the arrangement of the
books in the Hebrew Canon. Compare critically with
the order in the English translation.
2. The Massoretic text ; the Septuagint, the Peschitta,
the Targums. Explain these names.
3. What is the modem critical views of the composi-
tion of the Pentateuch (Hexateuch) ?
4. Write brief introductions (author, purpose, con-
tents) to any three of these books : — Samuel, Jeremiah,
Proverbs, Ruth, Elsther, Chronicles.
[OVHfc.]
III.
1. What was the proper home of the Aram»aiis ?
2. Qive the interchange of letters between the
Hebrew and the Aramaic
3. What are the leading names in Syriac literature ?
amtiersftff of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
HISTORY.
PASS AND HONORS.
A. F. Barr, B.A.
Examiners : ^ J. S. Carstairs, B. A.
Pakenham, B.A.
1. Contrast the attacks of the Vandals and of the
Huns upon the Roman Empire.
2. Write notes upon :
(1) Theodoric's rule in Italy ;
{2) The aggressions of the Northmen in the ninth
century ;
(3) Mahomet s place in the system of Islam.
3. State the results of the First Crusade.
4. Indicate the degree in which the Norman Con-
quest involved political change in England, and estimate
the work of William the Conqueror as King.
5. Write notes upon :
(1) The greatness of Alfred ;
(2) Henry II's quarrel with the Church ;
(3) The causes of John's defeat by the baronial
party.
6. Account for the independence of the Nation
commonwealths. Explain the issue between the Guelf
and Ghibbeline parties.
7. Account for the prevalence of Feudalism in the
mediaeval period and outline the responsibilities which
a vassal usually undertook in relation to his lord.
i
anfttrsftfi oC fforomo*
I
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
HISTORY.
. HONORS.
A. F. Barr, B.A.
Examiners : { J. S. Carstairs, B.A.
W. Pakenham, B.A.
1. Explain the theory of Roman Supremacy evolved
in the age of Augustus, and contrast the positions of
Augustus and Charles the Great as Emperors.
2. Outline Pope Gregoiy VII s edict of the organ-
ization of society and the nature of his quarrel with
the Emperor Henry IV.
1. Account for the predominance of theological pre-
conceptions in the intellectual life of the Middle Ag es
4. Estimate the causes of the rapid propagation of
Islam.
5. Write notes upon :
(1) Gregory the Great's relations to the civil
power ;
(2) St. Bernard ;
(3) Odoacer ;
(4) Philip Augustus of France:
6. In what degree may Justinian be said to have
revived and strengthened the Roman Empire ?
7. Write notes upon :
(1) Anselm's position regarding Investiture;
(2) The degree of prominence of early Roman
influence in England ;
(3) Ireland and Henry II.
Winitttvnits of Sovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
LOGIC.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiners • I ^- '^<^' ^•^•' ^^•^•
£.xaminera • | rp j^ Robinson, B.A.
Nora. — Pass candidates may omit the second question.
1. Shew fully the nature of inference, and explain
such terms as imTnediate inference, mediate inference,
inductive inference, deductive inference. Give exam-
ples. Define logic with special reference to inference.
2. Explain the nature of conception and judgment
and their mutual relation. Shew the exact meaning
of the principles of identity, contradiction and excluded
middle, using the judgment " Snow is white " by way
of illustration.
3. How many kinds of categorical judgments are
there ? Determine what pairs of such judgments will
yield valid conclusions. Refer to the rules of the
Syllogism.
4. Give the converse, obverse and contrapositive of
aU A ia B and ot tio A is B, with explanations.
5. What do you understand by the figures of the
Syllogism ? Prove that the conclusion in the second
figure must always be negative. Reduce A E E of the
secoud figure to the first figure.
6. What fallacy do you find in the following ?
(a) In classifying all books into English, French,
German and scientific.
(6) In trusting the predictions of a weather-
prophet because several of his former predictions have
been correct
[oykr]
(c) In concluding that all G is A because you
have found that all A is B and that all C \s B,
(d) In reasoning from the premises :
" If the sun comes out the room will be light.
But the room has become light,"
' to the conclusion :
" Therefore the sun has come out."
7. What do you understand by a cause i Elxplain
the " methods " of inductive inquiry, and show how
they establish causation.
8. What constitutes a legitimate hypothesis ?
Bnftiersftff of Q:ovotito<
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
PHILOSOPHY-PSYCHOLOGY.
PASS AND HONORS.
{A. H. Abbott, B.A.
F, TRAcy, B.A., Ph.D.
W. G. Smith, B.A.
Bight quutkma eowU a full paper,
PiUB candidates may answer either question 3 or question 5 (both
marked *)
Honor candidates must noi answer question 4 (marked t).
1. What is presupposed when we speak of Psych-
ology as a science,
(a) With regard to its subject-matter,
(6) With regard to the method of investigation ?
2. " In all cases the qualities of Sensation must be
ultimately accounted for by reference to the nature of
the stimulus." — (Stout.)
Is this statement true ? If so, in what sense ?
. Illustrate your answer by reference to Sensations
of Temperature and Colour.
*3. Do we hare Sensations (e.g,j of Sight) when we
drftam?
Discuss this question in such a way that you
show clearly what you understand by Imagination.
t^ (a) What is the problem of the Intensity of
Sensation ? State the Law of Weber and explain its
meaniDg.
(6) 1. A man by lifting them tries to find a
weight midway between two others. The two extremes
[OVEE.]
weigh 4 ozs. and 6 lbs. 4 ozs., respectively: what
weight will he judge to be midway between these*
supposing the Law of Weber to bold strictly ?
2. If 36 oz. is just noticeably heavier than
34 oz., what weight would you expect would be
noticed as just greater than 102 oz. ?
*5. It is sometimes said that there is an lUu&ioTt
''when the Physical and the Mental do not agree."
What do you understand this to mean, and is the
statement correct ?
Discuss this point carefully, giving definite
illustrations.
6. What is the relation of the Association of Ideas
to Memory and Recognition t
(Pointed illustrations carefolly explained are of special value
in answer to this question.)
7. Show how Emotion is related to Simple Feeling,
and make a rough classification of the emotions, wi£
explanations.
8. Carefully define the following, so as to show the
Elace of each in the volitional life : End, Siotive,
desire. Deliberation, Attention.
9. Point out some of the most important charac-
teristics ot mind-growth, as exemplified in childhood.
UniMtvnntt oi Cototito
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
PHILOSOPHY-PSYCHOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiners : | f ' J' ^^"^^ ^i' -^
(A. KiRSCHMANN, Ph.D.
yoTk. — J^ht questions count a full paper.
* Ouididates may answer either qneetion II or question III,
bat not both.
1. (a) Are psychical quantities measurable ? If so,
in what sense ?
(6) Does the view that such quantities are
measurable involve a materialistic theory of ideas ?
*2. (a) What are the conditions under which an
exact experiment is possible ?
(6) Compare physical and psychical experiments.
(c) What is your opinion regarding introspec-
tion?
*3 (a) Discuss fully the significance of scientific
analysis in psychology.
(6) When is a term used in psychological nomen-
clature adequately defined ?
4. (a) What are the psychophysical methods ?
Name them, and state the principle upon which each is
founded.
(6) State and illustrate graphically or numeri-
cally, the law which has been discovered by the use of
these methods.
5. Work out and draw any conclusions possible
from the following results of experiments regarding
the quantitative relation of sensations :
[ovkb]
i
(a) Method of least observable difference :
When R = 3, judgments were 3.5. 2.6, 2.5, 3.6
" R= 7, " " as, 6 , 5.9, 7.1
" R = 15, " " 17.6, 12.8. 12.5, 17.3
(&) Method of mean gradation. When Rl and
Ru were 9 and 995 respectively, the following judg-
ments were made ; 93, 105, 107, 96.
(c) If you had two lights of 10 candle-power
and two candle-power respectively, and you wanted
to have another which would appear as just mid'^vay
in brightness between these two, what C€«idle-power
would it have to be ?
6. (a) Discuss the physiological and psychological
interpretations of Weber's law.
(6) Discuss the question whether or not the
latter interpretation " explains " the law.
7. (a) Tell what you know about the zero-point in
sensations of temperature.
(b) What is the bearing of such a fact on the
use of " causality " with reference to psychical facts ?
8. (a) Upon what sensational data does a blind
man's presentation of the form and size of his own
body depend ?
(6) What are "local signs," and what is their
relation to space ?
9. (a) In investigating the quantitative relations of
sensations of pressure experimentally, what parti-
cular conditions must be kept constant ?
(6) W^hat additional factors must be kept constant
when sensations of pressure are combined with move-
ments {eg, of an arm), as in lifting weights ?
i
1
nnfiiersUff of Kovomo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
PHILOSOPHY-THEORY OF KNOWLEDGE,
HONORS.
ET _ . f A. H. Abbott, B.A.
\ J. G. Hume, M.A., Ph.D.
LOCKE.
1. (a) What were "Innate Ideas" according to
Locke ?
(6) Why were the two words (" Innate " and
" Idea ") contradictory for Locke ?
(c) What is your opinion of the problem raised
in the discussion ? Is there an " Innate " factor in
Consciousness ? If so, in what sense would you hold
such ?
2. (a) What does Locke mean by ** Perception," and
what problem is raised in his discussion of the relation
of *• Perception " to an " Idea of Sensation " ?
(6) Discuss critically the bearing of this problem
on (1) Locke's method, (2) on his theory of the
" Originals of Knowledge."
3. (a) How is the "Idea of Infinity " reached accord-
ing to Locke ? Discuss the problem (especially in
relation to Space) in its relation to an empirical theory
of knowledge.
(6) How would you approach the problem ?
4. (a) Discuss Locke's Nominal and Real Essence,
and indicate the place these conceptions had in the
theories of Berkeley and Hume.
(b) What is your own opinion regarding the
problem raised in this distinction ?
[over]
5. (a) To what extent does Book IV. of the " Essay
on the Human Understanding " represent a standpoint
different from that of Book IL ?
(6) To what extent would the conclusions of
Book IV., if applied, render the general doctrine of
Book II. impossible ?
Discuss both of these phases of the question
carefully, and give ample justification, by references to
the Essay, for your interpretations of Locke s theories.
9iiitier8fts Of ^ovonto.
ANKUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
PHILOSOPHY.
HONORS.
THEORY OF KNOWLEDGE.
Examioier : Professor J. G. Hume, M.A., Ph.D.
BERKELEY.
1. Give as fully as you can Berkeley's discussion of
" Abstract ideas." What is the significance of this
discassion for Berkeley's own views ?
2. (a) Give Berkeley's definitions of "idea" and
" spirit," with his sub-divisions of each.
(6) Give Berkeley's account of External Reality,
Laws of Nature, Causation, Space and Time.
3. What does Berkeley say about "notions" and
" relations " ? Clearly shew the difficulties for Berke-
ley's theory that this discussion reveals.
4 (a) Shew wherein Berkeley's results are valuable,
negatively, in refuting error ; positively, in establishing
troth.
(b) Point out wherein you think Berkeley's theoiy
was inadequate, and trace this back to its foundation
in his method or fundamental assumptions.
5, What has the study of Locke, Berkeley and
Hume taught ytni^ regarding the problem of Knowledge
aod the need for an investigation of this topic ?
anfUetfitfts of STotonto^
\
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
PHILOSOPHY.
HONORS.
THEORY OF KNOWLEDGE.
Examiner.' J. G. Hume, M.A., Ph.D.
HUMR
1. What is the significance of Hume*s declaration
that we *• cannot go beyond experience " ?
What does Hume mean by " experience " ?
2. Give Hume's treatment of ** substance " and
" modes" in different parts of his writings and under
various terms.
3. " Since it is'not from knowledge or any scientific
reasoning, that we derive the opinion of the necessity
of a cause to every new production, that opinion must
necessarily arise from observation and experience."
(a) How did Hume attempt to prove that the
" opinion of the necessity of a cause to every new pro-
duction " does not come ** from knowledge or any
scientific reasoning " ?
(b) In what way does he attempt to establish his
assertion that " that opinion must necessarily arise
from observation and experience."
4. (a) Indicate the negative conclusions drawn by
Hume from his doctrine regarding Space, Time,
Causality, Substance, Self.
(6) Shew wherein you regard Hume*s results as
inadequate.
(c) Point out how you would criticize his views.
(d) by what method would you proceed to estab-
lish your own views about Space, Time, Causality,
SabBtance, Self?
mnttttxulta of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR HONORS— FOURTH YEAR PASS.
POLITICAL ECONOMY.
ire,^™,-«.^» . i James Mavor.
Ikmmtners : | g ^ wickktt. Ph.D.
FWe questioiis only to be answered.
1. What is meant by "the economic principle";
•• economic law " ; " i>roductive labour " ?
2. Discuss the statement "political ecomony is
merely the theory of value."
3. State and examine the so-called iron law of
inrages.
4. Explain the meaning you attach to each term in
the equation : produce = rent + interest + wages.
5. What is money ? Are bank-notes and cheques
money ? Explain " token money."
6. Piscass the question whether trades unions can
raise wages.
7. What is meant by co-operation ? Briefly indi-
cate the course of its development. How would you
aeoonnt for the relatively greater success of distribu-
tive than of productive co-operation ?
8. Mention some results of the industrial revolution
of last century.
r
«nftier0ft» of SToronio.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
POLITICAL SCIENCE DEPARTMENT.
ENGLISH CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY.
HONORS
p • . f James Mavor.
Five qaeetions to be answered.
1. Give an account of the feudal system under
S&xou rule.
2. What changes were introduced into the principles
of land tenure after the Norman conquest ?
3. What different meanings have been attached to
the expression " hundred " ?
4. Give an account of the Manorial Courts.
5. Describe the *' trinoda necessitas."
6. Give an account of the growth of a body of ad-
visers to the sovereign, i^art from the " Witan."
7. Give an outline of ** The Assize of Arms" (1181);
and state the principal provisions of the •' Assize of the
rorest"ai«^>-
8 Give an outline of the principal provisions of
** Magna Charta."
r
ianftifr0ft9 of ^Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE.
ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY AND
CALCULUS.
Examiner : Alfred Baker, M.A.
1. Find the equation to a straight line in the following
forms ;
(1) X coe a + y sin a m» p,
(2) y - a; tan 9 + 6.
In each of these cases find the intercepts in the axes.
Express the former of these equations in the form
J- —— « 1, so that the intercepts in the axes are shewn ;
a b
and the latter of these equations in the form y^s{x — a) tan 0,
so that the intercept on the axis of x appears explicitely.
2. Shew that the general equation of the first degree
Ax + By + C ^ 0
most represent a straight line.
3. Find the condition that the lines
Ax + By + C ^ 0
A'x + By+C'^0
maj be fMrallel.
Find the equation to the line through the point
(3, — 4) and parallel to2x — 3ys0.
4. Find the intersection of the lines
X - 2y + 4 = 0,
3a: + 6y — 21 « 0;
and find the equation to the line through their intersection
and also through the origin.
[over]
5. Find the equation to a circle in the various forms :
(1) (a:-.a)«4-(s^-ft)«=r?;
(2) y2 « 2ra — a^\
(3) «« -f y« = r^.
Find the centre and radius of the circle
^ ^ yi — Qx — 8 y =s 0,
and shew that the line Z x + 4yaK0 is the tangent to
this circle at the origin.
6w Find the equation to the ellipse in the form
^ _L yl- 1
a2 ■»■ 62 - ^'
Shew that the sum of the disiances from axiy point in
the ellipse to the foci is constant and equal to 2 a.
7. Define a limit and illusti-ate your definition.
Define the term difierential co-efiicient How is the
differential co-efficient of f(x) expressed 1
From the definition of differential co-efficient and
without appealing to any formula for differentiation, obtain
the dif. co-eff. of a^,
8. Prove the folllowiug :
dx
d^~r^-^dx; dlog*--; duv = vdu + udv.
Illustrate geometrically the last form.
9. Differentiate the following :
\ xf v^a« 4. a-a ' V a + aj ' ^ ' '
1
10. Trace the curves
ysi3a; — a;'; y«ss— 4a: — 7a;^.
Find the point in the second at which y is increasing
at the rate at which y is inci*easing in the first at the point
(2. 2).
Onflifr»Ui? of Sotonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
NEWTON I.
HONORS.
Examiner : H. J. Dawson, M.A.
1. State and prove Lemma I.
Explain clearly the application of this Lemma to
test the tendency of a varying quantity to reach a
lirait, using as illustration the sum to infinity of a
suitable geometric progression.
2. Prove Lamma IIL
Use this Lemma to find the mass of a rod whose
density varies as the square root of the distance from
one end, the rod being divided into parts in ratios
3. State and prove Lemma IV.
Find the area of a parabola, using for comparison
the volume of a cone of revolution.
4. Prove Lemma VIL
In the proof of Lemma V. the sum of the chords is
taken to be equal to the arc. Justify this, and show
that it does not involve the assumption of the theorem
of Lemma VIL
5. If two arcs ACB, ADB have the same chord AB,
and the same tangent at il, a point in the middle of
finite curvature, and any line AE he drawn inclined
at any finite angle to AB, and the subtense AE, then
when B approaches A and ultimately coincides with
it, the curvilinear triangles ACBE, ADBE are uti-
mately similar.
6 Find by Newton's method the radii of curvature
at the origin of the two branches of the curve
35' + ^ — <^xy = 0,
the axes being inclined at an angle o).
Shew how to obtain the chord of curvature in a
given direction of any curve.
mnmtvttitji of Sorontow
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULDS.
HONORS.
Examiner: Alfred Baker, M.A..
1. If u be given as a function of y, and y as a function
of X, obtain the formula for finding the differential coefficient
of u with respect to x.
Find the differential coefficient of e* with respect to
Given a; = r cos ^, y = r sin ^, find ^ in terms of
r, $ and differential coefficients of r with respect to 6,
2, Prove Leibnitz's theorem
B'^v = uD^ + nDuD^h) + , where i> = -^ i etc.
dx
If y = . shew that
(1 — a:2) Z>H-iy - (2 n + \) xD^y ^ n^D^^y ^ 0,
3. Shew how to evaluate indeterminate expressions that
take the forms
(1) 0 X a; (2) <x«; ex — a .
What is the essential difference between the preced-
ing and sach a form as 1* t
Find the area of a circle regarding it as the limit of
A veffoJAT polygon with au infinite number of sides.
a:^ -j-^ + s= n (n — 1) (n — 2) w, etc.
4. Obtain Euler's theorem reepecting homogeneons
functions in the generalized forms
If u BK sin v where t; is a homogeneous function of
the nth degree, shew that
05^1-7-5 + 2 ajy -; — ; — ♦- v^ -7-5 « ti (w— 1) v COS V — nn;* sin r.
5. (1) Find the equation to the tangent to a curve in
the form
du du
(2) Shew that, in any curve,
Express in polar co-ordinates the curve
7. Shew how to find the envelope of the familj of
curves y(x, y, a) ^ 0, where a is the variable parameter.
What phenomenon presents itself when the pi-eceding
equation breaks into the form.
<p{^y)'\- F («» y> «) 4' (a, y)^oi
Find the envelope of the straight line
X — ad y — 2 a
sin 6 1 + cos 0
where 6 is the variable parameter.
8. What is meant by saying that two curves have a
contact of the first, second order 1
Shew that curves that have a contact of an even
order cut each other, and those with an odd order of contact
touch without cutting, at the point of contact
Shew that when, at a point, the radius of curvature
is a maximum or minimum the circle of curvature does not
cut the curve.
O. (1) Trace the curre
(2) Diaoover the nature of the curve
r coe 20 b a
at the origin, and also find its asymptotes.
10. The curve r ^»f(6) rolls upon a straight line ; shew
liO'w to obtain in terms of x and y the equation to the roulette
-traced oat bj its pole.
Applj your result to find the equation to the cjcloid
in the form
X
2 a sin-i J^ -v^2ay-.y«,
the rolling circle being r ss 2 a cos 0.
9nftiersft9 of {Toronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
INTEGRAL CALCULUS.
HONORS.
Examine!* : Alfred T. DeLurt, B.A.
1. Shew that integration (between limits) gives the
limit of the sum of an infinite number of infinitely small
quantitiea
By constructing a geometrical representation of the
integral
y ' v^o» - aj» .
dx
£nd the value of this integral.
Find its value by direct analysis.
2. Evaluate
dx ,^^ >- dB
J (x —
{x - 1) %/«» - 3 a: - 10
3. Shew how to reduce n in the following integrals :
(a) /Bin. B . ae, H) /^^ .
4. Evaluate, in the form of a power series in x,
r* dx
and infer the expansion of sin - ^ a:.
5. 'DvaoM'BiA the integrals
/ i • / e'* .dx
• (a-a:)J <
lover]
Evaluate
(a)/^ log sin 6 . dft (h)/ «"«• . dx
If u =J <p (sB, a) . dx^ where a and b are f anctions
of OL find -7— •
aa
6. Find
(a) The area of a loop of the curve
y« (a« + x«) = a:' (a* - »»).
(6) The area between the curve r = a (sec B i- tan 0)
and its asymptote r cos 0 » 2 a.
7. Find the length of the curve
y-log(l-a:«)
measured from the origin out to the point corresponding
to the value x of the abscissa.
8. If a. surface be generated by the complete revolution
of an arc of a plane curve Ubout an axis in its plane the
area of the surface generated is equal to the product of the
length of the revolving curve by the length of the path
described by the centre of gravity of that length.
Obtain the expression in polar co-ordinates for the
element of volume at a point (r, 0, ^) and employ the cor*
responding integral to find the volume of an ellipsoid.
9. If a, a', 6, b' are constants the order of integration in
y y 9^yy)dxdy
h a
is indifferent.
9lnltKv»lt9 of Sovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
SOLID GEOMETRY.
HONORS.
JSxaminer : Alfred Baker, M.A.
1. J£ ly nij n he the direction ratios of a line, axes
oblique, sbew that
1 ^ Z* + m* + n* + 2 Z/» cos (xy) + ... + ..
2. When the equation to a line is given in the form
a« + 6y + caf=l "j
a'x + b'y + e'z ^ I)
express it in* the symmetrical form
a; - a
~l~ "" ••• "^ •••
3. Find the shortest distance between the lines
X - a
~l "^ ••• "^ •••
X " a'
Find also the equation to the line perpendicular to
and intersecting both of these lines.
4. Find the equation to the line through the point
(a, ;9, y) and intersecting both the lines in the preceding
question. '
5. Find the locus of the middle points of a system of
paralled chords of the oonicoid F (cc, y, z) s 0, the direction
ooaines of the chords being (2, m, n).
Shew how the equations to the principal planes of the
coincoid are found, «.«., those planes which are at right
angles to the chords they bisect
Prove that the principal planes are mutually at right
angles to each other.
[ovkb]
6. Shew that an infinite number of sets of three dia-
meters exists, such that the plane containing any two of
these diameters bisects aJl chords parallel to the third.
If (aj^, y„ »,), (a„ y„ «,), («„ y,, «,) be the coordin-
ates of the extremities of three conjugate diameters, shew-
that co-ordinates of the centre of the plain section through
these extremities are
7. Shew how to find the axes and area of any central
plane section of an ellipsoid.
Shew how the axes and area, of any non-central
parallel section may be deduced.
Shew that the area of the section throng the
extremities of the principal diameters in
27r
8. Prove that the h3rperboloid of one sheet can be gener-
ated by two sets of straight lines.
Shew that no two lines of the same set intersct
The equations of the generating lines of the surface
xy + yz+zx-k-a^^O
at the point * •
are a;(l J. m) a am - y = =f {mz -+- a).
9. Prove the characteristic property of the family of
conicoids
a* -i^ X b* + X c^ -^ X
where X is the variable parameter.
Shew that wheu two such conicoids cut one another
it is at right angles.
10. Obtain Euler's formula
1 cos3^g sin'g
P ' Pi Pi, '
connecting the curvatures in normal sections at any point of
a surface.
Obtain Meunier's formula
^ = />^ COB ft
connecting the curvature in an oblique section with the
curvature in the normal section through the same tangent
line.
9tiftifr0ft9 ot CTovotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR
ELKOTRICITY AND MAGNETISM,
HONORS.
Examiner : J. C. McLennan, B. A., Ph.D.
1. Define inclination, declination, magnetic moment,
magnetic field.
Explain how to compare the magnetic moments
of two magnets.
2. Describe two methods of determining the inclina-
tion at any point on the earth's surface.
Also show, in a simple manner, how the horizon-
tal component of the intensity of the earth's magnetic
field may be found at any place.
3. Define potential.
Shew by means of a diagram of the lines of force,
or otherwise, that the potential of an insulated charged
conductor is affected by the approach of a second in-
sulated uncharged conductor.
Hence explain the theory of a condenser.
4. Describe the construction and action of a quad-
nuit electrometer.
How is it used to compare the electromotive
forces of voltaic cells.
Shew that the electrical work done in charging
a oonductor is equal to \ M.Y., M. being the charge
and V. the potential of the conductor.
5. Explain with diagrams the theory of the Wheat-
>taie bridge, and establish any formula necessary for
determining the resistance of a oonductor by the use
of this instrument
[ovbb]
6. Describe the construction and give the theory of
the tangent galvanometer.
7. Describe the construction of I. a standard dark
cell, or II. a battery suitable for ringing electric beUs.
8. What is an induced current. Dlustrate by two
experiments.
Explain with diagrams the principle of any form
of dynamo.
9. A magnetic needle is poised over a rotating^
horizontal copper plate; explain the motion of the
needle which ensues.
^nitirr0iti> of Sovotito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECXDND AND THIRD YEARS.
ACOUSTICS AND PHYSICAL OPTICS.
B.^„^ • ^,.„ . f J. Loudon, LL.D.
taking the Optics may choose any five questions from
the Acoostics.
ACOUSTICS,
1. Describe any method of determining the velocity
of sound in air. What is the effect of temperature on
the velocity ?
2. Define pitch of a note. Describe Lissajons'
method of comparing the vibration frequencies of two
forks.
3. Establish the formula for velocity of transmis-
sion of wave motion.
A fork of 1000 F.S. is to be mounted on a
resonance box closed at one end ; determine the length
of the box (velocity of sound = 340 metres).
4. Describe the major diatonic scale. If the stan-
dard pitch be il = 870 F.& calculate the frequencies
of the remaining notes.
5. State the law of transverse vibmtions of strings.
A steel spring 1 metre long under a tension of
16 kgm. gives a note C = 512 ; it the length be made
60 cm. and the tension 9 kgm. find the note produced.
6. Show by diagrams the nature of the reflection of
sound waves at the end of stopped and open organ
pipes. What is meant by stationary waves ?
7. What is meant by beats ? If two forks of fre-
quencies n and n-m are sounded together, what notes
besides the fundamentals are present ? How could
[oyxk]
the vibration frequency of a fork be determined by a
method of beats ?
8. What isjmeant by interference of sound waves ?
Describe any experiment to illustrate interference.
9. Give a short account of the vowel theory.
PHYSICAL OPTICS,
(JjlO. What is meant by interference of light ? De-
scribe a process of color photography based on the
principle of interference.
■^11. Show by a diagram the production of diffraction
bands by light passing through a narrow rectangular
aperture. Describe the construction of zone plates.
"^12. Describe any method of determining the wave
length of light.
13. What is plane polarized light? Indicate two
methods of obtaining light in this condition.
14. Describe the method of analyzing sugar solu-
tions by means of polarized light.
mnitttvuita ot CTovotito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
GEOMETRICAL OPTICS.
HONORS.
Examiner : G. R. Anderson, M. A.
1. Explaio the terma, geometrical shadow^ umbra^
penunhbra.
If the diameter of the sun s 880»000 miles, diameter
of mooD s 2,000 miles, radius of earth's orbit » 90,000,000
miles, and radius of moon's orbit as 240,000 miles : find the
dth of the path of totality on the earth's surface in an
lipae of the sun.
2. Show by a diagram the position of the image of an
object in a plane mirror.
If two plane mirrors are inclined to each other at an
ajigle 30*, find the number of images of an object placed
between them at an angle 20* from one of them.
112
3. Deduce the formula - -f -7 ss - for spherical mirrors.
p p r
A Tertical rod 3 inches in length is placed midway
between the centre of curvature and the principal focus of a
ooDcaYe mirror whose radius of curvature a 16 inches :
find the position and magnitude of the image.
4. Show the path of a ray of light through a prism.
Determine the deviation : what is the condition that the
deviation may be a minimum 1
Obtain the formula for finding the index of refraction
by means of a prism.
5. Give a graphical representation of the changes in jiosi-
tian and magnitude of the image formed by a convex lens
[OVIB]
as the object moves up from infinity to a position between
the principal focus and the surface of the len&
Find the focal length of a concave lens from the fol-
lowing data : —
A light is placed 20 cm. from a convex lens and the
image is formed 15 cm. from the lens ; the two lenses are
then placed in contact, the distances from light to the lenses
and from the lenses to image are respectively 40 and 50 cm.
6. Trace the paths of the rays through the Galilean tele-
scope or opera glass. What advantages does this instrument
possess over the ordinary form of telescope 1
Show how to determine the magnification f
7. Explain what is meant by chramciUc aherratian. Show
how a combination (1) of prisms, (2) of lenses, may be made
free from this defect
amiDtvivftff m ^rovmifov
1
ANNUAL EXAMINATIOXS : 1901.
SECOND YEAJEL
STATICS^
HONORS.
V
Excuminer : J. S. Plaskett, B.A.
1. State Newton's Second Law of Motion.
Show how it may be applied, graphically and
analytically, in measuring forces.
Find the measure of an erg if 1 metre, 1 deci~
gram, and 1 hour are the units of length, mass, and
time.
2. Find the sum of the moments of a given set of
forces, acting in one plane, about any point in the
plane.
Prove that the sum of the moments of two forces
about any point in their plane is equal to the moment
of the resultant about the same point.
3. Obtain the conditions of equilibrium for (a) any
number of forces acting on a particle (b) a set. of co-
planar forces acting on a rigid body.
A heavy beam rests against a smooth horizontal
plane and a smooth vertical wall. A cord attached to
the lower extremity of the beam passes over a pulley at
the base of the wall and sustains a weight P. Find
the position of equilibrium and the pressures on the
plane and wall.
4. Show that, generally, coplanar forces acting on a
rigid body can be reduced to a single force and find its
position and line of action.
Find also the equation to the line of action of the
resultant of any number of parallel forces acting on a
rigid body.
[ovbb]
5. Define Coefficient of Friction and explain how to
determine it experimentally.
Find the direction and magnitude of the least
force required to move a heavy particle of mass M at
rest on a rough horizontal plane.
A ladder is placed with one end on a rough hon-
zontal floor and the other against a rough vertical wall,
the vertical plane containing the ladder being perpen-
dicular to the wall. Determine the positions of equili-
brium.
6. Find the centre of gravity of a quadrant of an
elliptical plate.
If at the vertices of a triangle there be placed
three masses, each of which is proportional to the
opposite side, show that their centre of gravity is the
centre of the inscribed circle.
7. Find the form assumed by a uniform heavy string
suspended between two points not in the same vertici3
line.
Obtain the diflerential equations for determining
the curve in the general case.
8. Find the attraction of (a) a uniform spherical
shell on a particle just outside, and explain the abrupt
change in the attraction on placing the particle just
inside the shell ; (b) a right circular cylinder on a par-
ticle situated on the axis.
anfuevisns of Covonto.
ANNUAL EXA^HNATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
PARTICLE DYNAMICS,
HONORS.
ExamiTier : W. J. Loudon, B.A.
1. When a particle moves in any plane curve shew that
ds
its velocity at any instant may be represented by -z- -
Henoe deduce expressions for its accelerations at the same
instant^ measured along the tangent and normal.
2. .A particle is projected from a point with a velocity V,
at an inclination of 45"* to the horizon. Find the equation
Off its path.
3. If at a point there be a centre of attraction and a
particle be placed at a distance a from this point, shew that,
if the attractive force vary directly as the distance from the
pointy the distance passed over in any time t from rest is of
tbe form a cos s/fi L
¥ind the time of a small oscillation of a simple
pendulum.
4. If a particle be subjected to an attractive force vary-
ing inversely as the square of the distance from a fixed
point, and be placed initially at a distance a from the centre
of force, shew that it will perform oscillations of periodic
timo
2 VoT'
2/1
fi being the force at unit distance.
A body falls from a height h to the earth. Shew that
its Telocity at the earth's surface is equal to
[over]
R being the radius of the earth.
5. (a) If a centre of force be situated at a point, the law
of the force being - t shew that the time to the origin from
OS
a distance a (from rest) is
ylr,r
a_
(6) If the force be jux ~ ^, find time to origin from a
distance a (from rest).
6. A particle is projected with velocity F at a diatance
a from a point 0, where there is an attractive force varjing
directly as the distance : shew that the path is an ellipse^
and find its axes.
Aiso shew that the velocity at any subsequent distance
r is equal to
If the force be repulsive shew that the path will be a
branch of a hyperbola.
7. In the case of central forces prove the following :
d'u P h, ^ 0 . ^ .
— s- + u = X • v ss — ; r — «B constant :
d0* A'w" p' dt «"»"*"*'
/>• dr
8. (a) If a partid^be describing an ellipse about a centre
of force at its centre, shew that the sum of the reciprocals
of its angular velocities about the foci is constant.
{b) A body is projected vertically from the surface of
the earth ; shew that, if its velocity of projection be greater
than s/ 2 gB, E being the radius of the earth, it will never
descend.
(c) A pambola is described with accelerations F, At
tending to the focus and parallel to the axis respectively :
prove that
1 d . „ ^. dA ^
Ti- dF <^'-*> * *: = <>•
r being the focal distance.
WllnitttvtHtv of STovonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
PROBLEMS.
HONORS.
( Alfred Baker, M.A.
Examivers: < H. J. Dawson, M.A.
( Alfred T. DeLury, B. A.
KoTK. — Candidates are reqoeated to return answers to (questions in
sections A and B in separate books endorsed accordingly.
A.
1. In the ellipeoid
X* y* z*
4. z^ -i- — I =s 1
a' 6' c'
if a tetrahedron be formed by three tangent planes mutually
at right angles to each other, and by a fourth making an
angle of 60 with each of these, tbe locus of the foot of the
perpendicular from the origin in this fourth plane is
2. If (Z, w», w), (r, m', n'), (r, m", n") be the direction
coaneB of three lines through the origin, shew that the
equation to the plane which passes through the origin and
whose normal makes equal angles with these three lines, is
X i (mn' — m'n) A {m'n — rnn') + {ran — mn") |
4- y {...} + «{...}= 0.
3. Two systems of rectangular axes have the same origin.
If sn ellipsoid whose centre is at the origin cut them at
distances a» fr, c or a\ b\ c respectively, then
l + i + i = J_ + l + l
a* ^ 6* ^ c* «" ^ &" ^ c"
[ovxb]
4. Find the asymptotes of the curve
r sin 2 6 = a
and trace the curve.
5. Obtain the equation to the curve which touches all the
curves included under the equation
where 0 is the variable parameter.
B.
I. The area of a closed curve which is the envelope of the
line, X cos ^ 4- y sin ^ s p, where p Ib & function of ^^ is
the value of the integral
taken completely round the curve.
II. Evaluate the definite integrals :
w
/4 /"» gin X
tan tf . log cot tf . (ftf ; (6) / dx.
0 0 *
III. Given that
(M;»-4-2Aa:y + 6y« + 2^+2/y + c = 0
is the equation of an ellipse, find its area.
lY. Find the volume of the solid bounded by the para-
boloid
y* -f «• « 4 a (re -f a)
and the sphere
a;« 4- y« + »• = c*
supposing 0 greater than ok
Y. A number of equal squares in one plane with their
centres coincident are arranged consecutively, their sides
making equal small angles, each with the adjacent ones;
prove that the limit of the length of the serrated edge, when
the number of squares is indefinitely increased, is equal to
the circumference of a circle whose radius is a aide of the
square.
YI. Use Lemma lY to find the centre of gravity of a
rod AB oi length Z, the density at any point M varying as
%/2* — AM*y using for comparison any suitable geometrical
magnitudes.
i
9nfiiet«ftff oC Covatito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND
MINERALOGY.
CALCUIDS.
Eooaminer : Alfbed Bakkr, M.A.
1. Define a limU of a function.
Uliutrate your definition.
Pro^e that the limit of
log (1 + x)
X •
as X approaches the ralae 0 is unity.
2. Pro^e the following :
dx
alogx^ — ; d sinx am COB X dx;
X
dx
d ooeec— ^os™ —
3. Dififerentiate the following :
«* OC0 x; (a + hvF^Y i ^^^ * ^'^^ ^ > ** «*»o'"^ *.
4. Evaluate the following indeterminate forms :
loff co« «, ^ 05 — sinaj-
-=-: when X ^ 0: — r; r when x ^ 0;
X sin X a; (1 — cos 0?)
1 — tan X , re
when x-r-.
1 — ^/^mn X 4
5. Shew that for hoth maximum and minimum values
of f{x)y y (x)^ 0; also that for maximum values /^ (x) is
negative and for minimum values /" (x) is positive.
[ovxr]
What value of x will make (a: — 3)2 (x + 1) + 3 a
maximum, and what value of x will make it a minimum 1
A length a of wire is cut into two parts which are
reepectively bent into the form of a circle and of a square.
Find when the sum of the areas is a minimum.
6. Shew that if at any point of a curve y -7^ is positive
the curve at that point is convex to the axis of x^ and if
negative it is concave.
Define a point of inflexion, and obtain the analytical
test for it.
Find the point of inflexion on the curve
7. Trace the curve
• y = 2 a;8 — 9 a;2 + 12 a; — 5.
Find the radius of curvature at the point
« = I, y « — i-
8. Integrate the following :
y] /sin— ixrfas; /xlogxdx;
V X* J- a* -^ -^
dx
Jix —
(« - 1) (x - 2)
9. Find the area of the ellipse
o« ^ 62 •
Also find the centre of gravity of half of it cut off by
the axis minor.
10. Find the volume generated by the revolution of the
preceding ellipse about its axis major.
Also find the centre of gravity of that half of this
ellipsoid which lies to right of origin.
ainftifrsfts oc SorotitiB^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
GEOLOGY.
PASS.
Eocammer: A. P. Coleman.
1. Describe and give the composition of each of the
chief dark colored minerals found in eruptive rocks.
2. Define granite, slate and limestone, mentioning
their uses and where each rock may be found.
3. Describe the action of glaciers, showing the
results of their work in Ontario. What evidences
show w^here glaciers have been at work ?
4. Give an account of the Silurian rocks of Canada,
mentioning the more important fossils of the time.
5. Divide up the Cenozoic, and describe some of the
mamtna^s of the time. What general changes went on
in the animaJ life of the Cenozoic?
6. Discuss in a general way the growth of North
America from the Archsean to the present.
\
Binnier«ftff of Soromiu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
CHEMISTRY AND MINERALOGY AND
NATURAL SCIENCE.
MINERALOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner : A. P. Coleman.
1. What relationship has cleavage to the crystal
forms of minerals ? Give examples of different kinds
of cleavage and of minerals without cleavage.
2. Give the properties, chemical composition and
uses of corundam, fluorite and apatite. What colors
are found in each, and of what importance are these
colors ?
3. Describe and compare augite, hornblende and
mica, showing where they occur and what uses they
have, if any.
4. How is the group of zeolites distinguished ?
Describe three zeolites, mentioning Canadian localities
where they occur.
5. Give a classification of minerals according to their
cbemical relationships, and name one mineral in each
class.
Sltittiersfts oC iiroromo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
LITHOLOGY AND DYNAMIC GEOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner: A. P. Colemak, M.A., Ph.D.
1. What is the distinction between massive, schis-
tose and aedimentaiy rocks, and in a general way how
do these different classes of rocks originate ?
2. Describe the general character and composition
of syenite, basalt, gneiss and conglomerate. Give
localities for each rock.
3. Show the evidence for secular elevations and
depressions, and discuss the causes of changes of level.
4. What is meant by metamorphism ? Show what
factors are of im{K)rtance in metamorphism and how
the rocks are modified by their action.
0. Show the more important ways in which lakes
M« formed, illu.strating when pos.sible by Canadian
examples. Why is Canada so well provided with
lakes?
6. Discuss the geological work going on along the
^oreof Lake Ontario. Illustrate by sketches.
mnl\ttt»lts OS SToronio.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ZOOLOGY.
Examiner : R. R. Bunsley, B.A., M.B.
1. Describe the various modes of reproduction in
the Protozoa, comparing them with those of the
Metazoa.
2. Give an oatline, with explanatory notes and
examples, of the classification of the Coelenterata.
3. Describe, in a general way, and indicate the
reciprocal relations of, the coelome and bloodvascular
system of the Chaetopoda, Mollusca, and Arthropoda.
4. Draw a diagram to illustrate the structure of a
primitive moUusk. In what respect do the Amphi-
Aeura and Pelecypoda respectively, resemble and differ
from such a type.
5. Give an account of the structure and life history
of the parasitic flat worms.
lanftiersfts of ^ovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
BOTANY.
HONORS.
Examiner : E. C. Jeffrey, Ph.D.
1 - Give an account of the structure of wood in the
Oymnospernis and indicate in what respects it is of
cIa3sifica.tory value.
2. Explain some of the adaptations of plants which
enable thein to endure the lack of proper water-supply.
3. Describe the structure of the male and female
Grameiiophyte in the Conifers.
4. Outline the characteristic features of the Nym-
ph seaceae, naming the commoner Canadian genera and
their adaptations to their particular modes of life.
5. What is meant by the term central cylinder ?
Illustrate by reference to the root and shoot of plants.
WLnitftvults oc CTorottto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
PHYSIOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner: A. B. BIacallum.
1. Give an account of muscle contraction and show
its relation to tetanus.
2. Explain how changes in the heart beat may-
be brought about.
3. Give an account of intestinal absorption.
4. What are the general functions of the cerebrum,
mid-bi-ain, cerebellum, and spinal cord ?
5. Give an account of the oxygen of respiration
froni the moment it enters the pulmonary alveoli till
it disappears in the tissues.
j
2Anttier0lt9 of Sovotito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
DEPARTMENTS OF CHEMISTRY AND MINER-
ALOGY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY, NATURAL
SCIENCE, MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS.
ELEMENTARY PHYSICAL CHKMISTRY.
Examiner: W. Lash Miller.
NoTK. — Tftbles of logarithms mny be brought into the ExamiDation
HalL
1. What theoretical interpretation of the following
facts has been given ?
(a) The products of electrolysis appear at the
electrodes.
(6) After a current has been sent through a
uniform solution *of potassium sulphate, the quantity
of undecoQiposed potassium sulphate at the cathode is
greater than that at the anode.
(c) Ohm's law holds for a solution of copper
sulphate between copper electrodes.
(rf) The molecular conductivity of a solution of
acetic acid is increased by the addition of water, that
of a solution of hydrochloric acid is not.
2. What is Faraday's Law ?
Four U-tubes provided with platinum electrodes
are filled, the first with a solution of cupric chloride,
the second with a solution of sodium chloride, the
third with a solution of sodium sulphate, and the
fourth with dilute sulphuric acid. A current of elec-
tricity is sent through all the solutions, in series, until
63'1 milligrammes of copper are deposited in the first
cell. What are the products of decomposition in each
[over]
case ? Which of them will be found at the anode, and
which at the cathode ? What weight of each will be
produced ?
3. On what factors does the rate of a chemical
reaction depend ? What is the " Mass Law " ? How
may it be deduced from the results of experiments on
the rates of chemical reactions ?
4. Define : Incomplete chemical reaction, Reversible
chemical reaction, Chemical equilibrium. Qive ex-
d.mples of each.
How may the following reactions be accounted
for?
(a) Barium chloride is precipitated from its solu-
tion in water by hydrochloric acid.
(6) Antimony trisulphide is precipitated from its
solution in concentrated hydrochloric acid by the
addition of water.
(c) Lead oxalate is soluble in dilute nitric acid,
lead sulphate is not.
(d) Silver chloride is soluble in a solution of
potassum cyanide.
5. What is meant by the " Heats of formation " of
chemical compounds ?
From the following heats of formation, calculate
the amount of heat given off when- one gramme of
zinc is dissolved in an equivalent quantity of dilute
sulphuric acid : —
ZnSO, aq === 2485 K. HjSO^ aq = 2109 K.
How may the heat of formation of water from
+ -
H and OH be determined ?
i
Anftoftttftv ot ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR CM. & P.O.
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.
Eocami/ner : F&ank B. Eenbice, B. A., Ph.D.
(Tables of logarithms may be used in the examination).
1. In what sense is the centigrade thermometer
scale arbitrary ? It has been suggested that such
intervals of temperature be called equal on cooling
through which a unit mass of water gives out equal
quantities of heat. Explain why this would be no
less arbitrary.
2. Deduce the relation
dA^dT
Q T'
indicating clearly the fundamental premisses. Show
how this relation may be employed to calculate the
elevation of boiling point of a solution from its mole-
cular composition and the heat of vaporisation of the
solvent.
3. In what respects are dilute solutions analogous
to gases. Describe shortly experiments on which the
analogy is founded.
4. Write a note on the behaviour of gases under
high pressures.
5. Give a full account of the facts which are collated
by the hypothesis of electrolytic dissociation.
Find the vapour tension of a decinormal aqueous
solution of sodium chloride at 100° C.
6. Analysis of a solution of a mixture of potassium
chloride and iodide before and after electrolysis reveals
the fact that the relation between the quantity of
chlorine and iodine undergoes no alteration by the
[OYKB.]
pasaage of the carrent. Explain f ally what conclusion
may be drawn from the above statement regarding
the rates of migration of K and I ions and the con*
ductivity of the individual solutions of the two salts.
A current passing through solutions of silver
nitrate and copper sulphate in series reduced 0.3592 g.
of silver. In the copper solution about the cathode
were found
before electrolysis 0.3617 g. CuO
after " 0.2758 " "
Find the " share of transport " for copper.
[Cu = 63, Ag = 107].
atiiUftisiti? of STotonto^
AKNCJAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR CHEMISTRY AND MINERALOGY.
THIRD YEAR PHYSIOS AND CHEMISTRY-
NATURAL SCIENCE.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
Tuesday, May 14th.
1. Distinguish between primary, secondary and ter-
tiary alcohols. To which of the three kinds does
phenol belong ? Give your reasons and compare the
phenols generally with the aromatic alcohols.
2. Give general methods for preparing ove of the
following : (a) The aldehydes ; (b) the acids of the
CnHjnOs series; (c) the hydroxy-monobasic acids of
the paraffin series.
3. How can the hydrocarbons, aldehydes and acids
of the ethylene series be prepared from the corre-
sponding paraffin compounds ? How can acrylic acid
and propionic acid be prepared from hydracrylic acid ?
4. Mesitylene has an empirical formula CgHi2i ftnd
can be prepared from acetone by the withdrawal of there
molecules of water. Show by this reaction what its
constitutional or graphic formula is.
5. Show how to synthesize the higher acids of the
paraffin series by means of the ethyl-aceto-acetate
reaction. How are the properties of malonic ether
madeuse of in synthesizing ethereal salts of the higher
bibasic acids ?
6. What is the action of nitrous acid on amido com-
pounds of the benzene series ? Show how to prepare
by means of this reaction : (a) C^HjOH ; (6) CjH, ; (c)
C»H,C1 ; (d) C.H,CH,OH.
i!ilniucr0tuj of z:oromo>
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIUD YEAR.
GKEEL
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner: A. L. Langfoiid, B.A,
Note — Pass candidates must oot omit the parsing.
ARISTOPHANES, WASPS.
Translate :
(a) <i? airavS* ^fitv rvpavvu; iari koX ^vifcofjuoTai,
fiv T€ fiel^ov fiv T iKaTTOif '/rpayjjid tc; KaTTjyopfj,
^ €ya) ovK fiKovaa Tovuofx ovBi 'TrevTrjKovT iron/*
vw hk iroWoi Tov rapi^ov^ iariv a^tcorkpa*
&ar€ KoX Bf) TovuofjL avT^<; iv ayopa fcvXiuBerai.
fjv fjbiv oovrfTai ri^ 6p(f>(o^„ ficfi^pdha^ Si /u.r, diXt),
evdew^ €lpr)-)^ 6 ir(o\<av TrXrjaLov ra^ /Ae/x/SpaSa?*
o5to9 iyjrcjvelv eoi^ iv0p(a7ro<; eVl rvpavviBi,
ffv Se yiJT€U)v irpoaavrfj ti? h<f>vaL^ rfhva^d Tt,
t) Xa')(av6'rr(oXt^ irapafiXiy^aad <f>r)<Ti dareptp'
eliri fioi, yi]T€iop aire*?, irojepov iirl rvpavviht ;
rj vofjLi^€i<i rd*; ^AO/jua^ aoi (l)ep€iv rfBva/iara ;
Tavra yap TovToi<i uKOvetv ^Se\ el Kai vuv iyi>
TOV irarkp on ^oiXofxat tovtohv diraXXa')(0ima r&v
dp0po<f>oLTO<TUKo<f>avToBLfcoTaXai7r(opa)v rpOTriov
^rjv ^Lov yevpalov &(nr€p M6/3u;^09, airiav ey((o
-ravra Spav ^vvoyfiOTrj^ £>u Kal <f>povw TupappiKa.
(6) dXXd TO XoiTTOv rSiv 7roirjT&v,
& SaifjLOvioi, Toiff; ^ffTOVirra^
Kaivov TA Xeyeiv Ka^vpiaKCw
aripyere /xaXXov koI depairevere,
icaX rd vorjpMTa adl^eod^ avT&p.
1. Scan, naming metre, the lines in (b).
2. Ex)>lain syntax of the followinjj words in (a).
fj^Xif (v. 1) and roi/roi?, and give the principal parts of
airaXKa'xdkvTa,
DEMOSTHENES.
Translate :
(tt) Kat fir)v ov')(^ xmep r&v Xatov v/jlIp re Kat tlol tw//
SXK(ov avOpdnoov €<t0' 6 klvSvvo^* ov 'yap v(f> avrqi}
iroL'qaaadav rfjv woXiv ffovXerai <I>iXt7r7ro9 vfio^Vy ov,
hXX* o\q)<% aveXelp, olBe yap aKpi^S}^ on ZovXeveiv
fl€V Vfiei^ OVT €U€\lJ<TeT€ OVT , (UV €U€XrfT€, e'TTiaTf]-
a€a0€ (ap^eiv yap eltodaTe)^ irpdyfjuata Be '7rdpaa')(€iv
avTf^t, &v Katpov Xd^r^rej nrXeifo rayp aXX'cop dp0p(o-
TTOiv dirdpicop ivpijoeade, hid ravia vuayp ovyl
<f>ela€Tai, elirep eyKpa7r)<; yeptjo-erai, a>^ ovp virkp
Twi/ ha'-^droiP iaofxevov tov dySiPo^ ovtco 'Trpoa"qKei
yiypdoa/ceip^ xal tovs TreirpojcoTa^ avTov<; €K€iP(p
(f>apepS>^ fxiaelv Kal cnrorvfiTraPiaar ov yap eartp^
ovK ear I to>p efo) t^q 7r6Xe<o? e')^dpa)p Kparfjaat,,
Trplp &p Toi>9 €P avrfj rf) ToXet KoXaarfT i^^Opovs,
a\X' CLpdyicT) tovtol^ axTtrep irpo^oXoi^ TrpoainaL-
aapra^ varepi^eip eKeiPcop.
(h) Et Be Ti^ vfjL(op, & dpSpe<; *A0rfpaioi, top ^CKiinrop
op&p evjv')(ovtna <f>o0ep6p elpai pofii^et Kal BvcrrroXi-
pLtjTOP, aco^popo^ fiep upSpb<: XP^i'^^'' '^popoiar fieydXt)
yap poiri), /xdXXop Se to oXop rj tv^V ^'^^t* 'rrp6<:
dirapra ra twi/ apOpdyrrcop irpdyfiaTa* Kara iroXKov^i
fieproi rporrov^ eXocr^ ap Tt9 ov^ fjrrop rr)p r)p,€repap
evrv^iap ^ rr)P CKeipov rrapd re yap rtap rrpoyopcup
€K TrXeioi/ov xp^^^^ rrapeiXrj(l}afiep rr)P eviaipuopiap
ov rovrov /jlopop, dXXd avpeXopri <l>pdaat rrdprcjp
rwp €P MdKehopta ^aaiKevadprcop' Kaxelpoi fjLr)p
^AOrjpaloi^ <\>6pov^ TjpeyKap, ^ 8' tf/ierepa 7r6Xt9 ovSevi
TTO) rcop aTTapKOP.
(c) Tfc OVP, <l>ai7) Tt9 &P9 ravra pvp Xeyw ; on (fnfpX
ieip v/Lta?, iTretSrf ro fiep rrdpra^ fiLa'Oo<f>opeip Suo'^e-
paipovai ripe<;, rb Si (TVPraxOrjPaL Kal rrapaaKevaa-
Brjpai rrapd rrdprwp '^^tjaifiop elpav SoKifid^erai,
hprevdep dp^aadai rov rrpdyfjuaro^;, Kal rrpoOeipai
rrepl rovrcop rw fiovXofjLepq> yp<op/qp drro<l>riPacdai.
o)? oCtox? ^X^^ ^^ ^*^^ vfiel^ PVP rreiaOrfre rovrav
Kaipov elpai POfiiocpre^^ orap avrwp et^ ^P^^^^
eXur^re, eroifia v'Trdp^er &p S' aKaiplap r^adfiepoi
rrapiBfjre, orap Sej) 'XPV^^^*'' '^^'^^ apayKaaOriaeade
rrapaaxevd ^eaOai,
1. Parse in (a) ttXc/cd and ayeivo^i' Give and dis-
tinguish the constructions which follow Trpiv.
2. Parse in (6) ^vvekovri,
SIGHT TRANSLATION, FOR PASS ONLY.
*0 iJbkv ovv iraptov Kaipb<;, & cfi/Spe? ^KOrjvaloi^
€i7r€p TTore^ 7ro\\rj<: (lypovTiSo^ Kal ^ovXij^ Belrar
€ya} Be ov^ o rt ^^ Trepi t&v wapoPToop (rvfi^ovXev-
aai j^dXeTrioraTOV rj^ovnaL, aXK* ckciv* diropA, riva
')(pr} TpoTTov, & avSpe^ ^AOrjvaioi, Trpo? vud^ ire pi
ain&v ehreu/. TreTreiafiaL yap i^ &v iraptov Kal
QKovwv avvoiBa tcL TrXiio) rcl>v Trpar/fidTtov v/jm^
iicir€<l>€vy€vai r<^ fir) ffovXeaOai, t^ Siovra iroLeiv, ov
to) arj avvthai, a^i& Be vfid^y &v fiera irappr^tria^
Troia)fiac tov? \6yov^, inrofiiveiv, tovto Bewpovvra^
ct roK'qOri Xer/o) xal Bia tovto, Xva tcl XoLira ^cXtixju
ycvrirar opdre yap w ifc tov 7rp6^ X^P**' Brjfirfyopelv
ivioxj^ eh irdv TrpoeXrjXvde p,0')(6rfpiaf; tcl irapovTa.
HONORS ONLY.
J. Give a succinct account of the steps by which
rhiJip gained the mastei-y over Greece.
2. Comment on :
^ucelaOab yap <f>T]aiv upoTepo^ ttoW' avToiri ev
7r€7roif)/uo^,
''"a flip ov <f>av€pa)<:, dXX* eiriKovpoiv KpiBB-qv hepoKTi
7roi7}TaU,
M'ijLif)adfjLevof; tyjv ¥iVpvKXeov^ /MavTeiap Koi. Biopoiap,
^^^ dXXoTpia^ yaaTcpas epBv^ K(Ofi€pBiKa TroXXa
j(€aadaiM ,
'^' ^ame and describe the parts of a parabasis.
\
^niticrslti? oi i^orotiio.
ANNQAL KXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
GREEK-
HONORS.
J- . ( G. J, Laing, Ph.D.
Examiners :)^^^^^ Carruthers. M.A.
I.
THUCYDIDES.
Translate :
" OifKovv xpV oiJre rod davarov iff ^7}fiia w i'^ey-
yvm 'mar€V(TavTa<; ')(€lpov ^ov\€vaaa6ait ovt€ aviX-
TTLarov /earaaTTJaai to*? dTroardcriv w ov/c earai
fierayv&vai xai Sri iv fipa'^yrdro) rriv afiapriav
KaraXvaai, (TKeyjraade yap on vvv fxiv^ fjv TL<f Kal
airotrraaa iroki^ yvt^ fxri TrepieaofAept)^ eKdoL &v €9
^vfi^aaLv BuvaTTf ovtra cti rrjv hairdv7)v diroZovvab
KoX TO Xotirov vworeXelv i/C€LV(o^ Be riva oXeaOe
fivTiva ohK a/jL€ivov fiev fj vvv irapaaKevdaaadai, tto-
\iopKia re TraparevelaOai 69 rova')(arov, el to aino
Bvvarai o")(p\f} xal Ta')(y ^vfi^ijvat ; fipXv re 7r&<; ov
fiXdffrf hairavav KaOrffievoi^ Bia to a^vfiffarov, Kat
fjv eXoofiev iroXiv, e<\>6appbev'qv wapaXa^tiv, Kal t^9
irpoaoSov rb Xoiirbv aw* ainrj^ arepeaOat ; uT')(yop^v
Be 7rpo9 T0U9 noXefiiov^ rdBe, &(Tre ov Bticaara^i ov
Ta9 Bel f}p,vi pdXKov r&v i^afiapravovrtov uKpifiei^
ffXdirreaffai fj opav 07ra>9 €9 rov erreira 'xpovov fie-
Tp£a>9 KoXd^ovref; rai^Tro Xeaiv !^Ofi€v i<: 'XpT^fiAroiv
Xoyov iayyovtrai^; yp^aOai, xal rrjv <f>vXaKr)v pn) airb
r&v vofUDV T^9 S6ai/oti;to9 a^iovv Troieurdat, aXX* cltto
r&v epytov t^ eirifieXeia^,**
III., 46. 1-3.
2. Account for the difTerence in tense between
(iTroSovvat aiul v7roT€\€iu, Write a note on tlie cor-
relation of ^iv and t£. Explain the syntax of to avro,
3. Translate :
OvTcos oi)fxfj f) GTciai^ 7rpov)((oprj(7€P, Kal eSo^e
fiaXKov, hioTL iv toI? irpfOTtj iyivtio, hret va-Tcpov ye
Kal Trap, ci? elireip, ro * EXKi]vck6v iKLvrjd'q^ Bia<f>opo^p
ovGODv €KacrTa')(ov Tolf; t€ tojp SijfJLCDv TrpoaTaTat^
Tou? *A0rjuaiov^ iwdyeaOai fcal tol^ 0X170^9 rov^
AafC€Bai/xoviov<:, koI iv flip elprjpri ovk oLp i^oPTcop
irp6<\)a<TLP ovh^ €Totfxcop TrapaKoKelv avrou^, iroXe-
fMOVfiiptop 8e* zeal ^vfi/jLa^ia^ ap,a kicareooi^ rfj tSu*
epapTicop KaK(oa€i xal aifyiaip avrol^ iic tov ainov
irpoGiroiriaeit paBia)^ at iirayoyyai to2? peeorepi^eLP
TL Bov7<x)fi€POif; eiropl^opTo* koI iiriireae woWa teal
'yaXerrd KaraaTuaip Toi^ TroXeac, yty pofiepa fjuep koi
hel iaofiepay &><? &p 17 auTr) (j)V(Ti^ tipdpcoiroop 17,
fxdWoP Sk Kai r}GV')(aiT€pa koi toI<; eiSeat SirjWay-
fiepa ft)? ap e/cao'Tut al fji€Ta/3o\al rcop ^vptv^ic^p
€<\)LaTO)PTai, ip fM€P yap elp/jpjf Kal ay a6oi<; Trpdy-
fMUCLP aire 7r6\6£9 Kal ol tSte^ra^ dne'ipov^ ta? yvd^ixa^
€)(ov(n Bia TO fMTj e^JiKovaiov^ updyKa^ TrtTTTeti/* 6 &€
7r6\6/xo?, V(f>€\wp TTjp euTTopiap TOV Ka0^ TffiipaPt
^iaios StSdo^Ka\o^ Kai vrpo? ra Trapopra Ta<? 6pya<i
Tcop TToWayp ofiOLOt,
4. Soino Mss. vend ojfirj cndaL^. Is the omission of
the article allowable ? Explain the syntax of iirdyea-
6ai and of ^vfifiax^a^i,
5. Discuss the merits and defects of Thucydides as
an historian.
ir.
[Write in a separate book. ]
PINDAR AND SOPHOCLES.
1. Translnte:
01. oirota XPV^^*' pfjypvra)* rovfjiop 8' hyd>,
Kcl afiiKpop icTLj atrkpyH ISeip ^ovX'qaofJLai.
avrrj S t<rft)9, f^popel yap i)S yvpr) fiiya,
Tr)p Bvayepecav Tr)p ififfp aia")(VP€Tai.
iyo) 8' ifiavrop iralBa rfj^ TiJp^Ty? pepjAP
T^9 e5 StSov<Trj<; ovk dTi/jiaa0i](rofjLai,
Tr}? yap 7r€<f>VKa pLrjjpo^' ol Si avyyepei^
fi7jp6<; ii€ fjLLKpop Kal fxiyap Buopiaap.
I
TTOT^ dWo^, &aT€ fir) *KfjLad€Lv TovfJLov y€VO<;.
XO. eiirep iy<o /xdi/Tt<? el fit Kal Kara yifdfuip tS/Jt?,
ov Tov ''OXv/JLTTov airelpdJVy
<o Kcffaipdv, ovte eaei tclv avptov
TravaeXifvov, fit) ov ai je Kal irarpKorav OIBlttov
Kal Tpo(f>ov Kal fuiTfp av^eiv,
Kal ;)^op€Uco-^ai irpo^ ^fiojv, ci^ eirirfpa (f>€povTa Toh
ifjLol^ 7upuPvoi<;.
ujie <Pot^€, rroi 8€ ravT^ dpear ett).
t/? <T€y TCKPOv, Ti? o"* €TLKT€ T&v fiaKpaKavcdv apa
Tlavo^ opeaaifidra ttov
TpooireKaaSeia , ^ ae y evvdieipc. rt?
Ao^iov ; toj yap ifKuKe^ ay pcvo/jLoc iraaai (f)iKar
eW 6 KvWdva^ avdaacop,
€10* 6 Ba«^6io9 ffeo'i vamv iir aKpoap opeojp evprffjua
€fQT €K TOV
Nvfi<f>dp ' EiXtKiOPtScop, al<; irXelara avfiTral^eu
2. Tvpdppoi,^;, 6 dpatrafop, Nu/l6<^£i/. Who ? What
aro the sulyects of prjyuvrcOt av^eip, y(opev€a6ai ?
3. Write a note on the character and purpose of the
lyrical portion of this pas-age. How do you account
for the dialectic forms found in the choruses ?
4. Discuss from internal evidence the question of
the date of the (Ed'ipus :
OK
Develop the plot of this drama, distinguishing
clearly the various stages of the action. What improb-
abilities do we find in the play and how do they aflfect
the action ?
5. Scan, naming the metre :
vfias KVprjaai tov (f>vT€vaapTO<; iraTpo^
a\t9 IP €^riK€i<s ooKpvayp' aXX iul oTeyrj^ eaeo.
6. Translate :
Tl7f\€in T€ Kol KdB/jLo<: €p Tolaip dXeyopTar
'A^fcWca T €peiK\ iirei Z7fvo<; ffrop
XLTai<i erreiae, fiaTrjp*
&9 "^KTop ecrc^aXe, T/jooa?
afjuwxop aaTpafirj Kiopa, Kvkpop re dapdTtp 7r6p€P,
[over]
€vSov ipTi (f>apiTpa<;
ffxovavia avpeTolaiw 6? Se to ttclv epfirfvifou
yari^€i, ao<l>6k o iroWa etSoK (f>va' fiaOovre^ Be \dfipot
TrayyXtaaa-ia, KopuKC^ w?, aKpavra yapverov
/^o^ Trpo^ 6pvi')(a delou.
hr€')(€ vvv aicoTrot to^ov, aye ffvfjii, riva ^('iWofiev
ifc ^a\6aKd<; avre <}>p€vbs evKXea^ 61<ttov<; ievT€<; ;
7. Parr-e evetic, €<r0aXe, €vtl, iv roiaiv. Explain
TratS'. Wlu) ? TLPa ... Upt€9 ; What is the answer to
this question ?
8. Translate :
'Etti flap 0aip€L re /cai \d0a<; dreKfiapra p&f>o<i,
Kal 7rap€\K€i irpayix rtop opOap oSop
€^Q) <f>p€P<OP,
Kal Tol yap aiBotaa^i i'^^opre^ trrrepti opifiav ipXoybf^
oir rev^ap S' dTrvpoi^ iepoU
dXao<: ip aKpoiroXei. Keipot^ 6 fiep ^ap&dv hyayit>v
p€(f>€\ap
ttqXvp va€ '^i/aop* avrd Si <x<f>i(rip ^irace ri'^pap
irdaap iiri'^^dopifap TXavKoirm^ dptaionopoi^ X^P^^ Kpa-
relp,
cpya Bi ^cooiaip epiropreaal ff ofioia KeXevOot ^epop,
TIP Se kXco^ ^aOv. SaipTi Be koi ao^ia fiei^wp aBoXo^
reXedei.
9. BaepTi . . . reXedet, W hat di fferent interpretations ?
In whose honor was this ode composed ?
10. '* In Pindar the lyric movement culminates."
Does thi& mean that lyric poetry among the Greeks
died with Pindar ? Explain.
OR
Write a note on Pindar as an expounder of
Greek ethics.
I
WinlMKvalts of Soronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
GREEK.
HONORS/
E^miner : G. J. Laing, Ph.D.
PLATO, REPUBLIC, I.-IV.
1. Tran.slate :
(a) Ti Be 8rf iv abrfj t§ iroXei ; v&^ aWi^XoL^ /juera-
SdxTovariv &v &u eKaarot ipyd^tovrai ; &v Sr) ev€Ka
Kal Koivtoviav Trotffad/ievov ttoXlp tpKiaafiev. A^Xoi/
S17, 1} S' ov, hri TTOoiKovme^ ical oavovfievoi, ^Ayopa
hf) rffjLLv Kal vofiLGfxa ^vu^oXov ttj^ aWayrj^ ?P€/ca
yetnjaerai ck tovtov. Udvv fihf oiv, *Ai/ oZv KOfxi-
aa^ 0 yetofTfo^ eh Ttjv aryopdv ri &v irotel fj Tt9
aXXo? T&v 8rjpLiovpy&v /mt) ek rov abrov ')(p6vov rjKrj
T0I9 Beofievoi^ Ta irap' ainov aWd^do'daL, apyrjaei
rrj^ avTOv Brjfiiovpyiaf; KaOrffievo*; iv hyopd ; OvBa-
fi6>9, 77 0 09, oKK euTiv OL TOVTO opoivre^ eavrov^ ctti
T7)v Siaxoviav rdrrovai ravrrjv, ev fieu ral^ 6p0m
otKovfi€vac<i irokeai a')(eh6v ri ol haOevearaToi tA
awfjLara Kal d')(pe'ioL ti aXKo ioyov irpdrreiv, ainov
yap iel fievopra^ avrov? irepi t^i/ hyopkv ra fiev
dvT dpyvpiov dXKd^aa-Bat Tot9 ti Beo/Mcvoi^ aTToSo-
aOai, Tot9 Be dvrl ah dpyvpiov ButWdTretv, oaoi tv
BeovTai irpiaaOai, Avtt) apa, Tjv S' eyda, 17 XP^^
KairrjXcov ffulv yeveaiv eniroiel ti} TroXet. fj ov Kairrj-
Xov9 KoXovp^ev Tov^ irpo^ oavriv re Kal irpaaiv BiaKo-
vovirra^ iBpvjxevovs iu dyopa, tou9 8^ irT^avi^Ta^ iirl
Ta9 TToXew ifiTTopov^ ; Udvv piv ovv. "Ext 817
Tiv€<;, (09 iy^p^ac, elal koI aX\o^ BidKovoi, ot &v tcl
. fMev TTJ^ Buivoia^ p,)) iravv a^ioKOivdvrfTOi &aL, tt^v
Bi Tov (7<Of6aT09 la"xyv lKavr)v iwl tou9 irovovs e^foo'iv
ravTffp fiurdbv KaXovvre^;, K€K\rfVTdi, (u? iywfjuii,
fjLia6(i)Tor i} yap ; Ildvif fiev o5i/. TlXi^pcopLa St)
TToXeo)? elaiv, w eoiKe, koi fiiadwroL Aoxel fioi,
II., 12.
(6) O Toivvv apTL eXeyov, ^Tjrrjrkov, rlve^ apiaroi
<f>vXa/c€<; Tov irap avrol^ Boyfiarofi, tovto g)? 'Troitf-
riov, h &p rfi iroXet heX SokSxti ^eXrcarov elvai
avTov^ iroielv. rrfpTjriov St) ebOv^ ix iraiBtot/, irpoOe-
/Mepoi^ Spy a, iv oU av Tt? to tolovtop fjuiXiaTa
hnXavOavovro Koi ef aTraTcSro, Koi tov /mcv fivrffiova
/cal Svcre^airdTrfTov iyKpt/reov, tov Se /jlt) a'TroKpiTeov,
^ yap ; Nat Kai irovov^ y€ aZ xal aXyffi6va<: koi
aya>va<i avroU dcTiov, iv oU Taina Tuvra TTjprjTeov,
*Op6w €<f>r). OvKovv, fjv S' iy<o, Ka\ jpiTov eiSow?
toi5tow yoTfTeia^ afHiXXav iroiffTeov, xai OeaTiov,
&aTrep tov^ TTciXou? errl tov? ylr6<f>ov^ t€ xal dopv-
/3of9 ayovT€^ aKOTTOvaiv el <f>o0epoi, ovtq) veov^ SvTa^
eh BeifJLaT arra KOfxiaTeov ical el<; ^Soi/a? av ficTa-
^Xr)T€ov, fiaaavLfyvTa^ iroXv fmXXov rj 'ypvabv iv
IT V ply ei SvoyoTJTevTo^ Kal eva')(^fjLa}v iv iraai <^i-
verai, (f>vXa^ avTov &v ayaOo^ tcai fwvaiKtf^ tJv ip^v-
6av€V, €vpv6fjb6v T€ fcal €vdp/uLoaTov kavTov iv traai
TovToi^ wapiytov, oIo9 Br/ &v i>v Kal eavTw xat iroXei
'^pffo-ifKOTaTO^ ti'i;. Kal tov aei ev re iraiai Kal veavi-
aicoL^ Kal iv avBpdac ^a^avt^o/juevov Kal aKriparov
iKJ3aivovTa KaTaaTaTeov apyovTa ri}? TroXew? Ka\
(f>vXaKay Kal Tifm<; SoTeov Kal I^&vtc Kal TeXevTfjaavTi,
Td^fxov T€ ' Kal T<ov oXXtov fMVfjfieimv fieyiaTa yipa
XayydvovTa' tov Be firj tolovtov d'TTOKpi/riov, toulvit)
Tt9, rjv B* iydy BoKel fjLoi, & FXamcDV, r/ iKXoyi) elvat
Kal KaTdcTaais TOfV dpy^ovToov t€ Kai (fyvXdKCOVf (i?
iv TVTTtp, fjLTf Bi aKpifieia^^ elprjadai, Kal ifwi, ^
S' 09, oUtq) irp (f>aiv€Tai,
III., 20.
(c) ToCto Toivvvy Tjv B' iy<o, <f)d0L fie totc BovXecdai
Xiyeiv, el apa vvv efiade^, oti 6a a icTiv ola elvai
TOV, avTa ixkif fiova ain&v fi6va>v i<TTL, t(ov Bi ttoi&v
Tivcav iroia arra. Kal ov tl Xiy6), w, ouov &v J7»
ToiavTa Kal eaTiv, (09 dpa Kal t&v vyieiv&v xai
voatoB&v ff iTTiGTijfjLi] vyi€LV7j Kal voacoBi]^ Kal T&v
KaKOJv Kal T&v dyaO&v KaKt) Kai ayaOij* clW inreiSij
ovK avTov oinrep iTria-Trffir) iaT\v iyevcTO emaTiifiVt
aXXd TTOiov Tii'6^, TOVTO B' Tfv vyieivov Ka\ voa&Be^t
TToid Bi] Tf9 ^vvi^Tj Kal avTT) yeviaffaiy Kal ' tovto
atnifv erroirfce ^rfxert iirKrTijfiffv a7r\St^ Ka\el<T0ai,
aXKa Tov irouov tivo^ irpoayepo/Mevov larpiKijv. ^Efia-
00V, 6<^, icai fioi SoKCi ovT(o^ €)(€iv. To Bk Sfj Slyjro^,
ffp B* eyci, ov TOVTtov Oriaet^ ra>v Tti/09 etvai tovto
Srrrep iarlv ; ecTi Sk Sifrrov Siyfro^ ; ''Eywye, ^ S'
09' TTtofiaTo^ ye. Ovkovv troiov fiev tlvo^ irdifiaro^
wo tov Tt Kal Siyfro^ ; Siyfro^ 8* oiv airro ovre iroXKov
ovT€ 6\(rfov, ovT€ arjfa0ov ovt€ /caxov, ouS' ivl Tioytp
TTOiov Tivo^^ aW' avTOV ird/juiTO^ fiovov airro hl^o^
wiifyv/cev ; Uavrdirao'L fiiv oiv, ToS St-^frwi/ro?
ofHi 7f ^V)(T^, Ka0* oaov Bcypjj, ovk SXKo t* fiovXerai
if irUlv, Kat TovTOv opeyerai xal iirl tovto opfia.
ArjXov Sij,
IV., 14.
2. " The title borne by this dialogue — the Republic
or Polity — hardly presents a clear idea either of its
proclaimed purpose or of its total contents." Discuss.
3. State and account for Plato's views as to the
place of imaginative literature in education.
4. What objections have been or might be made to
Plato's idea of a state ?
5. What would be Plato's attitude towards the thesis
of Hobbes that ** all society is for gain or for glory ;
that is, not so much for love of our fellows as for love
of ourselves " ?
6. Point out some of the ways in which Plato's
theories of human life (ethical or political) reflect the
point of view adopted in his general philosophy of
Being and Becoming.
ZSnftiet0fti? ot STotonto
THIRD YEAR.
GREKK.
HONORS.
Eicaminer : Adam Caruuthers, M.A.
1, What, according to Aristotle, is (a) the supreme
good or end, (6) the supreme rule or standard, and (c)
the ultimate ground of obligation, in moral acts ? To
vrliat extent does he escape the charge of "relativity"
m his ethical system ?
2. Point out the nature and the significance of the
difference between Aristotle and Plato in (a) tempera-
ment and ancestry, (6) connection with Athenian civic
life, (c) relation of extant works to the growth of their
minds, (d) philosophic problem which chiefly attracted
them.
3. Translate:
^aiv€Tai Se Kai ra ^rjTovfMCva ra wepl ttjv evSai-
fboviap aTrauff uirdp^eiv to) Xey^dhm,. toI<s fihv yap
aperrj, T0i9 Se <f>povrja't^, aWoLf; Se Go<f>ia ri^ elvat
SoK€t' T0i9 a Tavra, fj tcvtcov tl fieO^ 17801/^9, fj ov/c
av€v ijSoi^' erepoi hk fcai ttjv i/cTo^ everrjpiav avfjb-
TrapaXafiffapovat, tovtodv Se, ra fiev woWol xal
irdKaiol Xeyoi/o-t, ra he oXlyoi xal evSo^ot avBp€<;.
ovSerepov^ Si tovtcov evXoyov Sut/juapTdveiv toU
oXoi^, aXX' Iv ye rt ^ xai ret ifKelara Karopdovv.
(a) Give (in Greek) Aristotle's definition of evSai-
(b) What philosophers or schools held the various
views set forth in this extract ?
(c) With what popular views does he (imme-
diately before this) show his deiSriition to harmonize ?
(d) What is the attitude of Aristotle (as compiired
with Plato) towards popular beliefs ?
4. Translate :
*Ef ov Kal ^rjXop on ovhe/jLia tS>v r}6iK(ov apcT&p
(f>v<T€i fjfuv iyyivc'rat,' ovBev yap rtov <f>v<rei ovTtou
aXXft)9 iOi^eraf olov 6 \i6o^ <j>v(T€i /carcw (f>€f>6fJL€vo^
ovK &v iOioBeir) av(o fpep^adai, ovS'&v fivptdtcif; efft^t)
Ti^ avoy piTTTcov ovSe to irvp Kara)* ovB* aWo avScv
Twv aXKto^ ire^vKOTftyv aXK(o^ &p idiadeirj. Out*
apa <f>v<T€i ovT€ irapa ^vaiv iyylvovrai ai apeTttl*
YKXh 7r€<f>vK6aL fiev rffilv Se^aadai aiJra?, TcKecov-
fievois Se hta rov eOov^, ''Ert, oca fjAv q^vaei r)fjiZv
Trapayiperai, ra? hwdfiei^ tovtcji/ trpoiepov ko/jli^o-
fieda, varepov 6e ra^ ivepyeia^ anrohihofieir onrep
eVl tiav al(Tfft]a€cop SffXov ov yap i/c rov iroWafcc^
ISeiv ff TToXKoLKi^ hKovaai Ta<i alaOrjaei^ iXdfio^iev,
aW* dvairaXtVy e^ovre^ i)(^pr}a'dfi€0a, ov '^(priadfievoi
eayofiev, ra^ Bi dp€Ta^ Xafi^dvofiev ivepyrjaavre^
rrporepov, &air€p Ka\ iirX rwv aWcov tc^p&v.
(a) ovSep ,,.i6l^€Tac, Is this universally true?
Exuiain.
(6) Does the difference noted here by Aristotle
between the genesis of the senses and the moral facul-
ties really exist ? Explain.
5. Translate :
To Sf St* arfvouiv oi);^ eKovaiov p»€v airav itrriv
atcovaiov ik to eiriXvirov Kal iv fierafieXeia 6 yap Si
ayvoiav irpd^a^ or tow/, pLrfikv 8€ hvG')(epaiv(av eiri
TJj irpd^ei, CKODV fiev ov ir€7rpa')(€p, o ye firj rjher ovS"
ai aK(op, fir] Xvirovfiepo^ ye, rov Brj Sl aypouiP, 6
fM€P €P fjueraueXeia, aKoop So/cel' 6 8e fit} fierafieXo-
fiepo^f inet erepo% Io-to) oi)^ e/ccoi/* iirel yap Sui^pei,
^iXrLop opofia e^etj' IBlop, ''Eire pop Se eoixe kcu to
St' aypocap irpdrretp rov dypoovpra,
(a) Write a note on the construction of roif
(8^ St').
(b) Explain the distinction between St' ayvoiav
and aypoovpra in the last sentence.
(o) Give Aristotle's classification of acts as found
in this chapter.
6. (a) Tov pL€v yap ixovaiov xal iratBe^ xal ra aXKa
^Shi KOivwvei, irpoaipeaeco^ B* ov, Kal ra e^al^vrf^ iKOvaia
fjt€v Xeyofiev, Kara TTpoaipeaiv S' ov.
(6) A^ KoX av8p€iOT€pov SoKcl €ipat TO iv ToU
al<f>tfiSioi^ (f>6fioi^ atf>ofiov xal ardpa')(ov elvai fj iv tow
vrpoSTjXoi^.
Translate and reconcile these statements.
7. Translate:
Aia<f>€p6vrayi Si ofxCK'fiaei Toi9 iv a^idofiaai Kal T0Z9
Tv^ovai, Kal fiaXKov fj fJTTov yvaypifjLOL^* ofioicu^ 5e
Kal Kara Ta? aXXa? Bui<f>opa^, eKaaroi^ awovifiayv
TO irpeirov, xai KaO* avro p,iv alpovfievo^ to awrjSv-
vetv, Xvirelv Zi €v\ai3ovfJL€vo<:, tow Bi awo^aivovciv^
iav 17 fiei^oDt avveTrofievo^:* \iya> Bi toS icaXcS Kal
T9> avfi<f)€povTr xal rjBovrj^ Bk ?v€Ka t^9 eiaavdu;
fi€yd\r)^ fii/cpa Xvw'qaei,
(a) What character is Aristotle here describing ?
(b) Give Aristotle's terms for the virtues he enu-
merates and for the various extremes.
S. Translate:
Ea 8' iarlv 17 evBaifiovla tear aperrfv ivepyeuz,
€v\oyov Kara ry)v Kpa7laTr)v avTt) 8' &v etr) tov
apiaTQV €?T€ 8^ 1/01)9 toOto, e?T€ olKKo ti, h Brj KaTa
(f>vaiv SoKel apyeiv xal r/yelcBai, Kal ivvoiav €)(€iv
'trepl Ka\&v xai Oeicov^ 6tT6 Oelov ov Kal avTo, €tT6
tS>v iv rjfjuv TO dciOTaTov, jj tovtov hvipyeia Korii
TTjv olKciav dperijv eltf &v rj TcXela €vBat/JL0via.
What is evBaifiovia found to be, and what reasons
Are given to show that the conclusion is correct ?
i
&m)}tvuUs of ^Toronto.
ANKUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
GRKEK AND LATIN.
TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
HONORS.
„ . (J. Henderson, M.A.
I
L
I.
Translate:
(a) £70) aoi i^ ap'xfj^ irdura ireLpdaofiai Sirjyijaaa'Bai.
ael yap St) teat t^q irpoaOev rffiipaf; €uo0€i/jl€v <l)OiTav
Koi €ya> fcat oi aXKoL iraph tov ^a>KpdTrf, avWeyo-
fjL€Voi €(o0ev ek ro BiKaarijpiov, iv c^ xal 37 SlKt)
iyepero' irKfjaiov yap fjv tov SeafKoiijpiov, irepie-
fxkvofiev oil/ ixdaTOTe, la>9 avoi'xjdelr} to BeafKOT'qpiov,
SiaTpi^ome^ fi€T dW'qXcjp' avet^ysTO yap ov Trpt^'
eneiZti hi aPOL^jBeii], elayfiev iraph tov Sco^paTi/
Ka\ TCL iroXKa Sii^fiepevofiep p^T axnov. teat 8ff Kal
t6t€ Trpo)iavT€pov aweXeyjjfjbep, t^ yap irpoTepaia
[^fi€pa\ iireiSff i^ijXBofiep itc tov BeafjLtaTrjpiov etrrri'
pa^, iirvBofieOa oti to ttXoiop itc ^rjkov d<f>tyfjLipop
€irf. irafyrjyyeiXafiev oiv dXKr^Xoi,^ fJKeiv co9 irpoDial-
rara eh to elcjffo^. xai rJKOfiep Kal '^/jup i^eXdoap o
0vp(op6^, oarrep emdei viraicoveLP, elnep 'irepifjiipeip
Kal firi TrpoTepop irapiipat, 6a>9 &p airro^ KeXevat)'
Xvovat ydp, l^, oi epSetca ^coKpdTf} xal napa/yyiX-
Xovaip OTTO)? &p T^he Ttj ^fiipa TeXeirrTja-rj, ob iroXvp
S* oZv 'xpovop itriaxoDP fjfcep xal ixiXevep ^fxa^
eiaiivat. eltreXBovTes oip tcaTeXafi^dpofiep top flip
"So^KpdTT} apTi XeXvfJiipov, ttjp he BapdcTTTrrjp, yir/pd}-
axei^ ydp^ S^ovadp re to TraiSiop avTov xat irapa-
KaSfjfAivfjp. €09 oip elSep ^fia<s 17 Bapdiirirff^ dp€V<l>'q'
fAffci T€ Kai ToiavT aTTa etirep, ola Btf euodaatp at
yvpaiK€^, OTA*ft 2a>icpaT69, vctotop SjJ ae irpoaepovai
vuv ol eTTiTT^Seioi teal av rovrovs, koX 6 1t(OKpa,Tri<:
fike^<i els TOP Kpircova^ *fi KoLTtop^ e^ri, oTrcLyerto
Ttv airnjv olKoZe. koX i/ceivrjp fi^p airrffop ripe^ t&v
Tov Kplrcopo^ po&adp re Kat /coirrofM€Pr)p' 6 Se
'Z(Ofcpdri]^ upaKa0i^6fJL€POfi €19 rijp tcKivqu avpifca.fM'^e
re TO a-xiKo^ xai i^erpiyfre t§ ^e/pt, Kal rpi^onv apm^
*fl? arOTTOPn €<l>f)t & &pSp€^^ loiKC 71 elpOl TOVTO, h
KoKovcLP ol &p0p<O7rot iJSv' (B9 OavfjLaaLO)^ 7r€<f>uK€
irpo^i TO SoKovp ipainiop eipai, to Xmrrfpop^ to a/Lta
fA€P avToa fir) ideXeiP waparfiypeadai Ttp hpffparrrq}
ihp Si Tt9 SuoKT) TO €T€pop Kot \ap>0dpr), a")(eh6v ri
upayKa^eGOai Xafifidpecp /cal to erepop, &(r7rep €*c
/Lua9 fcopv(f>rj^ aupf]/jLfi€P(o Sv* opts.
(b) *0 Be ^rjfioaOeprj^, eirel ^vpeXeyrf avroi to <TTpd'
revfia h e&et e^ovra €? rffp XcfceKiav ^(yqBelp, apa^ €k
TTJ^ XiryiPT}<; xai irXevaa^ 7rpo9 ttjp TleXoTropprjcrov rw
T€ ^apixKel Kal laU rpiaKOpra pavat rSip 'AdrfvcUo^p
^vp^p.ia-yeif xal irapcCKja^opTe^ r&p *Apyeia)P cTrXira?
eirt Ta9 pafh hrXeop ^9 rifp AaKoyptKi^p, /cat irpSyrov
fi€P T% 'E7rtSau/>ov rt ti)9 Kip.-qpw; ihrjtoa-ap, eireira
<T')(OPre^ 69 T^ KaraPTtKpij KvOi^ptop rrj^ AoKmi/itcr}^,
€pda TO lepop TOV ^AiroXXcopos icri, Trj9 re 7^9 ecrip
& eh-Qoaaap icai eTei')(jL<Tap laOfiSiBe^ rt ^tapiov, Zva Sif
01 re EtXwTe? r&p AaxeSai p^PKH^p avroae avropM^
\S><Tt Kal a/jui Xfjaral ef aurov, &<rn'ep hK T179 IIiJXoi;,
dpirayrjp iroi&prac, Kal 6 p,ep ^rjfioa-Oeprj^^ ehdif^
erreiSrj ^vyKareka&e ro '^^oupicp, TraperrXei iirl rrj^
KepKvpa^^ 57r(»9 Kal r&p eKeWep ^vfi/JLd')(<op rrapa-
Xaj^oDP rop €9 rr}P ^LKeXiap ttXovp on rd')(jLara
'rroirjrar 6 Si X,apLK\rj^ rrepiueipa^, ^q)9 to ')(copLop
€^erei')(L<Te, Kat KaraKiircbp <f}v\aKf)u aurov, direKOp^i'
^ero Kal avro^ vcrrepop raU rfidKOPra pavaiv err*
oIkov Kal ol ^Apyeloi &p^,
II.
(To be written in a separate book.)
Translate :
(a) Nee mulbo post ilia nubes descendere in terrasi
operire maria. cinxerat Capreas et abseonderat ;
Miseni quod procurrit, abstulerat. turn mater orare*
hortari, iubere, quoquo modo fiigerem ; posse
enini iuuenem : se et annis et corpore grauem bene
morituram, si mihi caussa mortis non fuisset.
ego contra, saluum me, nisi una, non futurum :
dein manum eius amplexus, addere gradam cogo.
pareb aegre, incusatque se, quod me moretur. iam
cinis ; adhuc tamen rarus. respicio ; densa call go
tergis imminebat, quae nos, torrentia modo infusa
terrae, sequebatur. Deflectamus, inquam, dum
uideiDus, ne in uia strati comitantium turba in
tenebris obteramur. uix consederamus, et nox,
non qualis illunis aut nubila, sed qualis in locis
clausis liiinine exstincto. audires ululatus femi-
naniin, infantium quiritatas, clainores uirorum.
&Iii parentes, alii liberos, alli coniuges uocibus
requirebant, uocibus noscitababant hi suum
casum, illi suorum niiserabantur. erant qui metu
mortis mortem precarentur. multi ad decs manus
tollere : plures, nusquam iam decs ullos, aeternam-
que illam et nouiasimam noctem mundo iiiter-
pretiibantur. nee defuerutit, qui lietis mentitisque
terroribus uera periculo augerent. aderant, qui
Miseni, illud ruisse, illud ardere, falso, sed creden-
tibus, nuntiabant. paullum reluxit; quod non
dies nobis, sed aduentantis ignis indicium uide-
batur.
\") Tunc, ne leuis aura retectos
auferret cineres, saxo compressit arenam :
pautaque ne bustum religato fune moueret,
inscripsit sacrum semiunto »tipite nomen :
bic situs est Magnus, placet hoc, Fortuua, scpul-
crum
dicere Pompeii, quo condi maluit ilium
qa&m terra caruisse socer ? temeraria dextra,
car obicis Magno tumulum manesque uagantes
iQcJudis? situs est qua terra extrema refuso
pendet in oceano. Roman um nomen et omne
vaiperium Magno est tumuli modus, obrue saxa
crimine plena deum. si tota est Herculis Oete
et lugct tota uacant Bromio Nyseia, quare
^uiuH in Aeypto Mamo lapis ? omnia Lagi
J'^^ t^enere potest si nuUo cespite nomen
"^^^int. erremus populi cinerumque tuorum,
M-agoe, metu nullas Nili calcemus arenas.
^^^^ fci tam sacro dignaris nomine saxum,
^de actus tantos monimentaque maxima rcrum ;
*^^® truces Lepidi motus Alpinaque bella
^JTnaque Sertori reuocato consule uicta
currus quos erit eques: commercia tuta
^ w ^^ pauidos Cilicas maris, adde subactam
^'"oariem gentesque uagas et quidquid in Euro
?S^oir\jm Boreaque iacet die semper ab armis
^i^oc^ repetisse togam : ter curribus actis
^^>tum patriae multos donasse triumphos.
ntiftiereft]? of Sovonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH AND THIRD YEARS.
GREEK PRdSE,
HONORS.
Examine!': Maurice Button.
Translate idiomatically :
My uncle was a dignitied old gentleman, " well
born, well dres.sed and moderately learned," easy-
going (like Sophocle-s) ; you could see the modera-
tion of his opinions peeping out through his
black broadcloth. He had only two aversions :
the higher education of women and Jaeger flannel
\tpwv *\TnroKparLic6v\. About the latter he did
not mince his words : " My youth," he said to me
one day (according to the poet of these latter
days, the poet of drawing rooms and of ladies'
schools), " my youth," he said, " was blasted with
a curse ; this flannel was the cause."
" By George, uncle," I said " you don't mean it."
" Four times a month," he said, " or more, I
used to put it on afresh, full filled with prickly
heat, than gadfly more pestiferous, more torturing
than Nessus-shirt, — unless indeed the Lernaean
hydra was after all an allegory for the first weaver
of Milesian wool — , My Apaturia, which should be
sad to every youth (for youth means ignorance and
bliss), was gay to me, as an escape from psoriasis ;
I bade the flannel then a long farewell ; may it
have gone to glory."
On the other theme he jested with perhaps
some .solecisms beyond his wont, for he was not
generally without good taste. " There you are,'*
[over]
he cried one day, " Brummagem ware and 'ware
the touch-stone there ; it will not bear it ; a cry to
catch the age, Sir, nothing more. If these young
ladies think so much of Greek, let them mark
Aristotle, his words : " let women go to cooking
school " ; let them offer Domestic Science (SovXucif
iirieTTj/iirj) instead of Greek and serve Corinthian
tables, not Athenian forms, and preserve their
charms with Corinthian spices, not with Attic
salt ; marry (but they wont), let them make pastry,
too, and -cake, and leave our young men there-
after, if it so turn out, to see visions and our
old men to dream dreams ; if not, let them at
least petition this Labour-ridden Grovemment
of ours to remove the ridiculous import tax on
Chinamen, and let them help us to import
the unfortunate Chinese; they at least will
profit by serving the white man for hire, instead
of serving him gratis, as they are doing now, and
giving him their land, their princes' heads, their
liberty and lives, without so much as " by your
leave." "And now," concluded my uncle, "as
they are not imported yet and the maid is off to
lecture, come and dine on the cold mutton : for
these the least of all Thy mercies: dont take more
than you want, and let us have no Boeotian hog-
gishness to-day."
eitiftiersUff of Soronio^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
GRAMMAR AND PHILOLOGY-
HONORS.
Examirier : A. J. Bell, M.A., Ph.d.
1. Classify the Greek dialects, noticing the main
points of difference between them. Indicate the place
of Latin among the Italic dialects, and notice the main
points wherein it differs from its sister dialects. Give
any reasons for or against the view that Latin is
derived from Greek.
2. Classify the mutes and show by examples how
the velar mutes are represented in Greek. Sketch the
history of the letters y, x^ 9 *^d 9'
3. Give the cognates in Greek and Latin respec-
tively of adgio, humeniSy quinque, generis, vidi, ^\to<,
/i€<ro9, SatSexa, 0€pfjb6^ and pi<o, accounting for variations
in form.
4. Give reasons for irregularities in the conjugation
of exi», ISXtia-iaa, Xelirm, tango and fero, and in the
declension of Zev^ and vS<op.
5. Account for the recessive accent of the Greek
verb and for the accentuation of elfii and <fyrjfii State
the rule for accent in classical Latin, comparing it with
that for accent in Greek. Comment on the accentua-
tion of ve&v OTTO, <f>i\ot (fKurivy ^EXevawdBe, and on the
contraction in aiLceps and praebeo.
A
6. Compare the eDdings of Ul^ genitive singnlar and
plural and of the accusative singular and plural in
Greek and Latin. Qompo^re the sQ-caUed primary and
secondary personal endings of the Greet verb, and
describe the formation of the passive voice in Greek
and Latin. Show how the Greek superlative ending
-raro^ and the Latin -iasi/mv^ are derived.
7. Compare in Greek and Latin the use of cases to
denote place, timfi and rv^eana ; and show how the use
of the accusative absolute diffbrs from that of the
genitive absolute.
8. Compare the Greek with the Latin subjunctive
with regard to the use of tenses in each.
9. Compare the forms in Greek and Latia of object
clauses after verbs meaning to fea/r and to hinder used
affirmatively and negatively, illustrating by examples.
10. Compare Greek with Latin usage in negative
prohibitions and in thd usd of (ibe double n^g^tive.
11. Explain clearly the syntax and use of the words
underlined in the following :
(a) 'BerXSi/ yhp inrh "jf^apfidronv trrjfia Ovdateei,
(b) Kal apTi eXeyov firjSiva iOihfiw eKOvra apx^Uf.
(d) Savovrmv fih ivdi^ ainUa awiKfi^^voi if^ph^
(e) T0 Be iTfpl rov9 fir/&ya^ ical r^ rfXeiora Mire-
\v6fl inro ^viJ^pSiv, wplv S^ ot hffvivaiov Tore
Toy ifYma hrqlrjagp,
(/) *'Akov<top Kal ifJMVy idv col rairrii Soicp.
(g) *A\V Su iwiureU ish $€ov iripnad* SSe Kpio^v
TO irpicraew m^L to /3ov\ev€iVf
(h) El yap oJrroi 6p0w ^irearriaav, hfieh dv ov
yptmv ipxotre.
(i) Kai ToVTot^ TTpovXeyop Sri av diroKplvaa-ffai
fi€P obfc iBeXija-OL^, elptopevcQio Si Kal iropra
fiaWop 7roii]<Toi^ fj inroKpiPolo, el r/9 tI ere
iptorS,
(j) ''EKeyop ob KaXck rt)p ^EXkaba ikeuOepow
avTOP el avSpa<i SU<f>d€ip€P ovre x^lpa^
apTcupofiepov^ ovre iroXefilov^,
{k) Turno tempus erit, magno cum optaverit
emptura.
Intactum Pallanta.
(l) Est tibi mater, cognati, quis te salvo est opus.
(ni) Immo vero indignum iam facinus faxo ex me
andies
(n) Nam aetate et forma haut dissimili in domi-
num erat.
(o) Nam illud quidem adduci vix possim ut ea
quae senserit ille tibi non vera videantur.
(p) Blaesus multa dicendi arte non per seditionem
et turbas desideria militum ad Caesarem
ferenda ait.
(q) Occidit, occideritque sinas cum nomine Troia.
(r) Omnia tunc quis invideas, si lividulus sis.
{b) Velis tantummodo, quae tua virtus, expug-
nabis.
(t) Hoc te monitum, nisi ipse non vis, voluerim.
12. Translate into Latin and Greek :
(1) I cannot help punishing him.
(2) If you wish to return, wait till I come.
(3) I may not be idle.
(4) He is a fit and proper person to govern the
state.
9niiiet0itff pt ^rpronto.
ANNUAL SXAMINATIONS : 190L
THIRD YBAB.
GRKEK AND ROMAN HISTOHY.
HONORS.
t.xniame)8.^j C. Eobbbtson. B.A.
Non.— Candidates are to write Parts I and 11 in separate books.
I.
(Write on four questions only, which must include five.t
1. Discuss the view that Mitylene revolted not
because she had suffered any real hardship, nor because
the Imperial idea was an unworthy one, but simply
becHOse it violated a fundamental political instinct of
the Greek.
2. Explain the statement " Before Socrates there was
DO morality in Greece."
Enumerate, in the order of their emergence, the
chief problems which had engaged the attention of the
Pre-Socratic philosophers.
3. Give an account of ' Heraclitus' philosophy, deal-
ing with the following points : The errors of sense ;
the origin of things ; the upward and downward way ;
the harmony of opposites ; the dry soul ; his import-
ance in the development of philosophy.
4. Show clearly what advance was made (a) by
philosophy upon cosmogony ; (6) by Greek science
upon the science of Egypt and Asia ; (c) by Anaxi-
nienes upon Anaximander ; (d) by Anaxagoras upon
all the other Pre-Socratic thinkers.
[OVKRJ
5. Write a paper on Socrates and the Sophists under
the following heads :
(a) Grote's theory of Plato's antagonism to the
Sophists.
(6) The atmosphere in which the Sophists and
Socrates worked.
(c) The Sophifits and Socrates compared and con-
trasted (!) as teachers ; (ii) as philosophers.
(d) Socrates' condemnation, (i) Was it entirely
unreasonable from the Athenian point of view ? (ii)
Should he have been less uncompromising in his
defence ?
II.
(N.B. — Write on four questions only.)
1. Describe the period of Scipio Aemilianus and his
political attitude.
2. Explain the nature and effect of the following
laws: — The Villian, the Licinio-Mucian, the Cincian,
the Calpurnian.
3. Describe the character of the new aristocracy and
the basis of its power.
4. What causes contributed to the transformation of
the new aristocracy into an oligarchy ?
5. Gains Gracchus — " a political incendiary " : Dis-
cuss this statement.
6. " The Plebeians were right : to free Italy from
Hannibal they had to go to school to him, to attempt
a bold stroke as he had done." Explain and comment
on this statement.
7. " Latifundia perdidere Italiam." Explain their
origin and discuss the truth of the remark.
anftittslts ot IToronto.
'ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD AND FOURTit TEARS.
LATIN,
^««W..{il---.^A._^
I.
Translate:
(a) * Nascere, praeqne diem veniens age, Lucifer,
almum,
Coniugis indigno Njsae deceptus amore
Dnm queror, et divos, quam'quam nil testibua illis
Profeci, extrema moriens tamen adloqnar hora.
Incipe Maenalios mecum, mea tibia, versus.
Maenalns argutumque nemus pinosque loquentes
Semper habet ; semper pastorum ille audit amores
Panaque, qui primus calamos non passus inertes.
(b) Sat fatis Venerique datum, tetigere quod arva
Fertilis Ausoniae Troes. Sunt et mea contra
Fata mihi, ferro sceleratam exscindere gentem,
Coniuge praerepta : nee solos tangit Atridas
Iste dolor, solisque licet capere arma JUyceiiis,
" Sed periisse semel satis est : " peccare fuidset
Ante satis, penitus modo non gentls omne perosos
Femineum. Quibus haec medii fiducia valli
Fossarumque morae, leti discrimina parva,
Dant animos. At non viderunt moenia Troiae
Neptuni fabricata manu considere in ignes ?
(c) Ph. Si uis mi uxorem dare,
quam despondisti, ducam ; sin est ut uelis
manere illam apud le, dos hie man'taty Demipho.
Nam non est aequom me propter uos decipi.
I
quom ego uostri honoris causa repudium altsrae
remiserim, quae dotis tantundem dabat.
. De. In in malam rem hinc cum istac magnificentia,
fugitiue ? etiam nunc credis te ignorarier
aut tua facta adeo ? Ph. Inritor. De. Tune
banc duceres,
sitibidaretur? Ph. Facpericlum. De. Utfilius
cum ilia habitet apud te, hoc uostrum consilium
fuit.
Ph. QvLoeao quid narras ? De. Quin tu mi argen-
tum cedo.
Ph. Immo uero uxorem tu cedo. De. In ius
ambula.
Ph. EDim uero si porro esse odiosi pergitis...
Dfi. Quid facies ? Ph. Egone ? Yos me indotatis
modo
patrocinari fortasse arbitramini :
etiam dotatis soleo. r
{d) Est igitur haec, indices, non scripta, sednata lex,
quam non didicimus, accepimus, legimus^ verum
ex natura ipsa adripuimus, hausimus, expressimus,
ad quam non docti, sed facti, non instituti, sed
imbuti sumus, ut, si vita nostra in aliquas insidias,
si in vim et in tela aut latronum aut inimiconim
incidisset, omnis honesta ratio esset expediendae
salutis. silent enim leges inter arma nee se
exspectari iubent, cum ei, qui exspectare velit,
ante iniusta poena luenda sit quam iusta repetenda.
etsi persapienter et quodam modo tacite dat ipsa
lex potestatem defendendi, quae non hominem
occidi, sed esse cum telo hominis occidendi causa
vetat, ut, cum causa, non telum quaereretur, qui
sui defendendi causa telo esset usus, non hominis
occidendi causa habuisse telum iudicaretur.
1. Write notes on italicised words.
2. Define Virgil's position in the history of pastoral
poetry.
3. In what sense is the JEneid called " the epic of
the Roman empire ? "
4. Sketch briefly the history of Roman comedy.
5. State briefly and account for the leading charac-
teristics of Roman oratory.
II.
Translate at sight :
HOW SERVILIUS KILLED MAELIUS BECAUSE HE
AIMED AT BEING KING.
Postero die cum in forum dictator descendisset
et Maeliani atque ipse dux eorum in se intentam
vim cemerent, qui tumultus, quod bellum repens
dictatoriam maiestatem quaesisset, rogitarent,
missus ab dictatore Servilius magister equitum ad
Maelium ' Yocat te ' inquit ' dictator.' cum pavidus
iUe» quid vellet, quaereret Serviliusque causam
dicendam esse proponeret, tunc Maelius recipere se
in catervam suorum et orare, ut opem sibi ultimo
in discrimine f errent, neve ante oculos suos truci -
dari sinerent. haec eum vociferantem assecutus
Servilius obtruncat respersusque cruore obtruncati,
stipatus caterva patriciorum iuvenum, dictatori
renuntiat vocatum ad eum Maelium repulso
apparitore concitantem multitudinem poenam
meritam habere, tum dictator 'Macte virtute'
inquit, ' C. Servili, esto ob liberatam rem publicam.'
III.
Translate into Latin :
The Romans fought like lions ; but the cavalry
of Pyrrhus and his elephants, the formidable
aspect of which terrified the Romans, decided the
day : the Romans took to flight, and perhaps not
one of them would have escaped, had not a
wounded elephant in his fury turned against his
own men and stopped their pursuit. Pj'rrhus
took the enemy's camp without resistance : he
had indeed gained a complete victory. On the
following day he visited the field of battle, and
seeing the bodies of the Romans, all of whom had
fallen with their faces towards the enemy, he
exclaimed, " With such soldiers the world were
mine ; and it would belong to the Romans, if I
were their commander."
anfliev0fts ot Soronto«
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATION, MAY, 190L
THIRD YEAR.
LATIN.
I.
Translate :
(cl) Non quia, Maecenas, LycUn'um quicquid Etruscos
incoluit fines, nemo generosior est te,
nee quod avus tibi matemus fuit atque patemus
dim qui magnis legionibus imperitarent,
ut plerique solent, naso suspendis adunco
ignotos aut, ut me, libertino patre natos.
cum referre negas, quali sit quisque parente
natus, dum ingenuus, persuades hoc tibi vere,
ante potestatem Tulli atque ignobile regnum
multos saepe viros nullis majoribus ortos
et vixisse probos, amplis et honoribus auctos.
(6) " Nil ergo optabunt homines ? " Si consilium vis,
Permittes ipsis expendere numinibus, quid
Conveniat nobis, rebusque sit utile nostris.
Nam pro jucundis aptissima auaeque dabunt DL
Carior est illis homo, quam sibi.
Ut tamen et poscas aliquid, voveasque sacellis
Exta, et ccmdiduli divina tomaculi porci —
Orandum est, ut sit mens sana in corpore sano.
(c) deinde animi ingratam uaturam pascere semper
atque explere bonis rebus satiareque numquam,
quod faciunt nobis annorum tempora, circum
cum redeunt fetusque ferunt vanosque lepores,
nee tamen explemur vitai fructibus umquam,
hoc, ut opinor, id est, aevo florente puellas
quod memorant laticem pertusum congerere in vas,
quod tamen expleri nulla ratione potestur.
(d) quin ipsae stupuere domus atqne intima Leti
Tartara caeruleosque inplexae crinibns angues
Eumenides, tenuitque inhians tria Cerberus ora
atque Ixionii vento rota constitit orbis.
iamque pedem referens casus evaserat omnes
redditaque Eurydice superas veniebat ad auras
pone sequens, — namque banc dederat Proserpina
legem —
cum subitae incautuin dementia cepit amantem,
ignoscenda quidem, scirent si ignoscere Manes.
(e) Ducemque terruit dira quies : nam Quintilium
Varum sanguine oblitum et paludibus emei*sum
cernere et audire visus est velut vocantem, non
tamen obsecutus et ipanum intendentis reppulisse.
coepta luce missae in latera legiones, metu an
contumacia, locum deseruere, capto propere campo
umentia ultra, neque tamen Arminiiis quam-
quam libero incursu statim prorupit: sed ut
haesere caeno fossisque impedimenta, turbati cir-
cum milites, incertus signorum ordo, utque tali in
tempore sibi quisque properus et lentae adversum
imperia aures, inrumpere Germanos iubet, clami-
tans, 'en Varus eodemque iterum fato vinctae
legiones ! '
II.
1. Write short notes on italicised words.
2. What is the meaning of satira ? Explain SaiiiHi
quidera iota nostra est.
3. What is the object of the De Reruvi Natura ?
4. Estimate Virgil's position in the history of
didactic poetry.
5. What influences tended to form the style of
Tacitus ?
III.
Translate at sight :
Dionysius shows his Flatterer Damocles what a
Tyrant's Happiness is worth.
Aderant unguenta, coronae : incendebantur
odores : mensae conquisitissimis epulis exstrue-
bantur. Fortunatus sibi Damocles videbatur. In
hoc medio apparatu f ulgentem gladium e lacunari
saeta equina aptum demitti jussit, ut impenderet
illias beat! cervicibua Itaque nee pulcros illos
ministratores aspiciebat nee plenum artis argentam
nee manum porrigebat in mensam, jam ipsae
defluebant coronae : denique exoravit tyrannum,
at abire liceret, quod jam noUet beatus esse.
Cicero.
IV.
Translate into Latin :
The accusation was then directed against the
other generals. Two of them made their escape.
Theramenes and Thrasybulus were acquitted, and
the remainder were brought to trial and con-
demned. On that occasion Socrates, who was
then a member of the council, was bold enough to
speak against so severe a judgment, and exerted
himself to save the unfortunate men, but in vain.
In order to obtain their acquittal, it was prd^osed
^ to judge them one by one ; but the votes were
taken upon them in a body, and all were sentenced
to death. It was on that occasion that Diomedon,
when he was led away into prison to drink the
poison, said to the people, '' We pardon you : may
that whicb you have aone to us not turn out to
your own misfortune."
BltfflifV0fts ot Sovomo.
I
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
LATIN,
ROMAN SATIRE.
Eocaminer .' 6. W. Johnston, Ph.D.
1. TraiLslate:
Simplicior quia et est, qualem me saepe libenter
obtmerim tibi, Maecenas, ut forte legentem
ant taciturn impellat qnovis sermone ; ' Molestus ;
communi sensu plane caret/ inquimus. Eheu,
qnam temere in nosmet legem sancimus iniquam !
Nam vitiis nemo ^ine nascitur; optimus ille est
qui minimis nrgetur. Amicus dulcis, ut aequum est,
cum mea compenset vitiis bona.
What is the context of this excerpt ? Explain
qualem,,. tibi, communi sensu, and account for the
mood and tense of ohtulerim,
2. Translate :
Quid oportet
nos facere, a volgo longe longeque remotos ?
Namque esto, populus Laevino mallet honorem
quam Decio mandare novo, censorque moveret
Appius, ingenuo si non essem patre natus :
vel merito, quoniam in propria non pelle quiessem.
Sed fnlgente trahit constrictos gloria curru
non minus ignotos generosis. Quo tibi, Tilli,
sumere depositum clavum fierique tribuno ?
Account for the syntax of esto, maUet, quiessem,
quo, tibi. Explain to whom or what the reference is
in l^08, Dedo, Appius, sumere... clavum.
3. Tranalate :
Cum te servitio longo curaque levarit,
et cerium vigilans, quartae sit partis Vlixes
audieris heres : ' Ergo nunc Dama sodalis
nusquam est ? Vnde mihi tarn fortem tamque
fidelera ?'
sparge subinde, et, si paulum potes, illacrimare : est
gaudia prodentem voltuxa celare. Sepulchrum
permissum arbitrio sine sordibus exstrue ; funas
egregie factum laudet vicinia. Si quis
sorte coheredum senior male tussiet, huic tu
die, ex parte tua seu fundi sive doraus sit
emptor, gaudentem nummo te addicere. — Sed me
imperiosa trahit Proserpina : vive valeque !
Explain the use of eat Remark on the poet's
manner of concluding the satire. Compare this satire
with others of Horace in respect of the subject and
method of treatment.
4. Translate:
Audaci quicumque afflate Cratino
Iratum Eupolidem praegrandi cum sene palles,
Aspice et haec, si forte aliquid decoctius audis.
Inde vaporata lector mihi ierveat aure :
Non hie, qui in crepidas Oraiorum ludere gestit
Sordidus, et lusco qui possit dicere liisce,
Sese aliquem credens, Italo quod honore supinus
Fregerit heminas Arreti aedilis iniquas.
What do you regard as the real significance of
this passage ?
5. Translate :
Agnitus accipies ; iubet a praecone vocari
ipsos Troiugenas ; nam vexant limen et ipsi
nobiscum. ** Da praetori, da delude tribuno."
Sed libertinus prior est. " Prior," inquit, " ego adsum :
cur timeam, dubitemve locum defendere, quamvis
natus ad Euphraten, n^oUes quod in aure leDestrae
arguerint, licet ipse negem ? sed quinque tabernae
quadringenta parant. Quid confert purpura maior
optandum, si Laurenti custodit in agro
conductas Corvinus oves, ego possideo plus
Pallante et Licinis ? "
Remark on the significance of the use of
Troiiugenaa, nobiscum, qiiadringenta ; on the mood of
timeam; and explain Quid confert pu/i'pura..,LiGini8*
6. Translate:
omnia novit
Graeculus esuriens ; in caelum, iusseris, ibit.
In summa, non Maurus erat neque Sarmata nee Thrax,
qui sumpsit pinnas, mediis sed natus Athenis.
Horum ego non f ugiam conchylia ? me prior ille
signabit ? fultusque toro meliore recumbet
advectus Romam, quo pruna et cottana vento ?
Account for mood and tense of ivsseris. Ex-
plain the lines In summa,., Athenis, noticing two
characteristics of Juvenal.
7. Translate :
Exitus ergo quis est ? O gloria ! vincitur idem
nempe et in exsilium praeceps fugit, atque ibi magnus
mirandusque cliens sedet ad praetoria regis,
donee Bithyno libeat vigilare tyranno.
Finem animae, quae res humanas miscuit olim,
non gladii, non saxa dabunt, nee tela ; sed ille
Cannarum vindex et tanti sanguinis ultor,
anulus. I, demens, et saevas curre per Alpes,
ut pueris placeas et declamatio fias !
Give your estimate of the tenth satire of Juvenal
as satire.
*Write on only two of the three last questions.
*8. •* JuvenaFs strength lies in his prejudices. He
is not a moralist but a- Roman moraJist." Criticise
and explain with references.
*9. " Together the description " (i.e. that given by
Persius) " of Lucilius and Horace make up the idecil
satire." Give the description and compare the two
poets mentioned.
*10. With what department or departments of Greek
literature does Roman satire seem most nearly related ?
Explain ; refer to passages in the satires which you
have read.
L
anfuersftff of Sorotito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
LATIN.
HONORS.
Examiners :[^ i' ^=^^' ^^'^'A^TfT^
\J. Fletcher, M.A., LL.D.
I.
PLAUTUS AND TERENCE.
1. Translate:
(a) Tr. Pol is quidem huius est cluens !
Tarn hoc quidem tibi in procliui quam imber
est quando pluit.
He. Fac is homo ut redimatur.
Ty. Faciam. sed te id oro, Hegio —
He. Quiduis, dum ab re nequid ores, faciam.
Tt. Ausculta, tum scies.
Ego me amitti donicum ille hue redierit non
postulo :
Veram, te quaeso, aestumatum hunc mihi des
quern mittam ad patrem,
Yt is homo redimatur illi.
He. Immo alium potius misero
Hinc, ubi erunt indutiae, illuc, tuom qui eon-
veniat patrem,
Qui tua quae tu iusseris mandata ita ut uelis
perferat.
(6) Ar. Certumnest tibi istuc ?
Non moriri certius.
Abdueite istum actutum ad Hippolytum fa-
brum,
labete huic crassas compedes inpingier :
Inde extra portatn ad meum libertum Cordalum
In lapicidinas facite deductus siet.
Atque bunc me uelle dicite ita curarier,
Ne qui deterius huic sit quam quoi pessnmest.
Tt. Quor ego te inuito me esse saluom poatulem ?
Periclura vitae meae tiio stat perieulo.
Post mortem in morte nil est quod metuam
mali.
Plautus, Captivi.
2. Derive cluens, auaculta, (hrMum, periclurti, and
write notes on the form of ted, nioriri, vinpingier,
aietj and on the meaning of in proclivi, ab re^ tuo stat
perieulo.
3. Explain the syntax of donicxjum redierit, quern,
mittam, iubete, impingier, faciet dedtictus siet, ne qui
... sit, jand the tense of misero.
4. Translate:
(a) Nee tu ea causa minueris
Haec quae facis, ne is mutet suam sententiam.
Patri die uelle, ut, quom uelit, tibi iure irasci non
queat.
Nam quod tu speres *' propulsabo facile uxorem his
moribus,
Dabit nemo'; inueniet inopem potius, quam te
corrumpi sinat.
. Sed si te aequo animo ferre accipiet, neclegentem
f eceris ;
Alia otiosus quaeret, interea aliquid accident boni.
(6) Pa. Me miserum.
Si. Hem, modone id demum sensti, Pamphile ?
Olim istuc, olim, quom ita animum induxti
tuom,
Quod cuperes aliquo pacto efficiundum tibi,
Eodem die istuc verbum vere in te accidit.
Sed quid ego ? Quor me excrucio ? Quor me
macero ?
Quor meam senectutem huius sollicito amentia?
An ut pro huius peccatis ego supplicium suf-
feram ?
Immo habeat, ualeat, uiuat cum ilia.
Pa. Mi pater !
T£REKCE, Andria.
5. Write notes on the meaning of nee, quod, denium^
olim, and on the form of seTisti and mi. Explain the
syntax of die velle, quod euperes and ut sufferam.
6. " Nam quod isti dicunt malevoli, homines nobiles
Eum adiutare adsidueque una scribere/'
Explain what is meant and discuss its probability.
Compare the plays of Terence with those of Plautus
with regard to their diction, dramatic structure and
delineation of character.
II.
(Write in a separate book. )
VIRGIL. ^NEID.
Translate :
(a)*'Accipite ergo animis atque haec mea figite dicta.
Quandoquidem Ausonios coniungi foedere Teucris
Haud licitura, nee vestra capit discordia tinem :
Quae cuique est fortuna hodie, quam quisque secat
spem,
Tros Rutulusne f uat, nuUo discrimine habebo ;
Seu fatis Italum castra obsidione tenentur,
Sive errore malo Troiae monitisque sinistris.
Nee Rutulos .solvo. Sua cuique exorsa laborem
Fortanamque ferent. Rex luppiter omnibus idem.
Fata viam invenient." Stygii per flumina fratris,
Per pice torrentes atraque voragine ripas
Adnuit, et totum nuta tremefecit Olympum.
(6) ** Nulla salus bello." Capiti cane talia demens
Dardanio, rebusque tuis. Proinde omnia magno
Ne cessa turbare metu, atque extollere vires
Gentis bis victae, contra premere arma Latini,
Nunc et Mymiidonum, proceres Phrygia arma
tremiscunt,
Nunc et Tydidea, et Larissaeus Achilles;
Amnis et Hadi'ificas retro fugit Aufidns undas.
Vel quum se pavidum contra mea iurgia fingit
Artiticis scelus, et formidine crimen acerbat ;
Nunquam animam talem dextra hac — absiste mo-
veri —
Amittes; habitet tecum, et sit pectore in isto.
(c) " lUud te, nulla fati quod lege tenetur,
Pro Latio obtestor, pro maiestate tuorum :
Cum iam conubiis pacem felicibus, esto,
Conponent, cum iam leges et foedera iungent,
Ne vetus indigenas nomen mutare Latinos,
Neu Troas fieri iubeas Teucrosque vocari,
[OVKE.]
Aut vocem mutare viros, aut vertere vestem.
Sit Latium, sint Alba^ii per saecula reges,
Sit Romana potens Itala virtuie propago ;
Occidit, occideritque sinas cum nomine Troia."
1. Write notes on italicised words.
2. Name the speakers in the three extracts respec-
tively.
3. Scan the 8th line of (o) and explain the rhythm.
4. State briefly the Roman legend of the connection
of ^neas with Italy.
III.
(Additional for candidates who omit I.)
Translate :
(a) '* Stat sua cuique dies ; breve et inreparabile tempus
Omnibus est vitae : sed famam extendere factis,
Hoc virtutis opus.
(6) Nescia mens hominum fati sortisque futurae,
Et servare modum, rebus sublata secundis !
Tumo tempus erit, magno cum optaverit emptum
Intactum Pallanta, et cum spolia ista diemque
Oderit.
(c) " Et nunc ille quidem spe multum captus inani
Fors et vota facit, cumulatque altaria donis ;
Nos iuvenem exanimum, et nil iam caelestibus ullis
Debentem vano maesti coraitamur honore.
{d) Cuius olorinae surgunt de vertice pennae^
Crimen amor vestrum, formaeque insigne paternae.
(e) Devictam Asiam subsedit adulter.
1. Explain the meaning of (b).
2. Quote or refer to a parallel to (c) in English
poetry.
3. Explain Cfialybean sted, Satv/mian, Blind
Maeonidea^ Pactolian saoids, myt^midona.
4. Write a short note on the simile in VirgiL
atiftiersfts ot ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
LATIN.
HONORS.
Exami7iers • I "^^ FLETCHER, M.A., LL.D,
I!.xam%7ier8 . j j ^ Robertson, B.A.
I.
Translate :
(a) Igitur Romanus qui aderat ezercitus sextum
post cladis annuTn tnum legionum ossa, nullo
noscente alienas reliquias an suorum humo tegeret,
omnes ut coniunctos, ut consanguineos, aucta in
hostem ira, maesti simul et infensi condebant.
primum eoctmendo tumulo caespitem Caesaj:
posuit, g^^atissimo munere in def unctos et praes-
entibus doloris sociua quod Tiberio baud proba-
tum, seu cuncta Germanici in deterius trahenti,
sive exercitum imagine caesorum insepultorumque
tardatum ad proelia et formidolosiorem fiostiuTn,
credebat ; neque imperatorem auguratu et vetuatis-
simis caeHvwniis praeditum adtrectare feralia
debuisse.
(6) Tiberius tamen, quasi augeretur potestas eius,
disseruit : grave moderationi suae tot eligere, tot
. differre. vix per singulos annos oifensiones vitari,
quamvis repulsam propinqua spes soletur : quan-
tum odii fore ab iis qui ultra quinquennium
proieiantur. unde prospici po.sse quae cuique tarn
longo temporis spatio mens, domus, fortuna ?
snperbire homines etiam annua denignatione :
quid si, honorem per quinquennium agitent ?
quinquiplicari prorsus magistratus, subverti leges,
quae sua spatia excercendae candidatorum indus-
triae quaerendisque aut potiundis honoribus sta-
tuerint.
(c) Crispum equestri ortum loco C. Sallustius*
rerum Romanarum florentissimus auctor, sororis
nepotem in nomen adscivit. atque ille, quam-
quam prompto ad capessendos honores aditn,
Maecenatem aemulatus sine dignitaie senatoria
multos triumphalium consulariumque potentia
anteiit, diversus a veterum instituto per cultum
et munditias copiaque et afluentia luxu propior.
suberat tamen vigor animi ingentibus negotiis
par, eo acrior, quo somnum et inertiam magis
ostentabat. igitur incolumi Maecenate proximus,
mox praecipuus cui secreta imperatomm inniter-
entur et interficiendi Postumi Agrippae conscius,
aetate provecta speciem magis in amicitia prin-
cipis quam vim tenuit. idque et Maecenati accid-
erat, lato potentiae raro sempiternae, an satias
capit aut illos, cum omnia tribuerunt, aut hos,
cum iam nihil reliquum est quod cupiant.
Tacitus.
1. Comment, without translating, on :
(a) Nero solus e privignis erat, illuc cuncta vergere :
filius, coUega imperii, adsumitur.
(b) Sed Pompeium imagine pacis, sed Lepidum
specie amicitiae deceptos.
(o) Nam legem maiestatis reduxerat, cui nomen
apud veteres idem, sed alia in indicium veniebant,
(d) Nee patrum cognitionibus satiatus iudiciis
adsidebat.
(e) Plerumque eos tantum apud se professos dis-
seruit, quorum nomina consulibus edidisset.
(/) Proavum Pompeium, amitam Scriboniam, quae
Juondam Augusti coniunx fuerat, consobrinos
iaesares, plenam imaginibus domum ostentat
(Libo).
(g) Tunc decreto patrum permissae' Germanico
provinciae quae mari dividuntur, maiusque im-
perium, quoquo adisset, quam iis qui sorte aut
missu principis obtinerent.
(h) Centiens sestertium pollicitus Caesar, et quan-
tum aerario aut fisco pendebant, in quinquennium
remisit.
({) Commaffenis Q. Servaeus praeponitur, turn
primum ad ius praetoris translatis.
(j) Id solum QermaDico super leges praestiterimus,
quod in curia potius quam in foro, apud senatum
quam iudices de morte eius anquiritur.
(k) At hercule nemo refert, quod Italia exterhae
opis indiget, quod vita populi Romani per incerta
maris et tempestatum cotidie volvitur.
Ibid,
2. Remark on the grammatical use of words italic-
ised in the first extract for translation.
3. What, according to Tacitus, were the views of
Tiberius, (a) on indiscriminate charity, (&) on sump-
tuary legislation ?
4. How far is the government of the Principate
correctly described as a dyarchy ?
5. How far could the Emperor influence the ordinary
courts of law ?
II.
(Write in a separate book.)
1. Translate:
Quae cum dixissem, magis ut ilium provocarem
quam ut ipse loquerer, tum Triarius leniter ar-
ridens, Tu quidem, inquit, totum £picurum paene
e philosophorum choro sustulisti. Quid ei re-
liquisti nisi te, quoquo modo loqueretur, intel-
legere, quid diceret ? Aliena dixit in physicis,
nee ea ipsa, quae tibi probarentur ; si qua in iis
corrigere voluit, deteriora fecit ; disserendi artem
Dullam habuit ; voluptatem cum summum bonum
diceret, primum in eo ipso parum vidit, deinde
hoc quoque alienum, nam ante Aristippus et ille
melius; addidisti ad extremum etiam indoctum
fuisse.
Cicero, De Finibus, I.
2. Explain the criticisms of Epicureanism here sum-
marized, going sufficiently into detail to make clear
the bearing of each statement.
3. Translate :
Sed finge non solum callidum eum, qui aliquid
improbe faciat, verum etiam praepotentem, ut M.
Crassus fuit— qui tamen solebat uti suo bono — ,
ut hodie est noster Pompeius, cui recte facienti
gratia est habenda : esse enim quam vellet iniquus
[over.]
f
n
poterat impune. Quam multa vero iniuste fieri
possunt, quae nemo possit reprehendere ! Si te
amicus tuus moriens rogaverit, ut hereditatem
reddas suae filiae, nee usquam id scripserit, ut
scripsit Fadius, nee cuiquam dixerit, quid facies ?
Ibid, 11.
4. (a) Explain qui tamen aolebat uti svuo bono and
the reference to Fadius.
(b) What light does the passage throw on the
assumed date of the discussion ? When was the work
really written ?
(c) Explain Cicero's line of argument at this
stage.
5. State the Stoic theory of the summum bonum
and of the TrporjyfAipa.
In what points chiefly did Stoicism differ from
Cynicism ? To what extent did it resemble Epicurean-
ism ?
Anfuersfts of Sovontik
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
LATIN PROSE.
HONORS.
Examiner : A. J. Bell, M.A., Ph.D.
She spoke with feeling of the Divine protection
which had shielded her from so many dangers. She
acknowledged simply and gratefully the loyal affection
which throughout her reign she had met with from
her subjects. ** Her life," she said, *' had now been
dangerously shot at, and nothing had grieved her
more than that a person of her own sex, of the same
rank and degree, and nearly allied to her in blood,
had fallen into so great a crime. So far was she from
bearing the Queen of Scots ill will, that she had writ-
ten secretly to her that if she would confess hei- fault,
her practices should be wi-apped in silence. Even
now, if the Queen of Scots would repent, and if there
were no interest in the matter but her own, she would
still willingly pardon her. Nay, if England might by
her own death attain a more flourishing estate and a
better prince, she would gladly lay down her life.
She cared to keep it only for her people's sake. For
herself, she saw no great reason why she should be
fond to live or fear to die. She was in a cruel posi-
tion. She was called on to order the death of a
kinswoman whose practices had caused her deep dis-
tress. Her situation was so unprecedented, and the
matter itself of so great moment, that she trusted an
immediate resolution would not be demanded of her.
In concerns less important than the present she was
accustomed to deliberate long upon that which was
once to be resolved. She promised to pray God to
illuminate her mind to foresee what would be for the
good of the Church and commonwealth, and admitting
that there would be danger in delay, she undertook to
give her answer with due conveniency."
anfuevsfti? of STovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH,
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner: A. H. Reynar., LL.D.
Note Candidates for Honors omit the first question ; Pass candi-
dates take any Jive questions.
1. Describe the great changes in the moral and
intellectual atmosphere of England in the 18th century.
Show the corresponding changes in the literary work
of the age, and illustrate by the works prescribed.
(Not more than four pa|<es allowed for answor. )
2. Trace the growth of English prose from Milton to
Goldsmith. Name characteristic writings.
3. Give briefly the specific aim and the peculiar
method of Butler in his Analogy. How did his style
accord with his subject and suit the readers of his
time ?
4. What measures did Burke recommend in his
speech on Conciliation with America ? Compare with
the present English colonial policy. Account for the
way in which his recommendations were received at
that time.
5. What are the distinctive excellencies of Gold-
smith's writings, and what are his limitations ? Illus-
trate by references to passages in the works prescribed,
6. From what point of view and in what spirit did
each of the following writers describe human life and
character : Addison, Pope, Swift, Johnson, Cowper ?
(Not more than four pages allowed for answer. )
7. Compare the lyric qualities of Collins, Gray, and
Burns, and illustrate by quotation or reference.
einftiersfts of Sovonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH.
HONORS.
Examiner : D. R. Keys, M.A.
I.
Translate :
Pa feng Alfred ^I^elwulfing his bropur t5
Wesseaxna rice. Ond paes ymb anne monap
gefeaht iElfred cyning wip alne pone here lytle
werede aet Wiltune, ond hine lonofe on daeff se-
fliemde, ond pa Denisean ahton wselstowe gewald.
1. Explain italicised vowels or diphthongs in Wes-
seaKXiSL, ymh, geiettht, here, longe, dceg, gefli^mde.
2. Decline in full broSur, here, dceg, wcelatoive.
3. Classify, and give principal parts of all verbs in
the extract.
4. Write a short note on iElfred as an English
author.
II.
Translate :
And Weonodland wses us ealne weg on stSor-
bord o5 Wislemu&an. SSo Wisle is swySe mycel
6a, and hlo t(^liS Witland and Weonodland ; and
Paet Witland belimpe^ to Estura ; and seo Wisle
lid (it of Weonodlande, and \lcS in Estmere ; and
se Estmere is huru fiftene mile brad. Ponne
cymeS Ilfing eastan in Estmere of ^s&m mere, ^e
Truso standee in stae^e ; and cuma^ ut samod in
Estmere, Ilfing eastan of Estlande, and Wisle
su^an of Winodlande. And Ponne benimS Wisle
Ufing hire naman, and ligeS of psem mere west
and nor5 on sse ; for 5y hit man hset Wislerau^a.
1. State gender, genit. Sg. and nom. pi. of ea, stce^^
mUe, namau, see,
2. Compare awyiSe, niicel.
3. How does this passage illustrate (a) the manner
of forming the 3 Sg. Pres. Indie, (6) the use of advbs.
of direction ?
4. Derive ea, toliiS, cumaS, of.
5. U8, Who is the speaker.
III.
Translate :
Hwset I 5a fserlice wurdon 5a gymstanas swa
ansunde past fur^on nan tacen . iere «rran
tocwysednysse nses gesewen. pa se uSwita
Graton saniod mid Paui cnihtum feoll to I5hannes
fotum, gelyfende on God. Se apostol hine fullode
mid eallum his hlrgde, and he ongann Godes ge-
leafan openlice bodian. Pa twegen gebro^ra,
Atticus and Eugenlus, seal don heora gymstanas,
and ealle heora Shto dteldon wSedlum, and tilig-
don pam apostole, and niicel menigu geleafFullra
him eac to ge^eodde.
1. Decline in fxxll fotum, Ood, US.
2. What peculiarities of conjugation have the verbs
wv^rdon, gesewen and aeaidon ? Explain.
3. Compare Old with Modem English as to sentence
structure, illustrating from the extract
IV.
Translate :
WoriaS fS. winsalo, waldend licgad
dreame bidrorene ; dugu5 eal gecrong
wlonc bi wealle ; sume wiff fomom,
lerede in forJwege ; sumne fugel op beer
ofer heanne holm ; sumne se hara wulf
deaSe gedselde ; sumne drgorighleor
in eorOscrsefe eorl gehydde :
yPde swa }?i8ne eardgeard selda Scyppend,
op Pset burgward breahtma lease
eald enta geweorc, idlu stodon.
1. Explain the italicised consonants in lic^a^,
bidrorene, heanne, Scyp2^nd.
2. Write in nom. Sg. wmsalo, %dLu ; and in nom. pL
dreame, heanne.
3. Give the 2 Sg. Pret. Indie, of ferede, oibosr,
gecTong.
4. Point out poetic (dialectal) forms in the extract.
V.
Translate :
50 Nis pier on 9am londe laSgenidla,
n€ wop n^ wracu, weatacen nan,
yldu ne yrm^u, ne se enga dea&,
ne lifes lyre, ne lapes cyme,
ne synn nS sacu, nS sarwracu,
55 ne w»dle gewin, n€ welan onsyn,
ne sorge n6 slsep, ne swar leger,
ne wintergeweorp, ne wedra gebregd
hreoh under heoionum, ne se heerda forst
caldum cylegicelum cnyseS ^nigne.
1, ScanU. 50, 51,54, 59.
2. Briefly characterise the poetry of the Anglo-
Saxons.
anftoersfcs of Sovotila
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FRENCH.
PASS.
Examiner : Pelham Edgar, Ph D.
L
Translate :
On demanda enauite : '* Quelle est la chose
qo'on revolt sans remercier, dont on jouit sans
savoir comment, qu'on donne aux autres quand on
ne salt oil Ton en est, et qu'on perd sans s'en
apercevoir ? "
Cbacun dit son mot, Zadig devina seal que
c'etait la vie ; il expliqua toutes les autres Enigmas
avec la mSme facility. Itobad disait toujours que
rien n'^tait plus aise, et qu'il en serait venu k
bout tout aussi facilement, s'il avait voulu s'en
donner ia peine. On proposa des questions sur
la justice, sur le souverain bien, sur Tart de r^gner ;
les r^ponses de Zadig f urent juge& les plus solides.
" C'est bien dommage, disait-on, qu'un si bon
esprit soit un si mauvais cavalier." — " Illustres seig-
neurs, dit Zadig, j'ai eu Thonneur de vaincre
dans la lice; c'est k moi qu'appartient Tarmuie
blanche. Le seigneur Itobad s'en empara pendant
mon sommeil: il jugea apparemment qu'elle hii
si^rait mieuz que la verte."
1. Translate into French : He enjoys good health.
He will never perceive it.
2. Give the first plural of the past definite of jouir,
savoir f a^apercevoir, venir.
3. Give a sketch of Voltaire's life before 1730.
II.
Translate :
lis cheminaient ainsi doucement a travers les
bois ; mais la hauteur des arbres et T^paissear de
leurs feuillages leur firent bientdt perdre de vue la
montagne sur laquelle ils se dirigeaient, et mSme
le soleil, qui ^tait pr^s de se coucher. Au bout de
quelque temps, ils quRtferent, sans s'en apercevoir,
le sentier fray^ dans lequel ils avaient marcb^
jusqu'alors, et ils se trouvlrent dans un labyrinthe
d'arbres, de lianes et de roches, qui n'avait plus
d*issue. Paul fit asseoir Virginie et se mit k
courir 9a et li tout hors de lui, pour chercher un
chemin bors de ce fourr^ ^pais, mais il tse fatigua
en vain. II monta au baut d'un grand arbre, pour
d^ouvrir au moins la montagne : mais il n'aper9ut
autour de lui que les cimes des arbres, dont quel-
ques-unes ^taient ^clair^ par les derniers rayons
du soleil coucbant Cependant Tombre des mon-
tagnes couvrait d6jk les fordts dans les vall^ ; le
vent se ealmait, comme il arrive au coucher du
soleil ; un prof ond silence r^nait dans ces solitude.'s,
et on n'y entendait d'autre bruit que le bramement
des cerfs, qui venaient chercher leur gtte dans ces
lieux ^cartds.
1. Render in French: (a) He made him read the
book, (b) He made the children read, (c) He made the
hildren read the book.
2. What are the striking literary features in the
story of Paul et Virginie ?
III.
Translate (a) and (b).
(a) Jusqu' au bout je pus lui avoir du pain blanc,
de la viande f ratche. II n'y en avait que pour lui,
par exemple ; et vous ne pouvez rien imaginer de
plus touchant que ces dejeuners de grand-p^re, si
innocemment ^go'istes, — le vieux sur son lit, f rais et
riant, serviette au menton, pr^ de lui sa petite
fille, un peu p&lie par les privations, guidant ses
mains, le faisant boire, Taidant k manger toutes les
bonnes choses d^fendues.
1. Explain the situation.
(b) Confus^ment, comme dans un rSve, le petit
Stenne, voyait des usines transform^s en casernes.
des barricades d&ertes, gamies de ehitfons mouilles
de longues chemin^s qui trouaient le broaillard
et montaient dans le ciel, vides, ^recb^. De
loin en loin une sentinelle, des officiers encapu-
chonn^s qui regardaient l&-bas, avec des lorgnettes,
et de petites tentes tremp^ de neige fondue
devant les feux qui mouraient. Le grand connais-
sait les chemins, prenait k travers champs pour
^viter les postes.
] . From what story is this extract taken ?
einfiif rsflff of Sovontm
ANKUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FRENCH.
PASS.
Examiner : W. A. R. Kerr, B.A.
Grammar, Sight, Prose, Bossuet.
Translate into French :
1. If they were to go down town, we should meet
them.
2. The King is dead : long live the King !
3. He introduced me to you.
4. Although he says so, I cannot believe it.
5. He got his tailor to make him a coat, but it
'does not suit him.
6. He is the taUest man I have ever seen.
7. Here is the letter which I have forgotten to
read.
8. He is leaving France and setting out for Japan.
9. They have more pictures than we have.
10. We ought to have gone.
II.
Translate into French :
Towards two o'clock in the afternoon some
English tourists, led by a guide, were visiting the
ruins of Pompei. The party was made up of a
father, mother, three tall daughters, two little
boys, and a cousin. Though they were probably
enjoying themselves, they tried, like all people of
British race, to seem bored (ennuy^. They
[OVBB]
looked at everj'thing with a cold and neutral
(glauque) eye. They visited the military quarter,
the temples of Venus and Jupiter, and the shops
which are near them. All silently followed in
their " Murrays " the explanations of the guide,
and hardly cast a glance on the columns, the
broken statutes, and the inscriptions.
III.
Translate into English :
Un homme s'est rencontr^ d'une profondeur
d'esprit incroyable, hypocrite raffing autant qu 'ha-
bile politique, capable de tout entreprendi-e et de
tout cacher, ^galement actif et infatigable dans la
paix et dans la guerre, qui ne laissait rien k la
fortune de ce qu'il pouvait lui 6ter par conseil et
par pr^voyance ; mais au reste si vigilant et si pret
a tout, qu'il n'a jamais manqu^ les occasions qu'elle
lui a pr&ent^es ; enfin un de ces esprits remuants
et audacieux qui semblent ^tre n^s pour changer
le monde. Que le sort de tels esprits est hasar-
deux, et qu'il en paratt dans Thistoire k qui leur
audace a 4t^ funeste ! Mais aussi que ne font-ils
pas, quand il plait k Dieu de s'en servir ! 11 fut
donn^ k celui-ci de tromper les peuples et de pre-
valoir contre les rois.
1. To whom does this characterization refer ? Dis-
cuss briefly its truth.
2. In what respects is the extract typical of Bossuet's
style ?
3. What were Bossuet's views on government in
general ?
IV.
Translate into English :
Le major, commandant prussien, achevait de
lire son courrier, le dos au fond d'un grand fau-
teuil de tapisserie et ses pieds bott^s sur le marbre
^l^gant de la chemin^e, oil ses ^perons, depuis
trois mois qu'il occupait le chsLteau d'Uville, avaient
trac^ deux trous profonds, fouillds un peu plus
tous les jours.
Une tasse de caf^ fumait sur un gu^ridon de
marqueterie macule par les liqueurs, hriiU par
les cigares, entaill^ par le canif de Tofficier con-
qu^rant qui, parfois, s'arrStant d'aiguiser un
crayon, tra9ait sur le meuble gracieux des chiffres
ou des dessins, a la fantaisie de son rSve noncha-
lant.
WLntbtmatp of Sotomo*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIKD YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. H. Cameron, M.A,
I.
Translate:
Avant tout, Feuillet veut Stre d^licat et distingud
S*il se trouve par hasard en face d'un embryon de
sentiment bas, il recule effar^ et d^oilte: il est
impossible qu'une femme du monde ^prouve rien
de semblable ! De 1^ son optimisme obstin^ ; de
\h, aussi son romanesque; pour que tout finisse
bien, il faut que le basard intervienne : le hasard,
ou la Providence, une Providence-g&teau, ravie
de ce qui se passe sur la terre, et n'ayant pas le
coeur de retarder jusqu'lt la vie future les recom-
penses que les gens du monde out tant m^rit^es.
Son optimisme n'est pas d'ailleurs cet optimisme
de commande dont le seul but est de satisfaire le
public; c'est un optimisme convaincu : leshommes,
les gens du monde, sont si bons, si nobles et si
g^n^reux qu'ils ne peuvent commettre une mau-
vaise action. C'est It peine s'ils commettent des
actions quelconques \ ils sont toujours distingu^s
et cette distinction IsL a, j*imagine, pour effetde
niveler et d'attdnuer singuli^rement lea caract^res.
N'exag^rons rien ; les h^ros de Feuillet agissent
.... en se for9ant un peu ; leurs actes sont souvent
genereuK ; mais, si j'aime ce qu'ils font, j'ai malgr^
moi quelque defiance du motif qui les fait agir :
et je me demande si ce qui les pousse, les arrSte
ou les console, c'est la d^licatesse de leurs natures
ou leur ^tat de gens du monde.
r. DU TiLLET.
L
II.
Translate into English :
(a) Li reis Marsilies la tient, qui Deu nen aimet :
Mahomet sert et Apollin reclaimet.
Nes poet guarder que mals ne li ataignet.
(b) Blanchandrins at tot premerains parlet,
Et dist al rei: ''Salvez seiiez de Deu,
Le glorios, que devons adorer !
I90 vos mandet reis Marsili&s li ber :
Enquis at molt la lei de salvet^t,
De son aveir vos voelt assez doner,
Ors et leons, veltres enchadenez,
Set cenz chameilz et mil ostors mudez,
D'or et d'argent quatre cenz muls trossez,
Cinquante charres que charreiier ferez.
Tant i avrat de besanz esmerez,
Dont bien podresT voz soldediers lo^r."
(c) Et dist al reiz : Laissiez ester voz Frans.
En cest pais avez est^t set anz,
Molt ont olit et peines et ahans.
1. Trace as fully as possible the derivation of the
following French forms, specifying the phonetic laws
where you can : 7^6% tierU, aimet, nes, poet, mals, at,
tot, igo, aveir, ore, or^ dont, lo4r, paw,
2. How do you account for the z in salvez, assez,
m^udez, aTiz.
3. Rewrite in modem French the last two lines of (6).
4. Point out any other striking differences between
the old and the modern constructions in (b).
III.
Translate into French :
In the morning, when thou risest unwillingly,
let this thought be present — I am rising to the
work of a human being. Why then am I dis-
satified if I am going to do the things for which
I exist and for which I was brought into the
world ? Or have I been made for this, to lie in
the bed-clothes and keep myself warm ? But this
is more pleasant. Dost thou exist then to take
thy pleasure, and not at all for action or exertion ?
Dost thou not' see the little plants, the little birds,
the ants, the spiders, the bees working together
to put in order the several parts of the universe ?
And art thou unwilling to do the work of a human
being, and dost thou not make haste to do that
which is according to thy nature? But it is
necessary to take rest also — it is necessary ; how-
ever, nature has fixed bounds to this too : she has
fixed boimds to eating and drinking, and yet thou
g^oest beyond these bounds, beyond what is suffici-
ent ; yet in thy acts it is not so, but thou stoppest
short of what thou canst do. So thou lovest not
thyself ; for if thou didst, thou wouldst love thy
nature and her will.
— Marcus Aurelius Antoninus.
IV.
Write a French composition, not exceeding three
full pages, on any one of the following subjects :
1. Gil Bias.
2. Figaro.
3. Beaumarchais.
4. Charles I*', roi d'Angleterre.
5. La Vie forestifere au Canada.
6. Les Expositions Internationales.
7. " Le danger loge sur les bords de la sfiret^."
8. " Prenez le temps comme il vient et les hommes
comma its sont"
8lnnier0fC9 of SToromo
ANKUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS.
ExamiTier : Pelham Edqar, Ph.D.
N.B. — TroMUUt onlf t?i^ specified passages,
A.
Translate :
Songez, r^pliquai-je, que vous n'arriveriez que
bien malade au haut de notre air ; il n'est pas res-
pirable pour nous dans toute son ^tendue, il s'en
faat bien : on dit qu4I ne Test d^jk presque plus
au haut de certaines montagnes, et je m'^tonne
bien que ceux qui ont la foiie de croire que des
g^nies corporels habitent Tair le plus pur ne diaent
aussi que ce qui fait que ces g^nies ne nous
rendent que des visites et tr^ rares et trfes courtes,
c'est qu'il y en a peu d'entre eux qui aachent
plonger, et que ceux-lk mdme ne peuvent faire
jusqu'au fond de cet air ^pais oh nous soroines que
des plongeons de tr^s peu de dur^.
Pluralitd des Mondee.
1. Explain the mood of the italicised words.
2, Give the French for, " He is far from rich."
8. Fontenelle has been called " un Voltaire man-
qud" Comment on this statement.
4. Sketch the life of Le Sagdi (Do not exceed an
average sheet).
5. Discuss the importance of CHI Bias with special
reference to 18th century fiction.
[otib]
I
c.
Translate :
G^nereux, bienfaisant, juste, plein de vertus,
S'il ^tait nd chr^tien^ qae serait-il.de plus ?
Et plttt k Dieu du moins que ce saint interprfete,
Ce ministre sacr^ que mon &me souhaite,
5 Du trouble oii tu me vois vint bientot me tirer !
Je ne sais, mais enfin j'ose encore esp^rer
Que oe Dieu, dout cent fois on m'a peint la cld-
mence,
Ne r^prouverait point une telle alliance :
Peut-etre, de ZfiLXre en secret ador^,
10 II pardonne aux combats de ce cceur d^hir^ ;
6. Scan lines 1-2.
7. Give a critical estimate of Zaire,
8. Under what circumstances was Zadig com-
posed?
9. Sketch Voltaire's life from his departure from
Prussia. Be concise.
D.
J'entre avec une secrete horreur dans ce vaste
desert du monde. Ce chaos ne m' offre qu'une
solitude affreuse oil r^gne un mome silence. Mon
dme A la presae cherche d a'y r^andre, et se
trouve parout reaserrde. Je ne suis jamais moins
seiil que quand je suis seul, disait un ancien : moi,
je ne suis seul que dans la foule, oti je ne puis
6tre ni k toi ni aux autres. Mon coeur voudrait
parler, il sent qui il n'est point 6coiit^; il vou-
drait r^pondre, on ne lui dit rien qui puisse aller
jusqu' k lui. Je rH entends point la langue du
pays, et peraonne ici n'entenala mienne,
10. Translate and explain the italicised sentences.
11. Show in how far the whole passage is char-
teristic of its author.
E.
(a) Estimate the importance of English influences
upon the thought and literature of France in the
eighteenth century.
(b) Point out how the circumstances of Rousseau s
life influenced his writings.
(c) Write brief notes on Siicle de Louia XIV,,
jSmile, Marivaux, Piron, J. B. Roibaaeau, Lea
Martyra,
nni\t$vait9 of Sorotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. Squair.
I.
Translate :
Changez encore les circonstances, et supposez
que Scapin soit au service d'un inattre dur, avare
et bourru, et qulls soient attaqu^ sur un f^nd
chemin par trois ou quatre brigands. Scapin
s'enf uit ; son maitre se defend : mais press^ par
le nombre, il est oblig^ de s'enfair aupsi ; et Ton
vient apprendre k Scapin que son maitre a ^happ^
an 'danger. '* Comment, dira Scapin trompd dans
son attente, il s'est done enf ui ? Ab ! le l&che ! " —
'* Mais, lui, r^pondra-t-on, seul contre trois, que
voulais-tu qu' il fit ? — Qu' U wxyvi/HUr r^pondra-
t-il ; et ce qu' il mourAt deviendra plaisant. H
est done constant que la beauts commence,
s'accroit, varie, decline et disparatt avec les rap-
ports,
Diderot.
1- Write precise notes on Scapi/n and qu' U mourAt
2. Of what argument is tbis extract a part ?
3. What does Diderot have to say in the extracts
you have read regarding: (1) '* True taste" in poetical
description ; (2) tne translation of poetry ?
I
II.
Translate :
Figaro: Monsieur, il n'est pas tons les jours
fete ; mais» sans compter les soins quotidiens,
monsieur a pu voir que, lorsqu'ils en ont besoin,
mon z^le n'attend pas qu'on lui commande.
Bartholo : Votre zMe n'attend pas ! Que direz-
vous, monsieur le z^I^, a ee malheureux qui bllille
et dovt tout ^veil]^ ? et Tautre qui, depuis trois
heures, dternue k se faire sauter le cr&ne et jaillir
la cervelle ! que leur direz-vous ?
Figaro: Je leur dirai Eh parbleu, je
dirai k celui qui eternue : Diea vous b^nisse ; et va
te coucher, a celui qui b&ille. Ce u'est pas cela,
mopsieur, qui grossira le m^moire.
— Le Barbier de Seville,
1. Explain concisely the humor of the situation.
2. Dieu vous benisse. What is the point of humor
in the use of this phrase ?
III.
Translate :
Ce riant asile des &mes ^tait ferm^ k Torient
par le pont sous lequel nous avions pass^ ; deux
col lines le bomaient au septentrion et au *midi ; il
ne s'ouvrait qu'jk Toccident, oti s'dlevait un grand
bois de sapins. Les troncs de ces arbres, rouge
maVbre de vert, montaut sans branches jusqu' k
leurs cimes, ressemblaient k de hautes colonnes, et
il y r^gnait un bruit religieux, semblable au sourd
rugissement de Torgue sons les voiites d'une ^glise ;
mais lorsqu'on pdndtrait au fond du sanctuaire,
on n'entendait plus que les hymnes des oiseaux
qui c^l^braient k la m^moire des morts une fete
^ternelle.
— Atala,
1. How is the original purpose of the book illus-
trated from this passage ?
2. What qualities of style of Chateaubriand are here
illustrated ? Be precise ?
IV.
Translate :
Au loin fut un ample manoir,
Ou le reseaux noueux en ^lastique ^gide,
Arme d'un bras souple et nerveux,
Repoussant la balle rapide,
Exer^ait la jeunesse en de robustes jeux.
Peuple, de tes Sus cette retraite obscure
Fut la D61os. O murs ! Temple k jamais fameux !
Bercean des lois ! sainte masure !
— Le Jeu de Paume.
1. Write a note on D6I08,
2. Make remarks on the poetry of the 18th century,
illustrating from the extract before you.
V.
Translate :
La politesse allemande est plus cordiale, mais
moins nuanc^e que la politesse fran9aise ; il y a
plus d'^ards pour le rang et plus de precautions
en tout. En France, on flatte plus qu'on ne
manage, et, comme on a Tart de tout indiquer, on
approche beaucoup plus volontiers des sujets les
plus d^licats. L'allemand est une langue tr^s
brillante en po^ie, trds abondante en mdtaphy-
sique, mais tr^ positive en conversation. La
langue fran^aise, au contraire, n'est vraiment riche
que dans les toumures qui expriment les rapports
les plus d^li^s de la soci^t^.
— Dq VAllemagne,
Anfliersftv of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1001.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GERMAN COMPOSITION AND'
SIGHT TRANSLATION.
Eccaminer : P. Toews, M.A., Ph.D.
I.
Translate :
Alphonso, king of Naples, had a jester at his
court This jester had a book in which he entered
all the absurd thinfi;s that took place at the court.
King Alphonso had at one time sent a Moor, who
had been his prisoner for a long time, to Morocco
with a large sum of money to buy horses. On
the same day the jester waited on the king at
sapper, and the king asked for the aforesaid book.
The king took the book and saw the following
words : ** King Alphonso has sent the Moor to his
country with a large sum of money to buy horses."
The king then asked him : ** Why have you entered
that ? " The jester answered : " Because I believe
he will never come back to become a prisoner
again ; and you will lose both your man and your
money." " Bqt, if he does come back, your jest
will come to nothing," said the king. *' By no
means, your Majesty," said the jester, *' if he
returns I will erase your name and enter his
instead."
VOCABULARY.
Jester, Narr ; enter, tH/niragen ; absurd things,
Albemheiten ; Moor, Mohr ; wait on, besiLchen ;
aforesaid, bewuszt ; come to nothing, zu Wasaer wer-
den ; erase, avsstreichen.
[OYXBJ
L
II.
Translate :
9ltd^t wentg war cr ta^er fiberrafd(it, al6 man i^u fn
tin ger&umtge^, fd^Sne^ 3intmer fii^rte, ^a^ )ioar ntc^t
fe^r wo^nltd^ ; audfa^ tcnn e« ent^iclt nur cine leerc
SBcttflelle unt> etncn ungebcuem *amtn, aber in Ser-
gtcid^ung mit ten SSifbent fefner ^^antajte e^er einnn
^runfgemac^, ali etnem ©efSngni^ gltd^. Der alte
^rieg^mann tt){lnf(^te bent ©efangenen gute 9}a4it unb
jog pdd mit frfnen ^et^ten jurilcf. din fleiner, ^gercr^
fittHd^er 2Rann trat etn. Der groge ©(^laffeftunb^
SQBetd^er an fefner ©efte btng, unb jeben femer ©c^ritte
tok mit Xettengeraffel bejeid^nete, gab i\)n aid ben
Slatf)«b{ener ober ©d^liefer funb. Ox legte fd^weigenb
einige groge ©d^eiter •^olj in'g *amin, unb balb lobertc
etn be^agli(^e« gfeuer auf/ bad bem jungen 9Wann lit
ber lalten 5Wfirjnad(|t febr ju ©tatten fam. Suf bie
Sretter ber breiten, leeren SBettfleBe breitete ber ©c^lic^
f er eine gro§e, woBene Dedfe, unb bad erfle ffiort, bad
®eorg aud feinem SRunbe b^rte, roax bte freunblic^e
Sintabung an ben ©efangenen, ft(^'d bequem )u ntac^en.
III.
Translate :
Da id^ fo im ©titten franfte,
(Sn)ig mint' unb n)eg ))er(angte
Unb nur blieb »or ^ngfi unb SBa^n ;
9Barb mir pI90li(^, wit 'oon oitn,
ffieg bed ®rabed ©tein gefd^oben
Unb mein Sunred aufgetpam
3Ben id^ fa^ unb wen an feiner
<&anb erblidfte, frage Reiner ;
Swig werb' i^ bied nur fef)n,
Unb 'oon alien Sebendfiunben
SBirb nur bie, wit meine SGBunben,
Swig better offen fle^n*
nnfUersfts of STotonco^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
GERMAN AUTHORS AND LITERATURE-
GENERAL.
Examiner: G. H. Needler, B.A, Ph.D.
I.
1. Translate :
@r ifi tcr 9lrm teg aflngltngg in fccr ©d^lad^t,
!I)eg ®reifcg leud^tent) Slug* in ter SBcrfammlung ;
Dcnn feine ©eel' ifl fiitle ; fie bewafjrt
!Der SRu^e ^eirge^, unerfd^Spfteg ®ut,
Unb ten Um^ergetriebnen reic^et er
%\x^ i^ren SEiefen giat() unb ^ftlfe^ 2Rid^
3lig er »om SBruber bg ; ben jiaunl' id^ an
Unb tmmer wieber an unb fonnte mir
Dag ®lficf nid&t eigen madden, lief ibn nidbt
aiug meinen Slrmen log unb ffiblte nic^t
Die SWabc ber ®efal^r, bie ung umgiebL
3e$t gebn fte, ibren Slnfcblag augjuffi^ren,
Der ®ee ju, wo bag ©d^iff mit ben ®effibrten,
3n einer Suc^t »erjiecft, aufg 3^^^^ lauert,
Unb l^aben flugeg SBort mir in ben SWunb
©cgeben, mii) gelel^rt, wag i^ bem ^8nig
Sntworte, wenn er fenbet unb bag Opfer
aWir bringenber gebietet,
GoKTHE, Iphigenie ouf Tauris, IV. 1.
2. Er iat der Ann u.8,w. Who is here the er?
Who is speaking ?
3. Explain (a) ihren Anschlag auszufilhren, (6) was
ich dem Konig antworte, (c) daa Opfer.
4. What had been Iphigenie's history previous to
the time at which the play opens ? What new informa-
tion concerning her family did Orestes bring to her ?
5. Discuss concisely the character of Iphigenie and
of Thoas.
II
6. Translate :
SBie ber wanbcmbc aRann, ber »or bcm ©mfm ber ©onnc
®{e nod^ cinmal iM Slugc, bte fd^nctoerfd^winbcnbe, fagtc,
3)ann im bunfein ©cbfifd^ unb an ber ©ettc beg gelfend
©(^weben fie^et t^r Sflb ; tt)of)tn cr b(e SUdfc nur wenbct
Sttet eg »or unb glcinit unb f(^n)anft in ^errltd^en ^arben :
®o betDegte »or ^ermann bte Itebltd^e Stlbung beg ^fibc^eng
©anft jtd^ sorbet unb fd^ien bem $fab tng ©etreibe ju fiolaen.
9[ber er fit^r aug bent flaunenben Zxanm auf, wenbete langfom
9laci^ bem Dorfe fff^ ju unb jlaunte wieber ; benn wteber
Xant i\)m bte l^of)e ©efiatt beg ^errltd^en 3R&b(^eng entgegen.
gefi betrad^tet* er fie ; eg war fein S^einbflb, jte war eg
©elber, i)tn gr6§eren 5trug unb einen Heinem am ^enfel
Iragenb in jegltd^er •^anb, fo fd^ritt fie gefd^fiftig gum SBrunncm
IV. Goethe, Henrvann u. Dorothea.
7. Tell the story from this point to the end.
8. At what period of his life did Goethe write
this poem ? What attracted him to the subject, and
influenced him as to form and substance ?
9. Scan the first three lines of this extract.
III.
10. Translate :
Dfe ©trage r^etnauftofirtg ffl^rte ^urt fiber Slnber^
nad^ unb er befd^Io§, tn bem na^en 9lobtne(f nodii etnmal
»orgufpred(ien. @r fam bort am jwetten Stage nad(i ®vau^
tl^erg unfeligem SBefu^e an unb ^8rte bf e ganje Sntffi^r^s
ungggefd^idj^te. Sg war aber aud(i fd^on befannt geworben,
ba§ ®unt^er ftd^ ber 53anbe beg wtlben grift angefd^Ioffcn
unb ben SSalbbauer auggeplfinbert unb in ben (^d&weine^
flail gefperrt l)abe unb bann mit ben ©traud^bicben na^^
©fiben gejogen fet. SBa^Ia erfu^r ^urtg Sfnwefen^eit
®ie lie§ i^n tn t^re hammer rufen unb bat i^n unter
SE^ranen, ba§ er fctnem $errn nad^etlen unb i^n in i^rem
9lan:en befc^wBren foUe, »on ber ©emcinfd^aft mtt bem
^errufenen Slitter ftc^ log gu madden. *S)a^ Slenb unb
ber Summer beg franfen, gebrod^cncn SWabd^eng rfi^ret
^urt fo lief, bag er i^ren 5luftrag augjufft^ren »erfpra(^»
RiEHL, Die Gerechtigkeit Oottes.
11. dxplain (a) die ganze EntfijihrtU7igageachi<^ :
(6) dcnr^ Waldbauer ausgeplilndert.
12. Describe the part played by Eurt in this story.
13. CSompare the characters of Riza and Adelheid in
Die OaTierben.
IV.
14. Give some account of Schiller's histories and of
bis historical plays.
15. Write notes on (a) Goethe's life from the death of
Schiller ; (6) Amdt ; (c) " Young Germany " ; (d) Jean
Paul ; (e) Wildenbruch. ^
Vnftietrsfcv ot STototito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GERMAN COMPOSITIOK
HONORS.
Eosaminer: Peof. Horning.
I.
Translate into Qerman :
1. Aelfthryth was so fair a woman that the king
heard of her loveliness and sent his friend Aethel-
wold to her father, saying, '* Give me thy daughter
to wife." But Aethelwold, made foolish by her
fairness, told the king that she was unworthy of
her fame, and married her himself. When the
king heard the truth, his anger was deep, but
hiding his heart he played the friend with Aethel-
wold and said, " I will come and see thee and
thy wife." Aethelwold told his wife what he had
done and said, ** Make thyself unbeautiful, put on
thy most common clothes and we may yet deceive
the king." But the woman, wroth with his fraud
and longing to be a queeu, clothed herself in
glorious garments and made her beauty greater,
and smiled upon the king. Then Eadgar, hunt-
ing with Aethelwold the next dav, and slew him
with his spear and avenged the lie. '* What
thinkest thou of this hunting," he said, turning
in his fierceness to Aethelwold's son by another
wife. " My lord/* said the younc man, " what is
pleasing to thee cannot be displeasing to me;"
and Eadgar gave him gifts in atonement ; but he
married Aelfthryth, and the woman had her way.
Afterwards she feared for herself and founded a
nunnery.
[over]
11.
2. Write a composition in German of not more than
30 lines on any one of the .following subjects :
(a) Oliver Gk>Idsmith.
(6) Die Leiden des jungen Werthers als ein Stuck
Goethebiographie.
(c) Shakespeare in Goethe's Faust. ,
{d) l^onig Lear.
(e) Schiller als Lyriker.
(/) Canadische Litteratur in den letzten zehn
Jahren.
i
2fttii)iersiiff of STotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
GERMAN.
HONORS.
Examiner: Prof. Horking.
GOETHE.
1. Outline in brief the stages in the composition of
Faust, Part I.
2. Translate :
So gib mtr au(^ tit ^tittn wtetcr
!Da iib noc|> felbfl im ffitrten war,
3)a jid^ tin Quell getrfint^ter 8ieber
Ununterbroc^en neu gcbar,
!Da gifbcl mix tie ffielt !)erf)flttten.
Die ^ofpe ©unber nodj) »erfpra^.
Da t(^ Die taufenb Slumen bracb,
Die aOe Xbaler reic^Hcb ffiOten.
34^ ^atte nicbt^ unt to^ genug.
Den Drang nad^ SQabrbett unt) Ut Sufi am S!rug.
@tb ungebfinbigt jene Iriebe,
Da^ tiefe f(^merjen»otte &IM,
Dee |>a<Tee «raft, bie 3Wacbt ber giebe,
®tb meine 3ugenb mir juriidf !
(a) Who is speaking? Write a note on the
biographical interest of the speech.
3. Translate :
3(^ gSb*"H)a« brum, wenn idf nur wfif f
©er \)tui ber ^err gett>efen i\i I
Sr fab gen)t§ rec^t n^acfer au^,
Unb tfi aue einem eblen ^mi ;
Da« fonnf id) ibm an ber ©time lefen —
Sr war auci^ fonft nicbt fo lecf gewefem
(a) Give the place of the above in the Gretchen
tragedy.
(b) Outline the subjects of the other monologues
of Gretchen.
(c) Who is generally supposed to have " sat as
model " for Gretchen ? Give definite references in
support of your answer.
4. Translate:
!Z)a id) em ^tnt mar, .
92td^t tDugte, tt)o au^ nodd tin,
Stt\)xt id^ mm ^txixxtt^ 9(uge
3ur ®onne, al^ wcnn brflber tt>fir
Stn Ofix, in ^reit meine Jtlage,
Sin ^erj wfe meing,
©tdi> be^ SetrtaHtcit ju erbarmcn.
ffier balf mtr
5Btt>er bcr Ittahen tlcbmnutl() ?
SBer rettete r>om Xoit mii},
Son ©flawet ?
^afl bu nid^t atted felbfl »oaentet,
^eilig alfl^enb ^crj, .
Unb glu^teft, jiirng unb gut,
Setrrftcri, 3lcttung^banf .
Deni Si^Iafenben ba brobcn ?
(a) Give an outline of the poem from which the
above extract is taken.
(b) Write a brief account o{ Goethe as Lyriker
up to 1775.
5. Translate:
Es hiit sich vor ipeiner Seele wie eiij Vorhang
weggezogen, un4 der ^cnauplatz des upendlicben
Lebens veir^wandelt sich vor pair in. den Abgrund
des ewig otfenen,Grabes. Kannst du sagen * Das
ist ! * da alles voriibergeht ? da alles mit der
Wetterschnelle voriiberrollt, so selten (Jie ganze
Kraft seines Daseins ausdauert, ach ! in den Strom
fortgerissen, untergetaucht und .an Felsen 2er-
schmettjBut wird ^ , Da . ist l^ein , A^genb^ick, der
nicht dich verzehrte und die D^inigeh am dich
her, kein Augenolick, da dii nicht ein Zerstorer
bist, sein musst ! Der hai^mloseste Spassierfi^ang
kostet tausend arme WUrmcheh das Leben; es
zerrttttet ein Fusstritt die miihseligeh Gebaude
)
i
' der Ameisen und stampft eine kleine Welt in ein
schmahliches Grab. Ha ! nicht die grosse, seltene
Not der Welt, diese Fluten, die eure Dorfer weg-
sptilen, diese Erdbeben, die eure Stadte verschlin-
gen, rUht^en inich ; mir untergrabt das Herz die
verzehrende Kraft, die in dem all der Natur ver-
borgen liegt, die nichts gebildet hat, das nicht
seinen Nachbar, nicht sich selbst zerstorte. Und
so taumle ich beangstigt, Himmel und Erde und
ihre webenden Krafte um mich her, ich sehe
nichts als ein ewig verschlingendes, ewig wieder-
^ kauenden Ungeheuer.
(a) In what way does " Werther " mirror the
times ?
(6) Write a note on the style of the novel and
its technique. Wliat predecessors or contemporaries
of Qoethe are considered to have influenced him ?
6. Die Zellberger heute waren indessen mit Stilling
sehr gut zufrieden, sie sahen, dass ihre Kinder lemten,
ohne viel geziichtigt zu werden ; verschiedene batten
sogar ihre Freude an all den schonen Geschichten,
welche ihnen ihre Kinder zu erzahlen wussten. Beson-
ders liebte ihn Krtiger ausserordentlich, denn er konnte
vieles mit ihm aus dem Paralacelsus reden (so sprach
der Jager das Wort Paracelsus aus) ; er hatte eine
altdeutsche Ubersetzung seiner Schriften, und da er
ein sklavischer Verehrer aller der Manner war, von
denen er glaubte, dass sie den Stein Lapis gehabt
batten, so waren ihn Jacob Bohmes, Graf Bemhards
and des Paracelsus Schriften grosse Heiligtumer.
Stilling fand Geschmack darinnen, nicht bloss wegen
des Steins der Weisen, sondem well er ganz hohe und
herrliche Begriffe, besonders im Bohm, zu finden
glaubte ; wenn sie das Wort : Had der ewigen Essen-
zien oder auch schielender Blitz und andere mehr
aussprachen, so empfanden sie eine ganz besondre
Erhebung des Gemiits. Ganze Stunden lang forschten
sie in magischen Figuren, bis sie manchmal Anfang
and Ende verloren und meinten, die vor ihnen liegen-
deo Zauberbilder lebten und bewegten sich ; das war
denn so rechte Seelenfreude, im Taumel groteske
Ideen zu haben nnd lebhaft zu empfinden.
(a) Write historical notes on Paracelsus and
Bohme.
ainftiersfts of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMIFATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR
GERMAN.
HONORS.
Examiner : G. H. Needler, B.A., Ph.D.
I.
1. Translate :
3a, ©crlagner, l^cin flagented SBtnfcIn, bctn banged S8crjn)cif=^
cin,
Vint ber ©eelcn ©efd^re^, bie bu fonfl unfd^ulbfg ewflrgtefl,
Xa§ fte funbtgenb flarbcn, unb bir unb bem ©d^affcnben
3ft nun betncm befnebigten <&crrf(^er tin liebltcbed JDpfen
aid er flarb, bcrfammelte ®8ttcr, ba fcbrtc bcr ^nabe
and %9ptud ®eftlbe jurflcf, 2)ie Sabte bcr 3ugmb
itW er im ©c^oo^ ber jfirtltd^en 2Rutter, (n wei^^er Umar^^
mung/
Unbefannt. Xtin juaenbltd^ geuer, fetn ebled Srfill^nen
Srieb tbn )u Untemepmungen an, ftcb furd(itbar )u mac^en.
Xo^, t'br ®5tter, (m einfamen ©alb', an bem 5bett ©eftabe,
ffio er oft n)ar, ba bat er btedetd^t auf Dinge gefonnen.
Die, au0 feared enber geme, ben Untergang ber ^SHe .
Dro^n, unb bon und berneuerten SRut^ unb SBad^famleit
forbern.
Klopstock, Mesaias, II.
2. Verlaasner. Who is this ? For what purpose is
he introduced ?
3. Who is the speaker of these lines ? Give the
tenor of the speech and its immediate result, as well as
as an outline of the subsequent events to the end of
the canto.
4. What do you consider the chief excellences or
the defects of the Mesaias as an epic ? Give as expli-
cit illustrations as possible from Canto II. in support
of your opinion.
5. Scan the first two lines of this extract.
II. A.
6. Translate :
Xiai gfrfiuletn Cf alt unb nac^benf enb, tntem fte
trinfO. aWSbdj^en, bu »erflel^fi lid) fo trcfflic^ auf bte
fluten SWenfdj^en ; abet toann wtllfi bu b(e fc^lec^ten m
tragcn lemen ? Unb fte ftnb bodj^ audj^ SWcnfc^en — unb
Sfter^ M tDeitem fo fdj^Ied^te ^Jltn^tn nidft, aid fte
fd^etnen* 9)2an mu^ i\)xt gute ©ette nur auffuc^en.
34> btlbe mix tin, biefer S^njofe ifi nid)t^ ate ettri.
^ud bloper Sitelleit mad^t er fic^ }uni fa(f(|en @pteler ;
er wiU mtr ni^t ^erbunben fdi^etnen ; er ivtU ftc^ ben
!£)anf erfparen. SteQetd^t ba^ er nun ^tn^e^t, fetne
fleinen ©d^ulben bega^lt, »on bem SRefte, fo»ett er reic^t,
fttd unb fparfam lebt unb an bad ®ptel md^t benft
ffienn bad i% liebe granjidfa, fo Ia§ i^n SRefruten ^olen,
tt)ann er »{a — (®ebt i^x bte SEaffe.) !Ca, feft' meg !—
Slber/ fage mtr, foUte XeU^etm ntd^t fd^on ba fein ?
Lessing, Minna v. Bamhelm.
7. Show the connection of this passage, explaining
(a) dieaer Franzose, (b) falschen Spieler, (c) Rekruten
holen,
8. Tell what use Lessing has made of the betrothal
rings in the development of the plot of Minna v. Barn-
helm,
9. What personal experiences of Lessing made him
familiar with such characters and incidents as are
pictured in this drama ?.
II. B.
10. Translate:
Die Christen glauben mehr Armseligkeiten,
Als dass sie die nicht auch noch glauben konnten.
Und gleichwohl irrst du dich. Die Tempelherren,
Die Christen nicht, sind schuld ; sind nicht als Christen,
Ale Tempelherren schuld. Durch die allein
Wird aus der Sache nichts ; sie wollen Akka,
Das Richards Schwester unserm Bruder Melek
Zum Brautschatz brin^en miisste, schlechterdings
Nicht fahren lassen. Dass des Ritters Vortheil
Oefahr nicht laufe, spielen sie den Monch,
Den albem Monch. Und ob vielleicht im Fluge
Ein guter Streich gelange, haben sie
Des Waffenstillestandes Ablauf kaum
Erwarten konnen. Lustig ! Nur so weiter,
Ihr Herren ! nur so weiter I Mir schon recht.
Lessing, Nathan der Weise 1. 3.
11. Explain the lines ** Dureh die allein .... nicht
fahren lasses."
12. What circumstances led Lessing to the writing
of Nathan der Weiae ? Compare the representatives
of the three religions, giving your opinion as to the
fairness or adequacy of the portraiture.
13. Point out the leading features of Minna von
Bamhelm and Emilia OcdoUi whereby the plays mark
important stages in the development of the German
drama.
ni.
14. Translate : I
Bin ich wirklich allein ? In deinen Armen, an deinem
Herzen wieder, Natur, ach ! und es war nur ein Traum,
Derniich schaudemd ergriff; mit des Lebens furcht-
barem Bilde,
Mit dem sttlrzenden Thai sttirzte der finstre hinab.
Reiner nehm' ich mein Leben von deinem reinen Altare,
Nehme den frbhlichen Muth hoffender Jugend zurtick,
Ewig wechselt der Wille den Zweck und die Regel, in
ewig
Wiederholter Gestalt walzen die Thaten sich um.
Aber jugendlich immer, in immer veranderter Schone
Ehrst du, fromme Natur, ztichtig das alte Gesetz !
Immer dieselbe, bewahrst du in treuen Handen dem
Manne,
Was dir das gaukelnde Kind, was dir der Jiingling
vertraut,
Nahrest an gleicher Brust die vielfach wechselnden
Alter;
Unter demselben Blau, iiber dem nlunlichen Grtin
Wandeln die nahen und wandeln vereint die fernen
Geschlechter,
Und die Sonne Homers, siehe ! sie lachelt auch uns.
Schiller.
15. Scan the first two lines of this passage, explain-
ing the metre.
16. Give concisely the substance of any two of the
following poems : Die Kraniche des Ibykus ; Die Goiter
OriecherUands ; Der Kampf mit dem Drachen ; Daa
versddeierte Bild zu Sais,
17. Compare Schiller with Goethe in their relation
to the Sturm und Drang movement.
anftotroftff of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ITALIAN.
HONORS.
IP ^^ f W. H. Fraser, B.A.
I.
Translate the following extracts :
(a) Poi tanto trabalgliasti, fkcioti lueo pregheri :
che tu vadi adomJh.nimi a mia mare e a mon peri.
Se dare mi ti degnano, menami alo raosteri,
e sposami davanti da la jente,
e poi far6 le tue comannamente.
1. Where, when and by whom was the poem written,
from which this extract is taken ?
2. What school of poetry does it represent ?
8- Give modem forms for fdcioti (1. 1), vadi (1. 2)»
mon (L 2), mosteri (1. S), jente (1. 4).
4. Explain the form adomdnimi (1. 2).
(b) Et Giovanni Sirac disse : di quella eosa che
non ti molesta non te combatere. Anche dei te
medesmo, inanze che tue parli, richiedire se tn'se
in buono e qneto senno, o se tu se'turbato per ira
o per alcun'altra turbazione d'animo ; e, se Tanimo
tuo h turbato per neuna cosa, deiti guardare di
non parlare, e di constringere Tanimo tuo pertur-
bato fin a tanto che I'ira basta.
1. What is the approximate date of the extract ?
2. Name the various classes of prose writings of the
same century.
anfberoftff of Zovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ITALIAN.
HONORS.
Examiners '\'^'^' Fraser, B.A.
J!.xamin€r8 - | g, J. Sacco.
I.
Translate the following extracts :
(a) O animal grazioso e benigno,
Che visitando vai per Taer perso
Noi che tignemmo il mondo di sanguigno ;
Se fosse amico il Re delFuni verso,
Noi pregheremmo lui per la tua pace,
Poich^ hai pietjh. del nostro mal perverso.
De quel che udire e che parlar ti piace
Noi udiremo e parleremo a vui,
Mentrechi il vento, come fa, si tace.
1. Who is the speaker ?
2. Explain the allusions in 11. 3 and 6.
3. Describe briefly the punishments of the Limbo
and the first circle of the Inferno.
4. Scan line 6, marking and naming the caesura.
5. What colour is perao ?
(6) Dante, perchi Virgilio se ne vada,
Non pianger anco, non pianger ancora ;
Ch^ pianger ti convien per altra spada.
J
Quasi ammiraglio, che in poppa ed m prora
Viene a veder la gente che ministra
Per gli altri legni, ed a ben far la incuora,
In suUa sponda del carro sinistra,
Quando mi volsi al suon del nome mio,
Che di necessitil qui si registra,
Vidi la donna, che pria m'appario
Velata sotto Tangelica festa,
Drizzar gli occhi vdr me di qua dal rio.
1. Line 1. Where and why did Virgil leave Dante ?
i. Explain lines 3 and 9.
3. Explain I' angelica festa (1. 11), and di qua del rio
(1. 12).
4. Scan line 6.
5. Give a short account of Dante's life up to his
banishment from Florence.
ir.
Translate the following extracts :
(a) Voi cui Fortuna ha posto in mano il freno
De le belle contrade,
Di che nulla i>ietk par che vi stringa,
Che fan qui tante pellegrine spade ?
Perchfe 1 verde terreno
Del barbarico sangue si dipinga ?
Vano error vi lusinga;
Poco vedete, e parvi veder molto ;
Chfe *n cor venale amor cercate o fede.
1. Voi (1. 1), Who are addressed ?
2. What is the error referred to in 1. 7 ?
3. Give Italian explanations or equivalents for il
freno (1. 1), le belle contrade (1. 2), pellegrine (1. 4).
4. Give an account of Petrarca's life at Avignon, and
of his friendship later with Boccaccio.
5. ** The ode from which the extract is taken was
rhetoric rather than real sentiment." Discuss.
(b) Qaanti lamenti lagrimosi sparsi
Fur ivi, essendo quei begli occhi asciutti,
Per ch'io lunga stAgion cantai ed arsi !
E fra tanti sospiri e tanti lutti
Tflcita e lieta sola si sedea,
Del suo bel viver gik cogliendo i frutti.
Yattene in pace, o vera mortal Dea,
Diceano : e tal f u ben ; ma non le valse
Contra la Morte in sua ragion si rea.
1. What scene is described in the extract ?
. 2. Explain line 3.
3. Diceano (1. 8). Who were speaking ?
4. What is the subject of valse (1. 8) ?
5. Give Italian explanations or equivalents for
ragion (1. 9) and rea (1. 9).
III.
Translate :
Et in questo che eg)i si rodeva, e Biondel venne.
II quale come egli vide, fattoglisi incontro, gli di^
net viso un gran punzone. — Oim^ ! messer, disse
Biondel, che h questo ? Messer Filippo, presolo
per li capelli e stracciatagli la cuffia in capo e
gittato 11 cappuccio per terra, e dandogli tuttavia
forte, diceva : — Traditore, tu il vedrai bene cid, che
questo d : che arrubinatemi e che zanzeri mi mandi
tu dicendo a roe ? Parot'io fanciullo da dovere essere
uocellato ? E cosi diceodo, con le pugna, le quail
aveva che parevan di ferro, tutto il viso gli ruppe,
nh gli lascid in capo capello, che ben gli volesse,
e convoltolo per lo fango, tutti i panni in dosso
gli straccid ; e si a questo fatto si studiava, che
pure una volta dalla prima innanzi non gli pot^
fiiondello dire una parola, n^ domandar perch^
questo gli facesse.
1. Explain the allusion in che arrubinatemi
a tne (II. 8-9).
2. Who was Messer FUippo (1. 4) ?
3. Give Italian explanations or equivalents for
punzone (1. 3), dandogli (1. 6), ucceliato (1. 10).
[over.]
4. Give a short account of Boccaccio's old age.
5. Name and describe briefly any two poetical
works by Boccaccio.
IV.
Translate :
Quando questi occhi chiusi mi vedrai
e'i spirito salito alFaltra vita,
allora spero che piangerai
el duro fin deU'anima transita :
e poi, se I'error tuo conoscerai,
d'avermi ucciso ne sarai pentita :
ma '1 tuo pentir fia tardo all'ultimo ora.
Perd non aspettar, donna, ch'i'mora.
POLIZIANO.
i
Unt\»9vnH9 of Soroifio*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
SPANISH.
HONORS.
K%..«.,%,^. . I ^^' H. Fbasbe, B.A.
Translate the following extracts :
(a) Rrachel a myo 9^^ !& manol va besar :
Ya, Canpeador, en buen ora 9inxiestes espada,
De Castiella uos ydes pora las yentes estranas.
Assi es uuestra uentura, grandes son uuestras
gananfias.
Vna piel vermeia morisca e ondi-ada,
?id, beso uaestra niano, endon que la yo aya.
lazine, dixo el Cid, daqui sea mandada ;
Si uos la aduxier dalla, si non contalda sobre las
areas.
1. Give modern Spanish forms or equivalents for
la manol va besar (1. 1) (inacieatea (1. 2), ydes (1. 3),
endon que la yo aya (1. 6), contalda (I. 8).
2. Who is Rachel (1.1)?
3. Write a note on the historical Cid.
4. Explain the construction of I. 8 by supplying an
ellipsis in Spanish.
5. Explain the system of assonance in the extract.
(b) Demuestrate por Madre, muevate piadat,
Of re9i nuestras pre^es al Rey de magestat,
Acabdanos la gratia por Dios e caridat,
Del Fijo que en ti piiso umanidat,
Virgo madre gloriosa singular e sennera
Plena de mansedumne, plus simple que cordera,
Tu nos acabda, madre, la vida yerdadera,
Tu nos abri los 9ielos commo buena clavera.
1. Give modem Spanish forms or equivalents for
o/r£'fi (1. 2), prefes (1. 2), Acabdanos (1. 3), pi^iso (1. 4),
manaedumne (1. 6).
2. Give an account of the author and his works.
(c) Lo que oy se callare
Puede se eras fablar ;
Lo que hoy se fablare
Non se puede callar.
Lo dicho, dicho es :
Lo que dicho non as,
Desir lo as despues,
Sy oy non, ser^ eras.
1. Give modern Spanish for crcLs (1. 2), as (1. 6), and
explain the form desir lo ds (1. 7).
2. State what you know of the writer and his work.
id) Y 11^4ndose & 61 tom6 la lanza, y despues de
haberla hecho pedazos, con uno dellos comenz6 i
dar & nuestro D. Quijote tantos palos, que i
despecho y pesar de sur armas le moli6 como
cibera. D&banle voces sus amos que no le diese
tanto y que le dejase; pero estaba ya el mozo
picado y no quiso dejar el juego hasta envidar todo
el resto de su c61era, y acudiendo por los demas
trozos de la lanza los acabd de deshacer sobre el
miserable caido, que con toda aquella tempestad de
palos que sobre ^1 llovfa no cerraba la boca, ame-
nazando al cielo y & la tierra y & los malandrines,
que tal le parecian.
1. Connect the pa&sage with the preceding events.
2. Write notes on cibera (1. 5), envidar (1. 7).
3. Uegdndoae (1. 1), picado (1. 7), malandrines (L, 12).
Express by other words in Spanish.
(e) Asi es, dijo D. Quijote, que ese es un sabio encan-.
tador, grande enemigo niio, que me tiene ojeriza
porque sabe por sur artes y letras que tengo de
venir, andandb los tiempos, & pelear en singular
batalla con un caballero 6, quien ^l favorece, y le
tengo de veneer sin que 41 lo pueda estorbar, y por
esto procura hacerme todos los sinsabores que
puede : y mdindole yo que mal podrdi ^1 contrade-
cir ne evitar lo que por el cielo esUt ordenado.
I Quidn duda de eso ? dijo la sobrina ; i pero qui^n
le mete £ vuestra merced, sefior tio, en esas pen-
dencias ? 2 no ser^ mejor estarse pacf fico en bu casa,
y no irse por el mundo & buscar pan de trastrigo,
sin Gonsiderar que muchos van por lana y vuelven
trasquilados ? j 0 sobrina mia ! respondid D.
Quijote, y cu^ mal que esi&s en la cuenta : primero
que d mi me trasquilen tendrd peladas y quitadas
las barbas & cuantos imaginaren tocarme en la
pmita de un solo cabello.
1. Give the imperative of dijo (1. 1), and of contra-
decir (I. 8).
2. Explain the expression bvscar pan de trastrigo
a 13).
3. ...tendre peladas ciiantos (11. 17-18). Criti-
cise this sentence as to its grammatical correctness.
4. Give a summary of the life of Cervantes up to the
time of his marriage.
n.
Translate :
Dios es comien9o e medio e acabamiento de todas
las cosas, e sin el ninguna cosa puede ser ; ca por
el 8u poder son f echas, e por el su saber son gover-
nadas, e por la su bondad son mantenidas. Onde
todo ome que algun buen fecho quisiere comen^ar,
primero deve poner e adelantar a Dios en el,
rogandole e pidiendole merced, que le de saber e
voluntad e poder, porque la pueda bien acabar.
L
0ltffber0ftff of Sorotfto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
SPANISH.
HONORS.
ExaminfiTB' / W. H. Fraser, B.A.
I.
Translate the following extracts :
(a) A tiempo k la bora suso memorado,
asi como nino que sacan de cuna,
no sd falsamente 6 si por fortuna
me vi todo solo al pi^ de un collado
selv&tico, espeso, lexano k poblado,
agreste, desierto ^ tan espantable,
que temo verglienza, no siendo culpable,
cuando por estenso lo habrd recontado.
1. For what is Santillana noted in Spanish litera-
ture?
2. Of what is this extract an imitation ?
3. Scan line 1.
(&) ^1, con canto acordado
al rumor que sonaba,
del agua que pasaba,
se quejaba tan dulce y blandamente,
como si no estuviera de alii ausente
la que de su dolor culpa tenia ;
y asi, como presente,
razonando con ella, le decia :
1. Name the writer. For what is he noted ? Give
his date.
2. Explain the form del agua (1. 3).
(c) Se toman & bautizar
y se llaman petrarquistas.
Han renegado la fe
de las trovas castellanas,
y tras las italianas
se pierden, diciendo que
son m^ ricas y galanas.
1. By whom was this stanza written ?
2. Who are meant by the petrarquistas (1. 2) ?
3. Give a synonym for se pierden, (L 6).
{d) I Dichoso el corazon enamorado
que en solo Dios ha puesto el pensamiento !
Por 6\ renuncia todo lo criado,
y en ^1 halla su gloria y su contento.
Aun de si mismo vive descuidado,
porque en su Dios est& todo su intento,
JT asi alegre pasa y muy gozoso
as ondas deste mar tempestuoso.
1. What class of literature does the extract repre-
sent ?
2. Name any two writers of the class.
3. What is meant by mar tempestuoso (L 8) ?
(e) Pues, passando el tiempo, como os digo, entendi6
el donzel del mar en si que ya podia tomar armas,
si ouiesse quien le fiziese cauallero ; y esto desseaua
dl, considerando que kl seria tal, 6 haria tales cosas
por donde muriesse; 6 biuiendo, su sefiora le
preciaria.
1. Name, and give some account of, the work from
which this extract is taken.
(/) Visto que mi conjuro no era vAlido, y que si
dejaba enfrair la determinacion que tenia, tornarfa
de nuevo el temor & desanimarme, p^seme la
espada entre los dientes, y con ambas manos asi
de la tumba por el agujero de abajo, y en alz&n-
dola, sali6 corriendo por entre mis piernas un
perrazo negro, con un cencerro atado i la cola, que
huyendo de los muchachos, se habla recogido &
sagrado, y como despues de haber reposado, oli6
la comida, retirola para si, y sac& el vientre de
mal ano.
1. Name any three writers of rurvelas picareacas,
giving the title of one such work by each.
2. Wliat new characteristics in literature belong to
this genre ?
3. Give equivalent Spanish for aacd el vientre de
mal aflo (1. 10).
II.
Translate :
Ea, pues lo.pasado, pasado. Td sabes que en
mi casa nunca te ha faltado que comer, ni te
faltard si por desgracia no lo ganas. Conozco que,
en efecto, d un muchacho de tu edad debe serle
una vergUenza el no tener oficio ni beneficio, y si
deseo que te coloques, es por ti, no por nosotros.
Manana & las diez te vas por casa del senor
marqu&, te enteras de tu obligacidn, y & cumplirla
como hombre de bien, que los que lo son, por m^
que en contrario se diga, nunca son mds dichosos
que cuando puedea decir : " Este pan que c6mo y
esta ropa que visto, son el f ruto de mi trabajo ; me
basto & mi mismo."
III.
1. Give some account of the origins of Spanish
literature down to and including Berceo.
2. Name any two writers of the pastoral novel.
3. Write notes on Jorge Manrique, Juan de Mena, and
Mariana.
4. Name the author of each of the following, and
describe each work in a few words : Las aiete Partidaa,
Claro« Varonea de Costilla, El Libra de Patronio,
-ArU Ciaoriay El Libro de Alexandre.
BInfliersfti? 6t Sorottco*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : IWl.
THIHD YEAR.
HEBREW.
MSS.
HISTORY, SYNTAX AND GOMPOSITION.
J. F. MacCurdy, LL.D.
Examiners : { J. F. MacLaughlin, M.A., B.D.
MuRisoN, M.A.
I.
1. (a) What is the date of the Exodus? (6) What
were the chief historical features of the period of the
Judges ?
2. Trace the rise of the monarchy through Saul,
David and Solomon. Sketch the character of each of
these.
3. Give dates and chief events in the reigns of any
three of the following :
Jeroboam I, Omri, Ahab, Jehu.
II.
1. Explain fully Annexion, or the Construct Rela-
tion.
2. Compare the use of the Imperative, Cohortative
and Jussive.
3. What classes of verbs take two Accusatives ?
4. How is the indefinite subject expressed in
Hebrew ?
3. What is the agreement of Collectives ?
6. Write a note on the Syntax of the Conditional
Sentence.
[ovwl]
m.
Translate into Hebrew :
Have ye not heard what I did to the Egyptians
in the day of my bringing you out of that land ?
There is no one answering, no one who hearkens
to my word.
Make for thyself an ark, for behold I shall
bring a flood upon the earth.
John (Yohanan or Hananiah) was forty-five
years of age when he came to this country. He
dwelt in it for twenty-six years, but he died on
the fifteenth of the third month of this year.
WinihtvtAts ot Soromo*
AKNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901,
THIRD YEAR.
HEBRKW TEXTS.
J. F. Mc(/URDY, LL.D.
Examinem
ij. Jb. MCCURDY, LL.D.
J. F. McLaughlin, M.A.
R. G. MuRisoN, M.A.
1. Translate Amos. i. 9-12.
- : •• : • T : t : - t
T •• : T T • : ~ V • ~: T T : -
nc« nil 11 :.TnJD"iiX n'?r«i "ik noma e^k
- T T -v : : ~ T : IT :
rem nne^i rn« anna ic-n-b:; i^s'-e^n
• T V" " : T
• : - • : — V T T : t : v : - - t I : —
iT : T : : - t : 'T : » t •• :
2. Parse IJ^-^ttffc^. DTJDH (^- 9) J 1CT1» nHCfl
(v. 11).
3. What vas the nature of the crimes here denounced
and of the threatened calamity )
4. Translate Isaiah ii. 12-17.
bv^ Dm mrb3 b:j nlxas r\\7vb dI"^ ^3 12
• T 'T ' T : - •• : - T - : ••• t : t • t
i t " - t : - t - : • t 't • t ' v
't: t t -:-t t:* t -:
ni^rfc^-bs bv^ E^^c^nn ni'':N-'?D bvi^^
' : T -: •:- -tit -:
on '?CE^i D"i«n ninaa he^'i i? : monn
• • «r •
T : T T 'T : - - : ^ -t : v •"
: wnn dV3 linb nln;" sat^Ji d^c*:^
• T» •*• ••
5. Parse ^fs;^ (v. 12); HE'L ^CE^l (v- 17).
6. To what period in Isaiah's life does this chapter
evidently belong and why 1 Give date.
7. Translate Isaiah xliii. 1-6.
THT) 3pi;^ 7fir\2 nln"' "iiD«-n3 nnyi i
riD^'2 TiKip rrrb^: ^3 t^TTi-bN ^J^nc?^
I : • : * TIT I • : - : • t ' " •• t : •
T : - • T I : • • — -: •- • t 'T
n2nb^ m3n ^b ^^-^^2 Thr\-^2 tiicde?''' ^b
t t '%•: vT • •• : !•• •• •• I : : •
i;:?'l-ip ?l^1^K nln^ ^jn "'3 3 : tis— lynn ^b
I: I V v: T : *-: • '-t - : •
t<3D=l E^13 DnXD T1"ID3 ^nnj Ti:;''Ef1iD ^Nnt'''
t : • - ; • f : : t • " t ' v " ' •• t : •
■"jw rn33: t:;3 nip*' "ie^'^^d * : Ti^nnn
«''35< nii?3D ••:« TinN-^3 i^Tn-'p^ 5 : tje^w
• t t J • • " T I : • '• T • " )*••:-
••nijai plniD ""jd \y^3n ^5*^3n-b« idti^?
) T'" -T • • T • T : • - » T •• :
y^^)D (^- 3) ; -iD«. ■':n. ''«''3n (v- 6).
9. Decline, without pronominal suffixes Q2^, Y^y, |3,
^3. Decline ^^ in the plural with pronominal suffixes.
10. Inflect ^"^"^ in Qal throughout and |pj in Qal
imperfect and infinitive. '
11. What does the prophet mean by the statement in
▼.4?
12. Characterize the literary style and point out the
leading ideas of Isaiah xl.-xlv.
13. Translate Jerem.'v. 14-17.
V : V ** ' *"" T : •• v: t : " t • i •• t
e^5<b» ?i''D2 n2'^ inj •■ijn r\^n -i2in-n«
•• : f • : - T : I •• • : ■• v~ t t -
... • : 1- -ITT":'" • ^* v" tt:
T : : : •• t : • •• 1 t : v * .^. •• -:
T •••••.•: T : - !•• -: - - : • :
^b^ic 'TlDT^b^ rcT'^p br«i 17 : onlaa ob^
noa nn« ie^« Timj^D ny EfE^-i"" Tinj^ni
V 'T V T •• T
14. Give dates and principal events of the life of Jeremiah.
QittiUfttfUS Of Sototito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ORIhJTALS.
HONORS.
HEBREW SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
Examiners /-
f J. F. McCuRDY, M.A., Ph.D.
J. F. McLaughlin, B.D.
R G. MuRisoN, M.A.
A.
1 . Define and distinguish clearly annexion and apposition.
Give examples of each.
Show how the place of the English adjective may
aonaetiiues be supplied by one or the other of these construc-
tions.
2. What are the various uses of the Hebrew absolute and
construct infinitives 7
3. What uses of the Hebrew accusative mav be described
as locative, instrumental and temporal f Give examples.
4. Point out the chief uses of the jussive, without and
with 1.
B.
Translate into Hebrew :
1. And he turned and said unto them, If any man come
uoto me and hale not his father, and mother, and wife, and
children, and brethren, and sisters, yea, and his own life also,
he cannot be my disciple (T^C^H)-
[over]
2. Wherefore thou art great, O Lord God: for there is
none like thee, neither is there any God beside thee, accord-
ing to all that we have heard with our ears. For thou hast
confirmed to thyself thy people, Israel, to be a people unto
thee for ever : and thou, Lord, art become their God.
3. They said, where dwellest thou ? He said, come and
see. Thev went and saw the house in which he dwelt and
he made a feast and they ate and drank with him that day.
iSnttoereltv of 2rorotiCii«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
. HONORS.
HEBREW TEXTS I.
r J. F.
:{J. F.
(r. g.
J. F. McCuRDY, LL.D.
Examiners : -{ J. F. McLaughlin, M. A.
MuRisoN, M.A.
1. Translate Isa. iL 12-17.
2. (a) Explain the metaphors of ii. 13, 14.
(h) What is the meaniDg of Qy^ in v. 12, and of
(c) What were " ships of Tarehish '* and why are they
referred to here 1
3. Translate Isa. xi. 11-14.
4. (a) Locate the regions mentioned in xi. 11.
(b) Parse ^r^ and niSlDJ (^- ^2), ^^iJ*^ (v. 13),
and ICi^l (v. 14).
(c) Correct the vowels of H^^ (^' ^^) > explain the
form Drii^DE^ID (^- 1^)> ^^^ decline HID^D (^- 12).
5. Translate Isa. xxviii. 9-13.
6. (a) Comment on the form and meaning of the words
employed in xxviii 1 0, in their relation to the speakers and
the theme of the prophet.
(6) Inflect in'^jn (^- 12) in its own stem throughout.
(c) Fame rViV and ri^^ (v. 9), r^^^y^ and ^n«
(v. 12). '
[OVBRj
1
7. Translate Isa. xlvii. 5-9.
8. (a) Explain the construction of the verbs in xlviL 5 6.
Oorrect the received division of v. 7.
(6) Account for the forms •»DD{< (^- ^)» DSHD (^- ^)-
(c) Decline |p| (v. 6), and ^J^Bf (v. 9), and explain
the pointing of the latter word.
anfUerslti? of Soroncik
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
HEBREW TEXTS II.
J. F. McCuRDY, LL.D.
Examine7*8:\J. F. McLaughlin, M.A.
R G. MuRisoN, M.A.
1. Translate Amos ii. 9-16.
2. (a) Pai-se •'H'^^i?!! (^- ^0) and inflect the stem
throughout.
(b) Account fully for the forms ^2^*12^ (v. 9) and
n^^b (V. 10).
(c) Who are meant by " the Amorite " (v. 10) 1
3. Ti*anslate Mic. vil 5-8.
4. (a) Explain n^mfr^ i^- ") ^"^^7 ^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^^
meaning.
(b) Account for the forms '^HD^'N ^^^ DC^fe^ (^'' ^)
5. Translate Jer. xiv. 15-18.
6. (a) Explain the forms D'^'^^E^P (^- ^^)» "^W^Hn
(v. 18). " "
(6) Account for the use of 7 after *)3pJ2 (v. 16),
and for the direct object with HJI^in (^' ^^) ^^^ "^PND
(v. 18).
(c) Parse IJ^R^ (v. 15), pl"?!!:! (^- 17) ; decline
•»77n (V. 18).
7. Translate Ezek. xii. 9-15.
8. (a) What words in the above extract have the accent
affected by the Waw consecutive 1
(b) How were vs. 12 and 13 actually fulfilled ?
(c) Where and when exactly did Ezekiel prophesy ?
ntifHerslts of Sorottto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
BIBLICAL ARAMAIC.
fJ. F.
; i J. F.
(R. G.
J. F. McCuRDY, LL.D.
Examiners : -{ J. F. McLaughlin, M.A., B.D.
MuRisON, M.A.
L Translate Daniel ii. 25-28.
1. Parse the verbs in v. 25.
2. What is the force of the pH prefix t How is a stem
of this kind modified in Pe sibilant verbs 1 Illustrate.
3. Give 7 with suffixes.
4. Parse n'^lH (^^) *^^ inflect in Peal throughout.
5. P^^*^ (27). Parse. Compare the use of the participle
in Hebrew and Aramaic.
6. Parse n''inn'? (27) i Ti^'K. ^vh-
7. Select from passage a masculine noun and a feminine
noun and decline throughout without pronominal suffixes.
IL Translate Daniel ii, 40-44.
1. Parse plHD (^^)' Explain foim. Give rules for
inflection of verbs of this class. Illustrate.
2. Parse y^r\ (40) ; |inb (^3).
3. Inflect 7C0p in Haphel throughout.
[over]
4. Decline Q^*) in plural with pronominal suffixes.
5. Give Aramaic Personal Pronouns.
6. Compare Hebrew Biblical Aramaic and Targamic
Aramaic.
7. What interchange of consonants takes place in Hebrew
and Aramaic.
8. What other portions of the Old Testament besides that
in Daniel are written in Aramaic.
III. Translate Daniel ii. 30 from Aramaic into Hebrew.
iSnfuersfti? of STorotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
ARABIC.
J. F. McCuRDY, M.A., Ph.D.
Eocamvaera : ■{ J. F. McLaughlin, B.D.
MuRisoN, M.A.
1. Translate the passages on the accompanying sheet,
Socio, p. 48*, lines 2-9 ; p. 51*, lines 10-15 ; p. 52, lines
11-14.
2. Parse the underlined wor(}s.
3. Decline the nouns and inflect the verbs indicated.
4. Define Hamza, Tesdld, Wasla, Medda.
5. What cases follow ya, the particle of address, and
-when?
6. Write singular and plural, inner or outer, of
sdhibun, viadlnatuiiy ramlun, mu^minun, mdlun.
7. Explain the construction of sentences introduced
by 'inna and *anna and point out the diflerence in
usage between these two particles.
sitiftieriKfts of Soromik
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
SIGHT TRANSLATION.
Eocamiver : R. G. Murison, M.A.
1. Translate : Deuteronomy 29 : 6-14.
2. Translate : Jeremiah 33 : 12-18.
8. Translate : Ezekiel 37 : 5-10.
4. Translate ; Zeeharia 1 : 1-7.
5. Translate: Daniel 12: 1-12.
6. Translate : Ezra 2 : 3-12.
^infiieriKfts of Sorotitiu
ANKUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YteAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
HISTORY AND LITERATURE.
Examiner : J. F. McCurdy, LL.D.
I.
1. The history of Israel is often studied without
reference to that of other nations. Show how it is
better to regard it as part of the larger history of
Western Asia.
2. By what peoples was Palestine controlled up to
the time of the Hebrew conquest ? State briefly the
character of the successive occupations.
3. Describe summarily the condition of Israel
between the times of Joshua and King Saul. Name
in order the chief popular leaders, and state the oceas-
sions of their dictatorship and the character of their
rule.
4. Tell of the dynastry of Omri in North Israel:
(a) tlie names of the kings; (b) the principal events
of their reigns, domestic and inteniational ; (c) the
religious and political effects of their policy.
5. Indicate the successive stages in the foreign rela-
tions of North Israel in the eighth century B.C. which
led up to the fall of Samaria.
6. Date the following events: the death of King
Ahab, the accession of Jehu, the first capture of
Damascus by the Assyrians, the accession of Tiglath-
pileser III. in Assyria, the second capture of Damascus,
the final capture of Samaria.
[ovkb]
II.
7. What prophecies of Isaiah were uttered between
the time of the Assyrian invasion of Syria and the
fa]l of Samaria ? What in outline was the prophetic
sentiment as to the dominant religious and political
tendencies of Judah at that epoch ?
8. Give evidences of a wide knowledge of "world-
politics and business on the part of Isaiah and Elzekiel.
9. Arabic is the most ancient and the most modem
of the Semitic languages. Show in what w^ys this
statement is true.
WHnlMtvtHts of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
HISTORY
PASS AND HONORS.
A. F. Barb, B.A
Examiners : { J. S. Carstairs, B.A.
PakenhaM, B.A.
^*« Pass candidates will take question 6 or 7. .
1. Show the unity of cause and purpose underlying
the seven great wars of England between the Revolu-
tion and Waterloo.
2. Discuss :
(1) the main features of the relations of Scot-
land and England between the death of Charles I and
the death of Oliver Cromwell ;
(£) Cromwell's attempts at parliamentary govem-
menL
3. Indicate the main lines of development in the
history of Ireland between the accession of Elizabeth
and the end of the year 1650.
4. Discuss the evidence for believing :
(1) that the Norsemen discovered America;
(2) that they failed to found a successful colony
in Yinland.
5. Account for :
(1) the tardiness of France and England in
securing a permanent footing in America ;
(2) the success of Kirke's expedition against
Qoebec ;
[over]
1
(3) the disputes between Frontenac and the
Church.
6. Compare :
(1) the first charter of Maryland with the first
charter of Massachusetts ;
(2) the type of society developed in New York
with that of New England say in 1756.
(3) the English idea of colonization with that
of the Greeks, of the Bomans and of the Spanish.
7. Discuss :
(1) Henry VIII's attitude towards Parliament ;
(2) Wolsey's fall ;
(3) the effect upon society in England of the
dissolution of the monasteries.
i
anfUeriKfts of Sotomo*
ANNUAL EXAMIKATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR
HISTORY-
PASS AND HONORS.
r A. F. Barb, B. A.
Examiners : -j J. S. Cabstairs, B. A.
( W. Pakbnham, B.A.
*«* Pass caDdidates will omit the first question.
1. Explain the origin and causes of the final dis-
appearance of the Electors, and show how under the
Empire it was possible for the rulers of Spain, France
and England to be rivals for the office of Emperor.
2. Indicate what is meant by the Revival of Leam-
ing» and illustrate by a description of the state of society
at Florence under Lorenzo de'Medici.
3. Write notes upon :
(1) The contrast between Pope Leo X. and Pope
Julian II.;
(2) Richelieu's conflict with the feudal nobility in
France;
(3) Gustavus Adolphus ;
(4) The nature of Erasmus's attack on the Church.
4. Estimate briefly the forces working in France for
revolt against the Church in the first sixty years of the
eighteenth century.
5. Explain
(1) The origin of the connection between Branden-
burg and Prussia ;
(2) The work of the Great Elector ;
[OVEE]
(3) The results of Frederick the Great's attack
upon Silesia.
6. Show the significance of the raid of Charles VIIL
into Italy, and Savonarola's relation to it.
7. Estimate Peter the Oreat's work in regard to the
army and the church in Russia, and compare him with
Charles XII. of Sweden.
J
Bliitto(r0itjf of s:orotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAE.
POLITICAL ECONOMY
• HONORS.
Examinera ■ { ^^^ Mavor.
J3.xam%ne^8 ' \ S. M. Wickett, Ph.D.
Five questions only to be answered.
1. Give an account of the economic bearing of the
teaching of Plato and Aristotle.
2. Discuss the Scholastic view of interest.
3. Describe the doctrines of the earlier mercantilists
and contrast them with those of the later members of
the school.
4. Trace the growth of Physiocratic ideas and shew
their relation to the prevalent philosophical conceptions
of the time.
5. Give an outline of " The Wealth of Nations."
6. State the position of Malthus on the Population
Question.
7. State and examine Bicardo's Theory of Rent.
8. Describe the conflict between the Historical and
Deductive groups of political economists.
iiftnftieretti? of ZToffontcu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
POLITICAL SCIENCE DEPARTMENT.
THEORV OF POLITICAL KCONOMY.^
HONORS.
E, . (James Mayor.
Ex^irmners : | g j^ wiCKErr.
Five questions only to be answered.
1. Give an account of the "Law of Diminishing
Returns," and show the relation of it to the Theory of
Rent.
2. Discuss the analogy between " Capital in durable
forms and Land."
3. Explain the function of Capital in modern indus-
trial production.
4. How does Interest emerge ? Explain fully the
Austrian Theory of Interest.
5. What are the characteristics of International as
opposed to Domestic Trade ? How is the equilibrium
of values reached ?
6. What is the rationale of the claim of the Labourer
to the whole of the value of the Product ?
7. Define Statistics. Mention some of the chief
limitations from the point of view of method, of their
use in economics.
8. Explain the expressions : statistical average ;
weighted mean ; interpolation ; statistical law.
&ni}ttvnits of Sovomnu.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
POLITICAL SCIENCE DEPARTMENT.
ENGLISH CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY.
Examiners ■ i ^"^^ Mavoh.
axarmtura . | g ^ Wickett, Ph.D.
Five qaestions only to be answered.
1. Give an account of the development of Parlia-
ment.
2. Mention some of the more important constitu-
tional documents and give an account of two of them.
3. Distinguish between a Statute and an ordinance,
and describe the procedure by means of which Acts of
Parliament are passed.
4. What is the " Dispensing Power," and what are
the limits of the effect of a " Proclamation ? "
o. In what way did changes in land tenure affect
the Parliamentary franchise ?
6. Give an account of the attempt to establish per-
sonal government under the House of York.
7. What are the constitutional privileges of Peers of
Ireland, Scotland and Great Britain respectively ?
8. Sketch the movement for reform in Parliament
up till 1885.
Binftiersfts oc Sorotito«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
POLITICAL SCIENCE DEPARTMENT.
ENGLISH CONSTITUTIONAL HISTOKY.
HONORS.
Examiners • J ^^^^ Mav(jr.
tLxamtmia. ^ g ^ Wickett, Ph.D.
Five questions only to be answeted. ,
1. Give an account ot the struggle between the
Parliament and the King on the question of the royal
prerogative, giving special attention to the reign of
Richard II.
2. Describe the methods of legislation by Petition
and by Bill, and shew the connection between them.
3. Give an account of the municipal system of the
middle ages especially in its constitutional relations.
4. What were the principal provisions of the Act of
Settlement (1701) ?
5. Give an account of the Statute of Marlborough
(1267).
6. Trace the movement for the reform of Parliament
daring the nineteenth century.
7. Sketch the history of the " Cabinet."
8. Describe the procedure by means of which a seat
is declared vacant in the House of Commons in Eng-
land and compare it with the procedure in the Domin-
ion House of Commons.
QlnitietsUfi of iiToromOc
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
COLONIAL CONSTITUTIONAL LAW.
HONORS.
Examine!': McGregor Young.
Note. — Five questions to be answered.
1. " The great constitutional reform in colonial
government effected by the introduction of responsible
government." Explain the nature and effect of this
reform.
2. How was the prerogative of pardon affected by
the royal instructions as settled upon Lord Lome's
appointment as Governor-General of Canada ?
3. What is meant by the statement that a Colonial
Legislature is not a delegate or agent of the Imperial
Legislature ?
4. What is the Imperial practice with respect to the
disallowance of Canadian legislation ? Exemplify by
precedents.
5. Outline the constitutional course of a Canadian
Governor-General who, believing the advice of his
Ministers to be injurious to the public welfare, desires
to reject it.
6. Explain the effect upon the prerogative of a grant
of legislative power to a Local Legislature. Can a
Colonial Parliament deprive a citizen of his appeal to
the Privy Council from the local Courts ?
7. Give a short account of the liabilitv of a Governor
to civil actions in the Colonial Courts.
iAnitiersfts of Soromo^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH CONSTlTUTfONAL LAW-
HONORS.
Examiner : McGregor Young.
Note. — Six questions to be answered.
1. " The prerogatives of the Crown have become
the privileges of the people." Explain this.
2. Illustrate the three meanings included by Profes-
sor Dicey in his general statement that the " rule of
law " is a special characteristic of English institutions.
3. Could the present British parliament legally pro-
vide that it should continue without appeal to the
electors for the lifetime of the King ? Discuss the
principles involved in this kiquiry.
4. It is charged that a census enumerator has injured
a citizen. Contrast the jurisdiction of the ordinary
Courts of Law under our system and a system of
" adviinistraiive law"
5. Explain the effect of the Habeas Corpus Acts
upon the authority of the judiciary over the executive.
6. What are Hearn*s views as to the creation of Peers
to coerce a refractory House of Lords, and how can
the^' be reconciled with the political sovereignty of
the nation ?
7. " The Crown can always check the adoption of a
policy which it deems unwise. This power is neither
impaired nor abandoned, but is exercised in a new and
peculiar manner." Explain.
8. What is meant by the corporate character of the
modem Cabinet ? Is a Ministry ever justified in re-
taining office against a condemnatory vote upon a
particular Minister ?
Cftnftier»ft9 oc {Toronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
HISTORY OF ENGLISH LAW.
HONORS.
Examiner : A. H. F. Lefroy, M.A.
1. What were the principal legal reforms in the
reign of Henry II., and what were the possessory
assizes.
2. Briefly describe the leading features of legal pro-
cedure in England prior to the reign of Edward I.
3. What changes do you consider to have been intro-
duced b^' William the Conqueror into the system of
Land Tenure in England ; and briefly describe the
character and incidents of the four free tenures ?
4. What were the chief legal enactments of Ed-
ward I.?
5. What was the origin of the Court of Chancery ?
By what methods did the Chancellors acquire jurisdic-
tion ? and describe the advantages of procedure for-
merly enjoyed by the Court of Chancery as compared
with the Courts of Common Law.
6. What is the history of the actions of Assumpsit,
Trover, and Ejectment ?
7. Can you mention any famous Acts of the reigns
of Elizabeth and Charles II. now operative in Ontario ?
8. Explain : Scutage ; Wer-gild ; Boc land ; Forensic
service ; Escheat ; Ancient Demesne ; Fines and Recov-
eries ; " There cannot be a use on a use.*'
9. Mention the principal heads of legal reform in
England since the reign of George IV.
WLnmvuita of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ROMAN LAW.
HONORS.
Examiner: A. H. F. Lefroy, M.A.
1. Explain and comment on the division by the
In.stituies of the field of law into the law of persons,
the law of things, and the law of actions.
2. Distinguish between Jus civile, Jus gentium, and
Jus naturale ; and state as fully as you can the sources
of the Jus gentium.
3. What was the date of the Emperor Justinian,
and what legal works were published by him ? State
names and dates of any prior codifications of Roman
Law.
5. Describe the Roman family organisation at the
time of the XII Tables, and indicate the points in
which it became subsequently modified, with special
reference to the law of intestate succession.
5. State and explain the three successive systems of
Judicial procedure among the Romans.
6. What classes of contracts were recognized as
I^ally binding in Roman Law in the time of Justinian.
Describe any forms of contract or conveyance known
to the old law which had become obsolete.
7. Explain the following terms : donatio mortis
caus4 ; culpa ; testamentum per aes et libram ; actio
Serviana ; bonorum possessio secundum tabulas ; Latini
Juniani ; adoptio plena ; jus in re aliend* ; peculium
profectitium ; justoe nuptisQ.
8. State the dates and provisions gf the Leges
Ganuleia, Falcidia, Julia et Papia Poppoea ; and of the
Senatus Consultum Velleianum, Trebellianum, and
Macedonianum.
9int\ttvuits oc CTovomo*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
PHILOSOPHY.
ETHICS.
EaxLminera • I ^^^^' ^' ^' ^adgley, M.A., LL.D.
1. (a) Explain Hobbes' theory of Human Nature,
and of the foundation and authority of morality.
(6) What criticism of his position was ottered
(1) by Cudworth and Clarke ?
(2) by Shaftesbury and Hutch eson ?
2. (a) Examine, after Butler, " the natural suprem-
acy of reflection or conscience."
(6) Show fully what you understand by Con-
science.
(c) Specify and criticise any theories that have
been held with reference to its origin.
3. State and examine the ethical theory of Hume,
or of J. S. Mill.
4. (a) Explain the fundamental positions of Hedon-
ism and Rationalism as applied to Ethics.
(6) Show how Evolution claims to harmonize
the two theories.
(c) Is the resulting theory satisfactory ?
5. Examine the meaning and significance of Free-
dom as applied to human conduct.
6. (a) Explain what is meant by Self-realization.
(6) Show whether it furnishes a satisfactory
theory of life, individual and social ; and an adequate
distinction betw^een good and bad conduct.
(c) Is Self-realization consistent with Self-sacri-
fice?
mnf»tvultp of 2r«v«ma«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
LOGIC.
HONORS.
Examinei^ : F. Tracy, B. A. Ph.D.
Discuss carefully and critically the following topics,
giving your own views, and any others with which
you may be acquainted, including those of Mr. Mill : —
1. The Categories.
2. The meaning of the Judgment ( = " The Import
of the Proposition.")
3. The function and value of the Aristotelian Syllo-
gism.
4. The Law of Universal Causation.
5. The nature and grounds of Induction.
anttirr0fto of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
MEDIEVAL PHILOSOPHY AND CICERO.
HONORS.
Examiner : F. Tracy, B.A.., Ph.D.
1. Describe the conditions — political, social, intel-
lectual and religious — under which the philosophy of
the middle ages took its rise ; and show the influence
of these conditions in determining the course of its
development.
2. Give an exposition of the system of Augustine,
shewing fully what he owes to preceding philosophy,
and how^ he influenced those who came after him.
3. Give as complete an account as you can of the
famous controversy over universals, mentioning the
most important names, indicating the progress made,
and shoTving the importance of the problem, as well
as its present status.
4. Define Scholasticism; explain its central posi-
tion; shew how that position was gradually under-
mined; and describe tbe influences that led to its
final overthrow.
5. What are the leading objections made by Cicero
in the De Finibws against the System of Epicurus (a)
in Cosmology, (6) in Theory of Knowledge, (c) in
Ethics ?
VLnifttvuita ot Socotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
HISTORY OF ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY
HONORS.
Examiner : F. Tracy, B.A., Ph.D.
1. What do you understand by the phrase " History
of Philosophy ? " and why is the philosophy of the
Greeks especially worthy of historical study ?
2. How does Philosophy arise ? and what are its
leading problems, as we find it among the Greeks ?
3. Dividing Greek Philosophy into three periods —
Pre-Socratic, Platonic, and Post-Aristotelian — point
out as fully as you can, the leading characteristics of
each period, and their relation to one another, Men-
tion the leading schools, thinkers, and tendencies.
4. Give some account of Pythagoreanism, and esti-
mate its influence upon Plato.
5. Select three of the following topics for historical
and critical treatment : —
(a) The Ionic Philosophy.
(6) Parmenides vs. Heraclitus.
(c) Atomism in Greek Philosophy.
(d) The Platonic doctrine of Ideas, and Aristotle's
criticisms thei*eof.
(c) Relation of Platonism to Neo-Platonism.
(/) Greek Ethics.
6. Reproduce the various definitions of knowledge
given in the Theaetetua, with the Socratic criticisms.
8lntlicr0tt9 ot Corotito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
PHILOSOPHY-PSYCHOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner : A. H. Abbott, B.A.
!• What is your opinion with regard to the relation
of Metaphysics to Psychology :
(a) As an introduction to Psychology ;
(b) As an outcome of the Psychological investi-
gation ?
2. State briefly what factors were operative in
forming Hartley's theory of the association of ideas,
and sketch accurately and fundamentally, the bearing
of this theory on a theory of (a) thought, (6) feeling,
(c) volition.
3. Critically examine the theory of association of
ideas as held by the English " associationalists " from
the following stand points :
(a) The problem of the quantitative relations of
sensations ;
(b) The problem of space ;
(c) The problem of memory (recollectiou and
recognition).
4. (a) If you were to attempt to give an account of
volition as you actually experience it, of what facts
would you take account ?
(6) Under what conditions would you regard it
as justifiable to make use of what is called ** remorse,"
** self-sacrifice," etc., in such an account ?
5. (a) To what extent is your view of " freedom "
affected by your theory of space and time ?
(6) What problems relating to volition (freedom)
have been raised by your study of Psychology ?
8lnftiev0U9 of Sovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
PHILOSOPHY : EXPERIMENTAL
PSYCHOLOGY.
Examiner : A. Kibschmank, Ph.D.
Fiye questions ooimt a foil paper ; one of the last three
most be token.
1. What is the stimulus, and how do we know it ?
In accordance with your opinion on this point which
explanation of the law of Weber do you prefer ?
2. Disprove the theory that sensations and repro-
duced images differ only in intensity. Discuss "Reality."
3. What arguments would you advance afi;ainst the
theories which hold certain colours only to be funda-
mental qualities ?
4. Discuss the physical, physiological and psychical
aspect of "colour- mixture.''
5. Compare colour-blindness with the deviations of
colour perception in indirect vision.
6. Examine critically Zoellner's theory that the
investigation as to a fourth dimension is justified by
the " fact " that the third dimension of space is already
a product of inference.
7. Illustrate by a di€Lgram the formation of double
images. Criticize the theory of <* identical points," and
show why geometrical constructions of the *' Horopter "
are practically of no value.
8. State all you know about visual angles and angles
of regard.
[OV£B]
9. Discuss ''Lustre" and its dependence on the
binocular parallax. Why does metallic lustre never
appear in stereoscopic pictures ?
10. Compare the sense of Sight and the sense of
Hearing with regard to (a) successive, (&) simultaneous
stimulation.
11. Why do we select out of the great manifoldness
of possible intervals just the twelve tones of the musi-
cal scale ? Give different theories.
12. Discuss thoroughly one of the two problems
interesting alike to the psychologist and the astronomer
(" Star magnitudes " and " Reaction Times.")
Slnflier»ft9 of Sorotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1801.
THIRD YEAR
PHILOSOPHY.
HONORS.
ETHICS.
\ E. I. Badglet, M.A., LL.D.
GREEN.
1. Give briefly the chief arguments advanced by
Qreen in favor of (a) " a spiritual principle in Know-
ledge," (6) **a spiritual principle in Nature." (c)
Shew the connection between the arguments for (a)
and (6).
(d) What bearing has this whole discussion upon
Ethics in Green's estimation ; in your own estimation ?
2. Give Green's discussion of '* Desire."
What important results depend on this discus-
sion?
3. Give Green's examination of the adequacy of
Utilitarianism in theory and in practice.
4. (a) Carefully state in your own words what you
conceive to be Green's views on human personality and
Divine Personality.
(6) What bearing has Green's discussion upon the
problems of Materialism and Pantheism ?
(c) Shew clearly the connection (if any) between
Ethics and theories of the Universe such as Material-
ism and Pantheism.
What in your opinion is the correct method
for the ethical writer to employ in dealing with such
problems ?
(KnliiirMltli) <if Sdtotitd*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD tBAR.
PSYCHOLOGY-PSYOeOPHYSICS.
Exarriiner: A. KifiSCHiiANK.
Five qnettions oonnt a fall paper.
1. Give an accurate expression of the Law of Weber
and explain why it is called the Psychophysical Law.
Illustrate the law geometrically and algebraically
(as a logarithmic law).
2. Method of least observable difference. Make up
an example of the ordinary application of this method,
or solve the following problem :
In the light of an electric arc lamp of ^000 c.p.
and at a distance of 50 m. the opaque shade of a
lighted incandescent lamj) of 16 c.p. throws a shadow
on a walL This shadow is invisible when ttie incan-
descent lamp is at a distance of 50 cm. from the wall.
An 8 candle power lamp has to be 14 cm. nearer and
a 32 candle power lamp 20 cm. further away in order
to obtain the same effect. Calculate these results
according to the method of l.o.d. and draw your con-
clusions.
3. Method of mean gradation : —
Solve two of the following three problems, assum-
ing that the Law of Weber holds strictly :
(a) In a dark room there are three sources of
light, A, B and C, of equal shape and intensity and at
the same distance from the eye of the observer.
Before one of them, A, is placed a smoked glass which
absorbs 84% of the light. How many degrees opening
^ [ovbb]
must an episcotister, rotating before B, have in order
to make it appear as of medium intensity between A
and C?
(b) If, in the above example, C is 5 times brighter
than A (without absorbing glass) and B, and if the
episcotister rotates before A and B at the same time,
what aperture of the episcotister must be applied in
order to have B appear as the medium intensity ?
(c) Find the composition of a rotating disc esti-
mated as the mean between two others, one of which
is composed of 10° of white and 350"^ of a black which
reflects .^ of the intensity of the white, whilst the
components of the other are 330^ white and 30"* of a
black of the intensity ^^. The same white is used for
all three discs and the black of the middle disc is of
the intensity ^^.
4. Method of average error.
(a) The height of a railway-car, a house and a
church steeple were estimated by ten different persons
as follows :
Bailway«car.
House.
Church StMple.
8 ft. 4
in.
47 ft
270 ft
7 ..
50 ..
2U0 M
7 M 6
II
39 ..
220 ..
6 M 9
'J
52 ..
300 ..
8 M
48 ..
340 ..
9 M 2
II
50 ..
220 ..
8 M 6
II
36 ..
310 ..
8 r. 6
II
53 II
S570 »
7 M 8
II
46 ..
220 1.
7 .. 9
II
49 ..
290 11
Investigate these results according to the method
of average errors. Calculate also the constant error
(C) if the railway-car is 14, the house 40 and the
steeple 300 feet high.
(b) State briefly the difference between Fechner*s
and Wundt's way of calculating the pure average eiTor
and show in which of the above cases the results are
the same for both methods.
5. State the essential characteristics of the method
of right and wrong cases.
6. Describe MerkeFs combination of the method of
mean gradation and that of right and wrong cases.
ainftifrsftv of ^Toronto
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
RIGID DYNAMICS.
HONORS.
Eaminer : W. J. LoUDON, B.A.
N.B. — Question (0) is given as a bonns.
1. Find, by direct integratioD, the moments of inertia of
(a) Ad elliptic plate about the major axis,
(b) A rectangular plate about a diagonal.
2. Find the moment of inertia of the solid
about the axis of x,
3. Shew that three points can always be found in a plane
M
area of mass }fj so that three masses, each equal to -k-'
j)laced at these points will form a system equimomental with
the area.
4. (a) A rod OAj of length 2a, fixed at 0, drops from a
horizontal position under the action of gravity : find its
angular velocity when in a vertical position.
(b) A fine string is wound around a heavy grooved
circular plate, and the free end being fixed, the plate is
allowed to fall under gravity. Find the space described in
any time from rest.
5. In the case of a body moving, under the action of .
finite forces, about a fixed axis, obtain the general equations
of motion.
When a heavy body moves about a horizontal axis,
how would you find the angular velocity in any position
most easily 1
[over]
6. Explain what is meant by a centre of percussion. If
a boily be capable of motion about a fixed axis, which is
parallel to a principal axis at the centre of inertia, shew
that the line of percussion will pass through the centre of
oscillation.
7. If a rod of length a be moving about one end fixed
with uniform angular velocity, and this end be suddenly
freed ; at what point must the rod l)e fixed again so that all
its particles may be reduced to rest 1
8. Find Euler's equations of motion for a body moving
about a fixed point under the action of finite forces.
Apply them tO; the case of a top spinning on a perfectly
rough horizontal plane.
9. (a) A perfectly rough ball is placed within a hollow
cylindrical garden roller at the lowest point, and the roller
is then drawn along a level walk with a uniform velocit}' V.
Shew that the ball will roll quite round the interior of the
roller if V^ > -^- g {h — a), a being the radius of the ball,
and b that of the roller.
(6) A fine uniform string of length 2 a is in equilib-
rium, parsing over a smooth small pulley, and is just dis-
placed : prove that the velocity of the string when just
leaving the pulley is v^o^.
(c) A heavy circular disc is supported form a point
whose height above it is equal to the radius by three equal
strings attached to the circumference at equal intervals.
One of the strings, being cut, shew that the tension of the
others is immediately diminished in the ratio of 2 : 3.
{d) A uniform rod of length a, freely movable about
one end, is initially projected in a horizontal plane with
angular velocity ttt about the fixed point. If at any subse-
quent time 0 be the angle which the rod makes with the
vertical and ^ be the angle which the projection of the rod
on the horizontal plane makes with the initial position,
shew that
sm^ g . -— MB CO.
dt
8liifliet«ft9 of Sovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
PARTICLE DYNAMICS.
HONORS.
Examiner : W. J. Loudon, B. A.
1. When a point is in motion in any plane curve, find its
accelerations, at any instant, along and perpendicular to the
tangent.
Shew that in any curve in space there can be no accel-
eration perpendicular to the osculating plane.
2. When a particle moves under an attraction in its line
of motion, varying directly as the distance of the particle
from a fixed point in that line, determine the motion.
If the force be repulsive and the particle be projected
initially from a distance a towards the origin with velocity
ai^fij shew that it will continually approach the origin but
never reach it.
3. A particle moves in a straight line under the action of
an attraction always directed to a point in that line and
varying inversely as the squai*e of the distance from that
point. Determine the motion.
Two particles A and B mutually attracting one another
according to the Newtonian law, are placed at rest a
distance a apart. The particle B is now constrained to
move away from A, along the straight line joining them,
with a uniform velocity n. Show that A will catch up to
2a
B if n^ < — , fJL being the mass of B : and that the time it
a
will take is
2fJL
i(r + 2/9 + sin2^)-7;
1 o/%« ,2a£ 2 ft ^
where cos* p '=»-ri and -r- ^ n*,
b b a
[over]
4. (a) A particle moves in a straight line from a distance
a towards a centre of attraction varying inversely as the cube
a«
of the distance : shew that the time of descent is
(6) Shew that the time of descent, to a centre of
attraction which varies inversely aH the square of the
distance, through the first half of the initial distance is to
that through the latter half as ?r -|- 2 : tt — 2.
(c) A particle is projected from a point P with velocity
7, so as to pass through a point Q whoee coK>rdinate8
referred to jP as origin are a;, y, the axis of y being vertical.
Prove that the directions of projection are given by the
quadratic
tan2 a tan a + 1 H 5^ «• 0.
gx g^
(d) A particle is projected from the highest point of a
sphere of radius c so as to clear the sphere. Prove that the
velocity of projection cannot be less than v^^ ge
5 In a central orbit prove the following : —
d^u ^ P ^ h^ dp A « • „
— J- 1/ =s • P=s - ' V ^i -' 2ij^ .B Pa
de^^"" K^u^' ^ p^ dr'"" p' ^^^^q-
6. Define the term Apse^ and find the analytical condition
for one : also, shew that in a central orbit there cannot be
more than two apsidal distances.
7. A particle is projected fiom a given point in a given
direction and with a given velocity, and moves under the
action of a central attraction varying inversely as the square
of the distance : shew that the orbit is a conic sectioD.
What is the necessary initial condition that the path
may be an ellipse ?
8. If a particle move in a circle of radius r about a centre
of attraction distant a from the centre of the circle, shew
that the periodic time is
2 7rr*
(»• — a) V^
where <p is the attraction at the nearer apse.
dnitiersftff of ^Tovotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
HYDROSTATICS.
HONORS.
Examvner : J. C. McLennan. B. A., Ph.D.
1. Shew how to determine the surfaces of equal pressure
and the curves of equal pressure and density for a mass of
heterogeneous incompressible fluid at rest under the action
of forces of the most general kind.
In the case of an elastic fluid of variable temperature
at rest under the action of forces belonging to a conserva-
tive sjstem, shew that the surfaces of equal pressure and of
equal temperature coincide.
2. A mass of liquid Lb at rest under the action of forces
whose components at the points x, y, z are cy - bz, az - cos,
and 6a;— ay ; shew that the surfaces of constant pressure are
1 X y z
planes passing through the line - = -f = - and the curves of
a 0 e
constant pressure and constant density are right lines parallel
to this line.
3. Define centre of pressure. Find its position for a tri-
aDgnlar lamina imersed in a heavy liquid with its vertices at
the depths x, y, and z^ respectively.
4. A plane area of any form occupies a vertical position
in water. If it is rotated in its own plane alone about any
point in the area, find the curve traced out in the area by
the centre of pressure.
5. Find the curves of flotation and buojrancy for an
elliptic lamina floating in a heavy liquid.
6. A solid of revolution floats in a liquid whose density
is a function of the depth; determine the position of the
metacentre.
[ovxr]
A right circular cone floats with its axis horizontal in
a liquid the density of which is double that of the cone. If
the vertex be attached to a fixed point in the surface of the
liquid, shew that for stability the vertical angle mast be
less than 120 degrees.
7. Establish the relation y' » l! for the principal ten-
sions at any point on a thin flexible vessel in the form of a
surface of revolution subjected to the pressure of a h^vy
liquid.
When the tensions at any point of a thin membrane
referred to any two lines intersecting at right angles are
given ; shew how to determine the principal tensions at the
point
8. A quantity of liquid within a thin spherical shell
rotates about a vertical diameter with uniform angular
velocity ; find the principal tensions at any point.
9. Find an expression for the energy of a liquid film and
deduce a relation between the radius of a spherical soap
bubble and the pressures to which it is subjected.
A soap bubble is blown between two parallel circular
rings which are gradually drawn apart. Determine the
form of the bubble when the pressure inside and outside is
the same.
1
anftictsftv ot SToronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
THERMODYNAMICS.
HONORS.
Examiner : G. R. Anderson, M.A.
1. Indicate the chief assumptions of the mechanical
theory of heat. Mention some facts that form crucial tests
between this theory and the now obsolete caloric theory.
2. Explain clearly the meaning of the " degree " on a
mercurial thermometer. To what defects is such a ther-
mometer liable 1 In the cas^of a gas thermometer, what
assumptions are made as to the nature of the thermometric
substance.
3. Define specific heat Show that Cp — Co =» R.
If the velocity of sound in air at Id*" C. and 760 mm.
pressure ^ 340 metres and the normal density of the air
s .001293; find 7.
4. Explain the difference between the adiabatic and the
isothermal elasticities of a substance and determine their
ratio.
5. Show that p^^ v'p « const.
6. Deduce the mathematical expressions of the two funda-
mental laws of Thermodynamics.
7. Define adiabatic lines and deduce a formula connecting
changes of temperature with adiabatic changes of volume.
8. Show how to calculate numerically the value of E in
the equation PF == B7\
Apply your formula to find JR for air.
8. Describe the Carnot engine and deduce a general
expression for its efficiency.
8ltiftiet0ft9 of crovoiito<
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
GEOMETRICAL OPTICS.
HONORS.
Exaaminer : G. R. Anderson, M.A.
1. State the laws of reflection.
Determine the deviation produced by a ray
reflected n times in succession from two mirrors
inclined at an angle 0 to each other.
Find the angle between two mirrors that a ray
reflected once at each of them may be perpendicular
to its initial direction.
2. In the case of a pencil of homogeneous light
refracted through a prism, determine the position of
the focua
What is the condition for total internal reflec-
tion ?
If the index of refraction for crown glass be 1.515,
find the maximum refracting an^le of a prism of this
glass that a ray may pass throu^.
3. Assuming the results of refraction at a spherical
surface for a small aperture, deduce the general
formula for a thin lens :
(a) When the opposite faces are in contact with
different media.
(b) When the two media are the same.
Determine the position of the nodal point
4. Show the course of the rays through an astro-
nomical telescope furnished with a Ramsden eye-piece.
[OVBRJ
If the focal length of the objective be 100 era.
and that of each lens of the ocular be 10 cm., 6nd the
magnification.
5. Investigate the conditions for achromatism of
two negative lenses separated by an interval a.
Show that Huyghens* eye-piece fulfils these con-
ditions.
6. What is meant by dispersive power of a medium ?
If the indices of refra<;tion for flint and crown
glass be : —
Fraunhofer Line.
Flint
1
Crown.
fi
E
U
1.536
1.545
1.562
1513
1.520
1.532
Determine the dispersive power of each and the
ratio of the focal lengths and the signs of two lenses to
form an achromatic convergent combination.
7. In the rainbow find the angle of incidence for
minimum deviation.
Find the angular radius of the third bow in the
case of a glass sphere whose refractive index = |.
SInUievfirttff of Sovotito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
THEORY OF EQUATIONS.
HONORS.
Examiner : Alfbed T. DbLuby, B.A.
1. lf/(z) ia a rational integral function of «,
(a) Shew that/(s;) is continuous for all finite values
(b) Outline a proof of the theorem that/(«) must
vanish for some finite value of z,
(e) The coefficients being real, state circumstances that
indicate immediately the existence of recU zeros of/ {z),
2. State the theorems that shew that the solution of any
binomial equation a^ — I » 0, may be made to depend
upon the solution of equations of the form
jcP^- 1 - 0
where /? is a prime.
3. Give any solution of the general quartic.
4. When any equation/ (a;) « 0 has an r multiple root a,
a value a little inferior to a gives to the series of functions
/(«),/i («),/2 («)... ./r - 1 («)
signs alternately positive and negative, or negative and
positive, while a value a little superior to a gives to these
fnnctioas the same sign, namely, that of /.(a).
5. If the real roots of either of the eqations
/(a:) = 0,/'(«) = 0
are known, what may be inferred as to the roots of the other f
From a consideration of the derived function, deduce
the condition Ijiat the cubic
«8 + 3Zr« + (? = 0
may have (1) real and unequal roots, (2) two equal roots.
[ovsb]
6. State Sturm's Theorem.
Apply it to the examinatioD of the equation,
af - lOa^ + 6 a; + 1-0.
7. Find to five places of decimals the smaller root of the
equation,
a!* —11727 a: + 40486 = 0.
8. Outline the proof of the theorem that every rational
symmetrical function of the roots of an algebraic equation
can be expressed rationally in terms of the coefficients.
9. When a determinant vanishes the constituents of any
row of its reciprocal are proportional to those of any
other row.
If OS,, x^ . . . . x,! are all different, the determinant
1 1 1
2
X
«{»— 1 05,"^^
.n-1
cannot equal zero.
Binfiirtttftff of s:ovonta
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS-
HONORS.
Exa'mvaeT : Alfred Baker, M.A.
1 . If ^ and V be explicit functions of two independent
variables x and y^ and if CT be expressible as a function of
F, then
dU dV^dU dV^^Q
dx dy dy dx '
identically. And conversely of this condition be identically
satisfied then is U expressible as a function of T.
If two solutions be obtained for the equation
M dx + N dy^O,
shew that they are functions of one another, t.e., the pre-
ceding equation can have only one independent primitive.
2. Sohre the equation
M dx + N dy^Q
when exact.
Extend the method to the equation
X dx-^- 7 dy + Zdz^O
when integrable.
Solve the equation
(3 a; — 2 y6«) cto — 2 JB6« c^ + (4 2 — 2 xy^) dz « 0.
3. Solve the equation
by the method of variation of parameters.
Extend the method for the solution of the equation
when y^, y^ .... yn% solutions when F a 0, are known.
Solve the equation
(tan " ^ y — as) c?y SB (1 4- y2j flfec
Solve also the equation
the solutions, when the right hand side is zero,
aJ* — a and aj.
4. Indicate methods of solution for the following classes
of equations :
y — /(«, p) \ « «/(y, p). /(yi p) — o \f{x, p) « o.
/&,.)-«.
Solve the equation
«8p« + ic2yp + o»— 0,
interpreting the solutions that arise.
5. Extend Leibnity, Theorem
D^hiv — u D^v + nDu 2>*-it> +
to the case where n is negative.
Prove
^ (D) uv « u^ (D) V + Duqf (/>)«+
Solve the equation
6. Prove the following propositions :
/(a D)7S^y ^ x^f{x D + m)V
vinD^^xD{xD —1) {xD '-n+ 1).
f{xD)D^^ D^f{x D — m).
7. In the case of the homogeneous equation
shew how to determine
(1) The Complementary Function, obtaining the forms
corresponding to equal and imaginary roots in the auxiliszy
equation.
(2) Tlie Particular Integral, examiDisg the different
cases that mstj arise according to the cpnatitntion of X
8. Solve the equations
(1) oi^^'-x'^£+2y^a^{\ogx)^ +x\ogx.
(2) a:^^^2y^x + C0BX.
9. ** When we know one or several particular integrals
of the linear equation
the order of the equation can be depressed by a number
equal to the number of particular integrals known."
If y^j y^ and y^ be known to be solutions shew how
the order of the above equation may be depressed by 3.
anftitvsftff of Sotontiu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : I90L
THIRD YEAR
STATICS.
HONORS.
Examiner: J. C. McLennan, B.A., Ph.D.
1. Define the British and French absolute and gravitation
units of Force and Work.
If 33000 foot-]>ounds be the unit of work, the weight
of a ton the unit of force, and five hundred weight the unit
of mass, find the units of length and time.
2. Parallel forces act at given points on a rigid body ;
shew how to find their centre when there is one.
If the forces are reducible to a couple, shew that
equilibrium may be established by turning the direction of
the forces through a certain angle in determinate parallel
planes. Shew how the angle and the planes may be found.
3. Shew how to reduce a system of forces acting on a
rigid body to a single force acting at an assigned point and
a couple whose axis is parallel to the direction of this force.
A given system of forces is reduced to two, P, Q, and
the shortest distances between their lines of action from the
central axis are x, y respectively ; prove that
P^ {Rh^ + (?2) « Q2 (^y2 + Q2y
4. Define ^Z^ of force, potential, intensity of field.
Shew that for the Newtonian law of attraction the
' forces at a point are given by
dV ^
X B= — etc.
ax
Shew that the potential cannot have a maximum or a
minimum value in free space.
Establish a relation between the potentials inside and
outside a spherical surface over which there is any distribu-
tion whatever of attracting matter.
[ovsr]
5. A spherical shell is covered with a thin layer of matter
whose density varies inversely as the cube of the distance to
a point within the shell. Find the action at points outside
the shell for this distribution of matter.
6. A distribution of attracting matter is partly ^thin
and partly without a given closed surface. Find the surface
integral of normal force intensity taken over the surface.
Use this theorem to establish Poisson's Equation
7. A homogeneous straight line of attracting matter
extends from il to ^. Find the level surfaces for their
distribution.
Deduce the action of a thin shell of matter bounded by
two similar and similarly situated ellepsoids at poiuto
within it.
8. State and prove Green's Theorem.
Shew that the work required to reduce a given self-
attracting distribution of matter to infinite diffusion is
iJffm^.
8
Hence deduce thb energy developed in a homogeneous
solid sphere whose component particles have been brought
together from infinite diffusion under their mutual attractiona
Sinfiietttftff of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR
PROBLEMS.
Examiner : W. J. Loudon, B.A.
1. Forces F, Q, act at a point A, and B, C, 2>, are the
points in v^hich any transversal meets the lines of action of
these forces and their resultant (EJ^ respectively : shew that
^ ^ c /?
AB ' AC AD
2. Find by any method the centre of gravity of a solid
hemisphere.
3. When a person tries to pull out a two-handled drawer
by pulling one of the handles in a direction perpendicular to
its front, shew that the drawer will stick fast, whatever be
the force employed, if the coefficient of friction be not less
than the ratio of the length of either side of the drawer to
the distance between its handles.
4. In a central orbit where the force is fir^ , n being a
positive integer, a particle is projected from an apse at the
distance c with a velocity \^fic^ + ^ : show that the path is
a circle.
5. A cardioid r b a (1 — cos 0) is described about a
centre of force at the pole : shew that, if F be the force and
V the velocity at the apse, 3v^ =s 4 aF.
6. An elliptic lamina is just immersed in a homogeneous
liquid, the major axis being vertical : prove that, if the
excentricity be ^, the centre of pressure will coincide with
the lower focus.
7. Given the specific gravity of ice (s) and of sea- water
{$') find the volume of an iceberg of which V cubic feet are
seen above the water.
8. Three plane mirrors are placed with their planes at
right angles to one another. If a ray be refiected by all of
them successively, its final direction will be parallel to its
direction at incidence.
[over]
f 9. If the refractive index of a medium at any point be
proportional to its distance from a fixed plane, prove that the
path of the ray will be the curve
2aj e ^ a '^
a a c
a and c being constants.
10. A fine uniform string of length 2 a b in equilibrium
passing over a smooth small pulley, and is just displaced :
prove that the velocity of the string when just leaving the
pulley is v^a^.
1 1. Find the position of a point 0. in a triangular lamina
A BO J such that the moments of inertia of AOBj JSOC, CO A,
about an axis through Oy perpendicular to the plane of the
lamina, may all be equal.
12. It a, /?, T' be the roots of the equation
a;3_3a.2_9a. + 27 = 0
form the equation whose roots are
wmirtttnits ot sovomo*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ZOOLOGY.
HONORS.
„ .„ f PROFEassoK Rahsat Wright.
^^■'"'''''^^ • { J. Stafford, B.A.. Ph.D.
1. Discuss the affinities of the Protochordata with
the Vertebrata.
2. Describe the excretory organs of Amphioxus.
3. What are the habits of the Nemertini, Urochorda,
and Cyclostomata ?
4. Discuss the relationships of the Ganoidei, Tele-
ostei, Dipnoi, and Stegocephali.
5. What are the distinctive characters of the Sharks
and Rays ?
6. Compare the urinogenital apparatus in a Selachian
and Amblystoma.
Slnflictsfti? of Sikvotito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
BOTANY.
HONORS.
Examiner: E. C. Jeffrky, Ph.D.
[time three hours].
1. Describe the various modes of fertilization and
development of the spore found in the Rhodophysese
2. Give some account of the Uredineee.
3. Discuss the classification of the vascular Crypto-
gams.
4. Describe the characteristic features of the Equi-
setaceae and their fossil allies.
5. Outline the salient features of the Cycadofilices
and indicate in what respects they are transitional
between the Cryptogams and Phsenogama.
6. Give an account of the assimilation of carbon by
plants.
7. Describe the relation of plants to nitrogen.
8. Describe the nature and mechanism of sleep
movements in plants.
BniHerieiftj? of STotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY-FIRST PAPER.
Examiner : F. B. Allan. B.A.
1. What are the uses of structural formulae ? What
information is conveyed by the following formulas ?
CH, — NHCjH, CH,— C ^ CH..OH
C^-OC-H, , CH.— C ' CH.OH .
2. Show how the following preparations may be
made : Butyric acid from sodium propylate, butane
from ethyl alcohol, ethylamine from phthalmide,
glycocoll from acetic acid, isobutyric acid from aci*ylic
acid.
3. Give methods of preparation for: ethyl phos-
phate, tetramethyl methane, methyl carbylamine, zinc
ethyl, oxamie acid, fumaric acid, tri-ethyl sulphine
iodide.
4. Give an account of the chemistry of carbamide
and its derivations and of cyanamide.
5. Describe a laboratory preparation for any two of
the following: Benzoine, allyl alcohol, acetanilide,
mandelic acid.
8lnfiier»fts of Sovotito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
0RG.4NIC CHEMISTRY -SECOND PAPER.
Examiner : F. B. Allan, B.A.
1. Show how the following may be prepared from
benzene : toluene, m-diaminobenzene, phenyl hydrazine,
picric acid, terephthalic acid.
2. Give methods of preparation for : diethyl aniline,
diazoaiii idobenzene, phenolphthaleine, acetophenon
anthraquinone, pyridine, salicylic acid, hippuric acid.
3. Give an account of the reduction products of
nitro-benzene (a) in acid solution, and (b) in alkaline
solution.
4. How can it be shown that the six hydrogens in
benzene are symmetrical ?
5. Give an account of triphenyl methane and its
derivatives
WLni^ttvttits 0% SToronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
INVERTEBRATE PALilONTOLOGY.
Examiner: W. A. Parks. B.A., Ph.D.
1. What are the main differences between Palaeozoic
and post Palaeozoic Crinoids, Star fishes and Urchins ?
Make a list of Palaeozoic examples in each case.
2. Show how the Ammonoidea replaced the Nauti-
loidea.
Trace the development of the septum in the
Ammonites.
Show the relation to the above, in time, of the
Dibranchiata, and describe in detail the hard parts of
a Mesozoic example.
3. Name and state the age of the earliest butterfly,
ostracod, worm, f ucoid, foraminifer, and long and short
tailed decapod.
4. Describe the hard parts of the Polyzoa.
Outline the classification.
Namejsome forms in the Niagara Formation.
5. What do you understand by a fossil of stratigra-
phical value.
Name some groups of especial value, and describe
the parts to which this value is due.
Name some species of little stratigraphical import-
ance.
•
6. Describe the fauna and flora of the Cretaceous
and contrast this system with its predecessor and with
its successor. '
(.
Wlnmtvults of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS
MINERALOGY.
Examiner : W. A. Parks, B.A., Ph.D.
1. Name the bases determinable by the " plaster
cast" method.
Describe the operation in each case.
2. Draw a scale to show the spectra of Lithium,
Potassium and Strontium.
Name, with composition, the minerals containing
Lithium.
3. Name and describe the minerals of the Phenacite
Group.
What minerals of the polysilicate division are
comparable with these ?
4. Describe minutely the Amphibole, Pyroxene and
Chrysolite groups.
Name, with composition, the members of each.
Write notes on Serpentine, and show its relation
to the above groups.
5. Classify according to the method adopted in the
lectures the oxides of the heavy metals.
6. Give an account of the progress of mineralogical
science from the Saxon revival to the time of Werner.
NoT£ : — Third year Candidates will omit question sis;.
r
nniHf mUff of voronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
CRYSTALLOGRAPHY.
ExamiTher : W. A. Pabks, B.A„ Ph.D.
1. Give name and formula of the form resulting by
producing the alternate faces of the hexagonal deutero-
pyramid.
2. Prove that — ^ i2 truncates the polar edges of R
3. Name, with Miller's indices the form resulting
from tetartohedrism in the regular system.
Show by diagrams that this is the only new form.
4. Show by spherical projection the relation between
the trisoctahedron and the trapezohedron.
5. Write notes on the crystal habit of Topaz, Heu-
landite, Leucite, Analcite and Marcasite.
6. Make diagrams to show the following combina-
tions:
(111) and (123)
(110) and (221)
(1010) and + —5— (rhombohedral).
7. Explain twinning axis and twinning plane.
Show difference between composition face and
twinning face.
Bltiftiev«ftfi o( Sovomo^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL SCIENCE.
STRATIGRAPHICAL GEOLOGY.
Examiner : A. P. Coleman.
1. Give an account of the rocks generally included
in the Laurentian in Canada. How were the different
rocks formed and how are they related to one another
in time. Discuss the question of life in Laurentian
times.
2. Describe the rocks and main fossils of the Cambro-
Silurian. Roughly map their distribution in Ontario.
What was the general character of the life and phys-
ical conditions of the time as known from fossils ?
3. Give an account of the Triassic and Jurassic with
the main forms of life belonging to them. Sketch the
.succession of plants from the Carboniferous to the
Jurassic.
4. What are the main ranges of mountains known
in the history of North America, when did each appear,
and what effects had their elevation on the life history
of the continent ?
5. Name and describe the great post glacial lakes,
showing their outlets and relationships to modern
bodies of water. What effects have they left behind
in Ontario.
iiiiitiet»ft9 of Corotito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR O.M. & P.O.
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.
FIRST PAPER.
Examiner : Frank B. Kenrick, B.A., Ph.D.
Tables of logarithms may be used in the examination.
1. Show how the hydrolytic dissociation of the salt
of a weak monobasic acid and a strong mdnovalent
base varies with the concentration.
How may the extent of hydrolysis be determined
experimentally ?
Explain the ase of phenol phthalem as an indic-
ator, showing why it gives unsatisfactory results with
ammonia.
2. A decinormai solution of the ester of a monobasic
acid undergoes saponification by decinormai potash,
the reaction being bi-molecular. After three days
the potash is found to be 0.075 normal. What will
its concentration be after 18 days ?
3. Describe briefly Behrend's experiments on phen-
anthrene picrate to test the constancy of the " solubil-
ity product."
4. Indicate by equations how the electrolytic dis-
sociation of two slightly soluble salts with a common
ion may be determined from the solubilities of these
salts alone and together.
5. The solubility of succinic acid at 0°C. is 2.88 g
per 100 cc, at 8.5°, 4.21 g per 100 cc.
Calculate the heat of solution of succinic acid (in
the saturated solution).
[log„ e = 0.4343].
6. Write a note on one of the following : (a) surface
tension, (6) rotation of the plane of polarisation by
solutions, (c) solubility of solids.
anftieviertts of Toronto
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR CM. & P.O.
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.
SECOND PAPER,
Exobininer : Fbane B. Kenrick, BA., Pfl.D.
(Tables off logarithmB may be used in ibe ezamination).
1. Calculate the electromotive force of a cell con-
sisting of silver electrodes in n/10 and n/100 silver
nitrate joined by a syphon at 17° C. Give a deduction
of the formula used. Addition of potassium cyanide
to the n/100 solution increases the E.M.F. by 1.14
volts. Find approximate concentration of the silver
ions in this solution.
In this question assume complete dissociation
and equality of the rates of migration of Ag and NO,.
2. Explain the processes which take place on charg-
ing an ordinary storage cell. Why does the E.M.F.
vary with the concentration of the sulphuric acid.
3. Under what conditions may two or more metals
be separated electrolytically ? What conditions pro-
duce simultaneous deposition of two or more metals
from a solution ?
4. Explain the action of Lippmann's capillary elec-
trometer.
Find the heat of ionisation of copper from the
following data :
i5 = — 0.00076
dT
TT = — 0.()0 V. at 17*^.
[ovsr]
5. Qive reasons for attaching any special importance
to that multiple of the combining weight known as
** molecular weight."
Define " chemical individual," and indicate what
peculiarities belong to such substances not possessed,
in general, by others.
Define '' mixture " and give reasons for excluding
so-called ** mixtures " of gases from this category.
Wlni\»tvnitv of Sovonlo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A
CLASSICS.
HONORS.
^"-"••{^"^szrs"-^
ARISTOTLE AND QUINTILIAN.
1. Translate:
(ct) To fih otv iiria-KOTrelv cl &p e^^et ffh-q fj rpar/c^hia
TO J? ftSea&i/ ucavm fj 08, abro re KaS" avro Kpiverai
tl \yoX\ real 7rpo9 ra diarpoj oKXa^ X6709. yevo/jbivrj
S* ovv air hpxn^ ai/Toa')(€Sia(rTCKi], xal avrf) fcai f}
KtafitpSia, Kal 1} fjbiv u'rrb rS)v i^apyovrmv top hidv-
pafifiovt 7} Se airo r(ov ra i^XKuca h ert xai vvv
ev rroWaX^ r&v iroXetou hiafikvei vofjii^Ofieva, icark
fjiiicpov rjv^i]0rj irpoayovrayv o<tov iylyvcro <f>av€pbv
avrrj^, /cal TroXXa? fiera^oKcL^ fjL€Tal3a\ov<ra 17 rpa-
y€f£La enavaarOf irrel €a)(€ rf)v avrrj<; <f>vacp,
(b) Aei Si T0U9 fivdov^ avvKTrdvai Kal t§ Xe^ei avva-
ireprfa^ecdai irv fjAXurra irpb o/Mfidrtop ride/jLCVov
ovrw yi,p hv ivapyecrara [6] opSiv Aairep trap*
avroU yi/fPOfAeifo^ rok rrparrofikvoi^ evpiaxoi ro
irpirrov Kal ffKiara &v Xavdavoi [to] ra inrevavria.
arjfieiov Be rovrov h iwerifiaro K.apKLV(p' 6 yap
*Afi<l>idpao^ ef Icpov avrju, h fir) op&ura \rov Oearrjv]
€\dv0av€v, irri Be t^9 aKrjvr)^ e^errea-ev Sva'^^epavdv-
rtov rovro r&v dearS>v,
2. Translate :
(a) lUud virtutis indicium est, f undere quae natura
contracta sunt, augere parva, varietatem simili-
bus, voloptatem expositis dare et bene dicere
multa de paucis. In hoc optime facient infinitae
quaestiones, quas vocari tne^is diximus, quibus
Cicero i^^m princeps in re publics exerceri solebat.
his confinis est destructio et confirmatio senten-
tiarum. nam cum sit sententia decretum quoddam
atque praeceptum, quod de re, idem de iudicio rei
quaeri potest, ium loci communes, quos etiam
scriptos ab oratoribus scimus.
(b) Est igitur usus quidam inrationalis, quam Graeci
aXoyov rpv^riv vocant, qua manus in scribendo
decurrit, qua oculi totos simul in lectione versus
flexusque eorum et transitus intuentur et ante
sequentia vident quam priora dixerunt. quo
constant miracula ilia in scaenis pilariorum ac
ventilatorum, ut ea quae emiserint ultro venire in
manus credas et qua iubentur decurrere. sed hie
usus ita proderit, si ea de qua locuti sumus ars
antecesserit, ut ipsum illud, quod in se rationem
non habet, in ratione versetur.
3. Comment on, or explain, without translating :
(a) KAi; dpa avfji^fj yevofieva woieiv, ovOev firrov
TToiijTij^ ioTf TOfv ycLp jcvofjiivoDv evta^ ovSh/ /ccaiKvei
TO Laura elvav ota &v el/co^; yeviadai teat Biwara yeve-
adav, KaO^ h exeipo^ avr&v ttoitjti^ iariv.
(b) ^H yctp Tpar/^Sia fjuifjutfci^ iariv ovk avdpdiyirtov
a>sXa irpa^eta^ xal ffiov /cal evSacfiovia^ xal KaxoSai-
fiovia^,
(o) Superest adhuc et exomat aetatis nostrae glo-
riam vir saeculorum memoria dignus, qui olim
nominabitur, nunc intelligitur. Eiabet amatores
nee immerito Cremuti libertas, quamquam cir-
cumcisis quae dixisse ei nocuerat.
[Write on f<mr of the following qnestions.]
4. To what extent ha^ the drama in Shakespeare s
hands made advances upon the theory of Aristotle that
may be considered permanent ?
5. How far does Aristotle furnish an explanation
of the essence of dramatic pleasure ?
6. The influence of Plato upon the theory of the
Poetics either in the way of suggestion or of opposi-
tion.
7. "I understand why the ancients called Euripides
the most tragic of their dramatists; he evidently
embraces ^within the scope of the tragic poet many
passions, ^love, eonjugal affection, jealousy, and so on,
which Sophocles ^eems to have considered as incon-
gmous iBvitli the ideal statuesqueness of the tragic
drama." Elxatinine this statement of Coleridge's.
8. The real value of Quintilian's literary criticism.
9. The plan of Quintilian's book.
10. *' Aristotle demanded from art that it should
have a moral influence on people {KadapaLs:)'*
— Tolstoi.
11. To ivhom do the following criticisms refer ?
(a) Plus habitura gratiae si intra versus trimetros
stetisset.
(6) Inter victrices hederam tibi serpere laurus.
(c) llle concitatis hie remissis adfectibus melior,
ille contionibus hie sermonibus, ille vi hie volup-
tate.
{d) Subtilis atque elegans et quo nihil, si oratori
satis sit docere, quaeras perf ectius ; nihil enim est
inane, nihil arcessitum, puro tamen fonti quam
largo flumini proprior.
«tiftiet0fts ot Sorotiio.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GREEK.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. C. Robertson, B.A.
I.
ARISTOTLE, POLITICS, II.
1. Translate-
'Ert hk Sixaiov fitf fwvov Xeyeiv oatov <rr€p7]aovTat
Kascoiv Koivtovija'avTe^, aXKit xai o<r<ov ar/aO&v
ffHiiverai K elvat nrafiirav aBvvarty; 6 ^io^. alriov
he TiJ! '%<oKpdT€i T^ 7rapaKpov<r€a}^ XPV vofjLi^eiv rtfv
viroBeaiv ovk oiaav opurfv, hel fiev yhp elvai ttco^
/Aiav /cal TfjjV oiKiav Kot rrjv ttoXcv, a\X oif 7rarrcD9.
loTi fjL€v yap m ovk larat irpolova-a 7r6\*9, eoTt S*
<»9 earai fikv, iyyif^ 8' oiaa tov firj ttoX*? etvdi
'XjeCpcov TToXi?, &(nrep k&v el rt? rifv cvfi^vlav
TTovfyreiev Ofio^^oivlav fj tov pudfiov ffdaiv fiiav* aXXii
Sei TrXfjOof; Sv, onnrep etprjrai trporepov, StA rifv frcu-
Seiav Kowrjv icaX fjLtav iroielv Ktd tov ye fiiXXovra
TTcuSelav eiadyeiv, xaX vofjil^ovTu 8t^ ravrrj^ iaeadai
rfjv TToXiv airovBaiav, utottov to*9 Totovroi^ olecOai
hiopdovv, oKXk fjLtf Tot9 edeai Kal t^ <l>iXoao<l>iif Kal
Tofe vofici^, &<TTrep tA irepl ri? ^Tijcxet^ ev AaKehal-
fiovi Kol Kpi^Tff rots (Tvaairiois 6 vofioOeTtjs itcoi-
vwaev.
2. (a) So-Q)!/ drfoB&v. Briefly enumerate.
(&) ^099... aXX^ oxf 7rain-a>9. In what sense does
Aristotle object to '' unity " in a state, and in what
senses does he approve of it ?
(c) aXXa fifj Tok edeai nai r^ ^iKoao^Ua teal roU
pofjLoi^. What is the meaning of these terms, and to
what extent is the criticism valid ?
0
3. Translate:
^aiverai hi oh Karct rr)p ^S^oXmpo^ yeviadat,
TovTO 7rpoaip€<nv, aWA fiSXKov cltto avfiirrifAartK
(tt;? vavapyla^ yctp iv T0t9 Mrjhucoi^ 6 Svjfio^ eurio^
yevofievo^ iif>poirrjfiaTLa07f koI Stj/iwyajyois ikafie
<^ai;\ov9 avii/rroKirevofievtov rwv CTneucAv), eirel
So\q>i/ ye ioLKe iijv avayKaiordrfjv anro&iZovtu rJ
Bi^fjup Svvafiiv^ TO ra^ OLpyas aipeiadcu KaX €V0W€W
{firjBc yhp TOVTOV Kvpio^ a>v 6 orjfu)^ SovKo^ &p eiri
/cat iroT^fHo^), t^9 S' apx^'^ ^^ '''^v yvtopipxev teal
tS)V einropaw KariaTijae Trdaas.
4. What was Aristotle's opinion of the respective
merits of the Solonian constitution and the Athenian
democracy of his own day ?
5. Without translating, explain the following state-
ments and state the connection in which each occurs :
(a) 'Eo-cifoi/To jj,iv woXefjuovvTe^f hTrwXKwTO Si
ap^avT€<:,
(6) "MaXXov yap Bei ra^ iwtOvfiw ofiaXl^eiP fj Ta<;
(c) ^Airopovo'i yap rtvef; Trorepov ^Xafiepop fj
<rv/j,<l>€pop TO?? TrdkecL to KLpeip rov^ irarpioxn po/iov^, av
fl TC<; a\Xo9 /3€\tuop,
(d) IRovXerai fiep ycip SfjfAOfcpari/cop elvai to Kara-
aK€va<r/ia t&p av(raiTiwv, yiperai S* TjKiara BfffWKpaTUCOv
ovra> p€PO/jLodeT7jfiivop.
II.
HISTORY.
Note. — Candidates wiU take questions 4 and 6 and any one of the
remaining three.
1. Explain how democracy as understood by the
Greeks differed from modern democracy. What effect
had democratic institutions upon the place the Athen-
ians'occupy in the history of civilization ?
2. Contrast the conceptions of history entertained bv
Herodotus and Thucydides. In what respects is each
different from the modem historian ?
3. '* The contrast [between heroic and historical
Greece] is similar, and the transition equally remark-
able, in the civil as in the military picture/' Explain
this statement of Qrote's and show what elements gave
continuity to the transition in the civic sphere.
4. Grecian myths :
(a) Their leading characteristics ;
(6) Their place and importance in the national
life;
(c) The changes in the attitude of the Greeks of
the historical period toward their myths.
5. Without translating, give the speaker and the
connection of the following : —
(a) Eu&ffare dearaX fiiv r&p \6ywp ylr/ve<T0aty
aKpoaral Be r&v epywv*
(6) "ilaTe et Tt9 aifTois ^vpeXmv <l>aiff Tretfyv/civaL
eiri ToJ fiiJT€ avToif^ hc^iv fia\r)(lav firire rov^ aWot/9
hvOpanrov^ iav, opdA^ av eXirov,
(c) '0/3a9 8^ c!>9 €9 oiKrjfiara rh fieyiara aUl koI
tevhpea ra roiaxna dTroaKrjiTTec 6 Oeb^ ra I3i\€a.
(d) Ovfc eoTip fifilv rafiteveadat i^ oaov ffovKofieda
apx^iv.
(e) *E^aeipaq yap fie v^ov koX rr}v TrdrprfP xal to
ipyovy 69 TO firjBev Kare^dKe^ irapaivecov vetcpi} Xv/uzi-
V€a0a$.
(/) Kal Oeov^ Svo a')(pri<Trov^ ov/c iKKehreiv a<l>€<uv
TT^v vfjaoPf aXX' aUi <l>i\oj(ci}pe€iP, Tlepitfp re Kal 'A/tiy;^-
apCrjp,
(g) *H9 [«/>X^] ^^^* eKo-rfjpat en v/mp earip, el
T*9 icaX ToSe €P T«f irapoPTi SeSvo)^ dirpayfioavpri apBpa-
yaOlfyrai,
(Ji) Kal afia tom if>vaei^ einardixepo^ vfi&p, fiovko-
/MepcDP fjL€P rd ffStara hKoveip, alriao/jLeptop Be varepop,
rjp Ti vfiLP iItt* avT&p pA} Ofioiop eK^fi, da^cCKecrepop
ffyrfadfiffv to XKrjdiq Srjk&aai.
[over.]
III.
HISTORY OP GREEK PHILOSOPHY.
NoTB— -Candidates will write on three qnestionB only.
1. Give the characteristics of the three chief divi-
sions of Greek Philosophy, and point out how each in
its origin was influenced by the political or social con-
ditions of the times.
2. " Parmenides is the chief forerunner of Platonic
idealism, without, however, being a spiritualist in the
modern sense." Explain and justify each part of this
statement.
3. *' Men hinder [Protagoras] from seeing man. It
is this cardinal error in his philosophy which is recti-
fied by Socrates/' Explain, and show the importance
of this for philosophy.
4. " The Utopian system of politics which sacrifices
nature to an abstract principle, asceticism, monachism,
the horror of matter which we find among the Neo-
Platonists, all these elements are the logical conse-
quences of a conception which makes the Idea a
reality." Trace clearly the connection. To what
extent do these elements show themselves in Plato's
Republic ?
5. To what extent may the differences betweea
Plato and Aristotle be accounted for by the consider-
ation (i) that the one was a reformer, the other an
investigator; (ii) that the one was a mathematician,
the other a biologist ?
6. Show how Aristotle by his conception of matter,
not as fi^ 8v or absolute privation, but as fii^ irm Sv or
potential being, hopes to escape the error into which he
holds Plato fell. Show further how fundamental this
conception is in his ethical and political philofiophy.
nnftierfifts of Sorotito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GREEK.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. C. Robertson, B.A.
PLATO, EEPUBLIC— ARISTOTLE, ETHICS.
NoTK — Candidates will write on any two only of the first four ques-
tions. All the Greek passages are to be translated.
1. Show the general bearing of the allegory of the
Cave and its place in the development of th^ argument
of the Republic.
2. Trace the growth of Plato's portrayal of ideal
human nature from the " City of Pigs " of Bk. II. to
the picture of the ideal philosopher in Bk. VII.
3. Show clearly the connection between Plato's
fundamental doctrine t^ avrov irpdrreiv and the objec-
tions raised in Bk. III. to the drama, to the innovations
in the medical practice of his day, and to the posses-
sion of property by the guardians ; and in Bk. VIII.
to the Athenian democracy.
4. Explain why Plato, in the Republic, should hope
to solve the problem of reconciling the interests of the
individual and the good of the community by insisting
on the partibility of the soul and the unity of the
state.
5. T^ a ^Tifiia^ fieyia'^t) to vtto irovqporepov apyecr-
6aiy iav fJkf) avro^ iOiXy ap')(€iv' fjv BeiaapTif: fjLoi <f>aipoirrac
ap^eti/, orav ap'xyxnv, ol i'rrt€tK€2<i, teal t6t€ ep^ovrai iiri
TO ap'xfiLV, ov\ C&9 err' arfaOov ri lovre^ ou8* m €inradr\-
aoin€^ iv airoJ, aW* a>9 ^'rr* avayKatov xal ovk expvr^^
kavr&v peKrioaiv iirtTpk^aL ovSe Ofioloi^,
To what extent is genuine self-sacrifice for others
a characteristic of Plato's ideal rulers?
6. OifKovz vurffa, fjv 8* eyci, on oi /Sat^ew? hireiBav
ffov\r)0&ai fidyftai epia Shtt elvat, aXovpyd, irpSirov fuv
eKXeyovrai ix roaourtov '^^tofuiTODv fJkiav <f>v(nv ri)v r&v
Xeutcw, erretra 'Trpoirapao-tcevd^ovaip ovk oKiyff irapa-
(TKfzvfi de^airevarapTc^t ottco? Si^erac o rt fjLoKiara to
avdo^, tcai ovTto St} Bdirrovcri* /cat b fxiv &p rovTq> rt^f
TpoTTip ffcKJ)^^ ZevaoTToiov yiyi/erai to ffa^v, xai 17 ttXi/o-k
oijT ap€v pvfifMaTtop ovre fiera pv/MfJuiTfap Svparat avr&v
TO ap0o<: d(f>aip€la-0aL' & S' itp /itij, olaOa ola Stj yiyirerai,
idp ri Ti9 aWa )^€OfjMTa fidTnr} idp re Kai raura fifj
irpoOepairevaa^,
What are the two important points in the appli-
cation of this figui*e ?
7. * Apdpwiroi^ yhp ffAck Koi iraiBevOelaip ck ^/^w
Si'qXdofiep^ /car ifir}p So^ap ovk iarr aXKri opdri iraiBnv
T6 KoX ywatK&p KTrjak re koI ^(peia ^ Kar iKeiptfP rijp op-
fir)p loviT^p, fjprrep rb rrpSnop d)pfj>i]aafi€P' eirej^€t/5);<ra/*ei/
Be rrov co? dyeKii^ ^vKaKa^ rov% apBpaf KaOiardpat Tip
Xoyip* Nai. *AKo\ov0iifi€P roipvp Kal rtfp yipeaiv koX
rpo^fjp rraparrXrialap hiroBiSopre^, Kai axovAfiep, el tjfjup
rrpkirei, ff oO.
, To what extent does Plato's argument fur the
similar education of men and women depend on the
analogy of animals ?
8. Ovro) roipvp kcu to t^v '^I'X^? ^Be poei' orav fih^f
oi KaTaXdfjLirei aXrjdevd re Kai ro Sp, ek rovro airepeiffff-
rac, ivorjo-e re Kal eypw airro Kal povv e^^ip <l>aip€rai'
orop Be €iv TO Tou aKortp KeKpafiepopj ro yvypofiepop re koX
inroWvfiepop, Bo^d^ei re Kal dfijSXvolyrrei, apto koX Karw
ra<s Bo^a^ fiera^dWop Kai eoiKCP ai povp ovk I^oiti.
"Eot^ce ydp. Tovro roipvp ro rrjp d\i]d€iap rrapeyop tow
yiyptoaKopbipoi^ Kai rt^ yiypcoaKOpri rfjp Bvpafup diroBiBov
ri)p rov dr/aOov IBeap <f>ddL elpat.
Explain clearly (a) how iiriarijfirj and Bo^a can
be said to deal with quite different subject-matters,
and (6) what Plato means bv the iBia rov ciyadov
imparting dXtjdeia,
9. TouTO fiiv Sif ovK Av ettf h ^ijrovfiev fjLaffrjfia* Ov
yap* 'AXX* ipa /Aoi/o-MCff, S(rr}v to rrpirepov Siij\0ofJL€v ;
*A\X* fjp itcelvT) y\ e<fnj, avrlarpo^o^ T179 yvfivaa-Tticfj^, el
fAe^unjacu^ eOeo't ircuSevovaa rov^ (f>v\aKa^, Kara re
apfxoviav evapiJUXTTiav ripd, ov/c i'Triarijfirjv, 'irapaSiSowa,
Kat Kara pvdfwp evpvOfiiav, ep re toI^ \070t9 ercpa rov-
TC01/ dBeX^, €(f>r), arra eyfova'a, xat oaot fivOwSei*: r&v
Xoyo9v Kal oaoi dXijOivanepot ^aav /JuiOrjfia Be 7rpo9
tocoOtoi' ri dyaOov, otov av vvv ^^rfreU, odSiv fjv ev avT^,
Why is the trainiDg in Movo-uctf and Tufivaarucrj
(a) inadequate, yet (b) indispensable, for the philoso-
pher-king s education ?
10. Ov fAOvov ffnnol^ iyyeioi^, a\\a Kal ev hrtyeioi^
^CMM9 ifiopct Kot a(f>opia ^^v^ftj^ re xal atoadrtov yiyvovrat,
orrav irepirpfyiral hcaaTOi^ kvicSmp 7repi<l>opd^ ^vvaTrraxri,
fipayyfiioi^ flip ^payvTropov^, ipapriot^ Se hpaprlw;*
yivcv^ Si vfAcripov evyopia^ re teal d<f>opla^ icaiirep opre^
ao^L, o(k i77€/Aova9 iroKew^ ir/raiZewTCurde, ovSep fiaWop
\oyurfjb£ fjL€T atadrjaem^ revfoprai, hXKii irdpe^nv avroi^
Mu yevpriaovai iraihds Trore ov Seop,
What does Plato really regard as the ultimate
cause of decay in his best constitution ? Connect this
view with his general philosophy.
11. iSiap Brf Toipvp TrKdrre aWr^p IBeap Xeopro^y fiicaf
Sc apdpwTTov' iroXif hi fieyoTTOP earfo to irpoiTOP Kal
Bevrepov to Bevrepop. Tavra, e<fyr}, p(f,<o' icai irkirKaGTcu.
Xvpairre Toivvp avTct eh h/ Tpla fora, &aTe tttj ^vfjLire-
^VK€P€U dXXi/XoiV. Si/in/TTTai, i<f>rf* TleplirXaiTop Bt)
avTok €^o}0€P epo^ eixopa, Ttfp tov hpdpwrrov, ScTe Tt^
pil BvpafjL€pq> T^ epTO^ opap, dXKd to I^o) oopop eXvTpop
opApTi, ip ^S^op ifiaipeauai.
What is the other of the three components ?
How does Plato apply his figure ? to, €pto^ opap.
Show how this typifies the method Plato adopts for
solvincr the problem presented by Glaucon and Adei-
mantus in Bk. II.
12. Aolfxep Be ye irov &p Kai Toi<: Trpoo-Taratv avTrj^,
ocot fjLj) TToiffTucoi, <f>i\o7roi7iTai Be, dpev fiCTpov \6yop
mrep avTTj^ elrrelv, a>9 ov fiopov f)Bela oKKa Kal axfyeXifiT)
I TTpo^ Ta? iroXirela^ Kal top ffiop top dpdpdympop iaTi'
\ [over]
KoX €Vfi€vm cLKOVirofieda, xepBavovfiev yap irov, iav fjoj
fiovov fihela 4^v^ oKKh ical a}(f>€Kifii]» II&v S* ov fiik-
Xofiev, €<f)7f, Kephaiveiv ;
How far was Plato's attitude of suspicion towards
poetry and the drama due to logic, and how far to
unsympathetic austerity ? Were any other causes at
work ?
18. Ov ypV ^^ /caret rois iraofuvovvra^ avOpinrtva
<f>pop€lv avupKOirov Svra ovSk Ovrfra tou Ovtitov^ bCSX &l>
oaov ipSi')(iSTai adavarL^eiv xal irdvra iroietv irpo^ to ^v
Kara to KpaTiarov t&v iv avrw* el yhp Kal rat Syx^
fML/cpov iari, Bwdfiet, teal Ti/jLi6Tr)Ti iroXif fiaXXjov 'irdvrcav
inr€pe)(€i' So^eie 8' &v ical elpcu Skooto^ toOto, dvep ro
Kvpiov Kal apLeivov, aroirov oiv yivoi/r &/, el (ATf top
avrov Plov aipoiro akXd rivo^ aXXov, to \e)(0h re
irporepov dpfioaet, teat vvv* to ydp oucelop hcdarw t$
<f)va€i KpaTiarov koX fjSuTTOV iartv eKooTtp' xai tw
apOpwrnp Sr) 6 Kard vovp ^Lo^t ehrep rovro fjMkuna
apOpmiro^, oJnof; apa teat evSai/jbOpearaTo^.
Point out the degree of correspondence between
this passage and Plato's conclusions in the Republic.
2lnttirrf9ifts of iiroronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GHEEK.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. Colling, B.A.
THUCYDIDES AND HERODOTUS.
Translate care fully :
1 'A\X' ov7€ 7rpo9 roif^ dWov^ ovt€ €? 17/ia? roioiBe
eta-tv, airoiKoi 8' oi'Te9 h<f>c<TTaai re htd iravr6<% Koi
pvv 'rro\€fjbov<Tiy XeyovTc*; w ovk iirt rrZ KatcSi<; irda-
^€iv €ic'rr€fi(l>de{rfo'av, 7ffjL€i<: Be ovS* avToi (hcLfieu eir)
t£ xnro roimuv vfipi^eaOai KaroiKiaai, aXX' hrt ru>
ffycfjMpe^ r€ elvat /cat tA eUoTd Oav/jid^eadai, at
fovv aXXai atroiKiai Ttfiaxriv t)fid^ Kai fioKicra viro
airoiKtav arepyofieOa' Kai BPfXou on, el toU irXeoaiv
ape<TKavr€s iafiev, toutS* &v ^jlovoi^ ovk opOw orrap-
eatcotfjuev, ovS' ewurrpaTevo/Mev iKTrpetrto^ firj xat
Sicut>€povr(o^ T£ dhiKovfievoL, Ka\ov 8* ffv, el KaX
tffiaprdvofiev, Toi<T8e fiev el^ai rfj t) ^eripa opyfj, rffilv
8' ala^pop fiid(ra<r0ai rrjv rovitav fMerpiorvfTa,
(a) Who are the speakers ? Who are the
audience ?
(6) Discuss briefly tiie relation of Greek colonies
to their parent states.
2. ^iXoKaXovfieif yap fier evreXeia^ Ka\ (f)LXo(To<f>ov-
M€P avev /jLaXaxia^, irXovKp re epyov fwXXov xatpi^
fj Xoyov KOfjLTT^ -^pdofieda, Kai to ireveaOai, ovx
opLoXoytlv Tiul ala')(p6v, dX\a fir) Bw(f)eir/€LV epytp
oXfT^iov, evL T€ Totv avToi<; olKeicjv a/ia koi TroXtre-
icmv iirifJLeXeia, Kai erepa irpo^ epya TeTpap.p.evoi^
ra iroXtTLKa /Mtf ivBeat^ yv&var fiovoi yap toi^ t€
fjLfjBei/ Tcii/Se fi€Ti)(pvTa ov/c airpdyuopa aXX a')^p€iov
vofii^ofjLcv, Kai avTol tjtoi tcpivofiev ye rj ivOvfiovfieda
6p0a><i ra irpayiMara, ov rov^ X070W toJ? epyoi^
ffKd^rfv ffyovfjievoiy aXKa fjLT) irpo&Lha^Orjvai fiaXKov
\6y^ trporepov fj iirl h iei epytp ikOelv. 8ia<f>€p6vTm
yap Sff Kal roSe €^ofj,€P ware roKfJbav re oi airrol
fid\i<TTa Kal irepX &i/ iirt'yeLp'qaofiei/ eKXoyt^eaffai*
h T0?9 a Wot? hfiaOia piv dpdao<;, \oy(<Tfib^ Se okvov
(pipet. tcpdrtaTOi S' &p Tr)v '^^vyr^v ScKaico^ Kptffelep
oi rd re Beiva xal iJSea <Ta(f>€<TTaTa yvyudxTtcovre^
Kal Biol ravra fit) hTrorperroixevoi €k tojv laviifif^v,
K€Li TcL €9 hp€Ti)v ffvavTuofieda T0J9 ttoKKjoW ov yap
ird<T')(ovTe^ ei aXKh Bp&vre^ KTWfJLeda Toif^ <f>i\ov^.
jSejSaiOTepo^ Be 6 Bpdaa<; rrfv ^apfri' &<rT€ 6^t\ofi€vriv
Bi* evvoia^ (^ BeBtoxe a^^eiv. 6 K dvro^t^v
hfJL^Xvrepo^, elSoD^ ovtc €9 X^P^^ aXX' 69 wf^eikqfM
T^i/ dpertfv diroBcoaayv, xat /mopov ov rov ^vfifl>epovTO^
fiaXKop Xoyia-fuf 'fj rrj^ i\jevdepia^ rci Trum^ o&i?
ripa d><f>e\ovfi€P.
(a) Can you quote from any contemporary crit-
icism of democmcy ?
3. Kai eSo^e /jmWop, Bi^nri ep to*9 Trpwrrj iyevero,
hrel varepop ye Kal ttSlv^ C09 eiireip rb 'EXXiywcoy
eKiprfOf}^ Buiff>opSiP oviT&p eKaaraj(pv rol^ re tAv
BiifK»p irpoardrai^ tou9 ^AOijpaiov^ eTrdyeadtu km
To29 oXiyoi^ T0V9 AaxeBaifiopiov^, Koi bf fjt^ep elprfini
ohK tip e'xpprtop TrpotfHUTip ovB' erolfuop rrapaKokuv
avrov^, iroXeiiovfiipfOP Be Kai ^vfjLp^i'xia^ ana
CKarepoi,^ ry r&p epaurlmp KaKdnrei koI a^ufw
axrro'k ix rov avrov 7rpo(nro&i^a'ei pa&uo^ ai eirayf^tu
rols pemrepi^etp ri fiovXofiipoi^ etroplfypro. koi
iirhretre iroWa Koi^aXeira Karh ardaip Ta*9 rrok&ri,
ypypofiepa fjiip xal del iao/jLeva, 60)9 Ap 17 airrtf ^fvci^
dpOpayircop ^, fiaXXop Be Kal fi<Tvyairepa Kal tok
elBe<n BirfWa^fjuipa d)^ &p ?Kaara4 al fierafiolKiu
tS}p ^vpru)(i&p €(f)iarS>prai. iv fihf yhp elprjpri ma
d/yadoK irpdyfiaaip al re froXei^ Kai ol IBunoi
dfieipov^ 7^9 yp(Ofia<; exova Bih ro /atj ^9 oKovaiois
opdr/Ka^ rrimreiP' 0 Be iroXefiu^ v<f>e\a>p ri}p einropi-
ap rov KaO* r/aepap ^iavo<i BiBdaKoKo^ Kol irpb^ ra
rrapopra rd^ opyd^ r&p rroXKSiP ofiouiL iaraffia^
re otw rb. rw woXetop Kal rh i^varepO^oprd irw
irvarei r&p rrpoyepopMptop rroXv hri<f>€pe rr^p inrep-
ISoX^p rov Kaipovadai rd^ Buipola^ r&p r €7r*j^€ip»/-
a€tap irepiTexyrjcrei teal t&v TifjLtopi&v aroiria, Ka\
Tffv euoBvlav a^iwaiv t«i/ ovofmrtov €? tu epya
airrijXXaf ai/ rij BiKauoaei, roK/xa fikp yap aXoyiaro^
avipela (l>iKiTaipo^ ei/ofiicOrj, fjL€\\rj<Ti<! Si irpojuijfirj^;
0€i\ia €if7rp€*mjs, to Bi aa><f>pov rov avdpSpov irpoa-
XVH^n *^* TO 7rp6^ airav ^vverov iir\ irav apyov, to
8' ifiirKriKTto^ o^v avBp6<i fiotpa irpoaerkdi^y aa<f>a-
\eia Be to hn^ovXevaaaOaiy diroTpoTrris Trpoffyaai^
eiJXcKyo?. KoX 6 fjL€v xaXeTtaLvwv iriaTO^ aei^ 6 B*
hvTiXeytop auTif {(ttottto?.
(4) Upb^ oiv oLTa^iav t€ Toiavrrjv xat TV-^rfv di/BpMv
€avTr)v irapaBeBwKviav TroXeuicoTdTcop opyfi irpoa-
fU^<afjL€v, Kal vofjLiaa>fM€v u/jlu fiev vofju/jLWTaTOv elvai
irpo^ T0V9 ivavTiov^, ot &p w cttI Tifitopia tov
irpoaireaovTo^ Bi/caida oxnv dwoTrKrjo'ai, t^<? yv(t)fi7f<;
TO Ov^ovfievov, ifia S' i^^Opov^ dfivvaa-Oai eyyevrjcro-
iA€vop r}p,lp Kal TO \ey6fi6P0P ttou ffBicTOP elpai. ay;
5' ixdpoi Kal evOiiTToi, 7raj/T€9 tcTCy oX y hrX tt)P
flpLeripap ffkOop oovXtoaofiepo^ ip t^, el KaTwpffaxrap^
dpBpdai pAp &p Ta7</)fUTra wpoaeOeaap, iraial Be Kal
yifpcu^l Ta nTrperriaraTa, ttoXci Be tt) iraar) ttjp
aiir)(iaTqp eTrucXTfau/, ap0* &p p,rf /jLa\aKi<T0rjpai
TLPa Trpeirei, fjLtjBe to dKipBvpo)^ (hreXOelp avToif^
xipBo^ pofiiaai, tovto fiAv yap Kal iap KpaTi]a<o<TLP
Ofiolto^ BpdaoiHTiv TO Be irpa^dpTtop €k tov eiKOTo^
h l3ov\6fi€6a TovaBe re KoXaaSrjpai Kai ry Trdcq
XiKeXia KapTTovfiepff Kal Trpip ekevdepiap iSelSacoTe-
pap TrapaBovpai, #ca\o9 o dywp. Kal kipBvpwp ovtoi
orraPKOTaTOL, ot ap, ikdy^io'Ta €k tov cr<f>a\rjpaL
ffKaTTTOPTe^ TrXeuTTa Scii, to evTv^crai axfyeXaxriP,
(a) Comment on syntax of pop,ip,(oTaTOP, iyyepr)-
cop^pop, irpa^dpTCDP, to KoXaaOrjpai,
5. 01 Be fidp^apoi^ w^ iwavaaTo tc 6 avepLO^ Ka\ to
Kvfia ecTprnTo, KaTa(nrd4rapT€Q ra? pia^ eTrXeop iraph
Tffp fjireipop. Kd/AyltaPT€^ Be ttjp aKpnjp ttj^ Mayptf-
aw79 Ideap iTrXeop €? top koXttop top hrl Ylarfoa-eoiP
<f>€poPTa, ecTi Bi "^{opo^ ip toS KoXTrtp Tointp ttj^
MarfPTjairy:, epOa Xeyerai top ^HpaKXea KaToXei-
if>0rjpai inrb 'liycroi/o? re Kal tow/ crvpeTaipwp eK tyj*;
*Apyov^ en iBtop Trep,if>depTa, evT eirl to K&a^
hrXjeop €9 Alap tijp KoX^iBa, epBexrrep yap ep.eXXov
vBpeva-dp^epoL €9 to TreXayofi d<f>'qa'etp. hrl tovtov Be
Toj^ytoptp ovpop^a yeyope ^A<f>€Tai, ip TOVTtp (op opp»op
oi s^p^eta iiroievpTo, TLepreKaiBeKa Be r&v peeap
rovTetap Jhvyop t€ vaTaTai ttoKKjop i^apa^Oelaai,
tcai tca)<; Karelhov ra^ eV ' A.pT€fit(riq> twv 'EXX^ji/on^
vea^, eBo^dv re 87 Ta<; a^erep:'.^ elvai 01 ffdpfiapo^.
Kal Tr\€ovT€^ erreaoif ev tow TroW^fiioin' roii/ e<rrpa-
Tijyee 6 airo Kii/Ltiy? t^v AloXiSo^ {jnap^o^ ^avhooxtf^
6 Safjui<riov, rov hrf irporcpov tovtoov ffaaiXjeis
^apclo^ hr airir} ToifjBe XafiitVy avearauptoo'e, iotrra
r&v ^aaCKyftwv SiKaaricop, 6 ^avhdfCTjf: errl XP^
fiaat c&vKov Blktjp iBi/ca^re, avaKpcfiaadevTO^ a>p
avTov \oyL^6fi€vo^ 6 Aapeto? evpi ol irXid) hyaSa
tSjv afiapTr)fMdTa>v TrerrotTf/jiepa €9 oltcov rbv 0aa'i-
Xrflop* evpoDP Sc tovto 6 Aap€lo<s teat yuoif^;, w
Tayvrepa avro^ fj ao^repa ipyaafiiuo^ eltf, eXvae.
ffaaiXea fj^cv Brf Aapelou ovtco BLa(f>vya)Vt fir) airoXe-
aOai, rrepiTjv, t6t€ Be e? rov^"KXX'Pfpa<; KaTairXaxraf;
e/jueXXe ov to Bevrepov Bia(f}vyo)v eaeadai.
6. 'O /JL€V ravrd <nf>b a'r)p,rjpa^ eKiroBo^v diraXXda'
aero, rolai Be w irurra eyevero ret dyyeXOiirra^
TOUTO fi€V €9 rr)v vrjalBa rrjv "^vrrdXeiav, fxera^v
'%aXafjLiv6% re Kecfiemju nal t?7<? rfTreipov, iroXXov^
Twv IlepaitDv dmeBifiaa-av, rovro Se, iireiBi) iytvovro
(leaai vvKre^, hvrjyov fxev rb hir iaireprj^: icepa^
KVKXovfievoi Trpo? rtfv ^aXa/MPa, Ctinjyop Be oi dfjiif}l
Tffp Keop T€ Koi Tr}p Km/oa-ovpap Teray/jJpov, tcaTei-
')(op 7€ fJi€^pt Moupv^it)^ nrdpra top iropOfjiop rfja-t
pf)vai, T&pBe Be ea/eK€p dprjyop t^^? vea^, Xpa 877 rolck
'^E\X?;<TA i^riBe <f>vyelp €f§, dXV a'rro\aiJb<f>dhnes ev
rp ^aXafjLipi, BoUp riaip t&p hr * Apre/jLUriw hytoPt"
{TfldTOOP.
(a) Elxplain these three movements.
ainfbersits of SToroitto*
ANKUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GREEK.
HONORS.
Examiners • i ^' ^' f^ANGFOHD, B.A.
iLxammeia, ^ j Flktoher, M.A , LL.D.
I.
^SCHYLUS.
Translate :
(a) firj^a^ yivedXov, htofxaroDV ifjuav (f)v\a^,
airovaia fxev elTra? eucuTio^ ifijj'
fjLaKpav yap i^ereiva*;' dW* ivaiaifjita^
alvelv, 'Trap aXkaav ')(pr) toS* €p')(ecr6ai y€pa<;'
Kal ToXXa firj yvvuLKO*; iv rpoiroi^ ijii
affpvve fiffSi' iSap^dpov (fxoro^ SUrjv
ycLfjutLTTeri^ ^oafjLa 7rpoa)(dvr)<; ifwi^
firjB* eifjLaa-L arpcoaaa hri<\)6ovov iropov
Tidei' 0€ov<; Toi TolaSe rifj,a\(f>€lv y(p€<i>v'
iv TroLKtXoi^ Si OrfVTOP ovra KaWeartv
/3aiv€ip ifioi /M€p ovBafjL&<; av€V (f>6^ou.
\eyxo Kar avSpa, fitf deov, oSffeLv ifii,
yoapi^ Troho'^r)<TTp<ov re Kal r&v iroi/ciXayv
KXffScbv iiVTci* Kal to fiy KaK&<; <j>povelif
deov fjLeyiarov S&pov, oXSiaai Se ')(pr}
fiiov reXevTJja-avT* iv evearol <f>L\7},
el nrdvTa 8* 0)9 irpdaaoLij! av, eifOapcrrj^ iyco,
(b) KA. avyeh elvai rohe rovpyov ifiov,
/MTfO* emXexOfi^
' Ay a fie /jLVOviav elvai fi aXo-^ov.
if^avraipfievofi he yvvaiKi veKpov
TovS* 6 7raXat09 Spifiif^ aKdaroap
^Arpieo^ ')(a\€7rov OoivaTtjpof;
riXeou veapok emdia-a^,
XO. a>9 iM&f dpaLTio^ el
TovSe <f>6vov TtV o fiapTvprjfTtav ;
irS) TTcS ; irarpoOev Be cruWi;-
TTTODp yevoiT* &v dXooTflop.
0ui^€Tai S* ofjLoairopoc^
emppoaiaiv alfjudroov
fieXa^ "ApTf^ iiroi BUap trpofiaLvtav
TTwyvq Kovpo^opfp irape^ei*
1. Parse in (a) Trpoaxavry;, TifjM\<f)€ip and explain the
mood of irpdaaotfi •
2. What is Aeschylus' view on the question of a
family curse ?
3. Refer to instances in the Agamemnon of humor,
pathos, and appreciation of the beauty of nature.
4. oX^iaat Be. , . . evearol <l>l\rj. Where else in litera-
ture does this statement appear ? What is your opinion
of its truth ?
5. From your reading of the Agamem,non what con-
clusion do you draw as to the height of the stage ?
n.
[Write in a separate book. ]
THEOCRITUS, HOMER.
Translate :
(a) YO) /A€V TQGG eliTo^v cuireiTavaaTO' rov S* 'A<l>poBira
rjOeX! avopOSurar rd ye fidp \iva Trdvra XeXoiirfj
€K Motpap' ')(a> ^d(f>vi^ e/Sa poop* IxXvae Bipa
TOP M.OL<rai^ <f>i\op dpBpa, top oh Nvfji<f)auTtP direyOr^*
(6) eaaeTai *Ayedpa/cTi koKo^ ttXoo? ev MiTvXdpoVt
'X&Tap e<f> earrepioL^ €pL<f>0L<i poto^ vyph Buotcy
KVfiaTa, ')(&pmp Sr* ^tt* ^VLxeapi^ iroBa^ t^X^*i
aXK€P TOP AvKtBap oirTevfievop i^ ^A<f>poBlTa^
pva-rjTaL' depfw^ yap epoo^ ai/rA fie fcaTaiffei'
'X^akfcvope^ aTopetrevPTi tA KVfiaTay top t€ doKaaircaf,
(c) <TVP B* airr^ /caTel3aipep*^TXa^ eveBpop ev ^Apyd,
aT<9 Kvapeap oif^ ff^aTo {rvpBpofjLoBoDP path,
oKTiA Bie^dt^e^ fiaOvp B* eiaeBpa/jLe ^acip^
cifjLo^ S' aj/Te\Xoi/T< n6XeiaSe99 i(T')(aTui\ Se
apvcL viov fiocKovTt, TerpafifiivoD eiapo^ 't^Srj'
fjpaxov,
(d) otra-a r atro y\vfC€p& /jbiXiro^, rd t' iv vyp^ ikaUpy
'rrdirr airro! irereifvii xaX kptrera retSe irdpeaTi,
X^^poi 84 ffKuiSe^, flaXaxw fipidovre^ din]dq>,
oeSpuLvff' oi Bi re K&pot vTrepTrfoT&vrai, "EpcDxe?,
oloL drihovi^e^ ae^ofievtov erri BivBpaov
Trorrwvrcu Trrepvytnw ireiptofMevoi, S^ov air c(fa>.
(«) 'El/ 8' iriOei a'Ta<l>u\^<n fi&ya l3pidov<Tav dkiofiv
Ka\T)p '^vaeiTfv jjAXave^ S' dvb, fiorpve^ ^(rav,
€(mjK€i Se icdfia^i StapL'Trepe^ dpyvperjaiv.
dfAit>l Si Kvavirjp Kairerop, irepi S' Sp/co<: eXaairev
KatTcrvripov uia S' ohf drapTrtrb^ ^ev ctt' ainrfVy
rfi viaaovro (poprjef;, ore rpvyooiev d\mi]v,
rrapdeviKoi &^ koX rjWeot draXa <f>poviovr€^
rrXe/crdi^ iv raXdpoiai <f>€pov /MeXirfSia Kaprrov,
TOU71V S' ev fiiaaoiair rrdl<i {fyopfiiyyi Xiyeirj
ifxepoev KiBdpL^e, Xivov S' irrro KaXov aethev
XerrraXir] (fxovTJ' rol Be p'q<T<TOPre<; dfiapry
^oXirfj r IvyfjLip re rrocr\ (ncaipopr&i erropro.
(/) ^Cl^ (fya/jUpj) fjLeydpoio Siiaavro* fiatpdSt tarf,
TraXXofiepT) KpaSirjP' afia S' dfjL<l>l7roXoi klop avry.
avrdp i-rrel rrvpyop re kol dpBp&p Ifei/* ofiiXop,
€<Trr) TTonrripaa err\ rei')(el, rov K eporfcep
eXKofiepop irpoaOep TroXto?* ra^^c^ Be fitp Xmrot,
iXKop aKtiBearoD^ KoiXa^ irri ptfa^ ^AyaiUp.
rrjp Be Kar o<l>6aXfi&p epefieppt) pv^ e/cdXvylrep,
TjpiTre* B' i^oTriaci)^ drrb Bi yfrv^p eKdirv<T(rep,
rriXe S* drro Kparb^ fidXe Be<Tfiara <TpyaX6epra,
a/MirvKa tceKpv<f>aX6p re IBe 'irXe/crrfp dpaBearfirfp
KptjBe/iPop 0\ o pd ol B&tce ')(pvaer) ^ K<f>poBir7),
\ (ff) 'n? Se TTartfp oi iraiBo^ oBvperai oarea /caitop,
pvfufiicv, o^ re OapoDp BeiXov^i aKdyricre TO/c^a?,
^ ^X'XiXeifs erdpoio oBvpero oarea KaCeop,
iprrv^top rrapd irvpKalrjp, dBipd arepw^^i^oip,
^H/ir09 S* Ea}(T(f>6po^ eVri <^66>9 epetop i'lrl yaiap,
ov re fjLera KpoKOireirXo^ vrrelp aXa KiBparau ^a>9
rriiJio^ wvpKalr) ifiapaipero^ iravcraro Be (f)X6^»
oi B* dpefiot irdXip avri^ efiap ol/copBe peeaOat
Sprftfciop /card iroproi" 6 8' earepep otBfAari dv(op,
[OVBRJ
1. Scan the last line in (/), noting peculiarities.
Parse the words marked with an asterisk.
2. Characterise briefly the literature of the Alex-
andrine Era.
3. Classify the poems of Theocritus, briefly character-
ising each class.
4. What reasons are assigned for asserting a diflferent
authorship for the Iliad and Odyssey respectively ?
0. " Homer in the Iliad gives an exact picture of
his own age." Illustrate briefly (a) with regard to
political institutions, (6) with regard to moral and
social feeling.
anftoersfts of Sorotito«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A
CLASSICS.
HONORS.
(OPTIONAL WITH PmLOLOGY.)
Examiners : [ ?^^*^^*^ ^^^^'^^ ^^\
\ Adam Carruthers, M.A.
ARISTOTLE, POLITICS, I. and IIL
1. Translate and explain -
(a) '^Ocroi fiiv oiv olovrcu ttoXitv/cov koI ^acCKiKov
KoX oitcovofUKov Koi Beo'TTOTiicbv elvat rov avrov ov
KoKm Xeyovci.
(b) Kal TTOorepov Srj r^ t^vaei ttoXi^ fj oUia xai
exaaro^ tffiMV e/rrt.
(c) 'H flip yhp '^vxv fov cduaTO^ ^PX^^ S€<nroTueijv
(d) Toi^ fjutv euvoui SoKet to hUauxv elvat roi^ Se avro
Tovro Bljccuop ro rov tcpeirrova apj(€iv,
(e) Topyui^ flip oip 6 Aeoprtpo^ ret ti€P lam^ airop&p
rh tif €ip<oP€v6fM€P0^ i<f>7f Kcidairep oX/jlov^ elviu rov^
inro tUp 6\fio7roi&p weirotrffiipox^ ovrto Kal Aapia-
acUov^ Tov^ xnro t&p Srjfiiovfrf&p Treirovrffievov^. elpcu
yiip Tipa^ XapiaaoTTOiov^,
(/) "'Ot* flip oip ipSij(€Tcit voXinjp 6pra ffirovSalop
fiif K&CTTjadaL vifP kperrip Ka6^ fjp avrovSaio^ api)p^
if>apep6p.
(g) ''iUnrep iipSpo^ xat yvpaixo^ eripa a'a)<f>f}OiTvprj
Kai apSpeia.
(Ji) Kat o pofio^ avpOij/nj, tcaOdirep €<^ AvKo^ptop 6
ao^iOTrj^f iwvrjri)^ liXKi^XoK t&p BtKaUop hlOC ov)^
oto9 TTOieip ayaOoif^ Koi StKaiov^ tov9 *n'o7Ur(K»
2. Translate:
»
(a) TavTTfv fih oih/ rriv diropiap rd'yO' 86^€i€v tw tiv
ouTck) \v€Lv ucav&<i' aWf) 8* iarlv i')(0/JL€Vf) ravrrj^.
BoKcl ryap aroTTOv elvai to /jl€l^6p{ov elvat Kvpiov^
rov^ (fyavXov^ ra)v iineiic&v, ai K evffvvai xal ai
r&v ap-xjov alpecei^ elat /jueyuTTa' &? iv eviai^ iroKtr
reiav;, &CTrep etprjrai, T0i9 Bijfiois airohiZoaavv ^
f^ap itCKKfjcia KvpCa nrdvrwv t&p roiovraov iorlv.
Kairot T?)9 fi€v €Kic\rjaUi^ fieri'XpviTt /cal fiovKevovai
Kal BtKa^ovoLV dbiro p.LKp&v nfirnjbdrwv Kai rr^
TV^ovar)^ flKiKiaf;, rafuevovo'i Si xal arpwnjyovin
Kal ra% fjieyiara^ ^PX^^ &p\ov(nv airo fi€C^6v€^v.
ofjLoUo^ hrj T£9 tiv Xvaete Kal TavTrjv rtfv anopiav,
laoy; yiip lj^€t xal ravT 6p0ck» ob yap 6 Sucaxrrij^
ohS' 0 povXeuTTf^ oiS' 6 iKKXrja-ioaTif^ o^iav ^rriv,
dCKKk TO hiKo^rripvov KaX rj ffovXi) Kal 6 oijfio^' t&v
Bi jyqOevTfov eKo^rro^ fiopiov iart roxnfov (Xijto Sk
fiopiov Tov ^ovXetrrtfv Kai rov eKKXrjo'UiOTrjv Kal rov
SiKaoTijvy &<Tre hiKoUa^ Kvpiov fAei^oPtov to TrX^or
CK yctp TToXXoDv 6 Srjfjbo<; Kal fi /3ovXff Kal ro Sucaa-
rrjpiov. Kal ro ri/iiij/Ma Be vXetov to tovtwv iramtov
tj to t&v koO* eva Kal kot oXiyov^ fi€yaXa<; apx'^^
hp^ovTtov, ravra fihf oSv BtoopiaOo} tovtov tov
TpoTTov V Bi TTparrrj X£')(j9€iaa airopia Troiel <f>tiv€pbv
oifBkv otrro)? frepov a>9 in Bel tov9 vo/jmv^ elvai
KVpiov^ Keifievov^ opffwy tov apyovra Bi, op t€ eU
av T€ irXelov^ &ai, irepl oaa>v i^acvvaTOvo'tv ol vo/ioi
Xeyew OKpi^m But to fir) pqJBtov elvai KadoXov
BiopUrtu Trepl irdvTmv.
(6) Hp&Tov fjL€v oiv awopTJo'eiev av Tt? woTepov rj
^(prifiaTLiTTiKfl 7) avTtj Trj olKOvo/uKfj eoTLV ff p^po^
Ti tj inrijpeTLKi], Kal el inrffpeTuci), iroTepov m ^
KepKiBoiroLrtTLKt) Tfj v(f>avTiK^ ff Q>^ fj 'yaXKOvpyucii
rfi dvBpiavTOTruua (ov yap wa-avTco^ vmiperovaiv^
dXfC fj fiev opyava irapexet, fj Bi ttjv vXrtv Xeyto Be
vXrjv TO uTTOKeifjLevovy ef ov ti diroTeXelrai epyov,
olov vifydvT-p fjuev epia hvBpiavroTrovaf Be x^aXxopy
or I, fiev oiv ov^ rj avrff T-fj olKovofiiKJ) fi ')(prip4yTi'
GTiKYj, BfjXov TTOTepov Be fiepo^ avrff^ €<ttL t4 ri
irepov elBo^f eyei BLafi<f>iafii]Tricriv, el ydp eon tov
'XprjfjLaTto'TifKov 0e(opri<T(u iroOev ')(^prifiaTa Kal KTrfCi,^
eaTau, 17 Bi KTrjat^ iroXXd TrepieiXtfthe fieptf Kal 0
ttXovto^, &crTe Ttptorov 17 yetopyiKtj iroTepov fxepo^ Ti
Ti}9 oUovofMiKiy; ff erepov ri yevo^, Kal KaOoXov fj
Trepl rtfv Tpo(f>r}v em/iJLeXeia [kcu Krr]ai<:], dXXa fxriv
elBrj ye TroXXd Tpo<f>rj^, Bio Kal ffiot ttoXXoI Kal t&v
(I^MDP Kal r&v avOpwirmv eiaCv r&v re yhp 0rjpl(ov tcL
l^hf arfeKjoia rk 84 avopaSc/cd iariv, Inrorepm^ avfju-
^p€i irpo^ rrjv Tpo<fn)P avroh Siii to ret fiep ^(j^o^arfa
ra Ze KapTro(l>dya ra he irafjL^>arfa avTa>v elpat, Acre
vpo^ Ta9 paarwva^ koX rrjv aipeciv rfjp tovtcdv 1}
^v(ri9 T0V9 Biov^ avT&v Suopiaev, otioion^ he koX t&v
dvdpdyjmv, oi fiiv oiv hpr/oTarot vofidSe^ elaiv (17
yitp airo r&v ^fUpcov rpo^t} ^mtov auev ttopov ylperai
a")(o\d^ov<np* ipayxaiov he 01/T09 fieraffdXXeip T0C9
KTijvea'i Slit T^9 POfia^ xal avrol opayfed^opraL (Tupa-
teoXovOeiPy Aa'n'ep yempyiap ^Aaap yetopyoupre^).
[It ia not neoeasary to attempt more than six of the following
queationa. Select the queationa yon anawer in equal
number from A, 6, and C. Anawer briefly.]
A.
3. " Commercial parallels are not out of place in
Politics. The state is a manufactory, and its object is
to pay dividends according to the capital invested. But
it manufactures virtue, and those who have invested the
largest amount of that commodity in the business are
entitled to the largest dividends of honor and power,"
Would this suit Aristotle ?
4. '* FiCith is greater than works in all things : in
politics primarily, but in medicine also, not less than
b theology."
Note the germs of this in the Politics.
5. *' Aiuch nonsense is talked about experts? For
expert we often must read crochet-monger, doctrinaire,
sectary, the purblind devotee of clique and claque : the
only useful expert is the broad-minded normal man."
Note any approach to this view in the Politics.
6. " (For purposes of government) any chamber is
better than an antechamber" (of kings). — (Cavour.)
Point out Aristotle's version of the same, with
his qualifications of it.
B.
7. ''It is not the observances which a man practises,
but the depths to which they have penetrated his
nature, the grounds on which he practices them, that
mark his mental calibre and the stage which he has
[ovbr]
reached in the journey of thought : the same obser-
vances may attend half a dozen different beliefs and
mark half a dozen different stages of society."
Illustrate from Coulanges' study of the ancient
city state.
8. " The last and strongest praise and censure of
an artificial society is praise for good taste and good
feeling, censure for brutality and harshness : a ruder
society is governed by motives at once much more
positive and utilitarian, as well cbs more theological"
Explain from Coulanges.
9. ** Plato was *a little Athenian': the whole of
Greek history was a protest against Imperialism, a cry
for liberty, *for genius, for diversity, amid the ever-
growing slavery, dullness and monotony of Roman
rule."
What is the Greek for a " little-state-" *s man ?
Is this account of Plato quite correct ? Point out the
centrifugal forces and the centripetal forces of Greek
life during the two centuries before and after the birth
of Christ. How did Christianity affect the monotony
and uniformity of life and thought under Imperial
Rome?
C.
10. " Aristotle recognises the legitimacy of pleasure
much more than Plato : is much less of an ascetic."
Illustrate from the Politics and elsewhere how
Aristotle and Plato are precursora respectively of the
Epicurean and the Stoic.
11. Compare the school time-table of Aristotle's and
Plato's Ideal states with that of Ontario : the moral,
emotional and intellectual elements in education with
those elements in our own schools ; the teaching of
languages and of sciences with our system.
12. Compare the probable product of the ideal educar
tion of Aristotle's and of Plato's state with the acioal
product of contemporary (a) Sparta, (b) Athens.
«nfiifvstts 9t ^Qvomo^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
COMPARATIVE SYNTAX.
HONORS.
Examiner : A. J. Bell, M. A., Ph.D.
NoTX. — Gandidaiea will attempt nine of these questions, one of
which must be question 12.
1. Sketch the history of syntactical studies till the
beginning of the nineteenth century, connecting it
with the names of Protagoras, Apollonius Dyscolus
and Sanctius. Explain the meaning and use of the
following terms : apOpov, p^T<y)(fi, prjfia and iiriderov,
2. Write notes on the ending and gender of A€\if>oi,
wMua, agricola, maius, 6B6<$ and S/Aco/9, and explain
the probable origin of heterogeneity in Greek and
Latin nouns, illustrating by examples.
3. Give the endings of the plural in Greek and
Latin, showing how far they were originally plural in
force. Write notes on the use of the plural in cervices,
epviae, bigae, and on the elliptical plural in Greek and
Latin.
4. Write a note on the order of the cases in the
Latin case system. Give the names of the cases in
Greek and Latin, showing how far these names indi-
cate the primary use of the cases. Note any of the
Latin names which are not proper translations of the
corresponding Greek names, ana account for this.
5. Discuss the nature and origin of the genitive
endings in aervi, ;^a>/>aa)i;, aeina, yovaTo^y paterfamilias,
ifUdep and iUius.
6. Describe the origin of the absolute cases in
Greek and Latin, and cite examples to illustrate their
leading uses.
7. Give the endings of the dative singular and
plural in Greek and Latin, tracing the origin of each,
and notice any traces of syncretism in this case.
8. Discuss the nature of the division of verbs into
transitive and intransitive, and describe the formation
. of the passive voice in Greek and Latin.
9. Describe the formation of the present, perfect
and weak aorist in Greek, and of the tenses of the
subjunctive in Latin.
10. Account for the use of the present with duvn in
dum haec in colloquio geruntur, Caesari hoc nurUia-
turn est, and connect with this an account of the
praeterite use of the Latin perfect in the indicative
and subjunctive.
11. "The subjunctive is a future from a present
standpoint ; the optative, a future from a past stand-
point. ' Criticise this statement of the primair force
of these moods, comparing it with any other tJ^eories
that have been advanced.
12. Write syntactical notes on the words and phrases
underlined in any ten of the following :
(a) TTvpl B* 6a<T€ SeSi/ci.
(6) ho^av tjfjuv ravra iTropivofieOa.
(c) Succinctus patria quondam, Crispine, papyro.
(d) Domesticus otior.
(e) *H fia Kai ain^ <f>dp€i d^vat^a^ Xafie BlaKOV.
(J) Pro deum immortalium.
ig) Si plus de triginta pedibus patuerint
(A) 'A/ic^p iyevovro aieair^.
(i) Pecuniam omittendae delationis ceperunt
(j) AUai ycLp topS* exnv^elv KTeivavrd fie ;
KTeivama ; Seivov y ehra^, el «ai ^p^ damv.
(ky Smas non quod opus est, sed quod necesse
est ; quod non opus est, asse carum est.
(T) ^l&v TOW nrp&roi hi ^Affrjpdioi top aiSffpov Kari-
ffevTo*
(m} Vereor ut satis diligenter actum sit.
(n) Oif yap irto roiov^ iSov avipa^ ovBi ISo^fiai.
(o) Suspendam potius me quam taeite haec tu
auferas.
(p) Toi^ TTOT* iyibv hrl vtfo^ iva-a-iKfjbOU) fieXaivff^
^A{a> T^X' ^lOdiCfi^y Iva fioi filorw 'ttoXvp SXAf>oi.
mni\$tvtnt9 of Sotoiao.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GREEK.
TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
HONORS.
Examiner: H. J. Crawford, B A.
Translate :
'^ilairep Toh affKrjTc/coU Koi irepi ttjv tS}v atofxarayp
€*7nui\€iav rja-/ci]^ipoi<i ou rrj^ €V€^la^ fjLOvov ovBi r&v
yufwacrifDv <f>popTif; iariVy aK\a Kai rrj^ Kara xaipov
yiyi^ofi€V7j<: dveaio)^, fiepo^ yovv t?}? a<7Ki]<7€a><; to
fteyiCTOv avrrjv VTroXafiffdvovo'iv* ovrao Srj Koi Tot9
irepl Xoyov^ hairovhaKodiv rjyobfiat irpoaqiceiv iiera
rtfv -TToXXiyj/ tS>p airovBaioTepa)!/ avayvoaaiv, avievai
re Trjv Bidvoiap xal irpo? rov eireLra Kafiarop itK/mai-
oripap 7rapao-/e€vd^€ip, yipoiTO B* cip ififieXh^; rj dvd-
iravai^ avTol<;, el toU roLovrot^ r&v (tpayp(aap.dT(op
OfiiXolep, & fjLT) fiopop ix Tov dareiov re xat ')(apUpTO^
'\lrtXt)P irapi^ei rrjp ylru^aydoytap, dWd ripa Kai
detopiav ovk ap,ovaop iirthei^eTaL olop ri fcal irepl
TWi/Se T&p (Tvyypaaftdrow <f>popi]a'€iP VTroXafx^cpco,
ov yap fiopop to ^epop t^9 VTroPeaeo)^^ ovSe to ydpup
T% TTpoaiprjaeoi^ iTrayajyop ecnai ai;Tot9, ovo on
yp^vcfJiaTa iroLKiXa iridapA^ re xai ipa\r)d(o^ i^eprj-
po^afiep, dW 071 Kai r&p laTOpovfiiptop exaarop
OVK dKa)/KpBr]T(o<; irpo^ ripa^ ^viKra^ t&p irdkaioiP
iroi'qT&p T€ Kai airyypa<f>i(op Kai tbiXoaoifxjDP, ttoWcl
Tcpdaria Kai ]j.v0a)Br) avyy€ypa(f>0Ta)P' ofj^ Kai opo-
fiaaTl &p €ypa<f>op, el /jltj Kat ainw <tol €k t?}? dpa-
ypaHTeo}^ (f>alp€a'0ai efMeWop. . . . dp^^tyyo^ Se avToU
Kai BtSdaKoXo^ Trj<; Toiainr)^ /Sw/i-oXo^ia? o tov
'Ofiripov 'OSvaceis, T0t9 Trepl top ^AXklpoop BiTjyov-
[ov«h]
/i6z/09 avBfJLOiv re SovXeiav xal fiovo(f>0d\fji,oh^ fcai
(Vfpiov^ TivcL^ avdptoTrov^* ert Se 'rro\vtc€<f>a\a fwa
Kal Ta9 VTTO (fyapfiaKODv tS)v eraipcov fieraffoXd^' ola
iroWa €K€ivo<i irpo^ IBidara^ dv6pa>7rov<i iTepaTevaaro
rov^ ^aiaKa^, tovtol^ ovv ivTvxo>v airaai rov -dreiJ-
aaadai fiev ov <T(f}6Spa tov9 avBpa^ ifiefiyfrdfjLijv, op&v
rjSff <rvvri6e<i ov tovto koI toU (f)LXoa'o(f>€lp inria-Yyov-
jxivot^* ixelpo S' avrtav idavfiaaa, el ivofMiaav Xrjaeiv
ovtc oK'qdri a'vyypd(f>ovT€<!.
ir. Translate:
Et Se TV')(^rj Tfc9 epSiop, txeKi^pov alriav
poalai M.0L<Tdp ipiffaXe* ai tJueydXai ycLp aXxai
CTKOTOP TToXifp VfjLPCop €')(pim Bcoficpar
€pyoi<; Bi fca\oi<; etroirrpov taafiep evl crvp rpcnrq),
el Mp7)fio(Tvva<; CKari XiirapdfnrvKO^
evprjTai arroLva fioxOtoP Kkvrat^ eirecop docBal^,
ao(f>oi 8i jxeKKovTa rpiTalop apefiop
ifiadov, ovB' cItto KepBei /3d\op'
dffypeo'!: irepi')(po^ re Bdvarop irdpa
ana peopTai, eyo) Be irXeop" eXirofiai
\6yov 'OBvn-aeo^ ^ irdOep Bia rov dSueTrrj yeveaO^
"OpLTjpov
CTrel yjrevSeal oi irorav ^ re /jLa)(apa
aefjLPOv erreari rr <TO<f)ia Bi KKeTrret irapdyoitra fxvOoc^.
rv^Xop S* €^€1
fjTop ofjLiXo^; hvBp&v 6 7r\e*<rT09. el yap fjv
I rav aXddeiav IBifiev, ov fcev oirXtov ')(oXa)d€i^
6 Kaprepo^; A?a9 eira^e Bt>h <f)pev&p
Xevpov ^i(f>o^* hv Kpariarov *A^tX€09 arep fid'^a
^avdw yieveXa BdfMapra KOfjuiaai 0odi<;
ev vavat iropevaav evdmrvoov 7ie(f>vpoio irofj/irai
irpo^ ^\Xov TToXtv.
«niiitt0ft9 9t Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
CLASSICS.
HONORS.
ROMAN HISTORY.
Examiner : A. R. Bain, M.A., LL.D.
Note. — Take three questions in each section.
I.
1. Write notes on the attitude of the various par-
ties and classes in Rome and Italy towards C»sar
durinsT the civil war.
2. Sketch the aims and political position of the
leading men in Rome in the year of Cicero's consul-
ship.
3. Sketch the politiccd career and character of
Pompey.
4. What were the character and aims of the con-
spiracy against Caesar ?
II.
.5. Point out the particulars in which the senatorial
and equestrian orders under the Empire differed from
the senators and knights of the early Republic, and
shew how the differences were produced.
6. In what points did the census instituted by
Augustus differ from the old Republican census ?
7. From what sources was the Imperial fiscus prin-
cipally supplied ? and with what expenditures was it
charged ? Did the needs of the fiacvs in any way affect
the extension of Roman citizenship?
[ovxr]
8. Contrast Rome and Britain in their attitude
and idieas of duty towards their respective subject
peoples.
III.
9. Sketch the history of Roman government in
Spain down to the time of Augustus.
10. Was the attitude, of the Democratic party
toward the provinces as indicated by the legislature of
Gains Gracchus and Servillius Rullus really in the
interest of the provinces ? 0ive reasons for your
reply.
11. Should the ultimate causes of the fall of the
Roman Republic be sought in the political or in the
social field?
12. It is against all experience that any nation can
long remain great which has never possessed, or which
has lost, a hardy and abundant peasantry. Illustrate
this statement by Roman history.
snifnevsfts of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
LATIN.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. C. Robertson, B.A.
CICERO AND POST-ARISTOTELIAN PHILOSOPHY.
1. Translate :
Quae cum dixissem, niagis ut ilium provocarem,
quam ut ipse loquerer, turn Triarius leniter arri-
dens : Tu quidem, inquit, totum Epicurum paene
e philosophorum choro sustulisti. Quid ei reli-
quisti, nisi te, quoquo modo loqueretur, intellegere,
quid diceret ? Aliena dixit in pbysicis nee ea ipsa,
quae tibi probarentur; si qua in iis corrigere
voluit, deteriora fecit; disserendi artem nullam
habuit; voluptatem cum summum bonum diceret,
primum in eo ipso parum vidit, deinde boc quoque
alienum ; nam ante Aristippus, et illo melius.
Addidisti ad extremum etiam indoctum fuisse.
Cicero, De Finibua, I.
2. Explain tbe criticisms of Epicureanism sum-
marized here, going sufficiently into detail to make
clear the bearing of each statement
3. Translate :
Ipse negat, ut ante dixi, luxuriosorum vitam
repreudendam, nisi plane fatui sint, id est nissi
aut cupiant aut metuant. Quarum ambarum
rerum cum medicinam poUicetur, luxuriae licen-
tiam pollicetur. His enim rebus detractis negat
se reperire in asotorum vita, quod reprendat.
Non igitur potestis voluptate omnia derigentes
aut tueri aut retinere virtutem. Nam nee vir
bonus ac iustus haberi debet, qui, ne malum
habeat, abstinet se ab iniuria. Nosti, credo, illud :
Nemo plus est, qui pietatem — ;
cave putes quicquam esse verius.
Ibid, II.
4. Quarum ambanim rerum medidnam pMicetur,
How so ?
5. Translate ;
Recte igitur haec facta distinctio est, atque
etiam ab iis, quo facilius res perspici possit, boo
simile ponitur : Ut enim, iuquiunt, si hoc finga-
mus esse quasi finem et ultimum, ita iaeere talum,
ut rectus assistat, qui ita talus erit iactu;*, ut
cadat rectus, praepositum quiddam habebit ad
finem, qui aliter, contra, neque tamen ilia prae-
positio tali ad eum, quem dixi, finem pertinebit,
sic ea, quae sunt praeposita, referuntur ilia quidem
ad finem, sed ad eius vim naturamque nihil
pertinent.
Ibid, III.
6. (a) Explain the application of this simile.
(6) How does Cato's exposition of Stoicism in
Bk. III. differ fromZeller's ? How do vou account for
the difference.
7. Translate :
Nam omnia, quae sumenda quaeque legenda
aut optanda sunt, inesse debent in summa bonorum,
ut is, qui earn adeptus sit, nihil praeterea desid-
eret. Videsne, ut, quibus summa est in voluptate,
perspicuum sit, quid iis faciendum sit aut non
faciendum ? ut nemo dubitet, eorum omnia
officia quo spectare, quid sequi, quid fugere de-
beant ? Sit noc ultimum bonorum, quod nunc a
me defenditur ; apparet statim, quae sint otiicia,
quae actiones. Vobis autem, quibus nihil est
aliud propositum nisi rectum atque honestum,
unde officii, unde agendi principium nascatur, non
reperietis.
Ibid, IV.
8. (a) Quod nunc a me defenditur. What does
CScero refer to ?
(b) State concisely the criticism involved in the
passage. What is the other main ground of attack on
Stoicism in Bk. IV. ?
9. Translate:
Cumque perturbationem animi illi ex homine
noD tollerent naturaque et condolescere et con-
capiscere et extimescere et efferri laetitia dicerent,
sed ea contraherent in angustumque deducerent,
hie omnibus his quasi morbis voluit carere sapien-
tem ; cumque eas perturbationes antiqui naturales
esse dicerent et rationis expertes aliaque in parte
animi cupiditatem, alia rationem collocarent, ne
his quidem adsentiebatur.
Ibid, Academics, I.
10. (a) Illi ; hie. Who are referred to ?
(6) Katv/rales ... rationis expertes. On what
ground was objection taken to these statements ?
11. Translate: *
Hie Zono vidit acute nullum esse visum,
quod percipi posset, si id tale esset ab eo, quod
est, ut eiusdem modi ab eo, quod non est, posset
esse. Recte consensit Arcesilas ad definitionem
additum : neque enim falsum percipi posse neque
verum, si esset tale, quale vel falsum. Incubuit
autem in eas disputationes, ut doceret nullum
tale esse visum a vero, ut non eiusdem modi etiam
a falso posset esse. Haec est una contentio, quae
adhuc pennanserit. Nam illud, nuUi rei adsen-
surum esse sapientem, nihil ad banc controversiam
pertinebat. * * Sed id omittamus. lUud certe
opinatione et perceptione sublata sequitur, omnium
adsensionum retentio, ut, si ostendero nihil posse
percipi, tu concedas numquam adsensurum esse.
Ibid, 11.
12. Write a note on the Stoic theory of knowledge
explaining the terms <t>amcuTlat arvy/earddeo'i^;, Kara-
^'T^v: and eiriarrj^'q, and show how the above passage
brings out the real question at issue in the Academics,
[ovek]
13. Explain one or other of the following statements
of Weber :
" The scepticism of the Academy is simply an
exaggeration of the underlying principle of this school,
and, in a measure, a return to the original sources."
OR
''The Stoic theology is a kind of compromise
between pantheism and theism."
14. State concisely the chief points of agreement and
difference between the Stoics, Antiochus and Cicero.
15. " In passing from school to school the post-
Aristotelian philosophy assumed, as might be expected,
various modifications of character in course of time ;
nevertheless it retained a certain mental habit and
certain common elements." Without going into detail,
enumerate the common features referred to by Zeller.
nniiif tfltfts of Sovonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
LATIN.
HONORS.
Exarmners . j j flettcher, M. A., LLD.
ROMAN HISTORY BOOKS.
•
I.
1. Translate, with brief ezplcinatory notes :
Placet igitur etiam me expulsum et agrum
Campanum perisse et adoptatum patricium a
plebeio, Gaditanum a Mytilenaeo, et Labieni divi-
tiae et Mamurrae placent et Balbi horti et Tuscu-
lanum. Sed horum omnium fons unus est:
imbecillo resistendum fuit, et id erat facile ; nunc
legionea XI..., equitatus tantus, quantum volet,
Transpadani, plebes urbana, tot tribuni pi., tarn
perdita inventus, tanta auctoritate dux, tanta
audacia. Cum hoc aut depugnandum est aut
habenda e lege ratio. " Depugna " inquis " potius
quam servias.*' Ut quid ? si victus eris, proscri-
bare ? si viceris, tamen servias ? ** Quid ergo '*
inquis, 'acturus es?" Idem quod pecudes, quae
dispulsae sui generis sequuntur greges : ut bos
armenta, sic ego bonos viros aut eos, quicumque
dicentur boni, sequar, etiam si ruent. Quid sit
optimum male contractis rebus plane video : nemini
est enira exploratum, cum ad arma ventum est,
quid futurum sit, at illud ouinibiis, si boni victi
sint, nee in caede principum clementiorem hunc
fore, quam Cinna fnerit, nee moderatiorera quam
Sulla in pecuniis locupletium. ^vfnroXtrevofjLal aoi
iam dudum, et facerem diutius, nisi me lucerna
desereret
2. Annotate without translating : •
(a) Itaque ego Metello, fratri tuo, praesenti restiti :
nam in senatu Kal. lanuariis sic cum eo de re
publica disputavi, ut sentiret sibi cum viro forti
et constanti esse pugnandum. A. d. III. Non.
lanuar. cum agere coepisset, tertio quoque verbo
orationis suae me appellabat, mihi minabatur.
(6) Gnaeus quidem noster iam plane quid cogitet
nescio: qui quidem etiam istuc adduci potuerit.
Nam adhuc haec eao^i^eTo, se leges Caesaris pro-
bare, actiones ipsiua praestare debere ; agrariam
legem sibi placuisse, potuerit intercedi necne, nihil
ad se pertinere ; de rege Alexandrino placuisse
sibi aliquando confici.
«
(c) Vettius ille, ille noster index, Caesari, ut perspi-
cimus, pollicitus est sese curaturum, ut in aliquam
suspicionem facinoris Curio filius adduceretur.
{d) Hammonius, regis legatus, aperte pecunia nos
oppugnat ; res agitur per eosdem creditores, per
quos, cum tu aderas, agebatur. Regis causa si qui
sunt qui velint, qui pauci sunt, omnes rem ad
Pompeium deferri volimt; senatus religionis
caluinniam non religione sed malevolentiaet illius
regiae largitionis invidia comprobat.
(e) Habes meam causam, quae si Bruto non proba-
tur, nescio cur ilium amemus, sed avunculo eius
certe probabitur, praesertim cum senatus consul-
tum modo factum sit, puto, postquam tu es pro-
fectus, in creditorum causa, ut centesimae perpetuo
faenore ducerentur.
(/) Senatum bonum putas, per quem sine imperio
provinciae sunt ? — nunquam enim Curio sustinuis-
set, si cum eo agi coeptum esset, quam sententiam
senatus sequi noluit, ex quo factum est ut Caesari
non succederetur — an publicanos, qui nunquam
firmi, sed nunc Caesari sunt amicissimi — an
faeneratores ?
{g) Quod autem suades, ut ab eo petam ut mihi
concedat ut idem tribuam Pompeio, quod ipsi tri-
buerim, id me iam pridem agere intelleges ex
litteris Balbi et Oppii, quarum exempla tibi misi ;
misi etiam Caesaris ad eos sana mente scriptas,
quo modo in tanta insania.
(A) Noli quaerere ; ita mihi pulcher hie dies visus
est, ut speciem aliquam viderer videre quasi revi-
viscentis rei publieae. Itaque cum omnis ante me
rogati gratias Caesari egissent praeter Volcatium
— is enim, si eo loco esset, negavit se facturum
fuisse — ego rogatus mutavi meum consilium.
3. Give some account of Cicero's literary activity
after the battle of Thapsus.
4. The value of Sallust'.s Catiline as material for
history.
II.
Translate and comment on :
(a) Plebes acri quidem annona fatigabatur, sed
nulla in eo culpa ex principe ; quin infecunditati
terrarum aut asperis maris obviam iit, quantum
impendio diligentiaque poterat.
(b) Apud quos etiam tum cuncta tractabantur, adeo
ut procurator Asiae Lucilius Capito accusante
provincia causam dixerit; magna cum assev.era-
tione principis non se jus nisi in servitia et pecu-
nias familiares dedisse : quodsi vim praetoris
usurpasset manibusque militum uses foret, spreta
in eo mandata sua : audirent socios.
(c) Quo magis mirum habebatur gnarum meliorum
et quae fama clementiam sequeretur, tristiora
malle. Neque enim socordia peccabat ; nee occul-
tum est quando ex veritate, quando adumbrata
laetitia facta imperatorum eelebrentur. Quin
ipse, compositus alias et velut eluctantium verbo-
rum, solutius promptiusque eloquebatur, quotiens
subveniret.
(d) Caeli temperies hieme mitis, objectu montis
quo saeva ventorum arceutur ; aestas in Favonium
obversa, et aperto circum pelago peramoena; pro-
spectabatque pulcherrimum sinum, anteqnam
Vesuvius mons ardescens faciem loci verteret.
[OVKRj
(e) Interea magna vis accusatorum in eos irrupit,
qui pecunias fenore auctitabant adversum l^em
dictatoris Caesaris, qua de modo credendi potei-
dendique intra Italiam cavetur.
(/) Contra alii fatum quidera congruere rebus
putant. sed non e vagis stellis, verum apud prin-
cipia et nexus naturalium causarum : ac tamen
electionem vitae nobis relinquunt, quam ubi ele-
geris, certum imminentium ordinem.
yg) Quater pecunia mea iuvi aerarium. ita ut ses-
tertium milliens et quingentiens ad eos qui prae-
erant aerario detulerim.
(h) Aegyptum imperio populi Roniani adieci. Ar-
meniam maiorem interfecto rege eius Artaxe cum
. possem facere provinciam, malui maiorum nostro-
rum exemplo regnum id Tigrani regis Arfcavasdis
filio, nepoti autem 'f igranis regis, per Ti. Nero-
nem tradere.
1. Give and criticise different views that have been
held as to the character of Tiberius.
2. Account for the readiness shown by the Bomans
to deify the early emperors.
3. " Nulla gens est, quae non aut ita sublata est, ut
vix exstet ; aut ita domita, ut quiescat ; aut ita pacata,
ut victoria nostra imperioque laetetur." — Cicero.
Translate. What was the condition of the Prov-
inces under the Principate ?
aniDetttfts ot SToronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
LATIN.
HONORS.
1,' '- ^- f J. Fletcher, M.A., LL.D.
Lxarmners:^^ J. Bell, MA., Ph.D.
I.
LUCRETIUS.
1. Translate:
Nee tamen haee simplex nobis natura putanda est.
ienvis enim quadam moribundos deserit aura
mixta vapore, vapor porro trahit aera secum.
nee calor est quisquam, cui non sit mixtus et aer ;
rara quod eius enim constat natura, neeessest
aeris inter eum primordia multa moveri.
Show how Lucretius is led to assume the presence
in the anima of the elements enumerated above. How
do they differ from one another, and how far do they
seem to correspond with these elements as found in
nature? Compare his theory with that held by
Democritus.
2. Translate :
Inde minutatim processit ferreus ensis
versaque in opprobrium species est falcis ahenae,
et ferro coepere solum proscindere terrae
exaequataque sunt creperi certamina belli,
et prius est armatum in equi conscendere costas
et moderarier hunc frenis dextraque vigere
quam biiugo curru belli temptare pericla.
et biiugos prius est quam bis eoniungere binos
et quam falciferos armatum escendere curras.
inde boves Lucas cnrrito corpore, taetras,
anguimanus, belli docuerunt volnera Poeni
sutfeiTe et magnas Marfcis turbare catervas.
sic alid ex alio peperit discordia tristis.
Write notes on in opprobinv/m, creperi, bovea
LucaSy and alid. Give Lucretius' account of the way
in which men learnt the use of metals.
8. Translate:
Linquitur hie quaedam latitandi copia tenvi&
id quod Anaxagoras sibi sumit, ut omnibus omnis
res putet inmixtas rebus latitare, sed illud
apparere unum cuius sint plurima mixta
et magis in promptu primaque in fronte locata.
Show this doctrine of Anaxagoras can be recon-
ciled with his Homceomeria, and characterize Lucretius'
statement of his theory of nature.
4. Do the atoms of Lucretius consist of parts, and
are they divisible ? Compare his theory in this respect
with that of any modem physicist.
5. Oeuloa nvXlam rem cernere poeae. Explain. By
whom was this theory held? How does Lucretius
confute it ?
6. Divinitus esse paratara naturam rerum. How
dees Lucretius confute this ? State his theory of the
existence, nature and life of the Gods.
7. ** It is not as much the beauty of form and color
as the appearance of force and life in nature that
Lucretius reproduces." Criticize this statement, sup-
porting your criticism by references to his poem.
IL
(Write in a separate book.)
VIRGIL.
Translate :
(a) Sicelides Musae. paulo maiora canamus!
Non omnes arbusta iuvant humilesque myricae;
Si caninius silvas, silvae sint consule dignae.
Ultima CuvKiei venit iain carminis aetas ;
Magnus ab integro saeclorum nascitur ordo.
lam redit et Virgo redeunt Saturnia reg^na ;
i
lam nova progenies caelo demittitur alto.
Tu modo nascenti puero, quo ferrea primum
Desinet ac toto surget gens aurea mundo,
Casta f ave Lueina : tuus iam regnat Apollo. *
(6) Pater ipse colendi
Hand facilem esse viam voluit, primusque per
artem
Movet agros curis acuens mortalia corda,
Nee torpere gravi passus sua regna vetemo.
Ante lovem nulli subigebant arva coloni ;
Ne signare quidem aut partiri Umite campum
Fas erat ; in medium quaerebant, ipsaque tellus
Omnia liberius nullo poscente ferebat.
Ille malum virus serpentibus addidit atris,
Praedarique lupos iussit pontumque moveri,
MeUaque deimsait foliia tgnemque removit
(c) Hie tibi (fabor enim, quando baec te cura remordet,
Longius et volvens fatorum arcana movebo)
Bellum iugens geret Italia populosque feroces
Contundet, moresque viris et moenia ponet,
Tertia dum Latio regnantem viderit aestas
Temaque transierint Rutulis hibema subactis.
At puer Aseanius, cui nunc cognomen lulo
Additur (Ilus erat, dum res stetit Ilia regno),
Triginta magnos volvendis mensibus orbes
Imperio explebit, regnumque ab sede Lavini
Transferet, et longam multa vi muniet Albam.
(d) Exoria'^^e cdiquis nostris ex ossibus ultor,
Qui face Dardanios ferroque sequare colonos,
Nunc, olim, quocumque dabunt se tempore vires.
litora litoribus contraria, fluctibus undas
Inprecor, arma armis ; pugnent ipsique nepotesque.
(c) Ille, ut depoaiti proferret fata parentis,
Scire potestates herbarum usumque medendi
Maluit et mutas agitare inglorius artes.
Stabat acerba f remens, ingentem nixus in hastam
Aeneas, magno iuvenum et maerentis luli
Concursu, lacrimis inmobilis. Ille retorto
Paeonium in morem senior succinctus amictu,
. Uulta manu medica Phoebique potentibus herbis
Nequiquam trepidat, nequiquam spicula dextra
SoUicitat prensatque tenaci forcipe ferrum.
1. Write notes on italicised words.
[ovsb]
2. Show briefly the relation of Virgil (a) to Theo-
critus, (6) to Homer, (c) to Ennius.
*S, Translate and explain :
A^o Koi <f>CKoao<l}(OTepov icaX trrrovSaiorepov iroi-
rjcL^ iaropUiM iarlv fi fiiv yap iroirfci^ fAoXKav ra
/caOoXov^ 17 S* laropia r^ xaff* ixairrov XeycL eari
Bi teaOoXov pAv, t£ iroUp ri. irola arra avpfiaivu
Xeyeiv fj irpdrreLv icarh to uko^ fj to kvarficaiov, oh
aro-)(a^eTcu fi Troirjai*; ovop^ara eiririOepeprj' to hi
Kaff Ixaarov, rl ^AXtaffidZrj^ errpa^ev ff ri hroBev,
Abistotle, Poetics.
How far does this canon apply to didactic poetry ?
Show briefly how Virgil in the Oeorgica overcomes the
difficulties inherent in the subject.
4. Comment, without translating, on :
(a) Idcirco certis dimensum partibus orbem
Per duodena regit mundi sol aureus astra.
(b) Ignoscenda quidem, scirent si ignoscere Manes.
(0) Sunt lacrimae rerum et mentem mortalia tangunt.
(d) Heu fuge crudeles terras, fuge litus avarum.
UnitKVtats ot sroronto«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
la™.
HONORS.
Easamvner : Q. W. Johnston, Ph.D.
Translate :
(a) Innoxia adhuc ac praecalida et libata gustu
potio traditur Britannico ; dein, postquam feruore
aspernabatur, frigida in aqua affunditur uenenum,
quod ita cunctos eius artus peruasit, ut uox pari-
ter et spiritus raperentur. trepidatur a circumse-
dentibus; diffiugiunt imprudentes. at quibus
altior intellectus, resistunt defixi et Neronem
intuentes. ille, ut erat reclinis et nescio similis,
solitum ita ait, per comitialem morbum, quo prima
ab infantia afflictaretur Britannicus, et redituros
paulatim uisus sensusque. at Agrippinae is pauor,
ea constematio mentis, quamuis uultu premeretur,
emicuit, ut perinde ignaram fuisse atque Octauiam
sororem Britannici constiterit : quippe sibi supre-
mum auxilium ereptum, et parricidii exemplum
intelligebat. Octauia quoque, quamuis rudibus
annis, dolorem, caritatem, omnes affectus abscon-
dere didicerat. ita post breue silentium repetita
conuiuii laetitia. nox eadem necem Britannici
et rogum coniunxit, proviso ante funebri paratu,
qui modicus fuit. In campo tamen Martis sepul-
tus est, adeo turbidis imbribus, ut uulgus iram
deum portendi crediderit aduersus facinus cui
plerique etiam hoiuinum ignosceliant, antiquas
fratrum discordias et insociabile regnum aesti-
mantes.
Tacitus, A nnals, XIII.
(6) Rem populi tractas ? — barbatum haec crede magis-
trum
Dicere, sorbitio tollit quern dira cicutae —
Quo f retus ? die o magni pupille Pericli.
Scilicet ingenium et rerum prudentia velox
Ante pilos venit, dicenda tacendaque calles.
Ergo ubi commota fervet plebecula bile,
Fert animus calidae fecisse silentia turbae
Maiestate manus. Quid deinde loquere ? Quvrites,
Hoc, puta, non iustum est, illud male, rectius
itlud.
Scis etenim iustum gemina suspendere lanoe
.Ancipitis librae ; rectum discernis, ubi inter
Curva subit, vel quum fallitpede regula varo,
Et potis es nigrum vitio praefigere u^eta.
Quin tu igitur, summa nequiquam pelle decorus,
Ante diem blando caudam iactare popello
Desinis, Anticyras melior sorbere meracas ! *
Quae tibi summa boni est ? uncta vixisse patella
Semper et assiduo curata cuticula sole ?
Exspecta, baud aliud respondeat haec anus. I
nuDc :
Dinomaches ego sum ! suffla sv/m candidus !
Persius, Satire TV.
(c) Sed a deo tantum rationem habemus, si mode
habemus, bonam autem rationem aut non bonam
a nobis ; non enim, ut patrimonium relinquitur,
sic ratio est bomini beneficio deorum data, quid
enim potius hominibus dedissent, si iis nocere
voluissent ? iniustitiae autem, intemperantiae, tint*
iditatis quae semina essent, si his vitiis ratio non
subesset ? Medea mo^o et Atreus commemora-
bantur a nobis, heroicae personae, inita subducta-
que ratione nefaria scelera meditantes. quid
levitates comicae ? parumne saepe in ratione
versantur ? parumne subtiliter disputat ille in
Eunucho ?
quid igitur faciam ?
exclusit, revocat : redeam ? non, si me obsecret.
ille vero in Synephebis Academicorum more contra
communem opinionem nondubitat pugnare ratione,
qui 'in amore summo summaque inopia suave
esse ' dicit
parentem habere avarum, inlepidum, in liberos
difficilem, qui te nee amet nee studeat tui.
atqne huie incredibili sententiae ratiunculas sug-
gerit ; idem faeilem et liberalem patrem incom-
modum esse amanti filio disputat,
quein neque quo pacio fallam neque ut inde
auferam,
nee quein dolum ad eum aut machinam commoliar,
scio quicquam : iia omnis meos doles, fallaciae,
praestigias praestrinxit commoditas patris.
quid ergo isti doli ? quid machinae ? quid fallaciae
praestigiaeque ? num sine ratione esse potuerunt ?
CiCEBO, De Ndtura Deorwm, IIL
BInfDeriBrttff of Sovotito#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner: W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
NonL — Candidates for Honors will take the questions marked with
; other candidates will lake any six questions.
*1. Wordsworth is described as being especially the
poet of consolation; show how this is illustrated in
each of three poems, Michael, Elegiac Stanzas Sug-
gested by a Picture of Peele Castle^ and Ode to Duty.
2. Making use of Old Mortality and The Lay of the
Last Mi/nstrel, compare Scott's work in prose romance
with his work in poetical romance.
3. State the distinguishing characteristics of
Shelley's poetry, and exemplify your points from the
poems you have read.
*4. By means of one lyric selected from the pre-
scribed works of each of the poets, Wordsworth, Scott
and Shelley, illustrate their characteristic differences
as poets.
*5. Compare the genius of Macaulay and that of
Carlyle as revealed m their respective styles and in
their treatment of character.
*6. Give a description of the poem entitled The
Ancient Sage, and an outline of the ideas therein
expressed.
*7. Compare The Revevge and Herv4 Riel so as to
exemplify the characteristic differences between the
two poets.
[gvbr]
*8. What view of art does Fra Lippo Lippi repre-
sent ? Show how his character and circumstiiaes
make him a natural exponent of this view.
9. Name the writer and indicate the connection of
each of the following passages : —
(a) She shall be Rportive aa a fawn
That wild witn glee across the lawn
Or up the mountain springs ;
And ner's shall be the breathins balm,
And her's the silence and the ciQm
Of mute insensate things.
(6) Yet now despair itself is mild,
Even as the winds and waters are ;
I could lie down like a tired child,
And weep awav the life of care
Which I nave Dome, and yet must bear, —
Till death like sleep might steal on me.
And I might feel in the warm air
My cheek grow cold, and hear the sea
Breathe o'er my brain its last monotony.
(c) ** This mom is merry June, I trow.
The rose is budding fain ;
But she shall bloom in winter snow
Kro we two meet again."
He turned his charger as he spoke
Upon the river shore,
He gave the bridle-rein a shake.
Said *' Adieu for evermore
My Love !
And adieu for evermore. '*
(d) Will no one tell me what she sings ?
Perhaps the plaintive numbers flow
For old, unhappy, far-off things,
And battles long ago :
Or is it some more humble lay.
Familiar matter of to-day ?
Some natural sorrow, loss or pun.
That has been, and may be again !
(e) The eods are hard to reconcile,
'Tis hard to settle order once aoain.
There ia confusion worse than death.
Trouble on trouble, pain on pain.
Long labour unto aged breath,
Sore task to hearts worn out by many wars.
And eyes grown dim with gazing on the pilot
(/*) We look before and after,
And pine for what is not :
Our sincerest laughter
With some pain is fraught.
8ltifiier0ftff of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH.
HONORS.
Examiner : A. H. Reynar, LL.D.
1. Compare the classic drama with the drama of
Shakespeare as to the admission of comic passages in
a tragedy or tragic passages in a comedy. Refer to
examples of such blending in Shakespeare's plays and
give your judgment as to the effect.
2. What is the main theme of Lear ? Show how
the subordinate parts bear on the theme.
3. Of what dramatic use is the fool in King I^ear f
Refer to passages in which his part is most helpful.
When and why does the fool disappear from the play ?
4^ " I loved Ophelia ; forty thousand brothers
Conld not with aU their quantity of love
Make up my sum."
Review Hamlet's treatment of Ophelia and show
how it agrees with this protestation.
3. Compare the madness of Lear with the assumed
madness of Hamlet. How does the latter differ from
the former ?
6. Point out the art by which Shakespeare con-
structs a really enjoyable comedy on the main plot in
Much Ado About ifothing.
fftnftoetsui? of SorontOi
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901,
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH.
HONORS.
Examiner: A.. H. Retnar, LL.D.
1. By a comparison of The Creation and Fall with
2%6 Foure PP, show the development of tendencies
which culminated in the drama of Shakespeare.
2. Describe the general temper and habit of the
mind of Marlowe. Show his relation to the great
intellectual movement of the age in which he lived,
and contrast him in this respect with Shakespeare.
3. What differences in the art and spirit of Marlowe
appear between his two dramas Tamburlai/ne and
Edward II?
4. Specify the peculiarities of subject, treatment and
form by which we may determine approximately the
year when Love's Labour's Lost, and the MidsurriTner
Night's Dream were written by Shakespeare.
o. What constitutes the unity of the M. N, D. and
blends into one harmonious whole the diverse parts
of which it is composed ?
G. What may we learn from the M. N. D, and Hamlet
of Shakespeare's judgment on the actors and acting of
his time ?
dtiinersitff of SPovontu.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH.
HONORS.
Examiner : W. Parkenhah, B.A.
1. Milton has been called the Scholars' Poet.
0
(a) What evidences of Scholarship does Gomus
reveal ? Particularize.
(6) Basing your remarks upon Every Man in His
Humor and on coraua, compare Jonson and Milton
with respect to the influence of their scholarship on
their work.
2. (a) What does Samson Agoniates tell you of the
man Milton ?
(6) Basing your remarks upon Comua and Sara-
son Agonistea, contrast the Milton of 1634 with the
Milton of 1670.
3. Trace, with definite references to the play, the
growth of Cleopatra's influence over Antony and the
deterioration of Antony's character.
4. In his prefatory remarks to Samson Agonistes
Milton states his belief that the " small esteem " in
which the tragedy of his day was held, was due to (a)
"the poet's error of intermixing comic stuff with tragic
sadness and gravity/' to (6) the introduction of '' trivial
and vulgar persons," and, generally speaking, to (o) the
desire " corruptly to gratify the people."
(i) Show to what extent this belief influenced
Milton in Samson Agonistes.
[OVBB]
(ii) Contrast, in this respect, the beliefs and prac-
tices of Milton in Samson Agonistea and of Shakspere
in Antony and Cleopatra.
5. Analyze in detail, from your recollection of the
play, the scene between Imogen and Pisanio in the
" Country near Milford- Haven," bringing out the vary-
ing moods of Imogen.
6. Explain fully and indicate the context of the
following :
(a) 0 foolishness of men ! that lend their ears
To those budge doctors of the Stoic far,
And fetch their precepts from the Cynic tab,
Praising the lean and sallow Abstinence !
(6) Wherein I am false I am honest ; not trae, to be trae.
These present wars shall find I love my coantry.
Even to the note o' the King, or I'll fall in them.
All other doabts, by time let them be clear'd :
Fortune brings in some boats that are not steer*d.
But, alack !
(e) Ton suatch some hence for little faults ; that's love.
To have them fall no more : you some permit
To second ills with ills, each elder worse.
And make them dread it, to the doer's thrift.
*
{d) The shirt of Nessus is upon me : teach me,
Alcides, thou mine ancestor, thy raee :
Let me lodee Lichas on the horns o the moon ;
And with those hands, that grasp'd the heaviest club.
Subdue my worthiest self.
(e) Great men,
That had a court no bigger than this cave,
That did attend themselves and had the virtue
Which their own conscience seal'd them — laying by
That nothing-gift of dififerin^ multitudes —
Could not outpeer these twau.
{/) My desolation does begin to make
A better life. 'Tis paltry to be Csesar ;
Not being Fortune, he's J>ut Fortune's knave,
A minister of her will : and it is great
To do that thing that ends all other deeds ;
Which shackles accidents and bolts up change.
^nftiersfts ot ^ovomo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
HISTORICAL ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
HONORS.
Examine^' : D. R. Keys, M.A.
N.B. — Five questions to constitute a full paper.
1. In what various forms does the original short a
a.ppear in Anglo-Saxon ? Account for these, and trace
their subsequent history to living English.
2. What survivals of Verner's law are to be noted in
Bfodern English ?
3. Draw a diagram to outline the history of English
dialects. Note any signs of a differentiation of American
dialects.
4. Outline the history of English declension during
the Middle English period.
5. Make a systematic classification of the Old English
-strong verbs.
6. Trace the development of the English weak verbs
from the old to the modem period.
7. Write an article on the English relative pronouns
8. Compare Old and Modern English with regard to
inflexion and use of the subjunctive mood.
]
JRnUttttAtti of Soronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH TEAR.
ANGLO-SAXON.
Examiner : D. R Keys, M.A.
1. Give arguments for and against the theory that
Beowulf was first written in Anglo-Saxon.
2. Compare the two earlier feats of Beowulf with
his final adventure, with special reference to their pos-
sible mythological relations.
3. Describe briefly the state of the Beowulf text.
Translate :
(a) Him on mod beam,
p8Bt heal-reced hfttan wolde,
medo-sem micel men gewyrcean,
70 Pon[n]e yldo beam »fre gefrunon,
ond Pser on innan eall geda^lan
Seongum ond ealdum, swylc him God sealde,
uton folc-scare ond feorum gumena.
Da ic wide gefrcegn weorc gebannan
75 manigre msegpe geond Pisne middan-geard,
folc-stede fr»twan. Him on fyrste gelomp
sedre mid yldum, Pset hit weard eal gearo,
heal-asma msest ; scdp him Heort naman,
se Pe bis wordes geweald wide hsefde.
80 H€ bSot ne aleh, beagas d^lde,-
sine set symle. Sele hlifade
heah ond horn-gSap ; hea^o-wylma bad
lai^an liges. Ne wses hit lenge Pa g^n,
past se ecg-heie ftpum-swerian
85 aafter w»l-nl6e wsecnan scolde.
1. Write grammatical notes on beam (67), beam
(70), gefrunon (70), f6orum (78), gearo (77), aleh (80),
adum-swerian (84).
Translate :
(&) Gewiton him ?a feran ; flota stille bad,
seomode on sale sid-fsePmed scip,
on ancre fsast. £ofor-lic scionon
ofer hleor-ber[g]an, gehroden golde,
fah ond lyr-heard ; ferh wearde heolA
Gu^'mod grummon, guman dnetton,
sigon setsomne, of fsei by [sjsel timbred,
geatollc ond gold-fah, ongyton mibton ;
?8et W8BS fore-mierost fold-buendum
receda under roderum, on psem se rica b&d :
llxte se ISoma ofer landa fela.
Him pa hilde-deor [b]of m5digra
torht getsebte, ];^t hie him to mibton
gegnum gangan ; gu^-beorna sum
wicg gewende, word sefter cwsaS :
'' Miel is me to feran ; FsBder al-walda
mid ar-stafum €owic ^ehealde
si^a gesunde ! Ic t6 sse wille
wis wrad werod wearde healdan."
2. Note the special poetical devices used in this
passage.
3. Scan the first five verses.
Translate :
(c) Gemunde pa se g5d& mseg Higelaces
^fen-sprsece. up lang astdd
760 ond him fseste wiSfeng; fingras burston ;
eoten waBS ut-weard ; eorl furPur stop.
M}^nte se m»ra, kvjidr he meahte sw&,
widre gewindan ond on weg Panon
fieon on fen-hopu ; wiste his fingra geweald
765 on grames grapum. Ptbt wsds gfiocor sid,
Pset se hearm-scaPa td Heorute ateah.
Dryht-sele dynede; Denum eallum wearS,
ceaster-buendum, cenra gehwylcum,
eorlum ealu-scerwen. Trre w»ron bigen ]
770 rSPe ren-weardas. Reced hlynsode ; *
Pa W8BS wundor micel, Past se win-sele
wiShsefde heaPo-deorum, paet he on hrusan ne f0ol, »
fsBger fold-bold ; ae hB pses fsaste wsss i
innan ond titan Iren-bendum
776 searo-poncum besmiPod.
4. Explain the reference in vv. 368-9, and in ealu
9cerwen (769).
Not to he translated .
(d) Gewiton him 89. wigend wica neosian
freondum befeallen, Fryslond geseon,
hamas ond hea-burb. Uengest $a gyt
wsel-fagne winter wunode mid Finn
el[nej un/litme ; eard gemunde,
Peah Pe he [ne] meahte on mere drifan
hringed-stefnan ; holm storme weol,
won wife winde ; winter ype beleac
is-gebinde, oP Sset Qper com
gear in geardas, swa nti gyt ded,
pa de singales sele bewitiad,
wuldor-torhtan weder. Da waes winter scacen,
fseger foldan bearm ; fundode wrecca,
gist of geardum ; he to gym-wrsece '
swiftor p5hte, Ponne t6 sse-lade,
gif he tom-gem5t purhteon mihte,
pset h€ Eotena beam inne gemunde.
5. Compare the feeling for nature shown in Beowulf
with that in (a) tbe classic epic literature, (b) modern
English literature.
nnftietsfts of Sovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FRENCH.
Eicamvner : J. Squair.
I.
Translate :
ANDROMAQUE.
Non, non, je te defends, Cdphise, de me suivre, '
Je confie k tes soins mon unique tr^8or :
Si tu vivais pour moi, vis pour le fils d'Hector.
De Tespoir des Troyens seule d^positaire,
Songe k combien de rois tu deviens n^essaire.
VeilTe aupr^ de Pyrrhus ; fais-lui garder sa foi :
S'il le faut, je consens qu'on lui parle de moi,
Fais-lui valoir Thy men oil je me suis rang^.
— A ndromaque.
1. Scan, (1) by counting the syllables, (2) by count-
ing the stresses, lines 4 and 5 of the extract.
2. Write notes on Hector and Pyrrhus.
II.
Translate :
Mascarille: II est vrai qu'il est honteux de
n'avoir pas des premiers tout ce qui se fait ; mais
ne vous mettez pas en peine : je veux ^tablir chez
vous une Academic de beaux esprits, et je vous
promets qu'il ne se fera pas un bout de vers dans
Paris que vous ne sachiez par cceur avant tous les
autres. Pour moi, tel que vous me voyez, je m'en
escrime un peu quand je veux ; et vous verrez
courir de ma fa^on, dans les belles ruelles de Paris,
deux cents chansons, autant de sonnets, quatre
cents ^pigrammes et plus de mille raadrigaux, sans
compter les dnigmes et les portraits.
— Les prSdevses ridicuUa.
1. At what point in the career of Moli^re was this
play written ? Give a sketch of his life up to this
point.
2. Explain ruellea and portraits.
III.
Translate :
DON RUY GOMBZ.
Mais va, crois moi, ces cavaliers frivoles
N'ont pas d'amour si grand qu'il ne s'use en pa-
roles.
Qu'une fiUe aime et croie un de ces jouvenceaux,
EUe en meurt, il en rit. Toas ces jeunes oiseaux,
A I'aile vive et peinte, au langoureux ramage,
Ont un amour qui mue ainsi que leur plumage.
Les vieux, dont Ykge 6teint la voix et les couleurs,
Ont Taile plus fid^le,et moins beaux, sont meilleurs.
Nous aimons bien. Nos pas sont lourds ? nos
yeux arides ?
Nos fronts rid& ? Au coeur on n'a jamais de rides.
— Hemani.
1. Compare this passage with the one from Andro-
maque so as to show differences between the classical
and romantic styles.
IV.
Translate :
PoiRlBR, d Gaston, — Dame ! le bilan est facile
sL ^tablir : vous avez re9u cinq cent mille francs de
la dot de ma fille. La corbeille de noces et les
frais d'installation en ont absorb^ cent mille.
Vous venez d'en donner deux cent dix-huit mille
i vos cr^anciers, il vous en reste done cent quatre-
vingt-deux mille qui, plac^ au taux l^gal, repr^-
sentent neuf mille livres de rente. Est-ce clair ?
£st-ce avec ce revenu que vous nourrirez vos amis
de carpes k la Lithuanienne et de volailles k la
conconlat ? Croyez-moi, mon cher Oaston, rested
chez moi, vous y serez encore mieux que chez
vous. Penaez k vos enfants qui ne seront pas
f3ich& de trouver un jour dans la poche du Mar-
quis de Presles les economies du bonhomme
Poirier. A revoir, mon gendre, je vab r^ler le
compte de Monsieur Yatel.
— Le gendre de Monsieur Poirier.
1. At what date are the events of the play supposed
to occur ?
2. Describe briefly the place Augier holds in the
development of comedy.
3. Write notes on A revoir and Monsieur Vatel
V.
Translate :
(a) D fait un de ces temps ainsi que je les aime,
Ni brume ni soleil ! le soleil devin^,
Pressenti, du brouillard mourant dansant ft mdme
Le ciel trds haut qui toume et fuit, rose de cr^me ;
L'atmosphdre est de perle et la mer d'or fand
Yerlaine.
1. Write a note on Yerlaine and his work as a poet.
(h) — Mon pauvre homme, le Mont-de-Pifet^ refuse
Le dernier matelas comme ^tant trop mauvais,
Oii vas-tu maintenant trouver du pain ?
— J'y vais,
B^pondis-je, et, prenant k deux mains mon courage,
Je r&olus d'aller me remettre k Touvrage ;
Et, quoique me doutant qu'on me repousserait,
Je me rendis d'abord dans le vieux cabaret
Oti se tenaient toujours les meneurs de la gr^ve.
— Lorsque j'entrai, je cms, sur ma foi, faire un
rfive.
On buvait \k, tandis que d'autres avaient faim ;
On buvait !
9
1. What is the poem from which this extract is
taken?
2. Explain Mont-de-PUU,
V
AnfDftottp of ^uovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1001.
FOURTH YEAR.
FRENCH.
GRAMMAR, SIGHT. PROSE, LA FONTAINE.
Examiner : W. A. R. Kerr, B.A.
I.
Translate into French :
1. He wishes me to go to see them.
2. " Give me some," lie said, in a low voice.
3. It is fine now, but it may rain to-morrow.
4. We set sail on the first of June at twenty min-
utes to five in the morning.
5. You ought never to have come.
6. Although the weather is clear, I can see nothing.
7. He came to spend his holidays with me.
8. As long as you are here, I remain.
9. The man I gave the franc to isn't here any
longer.
10. Can he do without a new coat ?
II.
Translate into French :
A sound of cannon was heard. The sound
increased moment by moment. Everyone looked
towards the north. Two vessels were seen fighting
at a distance of about three miles. The wind
brought both so near our ship that we could see
the ^ht quite easily. Finally one of the two ves-
sels launched a broadside (bord^e) against the
[OVERj
other. The latter at once began to sink. We
distinctly saw a crowd of men od the deck of the
ship which was going down; they kept raising
their hands to heaven and uttering frightful cries :
in a moment all was swallowed up.
IIL
LES X]^DECINS.
Translate into English :
1 Le m^decin Tant-pis alloit voir un malade
Que visitoit aussi son confrere Tant-mieux.
Ce dernier esp^roit, quoique son camarade
Soutint que le gisant iroit voir ses aieux.
5 Tous deux s'^tant trouv^ diff^rens pour la cure:
Leur malade paya le tribut k nature,
Aprfes qu'en ses conseils Tant-pis eut et^ cm.
lis triomphoient encor sur cette maladie.
L*un disoit : " II est mort ; je Tavois bien prevu.
10 — S'il m*e<!lt cru,disoit Tautre, il seroit plein de vie."
1. What light does this throw on the science of the
17th century ?
2. Explain the spelling of " encor " (1. 8).
3. Scan 11. 1-4.
4. In how far is La Fontaine an original writer ?
5. Sketch briefly the life of La Fontaine.
IV.
Translate into English :
Dans le salon carr^, c*^tait une bouillie de
monde grouillante et bruissante. Les peintres, en
representation jusqu'au soir, se faisaient recon-
na^tre i leur activity, k la sonority de leur voix, k
Tautoriti de leurs gestes. lis commenfaient Strainer
des amis par la manche vers des tableaux qu'ils
d^ignaient du bras, avec des exclamations et une
mimique ^nergique de connaisseurs. On en Toyait
de toutes sortes, de grands d longs cheveux, coiff^
de chapeaux mous gris ou noirs, de formes inex-
primables, larges et ronds comme des toits, avec
des bords en pente ombrageant le torse entier de
rhomme, D'autres ^taient petits, actifs, fluets ou
trapus, cravat^s d'un foulard, v^tus de vestons ou
ensaqu^s en de singuliers costumes sp^ciaux k la
classe des rapins.
2Snfiirt0ftff of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FRENCH.
HON0RS.
Examiner : Pelham Edqar, Pfl.D.
N.B. — Candidates will translate only the specified passages.
«
I.
Tes jours, sombres et courts cotnme des jours d'automne,
D^clinent comme rombre au penchant des coteaux,
L'amiti^ te trahit, la piti^ t'abandonne^
£t, seule, tu descends le senti^r des toinbeaux.
Mais la nature est \k qui t'invite et qui t'aime ;
Plonge-toi dans son sein qu'elle t'ouvre toujours ;
Quand tout change pour toi, la nature est la mdme,
Et le mSme soleil se l^ve sur tes jours.
De lumi^re et d'ombrage elle t'entoure encore :
D^tache ton amour des faux biens que tu perds ;
Adore ici Techo qu' adorait Pvthagore,
Prfite avee lui Toreille aux c^estes concerts.
Suis le jour dans le ciel, sui$ Tombre sur la terre,
Dans les plaines de Tair vole avec Taquilon,
Avec les doux rayons de Tastre du mystfere
Glisse k travers les bois dans Tombre du vallon.
Dieu, pour le concevoir, a fait Tintelligence :
Sous la nature enfin d^couvre son auteur !
Une voix k Tesprit parle dans son silence :
Qui n' a pas entendu cette voix dans son coeur ?
1. Translate the last two stanzas of the extract
2. Account for the gender of aewle (I. 4).
3. By reference to the above extract, and to other
poems by the same author you may^^ have read, enum-
erate the poetical qualities of Ijamartine, aud state in
a genereJ way his importance in the history of French
poetry.
II.
(a) Trois jours, trois nuits» dans la f oumaise
Tout ce peuple en feu bouillonna,
Crevant Techarpe b^maise
Du fer de lance d' I^na.
(b) Oh ! Memah), c'est la grande chose !
De quoi demain sera-t-il fait ?
L'homme aujourd' hui s^me la cause,
Demain Dieu fait mtlrir Teffet
Demain, c'est Tdclair dans \k voile,
C'est le nuage sur T^toile,
C*est un traitre qui se d^voile,
C*est le holier qui bat les tours,
C'est Tastre qui change de zone,
O'est Paris qui suit Babylone ;
Demain, c'est le sapin du tr6ne,
Aujourd* hui, e'en est le velours !
(c) Laissez mfirir vos fronts ! gardez-vous, jeunes gens,
Des syst^mes dor^ aux plumages changeants
Qui dans les carrefours s en vont faire la roue ;
Et de ce qu 'en vos coeurs TAmerique secoue,
Peuple k peine essay^, nation de hasard,
Sans tige, san^ pass6, sans histoire, sans art ;
Et de cette sagesse impie, envenim^e,
Du cerveau de Voliaire ^close tout arm^,
Fille de I'ignorance et de Torgueil, posant
Les lois des anciens jours sur les moeurs d'^ present,
Qui refait un chaos partout oti fut un monde,
Qui rudement enfonce, 6 d^mence profonde !
Le casque etroit de Sparte au front du vieux Paris.
1. Explain the meaning of (a).
2. Explain the metaphors in (6).
3. Translate (c).
4. Explain what Hugo is attacking in (c) and write
a brief note on the last two lines.
0. Sketch Hugo's life between 1820-1830.
III.
1. Taking Hemani as typical of Romantic drama
state explicitly :
(a) In what way Romanticism sought to oppose
itself to Classicism.
{b) What elements of Romanticism the dramatic
school of Augier and Dumas sought to oppose.
IV.
(a) £t puis, k mesure qu'il s'enfon9ait dans la rue,
culs-de-jatte, aveugles, boiteux, pullulaient autour de
lui, et des manchots, et des borgnes, et des Idpreux
avec leurs plaies, qui sortaiit des maisoDs, qui des
petites rues adjacentes, qui des soupiraux des caves,
hurlant, beuglant, glapissant, tous clopin-dopant,
cahin-caba, se ruant vers la lumiere, et vautr6s dans la
fange comme des limaces apr^s la pluie.
Gringoire, toujours suivi par ses trois pers^u-
teurs, et ne sachant trop ce que cela allait devenir,
marchait effare au milieu des autres, tournant les
boiteux, enjambant les culs-de-jatte, les pieds empStr^
dans cette fouriuili^re d'^lop^, comme ce capitaine
anglais qui s'enlisa dans un troupeau de crabes.
(b) Toutefois, si admirable que vous semble le
Paris d'dr pr&ent, refaites le Paris du quinzi^me si^cle,
reconstruisez-le dans votre pens^ ; regardez le jour k
travers cette haie surprenante d'aiguilles, de tours et
de clochers; rdpandez au milieu de Timmeilse ville,
d^cbirez k la pointe des ties, plissez aux arches des ponts
de la Seine avec ses larges flaques vertes et jaunes,
plus changeante qu*une robe de serpent ; d^tachez net-
tement sur un horizon d'azur le profil gothique de ce
vieux Paris; faites-en flotter le contour dans une
brume d'hiver qui s'accroche k ses nombreuses chemi-
n^es ; noyez-le dans une nuit profonde, et regardez le
jen bizarre des t^n^bres et des lumi^res dans ce sombre
labyrinthe d'^difices ; jetez-y un rayon de lune qui le
dcHsine vaguement et fasse sortir du brouillard les
grandes tetes des tours; ou reprenez cette noire sil-
houette, ravivez d'ombre les mille angles aigus des
Arches et des pignons, et faites-la saillir, plus dentel&e
quune m&choire de requin, sur le ciel de cuivre du
couchant. — El puis, comparez.
1. Translate (a) and (b).
[ovbe]
V.
1. Compare concisely Notre Dame de Paris and
Euginie Chandet (a) as to characters, (b) as to plot
and incident, (c) as to style.
2. Name and classify, if possible, the chief novels of
Balzac.
anfiietsftff of Sorotito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. H. Cameron, M.A.
I.
Translate:
II [Renan] ^tait admirable dans les discussions.
II ne discutait pas. II approuvait avec indiscre-
tion. Qoand il vous avait approuv^ jusqu'^ vous
r^uire au silence, il partait k son tour, disait
pr^is^ment le contraire de ce que vous aviez
soutenu, et terminait par ces mots: "C'est, du
reste, ce que vous disiez vous-mSme tout h Theure,
et mieux que moi.*'
Cette politesse, il la portait dans ses livres ....
CMtait au lecteur k mesurer le degr^ de force que
Renan donnait k Topinion out, et d'autre part k
Topinion non, pour savoir vers laquelle des deux
il penchait en definitive ; et cela mSme etait un
procede tres poli k regard du lecteur, quoique
peut-dtre un peu dangereux.
Et ]k aussi, une pointe de malignity trouvait
son compte. La politesse est un demi-mensonge
et, par suite, ne peut pas s'accuser [= se rendre
manifeifte] sans devenir une ironie assez forte,
Les gens que M. Renan approuvait ne laissaient
pas de soupfonner qu'il se moquait un peu d*eux.
Mais etait-ce sa faute si Ton ne peut dtre absola-
ment vrai sans 6tre rude, et si Ton ne peut dtre
poli sans quelque sourde raillerie intime ? Le
fond encore ici etait politesse, bonne Education
et bonte d'&me. Seulement il y a de petits r^gals
secrets de malice innocente k dtre tr^s bon.
— Emilb Faguet.
11.
1. Exhibit concisely some of the processes which
transformed the infinitives of the four Latin conjuga-
tions into the four French ones, and show the various
sources of each of the latter.
2. Give in full the Old French declension of the mas-
culine pronoun U, and show, by referring to phonetic
laws, how the Popular Latin declension must have
differed from the Classical Latin.
3. Give as fiill an account as possible of the deriva-
tion of the following words : oui, avant, avec, cK«, dont,
diaormais, cependant, derrihre, juaqv/d ce que, aujaur-
d*hui,
III
Translate into English :
Li Beduyn [Bedouins] ne demeurent en villes,
ne en cit^, n'en chastiaus, mais gisent ad^
(toujourfi) aus chans ; et lour mesnies, lour felbimes,
lour enfans fichent le soir de nuit, ou de jour
quant il fait mal tens, en unes mani^res de
herberges que il font de cercles de tonniaus loi^ k
perches, aussi comme li cher (chars) k ces dames
sont ; et sur ces cercles gi^tent piaus de moutons
que Ton appelle piaus de Damas, conrees ^i alua
Li Beduyn meismes en ont grans pelices, qui lour
cuevrent tout le cors, lour jambes et loot pi^.
Quant il pleut le soir et fait mal tens de nuit, il
s'encloent dedens lour pelices, et ostent les frains
k lour chevaus et les lessent paistre delez aus.
Quant ce vient Tendemain, it restendent lour
pelices au soleil et les frotent et les conroient, ne
ja n'i perra chose que elles aient estei moillies le
soir En bataille il ne portent riens que Tesp^
et le glaive. Presque tuit sont vestu de seurpeliz,
aussi comme li prestre; de touailles sont entor-
teillies lour testes, qui lour vont par dessous le
menton: dont laides gens et hydeuses sont k
regarder, car li chevel des testes et des barbes
sont tuit noir.
— JOINVILLE.
IV.
Translate into French :
Be like the promontory against which the waves
continually break, but it stands firm and tames the
fury of the water around it.
" Unhappy am I because this has happened to
me ! " Not so, but happy am I though this has
happened to me, because I continue free from
pain, neither crushed by the present nor fearing
the future. For such a thing as this might
have happened to every man ; but every man
would not have continued free from pain on
such an occasion. Why then is that rather a
misfortune than this a good fortune ? And dost
thou in all cases call that a man's misfortune
which is not a deviation from man's nature ? . . . .
Will, then, this which has happened prevent
thee from being just, magnanimous, temperate,
prudent, secure against inconsiderate opinions
and falsehood ; will it prevent thee from having
modesty, freedom, and everything else, by the
presence of which man's nature obtains all that
IS its own ? Remember, too, on every occasion
which leads thee to vexation to apply this prin-
ciple : not that this is a misfortune, but to bear it
nobly is good fortune.
— Marcus Aurelius Antoninus.
V.
Write a composition of not more than three pages
open any one of the following subjects :
1. Les Cent-Jours.
2. L'Exil de Victor Hugo.
3. Alexandre Dumas p^re.
4. Le R^lisme au XIX® sifecle.
5. Les Premiers 'explorateurs du Canada.
6. Les Qualitds qui font defaut chez les Canadiens.
7. *'Les mers ne s^parent pas, elles reunissent"
8. '' Les gouvemements sont pacifiques et les peuples
belliqueux."
aitiftietsfts of Sorotitik
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
FRENCH.
HONORS.
Ea^xi.'minPTS • -f ^' Squaib, B.A.
J^xaminers.^ Pelham Edgar, B.A., Ph.D.
I.
1. Sketch the literary history of France during the
decade 1820- 1830.
2. Outline the history of the drama since 1870.
3. Define Parnassien. Name the chief members of
the group of Parua.ssiens ?
4. Give a brief account of Ponsard.
5. Write notes on : Madatne Bovary, Cromwell^
Cinq Mars, Nisard, Anatole France, Graziella, la
Mare au Diahle, On ne hadine pas avec V Amour ^
Brunetiere.
II.
In the case of the following extracts (a) give in a few lines the sub-
ject matter and meaning of each, (6) assign each to its
proper school and times, with precise reasons.
(a) Lorsque mon coeur, noye dans des flots d'amer-
tume,
S'agite en moi, grossi de pleurs lents k couler,
Comme une mer qui s'enfle et jette son ecume
Sur le sable desert ou Dieu la fait rouler,
Mon cceur cherche une voix ])our gemir avec
elle!
Les flots en ont, les vents aussi, mais rhomme,
h^las !
U o'a qu'un triste ^ho de sa plainte immor-
telle
Qui r^sonne en lui-meme et ne console pas 1
(b) Ce manuscrit de quinze pa^es lui rev^laieat
brusquement et doucement tout, Tamour, la dou-
leur, la destin^e, la vie, T^ternit^, le commence-
* ment, la tin. C^tait comme une main qui se serait
ouverte et lui aurait jet6 subitement une poign^
de rayons. Elle sentait dans ces quelques lignes
une nature passionn^« ardente, g^nereuse, honnete,
une volont^ sacrde, une immense douleur et un
espoir immense, un coeur serr^, une extase
dpanouie. Qu'etait-ee que ce manuscrit ? Une
lettre. Lettre sans adresse, sans nom, sans date,
sans sifi^nature, pressante et d^sinteressee, Enigma
compos^e de v^rites, message d'amour fait pour
6tre apport^ par un ange et lu par une vierge,
rendez-vous donn^ hors de la terre, billet doux
d'un fantdme k une ombre.
(o) Trois grands tombereaux ^taient Ik, a la file,
charges de morts, de ces tombereaux de la salu-
brity, que Ton emplit k la pelle, le long des rues,
chaque matin, de la desserte de la veille ; et, de
meme, on. venait de les emplir de cadavres, les
arrStant a chaque corps que Ton y jetait, repar-
tant avec le gros bruit des roues pour s'arrSter plus
loin, parcourant le village entier, jusqua ce que
le tas d^bordd.t. lis attendaient, immobiles sqr
la route, qu'on les conduisit k la d^harge pu-
blique, au charnier voisin. Des pieds sortaient,
dress^ en Tair. Une tdte retombait, a demi
arrachde. Lorsque les trois tombereaux, de nou-
veau, s*^branl^rent, cahotant dans les flaques, ane
main livide qui pendait, tr^s longue, vint frotter
contre une roue ; et la main peu k peu s'asait,
dcorch^e, mangle jusqu' k Tos.
1. Translate from 7h*oi8 grands towhereaux to
dShorddt
{d) Les bStes ^taient \k, le nez toum^ vers la ficelle,
et alignant confus6ment leurs croupes indgales.
Des pores assoupis enfon9aient en terre lear
groin ; des veaux beuglaient ; des brebis bSlaient ;
lea vaches, un jarret repli^, ^talaient leur ventre
ear le gazon, et, ruminant lentement, clignaient
leurs paupidres lourdes, sous les moueherons qui
bourdonnaient autour d*elles. Des charretiers,
les bras nus, retenaient par le lieou des ^talons
cabr^, qui hennissaient k pleins naseaux. Les
juments restaient paisibies, allongeant latdte et la
crini^re pendante, tandis que leurs poulains se
reposaient k leur ombre, ou venaient les teter
quelquefois ; et, sur la longue ondulation de tons
ces corps tass^, on voyait se lever au vent, eomme
un flot, quelque criniere blanche, ou bien saillir
des comes aigues, et des tStes d'hommes qui
couraient. A T^cart, en dehors des lices cent pas
plus loin, il y avait un grand taureau noir musel^,
portcuit un cercle de fer k la narine, et qui ne
bougeait pas plus qu'une bSte de bronze. Un
enfant en haillons le tenait par une corde.
(e) J'aime Bacchus, j'aime Manon,
Tons deux partagent ma tendresse ;
Tons deux out trouble ma raison
Par une aimable et douce ivresse.
Ah ! qu'elle est belle ! Ah 1 qu'il est bon !
C'est le refrain de ma chanson.
De Manon si j'avais le coeur,
Lui seul pourrait me satisfaire,
Mais ses refus ou sa rigueur
Me rendent le vin nicessaire.
Ah! etc.
Des maux qu'elle me fait souflfrir
C'est ce nectar qui me d^livre.
Vingt fois elle m'a fait mourir.
Vingt fois Bacchus m*a fait revivre !
Ah! etc.
{f) lA-bas, sous les arbres s'abrite
Une chaumi&re au dos bossu ;
Le toit penche, le mur s'effrite,
Le seuil de la porte est moussu.
La fendtre, un volet la bouche ;
Mais du taudis, comme au temps froid
La ti^de haleine d'une bouche,
La respiration se voit.
[ov
^
Un tire-bouchon de fum^,
Tournant son mince filet bleu,
De r&me en ee bouge enferm^
. Poi-te des nouvelles k Dieu.
1. Translate extract (/).
(g) II erre comme une &me en peine
Parmi les chdnes et ies pins.
C'est le matin :
Le brouillard dtend son voile sur la plaine ;
L'^lise est grise ; les toits, noirs ;
La route, jaune ; les foug^res,
Les ajoncs, les geoSts font voir
Leurs verts si divers. — II espfere,
Avec le soleil qui vainement
Tente de rayonner au firmament ;
II est triste, avec la bu^
Qui semble enfumer les vallons.
Les coqs font les fanfarons,
Narguant les ^paisses nu^s ;
Les chemin^s du s^minaire
Fument discr&tement.
— Le village est mome et solitaire
Comme son &me qui se ment.
(h) La terre, notre m^re, et sa douce richesse,
Ne peut-elle, du inoins, ^gayer ta tristesse ?
Vols combien elle est belle ! et vois Tet^ vermeil,
Prodigue de tresors, brillant fils du soleil.
Qui vient, fertile amant d'une heureuse culture,
Varier du printemps Tunifonne verdure ;
Vois Tabricot naissant, sous les yeux d'an beau
ciel,
Arrondir son fruit doux et blond comme le miel ;
Vois la pourpre des fleurs, dont le pecher se pare,
Nous annoncer T^lat des fruits qu'il nous
prepare.
Au bord de ces pr^s verts regarde ces gu^rets,
De qui les bids touffus, jaunissantes forets,
Du joyeux moissonneur attendent la faucille.
D'agrestes dditds quelle noble famille !
La Kdcolte et la Paix, aux yeux purs et sereins,
Les dpis sur le front, les dpis dans les mains,
Qui viennent, sur les pas de la belle E^pdrance,
Verser la come d'or o& fieurit Tabondance.
amtietsfti? of Soronto<
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. Squair, B.A.
I.
Si iiiidi, du ciel pur, verse sa lave blanche,
Au travers des massifs il n'en laisse pleuvoir
Que des Eclats legers qui vont, de branche en branche,
Fluides diamants que I'une k V autre ^panche,
De leurs taches de feu semer le gazon noir.
Parfois, hors des fourr^s, les oreilles ouvertes,
L'ceil au guet, le col droit, et la ros^e au flanc,
Un cabri voyageur, en quelques bonds alertes,
Vient boire aux cavit^s pleines de feuilles vertes,
Les quatre pieds pos^s sur un caillou tremblant.
Leconte de Lisle.
1. Translate the first stanza of the extract.
•2. Examine the extract and, from characteristics
discovered in it, define the class of poetry to which it
belongs. Be precise in your references.
II.
(ti) Un brusque d^chirement de branches, de brous-
sailles, et le fourr^ s'^carta au-dessus d'eux, si vivement,
si f^linement, que Tartarin, la tete pleine d'aventures de
chaste, aurait pu se croire k Taffftt dans le Zaccar.
Manilof santa du talus, sans bruit, prfes de la voiture.
Ses petits yeux brides luisaient dans sa figure tout
^oitsh^e par les ronces, sa barbe et ses cheveux en oreille
dechien ruisselaient de Teau des branches. Haletant, bes
grosses mains courtes et velues appuyds k la }>orti^re»
il interpella en russe Sonia qui, se toumant vers Tar-
tarin, lui demanda d'une voix br^ve ....
(6) *' Malheureux ! prenez garde," crie Tartarin
bl^me d'^pouvante ; et, dt^esp^r^ment cramponn^ a la
paroi suintaute, il reprend d'une chaude ardeur son
argument de la veille en faveur de Texistence : " Elle
a du bon, que diantre ! A votre age, un beau gar^on
comme vous .... vous ne croyez done pas a Taniour,
qu4 i "
— TaHarin sur les A Ipes.
1. Translate (a).
2. What part does Manilof play in the story ?
3. What is the significance of (6) relatively to the
moral purpose of the book ?
III.
Translate :
Son cotillon de droguet dtait trop court de deux
mains ; et, comme elle avait grandi beaucoup dans
Tann^, ses bras maigres, tout mordus par le soleil,
sortaient de ses manches comme deux pattes
d'aranelle. Elle avait cependant un tablier d'incar-
nat dont elle ^tait bien fi^re, mais qui lui venait
de sa mfere, et dont elle n'avait point song^ k retirer
la bavousette, que, depuis plus de dix ans, les
jeunesses ne portent plus.
— La 'petite Fadette.
1. Replaxse the dialectal expressions by ordinary
ones.
2. Define a romantic novel. To what extent does
la petite Fadette conform to your standard ? Be precise.
IV.
Translate :
Jean. Je suis un parvenu, je suis le fils d'un
jardinier, je suis tout ce qu'on voudra, mais je ne
suis pas un imbecile, puisque j'ai fait fortune ; et,
si je me marie, je ne veux pas d'une femme qui se
croira quitte en vers moi en m'apportant deux ou
trois cent mille fmncs; qu*est-ce que c'est que
Qa ?. . . .et qui fera sauter mes petits millions dans
1
\
I
1^
^1
I.
r
line fricasa^e de denielles, de cachemires et de
diamants tout en me faisant la grimace, pendant
que je tiendrai la queue de la po^le.
— La question d* Argent,
1. Indicate the position of the author in the develop-
ment of comedy.
2. Compare Dumas fils and Scribe as dramatic
authors.
V.
Translate :
Lea Prideusea ridicules, joules en 1659, atta-
qu^rent les moeurs modemes au vif. Moli^re y
laissait les canevas italiens et les traditions de
th^tre pour y voir les choses avec ses yeux, pour
7 parler haut et ferme selon sa nature contre le
plus irritant ennemi de tout grand po^te dramati-
que au d^but, le b^gueulisme bel-esprit, et ce petit
goftt d'alcfive qui n'est que d6go<it. Lui, ITiomme
au masque ouvert et k I'allure naturelle, il avait k
d^blayer avant tout la sc^ue de ces mesquins
embarras pour s'y d^ployer k False et y ^tablir
son droit de franc-parler.
Sainte-Beuve,
1. Write notes on lea canevaa italiena, and le higuen-
lisme bel-esprit
2. Refer concisely to the intellectual qualities which,
according to Sainte-Beuve, characterised Molifere's
genius.
nnftiet0ft9 of STototito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GERMAN.
HONORS.
Examiner : Prof. Horning.
GOETHE, SCHILLER AND UHLAND.
1. What data of the Faust legend did Goethe use in
his drama ?
2. {Tfot to he translated) :
Ihr bringt mit euch die Bilder froher Tage,
TJnd manche Jiebe Schatten steigen auf ;
Gleich einer alten halbverklungnen Sage
Koramt erste Lieb' und Freundschaft mit herauf ;
Der Schmerz und neu, es wiederholt die Klage
Des Lebens labyrinthisch irren Lauf,
Und nennt die Guten, die, urn schone Stunden
VoraGllick getauscht,vor mirhinweggeschmunden.
Write full explanatory notes on this passage as to
date of composition and references.
3. Translate :
MEPHISTOPHELES.
Nun sind wir schon wieder an der Grenze
unseres Witzes, da wo euch Menschen der Sinn
liberschnappt. Warum machst du Gemeiuschaft
mit uns, wenn du sie nicht durchfiihren kannst ?
Willst fliegen und bist vor'm Schwindel nicht
sicher ? Drangen wir uns dir auf, oder du dich
uns?
FAUST.
Fletsche deine gefrassigen Zahne mir nicht so
entgegen ! Mir ekelt's ! — Grosser herrlicher
Geist, der du mir zu erscheinen wurdigtest, der
du mein Herz kennest und meine Seele, wamm
an den Schandgesellen mich Bcbmieden, der sich
am Schaden weidet und am Yerderben sich letzt ?
(a) Discuss the relations of Faust and Mephisto-
pheles as shown in both Parts of the Faust
(b) Ch*088er herrlicher Oeiat — Who ? When did
' he appear to Faust and in what manner ? What part
does he play in the drama ?
(o) What other quarrels between Faust and
Mephistopheles take place in Part I ?
4. Translate :
Ein Sumpf zieht am Gebirge bin,
Verpestet alles schon Errungene ;
Den faulen Pfuhl auch abzuziehen,
Das letzte war' das Hochsterrungene.
EroflTn' ich Raume vielen Millionen,
Nicht sicher zwar, doch thatig-frei zu wohnen.
Grlin das Gefilde, fruchtbar ; Mensch und Heerde
Sogleich behaglich auf der neusten Erde,
Gleich angesiedelt an des Htigels Kraft,
Den aufgewalzt ktibn-emsige Volkerschaft.
Im Innern hier ein paradiesisch Land,
Da rase draussen Fluth bis auf zum Rand,
Und wie sie nascht gewaltsam einzuschiessen,
Geuieindrang eilt die Lucke zu verschliessen.
Ja ! diesem Sinne bin ich ganz ergeben,
Das ist der Weisheit letzter Schluss :
Nur der verdient sich Freiheit wie das Leben,
Der taglich sie erobern muss.
Und so verbringt, umrungen von Gefahr,
Hier Kindheit, Mann und Greis sein tUchtig Jahr.
Solch ein Gewimmel mocht' ich sehen,
Auf freiem Grund mit freiera Volke stehen.
Zum Augenblicke dUrft' ich sagen :
Verweile doch, du bist so schon !
(a) When wjis this spoken ?
(h) Doe« Faust now forfeit his life in accordance
with the agreement with Mephistopheles ?
5. Translate:
Jetzt versteh' ich das Entsetzen,
Das geheimnisvolle Grauen,
Das mich schaudernd stets gefasst,
Wenn man mir den Namen nannte,
Dieses furchtbaren Geschlechtes,
Das sich selbst vertilgend hasst,
Oegen seine eignen Qlieder
Wtitend mit Erbittrung rast !
Schaudemd hort' ich oft und wieder
Von dem Schlangenhass der Brtider,
Und jetzt reisst mein Schreckenschicksal
Mich, die arme, rettungslose,
In den Strudel dieses Hasses,
Dieses Unglucks mich hinein !
(a) Give a short synopsis of the tragedy up to
this point.
(6) How does the idea of Fate in this drama
difiFer, if at all, from the Fate of the Greek tragedians ?
(c) What is the office of the chorus in this play ?
Point out any weakness in its use.
(d) Give a brief account of Fate-Tragedy and show
its relation to Schiller.
6. (a) Briefly indicate Uhland's place in German
literature as a balladist.
(b) Give a brief synopsis of Dea Goldachinieds
Tockterlein,
7. Translate :
(a) Hort von meiuer Minniglichen,
Lieben, hort ein neues Lied !
Denn der Winter ist entwichen,
Maienlust mit Wohlgertichen,
Maienwonn' ist aufgebluht.
Lieben, offnet eure Sinne ;
Mai erwacht,
Minne lacht,
Mai hat Minne,
Minne Sang wohl angefacht.
(6) — Natiirlich litt die Wirtschaft unter solchen
Riistungen. Zwar hielt Anton mit Strenge darauf,
dass wenigstens das nothwendigste gethan wurde
aber auch er fuhlte, dass eine Zeit gekommen
war, wo die Sorge um das eigene Wohl und Wehe
schwindet uber der Angst um das Grosste, das der
Mensch auf Erden besitzt. Die Gertichte, welche
jeden Tag drohender wurden, erhielten ihn und
seine Umgebung in einer fortwahrenden Auf-
regung und brachten zuletzt einen Zustand hervor,
in dem der Seele die fieberhafte Spannung Ge-
wohnheit ist. Man sah mit einer wilden Gleich-
gultigkeit in die Zukunft und ertrug das Unbe-
hagen das Tages als etwas Nattirliches.
&nmtvuitp of Sovonio*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GERMAN,
HONORS.
Examiner ; G, H. Needleb, B.A., Ph.D.
I.
1, What drama had Grillparzer written before
Sappho f Make a comparison of the spirit of the two
plays.
2. Which of the characters in Sappho do you con-
sider best drawn, as to clearness of outline and fidelity
to nature ? Give re&sons for your opinion.
8. Compare the charactor of Sappho with that of
Heinrich in Die veraunkene Olocke, pointing the tragic
element in each play.
11.
4. Give the substance of the poems from which the
following extracts are taken, making explanatory
comments to show how they illustrate Heine's opinions
or character, and telling at what period of his life they
they were written :
(a) " Was schert mich Weib, was schert mich Kind,
Ich trage weit bessres Verlangen ;
Lass sie betteln gehn, wenn sie hungrig sind, —
Mein Kaiser, mein Kaiser gefangen !
(b) Die Mutter nahm ein Wachslicht,
Und bildete draus ein Herz.
" Brinie das der Mutter Gottes,
Dann heilt sie deinen Schmerz."
(c) Sei mir gegriisst, du ewiges Meer !
Sei mir gegriiast zehntausendmal
Aus jauchzendem Herzen,
Wie einst dicb begriissten
Zehntausend Qriechenherzen.
(d) '' Nachtwacbter mit langen Fortschrittabeinen,
Du kommst so verstort einher gerannt !
Wie eebt es dabeim den lieben Meinen,
Ist scnon bef reit das Vaterland ? "
(e) Lebet wobl, ibr flatten Sale,
Qlatte Herren, glatte Frauen !
Auf die Berge will icb steigen,
Lacbend auf eucb niederscbauen.
(/) Scbone Wiege meiner Leiden,
Scbones Orabmal meiner Rub,
bcllone Stadt, wir mtissen scbeiden, —
Lebe wobl ! ruf icb dir zu.
5. Cbaracterize Heine's prose, naming his cbief
prose works.
6. Compare concisely Qoetbe, Byron, Heine and
Freiligrath in tbeir attitude toward tbeir native coun-
tries, justifying or condemning tbe main lines of con-
duct in eacb.
7. Quote tbe remainder of any two of the following
poems :
(a) Du bist wie eine Blume
(6) Icb grolle nicbt, und wenn das Herzauch bricht
(c) Ein Ficbtenbaum stebt einsam
{d) Ein JUngling liebt ein Madcben
III.
8. Explain tbe aptness of tbe title of Keller's
Romeo und Julie auf dem Lorfe,
9. Describe tbe part played by the " Schwaraer
Geiger " in the story.
10. Translate and explain the following phrases :
(a) ... mit welchem me ibrem eigenen Manneein
X fiir ein U machte.
(6) icb glaube aber, du bast es binter den Ohren,
nicbt ?
IV.
11. By what characters and episodes in Ekkehard
does Scheflel endeavor to portray the surviving heathen
elements in the national life of the time ?
12. Give briefly the substance of Schefiers version
of the WaUhari'lied. How is it connected with the
Nibelungenlied ?
13. Wherein do you consider the main strength of
Keller and of Scheffel respectively as prose writers to
lie?
V.
14. Translate :
34> tttt t\x6), jiftet nieber.
©eit id) itx ®d)ma6) ter ^anf^ett mid) cntrafft,
n>arb un^ ba^ erfte^ neue gro^begegnen
auf btcfe 8lbcnb|iunbc »orbereitet«
34^ ^offte ni^t, ate Srflen cu(^ ju grilpen
hi tnctncd SBirfcnd ftrtttfgnn ®cbtet.
9liin freut mt(^'^ boppelt ; fo ertDeiji fi(^*^ tod),
ba^ ii)x SBetuf unb ^raft unb Siebc ^abt
^uxd)brtd)tn fe^ t4^ eud^^ mtt fef^er gaufl
bie m6rberif(^en ©tride ber SBejiallung,
bent !Wenf(^enbtenfi entfltel[)n, utn ®ott ju fut^en.
Hauptmann, Versunkene Olocke.
15. By whom and to whom are these words spoken ?
Contrast the ideals of the two persons.
16. Explain :
(a) Seit ich der Schmach der Krankheit mich
erUraft.
(b) strittigem Oehiet,
17. Outline Hauptmann's development as a drama-
tist
VI.
18. Write shoi*t accounts of Theodor Komer, A. W.
Schlegel, Jean Paul, Auerbach, Paul Heyse, Suder-
mann.
Bnftifrstfts of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR
MIDDLE HIGH GERMAN AND PHILOLOGY
HONORS.
Examiner : G. H. Needler, B.A., Ph.D.
I.
1. Translate:
269 Die in den betten l&gen und heten wunden n6t,
die muosen des vergezzen, wie herte was der t6t.
die siechen ungesunden muosen si verklagen.
si freuten sich der msere gein der h6hgezite tagen,
270 Wie si leben wolden d& zer wirtscaft.
wtinne kne m&ze, mit vreuden uberkraft,
heten al die liute, swaz man ir da vant.
des huop sich michel vreude liber &[ daz G6n-
thdres lant.
271 An einem pfinxtmorgen sdh man flire gan,
gekleidet wunnecliehe, vil manegen kilenen man,
fUnf tusent oder mere, da zer hShgezit.
sich huop diu kurzewile an manegem ende wider
stilt.
272 Der wirt der hete die sinne, im was daz wol
erkant,
wie rehte herzenliche der belt von Niderlant
sine swester trfite swie'r si niene gesach,
der man s8 grozer secene vor alien juncfWuwen
jach.
273 D6 sprach zuo dem ktinege der degen Ortwin :
" welt ir mit vollen 6ren zer hohgezite sin,
s8 suit ir lazen seouwen diu wunneclichen kint,
die mit so grdzen Sren hie zen Burg6nden sint."
Xibelungenlied,
2. Write notes explanatory of the meaning of (a)
lines 1 and 2 of stanza 269 ; (b) lines 2 and 3 of stanza
272.
3. Parse wunden (269,1), muosen (269,2), «i (2693),
der (272,4), grdzer (272,4).
4. Compare the following words with their modem
equivalents, explaining the variation in form, and giv-
ing other examples of similar transformations : muosen^
ivas, vant, huop, strlt, im, gesach, scouwen.
5. Translate :
1780 " Nu st6 wir von dem sedele," sprach der spile-
man:
" si ist ein klineginne ; und lUt si f lire gd.n.
bieten ir die ere : si ist ein edel wip.
da mite ist ouch getiuret unser (ew^ders lip."
1781 " Nein dureh mine liebe," sprich Hdgene :
" s6 wolden sich versinnen dise degene
daz ih'z dureh vorhte^aete, und solde ich hine
gen.
ich enwil dureh ir deheinen nimmer von dem
sedele sten.
1782 J& zimet ez uns beiden zew^are Isizen baz.
zwiu solde ich d^n 6ren, der mir istgehaz?
daz engetuon ich nimmer, die wile ich h&n den
lip.
ouch enruoche ich waz mich nidet des kunec
Etzelen wip."
1783 Der tibermtiete Hagene leit' iiber siniu bein
ein vil liehtez w^fen, <iz des knopfe scein
ein vil liehter jaspes, griiener danne ein gras.
wol erkande'z Kriemhilt daz ez Sifrides was.
1784 D^ si daz swert erkande, do gie ir trflrens n6t
sin gehilze daz was guldin, diu scheide ein
porte r6t.
ez raande si ir leide : weinen si began,
ich waene ez hete dar umbe der kiiene Hagene
get&n.
NihduThgenlied.
6. Explain the connection of this passage in the
narrative.
7. Explain ez mande si ir leide (1784,3).
8. Write what notes you think necessary in expla-
nation of the form of the following : (a) ste, (6) ein edel
wlp, (c) zewd/re, (d) zwiu, (e) engetuon^ (/) hdn, (g)
scein, (h) gie, (i) trurena,
9. Sketch the parts played by Hagen, Brunhild and
Etzel in the Nibelungenlied.
II.
10. Point out the characteristic features of epic
poems. Illustrate your answer by comparing the
Nibelungenlied with any other epic poems you know,
11. Describe concisely the conditions that led to the
rise and the decline of court poetry in the Middle High
German period. Name the leading court epic poets
and the subjects of their principal works.
III.
12. Explain the use of the terms High German,
Middle German, Alemannic.
13. Account for the foreign linguistic elements within
the borders of the present German empire.
14. Arrange the following words in groups accord-
ing to the period at which they became part of the
German vocabulary. Give their derivation and write
brief notes showing how they mark the progress of
civilization in Germany : Abenteuer, Kohl, Wein,
Kommentar, Examen, Mauer, Fenster, Textor, Meile,
predigen, Magistrat, schreiben, Tournier, Melanchthon,
Kreuz, Aria, charmant, Montag, Conto, Brigade.
eitittiersfts Of Soroitto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 19()1.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
ITALIAN.
HONORS.
Examiners • I ^- H. Fraser, B.A.
I.
Translate the following extracts :
(ja) Oh giun bontk de'cavalieri antiqui !
Eran rival i, eran di ih diversi,
e si sentian degli aspri colpi iniqui
per tutta la persona anco aolersi ;
eppur, per selve oscure e calli obliqui,
insieme van senza saspetto aversi.
Da quattro sproni il destrier punto, arriva
dove una strada in due si dipartiva.
1. What episode is described in this stanza ?
2. Give a prose word for calli (1. 5).
3. Scan line 1, marking and naming the caesura.
(6) Dico che '1 mago al gatto, e gli altri al topo
s'assimigliar nelle battaglie dianzi ;
ma non s'assimigli&r gid. cosl dopo
che con Tanel si fe'la donna innanzi.
Attenta e fissa stava a quel, ch'era uopo,
aeci6 che nulla seco il mago avanzi ;
e come vide che lo scudo aperse,
chiuse gli occhi, e ]asci6 quivi caderse.
1. Mago(}, 1). Who is meant? What is the alle-
gorical signification of this personage ?
i
2. Hand innanzi (L 4). Who was la donna t
Where had she obtained I'anel ? In what sense is she
the heroine of the poem ?
3. Give more usual Italian expressions for era uopo
(1. 6), and nvUa avanzi (1. 6).
4. Derive tiopo, acudo, seco, quivi, douTia,
5. In what respects does L'Orlando Furioso differ
from the Chanson de Roland ?
6. Describe Ariosto's relations to the House of Este*
11.
Translate the following extracts :
(a) S'alcun gik mai, tra frondeggianti rive,
puro vide stagnar liquido argento,
o giii precipitose ir acque vive
per alpe, o in piaggia erbosa a passo lento ;
quelle al vago desio forma e descrive,
e ministra maniera al suo tormento ;
ch^ Timagine lor gelida e molle
Tasciuga e scalda e nel pensier ribolle.
1. Give an outline of the description of the drought
from which this stanza is taken, noting its merits as a
description.
2. Explain the meaning of the last two lines.
3. Give other meanings of the word vago (1. 5).
(6) Bello in si bella vista anco h Torrore,
e, di mezzo la tema, esce il diletto ;
n^ men le trombe orribili e canore
sono agli orecchi lieto e fero oggetto,
pure il campo fedel, bench^ miiiore,
par di suon piti mirabile e d*aspetto ;
e canta in piti guerriero e chiaro carme
ogni sua tromba, e maggior luce han Tarme.
1. Illustrate from the stanza the literary device of
parallel ideas common in Tasso's poetr3\
2. Give a brief account of Tasso's life up to the com-
Sletion of the Gerusalemme Liberata. Where did he
ie, under what circumstances, and when ?
3. *' The Gerusalemme Liberata is not a heroic epic
in the proper sense of the word." Discuss.
How does Tas80 treat his . historical material in
the Gerusalemme Liberata, in order to increase the
interest of the poem ?
m.
Transl&te :
Troverai in questa lettera o troppo, o troppo
poco, poich^ Tho scritto in mezzo ai dolori, spronato
dftl desiderio che nessuno mentisca sul conto mio.
Ta leva e aggian|;i come ti detta la coscienza, e
bada che non ti raccia velo Tamicizia passata tra
noi. Sii breve, schietto, severo: e domanda di
me ai piiL intimi come ai semplici conoscenti, per
raccapezzare il vero ch'io non avrd saputo dirti.
Per quanto ne pensino certuni, io non credo che
il mio nome debba essere tanto temuto da far
se^are col carbone chiunque s'attentasse a
rammentarlo : nonostante f ai in modo di porti in
salvo, stampando f uori d'ltalia, o lasciando anonimo
il libretto.
Giuseppe Giusti.
Wintbtt^t9 ot STotonio*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
ITALIAN.
HONORS.
B^i.^:{l;%l^^ ^^
I.
Translate the following extracts :
(a) A questa orribil voce, la tremante
tramortita fanciulla alza la testa,
la qual, vedendo il giovenetto amante
solo nella contesa aspra e molesta,
giunto il duol col timor, ch'avea avante,
sembrava, piii che pria, pallida e mesta,
gik perduto ogni senso, in verde piaggia
fior, ch'aduggiato languidetto caggia.
1. Name the writer of the extract. From what
poem is it taken ?
2. This poem has been described as transitional.
Enlarge.
3. What is the source of the poem ?
(&) Lionardo, conoscendo Tingegno di quel principe
esser acuto e discreto, volse (quel che non avea
mai fatto con quel priore) discorrere col duca
largamente sopra di questo : gli ragiond assai
delTarte, e lo lece capace che ffl'ingegni elevati,
talor che manco lavorano, piu adoperano, cer-
cando con la mente Tinvenzioni, e formandosi
quelle perfette idee, che poi esprimono e ritraggono
le mani da quelle gik concepute neirintelletto.
i
1. What is the subject of Vasari's chief work ?
2. When was it written ?
3. Give more usual forms for volse (L 2), assai (1. 4),
lo fece capdce (1. 5), Tnamco (I. 6), What is the ante-
cedent of qudle (1. 9) ?
4. Give the past definite 3 sg. of discorrere and
ritraggono.
(c) lo potrei con altri molti esempi spiegar la
ricchezza della natura riel produr suoi effetti con
maniere inescogitabili da noi, quando il senso e
Tesperienza non lo ci mostrasse, la quale anco
talvolta non basta a supplire alia nostra incapa-
city ; onde se io non saprd precisamente determiuar
la maniera della produzione della cometa, non mi
dovrii esser negata la scusa, e tanto piti, quant lo
non mi son mai arrogato di poter cid fare, cono-
scendo potere essere che ella si faccia in alcan
modo lontano da ogni nostra immaginazione.
1. Give the principal biographical facts concerning
the writer of the extract
(d) Ma sovr'ogni augellin vago et gentile,
Che piil spieghi leggiadro il canto e'l volo,
Verso il suo spirto tremulo e sottile
La Sirena de'boschi, il Rosignuolo ;
E tempra in guisa il peregrino stile,
Che par maestro de Talato stuolo.
In mille fogge il suo cantar distingue,
E transforma una lingua in mille lingue.
1. Name the writer of the extract, and the poem
from which it is taken.
2. Describe the pecularities of the literary style
which this poem inaugurated.
3. Give some account of opposite literary tendencies
in the same century.
4. Re-write in prose order the first four lines.
(e)- Come sul capo al naufrago
L'onda s'avvolve e pesa,
L'onda su cui del misero,
Alta pur dianzi e tesa,
5 Scorrea la vista a scemere
Prode remote invan ;
Tal su queU'alma il cumulo
Delle memorie scese !
Oh quante volte ai poateri
10 Narrar sS stesso imprese,
£ suH'eteme pagine
Cadde la stanca man !
1. Explain the allusion in oh quante. . . .man !
2. Scan verses 4, 5 and 6, marking the last stressed
syllable in each. Indicate which verse is of the
normal type for this metre, and show how the other
two depart from the normal.
3. Draw up a scheme of. rhyme for the complete
stanza.
(/) Su, Italia novella ! su, libera ed una !
Mai abbia chi a vasta, ^ecura fortuna
L'angustia prepone d'anguste cittJk !
Sien tutte le fide d'un solo stendardo !
Su, tutti da tutte ! Mai abbia il codardo,
L'inetto che sogna parzial liberty !
1. Write a biographical note on the writer of the
extract, naming him, and stating for what he is noted
in the history of Italian literature.
2. Parse abbia (1. 2).
II.
1. For what are the following writers celebrated : —
Alfieri, Leopardi, Foscolo, Berni, Tassoni ?
2. Give some account of II Gortegiano and its author-
3. Write a short paper on Manzoni and Romanticism.
4. Name and describe the chief work of Parini.
5. Describe briefly snjfive of the following, naming
the author : Baldtbs, Le Api, II Principe, Gli Ecatom-
miti, n Pastor Fido, II Ruscelletto Orgoglioao, Annali
dCIUUia, VOaservatore, Gli Animaii Parlanti, Merope,
L'Assedio di Firenze, Novelle Rusticane.
8ltiliift0fts Of srotont^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
SPANISH.
HONORS.
c^^ .• f W. H. Fbaser, B.A.
Examiners : { p ^^^^^^ jj^;^ p^ ^^
I.
Translate tho following extracts :
(a) Ah, Mingo Revulgo, Mingo !
ah, Mingo Revulgo, hao !
que es de tu sayo de blao ?
no le vistes en domingo ?
Que es de tu jub6n bermejo ?
porque traes tal sobrecejo ?
andas asta madrugada
la cabeza desgrenada :
no te Uotras de buen rejo ?
1. Explain the meaning of Mingo Revidgo (I. 1).
Who is the other interlocutor ?
2. Give modem Spanish for te Uotras (1. 9).
3. Describe the work from which the extract is
taken. What interest attaches to it in the history of
the Spanish drama ?
(b) Como se suele ver en las corrientes
de los undosos rios quien se ahoga,
que asi^ndose de rama, yerba 6 soga,
la tiene firme, de sentido ageno,
asi Marramaquiz tiene el relleno,
que ahogdndose en cohgojas y desvelos,
no soltaba la causa de sus celos.
1. What is the subject and title of the work from
which the extract is taken ?
2. Write a note on the fertility and versatility of
Lope de Vega as a writer.
3. Give the main ieucts of his biography.
(c) Ta OS digo que el monte y prado
leccion k mi amor han dado.
Mirad ese arroyo f rio
que ronda esas fiores bellas,
cuyas aguas lenguas se hacen
y solo se satisfacen
en que se miran en ellas.
1. Give Spanish equivalent for lenguas 8e huM
(1. 6).
2. What is the subject of miran (1. 7), and the ante-
cedent of ellas (1. 7) ?
3. Name the best known work of Tirso de Molina
For what is it celebrated ?
(d) Certifico 6, vuesa merced que habia uno dellos
que se Uamaba Surre, vizcaino, tan olvidado ya
de c6mo y por d6nde se comia, que una cortezilla
que le cupo la llev6 dos veces & los ojos, y de tres
no la acertaba & encaminar de las manos & la boca.
1. Name the work from which this extract is taken ?
2. Give some account of the works of the author.
3. Give the modern contraction of vuesa Tfierced
(1. 1).
4. Write the infin. and 1 sg. pres. indie, of ctip^
(1. 3).
(e) Oyen el ruido, corren, se agazapan,
pierden el tino ; mas al fin se escapan
atropelladamente
por cierto pasadizo abierto & diente.
" i Esto tenemos, dijo el campesino ;
reniego yo del queso, del tocino
y de quien busca gustos
entre los sobresaltos y los sustos."
1. Name any two writers of Spanish fables i^
18th century.
2. Write in full the preterit of oyen,
3. From what Latin letters are ie in pierde^* u^j
abierto, and n in quien derived ? Give f^
examples.
(/) El Emperador, benigno,
que alee del suelo le ordena,
y la pldtica diffcil
con sagacidad empieza.
T entre sereno y afable
al cabo le manifiesta,
que es el que & Borbon aJoje
voluntad suya resuelta.
1. Who was the first distinctly romantic Spanish
writer of the 19th century ?
2. In what sense was Spanish romanticism a revival
rather that an innovation ?
3. Parse aloje (1. 7).
4. Scan line 2 and write a note on this form of
stanza.
(ff) £1 amo patea, y grita, y ruega & todos que no
se vayan, que al fin se compondrd : nadie lo cree, y
los salones van quedando desiertos, los mtisicos en-
vuelven en las bayetas sus instrumentos,}' toda la
concurrencia, en fin^ gana por asalto la calle pro-
curando evitar los ominosos preparativos, cerrando
herm^ticamente sus narices, y corriendo precipita-
dos i buscar otra atm6sfera no tan mefltica y
angustiosa.
1. What was the chief topic of the writings of this
author ?
II.
1. Describe the effect on Spanish literature of the
change of dynasty which took place in 1700.
2. Give some account of G6ngora and his literary
innovation.
3. Name the writers of the following, and describe
each work briefiy : M Moro Expdsito, Celestina, Las
Mocedadea del did.
4. Write notes on Padre Isla, Gallego, Moratin (the
Younger).
[DICTATION AT 4.30 O'CLOCK.]
atHnetBftv of {Toronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
SPANISH.
HONORS.
Exarmnevs J ^- H. Fraser, B.A.
I
Translate the following extracts :
(a) O piensas por ser man^ebo baliente
O ninna de dias que a luenne estar^,
E fasta que liegues a biejo impotente
La mi venida me detardar6 ?
Abisate bien que yo llegard
A ty a desora ; que non he cuydado
Que tu seas manQebo o biejo cansado,
Que qual te fallare tal te leuard
1. Give modem Spanish for a luenne (1. 2) and
derive luenne.
2. Parse me (1. 4), fallare (1. 8).
3. What ground is there for supposing that poems
of this kind were common in Europe in the dark and
middle ages?
(6) Otra nocte me lo catare,
Si es uertad bine lo sabre.
Bine es vertad lo que io digo ;
en todo en todo lo prohio ;
non pudet seer otra sennal ;
achesto es, i non es al.
Nacido es Dios per uer de fembra
in achest mes de deeember.
Ala ire o que fure, aoralo e ;
por Dios de todos lo terne.
1. Give modem Spanish forms for biru (1. 2), pudet
(I 5), achesto (1. 6), fare (1. 9), terne (1. 10).
2. Give modern Spanish equivalents for en todx) en
todo (I. ^),prohio (1. 4), al (I. 6).
3. Explain the form aoralo e (1. 9), and derive
vertad (1. 3), al (1. 6).
4. Who is the speaker in the extract ? What inter-
est attaches to the fragment from which the extract is
taken ?
6. Sketch briefly the history of the Spanish drama
anterior to Lope de Vega.
II.
Translate the following extracts :
(a) Ya sabeis que son las ciencias
Que mas curso y mas estimo,
Matemd>ticas sutiles,
Por quien al tiempo le quito,
Por quien & la fama rompo
La jurisdiccion y oficio
De ensenar mas cada dia ;
Pues cuando en mis tablas miro
Presentes las novedades
De los venideros siglos,
Le gano al tiempo gracias
De contar lo que yo he dicho.
1. Write a note on curao (1. 2).
2. Point out an}' archaisms in the extract.
(b) Aunque el parabien es bien
Darme del bien que conquisto,
De solo haberos hoy visto
Os admito el parabien :
Y asi, de llegarme & ver
Con el bien que no merezco,
El parabien agradezco,
Estrella, que amanecer
Podeis, y dar alegria
Al mas luciente farol.
1. Who is the speaker ?
(c) I Qui^n, Astolfo, podrd parar, prudente
La furia de un caballo desbocado ?
I Qui^n detener de un rio la corriente
Que corre al mar soberbio y despenado ?
I Quidn un peiiasco Huspender valiente
De la cima de un monte desgajado ?
Pues todo fi&cil de parar se mira,
Mas que de un vulgo la soberbia ira.
Digalo en bandos el rumor partido
Pues se oye resonar en lo profundo
De las monies el eco repetido,
Unos / Astolfo! y otros ! Segiamundo !
El dosel de la jura, reducido
A segunda intencion, & horror segundo,
Teatro funesto es, donde importuna
Represents tragedias la fortuna.
1. Explain the connection between this passage and
the the rest of the drama.
2. Give Spanish synonyms for peflaaco (1. 5) and
monte (1. 6), defining each word.
3. desgajado (1. 6). Express by another Spanish
word.
4. Classify the above extracts with reference to their
poetical composition.
5. Briefly state the events related in the closing
scenes of the drama.
III.
Translate :
^ Qu^ cosa es romanticismo?... (ha pregun-
tado el publico ;) y los sdbios le han contestado
cada cual i su manera. Unos le han dicho que
era todo lo ideal y romanesco ; otros por el con-
trario, que no podia ser sino lo escrupulosamente
hist6rico ; cu&les han creido ver en ^1 & la natu-
raleza en toda su verdad ; cudies i la imaginacion
en toda su mentira ; algunos han asegurado que
s61o era propio & describir la Edad Media ; otros le
han hallado aplicable tambien & la modei*na ; aque-
lies le han querido hermanar con la religion y con
la moral ; estos le han echado d reSir con ambas ;
hay quien pretende dictarle reglas ; hay, por
Mtimo, quien sostiene que su condicion es la de no
guardar ninguna.
Mesonero Romanos.
smfnersfti? of UToronto
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
PASS.
HEBREW TEXTS.
(J.F.
: \ J. F.
I R. G.
J. F. MacCurdy, LLD.
Examiners: -{ J. F. MacLaughlin, M.A., B.D.
Mir BISON, M. A.
1. Translate PsaJm xcii. 1-6.
1. Parse nHin'? (2) i ""annDE^ (»)•
2. Explain force of prep, in v. 4.
II. Translate Psalm cxxii.
1. (a) Explain ni^J^DH TC^J W examine ^rh (!)•
2. ^nnDE^' P*^™e, give exact force.
3. D'^^Di^D' P*"®* How might this word be emended ?
4. Parse and explain verbal form in v. 2.
5. Parse Q^^ (4). Explain.
6. ^"^W^. Give exact value of prep. here.
7. n^J (^)* Inflect this verb in Qal throughout
III. Translate Proverbs iv. 20-27.
1. Parse QH (20) ; ir'pMSl); ^^-^^25); ^^^26).
Explain pointing of D*1DE^ (21)-
2. ^!3*1* Inflect in sing, and plur. Giving examples
with pron. suffix.
[ovbb]
3. Write a brief note od the Book of Proverbs.
IV. Translate Job. ^\ 4-5, 11-15.
1. Parse and explain forms: 15<^T^1 (4); "^CD (12).
2. What emendation has been suggested for v. 5.
3. Sketch briefly the Argument of the Book of Job,
Y. What are the chief characteristics of Hebrew Poetry \
What are the different kinds of parallelism f Illustrate
from selections.
Slnftifrfiftff of Soronto«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
HEBREW SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
f J. F.
.-^ J. F.
(R. G.
J. F. McCuRDY, LL.D.
Examiners ;-{ J. F. McLaughlin, B.D.
MuRisoN, M.A.
A.
1. Give the various forms and describe the uses of the
demonstrative prououns. How is the demonstmtive |^]
used with interrogatives and with adverbial expi*es8ion8 ?
2. How is comparison made and how is the superlative
expressed in Hebrew ) Give examples.
3. "What uses of the Hebrew perfect correspond to the
English present tense 1 Give examples.
4. How may a wish be expressed 1 What are the com-
mouly occurring optative particles'? Show, by examples,
how a wish may be expressed by an interrogative sentence
beginning with "^J^.
B.
Translate into Hebrew :
1. Then said I, Ah, Lord God ! behold, I caunot speak :
for I am a child. But the Lord (Jehovah) said unto me,
Say not, I am a child : for to whomsoever I shall send thee
thou shalt go, and whatsoever I shall command thee thou
shalt speak.
2. But abide thou in the things which thou hast leame<l
and hast been assured of, knowing of whom thou hast
[ovfk]
i
learned them ; and that from a babe thou hist known the
sacred writings which are able to make thee wise unto
salvation.
3. Then the people increased and grew many upon the
face of the earth. And they polluted their souls by dn
and rebellion against the Lord. Their wickedness and their
trangressions increased day by day. They forgot the Lord
who had formed them and gi^en them the earth as a po6r
session. They made images of copper and iron, of wood
and of stone, to which they prostrate^ themselves in worship.
anfuersfti? of {Toronto,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
HEBREW TEXTS II.
f J. F. :
: ^ J. F.
(R. G.
J. F. McCuRDY, LL.D.
Eccaminera : -{ J. F. McLaughlin, M.A., B.D.
MuRisoN, M.A«
I. Translate Proverbs (a) viii. 22-26; (b) xii. 12-16;
(c) xxx 10-17.
1. Parse ^JJp (^^)* ^^^® rules for pointing of verbs
with suffixes. >
2. |J^"» (6 12). Emend y{^^ (U). Is Qeri or Kethibh
the correct reading 1
3. ?E^7 (10). Parse. Explain fully the term Denomin-
ative verbs.
4. Give derivations of words 4 and 5 in (c) 14.
5. Y^itD (^^)* Sxplaii^ Massoretic note on this word.
6. Write brief note explanatory of HDI^r (^^) ^ ^I^C^
(16). I
7. nnp''7 (^^)- Give correct pointing.
8. Write brief notes on the Book of Proverbs.
IL Translate Job (a) iii. 3-6 ; (b) xiii 7-12 ; (c) xxviii.
24-28.
1. Parse and explain forms : ^3^^, n715<j 11*111 '>
(3) j;Din (4) i nn^ (6).
[OVBR]
2. niD71l* ^^^® correct pointing.
3. Explain use of imperfect in v. 3.
4. Explain what Job means in (b) vt. 7, 8.
5. Distinguish between pointing of ]^^ with suff. as prep,
and as sign of def. ace.
6. Il^^n* Explain form.
7. Parse pH (25); r\^pr] (27); nXI'' (28).
8. *' Verse 28 is the prosaic gloss of a pious reader "
(Duhm). Examine this statement.
9. Give purpose and brief outline of Book of Job.
Wini\»tv»it9 of {Toronto.
ANNCJAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
HEBREW SYNTAX-
J. F. McCuRDY, LL.D.
Examiners : '{ J. F. McLaughlin, B. A.
MuRisoN, M.A.
1. Define the teims annexion and apposition, and explain
their use in Hebrew Grammar. Show, by examples, what
various ideas may be expressed in each of these ways.
2. In vhat various ways may one verb be subordinated to
another, and what relations are indicated by such subordina-
tion 1 Give one or two examples in each case.
3. Describe the use of the relative ^^^ and explain the
construction of a relative clause in Hebrew.
4. Translate into Hebrew :
(1) I will sing of the mercies of the Lord for ever ;
With my mouth will I make known thy faithful-
ness to all generations.
(2) Grod's law is perfect, His testimony is sure and His
precepts ai*e right.
(3) Jesus (W^^) answered and said unto him, Because
I said unto thee, I saw thee underneath the fig-tree (nj^tH)
believest (Hiph. of 7|^^) thou? Thou shalt see greater
things than these.
[oveb]
BIBLICAL ABAMAIC.
1. Translate Daniel ii. 8-12.
2. Parse HJ^. IDW/ pDT. pn^lH. ^HTK (^- ») 5
n^mnh (y- 10); njim (v. n); msinb (v. 12).
3. Decline n^P> n^t<» Tl^D- Inflect ^gjp in Peal
thronghout
4. Point out the chief di£ferences you have noticed, both
in etymology and syntax, between Hebrew and Biblical
Aramaia
5. What parts of the O. T. are written in Biblical
Aramaic ?
Cftnftifrsftff Of Sorontik
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
HEBREW TEXTS.
Examiner: J. F. McCurdy, LL.D.
LYRICAL POETRY.
1. Translate Ps. ix. 2-6.
2. (a) In ix. 2 a Sept has i^ofioXo-pjirofial trot. Show that
this gives a better reading and modify the Hebrew text
aooordinglj.
(6) Explain the use of the cohortatives (subjunotiyes)
in this passage.
(c) Analyze "I'^nit^ /DJ (^' ^X *^^ ^^^^ *^® exact
meaning of the form. Inflect 1^^^^ (v. 4) in its own
tense and stem.
3. Translate Pa xxxix. 6-14, making any emendation
in the text that may be necessary.
4. (a) Parse and explain the forms TT^j^n'' (^- '^) >
''n'?mn (^- »); ninrin «^<i Doni (v. 12); y^n
(y. 14).
(6) How is the Imperfect to be explained in vv. 7 and
10, and the cohortative in v. 14 )
(c) Show the special meaning of ^^ in v. 13.
5. Translate Ps. xcL 1-12.
[ovss]
6. (a) Parse and explain the forms ■70'^ (▼- i) ; mB7"^
(v. 6) ; "J^nt^ i^' ^^)> correcting where necessary.
(6) Anal725e and explain I^D^ (^- *) i H JWE^"^
(v. 12). '
(c) Derive and show the literal meaning of "^nmiED
(v. 2) and Q'^^inil (^- ^h
7. Translate Ps. cxxxix. 7-12.
8. (a) Parse r)Q^ and n^ti^ i^- 8) ; •» JTHRH
(v. 10). ^
(6) Explain the use of the cohoi'tativee in vv * 8 and 9.
(c) What indications of a late date of composition do
you observe in this Psalm 1
dntnersftff of 0orotito#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ORIENTALS,
HONORS.
SIGHT.
ExamiTier : R. Q. MuRisoN, M.A.
1. Translate : 1 Chron, 21 : 8-12.
2. Translate : Jeremiah 44 : 1-6.
3. Translate : Proverbs 7 : 1-5.
4. Translate : Job 32 : 6-12.
5. Translate : Ecclesiastes 3 : 1-8.
Vnftifr0ft|? of STorotiio.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
ASSYRIAN.
Examiner: J. F. McCurdy, LL.D.
1. Translate literally extract I (Shalm. II).
2. (a) Transcribe the same passage into true As-
syrian words.
(6) Parse the verb-forms occurring therein.
(c) Compare the Assyrian writing of the non-
Assyrian proper names found therein with their native
forms.
a Translate extract II (Tigl. III).
4. (a) Inflect, in their own tenses only, the verb-
forms here found.
(6) Trace the word urd to its original form.
(c) Date the event here mentioned.
5. Translate extract III (Sinacherib).
6. (a) Ti-ace to their original forms the words niba,
lahu, iiahead, amnu.
m
(6) Give the Hebrew cognate equivalents of the
noun-forms (including adjectives) occurring in lines
6-10.
(c) Distinguish between the uses of the conjunc-
tions u and ma.
7. What has become of the old Semitic endings u
and a in singular verb-forms in Assyrian ? Illustrate
from any of the above extracts.
8. Translate into cuneiform Assyrian :
His city was strong ; the whole of the troops of
the king of Assyria besieged it three years and did
not capture it.
2lnftiet0ft|? of SToronto
ANNUAL EXABIINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
HISTORY AND LITERATURE.
Examiner : J. F. McCurdy, LL.D.
I.
1. State briefly the chief resemblances and dif-
ferences between the Assyrians and the Babylonians in
the character of their civilization and of their govern-
mental policy.
2. On what occasions and under what general
conditions did Egypt acquire possessions in Syria and
Palestine, and by what great powers was her dominion
there checked or subverted ?
3. Give an abstract of the reign of Tiglathpileser
ni, of Assyria, and show how Syria and Palestine
were aflr8cted by his policy and his armed invasions.
4. Contrast the character and the foreign policy of
Sinacherib and Esarhaddon of Assyria.
5. Describe the great rebellion against Asshurbani-
pal of which Babylon was the centre, stating its
origin and chief events.
• IT:
6. State the principles and the several forms or
modes of Hebrew poetic parallelism.
7. Give an outline of the problem and the plan or
argument of the Book of Job.
8. What are the chief contents or departments of
the Assyrio-Babylonian literature ?
8lnfticr0ft9 of Sorotito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ORIENTALS.
HONORS.
COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR.
Examiner: J. F. McCurdy, LL.D.
Transliierattoii may be employed for any of the languages if desired.
1. The Arabic has retained most fully the verb-
system of the Proto-Semitic. Indicate, however, any
forms which the Aramaic and Assyrian have preserved
and which the Arabic has lost.
2. What are the equivalents in the Arabic verb-
system of the several stems of the Hebrew verb ?
3. What has become of the Proto-Semitic (Arabic)
gutturals severally in Hebrew and Assyrian ? Illus-
trate by examples.
i. What Proto-Semitic (Arabic) sounds are repre-
sented in the Hebrew ? How are these represented in
Aramaic ? Give examples of both series of changes.
5. Give the first personal pronoun, singular and
plural, in Hebrew, Aramaic, Assyrian, and Arabic.
6. Inflect any strong verb throughout the perfect
tense in Hebrew, Aramaic, and Arabic ; compare the
Assyrian where it is possible ; and state what you
think to have been the original forms in the Proto-
Semitic perfect.
Btiltietfiifti? oC Sototito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
POLITICAL SCIENCE DEPARTMENT.
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY.
HONORS.
r, . f James Mavor.
Examxners : | g ^ Wickktt.
Note. — Five qaestions only to be answered.
1. Define the following expressions: — Natural Jjaw,
Liberty, Legislation, Society, — and explain the various
meanings of the expression, "The Greatest Good of
the Greatest Number."
2. Describe the ways in which the happiness of indi-
viduals may be promoted by Law, and discuss the
limits of such action.
3. In what sense is Society an Organic Growth ?
4. Give an account of the Political Philosophy of
Qrotius.
5. Distinguish between Socialism and Anarchism.
6. " To Hegel the State is the eternal and necessary
realization of the spirit of man." Comment upon this.
7. In what way does the Value of Social Life depend
upon the Ultimate End ?
8. Estimate the influence of Bentham in the political
speculations of th^ Nineteenth Century.
8lnitiet0fts of Soronto^
ANNJAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
POLITICAL SCIENCE DEPARTMENT.
PUBLIC FINANCE.
HONORS.
E, (James Mayor
Examxners : | g ^ wickett, Ph.D.
Five questions only to be answered.
1. Give an account of the theories of Taxation.
2. State and examine Adam Smith's Canons of
Taxation.
3. Describe the the process of ** shifting " taxes and
examine the theories of incidence.
4. " The total public charge of the year ought to be
Eaid out of the public Vevenue of the year, no matter
ow high taxes may have to be made to do so.''
Examine this statement, and notice the various theor-
ies that bear upon it.
5. Give a short account of the Canadian Banking
System.
6. Contrast the English Banking System with that
of the United States.
7. Describe briefly the various phases of railroad
policy in England.
8. Classify and examine the difierent systems of
taxes. Make special notes uppn the relative advan-
tages of " a single tax system/' and " a multiple
tax system."
8lnniev0ftfi of Sovotito#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FEDERAL CONSTITUTIONAL LAW.
HONORS.
Examiner : McQreqob Young.
1. ** This duality of citizenship is a cardinal feature
of the true Burtdeetaat'* Explain this fully.
2. Write a short note upon the fundamental points
of difference between the constitutions of Canada and
the United States.
3. Give the principles for determining whether legis-
lation affecting a railway falls within the legislative
competence of the Dominion or the Provinces.
4. Discuss the power of the Dominion Parliament
to trench upon matters assigned to the Provinces
under section 92 of the British North America Act.
5. Explain and illustrate the proposition that sub-
jects which, in one aspect and for one purpose fall
within the jurisdiction of a Provincial Legislature
may, in another aspect, and for another purpose fall
within the jurisdiction of the Dominion Parliament.
6. " Several salient features of the present American
Goverment are due to usages which have sprung up
around the constitution and profoundly affected its
working, but which are no part of it." (Bryce). Ex-
plain and illustrate.
7. Explain the doctrine of implied powers, and shew
any results of its application to the American Consti-
tution.
8. Hlustrate by examples the right of (a) the Prov-
ince of Ontario, (6) Congress, and (c) the State of
New York, to pass laws impairing the obligation of
contracts.
eiiiitiet0ft9 of srorotito<
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR
PUBLIC INTERNATIONAL LAW.
HONORS.
ExamiTier: McGregor Young.
1. Explain the doctrine of Extraterritoriality. To
what extent are foreign merchant vessels exempt from
local jurisdiction ?
2. What, in your opinion, is the obligation of a
neutral state with respect to the construction and
equipment for belligerents of vessels capable of use
for the purposes of war ?
3. Discuss the legality of armed intervention in the
internal affairs of a friendly power (a) on humanitarian
grounds, and (b) under treaty to maintain a republican
form of government.
4. Write a short note, with especial reference to the
questions of international law involved, on either (a)
the attitude of the United States in regard to the
proposed Nicaraguan Canal» or (b) the application of
the Monroe doctrine to the Venezuelan controversy ?
5. Discuss the doctrine that war is " a relation of a
state to a state, and not of individuals to individuals,"
and shew its bearing upon the propriety of maritime
capture of private property.
6. " International law is true law, though unique in
character." — ( Walker. )
*'That international rules lie on the extreme
frontier of law is not to be denied, but on the whole
it would seem to be more correct, as it certainly is
more convenient, to treat them as being a branch of
law."— (W. E. Hall.)
Explain these propositions, and examine the lead-
ing arguments urged against these conclusions.
amticrsUff of Sovomo<
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
GKNERAL JURISPRUDENCE-
HONORS.
Examiner : A. H. F. Lefroy, M.A.
1. What do you understand by " Jurisprudence, the
science of law."
2. What is meant by the " law of nature," and
state what you can of the importance and history of
the conception.
3. What traces are there in early rules of Inherit-
ance, of a period in which society was organized on
principles radically different irom those which now
prevail ?
4. Explain the following : — " positive law," *'a right
in motion," " adjective law," " a juristic act," " a State,"
" the sources of law," ** normal antecedent rights in
personam,'' " private international law."
5. What do you understand by the law of persons,
and what are the essential characteristics of a cor-
poration ?
6. How would you classify, for purposes of jurispru-
dence : Wrongful Acts, Rights, and Facts ?
7. How do you -distinguish between the jus poaaea-
sionia and the jua poaaidendi, and explain the former
from the point of view of Roman and English law
respectively.
8. State and explain the different forms of legal
securities for money lent.
8lnfiiev0ftfi ot Soronta
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
CANADIAN CONSTrrUTlONAL HISTORY
PASS AND HONOR.
- . (James Mayor,
Examx-MTH : | g. M. Wickett.
Note. — Five qaestions only to be answered.
1. Indicate the system of Government in Canada
prior to 1760.
2. Give an account of the feudal system in Canada.
3. Examine the position of those opposed to the
"Family Compact" between 1830 and 1841.
4. What were the forces leading up to the Con-
federation of 1867 ?
5. Stat« the financial provisions of the B. N. A. Act
of 1867.
6. Outline the rise of Responsible Government in
Nova Scotia.
7. Examine the powers and functions of the Fed-
eral Legislature.
8. Indicate the main features of city government
in Canada.
Vtiftietiiif tff of Sotontik
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
HISTORY.
PASS AND HONORS.
TAF,
.; i J. S.
Iw.i
A F. Babr, B.A.
Examiners,: ^ J. S. Carstairs, B.A.
Pakenham, B.A.
1. Discuss :
(1) The degree in which the political evils result-
ing in France in revolution were peculiar to that
country ;
(2) The feudal burdens from which the peasantry
of France suffered ;
(3) The influence upon opinion of the events con-
nected with the elections to the States-Qeneral.
2. Compare Turgot and Necker as reformers.
3. Explain the course of events between the estab-
lishment of the Constitutional Monarchy in France and
the September massacres.
4. Explain:
(1) The political outlook in France when Napo-
leon returned from Egypt ;
(2) The difficulties whiqh the Battle of Trafalgar
forced upon France.
5. Write notes upon :
(1) The causes of the failure of Joseph II ;
(2) The third partition of Poland ;
(3) The Czar Alexander I.
[otib]
±
6. Compare the political situation in Italy at the
end of 1849 with that at the end of 1866.
7. Comment upon :
(1) The causes of the meeting of the German
National Assembly in 1848 ;
(2) The terms of peace exacted from France in
1871;
(3) Sadowa;
(4) The Holy Alliance.
8ltlftlft0ft|? Of Sototito
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURH YEAR.
HISTORY.
PASS AND HONORS.
A. F. Barr, B.A.
Examiners : -{ J. S. Carstairs, B. A.
Pakenham, B.A.
1. Explain :
(1) •* The ordinance of 1787 is the foundation of
almost everything which makes the modem American
system peculiar " ;
(2) The relation of the Constitutional Act of 1791
to the Quebec Act ;
(3) Why the War of 1812 should be called by
some " Mr. Madison'* War " and by others " The
Second War of Independence."
2. Sketch the growth of the tendencies to disunion
between the Northern and Southern States from the
territorial diiBculties beginning in 1848 to the surren-
der of Fort Sumter.
3. Compare Canada in 1900 and Canada in 1830
with respect to territory, political institutions and
material well-being.
4. Outline :
(1) The policy of the younger Pitt in relation to
the Revolutionary Government in France and discuss
the situation at the time of his death ;
(2) What you should regard as the three most
important political changes effected in England be-
tween 1830 and 1885.
[OVSK]
5. Explain what you understand to be the problem
of a Philosophy of History and discuss the possibility
of such a Philosophy.
6. Discuss briefly :
(1) " With the Persian Empire we first enter into
the real web and woof of History " ;
(2) " The Middle Ages — ^a period of manifold
reactions " ;
(3) The contrast in the attitude of the Egyptians
and the Greeks towards Nature.
aitiflietiiltv o( Sortnto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
PHILOSOPHY.
HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY.
Examiner ; Prof. J. G. Hume, M.A., Ph.D.
1. Trace the development of thought in dealing with
the chief problems of theory of knowledge and theory
of reality in Eacon, Hobbes, and Hume.
2. Carefully indicate DesCartes method of dealing
with philosophical problems. How does he establish
the validity of our belief in external reality ?
3. Shew the relation of Spinoza to DesCartes*
Indicate the two opposing tendencies in Spinoza's
philosophy. State and critically examine his "par-
allelism."
4. Trace the stages in Locke's development in his
" Essay on the Human Understanding." What suc-
ceeding philosophical systems are most closely con-
nected with the several tendencies in Locke ?
6. Carefully note the negative results of the period
as brought out by David Hume. In what way would
you propose to establish the validity of knowledge ?
SMi^tvtHt9 Of ^Toronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
PHILOSOPHY.
HONORS.
HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY.
Examiner : Professor J. G. Hume, M.A., Ph.D.
1. Where do you find any anticipations of Kant's
method in DesCartes, in Locke, in Leibnitz ?
In what respect does Kant advance beyond his
predeces.sors in his method ?
2. Trace the development in the discussion of method
in Fichte and Hegel.
Carefully expound and exemplify Hegel's method.
3. Give the chief features of Schopenhauer's system
and
(1) Examine its consistency :
(a) As a development of Kantian principles
as claimed by Schopenhauer.
(6) As self-consistent.
(2) Examine the adequacy of Schopenhauer's
system.
aitifiiet0ft9 of 2roronto«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
PHILOSOPHV.
HIST0R7 OF PHILOSOPHY.
HONORS.
Examiner : Professor J. G. Hume, M.A., Pfl.D.
KANT.
1. What does Kant mean by "synthetical judg-
ments a prioi^ " ? What is the significance of this
discussion for Kant's philosophy ?
2. What is Kant's positive contribution to Philoso-
phy in his " Transcendental Aesthetic " ? Wherein is
the treatment of Space and Time left incomplete in
the " Transcendental Aesthetic " ? Indicate where the
deficiency is supplied.
3. Give a statement of Kant*s " deduction of the
categories." Point out what Kant is trying to estab-
lish and indicate the following : " the metaphysical
deduction," " the transcendental deduction," the sub-
jective and the objective aspects of the deduction.
4. Give Kant's '* Refutation of Idealism " and shew
its place in his exposition.
5. Give Kant's treatment of the Antinomy of Caus-
ality. What is the significance of this discussion in
connection with Kant's positive contributions to theory
of knowledge, theory of reality, and theory of conduct ?
6. " I had therefore to remove Knowledge in order
to make room for Belief,** Explain what Kant meant.
In how far was Kant successful in this method
of dealing with knowledge and belief ? What is your
own view on this problem ?
nninetiiftv of Sotonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
PHILOSOPHY.
HONORS.
ETHICS.
Ea^'ntiners • {^'^' Badgley, M.A., LL.D.
ARISTOTLE AND KANT.
Option between 7 and 8.
1. (a) Elstablish after Aristotle the End of moral
action.
(6) Is this End the same for the Individual and
the State ?
(c) How would Kant view these two questions ?
2. Aristotle says ; " Moral excellence is the result of
habit or custom."
(a) Give his argument.
(&) Name and criticise any other theories men-
tioned in this connection.
3. " But our particular acts are not voluntary in
the same sense as our habits."
(a) Critically examine this statement.
(6) What would be Kant's attitude towards this
position ?
4. Give Aristotle's discussion concerning Justice.
Is his doctrine of the *' mean *' applicable to this
virtue ?
[oTxa]
5. Give Kant's exposition of '' the notion Duty."
6. (a) Explain the different imperatives mentioned
by Kant.
(6) Give his answer to the question ; " How is a
Categorical imperative possible ? "
7. What do you regard aa the main defects (a) in
Aristotle's ethical system, and (6) in Kant's ?
8. What permanent contributions have Aristotle
and Kant, respectively, made to a satisfactory theory
of ethics ?
nntttfvnltp of Sototito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
PHILOSOPHY-METAPHYSICS.
Exaviiner : A. Kirschmann, Ph.D.
Five qnestioxis count a full paper.
1. Discuss "reality." Show that the term "real"
is used ambiguously.
2. What do you mean by an " element " ? Compare
ps3*chical with chemical elements.
3. Discuss briefly the relation of :
(a) Knowledge to action,
(b) Belief to mathematics.
4. Di.scuss infinity of space and time and Wundt's
distinction of quantitative and qualitative trans-
cendence.
5. State some of the modem theories of matter and
examine critically one of them.
G. Indicate the chief inconsistencies of a purely
mechanical view of the world.
^nl\ttv»lt9 of Sototito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
METAPHYSICS.
HONORS.
Examiner ; F. Tracy, B.A., Ph.D.
ARISTOTLE, Etc.
1. Give the substance of Aristotle's critical review
of preceding philosophy., including his strictures upon
Plato. Show the place and purpose of this, in relation
to his whole system.
2. Matter and Form, Potentiality and Actuality,
Universal and Particular. Discuss these conceptions
fully, with reference to the central problem of ontology,
viz., the problem of reality.
3. Select one of the following topics for careful
expository and critical treatment : —
(a) Hamilton's criterion of knowledge.
(6) Comte 8 doctrine of the evolution of human
thought.
(c) Mill's doctrine of necessary truth.
(d) Spencer on Space, or on the Soul.
4. Discuss the following topics as fully as possible,
passing under review all the works read, and the dis-
cussions in the lecture room, as well as giving your
own opinions : —
(a) The origin, nature, and chief problems of
philosophy, with the main divisions of its field.
(6) The Supreme Being, and our knowledge of
Him.
8lnfiiet0Uff of Soromo*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ETHICS-
HONORS.
i^ w :{i J^T^^:S:R
8TEPHEN»S SCIENCE OF ETHICS.
1. Discuss the appropriateness of the phrase ** Science
of Ethics." How far can Ethics be treated according
to the methods of Natural Science ?
2. Explain the functions of feeling and reason
respectively, in the determination of conduct. Show
the bearing of your answer on the problem of Free-
dom.
3. Mr. Stephen says (a) that the Moral Law is a
statement of the conditions of social vitality ; (b) that
these conditions emerge into the consciousness of the
race by virtue of a "prolonged induction"; and
(c) that in the process of evolution the law gradually
passes from the form " Do this," to the form " Be this."
Explain these statements fully, and offer any criticism
you may consider necessary.
4. Discuss the questions, whether Mr. Stephen has
given, and whether evolutional Ethics can give, a satis-
factory account of
(a) Altruism.
(6) Moral Obligation and the Categorical Impera-
tive.
(c) Personality.
(d) The relation of morality and happiness.
BtitbersUfi of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ASTRONOMY.
GENERAL COURSE.
Examiner : Alfred Baker, M.A.
1. What is meant by the angular magnitude of a
distant object ?
Shew that as the distance of an object varies,
the angular magnitude varies inversely as the distance,
the angular magnitude being small.
2. Give a drawing of the celestial sphere, represent-
ing on it the meridian of a place, the horizon, the
equator, and the ecliptic at noon, March 2l$t, when
the sun is in the vernal equinox.
Represent in another drawing the positiou of the
ecliptic at sunrise shortly after March 21st, i.e, when
the sun has attained a little north declination.
3. Explain the apparent motion of the sun during
the year (1) to one situated at the equator, (2) to one
situated at the north pole.
Shew that the total period during which the
sun is above the horizon at any place throughout the
year is independent of the latitude of the place.
4. Define right ascension and declination of a
heavenly body, and explain how they are determined.
Mention any practical use to which a knowledge
of the declinations of stars may be put.
5. Shew that the duration of twilight increases
with increase of one's latitude.
Determine the lowest latitude at which twilight
can last all night. At what season of the year does
this occur?
[ovxb]
6. Explain the phenomenon known as aberration
of light.
What paths do the stars, at different situations
with respect to the ecliptic, appear to describe owing
to aberration ?
7. Shew that the phases of the moon to the earth
are supplementary to those presented by the earth to
the moon.
Why do the horns of the new moon in Ae
western sky sometimes poiqt upwards, and sometimes
almost along the horizon. Explain by a diagram, and
state the times of the year, approximately, at which
the two appearances present themselves.
8. Explain eclipses of the sun.
In what way does the disc of the eclipsed sun
differ from that of the eclipsed moon, and why ?
Why at the same time may an eclipse of the sun
be total, partial or noti-existent, according to the posi-
tion of the observer ?
In what direction do solar eclipses move across
the earth^s surface, and why ?
9. In speaking of the planets what is meant by
conjunction and opposition; what by superior and
inferior conjunction ? Give a diagram.
Shew that the motion of B,n inferior |)lanet is
sometimes progressive and sometimes retrograde.
It was said of a recently-discovered comet that
it was seen in the east shortly before sunrise, and was
moving towards the suri. Cim you say whether its
motion was progressive or retrograde froni this state-
ment ? Explain.
10. Name and define the difiei*ent kinds of months,
stating whether and why each one is longer or shorter
than the sidereal.
Wnfiietttftff of Sototita#
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1001.
FOURTH YEAR.
ASTRONOMY.
HONORS.
Examiner: Alfred T. DeLury, B.A.
1. The residual errors of a transit instrument being sup-
posed known, obtain the correction to be applied to an
observed transit.
If the western pivot of a transit instrument be a"
higher and fi^' more to the north than the eastern, a star is
unaffected whose north polar distance is
co-latitude -f tan— ^
(tan a\
tanjS/-
2. Explain a method for determining the obliquity of the
ecliptic.
If Z be the latitude of a place between the tropics,
a and d the sun's right ascension and decliuation, the times
when the ecliptic is vertical are determined by the equation
hss a + sin— 1 (sin a tan I cot d),
3. Fully explaiu what is meant by mean 8un, eqiiation of
lime.
*
If the sun's longitude is c and the obliquity of the
ecliptic is at, then will the equation of time arising from
the obliquity of the ecliptic be
tan" ^ sin 2 c — J tan* ^ sin 4 c -f ^ tan' ^ sin 6 c — etc.
2 2 J
4. An event happens at Toronto May 1st, 1901, at
2^ 15™ 24" sidereal time. Find the mean solar time of
the event, being given that the longitude of Toronto is
5h 17«» 34.65«».
(The Ephemeris supplied.)
[OVKK]
5. Explain Aberrationy and obtain the fundamental
equation.
Shew that on account of aberration a star appears to
describe an ellipse about a mean position.
Find the effect of aberration upon the observed right
ascension of a star.
6. Find the elongation of an inferior planet from the sun,
when it appears stationary, on the supposition that the earth
and the planet describe co-planar circles of radii a and 6
about the sun.
Explain, in a general way, how by observations of a
transit of Venus the sun's parallax may be deteroiined.
7. Shew how the longitude of a place may be determined.
8. Explain how to determine the time, duration, aod
magnitude of a lunar eclii)se.
nnfiietttftff of Sototitiu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1001.
FOURTH YEAR.
HIGHER PLANE CDRVKS.
HONORS.
Examiner : H. J. Dawson, M.A.
1. What is meant by the statement that a point
(^> Vf ^) and a line (u, v, to) are united in position if
Defining the co-ordinates of a point as propor-
tional to the three perpendicular distances of the
point from three given lines, and using a similar
definition for line-co-ordinates, obtain the condition
that a point and a line may be so united.
Show that the above definition of point-co-ordin-
ates involves that of Cartesian co-ordinates.
2. Every curve of the rth degree {T>7a or n,
rm > m -h n — 3) which passes through all the mn
points of intersection of two curves of degrees m and n
except J (m + n — r — 1) (m -J- n — r — 2), will pass
through the remaining points
3. The co-ordinates of any point on a curve of zero
deficiency can be expressed as rational algebraic func-
tions of a single parameter, but if the curve be not
nnicursal they cannot be so expressed.
Express the co-ordinates of any point on the
curve oj* — ea? y'\-hy = 0 in terms of a single para-
meter.
4. Obtain the equation
7i = m(m — 1) — 2S — 3 A;,
and show how to deduce the equation
m = n{n — 1) — 2t — 3i.
[ovkb]
What is the signific^Loce of the following equa-
tions ?
(a) i — 3n = k — 3m.
(6) im(m. + 3)-S--2i = i7i(n + S)— T — 2i.
(c) m^ — 28 — 3A; = n2 — 2t — 3i.
5. Find in the form of a determinant, or otherwise,
the equation of the curve
aj* + y* + 2^ + rrioo^ y^ = 0.
when it is referred to its tangents as elements.
6. Assuming the equation of the quasi-normal, the
circular points being replaced by /, {a, /8, 7) and /,
(a, ff, 7'), show that, if the original curve passes through
/ or J, the tangent at that point is an inflexional
tangent to the quasi-evolute.
•
Find the degree of the evolute of a curve which
passes / times through the circular points and touches
the line at infinity g times.
7. Explain the origin of the notion of foci of general
curves, and show how to obtain the foci af a curve
when its Oartesian equation is given.
SAntnetttftff of Sototito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
QUATERNIONS.
HONORS.
Examiner : Alfbed Bakeb, M,A.
1. "If a, /9, ;* be ooinitial coplanar vectors, and if
€ui + 6/9+ c/* sa 0 and a + 6 + c ■« 0,
then do a, fi, j terminate in a straight line ? "
What illustration of Kellund and Tait's carelessness
in the preceding enunciation %
Prove the proposition.
State and prove the corresponding proposition when
four vectors a, y9, y^ d are involved.
If two coplanar triangles ABCy A'ffC be such that
AA\ BB^ CC meet in a point, prove by vector geometry
that the intersections of corresponding sides, AB, A'ff^ etc.,
lie in a straight line.
2. The direction as well as magnitude of a line being
represented by
a (cos e + v/"Zl sin Q)
shew that in any triangle AC ^sa AB + BC, as in vector
addition.
3. In the resolution of afi into the form
a6 (— cos 0 + 6 sin 0),
state clearly the fundamental assumptions or conventions-
What are a and fi respectively ?
Shew that i (j + k) ^ ij + ik.
Shew that (a^ ^)y ^ ay + fiy, (1) when y is in the
same plane with a and /9, (2) when not in the same plane.
4. Establish by quaternion methods the following for-
mulae in plane trigonometry :
(1) cos (6 + f ) s= co« 0 cos f — sin Q sin <p,
(2) cos e + cos f • 2 cos \{fi+ <f) cos i (6 — f ).
[over]
(3) o«BCOS^iC08j88inC+ •••• + •••• ^
sin A sin B sin C.
5. Establish by quaternion methods the following for-
mulae in spherical trigonometry :
(1) cos a 8s cos b cos c + sin b ain c cos A.
(2) sin ^ sin B sin (7
sin a sin 6 sine
(4) I — cos^ a — cos^ b — cos* c + 2 cos a cos b cos c =
sin* a sin*p, where p is the perpendicular from A on BC.
6. Taking the vector equation to the parabola in the
form
shew that the line from focus to intei-section of two tangents
is a geometric mean between the -lines to the points of
contact.' •
If three tangents be drawn to a parabola the circle
through their three points of intersection also passes through
the focus.
7. When the equation to a curve is given (1) in cartesian
co-ordinates, or (2) in polar co-ordinates, how is the equiva-
lent equation in quaternion analysis obtained 1
l^he equation to the spiral of Archimedes being r =» a0
in polar co-ordinatefl, obtain the following results by qua-
ternion analysis :
(1) The angle between the radius vector and the
tangent is tan—^ 0.
(2) The area between the curve and any vector varies
JBis the cube of the vectorial angle.
(3) The equation to the locus of the extremity of the
polar sub-tangent is '
8. Prove the following formulae :
(1) Va^r — ^S^r — fiSay + rSafi-
(2) VaVpr ^ ySa? — PSay,
(3) aVPr + PVya + yVa^ » 3 Sa^.
Interpret the last of these as a formula in spherical
trigonometry.
9. In the case of motion in a plane curve, obtain quater-
nion expressions for the velocities along and perpendicular
to the radius vector, and also for the accelerations in the
same directions.
Find the law of force under which an equiangular
spiral may be described. (Polar equation, r « ^).
Hnvttvults of Sovonto«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901,
FOURTH YEAR.
THEORY OF FUNCTIONS.
HONORS.
Examiner : Alfred T. DeLury.
L Explain litnU, function of a real variable^ continuous
Junction.
State the lemmas upon which depends the proof of the
theorem : ** A continuous function of a real variable attains
its upper and lower limits/' and deduce the proof.
Oite any case of a theorem in which this fact is
essential.
2. Establish the general properties of the rational alge-
braic function.
3. Explain cibsohUe convergence^ unconditional oonver-
ffence, uniform cohvergence.
When the series Sfn^ is uniformly oon^^i'gent at all
points of the closed interval (a, /9) the sum of ^^® series is a
continuous function of ^ in the interval.
4. State Weierstrass's theorem on the sum of an infinite
nunber of power series.
If Px is a power series defining a function in its
domain then, for any value of a; in this domain the derivate
of the function is the series formed by difierentiating Px
term by term.
5. Define dement of an analytic function and explain, in
* gODeral manner, how the function is continued.
6. Explain transcendental integral function^ transcen'
^•**toZ fractional Junction,
[OVKK]
The general expression for a function with no zeros
and no singular point except infinity is e^^ where G^ is
any integral function.
7. Construct as an illustration of Weierstrass's meihod^
not of his TeBMlt^ an integral fuuction whose only finite zeros
are 0, ^t 1» ± ^9 y^ simple.
Explain why the integral function is not oompletelj
characterized, and indicate the analogy in the case of the
rational integral function.
8, Write a brief note on integration, with special refer-
ence to the analytic function.
Account for the non-uniform character of
Shew that
/
. 1 ffx . dx
stating what you understand by^Ic.
9. Define <m, Cu, ifhi^ and shew that (fiu is doubly periodic.
«nfDev0Us oC Eovotiio
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
GEOMETRY OF POSITION.
Examiner: Alfred Baker, M.A.
1. What are the six primitive forms of modern
geometry ?
How are they arranged in grades and for what
reason ?
Why is one grade to be esteemed of a higher
order than another ?
2. Discuss briefly the theory of infinitely distant
elements.
Why must parallel lines be regarded as all inter-
secting in the same point at infinity ?
3. If two correlated triangjles ABC, A^B^C^ lie in
the same plane, and the three pairs of sides AB,
A^B^, etc., intersect in a straight line, then AA^, BB^,
CC\ intersect in a point.
Prove this, and also its converse, as an exercise
in projective geometry without making them depend
on the case in which the triagles are in different planes
•
4. Define harmonic points, and employ the proposi-
tion in question 3 to shew that if three points A, B, 0
and the order of their succession be given, the fourth
point D of the harmonic range is uniquely determined
Give also, by way of explanation of the phrase'
" order of their succession," the complete construction
and figure determining the fourth point according as
A and (7, .8 and (7, A and B are " separated points.'*
NoTS— Regard must be had to the perfect Bymmetry of the
three conatmctions.
[over]
6. What is meant by centre of homology ? What
by axis of homology ?
Prove that two hqmological figures may be
regarded in an infinite number of ways as projections
from two distant points of one and the same figure.
6. Give two definitions of the projective relation.
From either of the definitions obtain the follow-
ing : *' In two projective ranges qf points, to any four
points of the one range, of which the first two are
separated by the last two, there coirespond always in
the other range four points subject to the same"^ con-
dition,"
By projections shew that
(1) If two projective one-dimensional primitive
forms have one deli-correspondihg elemeht then are
the forms in perspective position.
(2) If two projectivfe oiie-ditoehsional primitive
forms have three self-corresponding elements A, B,C,
A^, -B,, C , then are all their elements iielf-cof respond-
ing, and tne forms are identical
7. Two ranges of points lie upon the same straight
line and are projectively related, so that the points
A, B, (7 correspo^id to the poipta A^,B^,C^, Shew how
to construci for the' point D, corresponding to the point
A. _
Make tke correspondihg construction when two
sheaves of rays al*e projectively related and have the
same rddlant poirit; i.«., the rdys a. h, c corresponding
to ttj, 6j, Cj, construct for the ray d corresponding to d^.
8. Two projective sheaves of rays are giveji by three
pairs of corresponding ravs, a and a,, 6 and 5^, c and
c^ ; to construct any required number of points of the
curve of the second order k* which these sheaves
generate.
When there are given two points S, S , with the
tangents at these points, and also a third point A (A^),
shew how to construct for additional points.
If instead of the third point -4, there were given
a tangent (without, of course, its ^oint of contact) how
would you proceed ?
9. Shew tfiat points of contact in a sheaf of rays of
the second order form a curve of the second order.
Vinttttvutts ot SovotitOt
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
PROBLEMS.
HONORS.
( Alfred Baker, M.A.
Examiners :< H. J. Dawson, M.A.
( Alfred T. DeLury, B.A.
Note. — Candidates are reqneeted to return answers to questions in
sections A and B in separate books, endorsed accordingly.
A.
1. Solve the equation
2. Find that differential equation to the ellipse which
expresses that the normal bisects the angle between the
focal distances.
Solve the differential equation so obtained.
3. Solve the equation
4. The asymptotes and one tangent of an hyperbola being
given, shew how to construct for additional tangents.
5. If a and ^ be two co-terminous vectors, obtain the
general expressions for two other vectors which, with a and
P, shall form an harmonic pencil.
6. Shew that
s {VafiVrd + rarVdp + VadVfir) - o.
[OVXB]
B.
I. Find the general equation of the system of conies
which pass through two given points and touch two given
lines, taking the })oint of intersection of the given lines as
the vertex C = 0 of the triangle of reference, the line joining
the two points as the line ^ = 0, the points -q =: 0, C == 0
being harmonic with respect to the given points^ and the
lines X, = 0, ^, = 0 haimonic with respect to the given
lines.
II. If a straight line envelope a curve of the juth class,
the locus of the {m ^ \y poles of this line relatively to a
curve of the mth order is a curve of order fi {m — I ).
III. Shew that a one- valued analytic function has at least
one singular point.
lY. The parallelograms determined by all primitive pairs
of a given net- work are of equal area.
Y. Examine the substitution
X, S5 — 2 .
for periodicity.
YI. Shew that the time at which the sun is south-east
may be determined by means of the expression
tV { ^ — sin " ^ (tan ^ cos / cos op)
where d is the sun's north declination, I is the latitude of
the place, and tan ^ = sin I.
Sinfurrsitii of STovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
ACOUSTICS.
HONORS.
Examiner : W. J. Loudon, B.A.
1. Define simple harmonic motion, and shew how
t>wo harmonic motions of the same period may be
compounded :
(a) When in parallel directions ;
(h) When in perpendicular directions.
2. Obtain the general equc'vtions of motion in the
case of a disturbance excited in a homogeneous atmos-
phere so as to proceed symmetrically from a centre.
Determine also the v^elocity of propagation.
3. Determine the notes which can be produced from
a tube closed at one end, the disturbances being pro-
duced by the oscillations of a disc placed at the open
end.
Also examine the case of a tube closed at both
ends with a mouth piece at the centre.
4. Find the dynamical equations of motion of a
stretched string, and determine the notes which are
capable of being produced by its vibration.
5. Explain the phenomenon of beats and discuss
it analytically.
6. State Fourier's theorem, and give a physical
illustration.
nnvt$vuH9 oC Sovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
PHYSICAL OPTICS.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. S. Plaskett, B.A.
2ir
1. Prove that y = a sin -^ivt — x) represents a
wave disturbance and determine the meaning of each
symbol in the expression.
Find an expression for the intensity of light and
prove, in another way, the relation between the in-
tensity and the amplitude.
2. Obtain the complete expression for the intensity
of the reflected pencil from a thin film, and determine
the color produced when white light is used.
3. Give the two main divisions into which diffraction
effects are classified.
If plane waves impinge normally on a plate con-
taining a rectangular aperture of sides a and b, find
the intensity at any point of a distant screen, and
determine the pattern produced.
4. Assuming the investigation for a plane trans-
mission gmting, show how to obtain that for a curved
reflection grating of radius R.
Find the relation between R p and p' where p and
p' are the distances of slit and screen. Explain fully
how Rowland used this relation in photographing the
spectrum.
5. Show how to construct Comu's spiral; from it
obtain graphically the amplitude, at any point of the
screen, due to a oylindrical wave impinging on a
narrow wire.
[over]
6. Give an analytical demonstration of the trans-
versality of the vibrations of polarised light.
7. What is meant by the singular directions ? Ob-
tain them for any wave front in a biaxal crystal.
Show how, when they are known, the wave
surface can be obtained.
8. Explain clearly two experiments wbich demon-
strate the correctness of Fresuel's assumptions in
obtaining the wave surface.
Find the angle between the optic axes of a
biaxal crystal in terms of the refractive indices.
9. Why does a beam of plane polarised light emerge
colored after passing through a thin sheet of mica
and a Nicol prism ?
Obtain expressions for the intensity of the 0 and
E rays and determine the colors produced.
SInflif rtfftff of crorotit04
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1001.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
ELASTICITY.
HONORS.
Examiner : Alfred T. DeLury, B.A
1. Define Homogeneous Strain, and shew that under
such a strain a sphere becomes an ellipsoid.
Employ this fact to shew that any homogeneous
strain is equivalent to a pure strain combined with a
rotation.
2. Obtain the equation of the Elongation Quadric,
and interpret the constants. (Strain homogeneous.)
Explain the relation of this quadric to the strain
ellipsoid.
Supposing the strain to be heterogeneous, explain
the conditions under which we have a parallel theory.
8. Shew that the conditions for a pure strain (strain
heterogeneous) leads to the existence of the strain
potential.
4. Explain what is meant by Stress, Homogeneous
Stress,
In the case of homogeneous stress find the stress
on any plane in terms of the stress constituents.
The strain being heterogeneous, find the equations
of equilibrium, and Uie equations of the lines of force.
5. Obtain the expression for the elementary work
done in a small strain.
[ovra]
6. Supposing the elastic body to be isotropic, deduce
from the expression for the potential energy (or other-
wise obtain) the equations connecting the stresses and
the strains.
7. Supposing one end of a cylindrical substance to
be fixed and a tangential shearing stress to be applied
to the other end, find under what circumstances the
strain is one of pure torsion round an axis parallel to
the edges of the cylinder.
VintbtvtHts of sovonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B. A
LEAST SQUARES-
HONORS.
Examiner : W. J. Loudon, B^
1. A card is muniug from a pack ; 13 cards are drawn
at random and found to be black. Whac is the chance that
the miaaing card is red f
2. Two points are taken at random on the circumference
of a circle of radius a : shew that the chord is as likely as
not to exceed av 2, but that its average length is — •
3. Assuming the truth of the arithmetic mean, find the
law of probab^tj of error.
4. Define probable error, and explain how it is found
theoretically, and what corrections must be applied to the
theoretical value for a limited number of observations.
5. In firing at a circular target shew that the probability
of hitting it is 1 — 0 ~ ^' ***, where h is the measure of accuracy
of the marksman and r the radius of the target.
Also, shew that the radius of the circle within which
in the long run the marksman can plant his shots \b
I log,
V loirn —
log 2
log n — log m
n being the whole number of shots, and m the number of
those which miss a circular target of radius r.
6. If a quantity be a linear function of observed
quantities, explain how you would find its probable error,
being given the probable errors of each of the observed
quantities.
[OVXB]
In the case of non-linear fanctions how would yon
proceed?
7. Explain the method of constructing empirical formulas^
taking as an illustration the law of expansion of a liquid.
8. In order to determine the length x at 0*^0 of a metre
bar, and its expansion y for each degree of temperature, it
was measured at temperatures 20°, 40°, 50^, 60°, the
corresponding observed lengths being 1000.22, 1000.65,
1000.90, 1001.05 m. m. respectively. Find the probable
values of x and y with their probable errors.
SAnfliersfts of Sotonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
THERMODYNAMICS.
HONORS.
Examiner: G. R. Anderson, M.A.
1. Define entropy. Determine the change of entropy
ronnd any closed curve, and show that the entropy of the
universe tends to a maximnm.
2. Show that the adiahatic change of temperature corre-
sponding to an increase of pressure equals the absolute
temperature multiplied by increase of volume per unit
increase of heat
3. Deduce Rankine's and CUusius' equations for saturated
vapor.
For chloroform
e « 67 + 0.1375 <
r
Cdt = .23235 t + .00005072 1\
0
Hence calculate the value of h for tss lOO"" and
t ^ 150". £xplain what is meant by the temperature of
inversion and o&lculate it in this case.
4. Obtain the equation of the isentropic line passing
through the point if ^ , jT^ in a mixture of liquid and vapor.
5. Deduce a general equation for the efficiency of a steam
engine.
In a steam engine if the temperature of the steam in
the boiler be 250°C. and that of the condenser be 40^ what
is the maximum efficiency ?
6. Investigate Boyle's Law on the assumptions of the
Kinetic theory of gases.
[ovsb]
^ I
7. Deduce the fonnula for the coefficient of friction of
gases : — fi as | mnlu,
8. Employ Van der Waals' equation in the form
\ P J P P
to determine the critioal preasare, temperatare and ▼olome
of a ga« in terms of the oooatants a, 6 and R.
VLnrntvults ot ^Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR
ELKCTRICITY AND MAGNETISM.
HONORS.
Eocaminer : J. C. McLennan, B.A., Ph.D.
1. Explain how to find absolutely the resultant
magnetic intensity at a given point on the earth's
surface.
2. Define line of force and tube of induction, and
N
establish the relation R = 41^ yy. between the poloriza-
' K
tion in a dielectric at a given point and the electric
intensity at the same point.
3. Determine the capacity of two infinite concentric
cylinders of radii r and ?■' separated by a dielectric of
inductive capacity K.
Shew how to find an absolute measure of the
capacity of a given condenser experimentally.
4. Describe some simple form of attracted disc
electrometer, and shew how it may be used to deter-
mine in " absolute measure '* the difference of potential
between two conductors.
5. A condenser consists of two infinite parallel
plates at a distance d apart. If a plane slab of specific
inductive capacity k and thickness d be inserted sym-
metrically between the plates, determine the change in
the capacity of the system.
Describe two methods of determining the specific
inductive capacity of a solid dielectric.
6. Explain the principle of a ballistic galvanometer
and establish a relation connecting the angle of swing
with the quantity of electricity discharged through it.
[ovpk]
7. A circular iron ring of small rectangular ctobs
section is uniformly wound with wire thix)Ugh whidi
a cunent ot* electricity C is passed. Calculate the
magnetic force at any point in tne iron, the dimensions
of the coil being given, and explain how the magnetic
induction may be found experimentally.
8. A circuit containing a battery of E.M.F., E is
suddenly closed. If R is the total resistance of the
circuit and L its self induction, find the value of the
cuirent at any instant.
Also find an expression for the energy expended
on the field when the current has reached a steady
state.
9. The two armatures of a condenser chaiged to a
difference of potential V are joined by a wire of
resistance R and self induction L\ determine the
nature of the discharge and the strength of the current
at any instant.
Explain how to measure a very great resistance
by observations on the leak from a condenser.
10. Give a general descfiption of the properties of
the Cathode stream in a vacuum tube.
Also explain two methods of finding the ratio of
the charge borne by one of the carriei's of electricity
constituting this strean> to its mass.
VninerBfts ot STorotiio*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
PHYSIOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner : A. B. Macallum.
1. Give a full account of the history of the red
blood corpuscle in the adult mammal.
2. Describe the course of the augmentators in the
frog and in a mammal.
3. Give a full account of the facts which indicate
the existence of a speech centre.
4. Describe fully the nervous mechanism in control
of respiration.
5. Explain electrotonus and Pflueger's law of con-
traction.
6. Give an account of the functions of the semi-
circular canals.
&ni^tvtHts of CTorotitiia
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY.
HONORS.
Examiner: A. B. Macallum.
1. Discuss the source, mode and place of formation
of faippuric acid in the body.
2. How may urea be prepared artificially, (a) from
inorganic compounds, (6) from proteids ?
3. What is nitrogenous equilibrium and what
factors influence it ?
4. Give the physiological history of the bile salt^.
5. Give an account of the conditions which influence
the absorption of inorganic salts in the intestine.
mnltttvuit9 ot Sovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
HISTOLOGY.
Examiner : R. R Bknslet, B.A., M.B.
1. Describe the structure of the thyroid and supra-
renal bodies.
2. Give an account of the structure of a zymogenic
gland. What glands in the Mammal belong to this
categorj^ ?
3. Describe the structure of the retina.
4. Give a full account of the structure of the lung.%
5. Describe the structure and development of the
teeth.
anfUersfts of ZTovonio^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR
EMBRYOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner: Pkofessor Ramsay Wright.
1. Contrast the modes of formation of the mesoblast
in Amphioxus, Amblystoma, the Chick, and the
Habbit.
2. Describe the development of the liver in the
chick and discuss its vascular supply.
3. What is the nature of the proamnion ? Describe
its extent in the Rabbit and the Chick.
4. Describe the development of the ear in the
Rabbit.
5. Discuss the occurrence of food-yolk in the eggs
of the Vertebrates, and the eftect of its presence on
developmental processes.
anfiifvisfiff of Sovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1001.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY.
HONORS.
Examiner : Pkofessob Ramsat Wright.
1. Discuss the exoskeletal structures of the Verte-
brates.
2. Indicate the chief lines of specialisation of the
anterior limb in Sauropsida.
3. Contrast the brain in the Pigeon and Rabbit.
4. Discuss the morphology of the vertebrate kidney.
5. Illustrate the phenomenon of change of function
by reference to the branchial pharynx of the Verte-
brates.
Bnmtvuits oc Sotontiu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
NATURAL SCIENCE, DIVISION I.
PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
Examiner ; A. Eibschmann, M.A., Ph.D.
(8 qnestioDB count a full paper ; questions 1, 2 and 6 must be taken.)
A
PSYCHOFHYSIOS.
1. Lsdicate some of the problems which have led
physicists and physiologists to establish a new branch
of science, viz., Experimental Psychology.
Why do you think this branch of study is appor-
tioned to Philosophy.
2. Show in a mathematical way that you have
thoroughly understood the meaning and significance
of the psychophysical law.
3. In which cases is an increase in the quantity of
the stimulus not accompanied by an increase in the
intensity of sensation ? Do you know a case where
an increase of the quantity of the stimulus produces a
decrease of the intensity of sensation ?
4. Why is the phvsiological explanation of the
Law of Weber unsatisfactory ?
5. Enumerate the psychophysical methods, and
ahow under what circumstances the results verify the
law of Weber,
6. Solve two of the following three problems,
assuming that the psychophysical law holds strictly :
[OVBK]
i
(a) If the upper and lower thresholds of discrimi-
nation (Au and M) for an intensity of 50 are 1 J and IJ
respectively, what should be the threshold of discrimi-
nation [A] for an intensity of 2412 ?
(6) Compute the angular values of the black and
white sectors of a rotating disc which appears of
medium intensity between the black and white pig-
ments used, if the intensity of the black is -^^ of that
of the white.
(c) What have the psychophysical methods to do
with star-magnitudes ?
B.
PSYCHOLOGICAL OPTICS AND TIME-RELATIONS OF
MENTAL PHENOMENA.
7. Has the colour-sense of man developed in his-
torical times ?
8. Discuss colour-mixture from a physical, a physi-
ological and a psychological standpoint
9. Discuss the movements of the eye in their sig-
nificance for visual space.
10. What advantage does the inaccuracy of the sense
of sight with regard to time-distinction give us ?
11 Discuss the Phenomenon of Purkinje.
12. What components enter into Reaction-time ?
Has the problem of Reaction-times any significance for
Biological study ?
mtft)er0ft9 ot Sotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR
METEOllOLOGY.
Examiner : W. A. Parks, B.A., Ph.D.
1. Describe in detail the twilight arch.
2. Outline James Croll's theory of the cause of the
glacial period. How do existing circumstances stand
in relation to this theory ?
3. Write note on the climatic diffei*ences of the
Alpine valleys and mountains.
Discuss the effect of altitude on the relative and
absolute humidity of the atmosphere.
4. Show the effects of the continents on precipita-
tion, cloudiness and temperature.
5. Describe the course of the atmospheric overflow
from the equator to its arrival at the poles.
What differences exist in the air movements
around the two poles ?
Write full notes on the barometric pressure at
the poles.
6. Contrast the vernal and autumnal temperature in
the oceanic and continental regions of different lati-
tudes. Give full explanations.
Unl\Kvnlts oC ZTovonto^
ANNCJAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
NATURAL SCIENCE, DIVISION 11.
ARCHilAN AND GLACIAL GEOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner : A. P. Coleman, M.A., Ph.D.
1. Give an account of the Grenville and Hastings
series, describing the rocks belonging to them, and
their relationship to the Ottawa gneiss and to one
another. Discuss the question of life at that time.
What economic products come from these rocks ?
2. Describe the Animikie rocks, sKowing their pre-
sent condition and attitude and that of associated
eruptives. What is their age, and how do they stand
with reference to the Laurentian and Huronian. Give
their distribution.
3. Discuss the question of the original rocks of the
earth's crust in relation to our Archaean. What are
the* oldest Canadian rocks ?
4. Describe the different types of glaciers and their
mode of flow, and give an account of the effects of
glacial action as shown in Ontario.
5. Give an outline of the more prominent theories
of the cause of Ice Ages, showing the bearing on the
question of the facts observed in North America.
What parts of the Continent were not ice covered,
and why were they left free ?
6. Name and describe the various sheets of water
that occupied the region of the Great Upper Lakes at
the close of the Glacial Period. Where were their
outlets, how were they dammed, and in what attitude
are their beaches at present ?
anfbevfititff of STotonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
NATURAL SCIENCE— DIVISION II.
PETROGRAPHY AND STRUCTURAL
GEOLOGY.
HONORS.
Eosaminer: A. P. Coleman.
1. Describe the more important schistose rocks of
Canada and discuss their mode of origin.
2. What are the general megascopic and microscopic
characters of granite, quartz porphyry, gabbro and
diabase ?
3. What are the characteristic points under the
microscope of muscovite, chlorite, serpentine and
calcite ?
4. Give an account of the usual forms of bedding
and lamination of the various stratified rocks. W^hat
relationship do you commonly find between these
rocks ? Illustrate by sketches.
5. Sketch and name the chief varieties of folds
showing their importance in mountain formation.
6. Describe and sketch the forms assumed by erup-
tive rocks.
nnniMtVttits oc STovontiu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
NATURAL SCIENCE— DIVISION 11.
PHYSIOGRAPHY.
Exwminey* : A. P. Coleman.
1. Discuss the question of uniformity and perman-
ence of sea level, and describe the means by which
heights and depths may be determined, giving an idea
of the accuracy of the various methods.
2. Describe and roughly sketch the shapes of the
coittinents, and give an outline of theories to account
for continents. How does the amount of land above
water compare with the volume of the sea ? Where
is the boundary between continents and oceans to be
found ?
3. Describe various kinds of plains, showing their
relation to the structure of the earth's crust, and to
running and standing water. What types of hills may
occur on plains ? Give sketches.
4. Classify the main varieties of rivers, showing
their relationships to land forms and to one another.
Discuss the question of grades and of meanders in
rivers of various ages and sizes.
5. Give a general account of the main areas draining
into salt lakes, referring especially to America.
anftiet0ft|? of Covotito,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1001.
FOURTH YEAR.
NATURAL SCIENCE, DIVISION IL
YERTEBRATK PALilONTOLOGy.
Examiner : A. P. Coleman, M.A., Ph.D.
1. Give an account of the chief Devonian fishes
found in Canada. What are their relationships to
extinct or still living forms ?
2. Define Reptilia, and show resemblances to other
classes and differences from them.
3. Describe and classify the Dinosauria known to
occur in Canada. Of what ages are they, and how
do they compare with those of the United States ?
4. Describe and show the position in classification
of the chief birds known in Mesozoic times.
5. Give an idea of the Mesozoic mammals so far as
known. How do they compare with living mammals,
and what are their nearest relatives ?
6 Describe an example of the Titanotheriidse, Dino-
theriiddB and Elephantidae, showing their position
among mammals. W^iat is the most striking general
advance displayed in the mammalia during the
Cenozoic ?
anfuetcfftff of Sovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
PHYSICAL CRYSTALLOGRAPHY.
Examiner : W. A. Parks, B.A., Ph.D.
1. Describe the Stauroscope of von Kobell and show
fully how it is employed to determine the angle of
extinction in biaxial minerals.
2. Explain in detail the phenomena of dispersion in
a plato of orthoclase cut parallel to the clinopinacoid.
3. Write a paper on the symmetry of the molecule
as compared with that of the assemblage and discuss
the origin of hemihedrons and tetartohedrons.
4. Given the axial ratio of a crystal, find an expres-
sion for the mean cohesion.
Discuss cohesion in the isometric system and
deduce the laws of cleavage for that system.
5. Draw figures to show the nature of the wave
surface in the three principal sections of orthorhombic
crystals.
Show the difference of wave surface in positive
and negative biaxial crystals.
6. On the principle of a generating plane and axes
of symmetry find the number of planes possible in
each system.
&ni^tvuits o( Sototito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : I90I.
FOURTH YEAR.
MATHEMATICAL CRYSTALLOGRAPHY.
Examiner : W. A. Parks, B.A., Ph.D.
1. Show how to find both angles of a pentagonal
dodecahedroD.
2. Indicate the method of finding the polar angles
of a triclinic pyramid, having given the axial ratio
and the value of a, )9. 7.
3. The vertical axis in Vesuvianite is 0.537541. A
plane makes an angle of 149° on the base and 117"" 26'
on the front pinacoid. Find its parameters.
4. OP A ^ = 126°. Find Rf^R.
5. Given a stereographic projection six inches in
diameter of a tetragonal crystal. The pole of (111)
appears three quarters of an inch from the circumfer-
ence. Show how to find the axial ratio by the use of
a protractor.
XT . J. n cot A cos (b + 6)
Note?— cot 0 = \ ^^ .
cos 4>
cot if> = tan c cos A.
also cos il = — cos B cos 0 + sin jB sin C cos A,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS) 190ti >:'/
i -,
• •
^^ft.A-a**.*^*^ !• •■ .4 •• '•!*» l»-*lj ^>
i''.;. ■:
FOtTBTrt^TEARn • ^
DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND
MINERALOGY.
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.
FIRST PAPER.
Examiner : W. Lash Miller.
1. How is the number of *' Components " in a sys-
tem determined ?
What means are there of ascertaining whether a
system has reached equilibrium or not ?
2. Discuss the equilibria in one of the following
systems : —
(a) Components, Silver chloride and Ammonia.
(b) Components, Ether and Water.
(c) Components, Iron and Carbon.
3. Explain shortly how the general forms of solubil-
ity carves in systems of two components have been
deduced by use of the function $!
What are the advantages of this method of treat-
ing the problem ?
4. Deduce the equation for the solubility curve of a
donble-salt (formula ABS2) in an aqueous solution
containing varying quantities of its components AS
and BS. Assome total dissociation, and the validity of
the gas laws in the solution.
5. Shew the connection between the forms of the
solubility curves in a three-component system, and the
changes that take place when water is removed from
the solution by isothermal evaporation.
[over]
6. DeOne "* Point of transition " and "" Intervml tH
transition.^ On what does the extent of the Interval
of transition depend f
Give a short account of the various experimental
methods of determining the point of transition.
rniinevsfts? of Sovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND
MINERALOGY.
PHYSICAL CHEMISTKY.
SECOND PAPER.
Examiner : W.- Lash Milleb.
1. Define: — A quantity of heat; a quantity of heat
at 100*^0; a quantity of entropy; the entropy of a
system ; non-reversible process ; isolated system.
2. Prove the following theorems : —
The potential of each component must be con-
stant throughout the whole mass of an isolated system
at equilibrium.
The greatest number of coexistent phases possi-
ble in a system at equilibrium is two more than the
number of components.
3. Make a complete list of the assumptions involved
in Gibbs' deduction of the '* mass law."
The algebraical details of the deduction need not
be given in full.
4. Show how the heat of formation of CuS0^.5H,0
from copper sulphate and water may be calculated
from measurements of the vapour-tensions of water
and of the system CuS0,.5H,0 + CuSO,.
6. Write a note on one of the following :
(i) The determination of the number of molecules
that te^ke part in a reaction.
(ii) The measurement of chemical affinity.
^tiineiTttUj? oC SToromtk
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1001.
FOURTH YEAR.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY-FIRST PAPER.
Examiner : F. B. Allan, B.A.
1. What organic syntheses may be made from (a)
desoxy benzoine, (6) cyanacetie ether ?
2. Give synthetic methods of preparation for
acetonyl-acetone, succinic acid, normal valeric acid,
p-amino toluene, aldol, aconitic acid, acridine, a-keto-
bntyric acid, acetacetic ether.
3. Qive an account of the modification of Friedel and
Crafts' reaction, involving the use of aluminium.
4. Give three methods for the preparation of quino-
line or its derivatives.
5. Give an account of five atom rings containing
more than one nitrogen.
anftifrsftv of STorofito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY-SECOND PAPER.
Examiner : F. B. Allan, B.A.
1. Give formuisB for the geometrical isomers possible
in an aldose in the pentose series. How could such an
aldose be prepared from an aldose in the tetrose
series ?
2. How has a-a^rose been prepared, and why is it
inactive ?
3. Glucose and gulose on oxidation give the same
dibasic acid. What is Fischer's explanation of this ?
How is the inactivity of mucic acid accounted for ?
4. Give some examples showing how geometrical
formulae have been assigned to unsaturated com-
pounds.
5. Write formulse for the geometrical isomers pos-
sible in trimethylene dicarbonic acid.
6. Give an account of the application of the prin-
ciples of stereochemistry to the benzildioximes.
8lnflift0ftff of Soromo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR, C. & M., P. & C.
HISTORY OF CHEMICAL THEORY.
1. What was the Phlogiston Theory ? Who were
its chief supporters, and why was it given up ?
2. What theories of inorganic chemistry did Berze-
lius hold, and what work did he do in connection with
inorganic chemistry ?
3. Give an account of the radical theories of organic
chemistry to 1838.
4. Write a short sketch on (a) the development of
the ideas of Valency, (6) the Periodic Law.
5. What were the most important views or dis-
coveries of Davy, Hittorf, Dumas, Kohlrausch, Wil-
liamson ?
Slnfliet0fts of So ton to
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
BIOLOGY.
Examiner : J. Stafford, M. A., Ph.D.
1. Compare the bones of the anterior and posterior
limbs and their supporting arches in the pentadactyle
vertebrates.
2. Give an account of the natural history of the
Sporozoa.
3. Describe the organs of circulation and respiration
in the catfish.
4. Describe the structure of a cell. What is epithe-
lium ? Describe carefully the different varieties.
5. Give an account of the blood corpuscles in Verte-
brates.
6. How. do the Fungi differ from the Algae in their
nutritive processes ? Give an account of the various
methods of reproduction of the Fungi.
&ni\»tttHts of Sotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
BIOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. StJlfford, M.A., Ph.D.
1. Describe the respiratory organs of vertebrates.
2. Discuss the phenomena of parasitism as exhibited
by the arthropods.
3. Describe the structure of the various kinds of
muscular tissue, indicating where they are to be found.
4. Illustrate by reference to types studied in the
laboratory the essential points in the structure of a
coelenterate.
5. Describe the events which take place in the heart
during the cycle of a beat
6. Describe the structure of the reproductive organs
of the pine.
8lnflier0ftff of ^oromo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Fkiday, May 10th.
1. Complete the following equations, inserting the proper
coefficients : —
Fe CI. + H.S -=
Fe.Cl. + H,S =
HgCl, + NH.HO =
HgCl, + KHO =
itHO + Br, (solution heated) =
A1,3S0, + NH.HS + H,0 =
FeSO, + H.SO, + HNO, =
2. What weight. of a solution of sulphuric acid containing
60% of H,SO^ will be required to dissolve 10 grammes of
zinc, and what will be the volume at 12° C and 755 m.m.
pressure of the gas evolved during the process ?
3. Mention some of the common impurities that are
found in drinking water. What substances render it unfit
for domestic use ? What tests would you apply in order to
ascertain their presence ?
4. Explain the following terms : dissociation, isomorph-
ism^ valency, cUlotropy, equivalent weight, atomic weight.
Illustrate each case by suitable examples.
5. You are supplied with water, hydrochloric acid, man-
ganese dioxide and phosphorus. Give two methods by
which you could prepare orthophospho>'ic acid from these
matenals.
6. What are the chief sources whence ammonia and its
compounds are derived ? Compare and contrast it both as
r^ards lis chemical and physical properties with the analo-
gous hydrides of phosphorus, arsenic and antimony.
anfiiet0ft9 of STorotitOi
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
HONORS.
Saturday, May 11th.
1. State briefly what you know regarding the pre-
paration and properties of three of the following bodies :
Bichromate of Potash, Common Alum, Chloride of
Chromium, Corrosive Sublimate.
2. You are provided with potassium hydrate, man-
ganese dioxide and hydrochloric acid from which you
are required to prepare oxygen. How much potassium
hydrate would be required for the preparation of 100
litres of oxygen, measured at S. T. and P., given a
sufficient supply of the other materials ?
3. What is the action of nitric acid on sulphur, on
phosphorus and on iodine ? Explain the so-called cata-
lytic action of traces of bromine or of iodine in stimu-
lating the action between nitric acid and phosphorus.
4. Shew in tabular form the connection and simi-
larities between nitrogen, phosphorus, arsenic and
antimony.
5. What is Avogadro's Hypothesis? Define the
following terms : atomic weight, molecular weight,
basicity of an acid, and distinguish between the terms
dissociation and decomposition.
nnflirt0iti> of Cotonto
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PHYSICS.
PASS.
Examiner : G. R. Anderson, M.A.
1. Describe the common pump, giving drawings
showing the piston ascending and descending.
What limit is there to the working of this
pump ?
2. What is the ordinarily accepted theory as to the
nature of heat ?
What is the unit of quantity of heat ?
How much heat is required to raise the terilpera-
ture of 10 grams, of water from 15°C. to 30°C. ?
3. Explain the graduation of the Farenheit and
Centigrade thermometers, and show how to convert
any temperature Farenheit to the corresponding tem-
perature on the Centigrade scale.
4. Describe any method of finding the velocity of
sound.
5. Describe the major diatonic scale. If C = 256,
-what would be the pitch of G in the same octave ?
6. Show by a diagram the position of the image of
an object placed in front of a plane mirror.
If there be two paj*allel plane mirrors with an
object placed between them, how many images are
formed ?
7. Describe the analysis of a beam of white light
by means of a prism.
8. Give a general explanation of the color of
objects.
9. Describe any form of electric battery with
which you are familiar.
*10. What is an "induced current?" Describe an
experiment or give an example to illustrate.
2initiet0ft9 of STovonta
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PHYSICS.
HONORS.
Examiner : G. R. Anderson, M. A.
1. Define specific gravity.
A block of lead weighs 24.86 grms., and when
immersed in water appears of weigh 22.66 grms.
Determine the sp. gr. of lead.
State how you would find the sp. gr. of a liquid
such as alcohol.
2. Describe the barometer. Explain why a " falling
barometer " generally indicates rain.
3. Describe a self-registering maximum thermometer.
Convert 95° F. to the Centigrade scale.
4. Define " latent heat."
Explain the lowering of temperature produced by
a freezing mixture of snow and salt.
5. Describe the mechanism of the ear.
6. Describe the induction coil, showing clearly the
construction of the automatic break.
7. State the law of reflection of light.
Explain the construction of the compound mic-
roscope, and show by a diagram the formation of the
imao^e.
o
8. What is plane polarized light ?
Explain the method of determining the strength
of a sugar solution by polarized light.
atiilittisfts of Sovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
ANATOMY.
PASS.
iv««.,„-^<. . I ^- Phimrose, M.B., CM., Edin.
Examiners : | j, jj q g^^^^^^ jj g ^^^
1. Enumerate the muscles which move the thumb
at the metacarpo-phalangeal joint; give the origin,
insertion and nerve supply of each.
' 2. Give an account of the origin, course and distri-
bution of the anterior crural nerve.
3. What are the relations of the Inferior Vena Cava ?
Enumerate its tributaries.
4. Give an account of the Lachrymal Gland, Indi-
cating its relations and its nerve and vascular connec-
tions.
5. Describe the floor of the Fourth Ventricle of the
Brain.
8lnfiiev0ftff ot SovontOt
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OP MEDICINE.
ANATOMY.
HONORS.
Examiners • i^' P^^rose, M.B., CM., Edin.
JLxam%7U!T8. |p j^ Q ^TKViYi, M.B., ToR.
1. Describe the Facial Nerve in that part of its
course extending from its origin from the Brain to its
point of exit from the Cranium.
2. Describe the attachment of the muscles of the
Soft Palate and give the nerve supply of each.
3. Describe the reflexions of the Peritoneum in their
relation to the Liver.
4. Describe the origin and course of the Thoracic
Duct. Indicate the portions of the body from which
the lymph is drained by the Thoracic Duct.
5. Enumerate the Muscles having attachment to the
Fibula, giving their nerve supply.
anftofvsfts of STovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PHYSIOLOGY.
PASS.
Examiner: A. B. Macallum.
1 . Give an account of the facts which show a rela-
tion of the pancreas to carbohydrate metabolism.
2. Describe the secretory changes which take place
in (a) mucous gland cells, and (b) serous gland cells.
3. Discuss the functions of the occipitol lobes of the
cerebrum.
4. Indicate how the functions of the various portions
of a renal tubule have been ascertained.
5. What are the physical properties of the lens of
the eye ?
6. Discuss the question why coagulation does not
take place in the normal blood-vessels.
«tnftoev0ftff ot SovontiL
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PHYSIOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner : A. B. Macallum.
1. Indicate by diagram of the internal capsule the
origin and destination of the fibres found in its various
parts.
2. Give a full account of the function of the thyroid
gland.
3. Describe the situation of the respiratory centre
and give an account of its relations and functions.
4. Discuss the functions of the Organ of Corti and
describe its central connections.
5. Give an account of the origin of urea and uric
acid in the body.
6. Discuss the origin of the heart beat, giving all
the facts which have a bearing on the question.
7. Describe the functions of the centres that are in
the lower dorsal and lumbar portions of the spinal
cord.
Pnftier0lt9 of ^oromoc
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
HISTOLOGY AND EMBRYOLOGY
ZOOLOGY.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner : R. R. Bensley, B.A., M.B.
1. Enumerate, with explantory notes, the stages in
the endochondml formation of bone. Explain (a) the
fornaation and growth of the marrow cavity of a long
bone, (6) the increase in length and thickness of a
booe during childhood and adole?^cence.
2. Draw a diagram to indicate the succession of
layers in the wall of the stomach, naming the layers.
Describe minutely the structure of the mucous mem-
brane and its parts in the fundus region. State, with
reasons, the relationship between the cells of the
cardiac and pyloric glands on the one hand and those
of the fundus glands on the other.
3. Illustrate by careful drawings with explanatory
notes the history of the formation and growth of a
Graafian follicle.
4. Indicate by a diagram the course of a uriniferous
tubule and its relationship to the various anatomical
parts of the kidney. Name the successive parts and
describe minutely, with drawings, their structure.
5. Give an account of the method of formation and '
of the structure of the umbilical cord.
6. Describe the development of the eye in Verte-
brates.
8inftoev0ftff of SToronuu
ANNUAL EXAMNATIONS : 190L
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
HISTOLOGY .\ND EMBRYOLOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner : R. R. Benslet, B.A., M.B.
1. Draw a diagram to illustrate the arrangement of
the parts and their nomenclature in the mucous mem-
brane of the ileum. Describe minutely the structure
of these parts. How is the epithelium replaced when
lost ? Indicate the location and nature of the glands
of Brunner. How does the colon differ from the
ileum ?
2. Give a full description of the histology of the
liver under the following headings : (a) mode of sub-
division, (6) course and distribution of the portal and
hepatic blood vessels, (c) structure, course and rela-
tions of the large and small bile ducts, (d) structure
and arrangement of the liver cells and their relations
to the blood and bile capillaries.
3. Describe the minute structure of the gustatory
regions of the tongue.
4. What is the fate of the mesoblastis somites in
the Mammal ?
6. Describe the development of the pineal and pitui-
tary bodies in man.
6. Discuss the significance of the yolk sac in the
Mammalia. In what respect does that of the rabbit
differ from that of man ?
Atiitietsftv of STovonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
ORGANIC CHEMISTUY.
PASS.
Friday, Mat 17th.
1. Indicate in equation fonn the reaction by means
of which you could synthesise any two of the follow-
ing:—
(a) Acetic acid from marsh gas.
(6) Ethylidene chloride from ethyl alcohol.
(c^ Acetone from ethylamine.
(d) Salicylic acid*from benzene.
2. For what purposes are the following substances
employ ed in organic chemistrj' ? the chlorides of phos-
phorus^ acetyl chloride, hydriodic acid, nitrous acid ?
Illustrate your answers by examples.
3. What are the general methods for the preparation
of the following classes ?
(a) The ethereal salts.
^^ «
(6) The bibasic fatty acids.
4. You are required to prepare pure aniline from
benzene ; indicate by equations the several steps in the
process you would adopt.
5. Describe the effect of heat on wood contained in
closed vessels. Speaking broadly, what substances are
thus obtained ? Describe shortly the " quick vinegar
process " for obtaining acetic acid.
nnftierttfts of STovoniOi
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
HONORS.
Saturday, May 18th.
1. Shew by a brief discussiou of the subject how the
constitutional formula for acetic acid has been arrived
at.
2. What methods may be employed for the prepara-
tion of the benzene hydrocarbons ? Compare and con-
trast their behaviour towards reagents with that of the
hydrocarbons of the marsh gas series.
3. In what way are' the carbohydrates classified ?
How is cane sugar prepared from beets, and in what
way might ordinary alcohol be got from rags ?
4. State what vou know about the reactions involved
in preparing each of the following substances : Chloro-
form, Urea from Potassium Ferrocyanide, Salicylic
acid. \Not from the ester contained in the oil of
wintergreen].
5. Indicate methods that might be used for pre-
paring the ketones. What other class of bodies do
they resemble ? IShew this resemblance as exemplified
by their mutual behaviour with reagents.
Mnftoerttftff of Soronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
MATERIA MEDICA.
PASS.
Eicaminer : James MacCallum, B.A., M.D.
1. State fully what is meant by the terms — drastic
purgative, cholagogue and hydragogue — and give ex-
amples of each.
- 2. Describe the characteristics of alkaloids, glucos-
ides, and volatile oils, and give examples.
3. Name the Salts of Zinc in common use. What
one of them resembles Epsom Salts ? How is it dis-
tinguished from the salts ?
4. Name the prepaititions of the metals which are
caustic.
5. Describe Ipecacuanha — dose — its preparations and
their dose.
6. From what is Quinine derived. Name the pre-
parations of Quin. Sulph., and their doses.
nnftievttftff of Sovontiu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
MATERIA MEDICA.
HONORS.
Examiner : James MacCallum, B.A., M.D.
1. What are the principal decoctions in the British
Pharmacopoeia ? How are they prepared ? State
their doses.
2. What is the source of Camphor ? What are its
preparations and doses ?
5. Give the characters and dose of Chloroformum ?
Mention the officinal preparations into which it enters,
giving the amount of Chloroform present in each pre-
paration, and the doses of those used internally.
4. What is the natural order of Cantharides ? Give
the preparations and dases.
5. Give the physical properties, dose, and modes of
administration of Hydrargyri lodidum Rub Reum,Ferri
et Ammonii Citras, Cupri Sulphas, Aciduni Arseni-
osum.
canftiersftj? of srorotito<
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PATHOLOGY.
Eocaminer : John A. Amyot.
1. Carcinomata. What are the theories as to their
origin ? Classify them. Make drawings illustrating
their chief characteristics.
2. Where are dermoids most likely to be found and
why ?
3. Classify local hyperaemias. Give the causes for
venous hyperaemia. What untoward results arise
from venous hyperaemia ?
4. What is Embolism ? Name four sources of em-
boli. What are the consequences of embolism ? '
5. On account of certain structural changes taking
place in inflammation there arise characteristic symp-
toms. What are these ? Give the explanation for
each.
6. What is meant by immunity ? Searching for
the bacilli of tuberculosis in sputum by staining,
how w^ould you proceed ? Give your reasons for each
step.
SinfDereftj? of SToronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PHYSIOLOGICAL OBSTETRICS.
Examiner: Henry T. Machell, M.D. (Tor.)
1. What are the local changes in the maternal
organism induced by pregnancy ?
2. Describe the stages of labour and mention the
phenomena in each stage.
3. What directions should be given the nurse after
labour in regard to asepsis, posture, the diet, the urine,
and the baby ?
4. How would you manage the third stage of
labour ?
\
\
Unt\ttv»tt9 of SToronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
MKDICIJNE.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner: Alexander McPhedran, M.B.
1. (a) What is the duration of the stages of incuba-
tion and invasion of: scarlet fever, measles and
smallpox ?
(6) Give the history of the stage of invasion in a
typical case of each.
2. Give the symptoms, diagnosis and treatment of
acute bronchitis. Differentrate it from broncho-
pneumonia.
3. What are the causes and symptoms of acute
catarrhal inflamation of the bile-ducts ?
4. Give the treatment of psoriasis. What is the
prognosis ?
5. A man aged 30 is passing daily 3 pints of urine
containing 5 per cent of sugar. How should he
dieted ?
6. What causes may give rise to ascites ?
9lnftiet0fts ot 3:orotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE,
SURGERY.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner: George A. Peters, M.B., F.R.C.S. (Eng.)
1. State the diagnostic points which distinguish an,
Inguinal from a Femoral Hernia. Describe the femoral
canal.
2. Excision of the elbow-joint for Tubercular disease.
Describe the operation, structures to be avoided, and
probable results of operation.
3. What causes may produce Extravasation of Urine
into the male perineum ? Give reasons for the direc-
tion of its spread. Give treatment.
4. A femur is broken just below the lesser troch-
anter. Describe and explain the deformity which
immediately results. Give the treatment.
Anfiifteftv of ^ovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH -YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
SURGICAL ANATOMY.
Exciminers • I ^' Primrose, M.B., CM., Edin.
1. What paralyses ensue on division of the ulnar
nerve at the elbow joint ?
2. Where would you map out the fissure of Rolando
on the surface of the scalp ?
3. Where would you outline the heart upon the
anterior surface of the chest, and where in this area
would you indicate the portion of the heart uncovered
by lung and pleura.
4. Enumerate, in order from without inwards, the
structures cut in making the incision, to open the
bladder, in the ordinary operation of lateral lithotomy.
5. If the femoral artery is tied in Hunter s canal, by
what anastomotic vessels may the circulation in the
limb be carried on below the ligature ?
J
anfuetcrtts of Sototito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
GYNilCOLOGY.
Examiner : Henry T. Machell, M.D., Tor.
1/On what theory are topical applications to the
uterus made ? What would you use, and how would
you use them ? For what conditions are they em-
ployed ?
2. Mention the causes of acute vaginitis, the varie-
ties, the prognosis and treatment.
3. What are the advantages and disadvantages of
pessaries in the treatment of retrovei*sion of the
uterus ? How would you replace the uterus, and how
would you measure for a pessary ?
4. Salpingitis. — Give varieties, symptoms, prognosis
and treatment.
5. What growths or enlargements may be found in
the right lower quadrant of the abdomen? How
would you differentiate them ?
I
I
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
OBSTETRICS.
Examiner : Henrt T. Machell, M.D.
1. Into how many periods is the child-bearing pro-
cess divided ? Give their names, normal duration, and
a brief resume of the management of each period.
2. What is understood by the ** mechanism of
labour" ? What are the factors concerned in a normal
labour and the names of the stages or steps and the
cause of the iSrst three ?
3. In what cases would you induce premature
labour ? How and when would you perform it ? What
are its dangers ?
4. What are the indications and contra-indications,
and what rules should govern the use of the forceps ?
5. What are the varieties of puerperal haemorrhage ?
What is the prognosis and what the treatment of
moderately severe cases ?
litiliietefttt ot STorotiio
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PATHOLOGY.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner : John A. Amyot, M.B.
1. Classify the benign new-growths. What are the
theories as to the origin of new-growth ? Make a
drawing descriptive of a small -round cell sarcoma.
2. Give the histological changes taking place in a
kidney in the course of a septico-pysemia. What
would you find of a pathological nature in the urine ?
3. What forms of anaemia have we ? What would
you find in each form on microscopic examination ?
How would you prepare and make a staining of a blood
smear for the examination of the white-cells ?
4. From a pulmonary infection by the bacillus of
tuberculosis, how does a general infection of the body
take place ? How would you go about it, to make a
cultural and a staining examination of the contents of
a tubercle ?
Unlt^tvttita of STovotitc*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FINAL EXAMINATION.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
THERAPEUTICS-
Examiner : James MacCallum, B.A., M.D.
1. Give an account of the the therapeutic actions
and uses of Turpentine.
2. Describe the physiological action and uses of
Digitalis.
3. Describe fully the treatment you would employ
in a case of Acute Nephritis, in which symptoms of
Uraemia were beginning to appear.
4. Upon what theory is the antitoxin treatment of
Diphtheria based ? Describe fully this method of
treatment, especially with regard to the dosage.
Y. What are the therapeutic actions and uses of
Suparenal Capsule ?
SInftiereUs of STorotito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH EXAMINATION AND FINAL.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
FORENSIC MEDICINE.
PASS AND HONORS.
Eocaminer : B. Spkncek, M.D.
1 . Write out briefly and categorically a set of rules
fbr the guidance of a Medico-Legal Witness during his
attendance at Court.
2. Descsibe all the changes which occur in the lungs
and in the position of the diaphragm of the new born,
as the result of complete respiration.
3. Describe the general appearance of Gunshot
Wounds, their dangers immediate and remote, noting
the effects of the Dum-Dum or expanding bullet and
of wounds by shell.
4. What do you understand by Mole Pregnancy ;
and of what significance may it be from a medico-
legal point of view ?
5. Ptomaine poisoning. Give its symptoms, treat-
ment, nature and origin of the poison. In what form
is it most commonly met with in Canada ?
SAnfUrrsiti? of 2rovonto«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
HYGIENE.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner: Wm. Oldright, M.A., M.D.
N.B. — Questions marked thus (*) are for Honors only.
«« " " (+) " Pass only. '
All other questions are for Pass and Honors.
*1. Describe the steps you would take if requested
to examine a school-building and report upon its
healthfulness.
"f2. Write a note upon the causes of impurity
frequently existing in the air of dwellings.
3. Mention the diseases caused by unwholesome
water, and describe the modes of their production.
•("Describe the defects sometimes found in house
drainage.
5. Describe a public disinfecting station and its
operation.
*6. How would you deal with an outbreak of small-
pox in a lumbering district ?
7. Write a paper upon mental hygiene.
ilntiievRiftff of Sovotito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH EXAMINATION AND FINAL.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
MEDICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner : N. H. Beemer, M.B.
HONORS.
1. Define the terms Delusion, Hallucination and
Illusion.
2. State clinical symptoms of Acute Mania.
3. State clinical symptoms of Acute Melancholia.
4. Describe Alternating or Circular Insanity.
*5. Outline three stages in General Paresis. Give
usual age of inception of the disease, frequency in
regard to sex, chief causes and average duration.
*6. Describe Delusional Insanity. Mention three
leading causes of delusions, chief causes, prognosis.
anfliersftff of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
THEORY OF OBLIGATIONS.
PASS.
Examiner : C. A. Moss, B.A., LL.B.
1. A person of full age and a minor enter into a
contract. What are their respective rights in regard to
demanding fulfilment ?
2. What are the general rules of responsibility for
fault ?
3. What are the contracts described as obligations
contracted re or real contracts ?
4. In what ways may a partnership be dissolved ?
5. Define donation. What elements are necessary
to its constitution? What laws limited or circum-
scribed donations ?
6. How may obligations be extinguished ?
7. What are the sources of obligations ? Discuss
the meaning of the term obligatio.
8. Define theft. What are the two kinds of theft ?
atiflietsitff of Sototito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR
FACULTY OF LAW.
MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE,
PASS.
Examiner : C. A. Moss, B. A., LL.B.
1. How are the proofs of absorption afforded ?
2. Distinguish mania and melancholia.
3. Will the suppression of a fact unknown to the
applicant in relation to the health of an applicant for
a life insurance policy invalidate his policy ? Explain.
4. What are the three alkalies ?
5. What are the post-mortem appearances in cases
of death from suffocation ?
6. What means are afforded of identifying the
living ?
7. Discuss historically the doctrine of irresponsi-
bility by reason of insanity as a defence to a charge of
murder.
8. What are the characteristics of the poisonous
effects of alcohol ?
9. What does the author give as the principal
reasons for feigned diseases ?
ntifliersftv of STorotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FACULTY OF LAW.
FOURTH YEAR.
TORTS-
PASS.
Examine!': C. A, Moss, B.A., LL.B.
1 . Name eight cases in which the law licenses an
entry upon the lands of others.
2. Can one have copj^right (a) in the title of a
book, (6) in the translation of a book, (c) in the re-
translation of a book ?
3. To what extent may a riparian proprietor use
the water of the stream for domestic purposes ?
4. What are the remedies of the public and of
private individuals in regard to public nuisances?
5. What are the rights of a man whose cattle have
been lawfully upon a highway and have strayed upon
adjoining property, in regard to driving them off such
property ?
6. Discuss the liability of a principal for false repre-
sentations made by an agent.
anfliersfts of 9otoiito«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
TORTS-
HONORS.
Exarainer : C. A. Moss, B.A., LL.B.
1. What obligation is there upon the owner of a
house towards his neighbor to keep his house in
repair ?
2. A took possession of a place in 1898. B. for
some time prior, since 1896, has been carrying on,
and still continues, his business in adjoining premises
in such a way as to diffuse noxious vapors and fumes
over the premises A. has taken. A. brings an action
against B. for nuisance. Can he recover ? Explain.
3. A. and 6. are negotiating with a view to A.
selling B. a horse. By false and fraudulent misrepre-
sentations concerning the animal C. induces B. to
break otf negotiations. A. suffers loss thereby. Is
C. liable to him for damages?
4. Can a man use his own property to the prejudice
of others ? What difference, if nxiy, does his motive
make?
5. Is a child of tender years barred from recovery
in an action for negligence by the contributory negli-
gence of the party in whose custody the child was ?
Explain.
6. Discuss the right of a person dwelling near a
railway constructed under legal authority to complain
of the noise of the trains.
atifoetsftff of 0ototit&
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
REAL PROPERTY.
PASS.
Examiner : C. A, Moss, B.A., LL.D.
1. In what ways can a tenancy at will be deter-
mined ?
2. Trace historically the assignment of rights of
entry.
3. Define vested remainder and contingent re-
mainder.
4. What are the requisites of a deed ?
5. Describe folkland and bookland.
6. Describe the conveyance by way of lease and
release.
7. Trace historically the abolition of military ten-
ures.
a^tifiietsftff of sorotitOt
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
REAL PROPERTY.
HONORS.
Examiner : C. A. Moss, B.A., LL.B.
1. Trace historically the manner in which creditors
become entitled to have recourse to the lands of their
debtors to satisfy the debt.
2. Trace the development of the modem mortgage.
3. What is the rule against perpetuities ?
4. What should a power of sale in a mortgage con-
tain?
5. Name the old principal species of lay tenure.
6. Explain the conveyance by way of bargain and
sale and trace its development.
Bltiftoersftj? of fforomOc
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901,
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
COMMERCIAL LAW.
PASS.
Examiner : C. A. Moss, B. A., LKB.
1. Can one who has sold goods to a man knowing
him io be drunk recover the price ? Explain.
2. What implied warranty is there as to quality in a
sale of goods by description ? In what cases is the
warranty not implied ?
3. Can the seller give the purchaser a better title to
goods than the seller has ?
4. When will a buyer be deemed to have accepted
goods?
5. When is a sale by auction complete ?
6. In what cases must a bill be presented for ac-
ceptance ?
. 7. Distinguish general and qualified acceptance ef a
bill of exchange.
8. How is a promissory note protested in Ontario ?
Can protest be waived ?
9. Bow is a bill discharged ?
«lnftiet0ftff oC Sototiio.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : IWl.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
COMMERCIAL LAW.
HONORS.
Examiner : C. A. Moss, B.A., LL.6.
1. How would you determine whether a given con-
tract was one for work and materials or one of sale ?
2. Distinguisl) and give examples of suspensive and
resolutive conditions
3. Where and when must delivery of goods sold be
made?
4. What rights by implication of law has an unpaid
seller of goods in cases where the property has passed
to the buyer ? In what cases can an unpaid seller
retain possession of the goods ?
5. What rights has the holder of a bill drawn or
indorsed by an infant or by a corporation having no
power to incur liability on a bill ?
6. " Please let the bearer have fifty dollars. I will
" arrange it with you this afternoon.
" To Thomas Tomkins, Esq.
"(Sgd.) John Smith."
Does the above constitute a valid bill ? Explain.
7. Explain payment of a bill for honor.
8. What is a crossed cheque ? Explain general and
special crossing.
sitiftiet0Uff of S0vomo«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR
FACULTY OF LAW.
PRIVATE INTERNATIONAL LAW-
PASS.
Examiner: H. E. Rose, B.A., LL.B.
1. Discuss the liability of an English administrator
to account in England for assets of the deceased which
the administrator has recovered abroad.
2. What is denization ? Distinguish it from natur-
cdization.
3. What pereons bom out of British dominions are
by English law considered to be natural-bom British
subjects ?
4. Do our Courts raise any presumption as to what
the law of another country on any given subject is ?
If so, how may such presumption be rebutted ?
5. How is the domicile at any given time of legiti-
mate and illegitimate minors, respectively determined ?
6. Write a note on exterritoriality, with special
reference to foreign states or sovereigns as litigants in
English Courts.
7. Discuss the divergent views as to allowing the
personal law of a given person to determine whether
or not he is of age to enter into binding contracts.
8. What requirements of the lex loci actus are, in
England, considered essential to the validity of a mar-
riage celebrated abroad ?
^ I
2lnftift0U9 of Sototito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : IWl.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
PRIVATK INTERNATIOiNAL LAW.
HONOURS.
Examiner : H. E. Rose, B.A., LL.B.
1. Is it accurate to speak of a '' general law mari-
time ? " If so, mention any case in which such a law
may be applied.
2. Do our courts, in so far as regards contracts made
here, recognize incapacity of a penal nature existing by
virtue of a foreign law ? Explain.
3. A contract of a sort which our law requires to be
evidenced by writing is made abroad without writing.
By the lex loci contractiis it is valid and enforceable.
Will our courts enforce it ? Explain.
4. Write a note on the English decisions as to domi-
cile as the foundation of jurisdiction to grant divorce,
referring especially to what Westlake calls "the
greater hesitation which the court appears to show in
recognizing foreign divorces than in granting English
ones."
5. Discuss the statement that " where English law
was properly applicable to the decision of a foreign
suit, and the foreign court has mistaken the law, the
court must not enforce its judgment."
6. " For a change of domicile, the intention which
is in general necessary is that of establishing in the
new country a residence luith a sufficient character of
permanence.*' Write a note on the italicised words.
ntiftiet0ftj| of Sovonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
CORPORATIONS.
PASS.
Examiner : H. E. Rose, B.A., LL.B.
1. What do 3'ou understaDd by the term "public
corpomtion " ? Is such a corporation under any obli-
gation which can be enforced by the public to perform
the objects for which it was incorporated ?
2. Distinguish the expressions " ultra vires ** and
" illegal," as applied to the acts of companies ?
3. What is the general rule as to the extent of the
power of a corporation to acquire and hold real estate ?
4. An owner claims compensation from a railway
company for injury to his building by vibration due to
the running of trains upon the line which has been
constructed under statutory powers close to the build-
ding. Discuss the case.
5. Discuss the power of a commercial corporation to
deal in its own shares or in the shares of another cor-
poration.
6. How does Mr. Brice define the limitations of the
power of an ordinary trading corporation to "run
into debt " ?
7. A company has power to issue negotiable instru-
ments, and by its by-laws authorizes its president and
.secretary to sign such instruments on its behalf.
These officers borrow money for a purpose foreign to
the objects of the company and sign a promissory note
in the company's name therefor. Discuss the lia-
bility of the company to a bond fide endorsee for value
of such note.
8. A company is given power to declare dividends
out of profits. Give the general rules for determining
what are " profits."
Blnftift0ftff of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EICAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
CORPORATIONS-
HONOURS.
Examiner: H. E. Rose, B.A., LLB.
1. A railway company contracts to sell a portion of
the land on which its track is laid, but afterwards
refuses to carry out its contract, alleging that to do so
will prevent the operation of the road, and that the
contract is therefore, vZtra vires.
Discuss the defence.
2. Write a note on the implied powers of directors
to accept the surrender of shares, and thus to relieve
the shareholder from his liability for calls.
3. A broker, employed by a company to sell its
shares, procures a subscription by fraudulent misrepre-
sentation. The subscriber institutes an action claim-
ing (a) recission of the contract, (b) damages from the
company, (c) damages from the broker.
Discuss the case.
4. A news-boy attempted to board a street car.
The motorman, thinking he had no right to get on,
pushed him o6, and he fell under the wheels, sustain-
ing injury. The motorman's duty was simply to
operate the car, the person to control its move-
ments and to deal with passengers being the conductor.
Is the company liable to the boy ? Explain.
5. A company, authorized by its charter to run
omnibusses between Toronto and Richmond Hill,
extends its line, without authority, to Newmarket Is
it liable in damages to a passenger who, while travel-
from Richmond Hill to Newmarket, sustains injury
owing to the negligence of the company's servants ?
Explain.
29nftiet0ftj| of Sovoiito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
CONSTRUCTION OF STATUTES
PASS.
Examvner : H. E. Rose, B.A., LL.B.
1. When does a statute come into force if no day is
specially named in it for its commencement ?
2. Is a statute creating a crime binding upon a
person who could not possibly have known that it was
passed ? Explain.
3. What is the general rule of construction in case
there are in the same statute general and specific
enactments inconsistent with one another ?
4. Mention some purposes for which express lan-
guage in a statute is indispensable.
5. What are the ** rules in HeydorCa Case"? Is
there any class of statute in which they do not apply ?
6. What effect, if any, may non-user for a great
length of time leave upon a statute ?
eitiftieteUs of Covonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
CONSTRUCTION OF STATUTES.
HONORS.
Examiner : H. E. Rose, B.A., LL.B.
1. Can any general rule be laid down as to whether
statutory directions as to how things are to be done
are to be treated as absolute or merely directory { If
you cannot frame a general rule, mention any circum-
stances to be considered in arriving at a decision in a
particular case.
2. Mention any circumstances which will justify the
supplying by implication of words omitted from a
statute. Give an illustration.
3. What is the rule of construction ex viacey^ibus
actits ? Under what circumstances is resort to be had
to it ?
4. Mention any exception to the rule that a prior
statute is to be taken as repealed by a subsequent one
if the two are contrariant.
5. How would you determine whether a penalty
imposed b}' statute is cumulative if the prohibited act
is done more than once on the same day at the same
place ?
6. Mention some circumstances under which statutes
-will be treated as retrospective.
!Anttier6ft9 of S^oronto<
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
CRlMIiNAL LAW.
PASS.
Examiner : H. E. Rose, B.A., LL.B.,
1. " Throwing stones from a house whereby the
death of some one is caused may be murder, man-
slaughter or homicide by misadventure.'*
Explain and illustrate the above statement.
2. Define affi^ay and distinguish it from riot and
from assault. Has the code altered the common law
definition ?
3. Could a dog be the subject of larceny at common
law ? Give the principle upon which the common
law rule was based, and say whether the code has
changed the law.
4. What is Harris' definition of larceny ?
The prisoner, with intent to steal a boat, began
to unfasten the moorings but was interrupted and
desisted. Might he have been convicted of larceny at
common law ? May he be convicted of theft under
the code ? Explain.
5. What is the offence of maintenance ?
6. Defin? and distinguish assault and battery,
7. What is the common law offence of conspiracy ?
Is the doing of an overt act a necessary ingredient ?
vinl\tfv»lts ot Sotomo^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
ft
CRIMINAL LAW.
HONORS.
Examiner : H. ^. Rose, B. A., LL.B.
1. What is an accessory after the fact to an offence ?
Has the Code altered the law as to the liability
of a husband who assists his wife to escape arrest for
an ofience ?
2. A warehouseman with whom goods are left for
safe keeping converts them to his own use. Could he
have been convicted of larceny at common law ? Of
what offence is he guilty under the Code ? Explain.
3. Harris, adopting Cokes definition, describes
murder jis the unlawful killing of a reasonable
creature. . . .with inalice aforethought either express or
implied. Write a short note on the meaning of the
words printed in italics.
How is murder described in the Code ?
4. (a) What is the common law definition of a
common nuisance ? (6) What common nuisances are
criminal under the Code ? (c) To what extent is a
private person justified in abating a public nuisance ?
5. What is perjury ? Is it necessary that the false-
hood should be in regard to some matter material to
the issue ? Has the Code effected any alteration in
the law &s to this ?
6. What is the common law distinction between
principals in the first degree and principals in the
second degree ?
Give examples to illustrate your answer.
Is the distinction preserved by the Code ?
amnetttfti^ of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
DOMESTIC RELATIONS.
PASS.
Examiner : C. A. Moss, B.A., LL.B.
1. Describe briefly the state of affairs intended to be
remedied by Lord Hardwieke's Act, and note its chief
provisions.
2., Distinguish void and voidable marriages.
3. What are the civil impediments to marriage ?
4. What are the rights of a mother to the custody
of her lawful children ?
5. How may the right of a parent to the custody of
his or her children be enforced ?
6. What is the liability of a parent for the torts of
his child ?
7. What are the disabilities of an illegitimate child ?
8. What right has a father to the earnings of his
child ? ^
9. Upon what principles does the Court of Chancery
exercise authority over parents, guardians of the per-
sons of an infant, and guardians of the estate of an
infant respectively ?
vmtMtvmtv of c:ovomtt
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
FACULTY OF LAW.
DOMESTIC RKLATIONS.
HONORS.
Examiner : C. A. Moss, B.A., LL.B.
1. Is marriage a status or a contract ? Explain.
2. Under what circumstances does the presumption
in favor of marriage not hold good ?
- 3. What marriages of British subjects celebrated
Abroad will be recognized in English courts ?
4. A stranger with the authority of the father pro-
irides for a length of time a fund for the maintenance
and education of his child. Can the father claim its
custody ? Explain.
5. Under what obligations are grandparents to sup-
port their grandchild ?
6. Trace the history of the liability of its mother to
support her illegitimate child.
7. In what ways may guardians be appointed ?
8. Explain guardianship by the custom of the
manor.
Vini\KV»its ot Sototito^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
In thb Aobicultubal College, Guelph.
METEOROLOGY.
Examiner : J. B. Reynolds, B.A.
1. Discuss the mutual relations existing between
atmospheric temperature and humidity.
2. Define the following terms, and state in what
connection each is used : — isobar, isotherm, adiabatic,
gradient, aneroid, cumulus.
3. Give a full description of a standard instrument
used for determining respectively atmospheric pressure,
humidity and precipitation. Describe also the method
of reading each instrument and of interpreting results.
4. A given area is heated while the surrounding
areas remain cold. Represent in a diagram and
describe the isobars over the supposed areas. Describe
also the circulation over these areas.
5. Write a general note on weather prediction, stat-
ing the conditions that may be predicted, and by what
means forecasts are made.
I
L
«nflier0ft9 ot STorotiio.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1900.
In the Agricultural Golleob, Guklph.
SOIL PHYSICS.
Examiner : J. B. Reynolds, B.A.
1. State and explain the effects of soil mulches.
2. Show to what extent the water-capacity of the
soil may be controlled.
3. In what circumstances, if at all, may a soil be
overdrained ? Describe the type of soil that is liable
t;o such injury.
4. In relation to the various tj'pes of soil, discuss
the question of the depth and the distance apart of
under^ound drains.
5. State and explain the influence on the tempera-
ture of the soil of (a) cultivation, (b) moisture,
(c) color.
6. Discuss the relative rates of heating of (a) soil
and water, (6) soil and air, when both are similarly
exposed to insolation.
Wntiiettfits of eotomo«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
In the Agricultural Colleob, Guelph.
VENTILATION AND HEATING.
Examiner : J. B. Reynolds, B.A.
1. At 0"" F. one cubic foot of saturated air contains
.56 grains of aqueous vapor, and at 60" 6.78 grains.
The outer air at 0° is introduced into a school-room
occupied by 60 pupils. Allowing 30 cubic feet of air
per minute for each pupil, and supposing that the
incoming air contains 75^ of moisture, and is to be
maintained at that degree of humidity, aud its tempera-
ture to be raised to 65 . Calculate the amount of water
that must be evaporated per hour, to maintain the
required degree of humidity.
2. Discuss the influence of the size of the room on
ventilation.
3. Define the terms " Plenum " and " Vacuum " as
applied to systems of ventilation. Show how a fan
may be used in either system.
4. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of
heating with hot air.
5. Describe and compare the direct and indirect
systems of steam-heating.
6. Discuss the special problems that have to be
considered in stable ventilation.
ZAnfUetivfti? of Sotomo^
DEPARTMENT OF DENTISTRY.
ROTAL GOLLKOK OV DkNTAL SuROBONS. OF ONTARIO.
COMBINED ANNUAL EXAMINATION : APRIL, 190L
FOR D.D.S. AND L.D.S.
ANATOMY.
Examiner : F. N. G. Starr, M.B. (Tor.)
Note. — Any five (5) queations will be considered a full paper, but
not more than five.
1. What is the origin of the Superior Maxillary
Nerve ? Give its branches and trace them to their
termination.
2. Describe minutely the Antrum of Highmore.
3. Describe the Intra-cranial Venous Sinuses, and
mention the means of communication between the
Intra and Extra-cranial venous blood vessels.
4. Describe the Pharynx.
5. Locate the various foramina in the base of the
skull, and tell what structures pass through each.
6. Trace the Lingual Artery, giving its relations
from its origin to its termination.
DEPARTMENT OF DENTISTRY.
ROTAL COLLBGB OP DbNTAL SuBOBONS OV OkTABIO.
COMBINED ANNUAL EXAMINATION : APRIL, lOOL
FOR D.D.S. AND L.D.S.
CHEMISTRY.
Examiner: F. J. Smale, B.A., Ph.D.
1. .30 grras. of an organic compound yielded upon
analysis 115 c.c. of Nitrogen measured at 20°C and
760 m.m. Calculate the percentage of Nitrogen by
weight in the compound. [Leave your answer in the
form of a fraction, without multiplying out] N = 14.
2. Hydrogen Sulphide is said to be a redticing
agent, Uhlonne, an oxidizing agent Explain, giving
equations.
3. Show that Arsenic Antimony and Bismuth while
showing somewhat varying chemical properties yet
show very similar composition in most of their com-
pounds.
4. Give methods of preparation and properties of
the Hydrides (compounds of Hydrogen) of Nitrogen,
Oxygen, Sulphur and Iodine.
5. What is the distinction between organic and
inorganic as applied to chemistry? Distinguish
between strv/stural and empirical formulae. What
compounds are isomeric with Ethyl Ether [(C,H5),0] ;
write their structural formulae.
[over]
6. Give formula and one method of preparation of
each of the following organic acids : Hydrocyamc,
Acetic, Tartaric, Salicylic.
7. Describe the method of preparation (giving equa*
tions) and properties of Chloroform and Formaldehyde.
einftietsftj? oC SoroMto^
PEPABTMENT OP DENTISTRY.
ROTAL COLLKOB OF DSMTAL SUBOBONS Of OnTABIO.
COMBINED ANNUAL EXAMINATION: APRIL, 190L
FOR D.D.S. AND L.D.S.
ORTHODONTIA.
Examiner: A. E. Webster, L.D.S., D.D.S., M.D.
Candidatea will take either queBtions 1 to 7 indaeive, or questions
7 to 12 inclusive.
1. Make drawings of suitable appliances for per-
forming the following operations :
(a) Rotate a central. t
(6) Spread the arch.
(c) Draw a cuspid distally where the 1st bicuspid
has been extracted to make room.
(d) Bring a central incisor into proper occlusion
that is now in lingual occlusion.
2. (a) What are the objections to annealing the
german silver wire as it is being drawn to the sizes
required in Orthodontia ?
(b) What are the reasons for annealing the ger-
man silver plate out of which the tubing is made ?
3. Explain in detail how to temper a small piece
of steel, such as an enamel chisel, so that the cutting
edge will be quite hard while the shank will be soft
enough to bend before breaking.
4. Of what value are accure casts of the teeth and
face in Orthodontia ?
5. Describe in detail how to pinch and solder a
band for a cuspid tooth.
[OVKR.]
6. Why is the drill used for cutting the hole
through the nut smaller than the tap used to cut the
thread?
7. Of what value is the Roentgen ray in Ortho-
dontia ?
8. Give the technique of setting Orthodontia bandB
upon teeth, using cement
9. Name three surgical methods of correcting irreg-
ularities of the teeth and describe one method in detail
10. Show by drawings how to perform the following
operations :
(a) Open the suture between the Superior Max-
illary bones.
(b) Bring all of the lower teeth into normal
occlusion that are now in distal occlusion about the
width of a bicuspid.
(c) Force the lower incisers into their sockets so
that they may not bite into the gums behind the
upper centrals.
11. What important point must always be kept in
mind in ^rrecting any irregularity so that the teeth
may remain permanently in their new positions after
the retaining appliance is removed ?
12. (a) Show a design of a suitable appliance for
correcting the irregularity presented in the models
given you.
(b) How long should these teeth be retiuned in
their new positions by an appliance ?
DEPARTMENT OF DENTISTRY.
Royal Collkoe op D«ktal Surgeons or Ontario.
COMBINED ANNUAL EXAMINATION : APRIL, 1901.
FOR D.D.S. AND L.D.S.
OPERATIVE DENTISTRY.
Eicamwer : Sylvester Moyer, L.D.S., D.D.S.
1. Give your treatment (at the first sitting) of a
tooth under the following conditions :
(a) Where the pulp has been devitalized by the
application of arsenic.
(6) Where pulp is putrescent but condition is
limited to pulp chamber and root canal.
(c) Where there is chronic alveolar abscess with
fistulous opening on the gum.
{d) Chronic alveolar abscess discharging through
the root canals, J^ut with no opening on the gums.
{e) Acute alveolar abscess.
2. Give rules for cavity preparation.
(a) On the proximate surfaces of the incisors.
(6) On the buccal surface of molars.
3. (a) What do you understand by " extension for
prevention ?
(6) In what classes of cavities would you think
extension for prevention necessary ?
4. Discuss the use and abuse of matrices.
5. What do you consider are the chief causes of
failure in cases where cavities have been filled with
amalgam ?
[over]
6. In filling cavities with gold
(a) What form of gold should be used ?
(b) How should it be annealed ?
(c) What should be the nature and streogth of
force applied for the condensing of the gold ?
7. A proximate cavity in a bicuspid has been
properly prepared for the reception of a filling. Give
your metnod of inserting and finishing
(a) An Amalgam filling.
(b) An Oxyphosphase filling.
(c) A Guttapercha filling.
8. Cite instances where the use of gold as a filling
is contra-indicated.
9. Root canal filling.
(a) With what would you fill them ?
(b) What precautions would you take to prevent
the filling from passing through the apical foramen ?
(c) How would you endeavor to prevent the
filling from gradually becoming permeated with
microbes ?
r
k
Bltiftitvttftff Of Sorotito*
DEPARTMENT OF DENTISTRY.
RoTAL College of Dental Suboeons or O^tabio.
COMBINED ANNUAL EXAMINATION : APRIL, 1901.
FOR D.b.S. AND L.D.S.
PROSTHETIC DENTISTRY.
Examiner : W. J. Fear, LD.8.
Note. — In order to seonre good marks diBcussions rnnit be short
and to the point.
1. Name the different methods commonly used for
tharelief of pain during extraction of teeth and discuss
briefly the relative merits of each.
2. Describe carefully a mouth that is ready for a
full upper denture.
3. Suppose a patient presents a mouth with the left
lateral, and 1st molar, and right 2nd bicuspid missing
from the upper jaw, and asks for an alluminum plate
with vulcanite attachments. Would you insert it ?
Give reasons for your answer.
4. Discuss the relative advantages and disadvant-
ages of : —
(a) The different kinds of vulcanite bases for
dentures.
(b) Alluminum with vulcanite and without.
(c) Gold.
(d) Silver.
5. Name in order the five most important points to
be considered in constructing an upper denture.
6. Given a case (the patient being 40 years old)
where the upper 4 incisors are badly decayed ; the R.
Lateral and L. Central absessed and quite loose and
have been for years, both 1st bicuspids badly decayed
[oyer]
from posterior surface but roots comparatively sound,
1st molars gone with the exception of the ends of
roots still in the gums, R. 2nd molar and both 3rd
molars crowns broken down but pulps still alive,
remander of upper and all lower teeth in good
condition.
(a) If left to your own choice how would you
treat the case and why ?
(b) If crowns or bridgework is used describe
clearly their construction ?
(c) If you do not advise, or your patient cannot
afford bridge work, give treatment and describe the
construction of aparatus used.
7. (a) How would you make an open faced shell
crown ior an upper cuspid ?
(6) Discuss their merits as anchorages for bridge
work.
8. What are the relative merits and demerits of : —
Richmond crown, Banded Logan and an all porcelain
for an upper central incisor with good, sound root.
atitbersftj? of s:arotito.
DEPARTMENT OF DENTISTRY.
Royal College of Dental Suboeons op Ontario.
COMBINED ANNUAL EXAMINATION : APRIL, 1901.
FOR D.D.S. AND L.D.S.
MEDICINE AND SURGERY.
Examiner : D. Clark, L.D.S., D.D.S.
1. Treat a fracture of the body of inferior maxilla
in a case where there are no teeth in either jaw.
2. What is Caries of bone ? Give causes, symptoms
and treatment.
3. In inflammator}' conditions what are the pre-
disposing and exciting causes ?
4. Treat a case of Cleft Palate surgically.
5. What is Syphilis ? How acquired ? Give symp-
toms and treatment of secondary stage.
6. Name different varieties of Sarcoma. Give symp-
toms and treatment of one variety.
8lnftiet»ft|? oC SotomOc
DEPARTMENT OF DENTISTRY.
ROTAL COLLBOK OF DsNTAL SfTBOEONS OF ONTARIO.
COMBINED ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : APRIL, igOl.
FOR D.D.S. AND L.D.S.
PHYSIOLOGY.
Examiner : A. Primrose, M.B., CM., Edin., M.RC.S.,
Eng.
1. Explain the physical laws which permit of the
absorption of Oxygen and the excretion of Carbonic
Acid Gas during respiration. What function is served
by the Pulmonary Epithelium ?
2. What effect is produced by stimulation of the
peripheral end of a divided Chorda Tympani nerve
upon (a) the secretion of Saliva, (6) the blood circula-
tion in the Salivary Gland ?
3. Through what channels are carbo-hydrates
absorbed from the small Intestine ? Trace the history
of the carbo-hydrates thus absorbed, (a) in the Liver,
(b) in the tissues generally.
4. What is Rigor Mortis ? In what way may you
compare the condition of rigor mortis in muscle to the
phenomena which occur in the coagulation of the
Blood ?
5. What is Urea ? Where is it produced and where
excreted ? If the Kidneys were destroyed by disease
or were removed from the body, what effect would
there be upon the formation and excretion of Urea ?
6. What is the composition of Sweat ? What func-
tion do the sweat glands serve in the body ? Discuss
the nerve control of the secretion of Sweat.
1
einftiersftfi ot Coronto#
DEPARTMENT OF DENTISTRY.
RoTAL College of Dental Surgeons of Ontasio.
COMBINED ANNUAL EXAMINATION : APRIL, 1901.
FOR D.D.S. AND L.D.S.
MAtERU MEDICA AND TflERAPEUTICS.
Examiner : W. J. Bruce, D.D.S., L.D.S.
1. Give your Therapeutic treatment of Alveolor
Pyorrhoea, and state what action you would expect
from each drug used ; also write a prescription for a
mouth wash to be used daily by patient during treat-
ment.
*
2. (a) Write a prescription for a Devitalizing
paste that will cause as little pain as possible to patient.
(b) Tou apply paste to devitalize a pulp and
patient cannot return for two weeks. Give directions
to patient. '
3. Give your treatment for recession of the gums.
Write a prescription for a Dentrifice and mouth wash
to be used in such cases.
4. Explain :
(a) How you would make an eight per cent
solution of Cocaine.
(b) The difference between a ten per cent solu-
tion and a ten grain solution.
(c) When you would not advise use of Cocaine
as a local Anaesthetic.
5. State in what cases each of the following drugs
might be successfully used : — Zinci Sulphas, Thymol,
Argenti Nitras, Sulfonal, Sodae Phenas, Potassi Per-
manganas, lodum, Phenacetine, Magnesii Sulphas,
Bismuthi Subnitras, Aristol, Amyl-Nitris, Alumen.
[over]
6. What would you consider the best treatment for
Chronic Alveolar Abscess and your reasons for using
such treatment ?
7. Give your treatment for the following : — Ulcer-
ous Stomatitis, Gangrenous Stomatitis, Aphthae,
Hypertrophy of the gums, Facial-Neuralgia, Maxillary
Abscess, Abnormal Sensibility of Dentine, Periodontitis.
8. Patient has fistula on side of face. The tooth
has been extracted but the fistula will not close. Grive
treatment in order to effSect a cure.
9. Give local treatment for Interstitial Gingivitis.
10. Patient has all the local manifestations in the
mouth of a cas^ of Syphilis. Give systemic and local
treatment of the case.
n
^nlt^tvults of STpvontpt
DEPARTMENT OF DENTISTRY.
RoTAL College of Dental Surgeons of Ontario.
COMBINED ANNUAL EXAMINATION : APRIL, I90L
EXAMINATION FOR D.D.S AND L.D.8.
DENTAL JURISPRUDENCE.
J^caminer : J. B. Willmott, L.D.8., D.D.S.
1. The Ontario " Act respecting Dentistry " provides
for a Board of Directors.
(a) Give number of Directors.
(6) Give qualification for Director.
(c) Give mode of electing Directors.
{d) How often are elections held ?
(e) State generally the duties and powers of the
Board of Directors.
2. Section 15 of the "Act respecting Dentistry"
directs the Board of Directors to make " By-laws as
ma}^ be necessary."
(a) Give titles of four By-laws so enacted, and
the general provisions of one of them.
(b) By whom may these By-laws be annulled ?
3. Under the provisions of the ** Act respecting
Dentistry *' :
(a) What offences are punishable by fine ?
(b) How is a conviction secured ?
(c) What is the amount of the fine which may be
imposed ? To whom is it payable by the Magistrate ?
4. To what extent may a legally qualified Dentist
resort to systematic treatment ? Mention illustrative
cases.
[OVBBj
5. If a Dentist administers general anesthetics, what
precautions is he required to take ?
Is it expedient for a Dentist to administer Chlo-
roform or Ether ? Give reasons for your answer.
6. What degree of skill does the law require of every
Dentist ?
What is the rule where one claims to be a
" specialist " ?
State the requirements in reference to advances
in the profession of Dentistry.
7. Distinguish between an *' expert " a^d a ^ com-
mon witness."
What qualifications will be required of an expert
Dental witness ?
What is the practice in Ontario as to fees paid
" expert witnesses ?
wmntvunji of (Roxomi^,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACY.
PRESCRll^TIONS.
Eocaminer : Chas. Heebneb, Ph.B., Phm.B.
1. Translate the following prescriptions :
(a) Mitte hirudines, No vj.
Applicetur lateri dolenti emplastrum v^esica-
torium hora vespere, et Recipe : — Hydrargyri chloridi
mitis, grana tres ; Pulveris autimonaiis, grana quatuor
c semisse ; Confectionis Rosae, sesgi*anum. Misce fiat
pilula hora somni sumenda.
(6) R. Magnesii sulphatis, semiunciam . Tincturse
cardamomi compositse, drachmam ; Aquae unciam et
drachmas duas. Misce fiat haustus aperiens eras
primo mane sumendus.
(c) ^. Linimenti ammoniae, Linimenti chloro-
formi, Linimenti opii, ana fiuidrachmas quatuor. Mis-
ceantur ut fiat linimentum, cujus infricetur pauxillum
bis terve^quotidie sterno et parti thoracis dolenti.
2. Expand and translate (a) c. m. s. ; (b) h. lima,
mat. ; (c) P. B. ; (d) p. c. ; (e) M. cap. |j q. q. 2da hor. ;
(/) seg. p. hor. ; (g) M. D. S. ; (h) d. i. p. seq. ; (i) h. s.
3. What would you dispense for the following
preparations: (a) Ung. caeruleum; (fe) Pulv. fuscus;
(c) Hepar sulphuris ; (d) Pulv. Jacobi ; (e) Grey powder;
(/) Ung. Qaleni ; (g) Ward's Paste ; (h) Eau de vie.
4. State the manner of preparing pharmaceutical
combinations of oils with aqueous liquids, and describe
fully the methods of procedure with fixed and volatile
oils respectively.
[over]
5. A prescription calls for strychnine and arsenoas
oxide, one-fourth gmn of each, in an aqueous mixture ;
state the volumes of Liq. strychninse, P. B., and Liq.
Arsenici Hydrochloricus P. B., respectively, that should
be dispensed to represent these quantities.
6. Criticise the following prescriptions : Point out
all cases of incompatibility where they occur; state if
the mixture can be satisfactorily dispensed, and give
methods :
(a) R, Strychnine gr.j.
Glycerini m. xxx.
Aquae q. s. ft. f 3iij.
Misce ut fiat injectio hypodermica.
(6) 5t. Camphoras, gr. Ixx.
Plumbi acetatis, gr. L
Tincturse iodi, m. 1.
Phenolis, gr. xxiv.
Misce et fiant pilulse viginti et quatuor.
(c) Q:. lodi resublimati, gr. xl.
Adipis suilli, Ij.
M. fiat unguentum.
(d) TSjc. Quininae sulfatis, 3i.
Ferri pyrophosphatis, 3ij.
Acidi phosphorici diluti f$ss.
Syrupi zingiberis f|ij.
Aquam ad ff iv.
M. ft. mist.
^nftietsfts of STorotiio.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FINAL EXAMINATION.
DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACY.
PRACTICAL DISPENSING.
Examiner : Chas. F. Heebner, Ph.G., Phm.B.
K'oTE. — Candidates will dispeDse the following prescriptions with
neatness, accuracy, and dispatch, labelling and finishing the
medicines, as if aesigned for patients. The order and clean-
Uness in which each dispensing desk with its utensils is left,
will be rated.
Thomas B. Byrnes.
Sk Olei jecoris aselli ^sb.
Olei menthse piperitse gtts. iv.
Camphorse ffr, xxv,
Sodii hypopboephitis Sss.
Oalcii phoepbatis gr. Ixxx.
Acacise pulveris q. &
Aquam ad. f^iv.
M. sec. art. ut ft. mist, et sig. : cochleare mod. hora
decima et hora tertia suniendum.
Winifred Outhbert.
R. Hydrargyri oxidi rubri gr. v.
Cetacei gr. xx.
Paraffini mollis ft. las.
M. ft nng. et mitte in pyxidem ligneam.
Sig — Prefricare leniter ad partem affectam.
[ovkr]
George Samson.
R. Creosoti m. j.
O. 0.0. m. ij.
M. Detur Id capsulam accurate metiri et niitte tales
dofies no. vj.
Sig — Una ante cibain et hor. decub. sumenda.
Miss Gertrude Foley.
R. Ammonii carbonatis gr. ij.
Rhei puiveris
Sacchari puiveris aa. gr. iij.
M. ft. pulv. et mitte septem et dispense cum signatura :
Capiat unam omni hor. quadrante donee leniatur dolor.
Thos. B. Kissam.
Bt. Rhei puiveris 0
Sodii bicarbonatis 1
Oiei menthse piperitse 0
M. et fiant pil. no. x.
Sig — Exhibe i. p. c. t. i. d. et hor. somni.
650
300
325
CAnfiiev0ftfi of Sovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FINAL EXAMINATION,
DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACY.
PHARMACY AND PHARMACEUTICAL
CHEMISTRY.
Examiner: Fbanklin T. Harrison, Phar.D.
1. In what way and from what cause are the follow-
ing substances liable to deteriorate, and what precau-
tions can to any degree prevent this ? : — Goulai-d's
Extract, Sulphurous Acid, Citrine Ointment, Solution
of Ethyl Nitrite.
2. Alcohol : — (a) What are the different strengths of
Alcohol used in making tinctures in the British Phar-
macopoeia ?
(6) Are strengths given by weight or by volume ?
(c) Which would be the stronger : 90% by weight
or 90% by volume ?
{d) How would you make a pint of Rectified
Spirit from Alcohol 95/^ by volume ?
3. Explain the necessity of standardized prepara-
tions, and outline briefly the standardization of Liquid
Extract of Cinchona.
4. Malt Extract : — State briefly what you know of
its manufacture, name the more important constitu-
ents, and state on what their value depends, and say
how they may be deteimined.
5. Give part of plant used, strength of menstruum
employed and method of extraction in preparing Tinc-
ture of Arnica, Tincture of Jalap, Tincture of Aconite,
Tincture of Digitalis, Tincture of Myrrh.
[over]
6. Outline a method of purifying and obtaining in
granular condition the following : — (a) Lead Acetate
which has been exposed to the atmosphere ; (6) Potas-
sium Chlorate containing some Potassium Chloride ;
(c) Ammonium Chloride contaminated with Iron.
7. Name the active ingredient and ' strength, and
outline method of estimating with a fair degree of
accuracy the following : — Mercury with Chalk, Cherry-
Laurel Water, Mercurial Ointment, Tincture of Ferric
Chloride and Strong Solution of Ammonia.
einfDev0ft9 of Sototito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACY,
PRACTICAL PHARMACY.
Examiner : Franklin T. Harrison, Phar.D.
1. Sodii Citro-Tartras EfFervescens.
Sodium Bicarbonate 10.2 grams.
Tartaric Acid 5.4 grams.
Citric Acid 3.G grams.
Refined Sugar 3.0 grams.
Prepare according to the above formula and
exhibit sample in wide-mouth bottle.
2. The sample of commercial cream of tartar sub-
mitted has been found to consist entirely of acid
potassium tartrate and calcium tartrate. Determine
the percentage of the former present and say how
much pure sodium bicarbonate 35 grams of this cream
of tartar will neutralize.
3. (a) Determine strength of sample of alcohol sub-
mitted. (6) What effect will it have on the apparent
strength of the alcohol, if in taking the Sp. Gr. the
temperature is too high ?
i
Untnttttits of Sotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACY.
CHEMISTRY.
Eocaminer: Graham Chambers, B.A., M.6.
1. Write an account of the chemistry of Nitric Acid,
and illustrate by equations the action of Nitric Acid
on Silver, Mercury, Sulphurous Acid, and Ethyl
Alcohol.
2. Describe one method of preparation for each of
the following substances : (a) Washing Soda, (&) Ferric
Chloride, (c) Ether, (d) Potassium Iodide.
3. Write a short account of the chemistry of Barium,
and contrast its properties with those of Calcium and
Strontium.
4. Give notes on the preparation and properties of
the Aldehydes.
5. Write a short account of Chemistry of the Oxides
of Nitrogen.
6. .4108 grms. of an organic compound yielded upon
analysis .6024 grms. CO^ and .2466 grms. HoO. Its
vapor density was 45 (H = 1). Calculate the for-
mula of the compound.
8ltitiier0its of VdttiitiL
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACY.
PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY.
• Examiner: Graham Chambers, B.A;, M.B.
1. Detect the metals and acids id substances marked
« A " and " B."
2. Detect the acid in substance marked " C"
3. Detect the metals in substance marked " D."
CSnfUersttj? ot Soromo*
ANNUAL EXAMIMATI0N8 : 1901.
DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACY.
MATERIA MEDICA.
Examiner : W. B. Kendall, Phm.B.
1. Describe a good specimen of Belladonnae Folia.
State at what time of the year they should be gathered
and why. Name three constituents. What two
leaves resemble Bellad, and give the distinguishing
points of each.
2. Describe fully the structure of a starch grain-
Explain what is meant by the terms simple and com-
pound and give an example of each.
3. Give Source, Habitat, Natural Order and Medici-
nal Properties of the following : Pruni Virginianae
Cortex, Oleum Santali, Grindelia, Strophanthi Semina,
Creasotum, Felix Mas, Colchici Semina, Benzoinum
and Asafetida.
4. Give sources of different kinds of Pepsin. State
how they are prepared and when made oflScial.
4. Give a dmwing of a transverse section of Sarsapa-
rilla Radix as seen with a microscope using low power ;
state whether you consider it an Exogen or Eudogen
and state your reason.
6. Give short notes on Inulin, Proteids and Cellulose.
7. Name the official source of Cinchonas. Describe
mode of collection and what percentage of total Alkal-
oids a good sample should contain.
aitii)ieir»ftff of Cotonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACY.
PRACTICAL PHARMACOGNOSY.
Eocaminer : W. B. Kendall, PhilB.
1. Identify and name gross specimen submitted
2. Identify and name microscopic specimens.
3. Oral examination in both.
i
anfti(t0it|> of ^Toirotico*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACY.
BOTANY.
Examiner : A. V. Scott, B. A., M.D., CM.
1. Write a detailed account of the morphological
differences between AngiospermsB and Qymnospermse.
2. Describe the structure of the mature gametophyte
of a fern, and compare it with the corresponding pne
in a pine.
3. Give an account of the structure of a seed, and
describe the successive stages of its germination up to
the period when the embryo-plant is established in the
soil.
4. Give a full description of the minute structure of
a foliage leaf, and state the uses of the various parts.
5. Describe fully the phenomenon of transpiration
in plants, and point out the various conditions which
govern it.
6. Write an account of the structure and life history
of any fungus.
7. Give a description of the forms of flowers met
with in the Compositse, and describe the fruit of one
srenus.
i
Unittfvnitti of S^oironto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
DEPARTMENT OP PHARMACY.
PRACTICAL BOTANY.
Examiner.' A. V. Scott, B.A., M.D., CM.
1. Describe, compare and classify plants A and B,
giving the reasons for your classification.
2. Specimen C. — Describe fully.
4. Describe the external morphological characters of
specimens D and E.
4. Dissect and give explanatory sketches of speci-
men F.
WnfUfrnUff o( Sotomoc
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
HARMONY.
(FIRST PAPER.)
Examiner : S. P. Wabrbn.
1. Define (a) Scale;
(6) Tone;
(c) Half step;
(d) Key ;
(e) Interval ;
(f) Signature.
Be concise and explicit in your answers.
2. Write on the staff:
(a) the^diatonic major scale — one octave — commencing on
D sharp:
(b) the chromatic scale, rising and falling through one
octave from D :
&nd give reasons for the choice of accidentals used.
[over]
3. Write on the st^ff-ftU the. jii(e|-v^.a8 Ei^r as the i
from D,
»r~-^
giving each one in all its possible fohns.
1. Write on the staff:
(a) the triads of a m^ot and a minpr key. Classifv and
compare them. ' '
(6) The same of the serentb eburds, major and minor keji
5. Give ^neral rules for the connection of chords in four
voice writing.
6. I>e6ne Cadence, and write on the staff different formk uT
Cadence. Name each.
7. What are theaeehdrdB ? <Jive roots and keys :
8. Write short examples, illustrating each of the foUowing:
(a) Preparation.
(b) Resolution.
(e) Organ-point,
(d) Passing notes.
9. What is " Cross-relation " ? Qiveanex8mple,andcorTectit
10. Give general rules regarding covered fifths.
fllnfiiftMiUff o( Sorontu^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901,
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
HARMONY.
SECOND PAPER.
Examiner : S. P. Warbbn.
[time — ^THRRB HOUBS].
1. Harmonize the following figured Bass in four parts — close
position.
ii'iii',Ui
%
2. Harmonize the following Bass in four parts — open position,
ift., for Sopraao, Alto, Tenor, and Bass on four staves.
-y f-s n
[over]
3. Harmonize the following melody, i.e., add Alto, Tenor umI
Bass parts.
lijiiNiTiMiJiiJ^ lilirilM^
ii^' llj ilj^^'M'lI'MM" I ]hi Jil
ijjjijiii J j^
4. Write the following modulations in phrases of not less than
four measures each in length :
(a) C to G : G to C (J time).
(6) F to G : G to F (i time).
(c) D to B minor : B minor to D (| time).
Finish each with a complete cadence, authentic or plagal.
5. Analyse the following succession of harmonies. Figure the
Bass and give roots of chords inverted. Point out modulatioDs,
suspensions, etc. Be definite and exact.
Riiiiif tuitff of Sorontiu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FAOCTLTY OF MUSIC.
COUNTERPOINT.
Examiner : S. P. Warren.
[time — THREE HOURS.]
1. Give the principal rules for strict two-part Counterpoint
in the different species.
2. (a) Define "Tritone," and state the conditions under
which this interval may be employed.
(6) What of the interval of the perfect fourth ?
3. Name the different kinds of motion of voices and state as to
the manner of their Employment. Write an examph- of each.
4. To the following Cantus Firmus add a Counterpoint in each
species :
(a) Note against note, for Tenor.
(6) Two against one, for Alto.
(c) Four against one, for Bass — placing the Cantus in the
Tenor.
(d) Syncopation in the Soprano.
(€) Florid Counterpoint in the Soprano.
(Uie the appropriate clefs.)
g \0 I C>:
[over]
0. To the following Choral melody, add Counterpoint as iDdi-
cated:
U"Ti'R'Ul,l,UI'i
mrtiiTt
iii;'ir rri'i i'i|iii|ii i|i iiii hill
THREE-PART COUNTERPOINT.
6. To the following Cantus Firmus :
add two simultaneous pi(rts:
(a) in first species (note against note) for Bass and Soprano.
(b) In first species for Alto and fourth species (syncopation)
for Soprano, the (yantus being placed in the Bass.
(c) In first species for Bass and Florid in Alto, the Cantus
being placed in the Soprano in the key of C.
7. To the following running Bass, add two simultaneous Coon-
terpoints for Alto (florid) and Tenor in half notes and syncopation
(or florid, at option).
■''■;^ummiJJiiii|iiiiVj|,jji[^jlnii_^W
Ani\^tvutt9 of Eovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
HISTORY,
Eocaminer: S. P. Warbbn.
[tIMB — THREE HOURS.]
1. By what nations was masic cultivated prior to
the Christian Era ? Write concerning each.
2. (a) In what centuries did the following men live ?
Bishop Ambrose,
Pope Gregory the Great,
Hucbald,
Quido of Arezzo,
Franco of Cologne,
John Dunstable.
(b) What did each of these men accomplish in
music ?
3. Give an account of the evolution of music nota-
tion. What did the earliest known notation consist
of? What was the first attempt towards the staff?
When were time signatures first used ? About when
does the five line staff appear ?
4. Who were the Troubadours? When did they
flourish ? Name a noted Troubadour, stating for what
he was distinguished.
5. Give dates embracing the period of influence of
the music and musicians of the Netherlands. Name
chronologically some of these noted Netherlandera
[OVBB]
6. Name several early Italians who fiisi rivalled
the Netberland musicians. When did the Italian
School reach its culminating point ? What were its
characteristics ?
7. Write concerning the beginnings of the opera:
(a) The culture movement leading thereto, (t) The
composer, date, place of production, and name of the
first opera.
8. Give names, chronologically, of as many German
composers from the time of Luther to the birth of
Beethoven, as you can. State characteristics.
9. Write concerning the rise and development of
the English School of Church Music. Give names and
dates, chronically, of English composers in this field,
until 1800.
10. Write a short sketch of the life of John Sebas-
tian Bach.
ilnnierfiftfi of Sototito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
HARMONY.
FIRST PAPER.
Eocaminer : Samuel P. Warren.
[timb — TWO hours].
1. Prepare and resolve the seventh chords of the scale of A
minor:
What have yon to say of the one on the seventh degree of the
scale?
2. (a) What are, respectively, chords of the ninth, eleventh and
thirteenth ?
(b) Give an example of each, with its preparation and reso-
lution on the dominant of D.
3. Write different forms of the augmented sixth chord — three
and four voice. Resolve each one.
4. What is the difference between a Retardation and a Suspen-
sion ? Give an example of each.
5. (a) Write an example of an ascending sequence in four part
barmony, employing triads and inversions. Finish with a com-
plete cadence.
(6) Write an example of a descending sequence employing
seventh chords and triads, or their inversions. Finish with a
complete cadence.
[OVKB]
1
ModulatioD ■
6. What are, respeciiveljy diaiome and cbvomatic
7. (a) What are *' auxiliary notes " ?
(6) What are ** changing notes " ?
8. Enharmonically change the following chords as many times
as you think possible. Qive to each one a resolation.
atiMicrttfto of Sorotico^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
HARMONY.
SECOND PAPER.
Exiiminei' : S. P. Warren.
[time — THREE HOURS.]
1. Harmonize the following Bass in four parts, chiefly in open
position.
"I . I li I I III . M III I I
j!^: ¥ %■
^ (n) 1 1'- * ♦*■ » S
2. Add parts for two Sopranos, Alto and Tenor to the following
Bass (in all, five parts). Use the proper clefs.
'^' I ii-i 'IT
M^»ri^"'^^""l=S»^Tr-V^
[ovbb]
8. Harmonize the following choral melody in five parts. Add
parts for Alto, Tenor and two Basses.
Hn. 1 1,1 J J 'II 1 1 Ml I i^^ II =
4. Write the following modulations :
(a) C Major to £ flat minor, in the most direct way yon
•can. Write the return modulation.
(6) Write the same modulation, but in extended period
form of eight measures iu length, passing through A minor, E
minor, F shaip or other keys. Employ suspensions, augmented
:sixth chords, enharmonic changes, etc., etc Let it be in | time.
(c) Similarly make the return modulation in a complete
musical period of eight measures. Let it be in } time.
tttittiertttto of SroTOtitb
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
COUNTERPOINT.
Examiner : S. P. Warren.
TIMK — THREE HOURS.
1. To the following Cantus Firmus, add :
(a) Two simultaneous counterpoints, for Soprano in the
fourth species (syncopation) and Bass in the third species.
(6) Transposing the Cantus to the Bass, add simultaneous
counterpoints for Alto in the fifth species, and Tenor in the
second species.
S.i>|''MfrH"l
53=
I I I I I I I
2. To the following Cnntus Firmus add two simultaneous
parts for Soprano and Alto in the fifth species (florid). Employ
a motive in imitation in both parts.
3. To the following Cantus Firmus, add :
(a) Three simultaneous counterpoints for Soprano, Alto and
Tenor, all in the first species ;
(b) Transposing* the Cantus to a suitable key for Tenor, add
a Soprano in the fifth species, an Alto in the second and fourth
species and a Bass in the third species.
i"i'i#i I' I" I I III I
[OYBRJ
4. (a) Define " double counterpoint"
(6) What are the kinds of double counterpoint most ia
u.se. Describe them.
5. To the following Cantus Firmus add a double counterpointj
in the octave, in each of the five species. Take the Cantai
alternately above and below, and use all the clefs. Write the
inversion of each one.
I^.H*\"\ M I I I I I l.l I
6. To the following subject write a florid double counterpoint
in the octavo for Soprano or Tenor. Write the inversioo and
add a Bass part in free florid counterpoint.
I»Ii'i|.mH|I|1 ITmH'iIIIN'^
9nittvitHt» of Sotonto*
ANNUAL BXAMINATI0N3 : 1901.
SECOND TEAR.
CANON AND FUGUE.
JShxtminer: Samuel P. Warren.
[time — THRBK HOUBS].
1. (a) What is a Canon ? (6) Name and define different kinds
of Canon. (<;) What is meant by " strict " and " free " Canon ?
2. Continue the following Canon — strictly as to steps and half-
steps — BO as to form a complete musical period of sixteen measures.
Let it be infinite. Furnish a Coda with a free close, and add a
free bass part in eighth notes.
3. (a) What is a Fugue ? (&) What are two principal kinds
of Fugue ? c) Name the essential parts of a fully developed
Fugue.
[oykk]
4. Give the coxtect f^nswers to t^e f o)to;pruig fygvie subjects :
/j[>Jjj. j |jj|j J.tl^.llwg
j.lJ'j|J,i'j3i'.>- i
''il^h'y n'Ji'i'i '^'1 1'Mihi^s
5. Sketch out a Fugue for three voices on one of the above
subjects. Oive the fir§t exposition complete, wi^h a counter sub-
ject in double counterpoint. Let the plan allow of two other
expositions, and otherwise let it fill all the conditions of a oom-
plete Fugue. Indicate its different parts.
■ »
J
SAnttotreftt? of Cotontd.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
HISTORY.
Examiner : Samuel P. Wakren.
[time — THREE HOURS].
1. Write a short essay on Mozart — date and place
of birth and death. Where he spent most of his
life. Give names of his works in different departments
of Composition, for Church, Opera and purely instru-
mental, with an estimate of his place in Musical His-
tory. State his relationship to Haydn and Beethoven.
2. Write concerning Beethoven's Ninth Symphony
and Bach 8 St. Matthew Passion ; their importance in
Musical history.
3. Oive a list of eminent composers, as many as you
can, bom during the lifetime of Beethoven.
4. Name twelve or more great works that may be
considered as landmarks in the History of Musical Art.
Arrange them in chronological order.
5. Define ** strict " and " free " style. As applied to
the Organ, make such comparison as you can between
ancient and modem compositions, citing examples and
giving names of composers.
6. (a) Oive a shoi-t sketch regarding the evolution
and development of the Pianoforte.
(b) Whence came the term "das Hammercla-
vier ? "
7. (a) When were the first attempts made in the
direction of polyphonic music ?
OYER]
n
(5) When did the art of pure polyphonic writ-
ing reach its perfection ?
8. (a) Who was Tartini ?
(b) With what acoustic phenomenon is his name
associated ?
9. (a) Write briefly concerning the development of
the modem orchestra.
(6) Who was called the father of the symphony ?
(c) Name the instruments forming the orchestra
of his day.
10. Compare Italian, French and German Opera
styles. what are their respective characteristics ?
Give names of the most eminent composers in each
school since Beethoven.
anfuetctftff of Soronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
ACOUSTICS.
Examiner : S. P. Warren.
[tihb— TWO hours].
1. How do sound beats occur ? Illustrate by diagram.
2. Define (a) " Upper partials."
(6) "Overtones."
(c) " Resultant tones."
3. What is a vibration number ?
JCic^°!^|fDescribe some mechanical devices by which vibration num-
l)ers^are determined.
4.f Qiven : 256 as the vibration number of
What are the vibration numbers of
5. (a) What is a diatonic Semitone ?
(b) What is a chromatic Semitone ?
(c) What is the ratio between these two ^ and what is it
(sailed?
[OYSB]
6. What is ** Timbre ? " What causes difference in the Timbre
of two sounding bodies ? Describe the tone production of an I
organ flue-pipe, and of a reed pipe. Furnish a diagram of each.
Describe also the tone production of the orchestral horn and i
oboe, and of the human voice. '
7. What point in a strectched pianoforte string, being struck
by the hammer, secures the best tone ? Why is this ?
8. (a) How is sound propagated as to direction ?
(b) How is sound propagated as to intensity ?
State the Rules.
9. What is the com|)ass or limit of sound employed musicallj f
Give the approximate vibration numbers of the highest and low-
est sounds. What are the lengths of the longest and 8horie>i
organ pipes ? 4
10. Give the ratios of the following intervals :
anitierttUff of eototito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
HARMONY.
Examiner.' S. P. Warrbn.
[time — ^THBEE TO F0X7B HOURS.]
Add parts for two Sopranos, an Alto, a Tenor aud a first Bass
ko the following (in all six parts) : —
W.J. -fi. ^^-'fr ' Aȣf
^'vi II f-r Tf =
4 i ' "
^ 7 *^^ J-- ^
2. Harmonize the following choral melody for six voices — two
Sopranos, an Alto, two Tenors and Bass — in open score, in the
proper defs. Introduce suspensions, passing notes, and other
harmonic devices.
h miqii|iiii \A. .)W\~J^^
\,l villain i^-iin niirii|i/jjjy.n
3. On the following motive write a prelude .in four part
Wmony, 16 to 24 measures in length. Progress to the
Dominaiit, then pass tbrongh O minor, F minor, D flat major and
C minor, back to the principal key. Introduce at option aoi
harmonic devices (suspensions, retardations, 9th, UUi, 13u
Chords, etc., etc.). Close with a tonice organ point. Figure Uu
4. Name the harmonies in any three of the following excerptt
Elucidate the progressions wherever yoa notice anything peculiar
5. JLb hegan below, continue the harmonic basid or skeleton of
J. S. Bach's Prelude in D — (well-tempered Clavichord, Book I, No.
5). ^Vrite the first ten and the last ten measures. See that the
chorda are properly connected and resolved.
m^rite only the harmonic basis.
SAnfUerefts? of SToronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
INSTRUMENTATION.
Examiner: S. P. Warukn.
[time — TUREK HOURS.]
1. Give a general classification of the instruments of the
orchestra. Into how many different groups or tone families are
they divided ? What are the characteristics of each of these
groups ?
2. What are transposing and non-transposing instruments ?
Give names of different instruments in each class.
3. Describe the clarinet. How man}' different clarinets are
employed ? Why are these different ones necessary ?
4. Describe the horn, as to tone-character and pitch. How
man}'^ different kinds of horns are there, i.e, in structure ?
Which horn is most frequently employed ?
5. Referring to question No. 1, what combination of instru-
ments constitutes what is called a small orchestra ? Describe the
<?rowth and development of this to the modern ** grand " orchestra.
Give the actual sounding compass of each instrument of the
ordinary orchestra.
6. Arran^je the followingf cadence for each of the orchestral
tone groups. Give to each the most effective scoring you can as
to range and character of the instruments, by close or open har-
mony, doubling parts, etc. Let thi^ be especially noticeable in your
treatment of the strings. (Arrange the cadence in two or three
[over]
L
ways for strings, employing, if you can, double notes, chords,
tremolo, etc.)
^^
2^
fe^
7. AiTange the following, excerpt for ordinary full orchestra.
Elaborate, double and amplify the parts as you may deem it
advisable.
J
niifiif r«ftff of sorontOt
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1001.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
CANON AND FUGDE.
Examiner : S. P. Warren.
[time — THREE HOURS.]
1. Oive rules for the treatment of the answers of Fugue sub-
jects. What is a real answer ? What is a tonal answer ?
2. Write an original subject requiring a real answer and one
reqairing a tonal answer. To each one write a Countersubject
in double Counterpoint.
3. What is (a) a double fugue ; (b) a triple fugue ; (c) a quad-
ruple fugue ? Cite examples of each from the great masters.
4. On the following subject write a fugue for four voices, with
not less than three complete expositions. See that it be sym-
metrical as to design and form. Cany out conditions as to
episodes, strettos, organ point, etc., and employ all the contra-
puntal devices you can. Let the Countersubject be in double
Counterpoint
OR
Write a fugue on the following subject, for three voices (for
piano or organ).
[oyer]
Observe the same conditions as given above.
5. Continue the following commencement of a Cancn, 4 in 2
for about sixteen measures, with repeat and C^a :
mm^tvnits of ^Toronto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
COUNTERPOINT.
Eocaminer : S. P. Warren.
[time — ^THREE HOURS.]
1. Wherein does modem or free Counterpoint differ from the-
old ? Give an explicit answer, with examples in notation, quoted
or original.
2. To the following Cantus Firmus add four parts in the first
species, two above and two below :
\i*\*\«\ N rri'
3. Place the same Cantus Firmus in the Bass and add parts for
two Sopranos in the fifth species, Alto and Tenor, both in the first^
species.
4. (a) Define ''Imitation," and give various Contrapuntal
devices for the employment of the same.
(6) Add three parts — for Soprano, Alto and Tenor — all ia
the fifth species, above the following Cantus Firmus. Employ
a motive oi decided character in imitation in all the parts.
[ovk]
5. To the f olIowiBtf Oantus (a) add a Double .Counierpoint in
the octave in the fifth species. Add a third voice in Simple
Counterpoint in the fourth species, (b) Write out the iDversion
of the Double Counterpoint, and add a third voice in the third
species.
I" I r^'Mi
6. Give rules for writing Double Counterpoint in the tenth and
twelfth.
7. Write an example of the above [(a) Counterpoint in the
tenth, and (6) Counterpoint in the twelfth] in the fifth species
(florid), on the following subject. Show the Counterpoints both
above and below the subject.
Bitttlietefts of Sotonto^
ANNUAL EXAMIMATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
HISTORY.
Examiner .• S. P. Warren.
[time — THREE HOURS.]
1. What differentiates Secular from Church Music —
i.e., in the abstract, regardless of words or text ? Trace
the influence of Folk Music on the music of the Chuich
in earlier times, and in musical art generally during
the past century ? Cite examples from Composers of
different nations.
2. Who first systematized the so-called Church
modes ? Who gave to them Greek names ? In what
respect has this procedure caused much confusion ?
3. Write a short account of the early school of
French opera ? Name the most prominent early
French opera composer. What instrumental form is he
credited with having originated ?
4. What have you to say about Carissimi and
Monteverde ? When did they live ?
5. Compare Bach and Handel in their styles, their
spheres of activity and in their influence in the history
of music Name some of their contemporaries who
influenced them in their development^
6. Describe the Lute. At what period was it a
favorite instrument ? What was its system of nota-
tion called ?
7. Give a historical account of the Violin, with
names of some famous makers of stringed instruments.
[oysb]
8. Since Beethoven died, what has been done — ^if
fiinything — to extend the Symphony, whether in form,
content or elaboration ?
9. Describe characteristics of Liszt, Berlioz and
Bjrahms, as to style, treatment, orchestration, &e. Give
names of some of their larger works, both vocal and
instrumental.
10. What radical reforms in the musical drama have
been effected by Richard Wagner? Qive names of
composers who in the past were active as reformer in
the same field.
Bni^ttnitp of ^TorontOi
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF MUSIC.
FORM.
Examiner : S. P. Warren.
[time — THREE HOURS.]
1. Define concisely "Rhythm" and "Metre." Give
other terms employed in elementcury musical form,
defining each clearly.
2. (a) Write an example of the simplest period form
of eight measures.
(&) Extend the above so as to form. a double or
two-part period.
(c) Extend it to a three-part period.
3. (a) Define " Dimeter," " Trimeter," " Tetrameter,"
" Pentameter.'*
(6) By what process may a phrase or period be
extended or contracted from the normal or even num-
ber of measures to an uneven number ? Write two or
three examples.
4. How many difierent rondo forms are there?
Describe each and cite examples if you can from the
classical composers. With wnich of these forms is the
so-called sonata- form in close relationship ?
5. What do you understand by the term "cyclic
forms ?" Give names of several, and describe them.
G. What is the difference between a Suite and a
Sonata ? Discriminate between them as to the
character, sequence and relationship of the move-
ments of each.
[OVER
7. Analyze the first movement of Beethovens Sonata
in B flat, Opus 22. Indicate by means of term^
brackets, etc.:
(1) Principal and secondary themes.
(2) Episodes and transitional passages.
(3) Modulations.
(4) Motival structure.
And give such other particulars as you consider Deces-
sary to a thorough understanding of the work.
Sinflieteftff of Sotoiit04
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR RA.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
THERMODYNAMICS.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner : Robert W. Angus, B.A.Sc.
1. Give thermodynamical examples of the applica-
tion of the criterion of integrability of a difierential
expression in two independent variables. What is the
rale for integrating such expressions when possible ?
Illustrate.
2. Describe imaginary experiments with the hypo-
thetical apparatus which will clearly define the mean-
ings of the six thermal capacities of a homogeneous
fluid for which any two of the variables p, v and t may
be considered independent.
3. Explain the isenergic line. Illustrate its appli-
cation in the graphical representations of the heat
absorbed by the working fluid and the change of
intrinsic energy.
4. Explain the theory of Thomson's scale of absolute
temperature and interpret the resulting equation
Q a
T =
Q' r- 1
5. Explain the method of calculating the constants
of the isenergic equation for steam original!}' nearly
dry when written in the form pv^ = C . Determine
the expressions for the heat absorbed and the work
done.
[over]
6. Investigate the p, v, isothermal equation of
superheated steam. Determine whether the steam
approaches saturation or the reverse during isothermal
expansion.
7. Investigate Zeuner's equations for the flow of
elastic fluids with absorption of heat. Deduce the
general hydraulic equation
h + hpi + hvi + hf^ = hi + hp^ + hy^ + Jir .
State clearly the assumptions regarding the
nature of the flow made in the above theory.
8. Investigate the expression for the velocity of flow
of superheated steam from a reservoir, no condensation
being supposed to take place in the short off'-flow tube
and the external pressure being less than half the
pressure in the reservoir. Show how to determine
whether condensation takes place or not at the
reservoir.
vmfUfrsftff ot STorontto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
ENGINES, BOlLEkS, ETC.
PASS ANb HONORS.
Eaximitier : Robekt W. Angus, B.A.Sc.
1. Give a description with sketchas of two different
kinds of indicator reducing motions, and explain fully
the method of applying and using them.
Determine the maximum errors, if any, to which
they give rise.
2. Sketch and describe three of the most common
forms of link motions, stating the peculiarities of each.
In a given link motion with open rods, show how to
find approximately the position of the link for a given
point of cut-off.
3. Explain the method of working of the Diesel
motor and describe its cycle. Determine its efficiency
in terms of the cylinder volumes and constants for the
gas.
4. Name and explain three methods of producing
compressed air, stating the applications of each.
A three-stage compressor is to be used to com-
press air at atmospheric pressure (14.7 pds.) to a pres-
sure of 500 pds. per sq. in. Determine the relations
between the volumes of the cylinders so that each may
do the same amount of work, the air entering each
cylinder at the same temperature.
5. Describe and illustrate diagram matically the mode
of action of the shaft governor. Show how the
diagram will be affected, for different points of cut-6ff,
by the position of the point of suspension of the eccen-
tric.
[oyib]
6. Discuss fully the effect on the economy of a
simple, single-cylinder engine of (a) the quality of the
steam used, (b) steam jackets.
Explain the effect of compounding such an engine.
7. Define boiler efficiency ; state in detail the data
required for its determination and the methods of
obtaining these data.
8. Describe the chemical processes which take place
in a boiler furnace, noting results which depend on
variations in the character of the fuel in the boiler
setting, and the methods of firing. State conditions
and processes which tend to diminish the efficiency.
9. Interpret the formula w = for the density
P
of the chimney gas, and describe in detail methods of
obtaining the dateu
BinftiereUff of Sototito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
HYDRAULICS.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner: Robert W. Angus, B.A.Sc.
1. Determine the dimensions of a trapezoidal conduit
with given side slope, so that the area of the cross section
may be a minimum for a given discharge. Ex, — The banks
of a channel slope at 45° ; compute its dimensions, the dis-
charge being 16 cu. ft per second, and the slope of the
water surface 1 per 2000. c = 114.
2. Discuss fully the action of a valve in a line of uniform
water pipe, giving the equations which represent its effect
on the discharge.
3. A 6 in. square orifice, a 5 in. circular orifice, and a
weir 2 ft. long are available for the measurement of the
same discharge, which would produce a head of 6 in. above
the upper edge of the square orifice. Determine the accu-
racy with which the discharge may be measured in each
case, there being a possible error in the measured head of
•003 ft. For orifices Cd = '60, for weir ca = '62.
4. Explain the method of determining the loss of head
due to a sudden change in the direction of a pipe in which
water is flowing.
A pipe 4 in. diameter, in which water is flowing with
a velocity of 5 ft. per second, has a sudden change in direc-
tion of 20*. Compute the horse power lost.
[over]
5. Determine the loss of head in a UDiform pipe with a
uniform discharge along pai*t of its length, the pipe flowing
full.
A 15 in. horizontal pipe has two branches, one 500 fL
long discharging 600 Imp. gallons per minute, the other 800
ft. long discharging 720 Imp. gallons per minute, the dis-
charge in each case being uniformly distributed along the
entire length. Find the diameter of each branch if the pres-
sure head at its dead end is to be 100 ft, the pressure head
in the 15 in. pipe 1 mile from the junction being 120 ft
/ = -02.
6. Write notes on the miner's inch and the hook gauge.
Explain the method of using, and the pur}:)06e for which
each is used.
7. A bell-mouthed pipe 8 in. diameter and 700 ft. long,
discharges thi*ough a smooth nozzle under a total head of
400 ft. into au impulse turbine. Neglecting the resistauce
of the nozzle, find the maximum power that can be obtained
What diameter nozzle corresponds to this power ! / = "02.
8. A stream 200 ft. wide and 6 ft. deep flowing in a uni-
form channel has a slope of 1 ft. to the mile. If a dam be
placed in the stream, find the distance from it at which the
depth is 7 ft, the depth at the dam being 1 1 ft., and the
width remaining unchanged.
Givea c = 90 ; ^ (^) _ ^ /^) = -37.
[
nniptvmt9'9t Voirpmot
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
WATERWHEELS AND CENTRIFCGAL
PUMPS.
PASS AND HONORS.
Exctminer : Robert W. Angus, B»A.Sc.
1. Sketch and describe the overshot wheel and the
breast wheel ; determine the maximum efficiency and
corresponding speed in the former.
2. Classify reaction turbines according to the direc-
tion of flow in them. Describe each class briefly and
draw the absolute and relative stream lines.
3. Investigate the general expression for hp in a
radial-flow reaction turbine in terms of the constants
for the wheel, the velocity of the wheel, and the velocity
of the water in the fixed guides. What does this
expression become when the wheel combines tangential
entry with perpendicular ofF-flow ?
4. Determine the efficiency of a badly designed
radial-flow turbine with draft tube, when running at
the proper speed for tangential entry.
5. Explain fully the method of measuring the areas,
radii and angles of a mixed-flow turbine. Determine
the constructional conditions which must be fulfilled
for maximum hydraulic efficiency.
6. Describe a good turbine governor and explaki its
method of action in connection with a given turbine,
e.g. a McCormick turbine.
[over]
7. Describe the Girard turbine ; investigate the
theory of the wheel.
S. Explain the object of balancing centrifagal
pumpd. When is this unnecessary ? Investigate the
theory of balancing vanes.
9. Investigate an expression for the minimum
of head at exit from the vanes of a centrifagal pump,
which has a volute but no enlarger. Compare the
dimensions of the volute in this case with those of a
volute for a pump in which an enlarger is used.
fMi\ttvult9 ot Sorotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
STRENGTH AND ELASTICITY OF
MATERIALS.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner : A. H. Harkness.
1. Explain what is meant by an iaotropic body. Define
PoisBon's ratio. Find an expression for the coefficient of
elasticity of volume for fluid pressure.
2. How may the coefficient of elasticity of shear be
determined Experimentally? Deduce the equations neces-
sary for its calculation from the experimental data.
3. Prove that E ^2C (l H j. Hence show how
the value of m may be determined experimentally and also
that of K,
4. Obtain a general expression for the maximum fiber
stress produced in a member subject to combined stresses.
Design an eye-bar for the bottom chord of a bridge.
Minimum stress » 30,000 pds. ; maximum » 90,000 pds. ;
p =. 9,000 l\ + ^^^ ; length - 24 ft.
^ \ max./
5. Obtain the equations for the deflection of a curved
beam
6. Show how these equations may be applied to obtain
the stresses in a two hinged arch.
[ovib]
7. Prove that the cable of a sospension bridge takes the
form of a parabola. Upon what assumption does this proof
depend f
Find the tension at any point in the cable in terms of
the load, length, and versed sine.
8. Find the end reactions of a rim-bearing swing bridge
for a concentrated load on one arm. In<ticate how the
other reactions may be determined.
ainfbev0U9 ot Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
NATURE AND PROPERTIES OF
MATERIALS.
PASS AND HONORS.
p f C. H. C. Weight, B.A.Sc.
Examiners : | ^ ^ Harkness, B.A.Sc.
1. What processes in the manufacture of Portland
cement render it necessary for the Engineer in charge
of important work to make frequent tests of the
cement used ? What other agencies may make the
quality of a properly manufactured cement inferior ?
2. Name the properties of Portland cement usually
investigated, and explain fully the uses made of the
results of the experiments. What is the fundamental
difference between such an investigation and that
made to determine the qualities of a material like
mild steel ?
3. Explain the meaning of the following test :
Sieve test — Residue on sieve, No. 100=9.4%.
— Residue on sieve. No. 50 = 0.0%.
Hot test — Perfectly sound.
Tensile strength — Neat, seven day, not rammed.
Average 656 lbs. per sq. in.
4. Describe fully the elastic and plastic properties
of medium steel as exhibited by tension tests on
different specimens and tension tests repeated on the
same specimen.
5. Name the chief impurities in cast iron and steel,
and describe briefly the effect of each on the properties
of the material.
tlnflievttlt]? ot tTovotitd*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
MINERALOGY.
Examiner: A. P. Coleman.
1. Name from inspection the minerals marked 1, 2,
3, 4, »5, 6, and state their chemical composition as
nearly as possible.
2. Determine by blowpipe minerals 7, 8, 9.
3. Give system of crystallization, and name the
planes of 10 and 11.
8lnfliev»ft9 9t SToronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1001.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sa
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
LITHOLOGY.
Examiner: A. P. Coleman.
1. Name from inspection the rocks numbered 1, 2,
3, 4 ; classify them and mention their constituents.
2. Examine with the microscope thin sections 5 and
6, naming the minerals occurring in them, and defin-
ing their characteristic micro-structural features. Give
the name and position in classification of the rocks
examined.
dlnfuertfiti? oc envonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
GEOLOGY.
PASS AND HONORS.
Examiner : A. P. Coleman.
1. Describe and sketch the forms assumed by erup-
tive rocks. What relationships have such rocks to ore
deposits ?
2. In what ways may cavities be formed within the
earth s crust, and how may they be filled ? Can cavi-
ties exist at all depths, or is there a limit in that res-
pect ? Discuss the question.
3. Describe the Huronian of the Province of Ontario,
taking up the rocks of the more important districts
with their origin, the subdivisions of the Huronian, its
relationship to the Laurentian, and its importance
economically.
4. Give an account of the Devonian of Canada, with
its subdivisions, chief fossils and economic products.
5 Take up the question of the coal deposits of
eastern and western Canada, giving an account of
the characteristic life of the time when each was
deposited, showing how the coal beds occur, and what
effects later geological factors have had on the charac-
ter of the coal of different parts.
I •
Mnl\ttvtHt9 of SToronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
METALLURGY.
PASS AND HONORS.
Eocaminer: G. R. Mickle.
1. Show by sketches, without giving details, a good
arrangement for a ten-stamp mill, intended to treat a
free-milling quartz ore with about 5% concentrates.
Assume that the site of the mill is on a steep side hill.
2. Describe the operations carried out in the cyanide
treatment of gold ore. No details of plants required.
3. Explain the theory on which the various wet
processes for the extraction of silver are respectively '
based. Show the application and discuss the probable
future of each.
4. Show by means of a tree all the various opera-
tions which an auriferous copper pyrites would undergo
before the final market product is reached. Give
alternative operations.
5. How do copper mattes and lead bullion compare
in their eflSciency as carriers for gold and silver.
State what conditions must be observed to ensure a
high extraction in each case.
6. Contrast by sketches the form (giving dimensions)
of the large lead and copper blast furnaces now in use.
7. Describe as well as you can the Frasch process for
treating nickel ores or mattes.
CAtilHetfidtt? of Sotomo«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sc.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
ASSAYING.
Examiner: G. R. Mickle.
1. Describe two good alternative methods of deter-
mining nickel and copper in an ore.
2. Assuming that 5% basic ferric sulphate
(Fe. O, SO,)
is present in an ore intended for cyaniding, hovsr would
you determine that, and what treatment would you
subject the ore to before cyanide leaching ?
3. Describe two methods for determining the amount
of gold in a cyanide solution, discussing the relative
convenience and accuracy of each.
4. If a blast furnace is smelting a gold-bearing cop-
per ore, describe the best method of sampling and
determining the gold and copper in the matte from
the day s run.
5. Explain fully two good dry methods for deter-
mining the percentage of lead in an ore stating the
time required and the accuracy of each.
6. How are silver bullion assays made ? Describe
fully.
Vinftoftsfts of SCototiio.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sa
FACULTY OF APPLIED SOIENOK
APPLIED ELECTRICITY-FIRST PAPER,
Eocaminer: T. R. Rosebrugh, M.A.
1. An alternating^ current ih said to be of C am-
peres. What is understood by this ? Explain how it
is possible for measuring instruments to determine its
value as so defined.
2. Define the term p<ywer as used with reference to
alternating current circuits in general.
3. Explain the method of the " three voltmetre "
measurement of power and prove the formula fully.
4. A current flowing through an inductive resist-
ance being represented by a revolving vector 0, find
how to similarly represent the potential difference
between the terminals, with full explanations.
5. The inductance, voltage, and frequency being
S'ven, but not the resistance, of a conductor, find the
CUB of the current vector.
6. Two conductors are in series between mains of
Siven voltage, the resistance of the first is variable,
ut the remaining quantities for both are constant.
Find the locus of the voltage vector for the second.
7. When the variation is harmonic, determine the
relation between the maximum and mean effective
potential difference. Given that the voltage between
the brushes on the D. C. side of a rotary converter is
600 (no cuiTent flowing), what would be the voltage
corresponding to this on single or two phase collecting
rings.
[ovbb]
8. Carrent and voltage both varying harmonically ,
prove the correctness of the expression for the power
in a given circuit.
9. The voltage at generating end of a two wire
circuit being given, the redstaoee and reactance of ih»
line, the current and its phase relatively to the voltas^e
at the first end being given, show how to find t£e
voltage at the second end of the line, giving proof.
10. Determine the locus of the voltage vector at the
second end of a line for given power received. Eazplain
also the method of finding the locus for given pow^^r
transmitted. Find from Uie diagram the effect on the
phase of the current, produced by raising the magneti-
zation of a sjmchronous motor.
ttnttoersitff of Sotronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.Sa
FACULTY OP APPLIED SCIENCE.
APPLIED ELECTRICITY-SECOND
PAPER.
Examvaer ; T. R. Rosebrugh, M.A.
1. Explain how to connect measuring instruments
to determine power given out or absorbed in a poly-
phase circuit.
2. Write a note on Scott's transformer.
3. The current received over a two phase transmis-
sion line on which measurement gives 11,000 volts
at the generator end at 60 cycles, amounts to 100
amperes on each phase for non inductive load and
200 amperes to supply motors of power factor -80, the
line resistance of each circuit is 3*5 ohms and induc-
tance 10 millihenrys. Show how to find graphically
the other quantities representing the condition of
operation.
4. When a two phase current is transformed into
a three phase by means of a rotary converter what is
the ratio of voltages ?
o. Given the three ammeter readings on three
phase mains, discuss the (Afferent cases which may
arise in the determination of the three " A " currents.
6. A three phase alternator is changed from " A "
to "Y" connection. What difference will be caused
thereby ?
7. Draw diagrams of armature windings (for an
eight pole field) suitable for single, two and three
Ehase respectively. Write a note on the points which
ave bearing on the choice of armature winding for
an alternator.
[over.]
i
^
8. Describe methods used for the field excitation
of alternators.
9. Make diagrams explanatory of a suitable form
of winding for the stator and, rotor respectively of
an induction motor to run at 1800 revolutions per
minute on a 60 cycle circuit
10. A resistance i2, inductance L and capacity ¥
are in series, what is the impedance and under what
circumstances will its value be a minimum ?
sanftotrsfto of STovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CAK DID AXES FOR BACHELOR OF PEDAGOGY.
PSYCHOLOGY.
S. A. Morgan, B.A., D.Paed.
1. " We have seen that mental processes when
introspective!}' scrutinised and dissected can be re-
duced to two kinds of quite simple processes or
mental elements, sensation and affection/'
Outline fully Titchener'a theory concerning the
primary elements of consciousness and compare it
with your own view.
2. State concisely the relationship of perception to
conception and show its bearing on the problem of
educational method.
3. Discuss fully the psychology of imagination and
indicate the function of the image in the process of
learning.
4. How would you justify the existence of child
psychology as a distinct division of psychology ?
Describe briefly the chief methods of investigation it
employs, and estimate the value of its contributions to
the science of education.
5. Discuss the problem of volitianal development
showing its relation to the development of moral
character. State concisely what you understand by
the terms impulse, desire and duty, and indicate their
relations to one another. Compare yonr own views
with those of Guyan.
einitoersiti? of ^otontik.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR BACHELOR OP PEDAGOGY.
ETHICS.
(with applications to PKDAOOGY.)
Examinei* : W. Pakenham, B.A.
1. (a) State Spencer's view of the origin and
development of the moral consciousness. Discuss.
(b) What position in the development of this
ethical system does Spencer give to moral obligations ?
(c) Apply his conception of the " ultimate end "
to a criticism of the ordinary sanctions and incentives
of the school-room.
2. Guyau distinguishes a " morality of impulse "
from a "morality of insight" and insists upon the
pedagogical importance of the former.
(a) Determine the psychological basis of his
distinction.
(6) Discuss after Ouyau the evolution of a ** mor-
ality of impulse."
(c) Apply Ouyau's conception of the methods and
aims of an ethical education (i) to a comparison of the
values of the Natural Sciences and of Art as the bases
of such education, and to (ii) a consideration of the
dictum " the ethical content of a subject should not be
the basis of formal instruction."
3. " The will is not free because the strongest motive
always constrains it." Discuss fully.
[oveb]
2. What are the advantages and disadvantages of
the co-education of the sexes ?
Account sociologically for the weight of opinion
in France and Germany on this question.
3. (a) In what particulars should the parents and
trustees co-operate with the teacher in the organization
and management of the school ?
(6) How may snich co-operation be secured?
Anfuetsfty of CToirotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR BACHELOR OF PEDAGOGY.
SCHOOL ORGANIZATION AND
MANAGEMENT.
Examiner : Jno. Waugh, D.Paed.
Eight qaestions only to be taken.
A.
1. A rural school h&s an average daily attendance of
seventy pupils. Give practical directions for the selec-
tion of a school-site, and make a rough sketch of the
plan of the school-yard and of the floor-space of a one-
storey school building for such a section.
2. Make oat a time-table for Form V. in such a
school.
B.
1. Discuss fully the value of Nature Study in rela-
tion to the cultivation of (a) the aesthetic, (b) the moral
sentiments.
2. " Severe discipline tends to destroy the will-
power of the child." Examine the validity of this
statement.
3. Make a psychological analysis of the sullenly
stubborn disposition, investigating its cause. Show
how you would effect its cure.
4. In what respects do punishments administered in
the home, in the school, and by the state, differ in
principle ?
C.
1. •' No system is so dead as a perfect system." How
may a system of education, theoretically perfect, tend
to repress individuality ? " Discuss in this relation
the value of ** voluntary schools."
LOVER
4. (a) Seth claims that the surest " warrant for the
efiectiveness of punishment as a deterrent and refor-
mative is found in its ethical basis as an act of retribu-
tion." Discuss.
(6) State and criticize Spencer's theory of punish-
ment.
5. Plato would " banish the poets lest they corrupt
the state by making its citizens believe a lie."
(a) From what premises did Plato reach this
conclusion ?
(6) Criticize both premises and conclusion.
mnttorreili? of CCotronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR BACHELOR OF PEDAGOGY
HISTORY OF EDUCATION.
Examiver: S. A. Morgan, B.A., D.Pakd.
1. Outline and criticize the leading educational
ideals of the Athenians. What did Plato and Isocrates
respectively contribute thereto ?
2. Discuss Comenius' System of Education as to
organization and method.
3. In what respects may the pedago£^ical maxin\s of
Rousseau be considered a reaction against the educa-
tional practices of his day ? Give your own estimate
of his leading principles.
4. "A boy whose acutest faculties are his senses,
and who has no perception of anything abstract, must
first of all be made acquainted with the world as it
presents itself to the senses."
How did Basedow apply this maxim in the
teaching of Latin ? Contrast his method with that of
Jacotot.
5. *' An interest in study is the first thing which a
teacher should endeavor to excite and keep alive."
By what means would Pestalozzi have us attain
this ? Compare his views with those of Froebel.
6. Discuss Spencer's views on Aesthetic Education.
8inftoer0tci? oc CoromiL
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR BACHELOR OF PEDAGOGY.
SCIENCE OF EDUCATION.
Examiner : HS. A. Morgan, B.A., D.Paed.
1. What fuDdamental principles should control the
organization of the subject-matter of the curriculum ?
Apply these principles in determining the place and
value of Manual training in an ideal system of educa-
tion.
2. " There are two extremes in the course of study,
Mathematics and Litemture. The former deals with
everything in a mechanical aspect, while the latter
deals with life in its highest forms." " Arithmetic,
Ehysics, and ehemistry have no power to form the
eart."
Apply your knowledge of the psychology of these
several subjects in a criticism of the above views.
3. Discuss the problem of Specialization in Second-
ary Schools.
4. "The genesis of knowledge in the individual
must follow the same course as the genesis of know-
ledge in the race."
What fundamental errors underlie this statement ?
What element of truth does it contain ?
5. From your knowledge of the Philosophy of Edu-
cational Method, what general features would you
expect to find in a well-conducted lesson ?
6. Examine critically the following educational
maxims :
(a) Teach Things, not names.
(b) Proceed from the Known to the Unknown.
titimersfti; o( Kovontu
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1901.
CANDIDATES FOR BACHELOR OF PEDAGOGY.
METHODS IN MATHEMATICS.
Examiner : W. H. Muldrew, B.A., D.Paed.
1. '' Democracy in education demHnds equality of 0{>))or-
tunity, not equality of attainment." Di8CU.HS this stateuient
in its bearing on the teaching of mathematics in a secondary
school.
2. " There has been a uniform complaint that pupils ....
could not measure wood, lumber, etc. This is because they
have been trained simply to measure woo<l and lumber."
Give your views on this topic.
3. "The educational value of arithmetic is largely lost
when recourse is had to algebraic methods." *' The solution
of an arithmetical problem gains much in value by being
given the general or algebraic form." Discuss.
4. (a) Outline an introductory lesson to a junior High
School class on the properties of similar triangles, leading to
the solution of some simple problem.
(6) How would you establish with a senior class the
frustum formula
5. What do you consider the chief difficulties encountered
by beginners in the study of Euclid's Second Book ? How
would you introduce this part of the work with a view to
overcoming such obstacles ?
6. Outline a lesson on the geometrical meaning of v^ — 1
given to a class acquainted with elementary trigonometry
and leading to the interpretation of expressions of the form
Atittifr0ft9 of s:ot'onto>
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1901.
BACHELOR OF PEDAGOGY.
METHODS IN ENGLISH AND HISTORY.
Exnminei': W. Pakenham, B.A.
1. (a) Determine the aims and function of a training
in history for stuilents who complete their formal
education in Primary and Secondary Schools.
(6) Indicate briefly the limits of the subject-
matter of such trainin<;.
(c) Deduce from the answer to ('/) the character of
an ideal text-book in Canadian history for Primary
Schools.
2. ** The best results in the teaching of English in
Secondary Schools cannot be obt^iined without the aid
given by the study of some other language."
(a) Specify in this regard the benefits to be
derived from " the study of some other language."
(6) In the light of your answer to (<e), what
*• other lan^UHge " should this be ? Why ?
3. (tt) State briefly your general scheme of teaching
English composition in the High Schools.
(6) Determine the relation (if any) of formal
rhetoric to this scheme.
4. (a) Outline a course in Supplementary Reading
for pupils in Forms IV. and V. of the Public Schools.
(/)) What principles have guided you in defining
this course ?
8lniliet0ftff of Sorotito*
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS: JUNE, 1001.
GREEK AUTHORS.
Examiner: Maurice Hutton, M.A.
HOMER AND LUCIAN.
1. Translate literally :
(a) €( S* vfuv oSe /mvOo^ a(f>av^v€i, aKXi, ^oXea-de
axjrrov T€ Jiaieti/ K€U ex^iv iraTpdia irdvra,
firi oi ')(prniaT erreira SXi^ OvtiffBi* SBoDfiev
ipOaS* lirf€if}6fA€Poi, aXK* ix fji^dpoto eKcurro^
IMfdadm ieBvoKTip Bv^ijfiepo^ ^ Bi /e* hrei/ra
yriiiatd* 09 ice irXeUrra iropoi xal fiopa-ifio^ SXffot.
(&) 'H fjL€v ap^ &9 elirova* aviffrj vpo^ Sdfiara KaXh,
oi S iviavrov iiravra trap* rffilv aidv fikvovre^
iv VTfl y\a<f>vpQ ffioTop iroXi/v ifi/rroXdovTO,
dXX* ore Si) /eoiXtf vtfv^ VX^^^ rota-i veetrdaiy
Koi TOT ap offyeXop fjtcav, &9 ayyeiXeve yvvaucL
fiXvff aptfp voXvihpi^ ifjbov irpo^ BdfjLaTa iraTpo^
jfovaeov opfiop iyoDPy fierh S* rjXktcTpota'iP lepTO.
TOP flip ap €p fieyap<p S/mmkI koI vorpva fi'^TTjp
yepaip t dfjL<l>a<f>dopTo Kat OifydaXfAola'iP op&pro,
(opop iirur^o/Aepav 6 Si Ttj KaTepevae aiwn^.
(c) T<ri)Ta fikp ih'qXov 17 eTno'ToXi)^ Koi irepl fjfjL&p^
&7ra)9 ^epia-Oeirjfiep, iyo) Bi irpoeXffoop oXiyop airo
OaXdTTTj^ evpop to (nrrjXaiop tolovtop oIop "Ofirjpo^
elire, xal avrijp TaXaoriovpyovo'ap, ay; Be Ttfp hna~
ToXfiP eXafie ical eTreXifaro, irpS^ra fiep itniroXif
eidxpyep* erreira Be irape/caXev rffia^ errl ^epiap xal
eiaTia XafiirpS)^, Kal vepl rov ^OBvaaew^ hrvpddpero
Kat irepl t?}? TlrfPeXoTrrf^, oiroia re elrj t7)p Sy^ip, Kat
el a-a><f>popoirf, Kaddirep ^OBvaaeif^ irdXat irepl avrri^
eKotnra^e'^ Kai ^fiet^ roiavra direKpLPOfjbeda, i^ &p
elxd^ofiep eb^papeiaOcu ain"np.
[over]
(d) "Apr^ fjkiv hrerravfAffv ek ra itScuTKokda ^irw,
f^Sff rifp ffXiKLav 7rp6<n)8o^ &v' 6 Be Trarifp iaiuh
irelro fieri, t&v <f>i\<ov, o, ri xai SiSa^cuTO fie. Tok
irXeiaro^^ oip tio^ iroiSeia fiiv kcu irovov iroXk/A,
leal j(p6vov ficucpov, teal SaTrdvtf^ oi afiucpa^, luu
rvj(rf^ Seurdai Xa/Mvpa^:' Ta Be fifikrepa fuxpa re
eZi/ai, /cal raxeidv riva rip ivucovpiav airMreof,
Et Be riva rexyrfv tS)v ffavauamv rovrwv iKfidOoifu,
TO fiev irp&rov ebOif^ &v airrb^ ^€ip ra apKovvra
rrcLph T^9 Teyyri^y koL fiffKeri oUoairo^ elvcu, njX*-
KovTO^ &v dhm ek fumpcLP Bi km rov rrarepa €v^pa>-
velvy ano^ptov aei ro yvypofiepov. ^evrepa^ ow
<r^e^099 ^pxh rrfmrridtfy Tt9 apurrfj r&v reymv^
KoX pa/rrq eKfiaOeiP, xai opBpl ikev0ep<p irphrowrOi
KCU irpo^eipov S^ovaa rijp ^ofyryyiap, Kat Btap/cSj top
rropop.
2. Parse fully, explaining the syntax of the follow-
ing words :
(a) fioXea-Oe, abrop, dvfjLfjBe, updaOen, yi^p/uff C^^J
this voice ?), iropov,
(b) ifAiroXdopro, fffxj^ero, ^kov, arfyeiXeie (Why
this mood? Write its equivalent iii Attic Greek),
6€/9TO| afjL<l>a<^opro, &pop, imaj^pfjLepcUj r^. Scan the
first five lines of this extract.
(c)^ cSiJXow, ^urOeifffiep (Why this mood ?), raXa-
aiovpyovorap, eiaria, eltf^ a-n^ovoitf, eucd^ofJLev, ev^-
peio'diUf airnjp,
(d) Vocabulary:
irpo<rriPo<;, well grown.
eTTiKovpla, assistance.
fiapava-o^^ a mechanic.
eif<f>paCpa>, I gladden.
irfHrxe^po^^ ready to hand.
Xopnyi^s income.
Biap/cf)^^ permanent
rropty;, revenue.
8lnft)er0ft9 of Sovoiito.
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
GREEK PROSE AND GRAMMAR.
Examiner : Maurice Hutton, M. A.
1. Translate into Greek :
It used to be said that the schoolmaster was
abroad in the land ; but never too late to learn ;
we are now told that the schoolmaster is also all
abroad in his opinions; his usefulness is gone I
suppose ; it is the carpenter and the mechanic to
whom we should all go to school ; our country,
after all, evidently won her battles neither in the
playing fields of our school boys, nor yet in their
class-rooms, still less in the universities, but in
the work-shop and the smithy. We seem likely
then to owe more to the School of Practical
Science than to the University ; the latter, those
of old used to say, shows men how to build, the
former how not to ; but sometimes, we know well,
truth emerges more quickly from opposites than
from its like, and a reductio ad absurdwm is
sometimes the best of proofs. So now let us
hymn the School of Science with a hymn of
ancient Greece ; let us strike up with the words
6v irpb^ AOrjvaiap, for they are appropriate to the
occasion ; and then let us quickly cease lest some
one accuse us of what the grammarians call
"cartwrights abuse" (where by the bye let me
ask do they put the apostrophe and I wonder if
they mean a small or a capital letter ? I seem to
have inadvertently forgotten).
[ovkr]
VOCABULARY.
schoolmaster, 8tSacr#ca\o9- ^ ^ t/ /»
to be abroad io the the land, iravv iroppm oia&vea6ai
Sia T^ ytf^^
too late, ir^ialrepov* • ^ ^^
to be all abroad in one's opinions, iraw mppn wfl-
tv€ff0a4 TO dXi;^.
my usefulness is gone, iyubi fiev fiefitmrai*
I suppose, olfuu.
carpenter, rexpirrj^;.
of course, pif Ata.
mechanic, fidvawro^.
to go to school, ifxtnap h^.
after all, 5pa.
evidently, use verb 4>dafOfun with participle after it
playing field, ircuBia*
yet, eli;*
class room, vaiiela.
much less, ^ trot/ ^e.
University, Avtceiop.
work shop, ipya4mipiop*
smithy, yoXjceioy.
to seem hkely, tcipSweveuf.
to owe, o^>el7ieuf*
baild, oiicoSo^iP'
to emerge, Tra/MMn^Trreiy.
the opposite, to ipamlop* ^ ^ ,
r^ttc^io ad dbmirdum, to /carrctffalpeiv ek arvirw t*.
sometimes, ipiore.
proof, TOCfLTipiOP*
to hymn, vfMpeip.
to strike up with the words, kpafiaXKBadai fSovriS^
appropriate, irpenoDP irpeirowra irphrop.
occasion, Kaifx^.
to cease, iravecdat'
grammarian, ypafifMTueo^' ^
cartwriffhts abuse, 6 i( dpui^ovftyov xKevtri^'
by the bye, i/c irapipycv.
to mean, fiovXeorBou,^
capital, fieya^ fieyaXv fiiya^
letter, ypdfifia.
to forget, hriXapOdpeadai, ^ a ' nro-
inadvertently, use verb XapOavco with reflexive p
noun following and a participle.
^nttuvuiis of Sotonto*
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
LATIN.
Examine!' : J. Fletchbr, M.A.
I.
Translate :
(a) Yixdum clamore suhlato, iaculatores fiugenint
inter subsidia ad secundam aciem. Inde equitum
certamen erat aliquamdia anoeps ; dein quia tar-
bant eqaos pedites intermixti, multis labentibvs
ex eqnis ant desilientibus, ubi suoa premi circum-
ventos vidissent, iam magna ex parte ad pedes
pugna venerat, donee Numidae, qui in oomibus
erant, circumvecti paulum ab tergo se ostendenint.
Is pavor p&rculit Romanos, auodtque pavorem
consulis vulnuB periculumque intercursu turn pri-
mum pubescentis filii propulsatum. Hie erat
iuvenis, penes quern perfecti huiusce belli laus
est, Af ricanus ob egregiam victoriam de Hannibale
Poenisque appellatus. Fuga tamen effusa iacula-
torum maxime fuit, quos piimos Numidae invase**
runt; alius confertua equitatus consulem in
medium acceptum, non armis modo, sed etiam
corporibus suis protegens, in castra nusquam
trepide neque effuse cedendo reduxit. Servati
consulis decus Caelius ad servum natioue Ligurem
delegat ; malim equidem de filio verum esse, quod
et plures tradidere auctorea et fama obtinuit
(6) Ergo Quintilium perpetuus sopor
Urget ! cui Pudor et Justitiae soror,
Incorrupta Fides, nudaque Veritas
Quando uUum inveniet parem ?
Multis ille bonis flebilis occidit,
Nulli flebilior quam tibi, Virgili.
Tu frustra plus heu non ita creditum
Poscis Quintilium deo&
Quod si Threicio blandius Orpheo
Auditam moderere arboribus fidem,
Non vanae redeat sanguis imagini,
Quam virga semel horrida,
Non lenis precibus fata recludere,
Nigro compulerit Biercurius gregi
Durum : sed levius fit ^atientia^
Quidquid corrigere est nefaa
(c) Linquenda tellos et domus et placens
Uxor, neque harum, quas colis, arborum
Te praeter invisas cupressos
Ulla brevem dominum sequetur.
Absumet heres Caecuba dignior
Servata centum clavibus et mere
Tinget pavimentum superbo,
Pontificum potiore coenis.
1. Give the principal parts of the verbs to which
forms italicised belong.
2. Give the rule for the mood of vidiasent, fiudiffi,
redeat, and for the tense of compulerit.
3. Scan the first stanza of (6) and quote a pamllel
from English poetry to the first stanza of (c).
II.
Translate at Sight :
Tum matronae ad Veturiam, matrem Goriolani,
Yolumniamque uxorem frequentes coeunt. Per-
vicere ut et Veturia, raagno natu mulier, et
Volumnia duos parvos filios secum f erens in cas-
tra hostium irent, et quoniam armis viri defendere
urbem non possent, mulieres precibus lacrimisqie
defenderent. Ubi ad castra ventum est, nantia-
tumque Ooriolano est adesse ingens mulierum
agmen, primo, qui neque a legatis neque a 8ace^
dotibus raotus esset, multo obstinatior adversos
lacrimas muliebres erat. Deinde familiarium
quidam, qui Veturiam inter ceteras cognoverat
inter nurum nepotesque stantem, '* Nisi me fms-
trantur," inquit, " oculi, mater tibi conjuxque et
liberi adsunt."
III.
Translate into Latin :
1. Has he not ordered the townsmen to bring him
com for bis soldiers ?
2. They were afraid that he would cross the river.
3. 0 that you had prevented them from making
war on Saguntum !
4. Do not ask him when he first beard that the town
had been taken.
5. He told them that he was younger than any
of them.
6. The Romans were filled with shame and remorse
at the fall of the city. They felt that after under-
taking its protection they should have shown greater
fidelity. It was evident that Carthage would now
bave greater influence in Spain than ever.
i
anflietsftff of Sotdnto*
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
EoMmiirier : D. K. Keys, M. A.
Write an essay of three or four pages on one of the
following subjects :
1. Imperialism vs. The Little Englander.
2. The influence of climate upon national character ?
3. Our daily paper and why we read it.
4. How can we beautify our cities and towns ?
5. The romantic element in Canadian History.
ntifiifreftff of Toronto.
8EKI0R MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS: JUNE, 1901.
ENGLISH LITERATURE.
PASS.
Examiner : W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
1. Give an outline of what Capulet says and does
npon four principal occasions on which he appears upon
the stage ; and thence briefly deduce his character.
2. By reference to definite passages in the play,
show the character of Cassius.
3. Indicate the circumstances of each of the follow-
ing speeches, and show how each is characteristic of
the person who utters it :
(a) These violent delights have violent ends.
And in their triumph die, like fire and powder
Which as they kiss consume.
(b) I think you ai e happy in this second match.
For it excels your first ; or if it did not,
Your first is dead, or were as good he were.
As living here and you no use of him.
(d) Do not stain
The even venture of our enterprise.
Nor the insuppressive metal of our spirits,
To think that or our cause or our performance
Did need an oath.
(e) And men and flesh and blood and apprehensive :
Yet in their number, I do know but one
That unassaila])le holds on his rank,
Unshaked of motion ; and that I am he,
Let me a little show it.
(J) No place will please me so, no mean of death.
As here by Caesar and by you cut off.
The choice and master spirits of this age.
[otkbl]
4. Explain fully and accurately what is italicised in
the following:
We*U not carry coals. 1 would thou wert to
ha'ppy by thy stay, to hear true shrift, ^You are &
pnncox You kiss by the book. Here's sach a
coU. CoTiceit, more rich in matter than in wards,
brags of his substance, not of omamenL- Bade him
bethink how nice the qudrrd was. Hood my wir
mann'd blood, baiing in m,y cheeks. Nature mast
obey necessity which we wUl niggard wiUi a litdt
rest. Mvst I badge ? must I observe you, Who
else m/ust be let blood, who else is ran. And reason
to my love is liable-- By no means I may discover
them by any mxirk of favour. Which fiwdtm lam-
entation might have moved. What less than doorM-
day is the prince's doom. ^£re this band shall be
the lahel to another dded.
5. What special purposes does the first scene in each
of the two plays serve ? in other words, why does
Shakespeare begin the plays wit]i these scenes ?
Bnfuetefts ot ^Totomo*
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : J(7NE, 1901.
ENGLISH.
HONORS.
Examiner : D. R. Keys, M.A.
1. What evidence is there in the play of Henry F.
of a regular balance or proportion between the heroic
and the comic elements of the action ?
2. Criticise the introduction of French scenes into
this English play.
3. Discuss the dramatic purpose of the character of
Fluellen.
4. Compare the characters of Pistol and Nym or of
Bardolph and the Boy.
5. Quote from the speeches of Henry Y. passages to
show (a) his patience, (jb) his piety, (c) his prudence,
(d) his penitence for his father's fault, (e) his playful-
ness, (j) his prowess, (g) the principal object of his
ambition.
6. Explain the following passages (giving, in each
case, the speaker and the connexion) :
(a) T would drink the cap and aU.
{h) Turn him to any cause of policy,
The Gordian knot of it he will unloose,
Familiar as his garter.
(e) TeU him he hath made a match with such a wrangler
That aU the courts of France wiU be disturbed
With chases.
{d) We'll not offend one stomach with our play.
(e) I have, and I wiU hold, the quondam Quickly
For the only she ; and — pauca, there's enough.
(/) The king has kiUed his heart.
[ovib]
ig) The fig of Spain.
(A) It is a beast for Perseus : he is pure air and fire.
(i) Be he ne'er so vile.
This day shall gentle his eondition.
(j) The day is yours.
7. Scan the following ver&es, noting all metrical
irregularities :
Mark then abounding valor in our English,
That, being dead, like to the ballet's grazing,
Break out into a second course of mischief,
Killing in relapse of mortality.
Let me speak proudly : tell the constable
We are but warriors for the working-day
And, mv poor soldiers tell me, vet ere night
They'll be in fresher robes, or they will pluck
The gay new coats o'er the French soldiers' heads
And turn them out of service. If they do this, —
As, if God please, they shall, my ransom then
Will soon be levied. Herald^ save thon thy kbor.
8. Carlyle speaks of Macauiay as a man " radiant
with pepticity." By a oompari3(m between Qamett s
selections from these two writers indicate the inflaenoe
of digestion upon style.
9. Compare Coleridge, Hazlitt and Lairnh as literuy
critics.
einftictffftff Of Sovonto*
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
FRENCH.
Examiner : J. Home Cahebon, M.A.
I.
Translate into French :
1. Take away this table and put it in front of the
window.
2. All dogs can eat meat as well as bread.
3. If you knocked at the door, somebody would
open it.
4. How many men did Napoleon lose in crossing
the Beresina ?
5. Where does one find the prettiest flowers in the
spring?
6. Sit down, if you please ; my uncle will come in a
moment.
7. We should not sleep more than ten hours each
day.
8. He who wants to have everything sometimes
ends by (par) being very poor.
II.
Translate into French :
There was once a man who did not like winter.
One day in the month of December, it was very
cold, and he shut himself in his room. He sent
word (faire savoir) to his friends that he was ill,
and they all came to see him, bringing several
doctors. They found him lying on a sofa {canap^f
m.) in front of the fire, and wrapped up in four
blankets {couvertures de laine, /.). " What is the
matter ? What is your illness ? " cried everybody.
" Alas ! " replied the poor man, in a feeble voice,
" I have winter." Everybody laughed, no doubt ;
but that disease is hard to cure.
III.
Translate into English :
Ces flots de mis^rables roulaient ainsi les ons
sur les autres ; on n'entendait que des oris de
douleur et de rage. Dans cette af&euse mUk,
les hommes foul^s et etouflR^s se ddbattaient sous les
pieds de leurs compagnons, auxquels ils s'atta-
chaient avec leurs ono^les et leurs dents. Geux-ci
les repoussaient sans piti^, comme des ennemis.
Parmi eux, des femmes, des raferes, appelJrent en
vain d'une voix d^hirante leurs maris, leurs
enfants, dont un instant les avait separ^es sans
retour : elles leur tendirent les bras, elles suppli-
ferent qu*on s'dcart&t pour qu'elles puasent s'en
rap))rocher ; raais eniport^es 9a et ]k par la foule,
battus par ces fiots d'hommes, elles succomb^rent
sans avoir 6t6 seulement remarqu^s. Danscet
^pouvantable fracas d'un ouragan furieuz, de
coups de canon, du sifflement de la tempete, de
celui des boulets, des explosions des obus, de voci-
ferations, de gdmissement^, de jurements effroya-
bles, cete foule d^sordonn^e n'entendait pas les
plaintes des victimes qu'elle engloutissait
1. State clearly the events which produced the situ-
ation described in the extract. (Do not exceed half a
page).
2. Translate the following detached pieces :
(a) " Ce g^n^ral se pla9a sur les bords du fleuve,
avec ses pontonniers et un caisson rempli de fers de
roues abandonnt^es, dont k tout hasard, il avait fait
forger des crampons.''
(b) '* II dtait reste sans abri, et k la tSte de sa
garde, dont la tourmente avait d^truit le tiers.''
(c) " II aimait la sagesse et le d^vouement de
celui-ci [Eugene]. Mais Murat avait plus d'^clat, et il
s'agissait d'imposer."
IV.
Translate into English :
Au commencement du YP si^le avant notre
dre, Confucius, apr^ avoir constats que le peuple
au milieu duquel ii vivait ^tait religieux; qu'il
rendait un culte k un Etre supreme et aux
m&nes des ancStres, dit k ses disciples : " H est des
myst^res au-dessus de la competence humaine,
que votre intelligence ne peut r^oudre ; vous ne
pourrez jamais vous imaginer de quelle nature est
Dieu : si grande est & ce sujet votre igno-
rance, que I'efficacite de vos prilres et de vos
pratiques pieuses pour vous le rendre propice peut
3tre mdme mise en doute.
" Mais, tout pr^ de vous, il est une voie tou-
jouTs* ouverte, dans laquelle vous 6tes libre de
marcher sans qu'aucun pouvoir au monde puisse
vous en empScher, voie que le pauvre d'esprit
peut aussi bien parcourir que le plus ^lair^ d'entre
vous ; voie qui aboutit k la perfection, et que
j'appellerai la region du devoir. lA est la seule,
la veritable entrie des cieux .... Pratiquer une
saine morale, faire ce que Ton croit 6lre juste,
observer les devoirs du jour et de I'heure, voilk ce
qu'il est possible k tout homme d'accomplir, voilk
la route qu'il doit suivre et qui le fera aboutir au
plus haut degr6 de la perfection."
nnftift0fts ot Sotonto*
SENIOR MATRICULATION lilXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
FREiNCH.
HONORS.
Examiner: Pelham Edgar, Ph.D.
L
Translate into English :
(a) Enfin, apr^s un an de refus et de n^gociations,
votre ouvrage s'imprime ; c'est alors qu'il fant ou
assoupir les cerb^res de la litt^rature, ou les faire
aboyer en votre faveur. II y a toujours trois ou
quatre gazettes litt^raires en Fk-ance, et autant en
Hollande; ce sont des factions diff(^rentes. Les
libraires de ces journaux ont intdrSt qu'ils soient
satiriques ; ceux qui y travaillent servent ais^-
ment Tavarice du libraire et la maiignite du
publia Vous cherchez k faire sonner ces trom-
pettes de la Renomm^e ; vous courtisez les &ri-
vains, les protecteurs, les abb^s, les docteurs, les
colporteurs : tous vos soins n'empSchent pas que
quelque joumaliste ne vous d^chire.
(h) Combien sous Torme ou dans la grange
Le dimanche va sembler long !
Dieu b^nira-t-il la vendange
Qu'on ouvrira sans violon ?
U d^'lassait des longs ouvrages ;
Du pauvre dtourdissait les maux ;
Des grands, des impdts, des orages,
Lui seul consolait nos hameaux.
(c) On aper^oit sans peine combien des natures
aussi fortement concentr^es dtaient peu propres k
fournir un de ces brillants d^veloppements qui
imposent au monde I'ascendant momentand d'un
peuple, et voilk sans doute pourquoi le role ext^-
rieur de la race Eymrique a toyjours 4t6 secon-
daire. D^nu^ d'expansion, ^trangfere k toute
id^ d'agression et de conquSte, pea souciease de
faire pr^valoir sa pens^ au dehors, elle n'a sa qae
reculer tant que Tespace lui a suffi, puis, accul^
dans sa demiere retraite, opposer a ses ennemis
une r&istance invincible.
1. Name the author of each extract
2. Explain the subjunctives in (a).
II.
Translate into English :
On ^tait k la fin de juin : le soleil descendait
vers le oouchant et allait toucher bientot le som-
met des hautes montagnes. Tout k coup, ses
rayons p&lirent et il disparut derri^re un epais
nuage d'un gris sombre. Des masses de vapeurs
noires, pourpr^ et jaun&tres, glissaient rapides
dans le ciel en s'^paississant k lliorizon. L'atmoa-
ph^re ^tait lourde et la campagne silencieuse.
Aucune fesille ne tremblait dans les arbres ; pas
un souffle n'agitait les hautes herbes au-dessus
desquelles ^anfaient les cigales et passaient les
papUlons au vol inouiet et ind^cis. )l deux
metres du sol, des milliers d'insectes microscopiq-
ues se livraient k une danse d&ordonn6e, fantas-
tique.
III.
Translate into French :
1. He often received letters from his father which
he used to answer at once.
2. Where is the book of which I spoke to you ?
3. I do not wish him to go away. Tell him so.
4. Have they meat ? No, sir, th6y have no meat,
but they have potatoes.
5. He made them write the story which he had told
them.
6. Although he had finished his work his mother
would not let him go out.
7. Why did you not get up earlier ? I have been
waiting for you for a long time.
8. He should have arrived yesterday evening.
IV.
Translate into French :
When the evening meal was finished and the
last plate put back in its place, Martha, as usual
brought her work and came and sat near the
lamp, but with a ceremonious air which was not
at all habitual to her. Few words were exchanged.
At last Madame said, in a hesitating voice :
*' Martha, it is at ten o'clock to-morrow that mv
little niece arrives. Some one must go to fetcn
her. The poor child would be very unhappy if
she found herself alone at the station."
nnUtttnitv of STotonto.
SBKIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1801.
GERMAN.
PASS.
Examiner : P. Toews, M.A., Ph,D.
A.
Translate :
Ein Rechtsgelehrter und ein Arzt waren Uni-
versitittsfrcunde gewesen ; sie hatten sich spater
in derselben Stadt niedergelassen und unterhielten
ihre alte Freundschaft. Obgleich ihre Berufs-
pflichtcn es ihnen nicht erlaubten sehr oft
zusammenzukommen, so machten diese beiden
Freunde es dennoch moglich, zweimal des Jahres
miteinander zu speisen und von den guten alten
Zeiten zu sprechen. Sie sprachen auch oft von
ihren spatern Erfahrungen und Erfolgen. " Ich
vermute, Doctor," sagte der Rechtsgelehrte, " dass
ein grosser Teil der Uebel Ihrer Patienten einge-
bildet ist." " Ja, ein ziemlich grosser Teil," sagte
der Arzt ruhig. *' Und Ihre Behandlung ist in
solchen Fallen wahrseheinlich auch durch einge-
bildete Pillen. Nun ja, ich gebe es zu, Sie mogen
es so nennen ; unter solchen Umstanden giebt es
keine Hilfe," war die ktihle Antwort. " Dann,"
fuhr der Rechtsgelehrte fort, " tiberreichen Sie
natUrlich fUr die Behandlung von eingebildeten
Uebeln mit eingebildeten Fillen auch eingebildete
Rechungen/' " Halt gleich hier, teurer alter
Freund ! nichts Derartiges ; nichts Eingebildetes
in Bezi'ehung auf die Rechnungen ; ich muss die
Grenze irgendwo setzen."
VOCABULARY.
Rechtsgelehrter, lawyer ; sich niederlassen, establish
oneself ; Beruf, profession ; Erfolg, success ; dngebUdet,
imaginary ; zugeben, admit ; in Beziehurig, in regard.
[oysb]
2. Give the plural of Becktsgdehrter, Jahr, Doctor,
Teil, Uebel.
3. State the gender of : Berufapfiicht, Erfolg, Urn-
atcmd,
4. Accent : Obgleich, Patient, eiiigehildet, Umstdnd-
en,
5. Give the principal parts of : kommen, sprecken,
geben, and the third person singular, present; indica-
tive of : niederldssen,
B.
Translate :
1. There were not many young trees in the park.
2. The old ones will be cut down (umhauen) next
spring. 3. The less you speak about it, the sooner it
will be forgotten. 4. The highest steeple (Turm) in
this town is not higher than about one hundred and
ninety feet. 5. For whom are tho^e books, and how
much did you pay for them ? 6. I do not know bow
much they cost ; I have not yet paid the bookseller for
them.
A silly man wanted to sell his house. In order
to sell it more quickly he broke a large stone out of
the wall of it, carried it to the market place and sat
down upon the stone among the sellers. Whenever
somebody asked him, what he had to sell, be answered :
" I want to sell my house, if you perhaps want to buy
it, here is a sample (Muster) ; the stone, on which I am
sitting."
nmtifvtfita^ oc soroma.
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
GERMAN.
HONORS.
Examiner : P. Toicws, M.A., Ph.D.
1. Translate:
Sr war auf rinem ©crgflfpfel anflefommen, ml^tx
rinc mitt %n^[x6)t tn'^ lal ^Inab gewfi^rte. 6r
l^idt fcin fdj^naubente^ SloJ an, manWc e^ gut ©cite unt>
genof nun ben fdj^Snen Slnbltcf, ber ftcb t)or fetnem Sluge
anihxHtHt. 93or t^m etne wette Sbene, bon walbfgen
*&0b^n begrengt turcbftremt y>on bm grdnen SSeOen ber
a)onQU ; )u feiner ffttd^tm bte ^flgelfette ber »flrtem:=^
bergtfc^n Slip, gu feiner Sinfen in weiter, wetter geme
bte ©djjneefuppen ber tfroler Sllpen. 3n freunblic^jem
S3lou fpannte ber ^tmmel feinen ©ogen ftbrr biefe
©cene, unb fcine fanften, licbten garben contrafiirten
fonberbar mil ben fdj^wargUcben SRauern U(m^, ba^ am
gu§e be^ Sergei lag, mtt feinem bunfelgrauen, unge^
beuren SWflnftertburm. Die bumpfen ©loden biefer
atten ^irc^e begannen in biefem Slugenblicf ben SRittag
einguISuten ; i^re Zint gogen in langen, berubigenben
Slccorben ilber tie ©tabt, iiber bie weite Sbene, bi^ fie
jtc^ an ben femen 93ergen bracken unb gittcrnb in ba^
©lau ber Sflfte wrfd^wcbten, aid woUten jle auf ibrer
melobifc^en Seiter bie 2Biinfc|)e ber ^tn^dftn gum
^immtl tragen.
2. Tremslate:
Unb fteb 1 in ber gilrflen umgebenben ^retd
£rat ber ©finger im langen Salare ;
3^m glfingte bie Socfe filberweifi,
©ebleicbt bon ber gilHe ber 3abre.
,,©fifer ffiol^Uaut fdj^laft in ber ©aiten ®olb.
//'
fr
I
!Cer ©finger ftngt »on ber SDlmne ©olb,
Sr pretfet bad |>6(^flf, bad ©efte,
9Bad bad <&rr) ftd^ n)finfci^t n>ad bet ©inn bege^it:
Z)o4 faae, mad tfl bed ^aiferd n>ert^
%n femem ^errH#m gefte ?'' — ,
M^i flebieten »erb* ic^ bem ©finger/' fprii^t i
X)er ^rrrfcfier mtt Ifidjielnbem SDtunbe,
r@r jh^t in bed flrBgem ^erren ^flit^t
(£r ge^or(^t ber gebtetenben ©tunbe.
9Bte tn ben Sitfien ber ©tttrmn)inb faudt,
SRan tt)etf ntc^t ))Dn mannen er fommt unb braudt, |
SBte ber DueK aud ))erbDrgenen 2:tefen, '
©0 bed ©fingerd ?teb aud bem 3nnem fd^aUt
Unb tt)edet ber bunfein (Kefaf)te ©ewalt,
S){e tm <&er)en wunberbar fcfiltefen*
R
1. Translate into German :
(a) They ought to have been punished either by
their teachers or by their parents. (6) The river
is broadest, where it flows into the lake, (c) I
do not think I can wait for you any longer.
{d) Do not leave (abreisen) without me. (e) If
you could postpone (aufschieben) your journey
to Montreal only until the day after to-morrow, I
should most probably be able to accompany yon.
( /) What would have become of those two IwyBi
if their parents had died ? {g) I had to introdnee
(vorstellen) myself to him ; he did not seem to
remember me. (h) Do not forget (2 pers. sin^.)
your promise, my dear friend, and do not take it
amiss (ubel) that I remind you of itw
2. A village blacksmith killed a man, and was
sentenced to be hanged. The peasants went to
the judge and asked him not to hang the black-
smith, because the village could not do without
the blacksmith to shoe horses, repair wheels and
so forth. The judge replied to this : But bow
can I do justice? A peasant then said: judge,
there are two weavers in our village, and for such
a small place one is enough ; hang the other.
VOCABULARY.
Blacksmith, Schmied; sentence, verurteUen; do
without, entbehren; shoe, beschlagen; repair, au^&ess^;
justice, Gerechttgkeit ; weaver, Weber,
c.
LlTSRATURE.
1. Name the works of Schiller written nnder the
influence of the Sturm v/nd Drang period.
2. Give a brief account of Gothe's great philosophi-
cal drama, and name his epic poems.
3. Tell what you know about Freytag.
Wlni\tttnitp of SoroMto.
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
ITALIAN.
HONORS,
Examiner : W. H. Fraser, B. A.
I.
Translate :
Durante il lungo periodo di tempo in cui i
Francesi e gli Spagnuoli combatterono in Italia
per la conquista del nostro paese. gli 8tati del duca
di Savoia erano stati occupati dai Francesi e dagli
Spagnuoli»cosiccb^ al duca Carlo III non rimaneva
quasi piii nulla
Intanto il figlio di Carlo III, Emanuele Filiberto,
combatteva per Spagna contro i Francesi e li
vinceva nella battaglia di San Quintino. Egli
succedette al padre a venticinque anni, ma non
pot^ occupare il suo stato cbe alcuni anui dopo.
il Piemonte era allora in tristissime condizioni.
Emanuele Filiberto era stato govematore dei Paesi
Bassi e aveva visto la nccnezza di quel paese
dovuta aU'agricoltura, airindustria e al commercio.
Appena giunse nei suoi stati cerc6 di migliorame
le condizioni promo vendo Tagricoltura e special -
mente la coltivazione del gelso. II tesoro del
govemo era vuoto, ma egli potd stabilire delle
imposte cbe i popoli del suo stato pagavano senza
dimcoltit a cagione della cresciuta riccbezza gene-
rale. Promosse gli studi e ordin6 cbe si facessero
delle raccolte di libri e di oggetti d'arte. Ordin6
Tesercito, cbe presto raggiunse il numero di 86,000
soldati.
Cosi per opera sua il Piemonte divenne uno
stato forte e rispettato tanto dalla Francia quanto
dalla Spagna.
1 • Give the principal parts (pres. infin., past parL, 1 sg^
pres. indie., 1 sg. past def.) of stati, rimaneva, vinceva
auccedette, poth^ visto, gmnse, pramovendo, facesserth
diV67l7l6.
2. Write in full the pres. indie, of divenne and of
cercd, the f ut. of rimaneva, the impl indie, of stati (1. 4X
and the past def. (preterit) of visto,
3. Write Carlo III and S6,000 in words in Italian.
4. Write the plural of lungo, del dAica^ nella baUa-
glia, qud paese, Veaerdto, difficoltd, and the singular of
gli skLti.
5. Give the positive and the comparative and super-
lative relative of tristiasvme (L 12).
6. ddla Francia (1. 27). When do names of coun-
tries take the article, and when do they omit it ?
7. 9% fcuceBsero (1. 22). Parse.
8. siLccedette (1. 10). Translate : " He will succeed if
he works enough."
9. Write the following words in phonetic transcrip-
tion: lungo, conqtbista, dagli, vinceva, venticinque,
ricchezza, giunae, cercd, popoli, cagione.
XL
Translate into Italian :
1. He will speak of it to us, to you and to them.
2. I saw him yesterday, but he was unwilling to
speak to me of it
3. The boys had been punished by their master
because they were bad.
4. Do us the favour to wait a minute ; we cannot
go now.
5. What shall we do if they do not come to-morrow ?
6. My uncle and aunt who were in Italy have
returned home.
7. It is said that the King of Italy is one of the
wisest monarchs (monarca) in Europe.
8. My dearest friend would not believe this story if
I told it to him.
9. You sing better than I do, but I learn my lessons
better than you.
lOi A boy was put bv his father to watch (caatodire)
the sheep (pecora) in the fields. One day he began to
shout (gridare) "wolf (al lupo), wolf!" His com-
panions, armed with sticks and knives, hastened up
{accorrere) to kill the wolf, but the bad boy did noth-
inf^ but laugh. Another day he repeated the same
Same (giuoco), and laughed at them again. The third
ay the wolf really came. The boy was very much
afraid, and shouted very loudly (forte), " wolf, wolf ! "
But his companions, not wishing to be deceived
(ingannare) again, did not move, and so the wolf
ate many of his sheep. Those who deceive are
not believed even when {qv/ind!anche) they tell the
truth.
8liifliev0ft9 of Soronto*
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
PHONETICS.
HONORS.
Eocaminer : W. H. Fraseb, B.A.
1. Define "voice," and describe the action of the
organs necessary to produce it Draw diagrams to
illustrate the condition of the glottis in "voice,"
" breath " and " whisper " respectively.
2. Qive examples of " high back narrow round "
vowel, " high front narrow " vowel, and " high front
narrow round " vowel.
3. Consonants may be classified according to form
and place. Explain, and give examples.
4. Classify any five consonant sounds indicated by
italics in the following: Ainber, shsll, water. Berg
(Qer.), jsk (Qer.), aouto (ItaL), agmeau (Fr.), trattre
(Fr.).
5. Describe and illustrate by diagrams the function
of the soft palate in the production of the French nasal
vowels. Write pairs of words illustrating French
nasalized and corresponding non-nasalized vowels.
6. Describe the formation of the sounds indicated
by italics in sole, see, Hut (Ger.), padre (Ital.), schon
(Ger.), illustrating in each case the position of the tongue
by a diagram.
7. Note any differences in the position or action of
the organs of speech in producing the following pairs
of sounds : (a) oee (Eng.), si (Fr.) ; (6) oui (Fr.). we
(Eng.); (c) rose (Eng.), rose (Fr.) ; (d) (iutter (Eng.),
tutto (It.); pass (Eng.), passe (Fr.).
8. Divide the following French words into syllables
according to the sound, and mark the stress in each
instance: ennemiy hirondelle, montagiie, mSlodieux^
disparaisaaient, degradation, coincidence, divisibility.
1
Hnit»tvnita ot Sovotito.
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS: JUNE, 1901.
HEBREW.
Examiner : Ross G. Murison, M.A.
1. Translate Genesis ii. 13-17.
bom '^z^'hwn "in:n~DE^i i* : e^d V"^«"'?3
ivv • • • : - TT~ ••• : • I vv t
wn T2nn "n^m "iie'i^ nonp "n^nn wn
• :«T TT": ~ - :?• ;•• •-
... — T T 'T V • \i T : J- — iT :
n)rv w\ 16 : mD\2Jb^ mivb ny—pa
T : - : - .T : T : t : t : I v " » ~ :
T 'T" »••• • •• TT'T - • v:
bDm ^b ynj ales n^Jin yj?D=i 17 : bpm
: men niD I^SD rhD^ Dl*'3 ""D =I5»D
2. Parse iJE^n. 3310."! (13) J HDlp (1*) i
15SD (17).
•• •
3. Give syntax of adjectives. Illustrate from above
passage.
4. niDJ? / (^^)' Pa™e and explain forms.
• ^» *
T :t
6. 75{<n /Dtt (^^)' I'arae, explain idiom.
6. Explain ** Construct State," illustrating from selection
7. Translate Genesis -n. 19-22.
• T • •- : T T T • " T T •
I T ••• • : ■• T?**: TT ;at • -:•-: t "
T T-:«T V V T • : T •• : - J • •• • :
nnw 21 : D'pnnb Trbi^ li^b"' Vdd n^i^ v^ynh
T-: •-:•-: I v v t • •- : a- •
lE^fet ^DS n j t^y'i 22 : rhDvh Drh^ rh n''m
V ": : - A * — iT : T : v t : ! : t t :
•T T I '• • •••: T •
8. Parse J^l^n. n^HH^ (19); Hp. ^DX"' nCDW
• T -: I- : r- •• T •• T : - T :
(21) ; C^JPT (22).
9. Explain the terms " Pause '' and '' Waw Consecutive,"
illustrating from this {lassage.
10. Translate Genesis xxxvii. 21-23.
=IJ3J i6 "IDX'I DI'D in^a"! ]3=l«"1 VDE^'I 21
D"nDBE^n-b« piitn Drhi< lot^'i 22 : 2?w
T : T : • - V ": v ~ "" v • : -
)T^rh DTD ln« b*'«n ryo'? 12-in^E^n-^N
• ":•- TT' • - I : : : •
T V .. I •• T V "!'" * J" •• T
njhSTiN lnjn3~n« nDl"'-Ti« id'^e^ci
• V : T : V I •• V • : —
: r^bv "ic'K D^Dsn
iTT V ": • - -
11. Parse !|n^«"1. DTD. 1J3J (21).
12. Decline ^^ and ^^ without pronominal suffixes.
13. Inflect ^gjp in Qal throughout. Give Ist sing,
pft. in Piel, Niphil and Niphal.
14. JDecline Q!|Q in maaa and fern. sing, and plur. with
ronominal snffixee.
1 5. Oive pointing of Article and Inseparable PrepositdonB.
16. Translate into Hebrew : The kings of the land. My
}od &rt^ thou. Do not kill the man. This is my book.
17. Oive geographical bounds and place in history of any
fne of the following : Babylonians, Aramaeans, Phoenicians.
OnfUfVttfts of Sovonto*
8EKI0B MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS: JUKE, 1901.
ANCIENT HISTORY.
Examiner : A. R Bain, LL.D.
Note. — CandidAtes will take four questions in each section.
I.
1. Point out the particulars in which the measures
of Cleisthenes were more democratic than those of
Solon.
2. Shew how the Athenian Empire was developed
from the Delian Confederacy.
3. Describe the origin, purpose, and outcome of the
Ionic revolt, and its connection with the struggle
between Oreece and Persia.
4. At the outbreak of the Peloponnesian war Sparta
professed to be acting on behi^lf of the autonomy of
the Greek states. Show by her conduct at its close
whether this profession was justified.
5. Write notes on Pindar, Sophocles, Aristophanes,
Pythagoras, Socrates, Pheidias, and Polycleitus.
6. Write notes on Apella, Heliaea, Hellenotamiae,
Nomophylaces, Cleruchs and Probouleumata.
11.
1. Between 509 B.C. and 265 B.C., what steps were
taken by Rome to give solidity and permanency to the
power which during that period she gradually acquired
over the Italian states.
2. Compare the elements of power possessed by
Rome and Cai-thage respectively at the beginning of
the Punic Wars.
3 Shew how the Senate of Rome came during the
period of the Great Wars to be the virtual ruler of the
state.
[otbb]
4. What objects respectively did Qaiufl Gracdmi
hope to attain by his lex fnimentaria and his lez
jvdiciaria. Point out the results which flowed from
each of these laws.
5. State some of the measures adopted by Augostna
which made the condition of the provincials under
Imperial Rome better than it had been under the
Republic.
6. Write notes on the life and character of Tiberias^
Trajan, and Diocletian.
vmibtvtuts ot sotomo*
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY.
Examiners • / ^^^^^ Bakkb, M.A.
nxamvners. | ^^frbd T. DeLurt. B.A.
1. Solve
^ ' y « 2
xymmS
(b) (x — 2) (» — S) (« — 4) (a: — 5) « 840.
2. If 5£2 ^ i2y2 ^2Sxy find the ratio xiy.
a c
If -=— sa« — -, then
0 a
ma n5pc9(^6c\7 p n m /
3. Sum (not guo^in^ the formula)
11 + 19 + 27 + 35+ ....
The 7th term of an A. P. is 51, and the 20th is 116 ;
find the sum of 27 term&
4. Insert five geometrical means between 2 and 1458.
The series
l + 4 + i+ A+ ••••
is continued indefinitely; shew that any term is 1^ times
the sum of all succeeding terms.
Obtain the formula for the present yalue of an annuity
of $ ^ commencing now and running for n years, the rate
of interest being r on the unit
6. Find the harmonical mean between a and 6, and shew
that it is less than the arithmetical mean of a and b.
[oyib]
6. Sam to n termt :
(a) P + 33 + 5« + . . . .
(6/ a + (a + 6)r + (a + 26)r2+ (a + 36)1^+....
L Express the other trigonometrical ratios of an angle in
terms of the cosine.
a^ + 6^
Is the equation sec ^ a possible 9 If so, whjt
II. Prove the following identities :
(1) 9xn^ A + oot? A m^{\^'%\xi A co% A) {mil A -{-CM A).
(2) (1 — 2 oo8« 4) (tan A + cot A) « (sin A-^cwA)
(secii + coeecA),
III. Prove the following :
(1) cos {A — jS) s cos il cos i^ + sin il sin B,
tan A + tan B
(2) tan {A + B)^
1 — tan if tan B
^ ^ ^ ' cot jB — cot il
lY. In any triangle establish the following formulas :
. sinil sin B sin (7
(3)tani(^-^)-^coti(7.
V. If i? be the radius of the circle circumscribing the
triangle ABC, prove that
a
2 6inii
' Shew also that
B (o2 + 62 + c2) = abe (cot A + cot J5 + cotC).
atifUftivfts of sotonto*
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, I90I.
EUCLID AND TRIGONOMETRY.
Hxaminer : Alfred Bakeb, M.A.
1. In a given circle to inscribe a triangle equiangular to
a given triangl&
Shew also how to make the construction that the
sides of the triangle within the circle may be parallel to
those of the original triangle.
2. To inscribe a circle in a given triangle.
If the centres of the escribed circles be joined, shew
that the angles of the triangle so formed are the comple-
ments of half the angles of the original triangl&
3. Define duplicate ratio and compound ratio.
If there be four straight lines, A^ £, C, and 2>, shew
how to find the ratio compounded of the ratios A to B and
CtoD.
4. If the vertical angle of a triangle be bisected by a
straight line which also cuts the base, the segments of the
base shall have the same ratio which the sides of the triangle
have to one another.
5. To divide a given straight line similarly to a given
divided straight line.
Apply the proposition to cut off the nth part from a
given straight line.
6. Similar triangles are to one another in the duplicate
ratio of their homologous sides.
Make a triangle twice as large as a given triangle
and similar to it.
[ovsb]
7. Prove the following standard forms :
(1) log mn B log m -f- 1^ n.
(2) logm* 3i nlogm.
Shew that
log6 a X logs 6 B 1.
8. Shew that
Z sin ^ + X ooeeo A =- 20.
In the equation log as sin il s Z sin ^, what is the
yalae oixf
9. Solve the following triangle :
a » 128, 6 « 74, C B 5^"" ; find ^ and B.
log 64 - 1.7323938 L oot 27^ » 10.2928341
log 202 - 2.3053514 L tan 27^" 41' » 9.7198620
Di£ for 60^ - 3070*
10. In a triangle a - 489, b nm 876, A mm M<' IV ; haA B
log 276 « 2.*4409091 £ sin 38"" 17' « 9.7920769
log 489 « 2.6893089 Z sin SO^' 28' -» 9.5436489
Diff for 60* m 3384.
8lnftiet«Up oc Sorotito«
SENIOR MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1901.
PHYSICS. .
Examiner: G. R. Anderson, M.A.
1. Explain the terms : motion, velocity, unftorm
acceleration.
A body having an initial velocity of 100 ft. per
second is subjected to a negative acceleration of 10 ft.
per second, per second. How far will it travel in its
original direction ?
2. A shot is fired at an elevation of 60° with a
velocity of 1000 ft. per second. Determine its range
on a horizontal plane and the greatest height attained
(9 = 32),
3. What is meant by " moment of a force about a
point " ?
When a lever AB is supported at its centre of
gravity it is found that a weight W hung at A will
balance 2.8 pounds at B ; but when W is hung at B it
requires 6.3 pounds at il to keep it in equilibrium.
What is the weight W ?
4. Describe the *' three classes " of levers, and find
the mechanical advantage in each case.
6. Define specific gravity.
Determine the specific gravity of a piece of
wood from the following data :
Weight of wood in air 20 grms.
" a piece of metal in air 24 "
*' wood and metal sinker in water . . 16 "
'* metal sinker alone in water 21 "
6. Explain the principle of the siphon. What limit
is there to its action ?
7. Define latent heat,
[OYBRJ
The latent heat of fosion of ice being 80 thermal
onits and that of vaporization being 536; find the
amount of heat required to change a maas of 120
grms. of ice at —10'' C to steam at 200"^ C.
8. Describe the phenomena observed when a man
of water is cooled from 10^ 0 till it solidifies. Of
what advantage is this peculiar behavior of water in
the economy of nature ?
BlnMiev«ftfi 9f Sotomo*
SENIOR MATRICULATIOK KXAMINATIONS : JUNE, 1001.
BIOLOGY.
Examiner : R. Ramsay Wright, M.A.
1. Discuss the nature and properties of chlorophyll
and its distribution in plants.
2. Describe the organs of locomotion which occur in
plants.
3. Contrast the reproductive process in a pine with
that in a fern.
4. Make a diagram showing the constituent parts
of the human ear.
5. What organs besides the kidney are engaged in
the elimination of water from the blood ? Describe
the histology of the parts concerned.
6. Discuss the various modifications of the anterior
limb V in Mammals.
n
anfuevttfts of CTovoiito.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
LATIN AUTHORS.
Eauminer: A. L Lakgford, BJl.
Translate :
(a) Interim milites legionum duarum, quae in
novissimo agmine praesidio impedimentis fuerant,
proelio nuntiato, cursii incitato, in summo coUe ab
hostibus conspiciebantar ; et T. Labienus, castris
hoRtium potitus, et ex loco superiore quae res in
nostris castris gererentur conspicatus, deciinam
legionem sabsidio nostris uiisit. Qui, cum ex
equitum et calonum fuga, quo in loco res esset»
quantoque in periculo et castra et legiones et im-
perator versaretur, cognovissent, nihil ad celeri-
tatem sibi reliqui fecerunt.
(6) Quibus abscisis antemnae necessario concide-
bant : ut, cum omnis Qallicis navibus spes in velis
armamentisque consisteret, his ereptis, omnis usus
navium uno tempore eriperetur. Reliquum erat
certamen positum in virtute, qua nostri milites
facile superabant, atque eo magis, qu<Kl in con-
spectu Caesaiis atque omnis exercitus res gereba-
tur, ut nullum paulo fortius factum latere posset ;
omnes enim coUes ac loca superiom, unde erat
Eropinqous despectus in mare, ab exercitu tene-
antur.
(o) Bic aliud mains miseris multoque tremendum
Obicitur magis, atque improvida pectora turbat
Laocoon, ductus Neptuno sorte sacerdos,
Sollemnes taurum ingenbem mactabat ad aras.
Ecce HUtem gemini a Tenedo tranquilla per alta
(Horresco referens) inmensis orbibus angues
[ovbb]
Incumbunt pelago, pariterque ad litora tendont;
Pectora quorum inter fluctus arrecta iubaeque
Sanguineae superant undas ; pars cetera pontum
Pone legit, »inuantque inmensa volumine terga
{d) Venit summa dies et ineluctabile tempus
Dardaniae. Fuimus Troes, fuit Ilium et ingeoB
Gloria Teucrorum. Ferus omnia luppiter Ai^
Transtulit : incensa Dnnai dominantur in urbe.
Arduus armat08 mediis in moenibus adiitans
Fundit equus, victorque Sinon incendia miscet
Insultans. Portis alii bipatentibus adsant,
Milia quot magnis umquam venere Hycenis ;
Obsedere alii telis angusta viarum
Oppositi ; stat ferri acies mucrone corusco
Stricta, parata neci ; vix primi proelia temptant
Portarum vigiles, et caeco Marte resistunt
1. Pai-se fully in
(a) qua^, casti'is (hostiwTa), gererentur, vMitns
(jaisit), cognovissent, aiM, reliqui.
(6) navihus (spes), qua^fortixts, posset.
2. What is the syntax of the following words in (c):
iniserisy Xeptuno, pelago, volumine ?
3. Scan vv. 2 and 4 in (o).
4. Sight translation :
Interea, dum haec gernntur, hostium copiae ex
Arvernis.equitesque qui toti Oalliae erant imperati,
conveniunt. Magno horum coacto numero, cam
Caesar in Sequanos per extremos Lingonum fines
iter faceret, quo facilius subsidium Provinciae
ferri posset, circiter niilia passuum decern fb
Roman is trinis castris Vercingetorix coosedit;
convocatisque ad consilium praefectis equitum,
venisse tempus victoriae demonstrat : "fugerein
Provinciam Romanas, Oalliaque excedere ; id ^^^^
ad praesentem obtinendam libertatem satis esse;
ad reliqui temporls pacem atque otium paruin
profici ; majoribus enim coactis copiis reversuros,
neque finem bellandi facturos. Proinde in agu^i^®
impeditos adorirentur."
flnftietiKftj? oC STotoMio.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
LATIN PROSE.
Examiner: G. W. Johnston, B.A., Ph.D.
I.
Translate into Latin :
1. Who of you does not prefer to benefit (= be of
service to) himself ?
2. Nothing was easier than to promise that you
would do this.
3. I ask you not to think that I am either better or
worse than other men.
4 There are very many qualities {i.e, things) which
a commander ought to possess.
5. Will you return to Borne this winter or are you
going to remain at Athens for a whole year ?
6. There can be no doubt that his officers will send
him assistance with all possible speed.
7. It is impossible for such a man to be a very great
commander ; he best commands who best obeys.
8. If all things must be entrusted to one (man),
Csesar is the most deserving of that honor.
II.
Translate into Latin :
When CsBsar came into Gaul all its states weie
divided into two parts, of which the Aedui were
the chiefs of the one faction, the Sequaui of the
other. In several severe battles all the nobles of
the Aedui were slain ; the chieftains were forced
to give up their sons as hostages and to swear
that they would form no conspiracy against the
Sequani. The latter were now in possession of
part of the neighbouring territory also and
obtained the chieftaincy of the whole of Gaul.
L
anfb(r«ftj? of 2roronto<
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
ENGLISH GRAMMAU.
Examiner : D. R. Keys, M.A.
When the Grecian generals, after the Persian fleet
had been ruined at Salaniis, met to settle who de-
served the first and the second prizes for valour, the
story runs that each man gave for himself his first
vote and his second for Themistocles. // the civilized
nations of the world met to decide in like wise for the
best and the next best country, would not their second
votes, with our impassioned poetess, Salute Italy, — so
giving her the virtual primacy ?
1. Analyse the Hrst sentence of the above extract.
2. Par.<e italicised words.
3. Account for the different sounds of c in second
each and civilized ; of g in (Trecian,yeneralsandgrivin7 '.
of 8 in wiae, be^t and impassioned. '
4. Give the various meanings attaching to the words
Jleet, >tory and runs, illustrating thereby as many of
the different parts of speech as }»ossible.
5. Explain the formation of the 'WdvA^ Grecian, first,
second, kiinnelf, impassioned, poetess, explaining the
derivative termination in each case, and giviug, when
possible, parallel forms.
6. Account for the various capitals used.
7. Write an article on the noun.
eminftsfti? of CToronto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULA.TION.
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
Examiner : W. J. Alexander, Ph.D.
The candidate will write an original easay on one» and one only,
of the following themes : —
1. Elizabeth and Victoria: a contrast.
2. Scene in a Harvest-field.
3. The Life and Genius of Tennyson.
4. Departmental Shops.
5. Preaching.
anftirrttfts of SToronio*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 190L
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
ENGLISH LITEIUTURE.
Examiner: W. J. Alexander.
1. The Lady of Shalott and Lancelot and Elaine
are based upon the same original story : point out the
main ditierences in the method of treatment of the
theme in the two poems.
2. Give a description and outline, with brief appro-
priate quotations, of Ulysses.
3. Quote twenty lines of the Lotos- Eaters, OR of
Early Spring, ok of " You ask me why," or of " Of
old sat Freedom."
4. Explain fully and accurately the italicised words
in the following:
(a) That clothe the wold.
(b) As this pale tapers earthly spark
To yonder argent round,
(c) For a neck to which the siva.n's
Is taivnier than her cygnet's.
(d) My knees are bowed in crypt and shrine.
(e) For he who loves me must have a touch of
earth.
The lovj sun makes the colour.
5. Indicate the poem and the connection in which
each of the following passages is found :
(a) Let us alone. What pleasure can we have
To war with evil. Is there any peace
In ever climbing up the climbing wave.
[ovkr]
(b) Obedience is the courtesy due to.kinors.
(c) To watch the crisping ripples on the beach.
And tender curving lines of creamy spra3^
(d) How sweet are looks that ladies bftud
On whom their favours fall.
(e) In nie there dwells
No greatness, save it be some far-off touch
Of greatness to know well I am not great.
6. Hail, Twilight, sovereign of one peaceful hour !
Not dull art Thou as undiscerning Night:
But studious only to remove from sight
Day's mutable distinctions — Ancient Power!
Thus did the waters gleam, the mountains lower,
To the rude Briton, when, in wolf-skin vest
Here roving wild, he laid him down to re>t
On the bare rock, or through a leafy bower
Looked ere his eyes were closed. By him was
seen
The self -same vision which we n'>w behold,
At thy meek bidding, shadowy Power ! brought
forth ;
These mighty barriers, and the gulf between ;
The flood, the stars, — a spectacle as old
As the beginning of the heavens and earth 1
— Wiyi'dsiL'oih,
(a) What peculiarity of* twilight gives the centra)
idea of this poem ?
(b) What is the other main thought of the poem,
how is it connected with this central idea ?
Utiftiersft]? ot SToronto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
FRENCH COMPOSITION.
Examiner : J. Home Cameron M.A.
I.
Translate into French :
1. One is sometimes rich ^hen one has only
enough.
o
2. It is better to sing than to weep.
3. Where are we going to live next year ?
4. All that she had she gave [it] to the poor.
5. Can Jules write as well as both his brothers ?
6. Blanche has been in Paris for two months now.
7. Although we are black, we have white hearts.
8. Could you see the moon if it were fine weather?
9. Nobody has given the beggar any money.
10. The sun will rise at thirty-nine minutes past
six.
11. Tell your cousin to come and see us to-morrow
evening.
12. I do not believe that that can be true.
13. I am very glad you have come to my house.
14. We sell our apples at five sous a pound.
15. The maid will go and get us some water, if you
wish [it].
1 6. You do not know my age, and I do not know
yours.
17. Here are the pens you have asked for, and those
which I give you.
[over]
18. They write, they sew, they do ; laugh, see, take,
sleep, hold, hate, drink [v^e the singular imperative.^
19. (Past participles) seated, lived, born, grown,
feared.
20. Conditional 1st person of: Venir, cueillir, courir,
envoyer, appeler.
II.
Translate into French :
The march [ynarche, /.] was long and toilsome
[pinible]. The country was arid. There was no
water. Alexander and his army were suffering
from thirst The king sent some soldiers to ex-
plore [d la dicouverte]. They found a little water
in the hollow of a rock and brought it to the
king in a helmet [casque, m.] Alexandar showed
this water to the other soldiers to encourage them
to have patience ; and then, instead of drinking
it, he threw it on the ground. How, under such
a leader [chef] could one have complained of pri-
vations or fatigucjj ?
dnitortefti? of SotomA.
SITVPLBMBNTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
FRENCH AUTHORS.
Examiner: J, Home Cameron, M.A.
L
Translate into English :
Caboussat, seuL II commence a mlnqui^ter avec ce
cMfaut. . . .qui est presque an vice! je ne serais
pourtant pas f&ch^ de le connattre.
Machdt, paraissant aufondy trie aninii et jmrlant
d la cantonade, C'est une calomnie . . . . et je le pron-
verai !
Cab. Machut ! .... A qui en as-tu done ?
Mach. C'est Monsieur Chatfinet, votre concurrent
. . . .qui fait courir sur mon compte un bruit inf&me.
Cab. Un bruit. . . .infd,me ! {II ne fait pas aeutir
la liaison.)
Mach. II pretend que j'ai tu^ votre vache.
Cab. Mais c'est faux .... puisqu elle est morte avant
ton arriv^e.
Mach. Eh bien, ^crivez-moi 9a sur un bout de
papier, pour que je le confonde, cet animal-12t !
Cab. Ecrire, moi ? (Apart) Et ma fille qui n'est
pas llL {Haul) Mon ami, il est des injui*es auxquelles
un homme qui se respecte ne doit r^poudre que par le
silence et le m^pris.
Macr Qui, mais moi, je pr^ffere Taplatir .... Vite !
§crivez moi un mot ....
Labiche : la Orammaire,
1. What is the difference between il a comviem a
cou/per and il a eomviejice par couprr ?
2. Explain the meaning of each word m A qtti en
aS'tu t
II.
Translate into English :
On taxera, si Ton vent, de prejuge rinfluence
que j'attribue aux habits de voyage sur ies voy-
ageurs ; ce qae je puis dire de certain k cet ^rd,
e'est qu'il me pamitrait aussi ridicule d'avancer
d'un seul pas mon voyage autour de ma chambre,
revStu de mon uniforme et T^p^ au cot^ que de
sortir et d'aller dans le monde en robe de chambre.
-> Lorsque je me vois ainsi habill^ suivant toates
Ies rigueurs de la pragmatique, non seulement je ne
serais pas k meme de continuer mon voyage, mais
je crois que je ne serais pas m^me en etat de lire
ce que j en ai ^rit jusqu'k present, etmoins encore
de le comprendre.
Mais cela vous ^tonne t-il ? Ne voit-on pas tous
Ies jours des personnes qui se croient malades
parce qu'elies ont la barbe iongue, ou parce que
quelqu'un s'avise de leur trouver Tair roalade et
de le dire ? Les vetements ont tant d'influenoe
sur I'esprit des hommes, qu'il est des val^tudinaires
qui se trouvent beaucoup mieux lorsqu'ik se
voient en habit neuf et en perruque poudr^ : on
en voit qui trompent ainsi le public et eux-memes
par une parure soutenue ; ils meurent un beau
matin tout coiffds, et leur moit frappe tout le
monde.
1. Translate by using the above materialB: (a) "You
are not able to understand what I am writing." (b)
" He thought he was ill, but to-day he feels much
better."
III.
Trnnslate into Enelish :
■&'
Certes, jamais accueil, si flatteur qu'il tdt,
n'avait 4t6 mieux in^rit^ que celui qu'on faisait
en ce moment a la nouvelle reine de Navarre.
Marguerite k cette epoque avait vingt ans k peine,
et d^ijk elle ^tait Tobjet des louanges de tons les
pontes C'^tait en effet la beauts sans rivale de
cette conr Qj!i Catherine de M^icis avait reuni,
})0ur en faire ses sir^nes [* sirens'], les plus belles
femmes qu'elle avait pii trouver. Elle avait les
cheveux noirs, le teint brillant, Toeil voluptueux
et voil^ de long cils, la bouche vermeille et fine, le
cou ^l^gant, la taille soiiple, et, perdu dans une
mule ['low dipper*] de satin, un pied d enfant.
Les Fran9ais, qui la poss^daient, ^taient fiers de
voir ^clore sur leur sol une si niagnifique fieur, et
les ^trangei-H qui passaient par la France s*en re-
tournaient dblouis de sa beauts s*ils Tavaient vue
seulement, dtourdis de sa science .s'ils avaient
caus^ avec elle. C'est que Marguerite ^tait non
seulement la plus belle, mais encore la plus lettr^e
des feinm&s de son temps.
atittoersitv of iTor o.u?
SUPPLEMBXTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
GERMAN.
Examiner: Professor Ho knino.
1. Translate :
Da sah der Mann seine Frau zum ersten Male
wieder freundlich an, und wie er sie ansah,
ineinte er, dass sie noch nie »o hubsch gewesen
ware, wie in dieseni Aiigenblicke. Er nahm ihr
. den kleiuen Vogel ans der Hand, hielt ihn Hich
wieder <licht vor die Na**e. I»esah ihn sich von
alien Seiten, schUttelte den Kopf und sagle dann :
'* Kindehen, du hattest doch Recht. Es ist doch
merkwurdig, wie sehr man sich tauschen kann."
2. Give the 3rd pers. sing. pres. indie, of anaahf
mahm, hieU.
3. Give the nom, plur, of Mann, Frau, Vogel, Hand,
Kopf, Recht
4. What is the case of sich in beaah ihn sich f
5. Change the lines in direct narration to indirect
6. Translate:
Die zweite Schwester aber, welche schon den
Sprung hatte, wurde die Tante und zwar die
allerbeste Tante der Welt. Dies versicherten
nicht bios die Kinder, welche der junge Edelmann
m und die Priniiesstn bekamen, sondern auch alle
anderen Leute. Die kleinen Prinzessinnen lehrte
sie lesen, beten und Puppenkleider machen ; dem
Prinzen aber besah sie die Censuren. Wer eine
gute Censur hatte, wurde sehr gelobt und bekam
etwas geschenkt; hatte aber einniHl einer eine
schlechte Censur, dann gab sie ihm einen Katzen-
[over]
kopf und sprach : *' Sage einmal, du sauberer
Prinz, was du dir eigentlich vorstellst? Was
willst du spater einmal warden ? Heraus mit
der Sprache ! Nun, wird's bald ? "
7. Write down the German for 3rd, 22nd, 102nd;
17, 45, 111, 359, 1901.
8. Give the fKist participle of wurde, bekamen,
lesen, beten, sprach, vorstellst,
9. Translate:
DAS MARCHEN VOM BUCHE.
£s war wieder an einem Winterabend, als
Heinrich nach jener Handelstadt zuiiickfuhr, in
der er so manches Jahr gelebt. Wieder tanzten
draussen die Flocken (snowflake), wieder sah er
vor sich ein neues, ein ganz unbekanntes Leben,
und siehe da ! auf dem Sitz gegeniiber lag wieder
ein kleines, graubraunes Buch. Doch dieses Hal
wusste er, wem es gehorte. Rs sassen zwei
Herren mit ihm im Wagen, und der altere von
den Beiden hatte soeben das Buch beendigt, es
zugesehlagen, auf den Sitz gelegt und zu seinem
jlingem Genossen gesagt : " Ein ganz prachti^es
Buch ! wer das geschrieben hat, der ist ein
Dichter/*
" Verzeihen Sie," sagte er zu dem Herm, ** wenn
ich Ihr Buch mir ein Bischen betrachte."
" Bitte, bitte," rief jener freundlich, *' ich kann
Ihnen die Lecttire empfehlen. Es ist das Werk
eines neuen, eines kraftvoUen, jungen Ueniea"
Heinrich ofinete zogernd {hesitati7igly) das
Buch — sein eignes und der es geschrieben hatte,
war er. Er gab es errotend {with bludies) dem
Herm zuriick.
" Icl^ kenne das Buch schon/' sagte er leise.
'' Sie kennen es ? Ich raochte nur wi&sen, wer
es verfaast hat."
Da sagte Heinrich ganz leise, '* Ich ! "
Damit die Geschichte ordentlich ende, muss ich*
noch erklaren, dass die zwei Herren Heinrich 's
warmste und innigste Freunde, und unser Hein-
rich selbst ein beriihmter Schriflsteller ward.
&nv»tvntts of Socotito*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901-
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
Examiner: G. H. Needleu, Ph.D.
I.
Translate into German :
1. That boy's sister is not so tall as mine, although
.she is two years older.
2. On the first Monday in December he always pays
ii visit to his father and his mother.
3. Does this big dog belong to you ? What sort of
a dog is it ?
4. Would you be happier if you had more money ?
2^o ; the rich man is not always happiest.
5. Who is in tlie room ? It is I. Do you not know
^onr brother ?
6. It is now a quarter to seven o clock. You will
have to study until half past eight.
7. This is a much more beautiful city than the
larger one we visited a week ago.
8. He went to town this morning. In the country
it is most pleiisant in summer.
9. VVhat a storm ! It rained almost all night. Are
y^ou afraid of the lightning ?
10. To which of the girls does this ring belong, the
little one or the tall one ?
11. Are you fond of music? Yes, particularly of
sinirinir. I would like to hear a (jood singer two or
three times a week.
12. What is the name of the lady we helped to find
her little child yesterday ?
[over]
11.
Translate into German :
Shortly before his death a father once said to
his three sons : " My dear children. I have noth-
ing: to leave vou but this little house and the
vineyard {Weinbenj). But in the vineyanl lies
buried a great treasure. Dig for (navhgmhm) it
industnously and you will tind it" After their
father's death the sods did what he had com-
manded them. 'J'hey spent every day di^ng in
the vineyard, yet found iieither gold nor silver.
However, because they had worked {hearheHeti) it
so thoroughly, the vineyard produced more grapes
than ever before. Now the sons perceived what
their father meant when he told them of the
treasure that lav buried there.
anfiirt0fti? of STotontO;
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS, SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
HISTORY AND GKOGRAPHY.
Examine!': G. M. Wrong, M.A..
1. Compare the historical careers of the elder and
the younger Pitt
2. Explain the causes of :
(a) The decline in the population of Ireland.
(6) The agitation against the Corn Laws.
3. Explain the extensions of the British Empire
resulting from the Mapoleonic wars.
4. Outline briefly the causes of the war of 1812.
5. Compare the systems of government established
in Canada by the Quebec Act and by the Constitu-
tional Act of 1792.
6. Write notes on: (1) The Duke of Wellington's
attitude towards the Reform Bill ; (2) the immediate
cause of Canadian Confederation; (3) the Battle of
Waterloo ; (4) the Gordon Riots ; (5) Tel-el-Kebir.
7. Indicate the geographical situation of Bunker's
Hill; Lexington; Cape St. Vincent; Alajuba Hill;
Navarino ; Lucknow ; Fort Garry ; Assiniboia ; Van-
couver ; Aboukir Bay.
^nfbtrsftff ot STotonio
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
ANCIENT HISTORY.
Examiner: A. Carruthers, M.A.
1 . Give a brief account of Greek colonization (700-
oOO B.C.), and show in what respects an ancient Greek
colony differed from a modern English one.
2. What conditions and events led to the Pelopon-
nesian War? To what extent did Sparta's after
performances harmonize with her previous promises to
the allies of Athens ?
t^. Write notes on Delian Confederacy, Ephors,
Cleruchies, Harmosts, Cleon, Thrasybulus, Sophocles,
Clearchus.
4. Give some account of the Valerio-Horatian Laws,
and of the Licinian Rogations, with dates.
5. Describe the causes of the war between Pompey
and Julius Caesar, and give some account of the pre-
vious careers of both men. Dates.
C. Write explanatory notes on quaestors, comitia
curiata, censors, uediles, Re»(ulus, Spurtacus, Sertorius,
Arminius.
7. Locate and write brief historical notes on the
following : —
Actiuni,
Leuctra,
A Ilia,
Mantinea,
Carrhae,
Phyle,
Sentinum,
Sphacteria,
Zela,
'Janagra.
n
Bni\ttv»tt9 of ^Tovotito.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTKMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
ARITHMETIC.
Examiner: E. F. Burton, B.A.
1. Simplify :
(1) (31.156 — .357) X (7.837 + .003 — 6.421) -r 6.59.
(I X j) - I of u
(2)
HI X (H - H)
2. If an oil barrel holds 30.755 gallons, ard a dipping
pail 3.65 quarts, how many times can the pail be filled from
the barrel full ? Express the remainder as a vulgar fraction
(1) of a quart, (2) of a pail full.
3. A leaves ^ of his property to his tirst sou, | of the
remainrler to his second son and | of what then remained to
his third son, while the balance went to the widow. The
widow had $670 less than the first son. Find the value of
the estate.
4. Which is the better investment, to buy 3% stock at
87 or 5% stock at 135, dividends paid yearly in each case?
Find the difference.
5. A mixture of black and green tea, weighing 11
pounds is worth $4.59. By interchanging the quantities of
the black and the green the value of the new mixture is
^4.32. If the black tea is worth 45 cts. )>er lb., find the
price of the green Aud the amount of each in the first
mixture.
[ovbr]
6. $657— Toronto, April 3id, 1901.
Three months after date I promise to pay to the onltr
of Wm. Thom|)Son at the Ontario Bank, Toronto, the sum
of six hundred and fifty-seven dollars. Value received.
John Nelsos.
This note was discounted on April 24th at 5%. Find
the proceeds. What per cent, does the bank make on its
money ]
7. A man buys goods on three months credit and sells
them immediately for $150 cash. Find the cash gain in
dollars, money being worth 8% per annum. (£1 = 84.86 j.).
8. A man gives his son on his 1 7th birthday an annuity
of $200 to be paid at the beginning of each year until the
son is 24 yetir's old. If the money is put in the bank as
soon as paid, what is the cash value of the gift on the son's
twenty-first birthday?
9. Find the compound interest on $780 at 4% per annum
for 3 years, compounded half-yearly.
10. A man sold $4,000 of 4% stock and invested the pro-
ceeds in 3% stock at 864, thereby increasing his yearly
income by $14. Reckoning brokerage at J% in both ti-ans-
actions, find the price of the first stock.
j!Anioev0U9 oC Sovonto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 190L
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
ALGEBRA.
hJaytminer: Alfred T. DeLurv, B.A.
1 Factor :
(a) X* f x'y^ + y\
(b) a* + 4 6*.
(c) 2 X* — 15 y« + 15 a' -- 16y« — II zx + 7 xy.
2. Simplify :
(y + g — g)" (g — y + g)' , (j? + y — g)-
(y + «)^ — aj^ (« H- «)* — y^ (« + y)''^ — z^
3. Prove that the product of four cousecutive integers,
increased by unity, is a square integer.
4. Solve the equations :
a^c
(a) (o + a:) (6 + a?) — a (6 + c) = — + «2
(6) 2(a:-3)-<i^ = 4,
3(y+l)+ ^^ =9.
5. Solve the equation :
ax^ + 6x + c = 0 ;
and find the sum of tlie roots, their product, the sum of
their squares, and the sum of the squares of their reciprocals.
6. Find the equation whose roots are greater by 1 than
the roots of the equation
a:2— (a +l)a: + a = 0.
[OVKBl
7. Solve:
2a; — 3 3x — 7
2a: + 1 • 3t + 5
(b) x« + y« = 1691
xy = 60/*
8. The difference of two numbers is to the less as 4 is to
3, and their product multiplied bj the less is «504 : find the
numbers.
9. Find the square root of 10 + 2 \/2\.
10. Shew that
[
[
T J ^ '- and that
1
2
einfiietrsUs of CDotonto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
EUCLID.
Examiner: E. F. Burton, B.A.
1. Any two sides of a triangle are together greater than
the third side. (I. 20.)
The sum of the sides of any quadrilateral is greater
than the sum of the diagonals, and less than twice that sum.
2. Equal triangles on the same base, and on the same side
of it, are between the same parallels. (I. 39.)
If ABC and ABD are two equal triangles on the same
side of the line AB and the parallelogram ADBE be com-
pleted so that E is on the side oi AB remote from D, then
CB is bisected by AB.l
3. To divide a given straight line into two parts, so that
the rectangle contained by the whole line and one of the
parts may be equal to the square on the other pai-t. (II. 11.)-
If ABC be any triangle, D the middle point of AB, then
AC^ + BC^ « 2 AD^ + 2 DC^.
4. Equal cords in a circle are equally distant from the
centre ; and thone which are equally distant from the centre
are equal to one another. (III. 14.)
5. If a straight line touch a circle, and from the point of
contact a chord be drawn, the angles which this chord makes
with the tangent shall be equal to the angles which are in
the alternate segments of the circle. (III. 32.)
6. ABC is any triangle inscribed in a circle, 0 is any
point on the circu inference of the circle, and perpendiculars
are let full from 0 on eacli of the three sides of the triangle :
shew that the feet of these perj^endiculars all lie on one and
the same straight line.
8lnfiieir0fti? of Coronta
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901,
JUNIOR MATRICDLATION.
PHYSICS.
Examiner: G. R. Anderson, M.A.
1. If 1 metre = 39'37 inches and 1 cubic foot of
water weighs 1000 ounces, determine the weight of 1
litre of water in ounces.
2. Define specific gravity.
Define any method of finding the specific gravity
of alcohol.
3. Describe the construction and explain the prin-
ciple of the mercurial barometer.
What advantage would there be in using a liquid
of less density than mercury ?
4. State the law of diffusion of gases.
Describe any experiment to illustrate it.
5. Distinguish between temperature and quantity of
heat. What are the units in each case ?
20 grams of water at 10°C. is mixed with 30
grams at ^O^'F. : find the temperature of the mixture.
6. Define specific heat.
Describe a method of finding the specific heat of
a piece of lead.
7. What is meant by " latent heat of vaporization " ?
If 1 lb. of steam at 100°C. be injected into a
gallon of water at lo'^C, c^ilculate the temperature to
which the water will be raised.
anfiiev0Us of Sovonto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 190L
JUNIOR MATRICULATION.
(JHKMISTKY.
Examiners: The Examiners in Chkmistry.
1. State the laws of deHnite and multiple propor-
tions, and give illustrations of each.
2. What information is given by the equation
2 H, + 0, = 2 H.O ?
3. An excess of sulpluir is ignited in 10 litres of
ox^'gen measured at 20''C and 7G()mm. What volume
of sulphur dioxide will be formed if the temperature
during combustion has risen ten degrees, the pressure
remaining constant ?
4. Write formulae for aluminium oxide, chloric acid,
hydrogen peroxide,potassiuin sulphite, potassium hypo-
hlofite, phosphorus hydride, nitrous anhydride.
5. Write equations showing methods of preparation
for oxygen, sulphur dioxide, hydrogen sulphide, nitrous
oxide, hydrogen, hydrogen chloride, ammonia, carbon
<HoxTde.
anflirtsftp of Coronttt
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901.
FIRST YEAR AND SENIOR MATRICULATION.
GREEK AL'THOKS AND SIGHT
TU4NSLATI()N.
Examiner: A. L. Langford, B.A.
1. Translate :
To) S' am ev KXiairj *OSua€v^ Koi hlo^ v<f>op^b^
hopirehrjv iraph Se <t<^iv ihopireov avipe^ SXKoi,
avTctp iirei iroaio^; koi iSr)7vo<; ef epov euro,
Tot9 S ^OBvaeij^ fjuereetire, avBoireoi TreiprjTi^oov,
7] fJblP €T kvBvK€(0<i (t>l\€Ol fl€lpal T6 KcXevOl 5
avTov ivl aTadfjbWt ^ orpvveie TroXivhc
K€K\vdi vvv, Evfiaie, Ka\ aXKoi iravres eTaipov
rj<o0€if TTpoTi aarv XiXaiofuti airovieadai
TTTea^evatov, Xva fit] ae KaraTpv^oD Koi kraipov^*
hKKa fjLOi ei 0* virodev Ka\ ap! ffycp^ov iaffXov oiraaaov^
o? Ke fM€ K€ia hydyrj' Kara Se tttoXiv auro^ dpdyKrj 1 1
TrXdy^OfjLai. ai K€v rt? KOTvXrjv Kat irvpvov opi^j).
Kai fc iX0a)v irpo^ Zdypar 'OSurxa^o? deioto
dyy€\irjv eliroifjLi Trepifjypovi TlrjveXoTrei'nt
fcai K€ fjLvrjarijpeaaiv VTrepfjyidXoiaL fiiyelijv, 15
€1 fiui Sehrpov Solev oveiara fivpC c^oin^es.
2. Parse : &to, p^lvai, orpuvuc, Kararpv^o}, viroOev,
dydyr), fiiyeirfv, 8oUp.
3. Scan vv. 4 and 13.
4. Translate :
*^n? apa (fxovTjaa^ Kar ap €^€to, TrfXifia-xp^i Be
aii<l>i^v0€i^ Trarip* iaffXov oBvpero, Bdtcpva Xei^ayv.
d.fiff>oT€potai Be rolaiv v<f> Xtiepo^ &pro yooio*
basket. He knocked at the door and tbe dean
opened it himself. " Here," said the boy, "my
master has sent you a basket full of things."
fciwift was displeased and said, " Come here, and
I will teach you how to be more polite. Imagine
yourself Dean Swift and I will be the boy."
Then taking off his hat, he said very politely to
the boy, " Sir, my master sends you a little
present, and begs you will do him the honour to
accept it." " Oh, very well, my boy," replied the
lad, " tell your master I am much obliged to him,
and there is a shilling for yourself/'
III.
Translate :
Moi, je continuai durant trois semaines a tmner
ma charrette. A cette ^poque eut lieu la vente
aux ench^res publiques de la cave, du grabat, de
la chaise et du vieux bahut de Zulpick ; et com-
me il me rest^iit les deux cents florins que j'avais
gagn& a votre service, je me rendis acqu^reur du
tout pour la somme de trois gouUlen, ce qui ne
laissa pas d'femerveiller le voisinage et inaitre
Durlock lui-meme. Comment un simple domes-
tique pouvait-il poss^der trois govXden ? Je fi?
voir a M. Durlach la note que vous m'aviez re-
mise, et il n*y eut plus d'objections h ce sujet.
Bientdt meme le bruit courut au pays que j'^tais
un richard, qui tratnait des charrettes pour ac-
complir un vcbu de contrition. D'autres pr^ten-
daient que je metais d^guis^ en domestique, pour
racheter k bas prix les d^corabres de Vieux- Brisach.
et les revendre ensuite en bloc a Tempereur
d'Autriche, lequel se proposait de reconstruire les
chateaux des Hapsbourg de fond en comble a
Tinstar du XII® si^cle, d*y remettre de vieux
reitres, des chapelains et des eveques.
Erckmann-Caatrun.
IV.
Translate :
II avint qu au hibou Dieu donna g^niture ;
De fa9on qu*un beau soir qn*il ^tait en p4ture,
Notre aigle aper9ut d'aventure,
Dans les coins d'une roche dure,
Ou dans les trous d'une masure
(Je ne sais pas lequel des deux),
De petits monstres fort hideux,
Rechignes, un air triste, une voix de Megfere.
** Ces enfants ne sont pas, dit Taigle, a notre ami :
Croquons-les." Le galant n*en fit pas k demi :
Ses repas ne sont point repas k la leg^re.
Le hibou, de retour, ne trouve que les pieds
De ses chers nourrissons, h^las ! pour toute chose.
La Fontaine.
1. What is the moral of this fable ?
2. Scan the last two lines of the extract.
anfuevBUff of Soronto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901.
ALL THE YEARS.
GIIKEK PROSE.
Examiner: Adam Cakruthers, M.A.
Note. — First Year Candidates will take A and B ; Candidates of
the other years will take the whole paper.
A.
(a; Identify the foUowip^ verbal forms :
iTTicKoireL, ipeaOai, aXoi/Tay avcTTJvai, Xd^oiev,
ia-ToXrjv,
(h) Translate into Greek :
Of the kings themselves ; to this father; in the
middle of the river; on the same night; owing to
this ; by means of this ; they know (olSa) the
general is good ; he knows how to be good; the
soldier said not to do that ; he says he did not do
that.
B.
Translate into Greek :
1. She says that justice is wisdom, and that she
herself is justice.
2. The generals were leading their soldiers against
the enemy.
3. Some remained in the city, but other fled through
the fields.
4. The shepherds saw many other soldiers, but those
who were present I saw.
5. That famous philosopher said that there never
was a good war or a bad peace.
[ovbr]
6. The Lacedaemonians condemned the Athenian^y
to death.
7. According to Herodotus these soldiers arrived
after the buttle at Marathon.
8. That king came to see the city, not to aid the
citizens, but it he had arrived three days sooner the
city would not have been captured.
C.
Translate into Greek :
At this place the Greeks came to a halt and
piling their arms proceeded to take some rest.
At the same time they were surpi-ised that Cyrus
hin)self nowhere put in an appearance, and that
no one else came to them from that leader; for
they were not aware that he had heen slain, but
fancied that he had either irone in pursuit of the
enemy, or had pushed forward to secure some
position.
tEinitievBUv of a:ovoiuo«
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 190L
FIRST YEAR AND SENIOR MATRICULATION.
LATIN.
Examiners i"^' Fletcher, M.A., LL.D.
£.xaminer8, |q ^ Johnston. M.A., Ph.D.
I.
Translate :
(a) Quod inter Trebiam Padumque agri est, Galli
turn incolebaiit, in duoruin praepotentium popu-
lorum certamino per arabiguum favorem baud
dubie gratiam victoris spectantes. Id Romani,
modo ne quid moverent, aequo satis, Poenus
periniquo animo ferebat, ab Gallis accitwm se
venisse ad liberandos eos dietitans. Ob earn iram.
simul ut praeda militem aleret, duoiiiillia pedituin
ft mille equites, Numidas plerosque, mixtos quos-
dam et Gallos, popular! omnem deinceps agrun>
usque ad Padi ripas iuasit. Egentes ope Galli,
quuin ad id dubios servassent animos, coacti ab
auctoribus iniuriae ad vindiees futuros declinant,
legatisquead consules missis,auxiliuui Romanorum
terrae ob niroiain cultorum fidem in Romanos
laboranti orant. Comelio nee causa nee tempus
agendae rei placebat, suspectaque ei gens erat
quum ob infida multa facinora, turn, ut alia vetus-
tisite obsolevissenty ob recentem Boiorum perfidiam ;
Sempronius contra continendis in fide sociis maxi-
mum vinculum esse primos, qui eguissent ope,
defensos censebat.
(6) Te maris et terrae numeroque carentis harenae
mensorem cohibent, Arohyta,
pulveris exigui prope litus parva Matinum
raunera, nee quidquam tibi prodest
aerias tentasse domos animoque rotundum
percurisse polum morituro.
occidit et Pelopis genitor, conviva deorom,
Tithonusque reinotus in auras
et lovis arcanis Minos admissus, liabentque
Tartara Panthoiden iterum Oixso
deniissum, quamvis, clipeo Troiana refixo
terapora testatus, nihil ultra
nervos atque cutein morti concesserat atrae,
iudice te non sordidusauctor
naturae verique. sed omnes una nianet nox
et calcanda seme) via leti.
dant alios Furiae torvo spectacula Marti ;
exitio est avidum mare nautis ;
mixta senum ac iuvenuin densenturfunera, nullum
saeva caput Proserpina fugit.
me quoque devexi rapidus comes Orionis
Illyricis Notu.s obruit undis.
1. Give the principal parts of verbs italicised.
2. Explain the syntax of agri, quid, ope, servassent,
vetustate, iudice, exitio.
3. Continendis aociia : **the dative of gerundive
used in final sense." Explain.
4. Devexi Orionis, What is the meaning ?
II.
Translate at sight :
JULIUS CAESAR ANP THE PIRATES.
Hue dum hibernis jam mensibus trajicit, circa
Pharmacussam insulam a praedonibus captusest,
niansitque apud eos, non sine summa indignatione,
prope quadraginta dies cum uno medico et cubi-
culariis duobus. Nam comites servosque ceteros
initio .statim ad expediendas peciinias quibus
redimeretur dimiserat. Numeratis deinde quin-
quaginta talentis, expositus in litore non distalit
quin classe deducta persequeretur abeuntes, et
redactos in potestatem supplicio, quod saepe iUis
minatus inter jocum fuerao, afliceret. Sed et in
ulciscendo natura lenissimus, quoniam suffixiirum
se cruci ante juraverat, jugulari prius jussit, deinde
suffigi.
III.
Translate into Latin :
1. I warn you not to attempt to win over any of
our allies.
2. The defeat of these three strong armies was a
source of great grief and alarm both to the common
people and the nobility.
3. He declared that he was not ashamed to be called
s. renegade : all his friends would soon agree that no
one was more loyal than he.
4. When will you, my countrymen, prefer to be free
rather than slaves ? Can you believe anything to be
worse and more hurtful than cowardice ?
5. Panic reigned in the city : the terrible Hannibal
WHS now not more than four miles from the capital.
6. After a fierce assault on the enemy's works and
defences they withdrew very hastily to their own
camp where they remained during the rest of the day.
anfiier«ft9 o( Soromitu
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
SENIOR MATRICULATION.
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
Examiner : A. H. Reynab, LL.D. .
Write a composition on one of the following sub-
jects:
(a) The War in South Africa.
(b) Queen Victoria.
(c) King Alfred.
{d) Chivalry in Modem Life.
(e) The Pan-American Exhibition.
It is expected that the length of the essay will be
fairly proportioned to the time allowed for writing,
but the chief stress will be laid on the good form of
the composition.
ffttitnetsits of Soronio.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
ENGLISH.
Examiner: A. H. Reynar, LL.D.
1 . Show how the characters of Romeo and Juliet are
brought out by contrasts with other characters in the
play.
2. What is the final impression left by Shakespeare
as to the greatness and the weakness of Caesar and
BrutuR ?
3. In Romeo and Jvliet we have the social and pol-
itical interest of the family feud, and also the romantic
interest of the love story. Which interest dominates
at the close of the play ?
4. Write notes on :
(a) " Et tu Brute."
(6) "Cantelous."
(o) " Is it physical to walk embraced ? ''
(d) " Unicorns may be betrayed with trees."
(«) " To fleer and scoi-n at our aolem^nity**
5. Place the following quotations :
(a) " I'll be a candle-holder and look on."
(6) " That which we call a rase by any other name
would smell as sweet."
(c) " Was ever book containing so vile matter so
fairly bound ? "
(d) " He thinks too much. Such men are danger*
ous."
(e) " The evil that men do lives after them."
n
\
einfUftsfti^ of Sorotito.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901,
FIRST YEAR
FRENCH.
ExaTtiiner : J. Homk Cameron, M.A.
I.
Translate into French :
1. I have none yet, but I shall have some to-
morrow.
2. When did you do that ? Where have you been ?
3. How much money have they lost since last year ?
4. Why can't he tell you what you ask him ?
5. Potatoes and cabbages are generally che;ipt'r
than apples.
6. The man will bring some water, if he has time.
7. Would you not go with us, if you had a horse ?
8. It has been warm this week, but it will be colder
soon.
9. I want you to do your work and to have
patience.
10. Here are our hats; yours is black, mine is
brown.
11. A man came home one evenin^r and found the
house deserted and the door locked [use * fermer k
clef]. With great difficulty he opened one of the
windows and got into the honise. After a little while
he discovered on the dining-room table a note [* mot *J
from his wife to [* pour '] tell him that she had gone
out and that he could find the key outside under the
door-mat [* le paillasson 'J.
[ovek]
II.
Translate into English :
(a) En eifet, tout ce que Napoleon pouvait pr^voir
de malheurs ^tait arrive ; aussi hi triste conformity
de sa situation avec celle dn eonqu^rant su^ois le
jeta-t-elle dans une si ^rande contention d'esprit,
que sa santd en fut ebranl^e. Neanmoins ces
premiers mouvements fufent les seuls qui lui
^t'happferent, et le valet de chainbre qui le secounit
fut le seul qui s'aper(;ut de son agitation. Duroc,
Darn, Berthier ont dit qu'ils Tignorferent, qu'ils le
virent in^branlable ; ce qui ^tait vrai, humaine-
nient parlant, puisqu'il restait assez maitre de lui
pour contenir son anxi^t^, et que la force de
ihomme ne consiste le plus sou vent qu*i cacher
sa faiblesse.
(b) C*^tait la premiere canipagne malheureuse, et
il y en avait eu tant d'heurenses I il ne fallait que
pouvoir le suivre: lui seul, qui avait pu eleversi
haut ses Roldats et les pr^cipiter ainsi, pourrait
seul les sauver. II ^tait done encore au railieu
(le sou arm^e comnie Tesp^rance. Au milieu du
coeur de riiomme.
SfeUR.
1. Whe is meant by le conqiiArant sitedoiaf
2. jeta-t-elle : Why this order ?
in.
Translate into Enorlish :
Un jour, a la cour de Cornouailles [' CornxwiV]
survient un harpeur irlandais : son jeu enchante
tel lenient le roi Maic qu'il promet de lui accorder
le don, quel (|u'il soit, qu'il demandera; il deinande
la reine Iseult, et le roi, esclave de son serinent,la
lui laisse tristement emniener. Sous une tente,
•
pies de la mer, elle attend, en se tordaut les mw^^
de dnuleur, que la maree ['tide'] ait reniis ^ A^^
le vaisseau qui va I'eniporter ; mais Tiistan, qwi
revenait de la chasse, apprend tout : il se deguise
en mtinestrel [*?7itu«^)ri '] s approche de la tente,
et joue si merveilleusement de la rote [ roU']^^^
la douleur d'lseult s'a|)aise meme avant quelle
I'ait reconnu ; le ravisseur et ses conipagnons ouo*
lient le temps a I'^couter, et, quand ils s^
aper9oivent, le flux [* tide'^ montant a re"^^
difficile Taccfes du navire.
einfUf mfty of Sovomo*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, I90L
SENIOR MATRICULATION AND FIRST YEAR
GERMAN.
Examinei' : Professor Horning.
1. Translate:
Ein Mann sollte einen Wolf, eine Ziege (goat)
und einen Uaufen Kohl (cubbage) til^r einen
FIuss Ubersetzen. Der Kabn war aber so klein,
<ias<s er immer nur eins von den drei mitnehmen
konnte. " Welches sollte der Mann zuerst mit-
nehmen," fragte der Vater, "ohne furchten zu
miissen, dass der Wolf die Ziege, oder diese den
Kohl wahrend der Uberfahrt fresse ? "
*' Ich h&tte den Wolf zuerst ubergesetzt," sagte
Hermann.
" Dann hatte die Ziege den Kohl wahrend der
Uberfahrt gefressen," antwortete der Vater.
" Ich hatte die Ziege zuerst ubergesetzt/' sagte
Bertha. *' Der Wolf kann denn Kohl nicht
freasen."
" Gut," sagte der Vater, " Aber welchen nahm
-er bei seiner zweiten Uberfalirt ? Den Wolf ?
Dieser hatte die Ziege wahrend der Uberfahrt
gefressen. Den Kohl ? Diesen hatte die Ziege
gefressen."
'* Ich liesse die Zie£:e immer etwas an dem
Kohle nagen/' sagte Karl. " Wahrend der Uber-
fahrt kann sie nicht viel fressen. Wenn ich dann
den Wolf ubergesetzt, so holte ich den Kohl und
isuletzt die Zieore."
" Der Kohl muss aber unbenagt bleiben," ant-
wortete der Vater.
[oysb]
** Er muss dann die Ziege anbinden/' sagte Karl
'' Der Uann hat keinen Strick/' antworteie der
Vater."
Studenten ! Wie macbie es der Mann ?
2. Give the nom. plur. of Mann, Wolf, Fbus^
Vater, Ziege.
3. Give the Styi pers. sing, prea, indie of solfte,
iiim'setzen, mitnehmen, fressen.
4. Decline throughout the German for the lUtie
cabbage^ a white goat
5. Translate iuto German :
A peasant went into the old castle of Edinburgh
to see the pictures of the kings. Among others
he saw the portraits of a father and a son. The
father looked young and the son old. Then said
the peasant, *' How is it possible that this young^
man could have so old a son ! *'
6. Translate into German :
Do you see that house over there ? There are
two windows on this side and a door. On the
other side there are three windows and two doors
In each end there is one window and no door.
Can you count the panes (Scheibe) of glass in the
windows ? I think each has about twenty-foar,.
for the house is old fashioned. There are five
rooms down-stairs and upstairs five bright bed-
rooms. The stairs are wide and easy to mount
The roof is of wood. In Germany the roofs are-
mostly tile (Ziegel).
8liiiiiev«ftfi 9( Sovotite*
SUFPLBMBNTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
HEBREW.
Examine^-: Ross G. Murison, M.A.
1. Translate Genesis i. 21-25:
•• : • : - • • — .. • ... T : •-
• • • • •
WDn ijj*iE^ "«^i< riE^Dhn n^nn e^dj-^3
• — - : IT V "2 V V 'T T "" ■" V V T
v: :"~ •• • : Itt I t ••: v" ■• •
: •• • v: T / vT :- • •
» V 'T T V " I T : • - - • — V : • :
- •• • -: fv "I '" vv "• '""
nona nro*? n'n tsfoj vnxn «sln D^1^«
T •• : T • : T- .,..,.] .^. T T •• • v:
-— 1,.. •: •- T* : » V V !•" s V vT
T •• : ■ V : T • : » v T t — %• * v:
V V T ••: T • :
T T-:«T
2. Parse j^-i^"!. DJ^'^nH. nK^Din. Dn3''Db»
T. s^ • « ^ .K .... T ••••••
• • • • • •
x-i"! (21); rpTi Dn4<.ns. a"!"" (22); ••n"'! (23);
: — I vt:- t : V* • :-
«sln. ln''m (2*) ; e^j;"! (25).
: • :
[OYSBJ
3. Explain and illustrate terms : Waw consecutive,
Jussive, Pause.
4. In6ect 72)5 in Piel, and H^IB ^^ Q*^» throughout
5. Translate Genesis iv. 9-14- :
^b "iDK'i Tnt< ban •>« rp"b« nin"' "idk'i »
T • T V V V ~ • • T • T •• -: • T -T
•T T": 'T ' • ~ •• r - f • T " ' I
nniJB nef« nDij<n-p nn« "in« nnjn »
T : 'T V ": T T-: -t ' • t t t t - :
I'VT • I • T •• : V -r-T T •
b\i^ nx-vb^ ro "iDxn 13 : vivo n^^nn i:i
T T 5 •.•'••" V " ' V'TT v: '" TT
•>:© b:jD DVn Ti^ nEf*)j n »* : «iiyjD ■'Jiy
• i • ■ ■ •
Y"i«3 lii jri ''n''Mi "inD« Ti^isoi nonsn
* VTT TT T • • T: •• T V f vT ' T T-tiT
»,•• • »<•■
6. Parse the last three words in v. 9, and explain fully
their relations to one another.
7. Parse n**fe^]? (^^)- Account for the pointing of J^P.
T • • • L
8. Parse ij^rj, D^'pi;!:. "^7%^ (10) ; -in«. HnxB.
<i3) ; nE^^ia. inD«. ""i^sb (i*)-
T : """• '• T V • :
9. How is the comparison of Hebrew adjectives effected!
10. Inflect Q!|Q in sing, and plur. with pronominal
suffixes.
11. Translate into Hebrew:
Who are these) These are thy father, and tfaj
brotherb, with their horses. From all the trees of the
jnrarden thou majest take.
12. Tell briefly what you know of Ancient Babylonia, its
^geographical position, and the historical importance of its
people.
anfliet«fts of SorontQ.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
FIRST TEArT
ANCIKNT HISTORY.
Examiner: A. R, BAI^^ LLD.
N.B. — The candidates will take four questions each in I. and II.
I.
1. Compare the mental and moral characteristics of
the Ionic with those of the Doric Greeks.
2. Show how Greek life and character were influenced
by such gatherings as the Pan-Ionic at Delos and the
Pan-Hellenic at Olympia.
3. What benefits accrued to Athens from the general
policy and measures of Peisistratus ?
4. Give fully the provisions of the "Peace of Nikias,"
and state clearly why it failed to permanently close the
Peloponnesian War.
5. Briefly describe the steps by which Athens and
afterwards Sparta obtained supremacy in Greece, and
compare these supremacies as to influence and import-
ance.
6. Write notes on Ostracism, the Athenian Drama
and the Achaean League.
II.
1. Write notes on the powers of the King, the
Senate and the Comitia Curiata during the regal
period at Rome.
[over]
2. Explain how the government of the state fell
virtually into the hands of the Senate during the
Republican period.
3. Describe Hannibal's passage of the Alps, and give
some account of th# composition of his army.
4. State the principal measures advocated by Gaia&
Gracchus and the object he hoped to attain by each.
5. Give some account of the character of Augastos,
and show how he reconciled republican forms with
personal supremacy.
6. Describe the government of a Roman Province,
and show how the ottice of pro-consul might be fraught
with danger to the central authority at Kome.
2an{|iet0ft» ot Cotomo*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 190L
FIRST YEAR AND SENIOR MATRICULATION.
EUCLID AND TIUGONOMLTRY.
Eocaniiner: Alfred Baker, M.A.
1. To inscribe a circle in a given triangle.
What is an escribed circle ?
Shew that the centres of the escribed circles of any
triangle lie in pairs on straight lines through the angles.
2. To circumscribe a circle about a given squaro.
lu what ratio are the areas of circles in and about a
square 1
3. To inscribe a regular pentagon in a given circle.
4. Af Bf C and D are four straight lines. Shew how to
find, after Euclid's manner, two straight lines which are in
the ratio com])ounded of the ratios A to B and C to D.
Find iftlso two straight lines which are in the duplicate
ratio of il to B.
5. The areas of triangles of the same altitude are to one
another as their bases.
6. To describe a rectilineal figure which shall be equal
to one and similar to another rectilineal figure.
7. Prove that
logfr m =
Of what use is this formula?
8. Shew that log^ b ' log^ a == 1.
Given log,^7 = .8450980, find log, 4-9.
[ovbr]
9. In the right-angled triangle
A = 39'' 10', c = 478, C = 90" : find a.
log 47800 = -6794279 L hin 39' 10' = 9-8004272
log 30189 = -4798487
Diif. » 144.
10. In the triangle
a = 347, h = 289, C = 78' : find A and B,
. log 68000 = -7634280 L cot 39* == 10*0916308
log 63600 = -803457 1 Z tan G** 26' = 90610078
Diflr. for 60"= 11361.
11. a « 253, h = 361, A = 34^ 15' : find both value*
of B.
log 361 = •5575072 L sin 34** 15' = 9-7503579
log 263 = -4031205 L sin 53' 26' = 9-9047106
Diflr. for 60" « 937.
J
anfUerieifti? ot Toronto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS, SEPTEMBER, 1901.
SENIOR MATRICULATION AND FIRST YEAR.
ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY.
jp . _ f Alfbed Bakeb, M.A,
1. Solve :
(a) 2 X* — 3a^ — »« — 3* + 2 - 0.
(6) jc + y - 17.
afi + y^^ 1241.
2. If m and n are the roots of the equation
aaj2 + 6a: + c « 0,
then »j + n ^ — -, mn ss -.
a a
Conatnict the equation whose roots are the reciprocals of
those of the equation
x^ -{- px + q ss 0,
^ ir^ ^ ^ f K«« a^ + <^ + e^ _ ace
Given ao: + 6y + c« = 0
Ix + my + n» = 0
find the ratios x \y\7i,
4. In an arithmetical pi*ogression shew that the sum of an
odd number of terms is equal to the product of the number
of terms and the middle term.
Insert 10 arithmetical means ben ween 27 and 93.
5. Find the sum of n series of a geometrical progression.
Find the present value of a perpetual annuity of $A
starting now, the rate of interest being r on 1.
6. Sum the series :
(a) P + 22 + 32 to w terms.
(b) 1.2 + 3.4 + 5.6 to n terms.
r.,,..
I. Express the other five trigonometrical ratios in terms
of the cotangent.
II. Prove the following :
(1) 1 — tan« ii « 2 beo^ ii — aec^ i(.
(2) ain^ ii— coe^^B(8in ^— 008^) (l+ai&^ooBi).
(3) 1 —sin -4 , ^ , ...
T-r-' — 7 — (aec -4 - tan £f.
III. Prove the following :
(1) COB (i -- ^) aa COB ^ ooe ^ + Bin il sin ^.
tan A *— tan B
(2) tan (^ - ^)
(3) cot (ii — ^) :
1 + tan ii tan ^
cot ii cot ^ + 1
cot B — cot A
IV. Prove that
(1) 008 (if + ^ + C') a- COB ii COB ^ COB C
— coBil ainJ^sinC — cos^sinCsiDii
— COB C sin J sin />.
(2) sin 3ii » 3 sin il - 4 sin^ A.
V. In any triangle establish the following :
(1) a^h fx% C '\- c Qo% B,
(2)C0B.1 ^^^^
(3) tan \ (A — J« ^^ cot \ C.
VI. If r, be the circle escribed to the side a of the triangle
ABC^ prove
S a COB ^ B COB \ C
' 9 — a COB \A
anfuetfiiity of Sotonto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
FIRST YEAB.
ELEMKNTARY BIOLOGY.
Examiner: Prof. Ramsay Wright.
NoTS. — Select any five queBtions.
1. Contrast the nature of the nutritive processes of
plants and animals.
2. Describe the structure and methods of i-eproduc-
tion of a Liverwort. In what respects does it differ
from a Moss ?
3. What are the regions of the Vertebrate brain and
how are these related to the Cranial nerves ?
4. Describe the microscopic appearance and the pro-
perties of muscular tissue.
5. What are the tissues which enter into the com-
position of the Vertebrate Skeleton ? Describe their
microscopic structure.
6. What are the chief modifications of structure
which adapt the bird for aerial locomotion.
7. Give some account of the Oixlers of Reptiles —
Jiving and extinct.
I
anfiiettffts ot Toronto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 190L
FIRST YEAR.
PHYSICS.
Examiner : C. A. Chant, M.A.
1. Give examples to illustrate the meaning of the
terms velocity, mass, weight, acceleration, energy.
2. A train weighing 50,000 kilos starts from rest,
and at the end of 5 minutes is moving at the rate of
40 kilometres per hour. Find
(a) the acceleration, (considered constant) ;
(6) the momentum at the end of the 5 minutes ;
(c) the kinetic energy then ;
(d) the velocity 2 seconds after the start
3. What is the centre of gravity of a body ?
A uniform square sheet of metal, 9 inches to the
side, is divided into 9 equal squares, and one of these
squares at the centre of a side is removed. Find the
centre of gravity of the portion left.
4. How would you find the specific gravity of (a) a
piece of quartz, (b) a sample of nitric acid ?
5. State Pascal's Ihw of transmission of fluid pres-
sure.
6. Give examples of the conduction, convection and
radiation of heat.
7. A calorimeter weighs 120 grams and its specific
heat is .08 ; in it are 500 gramn of water at 12'' C. and
into this a kilogram iron weight of specific heat .1, and
at temperature 100° C. is dropped. Find the resulting
temperature.
r
I
atifnevfiiftfi ot Sototito*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901,
SECOND YEAR.
GREEK AUTHORS.
Examiner: J. C. Robertson, B.A.
1. Translate :
(a) & nai/09 OaKrifjMra koX
TrapavKi^ovca irerpa
fAVXioSea-i Maxpal^i,
ipa ^opoi^ aieiffovGi voBotv
* Ay pavXov Kopai rpiyovot
ardSia ')(\o€pa irpo IIaXXaSo9
va&v, avpirfyoDp
vfUf(0Vt orav avKloi,^
a-upi^p^, & riAi/,
Totai aoif; iv avrpoi^,
Xva TeKovad ti^ irapOkvo^, & fieXia,
Pp€<f>o^ ^oi^tp irravol^ i^pi^ev doivav
drjpai T€ (jyoii/iav SaiTa, iriicp&v ydfitov
vfipiv. ovT iiri teepieiaiv ovre \6yoi^
deodev TCfcva dvaroh.
(b) XO. &(f,0rf Be TTw Tfl fcpvirra firi^avrjfiara ;
8E. TO p,r) BiKatov tt)? Bixt)^ ^aa(OfA€vop
i^vpeu 6 Oeo^, oi p^uivdrjvai deKtov,
XO. TTW ; dvTiA^u} a iKiri^ t^eivelv raSe*
TreTTuafievai yap el davelv f)fid^ j^peoDV,
fjBiov &v OdvoLfiev, elff" opav <f>do^,
©E" iirei 0€ov fuivreiov ^ver* 6#cX(7ra>i/
TToai^ Kp€ou<ri7^, 'iraloa tov Kaivov \a0a>Vy
irpo^ hehrva Bvaiaf; ff &? Qeovi cjirXi^erOf
SovOo^i fiei/ f^x^' evda irvp irrjSa 0€ov
0afcx€iov, a>9 a<f>ayaiai Aiopvaov irerpa^
Sevaeie Bicaa^ TratSo? dvT* oTrrrfpicav,
i
moyen de connaitre oA est le beau vers, si le
com^dien ne s'y arrfite, et ne vous avertit par \k
qu'il faut faire le brouhaha ?
Caihos, En effet, il y a inani^re de faire sentir
aux auditeurs les beautes d'un ouvrage, et les
choses ne valent que ce qu'on les fait valoir.
Maacarille, Que vous semble de ma petite-oie ?
La trouvez-vous congruante k Thabit ?
Cathos. Tout k fait.
Maacarille. Le ruban est bien choisi.
Magdelon, Furieusement bien. C'est Perdri-
geon tout pur.
1. Write notes on grands comSdiens, petite-oie. Per-
drigeon,
2. Substitute ordinary French for the yrecif.ase
expressions in the extract.
IIL
Translate :
HERNANI.
Oh 1 je [)orte malheur a tout ce qui m'entoure !
J ai pris vos meilleurs tils, pour mes droits sans remords-
Je les ai fait combattre, et voila qu'ils sont morts !
C'^taient les plus vaillants de la vaillatite Espagne.
lis sont morts ! ils sont tous tomb^s dans la montagne
Tous sur le dos couch&, en braves, devant J)ieu,
Et, si leurs yeux, s'ouvraieut, ils verraient le ciel bleu \
VoilJt ce que je fais de tout ce qui m'^pouse !
Est-ce une destinee k te rend re jalouse ?
Dofia Sol, prends le due, prends Teiifer, prends le roi !
C'est bien. Tout ce qui n'est pas moi vaut mieux que
moi !
Je n'ai plus un ami qui de moi se souvienne,
Tout me quitte, il est temps qu'a la fin ton tour vienne^
Car je dois etre seul. Fuis nm contagion.
Ne te fais pas d'aimer une religiim !
— Hernani, Act III., Sc^ne IV.
1. Explain the cases of the subjunctive mood occur-
ring in the extract.
IV.
Translate :
Oaston. Que veux-tu ? il m*agace les nerfs,
ce petit monsieur, qui se croit de noblesse d'epee
parce que monsieur Grimaud, son grand -p^re,
etait lournlsseur aux armies. C'e.st vicointe, or>
ne yait comment ni pourquoi, et 9a veut etre plus
l^gitiiniste que nous; 9a se porta k tout propos
chain pioii de la nobles.se pour avoir lair de la
repr^aenter. Si on fait une ^gratignure a un
Montmorency, <;a crie comnie si on I'^corchait lui-
meme. Bref, il y avait entre nous deux une
querelle dans lair; elle a crev^ hier soir k une
table de lansquenet. 11 en sera quitte pour un
coup d'^p^e ce sera le premier qu on aura
re^u dans sa famille.
— Le Geridre da Monsieur Poirier,
Acte /., Seine 1 1.
1, Write notes on noblesse d'^p^e, Ugitiviiste, Mont-
murency, lausquenet.
2. Give present subjunctive in full of croitj crevd.
r3. Write a note on the use of ^a in this passage.
V.
Translate :
On volt dans les sombrcs ticoles
Des petits qui |)leurent toujours;
Les autres font leurs cabrioles,
Kiix, lis restent au fond des cours.
Leurs blouses" sont tifes bien tiroes,
Leurs pan talons en bon ^ttit.
Leurs chaussnros toujours cirdes :
lis ont Fair sa^je et d^licat.
Les forts les appellent des filles,
Et les malins des innocents:
lis sont doux, ils donnent leurs billes..
ils ne seront pas commer^ants.
VI.
1. Give in brief outline the life of Moliere.
2. Write notes on Sulhj'Pntdhoiume, Daudet, Vol-*
ta'iTe,
smtiierttUff of Soronto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
LATIN.
Examiner: J. Fletcher, M.A.
^ I.
Translate :
(a) Datur negotium militibus, quos miserant expe-
ditionis eius comites, ut eum opportune adoiH
loco interficerent. Haud inultum interfecere ;
nam circa repngnantem aliquot insidiatores
ceddere, quum ipse se praevalidus, pari viribus
animo, circumventus tutaretur. Nuntiant in
castra ceteri, praecipitatum in insidias esse ; Sic-
cium egregie pugnantem militesque quosdam cum
eo amissos. Primo fides nuntiantibns fuit ; pro-
fecta deinde cohors ad aepeliendoa, qui ceciderant,
decemvirorura permissu^ postquam nullum spolia-
tum ibi corpus Sicciumque in medio iacentem
arinatum, omnibus in eum versis corporibus,
videre, hostium neque corpus uUum nee vestigia
abeuntiuTn, profecto ab suis interfectum memo-
rantes rettulere corpus. Jnvidiae(|ue plena castra
erant, et Romam ferri protinus Siccium placebat,
ni decemviri funus militare ei publica impensa
facere maturassent.
(6) Testis erit magnis virtutibus unda Scamandri,
Quae passim rapido diffunditur Hellesponto,
Cujus iter caesia angustans corporum acervis
Alta tepefaciet permixta flumina caede.
Currite ducentes suhtecSrmina, currite, fusi.
Denique testis erit raorti quoque reddita praeda,
r
cuDi teres excelso coacervatum a^crere bostom
Excipiet niveos percuasae virgini^ artus.
currite ducentes subtegmina, currite, fusi.
Nam simul ac fessis dederit fors copiam Achivi:>
Urbis Dardaniae Neptunia solvere vincla,
Alta Polyxenia madefievt caede sepulcra,
Quae, velut ancipiti succumbens victima ferro,
Projiciet truneuin submisso poplite coi'pus.
1. Give principal parts of italicised verbs.
2. Turn into direct narration from praecipitaium \a>
amiMoa,
3. Scan the first three verses of (6).
4. Write notes on unda Scainandri^ Neptunia
vinda.
II.
Translate at sight :
Nee iam poterat bellum differri. JEqxu Latinum
agrum invaserant. Oratores Latinorum ab senatu
petebant, ut nut mitterent subsidium aut se ipsos
tuendorum finium causa capere arma sinerjent
Tutius visum est defendi inermes Latinos quam
pati retractare arma. Vetu^ius consul missus est ;
is finis population! bus f uit. Cessere iEqui campis,
locoque magis quam armis freti sum mis se iugis
montium tutabantur. Alter consul in Volscos
profectus, ne et ipse tereret tempus, vastandis,
maxime agris hostem ad dimicandum acie excivit.
Medio inter ca.stra campo, ante suum quisque
vallum, infestis signis constitere. Multitudine
aliquantum Volsci supenibant ; itaque efiusi et
con tern ptim pugnam iniere.
iir.
Translate into Latin :
(a) Let us persuade them to return and ask for
peace.
(6) He said it often happened that the best men
were not elected.
(c) How could you tell where they came from ?
{d) If they had made an attack, they would have
captured the place.
(e) One morning, as Virginia, attend e<l l\y her
nurse, was on the way to her school, which was in one
of the booths surrounding the forum, M. Claudius, a
client of Appius, laid hold of the damsel and claimed
lier as his slave. The cry of the nurse for help brought
a crowd around thetn, and all parties went before the
Decemvir. In his presence Marcus repeate<l the tale
he had learnt, asserting that Virginia was the child of
one of his female slav(^s. and had been imposed upon
Virgin! us by his wife, who was childless. He farther
stated that he would prove this to Virginius as soon
as he returned to Rome, and he demanded that the
jijirl should meantime be handed over to his custody.
amnettttls 0€ Soronco.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIOKS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
ENGLISH.
Eocaminer : A. H. Retnar, LL.D.
1. What is Tennyson's point of view and his peculiar
object in telling the story of the Idyls of the King ?
2. What are the qualities that distinguish Tennyson
as an artist ? Illustrate from the work prescribed.
3. Describe after Tennyson the nature, work and
destiny of King Arthur.
4. Tell briefly the legend of the Holy Grail and say
to whom and how it happened.
5. Describe the last battle and the passing of
Arthur.
atifuctieffts of Sovonto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXMINTIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FKKNCH.
Examiner : J. Home Cameron.
I.
Translate into French :
1. Would they not be angry if we went away before
them ?
2. He could ha^e finished the book if he had begun
early.
3. It is time to put out the lamp and go to bed.
4. You would not like one to do that to you.
5. It is natural that we should not love our enemies.
6. My two brothers will have to cut all the wood.
7. You have been reading for two hours, now you
may play.
8. Be kind enough to lend me your pen.
9. He who has drunk will drink. Translate this.
He conducted me.
10. I have ground the coffee, boiled the milk, and
beaten the eggs.
II.
Translate into French :
When a man loves only himself and thinks
only of himself, that man is selfish. ... If
no one came to the aid [secours, m ] of the poor,
they would be forced to steal what is not theirs ;
for everybody has the right to live. Unfortnn-
ately, the weak are oppressed [opprimn'] by the
strong, and the strong by those who are stronger ;
and if-it-were-not-for [«rni8] charit}', injustice
would prevail [r^ver] everywhere. It is there-
fore charity tbat preserves [consei'ver] liberty.
II r.
Translate into English :
II y avait deux ans qu'ils ^taient brouill^s avec
leur tils Edouard, et qu*il avait ^psus^, contre leur
consentement, une femme pauvre, une ouvri^re
qu'ils n'avaient pas meme voulu connaitre. Comtne
lis Tavaient aim^, gat^ d^s son enfance, cet
Edouard, leur enfant unique! Tout de suite,
Bourgueil, Tancien compagnon, — alors d^ja petit
entrepreneur, — avait dit a sa femme : ** Tu sais,
Clfemence, on est en train de rafistoler Paris de
fond en combla Le hatiment va fort, et si cela
continue, j'aurai fait fortune dans douze ou quinze
ans d'ici.
(6) II les Ajarta pai de dures paroles. Mais le
faim les rendait faroiiches et hardis counue des
loups. lis se formferent en cercle autour de loi
demand^rent du pain d'une voix plaintive et
rauque.
(c) Au parvenu qui se chamarre de bijoux et toise
le passant du haut de ses arrogances mill ionnaires,
il dirait que ces splendeurs de mauvais aloi
trahissent au lieu de lacacher, son humble origine;
que larrogance est le synonyme de petitcsse, et
que ceux qui regardent de haut sont d'ordinaire
ceux qui sont partis de bas.
IV.
Translate into English :
Le 23 fi^viier 180G, Napoleon avait promis
(I'assister au bal de Tamiral Decr^s ; mais avant
diner il rnande pour huit heures le ministre des
finances.
— II est bien temps, lui dit-il, que nous allions
au bal k dix heures.
Et les yoi]k tous deux ^tudiant le budget. Vers
minuit, un page gratte k la porte. Josephine, qui
s'est rendue separ^ment chez Decr^s, fait dire que
le bal est charmant et qu*on s'inqui^te de Tabsence
de Tempereur.
— Tout k rheure, r^pond Napol^n. Dites a
riinp^ratrice que je travaille avec le ministre des
finances. Nous y allons.
Une heures, deux heures, trois heures sonnent
a \a, pendule !
— Mais quelle heure est-il done ? demande tout
a coup Tempereur.
— Trois heures. Sire.
— Ah ^ bon Dieu ! il est bien tard pour aller au
bal. Qu'en pensez, vous ?
— C'est tout k fait mon avis, dit Gaud in.
— Allons done chacun au lit. . . . Et com-
bien de gens croient que nous passons notre vie a
nous divertir, et comme disent les Orientaux, a
manger des confitures !
^ I
aifftoft«ft9 of Sorotito*
SUPPLBMENTAI. EXAMINATIONS, 8EPTEMBEB, 1901.
SECOND YEAR
GERMAN.
Examiner: Profkssor Horminq.
1. Translate:
Dein Herm von Ringstetien ycHv* es fi^eilich
lieber gewesen, wenn sich alles an diesem Tage
anders gefttgt hatte; aber anch so, wie es nun
einmal war, konnie es ihm nicht unlieb sein, da
sich sein reizende Frau so fromm und gutmiitig
und herzlich bewies. Wenn ich ihr eine Seele
gegeben habe, musste er bei sich selber sagen, gab
ich ihr wohl eine bessere, als meine eigne ist ; und
nun dachte er einzig darauf, die Weinende zufrie-
den zu sprechen und gleich des audem Tages
einen Ort mit ihr zu venassen, der ihr seit diesem
Vorfalle zuwider sein musste. Zwar ist es an dem,
dass man sie eben nicht ungleich beurteilte. Weil
man schon frliher etwas Wunderbares von ihr
erwartete, fiel die seltsame Entdeckung von
Bertaldas Herkommen nicht allzusehr auf. und
nur gegen diese war jedermann, der die Geschichte
und ihr sturmisch Betragen dabei erfuhr, tibel
gesinnt. Davon wussten aber der Ritter nnd
seine Frau noch nichts ; ausserdem ware eins fur
Undinen so schmerzhaft gewesen als dns andere,
und so hatte mnn nichts besseres zu thun, als die
Maucm der alten Stadt so bald wie moglich hinter
sich zu lassen.
2. Compare lieber^ from/m,, herzlich,
3. Give in full the 'prte, indie, of wussten, fiel ,,, auf
and erfviiiv,
[ovkr]
4. Translate into Qerman :
The next mominfjr the rich man nise and came
to the window. When he saw a bf^audful house,
in place of the old hut which stood opposite, he
told his wife to run over and learn how that bad
happened. 1'he poor people told her that yester-
day evening a traveller had come to whom they
had given a night's lodging (Nachtherberge) ; that
on departing be had granted them three wishes,
and in addition had offered them a new house in
place of the old one; this they had accepted
(anvehmeii)y and the stranger had at once gone
off, without saying who he was. When the
woman related this to her husband be wanted to
kill himself because the stranger had been first
at his house but he had rejected (abweisen) him.
Then his wife advised him to get on his horse and
catch (einholen) the man for he could not be gone
very far. This he did, and after talking a while
he asked whether be might not also make three
wishes as his neighbor had done. He got them,
but he had better not have wished.
amnereUff of Sovonto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 190L
SECOND YEAR.
MEDIAEVAL HISTORY-
Eooaminer : Oeorqe M. Wrong, M.A.
1. Explain the influence of the Goths upon the
•decay of the Roman Empire.
2. Compare the positions of rulers of Pepin the First
Merovingian King and Charlemagne.
3. Write notes upon :
(1) The Donation of Constantine ;
(2) Bernard of Clairvaux ;
(3) The Venerable Bede ;
(4) The Emperor Henry IV. ;
(5) Alcuin;
(6) The Controversy Concerning Investiture.
4. Explain the chief features of the policy of William
•the Conqueror, and compare him with Henry II.
5. Outline the chief responsibilities of a feudal
vassal.
6. Show the political and social conditions that
favoured the first crusade and indicate the result.
i
8itifiiev«fts ot Sovonto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : 8EPTEMBEH, 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
LOGIC.
Examiner: F. Tract, B.A., Ph.D.
1. What do you understand by Reasoning I Show
clearly the relation of Logic to the process of reasoning.
2. Define, analyse and illustrate the syllogistic pro-
cess, 80 as to show the elements of which it is com-
posed and the rules by which it is governed.
3. What is meant by the phrase "* methods of induc-
tive inquiry"? Expound, with concrete examples,
any two of the inductive methods.
4. Explain the principles of a scientific classification.
5. Define CavM^ AncUogy^ Dilemma.
6. What relation do you consider to exist between
the study of Logic and that of (1) Mathematics,
(2) History ?
{RnfuetsUff o( Sototito*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
PSYCHOLOGY.
h^^ -^ - ( Albert H. Abbott, B.A.
^^«"^*"«''«-{f. Tracv, B.A.,Ph.D
1. (a) In what respects are you able to distinguish
the facts investigated in Psychology from those investi-
gated in the Physical Sciences ?
(6) Critically examine the following detinitions :
(1) " Psychology is the Science of the Soul ; "
(2) " Psychology is the Science of Inner
Experience."
2. (a) What meaning do you give to the following
terms : " Imagination," *' Memory," *' Sensation,"
'* Feeling " ?
(b) In your experience of a beautiful landscape
indicate what facts would be classed under each of the
above terms.
3. {a) Qive an exact statement of the Psycophysical
Law (Law of Weber), and illustrate the law by means
of (1) Series of Numbers, (2) Sensations of Light, or
Pressure.
(h) (1) If in lifting weights I find that I am just
able to distinguish a difference between one of 2 lbs.
and one of 2 lbs. 4 oz., what weight would you expect
to be just noticeably heavier than one of 10 lbs. sup-
posing the law of Weber to hold strictly ?
(2) What would the Law of Weber demand
as the estimated mean between 2 lbs. and 200 lbs. ?
[ovkr]
i
4. (a) In the Presenbition of what is known as a
" Mirage" what is Illusory ?
(5) What is an illusion ?
5. What is the Association of Ideas ? Discuss the
bearing of Association on the facts of language (e,g^ a
printed poem), and on education as a whole.
6. In a classiBcation of the facts of Consciousness as
Thinking (Presentation), Feeling, and Will, (VoHtionj.
what facts fall under Will, and what is the relation of
these facts to those of the other classes ?
7. Discuss the relations of interdependence between
(a) Feelings and Emotions.
(6) Feelings and Presentations (Ideas).
8. Tell what you know about the development of
Consciousness, or Experience, from the child to the
adult stages.
anftiet0ftj> ot STototito
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
LATIiN.
Examiner: J. Fletcher, M.A.
I.
Translate :
(a) Quae nemora aui qui vos saltus habuere, puellae
Na'ides, indigno cum Qallus amore peribat ?
Nam neque ParnHsi vobis iuga, nam neque Pindi
Ulla moram fecere, neque Aonie Aganippe.
Ilium etiam lauri, etiain iievere myricae,
Pinifer ilium etiam sola sub rupe iaeentem
Maenalus et gelidi fleverunt saxa Lycaei.
(6) Non pudet obsidione iterum valloque teneri,
Bis capti Phryges, et morti praetendere niuros ?
En qui nostra sibi bollo conubia poscunt !
Quis deus Italiam, quae vos dementia adegit ?
Non hie Atridae nee fandi fictor Ulixes :
Durum a stirpe genus natos ad flumina primum
Deferimus saevoque gelu duramus et undis.
Venatu invigilant pueri silvasque fatigant;
Fleetere ludus equos et spicula tendeie cornu.
At patiens operum parvoque adsueta iuventus
Aut rastris teiram domat aut quatit oppida bello.
(c) Ch. Ehem, Demipho,
lam illi datnmst argentum ? De. Curaui ilico.
Ch. Nollem datum.
Ei, uideo uxorem : paene plus quam sat erat. De.
Quor nolles, Chremes ?
Ch. lam recte. De. Quid tu ? ecquid locutu's cum
istac, quam obrem banc ducimus?
Ch. Transegi. De. Quid ait tandem ? Ch. AIkIucI
non potest. De. Qui r.on potest ?
Ch. Quia uterque utrique est cordi. De. Quid istuc
nosti-a? Ch. Magni: praeterhac
Cognatam comperi esse nobis. De. Quid? deliras.
Ch. Sic erit :
Non temere dico: redii mecum in memoriam. De.
Satin sanus es ?
Na. Au <>bsecro, uide ne in cognatam pecces. De.
Non est. Ch. Ne nega ;
Patris nomen aliud dietumst : hoc tu errasti. De.
Non norat patrem ?
Ch. Norat. De. Quor aliud dixit? Ch. Num-
quamne hodie concedes niihi
Neque intelleges? Dk. Si tu nil narras ? Ch.
Perdis. Na. Miror quid hoc siet
De. Equidem hercle nescio.
(cZ) Sed huius beneficii gratiam, iudices, furtuna
populi Romani et vestra felicitas et di immor-
tales sibi deberi putant. Nee vero quisquam
aliter arbitrari potest, nisi qui nullam vim esse
ducit numenve divinum, quern neque imperii
nostri magnitudo neque sol ille nee caeli signor-
umque motus nee vici.ssitudines rerum atque
ordiues movent neque, id quod maximum est.
maiorum sapientia, qui sacra, qui caerimonias, qui
auspicia et ipsi sanctissime coluerunt et nobis
suis posteris prodiderunt. Est, est profecto ilia
vis, neque in his corporibus atque in hac imbe-
eillitate nastra inest quiddam, quod vigeat et
sentiat, et nou inest in hoc tan to naturae tani
praeclaro motu. Nisi forte idcirco non putant^
quia non apparet nee certiitur.
1. In what sense do the English poets use naid^
Aoniav, Arcadia?
2. What is the relation of Milton's Lycidas to
Virgils Tenth EcLogiie ?
3. " The modern reader is interested in the Aeneid
as a poem of national life." Explain.
4. Explain the dramatic situation in extract (c).
5. Sketch briefly the events that led to the trial of
Milo.
II.
Translate at sight:
The Poet sees a frozen river.
Caenileos ventis latices durantibus, Hister
Congelat et tectis in mare serpit aquis.
Quaque rates ierant, pedibus nunc itur, et undas
Frigore concretas ungula pulsat equi ;
Perque novos pontes subter labentibus undis
Ducunt Sarinatici barbara plaustra boves.
Vidimus ingentem glacie consislere pontum,
Lubricaque immotas testa premebat aquas.
IIL
Translate into Latin :
The Roman army proceeded from Epirus to
Thessaly ; but being too weak, it could not attack
Perseus, nor could it place full confidence in the
Greeks in its rear. Its commander, the consul
Philippufi, therefore induced Perseus to conclude
an armistice, in order to carry on negotiations of
peace ; and Perseus, though he had been successful
in the first engagement, allowed himself to be
duped instead of following up his advantages.
The Romans, on the othei* hand, employed this
time in stirring up the Greeks and strengthening
themselves. The Boeotians regretted their former
steps, because the Romans had removed the most
zealous partizans of Perseus, and demanded th;it
those nations which did not stand by Perseus
should publicly declare against him.
0lnfiier0ftj? of Sotoii»o«
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH.
Examiner : A. H. Ketnar, LL.D.
1. Give the characteristic features of 18th Century
literature, and show how it was in accord with the
political and religious conditions of the Age.
2. Compare Dryden and Pope, and show resem-
blances and differences between them.
3. What was Swift's motive and aim in writing
Gulliver s Travels ? Compare his Satire with that of
Addison.
4. Show how Thomson, Goldsmith and Cowper, each
in his own way, initiated a new tendency in our
literature.
o. In what different styles does Burns write?
Name examples of each style. In which style does he
chiefly excel ?
antkitt0itfi of Toronto
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
FRENCH,
Examiner: J. Squair.
I.
Tranolate into French :
1. Where do you intend to go to-morrow ?
2. We do not intend to go anywhere. We shall stay
here.
3. Could you tell me what that young man is doing?
4. Will you explain it to him, for fear he does not
understand it ?
5. We had a drive this mominor and now we are
going for a walk.
6. Do you not remember what he told us ?
7. Will you be so kind as to give me some water?
8. They conquer their enemies. We shall not per-
mit it. The flowers are growing. He translates the
book
II.
Translate into French :
The city of Paris is situated on both sides of
the Seine. It is the capital and the largest city
of France. Its population is about two millions
of souls. The form of the city is almost circular
and a wall surrounds it. In Paris are to be found
the offices of the government. There one finds
also a great many museums, as, for exam])le, the
Louvre, which contains a great number of inter-
esting things : antiquities, sculpture, painting.
There are also many great churches in Paris, of
all styles of architecture. The shops of Paris are
amongst the most famous of the world. There
one can buy anything, particularl3^ that which is
elegant and artistic. The tlteatres of the city are
very renowned. The oldest and greatest of them
is the celebratt-d Th^ditre Fran(;ais, which has had
a long history and in which many of the great
plays have been represented.
III.
Translate :
En trois heures j'eus visited non seulement hi
ville, mais ses environs. L'aspect general en etait
singulieremcnt triste, P*is d arbres, pa*> de v^^
tation, pour ainsi dire. Partout les aretes vives
des rocnes volcaniques. Les huttes des Islandius
sont faits de terre et de tourbe, et Ieui*s murs in-
clines en dedans; elles ressemblent k des toits
pos& sur le sol. Seulement ces toits sont des
prairies relativement fecondes. Gr&ce k la chaleur
de rhabitation, Therbe y pousse avec assez de
perfection, et on la fauche .soigneusement a Tepoque
de la fenaison, sans quoi les animaux domestiques
viendraient pattre sur ces deroeures verdoyantes.
Pendant mon excursion, je rencontrai peu dlia-
bitants ; en revenant de la rue cummer^ante, je vis
la plus grande partie de la population occup^ k
s^her, saler et charger des morues, principal
article d'exportation. Les hommes paraissaient
robustes, mais lourds, des espdces d'Allemands
blonds, k Toeil pensif, qui se sentent un peu en
dehors de Thumanit^, pauvres exiles reldgu^ sur
cette terre de glace, dont la nature aurait bien dii
faire des Esquimaux puisqu'elle les condamnait k
vivre sur la limite du cercle polaire.
Jules Verne.
IV.
Translate :
Elle, toujours intr^pide, autant que les vagues
^taient ^mues, rassurait tout le monde par sa fer-
met^. Elle excitait ceux qui Taccompagnaient k
esp^rer en Dieu, qui faisait toute sa confiance ; et,
pour eloigner de leur esprit les funestes idfes de
la mort qui se prdsentait de tons c6t&, elle disait.
avec un air de s^renit^ qui semblait dejk ramener
le calme, que les reines ne se noyaient pas. H^las !
elle est r^erv^e k quelque chose de bieii plus ex-
traordinaire ! et, pour s'dtre sauv6e du naufrage,
ses malheurs n'en seront pas moins d^plorables.
Elle vit bdnir ses vaisseaux, et presque toute
Tesp^rance d*un si grand secours. L'amiral od
elle ^tait, conduit par la main de celui qui doinine
sur la profondeur de la mer, et qui douipte .se^
flots soulev^s, fut repous^^ aux ports de HoUande ;
et tons les peuples f urent etonn^ d'une d^livrance
si miraculense.
BOSSUKT.
1. Give an outline of the life of Henriette de Fiance.
anflietoftj? of Soconto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 190L
THIRD YEAR.
FRKNCH.
Examiner: J, Squair.
I.
Translate :
J 'avals fourni k leura maisons six cents fro-
mages : j allai un jour k la ville pour etre paye ;
j*appris en arrivatit dans BaV»>loT)e que la reiiie
et Zadig avaient disparu. Je courus chez le
seigneur Zadig, que je n'avais jamais vu ; je trou-
vai les archers du grand desterham, qui, munis
d'un papier royal, pillaient sa uiaison ioyalement
et avec ordre. Je volai aux cuisines de la reine :
quel(|ues-uns des seigneurs de la bouche me dirent
qu'elle ^tait en prison, d'autres pr^tendiient qu'elle
avait pris la fnite ; mais tous m'assur^rent qu'on
ne me payerait point mes fromages. J allai avec
ma femme chez le seigneur Orcan, qui etait une
de mes pratiques; nous lui demandAraes sa pro-
tection dans notre disgrace ; il I'accorda a ma
femme, et me la refusa.
— Zitdiij.
1. Outline the life of Voltaire subsequent to 1750.
2. Give the present subjective in full of 'pris, vu,
paye,
II.
Translate :
II nV avait point de jour qu'ils ne se comiuuiii-
quassent quelques secours ou quelques lumieres :
oui des lumieres; et, quand il s'y serait mel^ quel-
ques erreurs, Thomme pur n'en a point de danger-
[over]
euses k craindre, Ainsi croissaient ces deux
enfants de la nature. Ancun souei n avait ride
leur front ; aucune intemperance n'avait corrompu
leur sang; ancune passion malheurense n avait
deprave leur coeur; Tamovr, Tinnocence, la pi^t^,
developpaient chaque jour la beaut^ de leur Sme
en graces ineffables dans leurs traits, leurs attitudes
et lenrs mouvements. Au matin de la vie, ils en
avaient toute la fraicheur; tels dans le jardin
d'iden, parurent nos premiers parents, loi*sque,
sortant des mains de Dieu, ils se virent, s'appro-
cherent et convers^rent d*abord comme frere ct
comma soeur.
— Patd et Virg^inie.
1. State briefly the chief argument of this book.
2. 86 cominuniquassenL Explain the mood, and the
form of the negative.
III.
Translate :
L'un lui tirait les oreHles, Tautre la queue:
Quiquet lui montait sur le dos, Beluguet lui essay-
ait sa barrette, et pas un de ces gaiopins ne
songeait que d'un couf) de reins ou d'une ruade la
brave b^te aurait pu les envoyer tous dans T^toile
polaire, et raeme plus loin ... mais non ! On n*est
pas pour rien la mule du pape, la mule des bene-
dictions et des indulgences. Les enfants avaient
beau faire, elle ne se f&chait ])as ; et ce n*est qu'a
Tistet Vedene qu^elle en voulait. Celui-1^, par
exemple, (jnand elle le sentait derriere elle, son
sabot lui d^mangeait, et vraiment il y avait bien
de quoi. Ce vaurien de Tistet lui jouait de si
vilains tours ! il avait de si cruel les inventions
aprfes boire !
— Iai Mule du Pape.
1. Give the gender of oreilles, reikis, exemple,
2. en voulait Explain en.
CAnft»fr«ftv •€ Sorotitik
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 190L
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GERMAN.
SIGHT TRANSLATION AND COMPOSITION.
Examiner: Pkofessor Horning.
1. Translate:
Nach einiger Zeit kain Frau Werner ebenfalls
au8 ihrer Wohnung zuiiick, und wir gingen auf
die Verandah vor der Gartenthlir, um Kaffee zu.
trinken. AIh wir dort so behaglich im Schatten
sasscn und der leise Soinmerwind den Bluinen-
duft aus dein sonnigen Garten herwehte, wo die
Sehnietterlinge, wie berauscht, um die Rosen^
flabterten, und es so still war, da.«8 man fast das
Schlngen ihrer Fliigel horen konnte, sprach der
Rosenkonig : " Eb liegt ein eingener Zauber darin,.
an so einem sonnigen Nachmittage im bebagliehen
Schatten zu sitzen, von lieben Menschen umgeben;.
aber volistandig wird der Genuss erst, wenn.
If usik dabei ist ; Marie, willst du uns nicht ein^
Lied singen V
Das Elavier stand nahe an den geotfneten
Thliren, ich sass gerade so, dass ich es sehen
konnte. Ich hatte Marie noch nie singen horen
und war iiberrascbt durch den anmutigen Klang-
ihrer Stimme als sie begann :
** Vom Berg zum Thai das Waldhom klang,
Im bltthenden Thai das Magdlein sang ;
Von der Rose, der Rose im Thai."
2. Translate:
Mit deinen blauen Augen
Siehst du niich lieblich an,
Da wird mir so traumend zu Sinne,
Dass ich nicht sprechen kann.
[over]
Ad deine blauen Augen
Qedenk* ich allerwarts ; —
Ein Meer von blauen Gedanken
Ergiesst sich tiber mein Herz.
3. Translate into German :
A woman who in other respects {fuyDst) lived
most of the year happily with her husband once
complained to (bei) her physician. She said it
WAS really a pity he is so irritable. Not a day
passed but that her husband, with all hia good
sense, became very violent, especially when he
had been drinking. "It is too bad,'* she said,
'* that the life of two people should be thus spoiled.
Could you give me a cure?" "Oh," said the
doctor, '' we will soon fix that ; it is quite simple.
I have an excellent water which I recommend to
most of my patients for this sickness. Should
your husband become violent again, take half a
cupful in your mouth and keep it about five and
a half minutes in it. The warmer the water
becomes in your mouth, the more will your hus-
band's anger disappear. If that is not enough,
take some more, or keep it in your mouth a few
minutes longer." This compelled the woman to
keep silence, and the two lived happy ever after.
mni\ievait9 ot Sototito*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901,
THIRD YEAR
GKRMAN AUTHOKS AND LITKRATUHE,
Examiner : G. H. Needlek, Ph.D.
I.
I. Translate :
®cfd)wifter, tie t^r an tern roeiten ^immcl
Xa^ fd)6nc ?i'c^t bci Iac| unt ?lad)t ^crauf
Den 5Wenfcl)en brtncjet, unt ten Slbgefrf^ietnen
?lid)t leuc^)tcn tfirfel rettet uns ®efd)n)iflcr !
Du Uebfl, Diana, teinen ^olben ©rurer
95or SlUem, tt3a^ bir Srb' unb ^tmmel btctet,
Unt> ii>enbeft bein juncjfrSulic^ 2ln<jcfirf)t
yiad) feinem ew'^en ?i4)te fc^)nent)YtiU.
D la§ ben einj'(i[en, fpatj^efunbnen mix
9lic^t in bev ginflerni§ be^ SBa^)nfinnd rafen !
Unb ifl bein SBille, ba bu ^ler mid) bar.ifi,
Slunme^r »oUenbet, willjl bu mtr burcf) i^u
Unb tbm burc^ mi^ bic feFge ^filfe gebcn,
So ISr i^n t^on ben 5Banben jene^ gluc^^,
Da§ nic^t bie t^eure 3^it ber Slettung fc^roinbc !
GOETHK, Iph^cjevie, 111. 3.
2. Explain ((«) deinen holden Brader ; (b) Hpdt-
gefundimn ; (c) da du /tier inich hargut ; (d) je.nes
Fluchs.
3. Sketch the characters of Pylades and Thoas.
II.
4. Translate:
greunblicf) begrfi§te fogleicfe ba^ flUte SWSbrf^en ben 3finfl^
linfl.
©prac^: @o ifi fc^on ^ter ber SEccj mir jum ©runnen
belo^net.
Da id) fintc ben ®uten, tn une fo t>tcle^ gcrri(^t bat ;
Dcnn ter Slnblicf te^ ®eberd ift n>ic tie @abcn erfreuUA.
*omm tunt [cbet tod) felber, tt>cr Sure SWtltc c^euojTcii,
Unt empfai^A^'t ^^^^ vul)igeu Xawt &on alien Srquicftm.
Xa§ 3^r aber fcglcid) i>crnebntct, »arum icb A^tommen,
^ler in fc^Spfc"/ too rein unt unablaffifl ter OueQ jlic^t,
®afl'id) (ind) tie^ : e^ baben tie un»oifi(^tiflen 3)lfnf(l^en
2lUe^ SCaffer fletrfibt im Dorfe, mit 'Pferten unt Ct^fen
(Sleic^ tur4)n?atent ten Duell, ter Staffer bringt ten ^mth^
nem.
Unt fo t^abcn fie aud> mit SQBafc^en unt SReinigen alle
IrCfle tee Xorfeg befd^muftt unt alle ©runnen bcfutelt ;
Denn ein jec^lic^er tenft nur, fic^ fclbft unt tag naijlt
33etiirfni^
©c^ncU gu befriet'flen unt rafds, unt nic^t te^ golgenten
tenft er.
Ibid., Hei^mann u. DorotheiL
5. Explain:
(a) der una so vieles gereicht hat.
(6) die unvorsichtigen Menschen,
G. Tt*!! the story of the poem up to this j-oint.
7. Scan the first thi^ee lines of this extract.
III.
S. Translate :
Slu^ alien SReten te^ ©terbenten leucbtete aber
^enjor, n>ie lieb er Sltga toc^ immer im jHBen Sinne
(\et)abt unb toit tie ginfebr bei i^r etn e(^tcre0 ©liid
i\)m flcboten al^ ter 3lauf4) be^ g^rgeije^, welc^en er
mit 3ltelbeit burd)gef4)n>firmt. 6^ war ein »erbiiUte3,
unbe»u§te^, Siebe^geflSnbni^ ftonj eigener Slrt, fo
tammemt, n?tc aucb Slijad jagente 2iebe lange 3^^'
gen>efen mar.
yiiia^ Siebe l^atte i^r 3^fl^" iiefl^<»ft fibermaAfen, ale
e^ gu fpSt mar unt ©Ipre^^t bereitd an Sltelbeit^
|)ant tem Untergang entflegen jtilrmtc; 3Bipte(^te
giebe fprad) fic^ jum erftenmale teutlit^ au^, al^ feine
balbmac^e @eele bereit^ gum £otc biniibertraumte.
RiEHL. Die Gatierben,
\). Translate :
£a famen fte gulegt nad) etner Stabt, tie t>or bob^n
SCaltbergen lag, unt auf ter antren ©eite brettete ji4
meittjin tint frud)tbare Sbene au^. ©unt^er fanntc
tic ©tatt mcl^t ; ev frafltc fcine 9BScf)ter, wit |ic ^eige,
ober fcinrr (\ab t^m ©efc^cit. 211^ er t)urc^ tie ®affen
flcfa()ren irurte, fdjimpftc t'bn ta^ ftofffnte SBolf unt
bftro^te i^w, fo ta§ er fafi frob mar, wieter ()tnter
®^lo§ unt SRicflel ju fommen . Dort fagte t^m ter
(Sifenmcifler, ta§ er am nSc^flen lag 5)or fetnen 5Rtci^ter
fleful)rt werten foUe.
®untl)er ton^U, »a^ ibm b«>orftant. Sltlctn er be^
f(Wo§, au4) t>or tern Sitcftter ju fd^weigen, felbfl menu
taef ©eftantni^ fetne^ 9Janien^ unt> tie toa^r^afttge
Srjal)lung feiue^ ©c^irffal^ i^m ta^ ?eben J)atte retten
fSnnen.
76/V/., jDie Oerechtigke'it Gottes.
10. Point out any contrasts or resemblances that
you see in the leading characters of these two stories.
IV.
11. At what period of his life did Goethe write
Hei'raavn xl, Dorothea ? Give some account of his
othei litt-rary productions up to that time.
12. Write notes on :
(a) The Sturm v.nd Drang.
(h) AujTU.st Wilhelm Schlegel.
(r) Heinrich Heine.
(d) German Novel in the I9th Century.
ntiiiiet0ft9 of Sovonto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
HISTORY.
Examiner : Georqb M, Wrong, M.A.
1. Indicate the chief phases of English and French
settlement in North America between 1600 and 1630.
2. Explain :
(1) Oliver Cromweirs Conquest of Scotland.
(2) His quarrel with the Long Parliament
(3) The novel career of Blake.
3. Write notes on :
(1) Leif Ericson.
(2) Prince Henry the navigator.
(3) The theories of Columbus in regard to a
voyage westward.
4. Explain Frontenac's aims for New Fmnce and
account for the final overthrow of the French power.
5. Write notes on :
fl) Lord Burghleigh.
(2) Thomas Cromwell and the monasteries.
(3) The execution of William Lord Russell.
6. Show the effect of the civil wars upon the con-
dition of Ireland.
anfuerisUs ot Sotonto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901,
THIRD YEAR.
HISTORY.
Eanminer : George M. Wrong, M.A.
1. Show what were the theoretical t unctions of the
ruler of the Holy Roman Empire, and explain extent
of the dominions and the policy towards religion of
the Emperor Charles V.
2. Indicate the influence of the Renaissance move-
ment upon the study of classical antiquity.
8. Write notes upon :
(1) The origin and the result of the Thirty Years'
War :
(2) Savonarola's rule at Florence ;
(3) The contrast between Erasmus and Ignatius
Loyola.
4. Explain the establishment of Prussia as a king-
dom, and account for the militarism of Frederick
William I.
5. Write explanatory notes upon :
(1) Tlie policy ol' Philip II. of Spain in regard to
religion ;
(2) The ambition of Lniis XIV.
anftiev0fts of cototito^
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ETHICS.
Examines /^ ^ Badqley. M.A., LL.D.
Jisxamirwrs .^j G. Hume, M.A., Ph.D.
1. How is Conscience conceived by (a) Shaftesbury,
by (&) Mill, and by (c) the Intuitionist ?
2. Examine critically (a) the fact, (&) the sphere,
and (c) the necessity for Freedom in moral action.
3. In a theory of Ethics, show whether you can
logically combine :
(a) the satisfaction of individual desires ;
(b) one's own advantages ; and
(c) the happiness of others.
4. State and critically examine the fundamental
positions of Hobbes, Locke, Cudworth, and Spencer in
relation to moral obligation.
5. Briefly express your views on the legislative
repression of
(a) the manufacture and sale of intoxicants ;
(6) and of Anarchism.
mnftifrsits o{ Sotrotito*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
PHYSICS.
Examiner: G. R. Anderson, M.A.
NoT£. — Candidates will take 4 questions in Acooustica and 4 in
Optics.
1. Describe an accurate method of determining the
velocity of sound in air.
What is the effect of temperature on the velocity ?
2. What is meant by ivave-length hi air of a given
note ?
Find the wave-length of (7 = 612 V. S.. the
velocity of sound in air being 340 metres per second.
3. Describe fully the major diatonic scale. Calcu-
late the pitch of ail the notes for A = 870.
4. Explain what effect is produced on the pitch of
a note when the source of sound is itself in motion.
If a body producing a note of 512 V. S. be
moving 34 metres per second towards the observer,
what will be the pitch of the note heard ?
5. State the laws of the transverse vibrations of
strings.
A string 120 cm. long under a tension of 20 kilos
gives the note 0 = 768. If the tension be increased
to 45 kilos and the length to 270 cm., find the note
produced.
6. Describe any method of determining the velocity
of light.
[over]
r
7. Describe and account Tor the phenomena observed
when the edge of an opaque object is placed in the
path of a slender beam of light falling on a screen.
8. Explain and illustrate by a diagram the disper-
sion of sun light by a prism. If a piece of ltd glass
were placed between the source of light and the prism
what effect would be produced and why ?
9. Give a general explanation of the rainbow.
Account for the position of the colors in the primary'
and secondary bow. Illustrate by diagrams.
10. What is meant by plane polarized light f
Describe two methods by which a beam of plane
polarized light may be obtained.
eitiitietefts of Toronto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY.
z,. fjAMES Mayor.
bxarmners:^^ M. Wickbtt.
NoTB. — Five questioDB only to be aDswered.
1. Give an account of land tenure in England prior
to the Norman Conquest.
2. Give the chief features of any two Charters prior
to Magna Charta.
3. What were the principal provisions of Magnu
Charta ?
4. What are the constituent elements of the British
Parliament ?
5 What is the ** Ministry " ? What are its functions-
powers and position under the Constitution ?
G. What is meant by " Party Government " ? Give
a short account of its development and oi the dis-
tinguishing principles of the respective parties.
7. What are the powers of the House ot (Jommons
in respect to public revenue and expenditure ? What
is the machinery through which these powers are
exercised ?
8. Compare the Constitution of Great Britain and
the powers of the British Parliament with the Consti-
tution of Canada and the powers of the Cnnadian
Parliament.
Slnfliet0ft9 ot crovonto*
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1900.
FOURTH YEAR.
GREKK,
„ f Maurice Button, M,A.
Examinei^s: | ^ ^ Langfohd, B.A.
I.
SOPHOCLES. (EDIPU'S 11 KX.
Translate •
Si]l3a<i ; iKTerafiai, ^fiepav <f>p€va Selfiari 7raX\a)i;,
ufi^fn aol a^6/M€uo^^ rl fioi fj veov ^ trepLTeXKofjiiua}^
&pai^ TrdXiv
afjL$poT€ ^dfia.
TTp&rd ae ictfcXofievo^, ftuyarep Ai09» a/jL^por"^
^AOdva,
''\pT€fjLLv, h KVKXoeyr ayopa^ Opovav eincXia Bdaaei,^
teal ^olfiov €Kal36Xou, id,
Tpiaaol aXe^ifMopoi irpotpdvrjri fioi, el irore Kal
frpOTcpa^ ara^; wrep
opvvfie^a^ iroXei, rjvvaar i/eroiriai/ <px6ya TTij/Maro^iy
eXdere Kal vvv,
((j) 'AXX' ri fi€v fipMiv fioip\ wtoiirep ela^ Irto*
iraihtov Bi tS}v /jl€v dpirivwv fjnr^ fjkoi, Kpiop,,
irpoaOjj jiepifivai/' avBpe^ elalv^ SxoTe fiff
(Tirdviri/ TTore a^^ctv, €pd^. &i/ wcrt, rov fiiov"
raiy 5' adXiaiv olKTpaw re irapdivoiv i^cSnf,.
dtp ovTToff Tfixij YWf?/? iard0fi! fiopoK
Tpawe^ avev tovo avopo^, aXX oacop ryi»
yp'avoifjLif iravTfov rSyvK net fjL€T€iy€T7fu-
alv fioi fieXeaOar Kal /jLoXiO'Ta fiev '^epoiv
ylravaal fx eaaov KairoKXavo'aadai xaicd,
iff &va^f
Iff & yovy yevpale, x^po-i t&p dtrfa>v
BoKoifi €)(€iv a<f>a<;f (oairep fiviic e^Kenov.
1. Parse fully in (a) iicT€Tafiai and KcxXofjievo^,
2. eur and Ttoj. Write out the other forms of the
tense and mood here given.
3. Why are dorieisins more frequent in the chorus
than in tlie dialogue of a Greek tragedy ?
4. Descril)e the character of (Edipus a*s delineated
in this play.
II.
(Write in a separate book. )
Pf.ATO, PHiEDO.
1. Translate litenillv :
(a) 'Atto Bt) 0avfiaarrj<; iKiriSo^, & eralpe, t^xofi7\v
(f>€popL€Po<;^ CTreiBr) 7rpoli)v Kal hvayiyvdcKav opSi
dvBpa T(^ fieu i/r|! ouSei/ ^(piafieuop eU to hioKoapjHif
TCi irpdyfiara, dkpas Be koX ai0€pa<i xai vBara
alruo/Mevov Kal aWa 'jroXXa xal aTOira, Kal fioi
iBo^ep ofioiOTaTop ireiropdevai Sxnrep &p €1 rt?
Xeycap oTt 'EayKpdrrjf; irdpra oaa irpdrret v«^ irpdr-
T€*, Kajrei/ra iiri'^etpi^a'a^ Xiyeip tA? atrial eKdqrwp
&p TrpaTTW, X&yoi irp&rop fiev 6ti Bta ravra pvp
ipOoBe Kd0t)fiait on <TvyK€iTal fiov to a&fia i^
6<TT€<op Kal pevptop^ Mxi ra fi€P oara iarw oTepea
Kal Sia<f>v^^ €')(€i x^P^^ ^'^^ dXXi]X(DP, ra Bk pevpa
ola hrneiveadai koX dpieaffai, ireputfiirkyopra ra
oara fiera t&p aapKmp kcU BkpfuiTo^ o avp€j(€i
avrd* aloDpovfiipooP ovp t&p 6aT€a>P ip Tal^ avT&v
^vfifioXat^ XaX&pra Kal avpTevpopTa rh pevpa Ka^jr-
T€a0al irov frocei otop t cIpcu ifie pvp to. /LtiXrf,
Kal BiiL TavTrfp ttjp ahlap a-ir/Kafi<f>0eU epOdBe xdOff-
fiar KOI av irepl tov BiaXeyeadai vpiv krkpasf roiav-
Ta9 alrui^ Xeyoi, <f><opd^ re Kal aipa^ Kai axoit^ Kal
aXXa fivpia Toiaxna alTi&fA€PO<:, afieXi^a'a^ r^ w
aX7fd&^ atrial Xiyeip, OTt, iirecBif ^A6f)paioi^ eBo^e
l3iXTiop elpoi ifiov KaTa-y^^Caaadai^ Biii raura hi\
Kai ifiol fiiXriop aZ SiBoKrai ivddBe KadtjaOci, «ai
SiMUorepov napa/jbii/ovTa uTre^eii/ ttjv Stterjv f^v hv
KeXevacoaiv iirei vrj tov Kvva, &)9 iyt^fiai, iraXai hv
ravia ra vevpd re real to. oara fj Trepi Meyapa fj
' Hob^Tov^i rjp, irrro ho^r}^; <f>€p6fi€va rov ^eXrlcTOv, el
/Iff SiKUiorepov olarfi; koi KaXXiOi/ elvat irpo tov (^ev-
yew T€ Koi airoSiBpdcKeiv inre^eiv r^ iroXet Siktjv
rivTW civ ranrj,
(6) TovTou he viuv oXtlo^ eari Topyia^* a<pifc6u€vo<s
ydp el^ T7)p TToXiv epaaTa^ etrl <TO<f>{a ei\rf<t>ev 'AXeu-
aS(ui/ re rov^ irpdrov^, &v 6 ao^ ipaarris eartv
WptaTiinro^f Kai twj/ aWtov ©eTraXoii/' xal St) xal
Tovro TO eflo? vfm<; eWiKevy d<f>6l3<o^ t€ Kai fieyaXo-
'npeTTW arroKpipeadai, idv rt^ Tt epr^Tai, Aairep el/co^
Tov^ etSnra?, are Kai airro^ irapeycdv avTov ipcoiav
Toii/ *EXXi]U(ov Tto fiovXoixkvtp o Ti av 719 iSovXrfTai,
Kai ouBevl OT(p ovk airoKpivofiepo^. evdahe Si, & 0/\6
Mevwp, TO ivavTLOp irepiearrfKet/' &aTrep av')Qio^ T19
T779 ao<^ia^ yiyopep, xat KivBvpevei ex raypSe t&v
Toireop Trap* Vfia<; ol}(€<Tdai rj ao<i>ia, el youp riva
eSeXei^ ovT<o<i epeadat t(op evOdhe^ ovheU oaruf; ov
yeXdaerai koi ipel' & ^€ve, KLpivvevw aoi BoKeiP
fxaxdpLO^ Tt9 elvaij dpeTrjv yovp elre SiBaKTop eiff*
OTtp rpoTTtp irapayiyveTai elSivar iyo) Si tooovtov
Sito €LT€ BiSaKTOp €iT€ /XT) SiSaKTov elSevat, &aT ov}>i
atTO, 0 Tt 'iroT earl to Trapdirav apeTij^ rirfxdpfo
elhd)^. 'E/yo) ovp Kai avro?, & Mepcjp, outo)? e^^cw
avpnrepOfuiL rot? TrrX/rai? Toifrov rov irpdrffiaroSf
Kai ifiavrov KaTafJL€fi<l>OfjLai ay; ovk elBcD^ irepi dperr^s
TO irapdirap* o Be firj olSa ri earip, ttS? ap oiroiov
ye Tt elBeiTfp ; rj SoKel aoi olop re elvai, oa-ri^
^epwva fJLf) yiyvayGKei ro irapdrrav oari^ iariPf roxH
rov elBevai elre KaXo^ etre irXovaio^ elre Kai yevvalo^
iariv, etre Kai rdvavrla rovrayv ; BoKei aoi olov r
elvai ;
VOCABULARY.
avxfi6<:, dearth,
kdl^eivy to habituate,
avfiTrevofiai, I am poo^ in company with,
2. Parse fully : (a) ^x^^^'t^* Bia(f>vd^, ola, avieaOai,
oara^ otov r (before elvai), Xeyoi, dfjieX^qca^i ra? (after
hfieX'qaa^), irapafievovra, eyt^fiai.
SlnfDft0ft9 of ITotrotito
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATI0K8 : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH.
Examiner : A. H. Reynar, LL.D.
1. Give general features of the great movement of
European thought in the first part of the 19th Cen-
tury. How did Wordsworth regard that movement ?
2. What 18 the subject of Shelley's Adonais?
Wherein lie the charm and value of that poem ?
3. Contrast Scott and Carlyle in spirit, style and
purpose.
4. What is the teaching of Tennyson's Ancient
Sage ?
5. Give Browning's Conception of Inspiration as
found in his Saul and A Death in the Dessert, and his
conception of Art as found in Foa Lippo Lippi and
Andrea del Sarto.
%
anfUftsftv of STovonto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 190U
FOURTH YEAR.
CANADIAN CONSTITUTfONAL HISTORY.
Ji^xammers . | g. M. Wickett.
1. Explain briefly what is meant by Constitutional
History.
2. In what respects was the Feudal System an inte-
gral part of tl)e Government of Canada under French-
rule ?
3. What led to the troubles of 1837 ?
4. }fow was Confederation brought about ?
5. *• The B. N. A. Act is in effect the Constitution of
Canada.*' Give some of its important provisions.
6. Outline the system of local government in Ontario.
enttuevsftfi oc Sovotito4
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE
BIOLOGY.
Examiner: J. Stafford, M.A., Ph.D.
1. Discuss the relations of Vertebrates to their
various habitats.
2. Describe the metamorphosis of an Insect.
3. Draw, describe, and tell the work performed by
the diiferent organs of nutrition in an Amphibian.
4. Describe at length the function of the blood.
5. Discuss the structure and life-history of Lichens.
atiiuevsUi^ of STovomii^
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PHYSICS.
Examinei*: G. R. Anderson, M.A.
1. State the principle of Archimedes.
Show how to determine the specific gravity of a
solid heavier than water.
2. Describe any experiment to illustrate the trans-
mission of fluid pressure.
3. Enunciate BoyIe*s Law.
A certaintnass of gas is confined under a pressure
of 10 lbs. to the square inch in addition to that of the
atmosphere. If the pressure be increased to 15 lbs.
find the new volume, atmospheric pressure remaining
constant at 15 lbs. to the square inch.
4. Describe the construction and graduation of a
common mercurial thermometer.
5. State the laws of transverse vibrations uf strings.
A string 1 metre lon<; under a tension of 25 kilos
gives the note C'==512 vibrations. If the string be
made 60 cm. long and the tension 36 kilos, find the
note emitted.
6. State the law of reflection of light. Show by a
diagram the position of the image of an object in a
plane mirror.
7. State Ohm's Law.
A certain cell gives a current of 1 ampere through
an external resistance of 1 ohm and two such cells in
series give a current of | ampere through the same
resistance. Find the internal resistance of the cell.
2anfiift0ft9 of ^Toronto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901.
FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
INORGANIC CHKMISTRY.
Examiner : The Examiners in Chemistry.
1. What volume of ammonia at 25° C. and 730 mm.
may be obtained from one kilogramme of ammonium
chloride ?
CaO + 2 NH.Cl = CaCl, + H,0 + NH,.
2. G.ive equations for the following reactions in
solutions:
Sodium chloride with silver nitrate.
Hydrogen sulphide with copper sulphate.
Hydrogen sulphide with ferric chloride.
Lead nitrate with potassium iodide.
Ammonia with sulphuric acid.
8. What information is given by the chemical
formula HOI?
4. Cotnpare the properties of the chlorides and
hydroxides of carbon, silicon, tin and lead.
5. Give methods of preparation, with equations for
hydrogen, chlorine, nitrous oxide, sulphur dioxide,
oxygen, hydrogen bromide.
8lnftoer»U9 ot Soronto.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1001.
SECOND YEAR.
ANATOMY.
Examiner: A. Primrosk, M.B., CM., Edin.
1. Describe the imisculo spiral nerve from its origin*
from the brachial plexus to its point of division into
its two terminal branches. Give its relations and
enumerate the muscles supplied by it.
2. Describe the Velum interpositum, indicating its
relations to the third ventricle of the brain.
3. Describe the radio-carj)al joint.
4. Describe the popliteal artery — its course and rela-
tions. Enumerate its branches.
5. Describe the relations of the posterior wall of the
urinary bladder in the male, indicating the structures-
which lie in contact with it.
nnfiietsfts of 2Pototito«
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 190L.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PHYISIOLOGY.
Examiner: A. B. Macallum.
1. Give an account of the manner in which the
intestinal mucosa absorbs Proteids, Fats and Carbo-
hydrates.
2. Describe the location and tlie functions of the
V^asomoter centre. Describe also its efferent paths.
3. Give an account of the functions of the Rolandic
area of the brain.
4. Explain liow contraction and dilation of the pupil
normally occur.
0. What are the properties of urea and uric add ?
8lnfliet0ftff of Sotrontiu
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
HISTOLOGY AND EMBRYOLOGY.
Examiner: R. R. Bensley.
1. Describe the structure of the oesophagus.
2. Illustrate by a diagram the mode of subdivision
of the air tubes in the lungs, indicating the relations
of the pulmonary and bronchial vessels. Describe
minutely the structure of the tubes of various sizes.
Describe the circulatory apparatus of the terminal
air sacs.
3. Describe the structure of the pancreas. Make
careful drawings to show the appearance presented by
its acini in the various phases of rest and activity.
4. Outlin as briefly as possible the phenomena of
fertilization of the ovum.
5. Trace the development of the rabbit from the
completion of segmentation up to ,the tenth day of
development.
Vnftortsits of Sovotito.
SUPPLEMENEAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
ORGANIC CHKMISTRY.
Examiners: The Examiners in Chi&mistky.
1. Distinguish between primary, secondary and
tertiary alcohols. Indicate the class to which each
of the following belongs, giving reasons: propyl
alcohol, idobutyl alcohol, methyl-isopropyl alcohol.
2. Show, by equations, how each of the following
may be prepared from ethyl alcohol : ethyl chloride,
ethylene, ethylamine, ethyl ether.
3. What are the general reactions of the amides and
of the parafiBnes ?
4. Indicate by equations the reaction of —
Sulphuric acid on benzene.
Phosphorus trichloride on succinic acid.
Nitrous acid on phenyl-ammonium chloride.
Chlorine on acetic acid.
Water on acetyl chloride.
5. Write constitution formulae for para-oxy-benzoic
acid, ethyl formate, iso-propylamine, acetaldehyde,
diethyl ketone.
anftirrsits oC CToronto
SUPPLEMICNTAL EXAMINATIONS : SEPTEMBER, 1901.
SECOND YEAR.
MATKRIA MEDICA.
ExamiTier: James MacCallum, B.A., M.D.
1. What is the difference between a decoction and
4in infusion ; a tincture and a fluid extract ?
2. Why do drugs act more quickly when given
hypodermetically than per orem ?
8. What is the solubility in water of Magn. Sulph.,
Soda Tartarata, Potassii Acetas, Zinci Chloridum ?
<3ive the doses of the first three named.
4. Why does Tincture of Iodine contain Iodine of
Potassium ?
5. W^hat proportion of alcohol is present in Whiskey,
■Gin, Port, Claret, Champagne, Beer ?
6. Name the preparations of Hydrargyrum used as
purgatives. Give the dose of each.
7. What proportion of Morphine should Opium
contain ? Name three tinctures which contain Opium ;
give the strength and dose of each.
8. Name the preparations of Jalap and give their
-doses.
/
nnmtvniis of ^Poronta
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: SEPTEMBER, 1901,
THIRD YEAR.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PATHOLOGY.
Examiner: John A. Amyot, M.B.
1. Given pus from an absce.s9, just opened, what
steps would you take to make a pure culture of the
causative organism ? How would you show it to be
the cause ?
2. What is meant by the term degeneration ? Give
the causes and results of fatty degeneration.
3. Gangrene of an extremity. — What causes might
bring it about ? How dt)es nature remove the dead
portion ?
4. Give the causes foi* local oedema.
5. Classify sarcomata. Make drawings illustrating
a small-round-cell sarcoma and a myaloid sarcoma.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11